Onshore US 1-10-08

BP
NA GAS Onshore U.S.

2007 Safety Practice Manual
BP Onshore U.S. Safety Standard Page A.11
Appendix 1, Glossary
Appendix 1
Glossary
ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists

ANSI American National Standards Institute
AOSC Association of Oilwell Servicing Contractors
API American Petroleum Institute
APR air-purifying respirator
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BU Business Unit
BUL Business Unit Leader
CO2 carbon dioxide
CPR cardiopulmonary resuscitation
dBA Abbreviation for decibels adjusted.
DOL Department of Labor
DOT Department of Transportation
E&P Exploration and Production
EMS Environmental Management System
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPP Emergency Preparedness Plan
ESD emergency shutdown
FL flammable liquids
FRC fire resistant clothing
FSC Field Safety Coordinator
GFCI ground fault circuit interrupter
gHSEr getting HSE right
H2S hydrogen sulfide
HAZCOM Hazard communication
HAZWOPER Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
HBV hepatitis B vaccination
HCP Hazard Communication Program
Document Owner: Glenn Harper Revision Date: 6/29/2006

Print Date: 06/29/06
PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY IS VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING.
HCP Hearing Conservation Program

HHC highly hazardous chemicals
HIP Hazard Identification Program
HR Human Resources
HSE Health, Safety and Environmental Department
IADC International Association of Drilling Contractors
ICS Incident Command System
IDLH immediately dangerous to life or health
IMP Incident Management Plan
JSA Job Safety Analysis
LEL lower explosive limit
LEPC local emergency planning committee
LFL lower flammable limit
MCC Motor Control Center
MOC management of change
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet
N2 nitrogen
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NGL natural gas liquid
NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
NORM naturally occurring radioactive material
NRC Nuclear Regulatory Commission
OPIM other potentially infectious materials
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
P&ID piping and instrumentation diagram
PEL permissible exposure limit
PFAS personal fall-arrest system
PLC programmable logic controller
PPE personal protective equipment
ppm parts per million

psi pounds per square inch

psia pounds per square inch absolute
PSM process safety management
PSV pressure safety valve
PU Performance Unit
PUL Performance Unit Leader
QLFT qualitative fit test
RA Risk Assessment
RAT risk assessment tool
RIK replacement-in-kind
ROPS rollover protective structures (for forklifts)
RQ reportable quantity
SCBA self-contained breathing apparatus
TLV threshold limit value
TWA 8-hour time-weighted average
USPHS United States Public Health Service

NA Gas Onshore US Health & Safety Practice Page 1 of 3
Document Number: K0000000415
Document Type: Health & Safety Practice

Document Title: Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records
I. Notification
A. Upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter, employees must be

informed of the following:
1. The existence, location, and availability of employee records of exposure to

toxic substances or harmful physical agents.
2. The person responsible for maintaining and providing access to the records.
Contact your supervisor to initiate this request.
3. The employees right of access to those records.
B. Notification will be accomplished by sending an annual letter to all employees or by

bulletin board postings that specify points 1-3 above (See Attachment 1.1-1 for an
example of a bulletin board posting). This information must be provided to new or
transferred employees. The supervisor in charge is responsible for seeing that
notification is accomplished.
II. Recordkeeping
A. Employee exposure records shall be maintained for the duration of employment and
for 30 years thereafter and shall include the following:
1. Environmental (workplace) monitoring, including personal, area, grab, swipe

(wipe over a designated area), etc. type samples are kept by the Operations
Center.
2. Medical records, including the biological monitoring level of chemicals in the

blood, urine, hair, or fingernails are kept by the Medical Department.
3. Material safety data sheets. (See the Hazard Communication Program chapter in
this Standard.)
III. Access
A. Employee access to exposure and medical records must be provided no later than 15
days after the request for access has been made.
Control Tier: 2 Print Date: 3/9/2006

Documentum Document Number: K0000000415
PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. THE CONTROLLED
VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND AT http://ousbuhse.bpweb.bp.com/.
B. Records or copies must be provided at no cost to the employee.
IV. References
A. Occupational Safety And Health Administration, Department of Labor Standard, 29

CFR, Part 1910.1020.
B. gHSEr Element # 8, Information and Documentation.

Attachment 1.1-1
Notice to All Employees

Concerning Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records
If you are exposed to a toxic substance or a harmful physical agent in the workplace, you, or
your designated representative, are entitled to review and copy:
1. Exposure records relevant to your actual or potential exposure.
2. Your medical records.
3. Analyses using exposure or medical records concerning your working conditions or

your workplace.
4. OSHAs rule (29 CFR 1910.20) regarding access to employee exposure and medical
records.
These records are maintained by the applicable Medical Department serving your operation and
are available to you upon request. If you are interested in reviewing or copying any of these
records, contact your supervisor, who shall make the necessary arrangements.

Asbestos Page 1 of 7
Asbestos Management
Document Control Details
1.0 Purpose/Scope
The purpose of this safe practice is to provide guidance on safe asbestos management for the
North American Gas (NAG) SPU Lower 48 Operations.
2.0 Definitions
Terms Description
Asbestos Any material that contains more than 1% asbestos.
Containing
Material (ACM)
Presumed Any thermal system insulation or surfacing material (such as certain types
Asbestos of floor tile, floor sheeting, mastic, or wall board) found in buildings
Containing constructed prior to 1981 that has not been proven (through testing) to be
Material asbestos free.
(PACM)
Initial Exposure An assessment by a competent person immediately before or at the
Assessment initiation of the operation to ascertain expected exposures during that
operation or workplace.
Intact Gasket An ACM/PACM gasket that has retained its binder integrity and is in a non-
friable condition so that it would not crumble or disintegrate into a dust or
fine debris with hand pressure.
Non-Intact An ACM/PACM gasket that has lost its binder integrity or is in a friable
Gasket condition.
Friable Asbestos material that can be pulverized or crumbled with hand pressure
into a fine debris or dust.
3.0 General Requirements
Asbestos containing materials (ACMs) were commonly used in the past as pipe wrap, vessel
equipment and building insulation, brake pads, and in structural materials such as transite
panels, floor tiles, and roofing felts. It is often difficult to differentiate between ACM and non-
ACM without laboratory testing. Although ACM is no longer installed for insulation in any BP
facility, there are older facilities where asbestos may still remain.
Inhaling asbestos dust and fibers increases the risk of developing lung cancer, asbestosis
(fibrotic lung disease), mesothelioma (cancer of the lung lining or abdominal contents), and
Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

Revision Date: 01Sept2006
Paper copies are uncontrolled. This copy is only valid at the time of printing.
The electronic version of this document is located at
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/documents/K0000002595
pleural plaques. Health effects associated with long-term asbestos exposure typically occur 15
years or more after initial exposure.
Asbestos insulation that is properly encapsulated, covered, not visibly damaged, or not in a
friable condition, generally, will not release asbestos fibers at a dangerous level, especially in
nonenclosed structures. To minimize personnel exposure, it is important not to drill, cut,
remove, tear, step on, brush against, hammer on, or in any way disturb ACM or PACM. To
protect employees from hazards associated with asbestos during construction and/or
maintenance activities, it is the NAG policy to follow government standards minimizing
exposure. More specifically, before performing any work that may disturb unknown insulating
or building materials, BP personnel must first determine whether the material contains asbestos.
To eliminate delays in job execution, this determination is best performed during the
planning process.
Asbestos sampling must be performed by a qualified contractor or certified industrial
hygienist.
Installation of new asbestos containing materials is prohibited.
Banding used to secure new insulation must be imprinted with "No Asbestos" verbiage.
Newly installed insulation must incorporate the use of a non-asbestos identifier (see Section
6.1, Non-Asbestos Insulation Identifiers).
4.0 Roles and Responsibilities
Operating supervisors should be familiar with the basic information in this document.
Further information on asbestos may be found in the BP US NAG Asbestos Operations and
Maintenance Manual.
Operating supervisors must provide for the identification of potential asbestos exposure
hazards and for the proper management of control measures during work involving ACM and
PACM, inclusive of proper training, resources, equipment and administrative support.
Compliance assurance and program implementation is the responsibility of site/facility
management and supervisory personnel.
5.0 Procedure
5.1 Exposure Assessments
BP and contractor work involving asbestos requires:

Conducting an initial exposure assessment for each job type involving ACM and
Contractors performing asbestos related jobs will be responsible for conducting their
own initial exposure assessments and exposure monitoring, and, must upon
request, provide copies of results to a BP industrial hygienist.
Clearance monitoring requires:

Contractors to have a third party conduct clearance monitoring for all indoor
asbestos work to ensure it is free of asbestos prior to releasing a regulated area.
5.2 Bulk Sampling
When bulk sampling is required to determine the asbestos content of materials, an

Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) certified inspector must perform
sample collection. However, in an emergency, a Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) may
perform sampling.
5.3 Communication of Hazards
5.3.1 Signage
BP informs all building occupants of the presence of ACM and PACM inside buildings
with signs. Employees and contractors are informed of the presence of ACM or PACM
in the field with signs at entrances to the control room and mechanical equipment
rooms. The posting and maintenance of signs and their location is the responsibility of
operations personnel with guidance from HSE. Signs shall be yellow in color with
black lettering and contain the following verbiage.
DANGER
ACM/PACM IN THIS AREA INCLUDE:
____ Floor Tile ____ Floor Mastic ____ Pipe Insulation
____ Floor Sheeting ____ Transite ____ Duct Insulation
____ Tank Insulation ____ Fireproofing
____ Other __________________________
THESE MATERIALS CONTAIN ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
BEFORE PERFORMING WORK THAT MAY DISTURB THIS MATERIAL,
CONTACT THE INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE COORDINATOR FOR
APPROPRIATE WORK PRACTICES AND INFORMATION
5.3.2 Equipment Specific Asbestos Identification
Previously installed insulation may be secured with "No Asbestos" imprinted banding
indicating that the insulation within is asbestos-free.
Non-asbestos insulation identifiers (see Section 6.1, Non-Asbestos Insulation

Identifiers) may also be used to indicate non-asbestos content.
Given the absence of either of the two conditions above, such material must be
presumed to be asbestos until bulk sampling proves otherwise.
5.4 Training

BP operations and maintenance employees must receive annual asbestos awareness

level training. Certain jobs, such as removal of intact asbestos gaskets, asbestos brakes and
asbestos clutch plates require additional training. Refer to the BP US NAG Asbestos
Operations and Maintenance Manual.
for asbestos monitoring, training, and other requirements. Asbestos abatement contractors
must ensure their employees receive and maintain asbestos training commensurate with
the class of work they will be performing and applicable OSHA and EPA regulations.
5.5 Work Practices
Excluding removal of intact asbestos gaskets, equipment packing, vehicle brakes and
clutch assemblies, BP personnel are prohibited from conducting asbestos repair,
maintenance, or abatement jobs unless they have received asbestos training
commensurate with the class of work they will be performing and applicable OSHA and
EPA regulations.
BP personnel will perform acceptable asbestos work according to the following safe work
practices.
5.5.1 Intact Asbestos Gaskets and Equipment Packing

BP personnel may not remove friable asbestos gaskets. A qualified asbestos
abatement contractor must be used unless the BP personnel have received
commensurate training.
Intact asbestos gaskets may be removed by tapping (Flexitalic) or peeling
(Garlock).
If tapping and/or peeling are unsuccessful in removing the entire gasket, a putty
knife or chisel can be used. However, the gasket remnants must first be sprayed
with lubricating oil to prevent fibers from becoming airborne.
As a last resort, power tools equipped with a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
filter can be used.
Once removed, asbestos gaskets must be disposed of as outlined in Section 5.6,
Disposal of this policy.
All work involving asbestos, other than that mentioned above, must be performed by a
qualified asbestos abatement contractor unless the BP personnel have received
commensurate training. Contractors must follow the requirements of BP procedures
and those outlined by the EPA, OSHA, and local or state regulations.
5.5.1.1 Vehicle Brake and Clutch Assemblies

Vehicle brake pads and clutch plates may contain asbestos. Employees
who perform this work can do so without additional personal protective
equipment (PPE) as long as they do not exceed five brake or clutch jobs per
week.

While performing this work, lubricating oil must be used to prevent fibers
from becoming airborne.
All residual dust must be cleaned up using a HEPA equipped vacuum
cleaner.
Asbestos brake pads, clutch plates, and associated remnants must be
disposed of as outlined in Section 5.6, Disposal of this policy.
5.6 Disposal
Asbestos containing material (including gaskets, brake pads, clutch plates and
associated remnants) must be disposed of in HSE approved liners.
Per regulation, when drums are used in addition to liners, drums must be labeled as
follows.
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
Once the liner/drum is full, contact the NAG HSE Department for appropriate disposal
guidance.
When large quantities of asbestos are involved, contact the NAG HSE Department for
disposal guidance.
5.7 Abatement Management
The industrial hygienist or designated representative shall coordinate asbestos abatement

activities within the NAG, as well as conduct periodic inspections of asbestos insulation.
Asbestos abatement contractor qualifications shall be periodically reviewed.
5.8 Medical Surveillance
BP Personnel
Due to the limited nature of asbestos work allowed by BP employees, medical
evaluations are not conducted. However, should a BP employee be exposed above
the permissible exposure limit (PEL) for a combined total of 30 days or more in a
given year, medical surveillance will be provided.
Contract Personnel
Each contractor in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations shall provide their
employees with medical surveillance.
5.9 Emergency or Accidental Exposure

In the event of accidental exposure (e.g. striking insulation with equipment and insulation
falls on you), treat the insulation as you would any hazardous chemical and use the
emergency shower. Once the clothing is wet, it can be removed and replacement clothing
can be put on. Wet clothing should be put into an appropriately labeled asbestos bag
obtained from the industrial hygienist. Contact the NAG HSE Department or the industrial
hygienist to coordinate appropriate disposal.
5.10 Record Keeping
The NAG HSE Department maintains records required by the OSHA asbestos regulation
for a period of 30 years from the date of completion. Refer to the BP US NAG Asbestos
Operations and Management Manual for further record keeping information.
6.0 Key Documents, Tools, References
OSHA Asbestos Construction Standard (29 CFR 1926.1101)
OSHA General Industry Standard for Asbestos (29 CFR 1910.1001)
EPA (40 CFR Part 763)
EPA NESHAPS (40 CFR Part 61)
6.1 Non-Asbestos Insulation Identifiers
Non-Asbestos Insulation Products With "Asbestos Free" Identifiers
Manufacturer Asbestos-Free Identifier

Johns Manville (Thermo-12) golden flecks of MICA within a blue or
gold filler
Louisiana Pacific (Pabco Super Caltemp) black fibers within a yellow or gold filler,
green stripe on edge
Owens Corning (Kaylo 10) gold/black particles within a pink filler
Owens Corning (Fiberglass) pink filler throughout
Calsilite (Calcium Silicate) blue powder on outside
Newly Manufactured Calcium Silicate gold color throughout
(post industry consolidation of identifier)

Document Name Asbestos Management

Scope NAG SPU, GoMP Control Tier Tier 2
Document # K0000002595 Issue Date 09/01/2006
Revision Date 09/01/2006 Next Review 09/01/2008
Industrial
Duane Health & Safety
Authority Custodian Jack Kogut
Hygiene
Kortsha Program Manager
Coordinator
Controlled Version http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/documents/K0000002595
Rev# Revision Date Revision Detail Authority Custodian
Initial issue as controlled
Duane Kortsha, Jack Kogut,
document. Prior revision history
1.0 10/26/2006 Health & Safety Industrial Hygiene
located in hard-copy consolidated Program Manager Coordinator
manual.
Associated Documents
Title of Document Revision File Name/Location
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/us_wl_dk_gom_hse:/content
BP US NAG Asbestos Operations &
/hssems/gom_unified/UPS-US-SW-GOM-HSE-DOC-
Management Manual
00541-2
OSHA Asbestos Construction External OSHA Asbestos Construction Standard (29 CFR
Standard Link 1926.1101)
OSHA General Industry Standard for External OSHA General Industry Standard for Asbestos (29
Asbestos Link CFR 1910.1001)
External
EPA (40 CFR Part 763) EPA (40 CFR Part 763)
Link
External
EPA NESHAPS (40 CFR Part 61) EPA NESHAPS (40 CFR Part 61)
Link
Document Approval
Approver Title Date
Authority
Custodian

Benzene Compliance Page 1 of 9
Benzene Compliance
1.0 Purpose/Scope
This practice addresses the recognition, evaluation and control of occupational exposures to benzene at
BP US North America Gas controlled worksites. The purpose of this practice is to define the requirements
and risks associated with working with benzene, to reduce benzene exposure to our workforce, and to
prevent contamination of the environment.
2.0 Definitions
ACGIH - American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. A private not-for-profit,

nongovernmental corporation whose members are industrial hygienists or other occupational health and
safety professionals dedicated to promoting health and safety within the workplace. ACGIH is a scientific
association. ACGIH publishes guidelines known as Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) and Biological
Exposure Indices (BEIs) annually.
OSHA The Occupational Safety and Health Administration. This is the federal regulatory body
promulgating safety and health regulations.
Action level - The level at which additional employee exposure monitoring and controls are required and
at which medical surveillance is required if workers are exposed at this level for 30 or more days per year.
ppm parts per million. Exposure limits for gases and vapors are usually established in terms of parts of
vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume.
PEL Permissible Exposure Limit. The OSHA Regulatory limits for employee exposure.
STEL Short Term Exposure Limit. The airborne concentration limit which no employees exposure
should exceed as averaged over any 15 minute period.
TWA - Time-weighted average Limit. The airborne concentration limit which no employees exposure
should exceed as averaged over an 8-hour period.
TLV Threshold Limit Values are health-based values. ACGIH TLVs are established by committees that
review existing published and peer-reviewed literature in various scientific disciplines. Based on the
available information, ACGIH formulates a conclusion on the level of exposure that the typical worker can
experience without adverse health effects. The TLVs and BEIs represent conditions under which ACGIH
believes that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed without adverse health effects. They are not
fine lines between safe and dangerous exposures, nor are they a relative index of toxicology.

Revision Date: 31 Jan 2006

The OSHA benzene standard (29 CFR 1910.1028(a) (2) (vi)) specifically exempts oil and gas drilling,
production, and servicing operations. Also exempted are containers and pipelines carrying mixtures with
less than 0.1 percent benzene and natural gas processing plants processing gas with less than 0.1
percent benzene. These exempted operations fall under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1000.
4.0 Key Responsibilities

Supervisor - The supervisor is responsible for verifying that workers are properly trained in recognizing,
evaluating and controlling benzene hazards and ensuring appropriate equipment is available for this
purpose. Supervisors should request monitoring when benzene concentrations have not been
previously characterized and could reasonably be expected to approach the action limit for a given task.
Health & Safety (H&S) Coordinator - The H&S Coordinator will assist supervisors and employees with
requests for air monitoring and arrange for employee exposure monitoring as outlined below.
Employees -When performing jobs with a reasonable expectation that benzene exposures may
approach the action level for a given task, employees are expected to either use direct reading
instruments to check benzene air concentrations, utilize appropriate controls, or request assistance from
local H&S staff.
5.0 Benzene Compliance Process
5.1 Recognition of Benzene Hazards
5.1.1 Identification
Benzene, C6H6, is the simplest of the aromatic hydrocarbons. It is a colorless to light yellow
liquid. It has a sweet smell that is noticed in concentrations starting around 4 5 ppm. Benzene
is a fire hazard when exposed to heat or flame. The flash point for benzene is 12 F, a
contributing factor to the relatively low flash point of fresh crude and NGLs. Benzene and other
hydrocarbon vapors are heavier than air and can travel along the ground to ignition sources.
Benzene will also react vigorously with oxidizing materials such as ozone, hydrogen peroxide,
chlorates, nitrates, iodates, and bromates. Auto-ignition temperature is 928F.
5.1.2 Where Found

Benzene is commonly found in crude oil and gas operations, and in crude oil products such as
diesel fuel and gasoline. Drilling muds returned from oil-bearing formations may carry benzene
into the drilling rig. In US North America Gas production facilities benzene can be present in
process streams, in the gas-drying glycol systems, in lube oil of wet gas compressors, storage
tanks, epoxy coating operations, in produced water systems and many other areas. Benzene
levels above the BP action level have been found in some filtering operations at produced water
disposal facilities. Exposures above the action level should be expected when process
equipment is opened for service or when process fluids leak or spill. Consumer products
containing benzene include tobacco, gasoline, solvents, adhesives, and varnishes.

5.1.3 Health Effects

Benzene may cause adverse health effects from exposure via inhalation, ingestion, and dermal
or eye contact. Early acute overexposure can result in euphoria, giddiness, then drowsiness,
dizziness, headaches, ringing in the ears, vertigo and delirium, potentially proceeding to loss of
consciousness. These symptoms tend to appear between 100 ppm (parts per million) and a few
thousand ppm. The early symptoms usually disappear after exposure stops. However, death
may occur after brief exposures at concentrations around 10,000 ppm and higher. High
exposures lead rapidly to deep anesthesia. If untreated at this stage, respiratory arrest rapidly
ensues, often associated with muscular twitching and convulsions.
Symptoms of chronic exposure to low levels of benzene include: headaches, dizziness, fatigue,
anorexia, shortness of breath, vertigo, pallor (unnatural paleness), and visual disturbances. It is
also a known carcinogen, affecting the blood making tissues of the body. It has caused
leukemia and subsequent death in some workers exposed to benzene for periods of less than
five and up to thirty years at varying concentrations. Long-term exposure to benzene has, in
other cases, affected normal blood production causing severe anemia and internal bleeding.
Although inhalation of benzene is generally the primary pathway of exposure, absorption through
the skin may also contribute to the total dose. Skin contact with benzene can lead to skin
irritation, de-fatting, dryness, and cracking.
5.1.4 First Aid

Eye and face exposure: If benzene is splashed in your eyes, wash it out immediately with large
amounts of water. If irritation persists or vision appears to be affected see a doctor as soon as
possible.
Skin exposure: If benzene is spilled on your clothing or skin, remove the contaminated clothing
and wash the exposed skin with large amounts of water and soap immediately. Wash
contaminated clothing before you wear it again.
Breathing: If you or any other person breathes in significant amounts of benzene, get the
exposed person to fresh air at once. Apply artificial respiration if breathing has stopped. Call for
medical assistance or a doctor as soon as possible. Never enter any vessel or confined space
where the benzene concentration might be above the action limit without proper safety equipment
and always follow confined space entry procedures.
Swallowing: If benzene has been swallowed and the patient is conscious, do not induce
vomiting. Call for medical assistance or a doctor immediately.
5.2 Evaluating Benzene Exposures
5.2.1 Benzene Occupational Exposure Limits
Recommending Body Average Exposure Exposure Limit (ppm)

Time
OSHA Action Limit 8-hours 0.5
OSHA PEL-TWA 8-hours 1
OSHA PEL-STEL 15-minutes 5
ACGIH TLV-TWA 8-hours 0.5

ACGIH TLV-STEL 15-minutes 2.5
The OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL-TWA) is 1 ppm as an 8 hour time-weighted

average (for a normal, eight hour day, forty-hour week). The OSHA short-term exposure limit
(PEL-STEL) is 5.0 PPM for any 15-minute period. An average exposure of 0.67 ppm benzene
for 12 hours would equal the OSHA PEL-TWA.
The OSHA action level for benzene is 0.5 ppm. Jobs with exposures at this level must be
monitored annually, and supervisors should determine how many days per year workers are
exposed at this level. Annual training is required when workers are exposed at this level.
The ACGIH Threshold Limit Value (TLV TWA) is 0.5 ppm for as an 8 hour time-weighted
average. An average exposure of 0.33 ppm for 12 hours would equal the TLV. The ACGIH
TLV- STEL is 2.5 ppm for as a 15 minute period.
BP US North America Gas action level for benzene is 0.5 ppm. If direct reading instrument
sampling or prior industrial hygiene monitoring indicates benzene at or above 0.5 ppm in
employee breathing zones, BP uses a minimum of an air-purifying respirator (APR) with organic
vapor cartridges, regardless of task exposure length. In crude oil operations, benzene exposures
generally occur along with exposures to other hydrocarbons, which are not being measured and
evaluated but nevertheless contribute to total hydrocarbon exposure. The use of an action level
of 0.5 ppm benzene is intended to hold worker exposures below the benzene TLV, considering
variable exposure environments, long shifts, and the presence of other hydrocarbons with some
similar health effects.
5.2.2 Detecting and Measuring Benzene in the Work Environment
If controls will not be utilized and previous benzene monitoring data is not available and benzene
levels could be reasonably expected to exceed the action limit for a given task, air concentrations
should be evaluated using direct reading instruments and/or integrated sampling methods. The
sense of smell is inadequate to evaluate such exposures.
Direct reading instruments can be used to check benzene concentrations in workers

breathing zones, whenever process equipment is opened and benzene vapors may present
potential exposure. Direct reading instruments include detector tubes, Drger CMS, Snapshot
and Ultra Rae. The Industrial Scientific VX500 is not recommended for detection of benzene
concentrations as it has proven to give erroneously high readings in the presence of other
hydrocarbons. Use the monitoring results from the direct reading instrument to determine
appropriate controls as described below. Re-sample after installing exhaust ventilation to
document effectiveness. If the task will continue more than a few minutes, the H&S Coordinator
or industrial hygienist may suggest periodic re-sampling to ensure that conditions have not
worsened.
Personal benzene exposure monitoring will be conducted by an industrial hygienist,

occupational health technician, or H&S coordinator using integrated sampling methods.
Monitoring will be conducted when called for in the job hazard analysis, when workers express
any reasonable exposure concern, or as part of the exposure assessment program. Employees
may wear passive monitoring badges for full-shift samples or personal air sampling pumps with
charcoal tubes mounted to collect the sample in the breathing zone for short-term samples. The
industrial hygienist will report laboratory analytical results to the supervisors, H&S coordinators
and workers involved in the monitored task.
If personal exposure monitoring reveals worker exposure at or above the action level for a given
task, but at or below the 8-hour time-weighted average PEL-TWA, the location shall implement
appropriate controls and repeat monitoring for that job task at least every year, if the job is
recurring. If sample results reveal exposures above the 8-hour PEL-TWA, appropriate controls
shall be implemented and monitoring for the workers engaged in the job task shall be repeated at
least every six months, if the job is recurring. Where initial monitoring shows results below the
action level, monitoring for those workers may be discontinued until the location has reason to
believe exposure levels might have changed due to a significant change in process, equipment,
or procedure. Monitoring for the PEL-STEL shall be repeated as necessary to evaluate
exposures of workers subject to short-term exposures. When exposure monitoring indicates
benzene levels greater than the OSHA PEL, a written plan to reduce the exposures to below the
PEL using engineering, work practice and respiratory controls is required. The plan should
include a schedule for the development and implementation of the controls.
5.3 Controlling Benzene Exposures

BP must control benzene exposures when:
Previous industrial hygiene monitoring for the job indicates benzene levels may be above
the action limit,
Previous monitoring data is not available and benzene levels could be reasonably
expected to exceed the action limit, or
Direct-reading samples indicate the presence of 0.5 ppm or more benzene in the
breathing zone concentrations.
The H&S coordinator or industrial hygienist can provide advice on control systems. Some useful
controls include:
5.3.1 Pre-job water wash and purging of equipment to reduce hydrocarbon
contamination.
Hot water wash piping with a combination of Jettison or pre-wash surfactant and
water at 210 degrees F. Hook hot water wash mixture connections to the bottom of
the piping if possible and drain from the top in order to float hydrocarbon residuals
out. Pump through piping approximately three times (or until readings are within
acceptable limits). Fill the piping with cold water and allow to cool to reduce residual
hydrocarbon break out.
If feasible, implement nitrogen purge until levels are reduced. Some locations purge
with light end gas to decrease benzene levels.
5.3.2 Install temporary local exhaust ventilation to capture hydrocarbon vapors at the
source before they can reach worker breathing zones.
Set up a temporary local exhaust system with a portable air or electric-driven fan and
flexible ductwork to capture and exhaust vapors to the outdoors.
Be sure the flexible duct is in good condition without holes.
Minimize duct length, kinks, and bends to get the most air flow possible.
Improve capture efficiency by adding a flange on the entry hood (duct entrance).
Position the entry hood within a few inches of the source, i.e. the process opening
point.
Start the fan before opening the process.

5.3.3 Wear air purifying respirators (APR) with organic vapor cartridges, if engineering
controls are not feasible or are not able to control the exposure.
Wear at least a half-face mask APR when grab samples measure 0.5 ppm benzene
and less than 10 ppm.
Wear at least a full face APR or atmosphere-supplying respirator for exposures
above 10 ppm benzene and less than 50 ppm.
Atmosphere-supplying respirators (i.e. SCBA, air line respirator) are required for
exposures above 50 ppm benzene.
The H&S coordinator or industrial hygienist can assist with the determination of the
appropriate level of respiratory protection.
No personnel shall utilize respiratory protection unless medically evaluated and fit
tested for the specific type of respirator utilized.
5.3.4 Wear skin and eye protection: Nitrile gloves, safety glasses or goggles, and aprons or
splash suits must be worn as required by the job conditions, the task hazard analysis, or
other instructions to prevent skin and eye exposure.
5.4 Employee Information and Training

5.4.1 Training
The workforce must receive training and information on benzene as part of BPs Hazard
Communication Program initially upon assignment. Training must be completed annually for
workers who perform tasks that have shown exposures above the action level. Training will
cover: location/operations where benzene is present, location and availability of Hazard
Communication Plan and MSDS, how to recognize benzene hazards, methods used for
measuring and detecting benzene, and how to control and prevent exposure.
5.4.2 Signs
Regulated areas should be established and demarcated for any area where airborne
concentrations of benzene exceed or can reasonably be expected to exceed the action limit of
0.5 ppm. The following signage should be posted at the entrance to this area to minimize the
number of employees exposed to benzene within the regulated area.
DANGER
BENZENE
CANCER HAZARD
FLAMMABLE - NO SMOKING
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATOR REQUIRED
5.4.3 Labels
Benzene may be present in our process streams. Labeling, as outlined in BPs Hazard
Communication Program, is required for containers (barrel, bottle, can, cylinder, drum, reaction
vessel, storage tank, or the like, but not including piping systems) which contain greater than
0.1% benzene. Additionally, when previous monitoring indicates that exposure levels may
exceed the action level when performing tasks on opened vessels, these vessels should comply
with the requirements of 29CFR1910.1200(f) and shall include the following legend:
DANGER
CONTAINS BENZENE
CANCER HAZARD


5.5.1 Emergency Examinations (Appendix 1)
When there is a potential emergency / unanticipated exposure to benzene that may have
exceeded the OSHA PEL-STEL (5 ppm), a urine sample should be collected from the exposed
employee at the end of their work shift. If the concentration can not be readily be determined,
collect a urine sample from the employee. The H&S Coordinator will work with the BP Medical to
facilitate sample collection. The sample should be collected at the end of the shift and have a
urinary phenol test performed on the sample within 72 hours. When a sample is collected, the
requestor should notify the BP Medical Department that the sample is being sent for analysis.
Other notifications should be made per the North America Gas Incident & Illness Reporting
Procedure. BP Medical will advise as to whether further medical evaluation is required. Field
locations that determine that they may have the potential for emergency benzene testing should
request benzene test kits from the BP Medical Department. The BP Medical Benzene
Surveillance Questionnaire and Examination Form can be found at:
http://houoccmed.bpweb.bp.com/Benzene%20Ex%20Form.doc
5.5.2 Voluntary Periodic Examinations
5.5.2.1 Current Exposure Potential
A medical surveillance program will be available to employees for the duration of their
employment who are or may be exposed to benzene at or above the action level 30 or more days
per year or above the PELs 10 or more days per year. If a field location has a job classification
where employees may be exposed at this level, the Supervisor or H&S Coordinator should notify
the BP Medical Department that the employee should be included in the medical surveillance
program upon initial assignment. BP Medical will provide direction to the employee and
supervisor regarding the initial and annual periodic examinations.
5.5.2.2 Historic Exposure
A medical surveillance program will be available to employees during the duration of their
employment who are known to have been exposed to benzene at or above the action level 30 or
more days per year or above the PELs 10 or more days per year. If a field location had a job
classification where current employees are now known to have been exposed at this level, the
Supervisor should notify the BP Medical Department that the employee should be included in the
medical surveillance program upon identification of the historical exposure. BP Medical will
provide direction to the employee and supervisor regarding the initial and annual periodic
examinations.
5.6 Recordkeeping
Employee exposure records must be maintained for at least 30 years and medical records, if
applicable, must be maintained for the duration of employment plus 30 years.
6.0 Key Documents/Tools/References

OSHA 29 CFR 1000, Toxic and Hazardous Substances
http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=9991
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1028, Benzene
http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=10042
APPENDIX 1
OUSBU Benzene Emergency Examination Flowchart
Was there an
unanticipated potential
emergency exposure to
No further action
benzene > OSHA
necessary
STEL (5 ppm)? (vapor,
skin, etc.) No
Yes
Urine Sample Sample must be

Required from provided at the end
Worker (use Benzene of the workshift
test kit or contact BP and urinary phenol
Medical for Protocol) test performed
within 72 hours
BP Medical
Outcome Normal receives analytical Outcome Abnormal
results and informs
employee,
supervisor and
HSC of results
BP Medical Instructs
No further evaluation
Employee of further
necessary
Action
BP Medical issues
Final Report to
Employee &
Supervisor

Document Name Benzene Compliance

Scope NAG SPU Control Tier Tier 2
Ruth NAGAS SPU Kate Industrial Hygiene
Authority Custodian
Germany-Bice HSSE Director Murray Coordinator
Duane Kortsha, Kate Murray,
1.0 01/31/2006 New Draft Practice Health & Safety Industrial Hygiene
Program Manager Coordinator
OSHA 29 CFR 1000, Toxic and External http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_docu

Hazardous Substances Link ment?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=9991
External http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_docu
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1028, Benzene
Link ment?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=10042
BP Medical Benzene Surveillance
Internal http://houoccmed.bpweb.bp.com/Benzene%20Ex%20
Questionnaire and Examination
Link Form.doc
Form
Document Approval
Approver Title Date
Authority NAGAS SPU HSSE Director
Custodian Industrial Hygiene Coordinator


Document Title: Blinding and Equipment Isolation
I. Purpose
This standard establishes blinding procedures for the installation and removal of blinds.
Blinding is generally the preferred method of isolation.
II. Scope
Blinds shall be installed to isolate and prevent the release of combustible and toxic liquids,
vapors, or gases into the work area and to prevent repressurization of equipment isolated
for maintenance. In addition, blinds shall be installed at vessels, equipment, or confined
spaces scheduled for entry as outlined in the Confined Space Entry and the
Lockout/Tagout chapters of this Standard.
III. Definitions
Blind (slip blind): A properly rated and sized metal plate inserted between pipe flange
gaskets to prevent the flow of gas or liquid in either direction.
Blind flange: A full-rated pipefitting used to close the flanged end of an open pipe or
valve.
Spectacle blind: A combination of blind and spacer, formed from the same piece of
material. This item is often a permanent part of the line and is taken out and the other end
inserted, depending upon whether or not flow through that line is desired.
Tapped blind flange: A full-rated pipefitting used to close the flanged end of an open pipe
or valve with a threaded tap for installing a valve. A vent valve is recommended for the
controlled release of any pressure buildup prior to removal of the blind flange.

NOTE: Do not confuse blinds with spacers, screens, or orifice plates.
IV. Blind Selection
A. A blind must be of sufficient strength to withstand the maximum possible pressure to

which it can be subjected. Permanent blinds must meet applicable design piping
standards and codes. Blinds shall be properly identified. A blind is recommended to
have a T-handle long enough to extend at least 2 inches beyond pipe flanges. One
side of the T-handle shall have a hole for the attachment of a tag and flag.
B. Purchased blinds from approved manufacturers shall be designed specifically for the
size and rating of the flanges to assure the proper thickness, flatness, and smoothness
of the gasket surface. If blinds for raised-face flanges must be fabricated on site, use
Table 4.2-1. The table uses steel plate with a yield strength of ASTM A-36 or better.
Or consult the appropriate engineering group to design the blind to withstand the
maximum pressure.
Table 4.2-1
Blind Rating Chart
(per the formula in Section 304.53 of ANSI B31.3, using allowable stress of 17,800 PSI)
Nominal Pipe Size (NPS)

ANSI 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16"
Class
3 5 7
150 " " /8 " /8" " " /8" 1"
3 3 7
300 /8" /8" " " /8" 1 1/8" 1 " 1 3/8" 1 "
3 5 5 7 1 3 5 7
600 /8" /8" /8" /8 1 /8" 1 /8" 1 /8" 1 /8" 2 1/8"
NOTE: These blind thicknesses are good for a temperature range of 20 to 100 F.
C. Slip blinds (blanks) for ring type joint (RTJ) flanges shall be purchased only from
approved manufacturers and designed specifically for the size and rating of the
flanges. Self-fabricated RTJ blinds are not allowed.
D. The use of other types of blinding devices such as tapped bull plugs and Victaulic
caps may also be considered if these meet or exceed ratings of other members of

piping systems. Special attention shall be given to providing the means to bleed
down pressure before using these devices.
V. Procedures
A. Install blinds as close to the vessel or equipment as possible to ensure isolation. A

blind provides the best method of guaranteeing that liquid or gas will be safely
contained and not transferred through a process system. Install and/or remove blinds
only at the direction of the supervisor or designated alternate.
B. A blind shall be installed with three major considerations:
1. Rating.
Is the blind properly rated?
2. Location
a. Will the blind effectively isolate the equipment in the location selected?
b. Is there access to the selected location?
c. Can the blind be safely removed when removal is required?
3. Size
Does the blind size match the size of the line being blinded?
C. The blind list must be approved by the qualified individual when blinds are installed.
The blind list will be kept in the control room, lease office, or vehicle on site. This
list shall include the size, pressure rating, location, dates of installation and removal,
and the initials of the person(s) installing the blind.
D. Blinds shall be tagged for identification and numbered to correspond with the blind
list (See Attachment 4.1-1, Blind List).
E. When work is completed, the supervisor or designated alternate, using the blind list,
must confirm that all blinds have been removed prior to startup. The blind list shall
be initialed by the supervisor or designated alternate and the person(s) removing the
blind. Failure to remove all temporary blinds could lead to overpressure and other
potentially hazardous conditions.
F. Ensure that drain valves are open by using proper rod-out equipment.
G. Remove flange bolting, leaving a minimum of two, then loosen these bolts and
without completely removing the nuts spread the flanges to install the blind. Always

spread the flange on the side so any sudden release will be directed away from
personnel.
H. When vessels or process equipment is interconnected in such a way that the blinding
of each is not possible or practical, the combination is to be considered as one vessel.
The combination will be appropriately blinded and prepared as a unit.
VI. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR, and

1910.147.
B. gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
C. gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.

Attachment 4.1-1
Blind List
Blind Location and Description Installed Removed

Number (Initials and Date) (Initials and Date)
Each blind must be tagged. Approved by:


Document Title: Bloodborne Pathogens Exposure Control Program
I. Purpose and Scope
A. The Bloodborne Pathogens OSHA Standard (29CFR 1910.1030) was established to

eliminate or minimize these types of infections in the workplace. This program
provides control measures and procedures to be followed at Onshore U.S. locations
to prevent occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens and other potentially
infectious materials.
B. Besides HBV and HIV, bloodborne pathogens include any pathogenic

microorganism that is present in human blood and can infect and cause disease in
persons who are exposed to blood containing the pathogen. Other examples include
hepatitis C, malaria, syphilis, babesiosis, brucellosis, leptospirosis, arboviral
infections, relapsing fever, Crueutzfeld-Jakob disease, human T-lymphotrophic virus
type 1, and viral hemorrhagic fever.
C. This program covers all Onshore U.S. employees who are required to render medical
assistance as part of their job duties. This primarily includes doctors, nurses, and
employees designated by the company to be responsible for rendering first aid at the
worksite.
D. More specific information that will assist in determining those employees covered in
the standard is outlined below.
II. Delegation of Responsibility
Onshore U.S. management is responsible for the implementation of this program and for
ensuring employees follow the procedures outlined in the plan. The HSE and Houston-
based Medical Departments are responsible to assist Onshore U.S. facilities in
implementing this plan.
III. Written Exposure Plan
A. The written control plan for occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens will be
maintained in the facilities safety records.
B. The plan will be reviewed at least annually by the HSE Department for updating and
changes.

VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND AT http://ousbuhse.bpweb.bp.com/
IV. Exposure Determination
A. The exposure determination is based on identifying employees who may reasonably

have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials when
performing their duties. Occupational exposure means any reasonably anticipated
skin, eye, mucous membrane, or parenteral contact (piercing, such as needle sticks,
cuts, abrasions) with blood or other potentially infectious materials (OPIM) that may
result from the performance of an employees duties. The primary factors to be
considered are:
1. Probability of exposure
2. Potential routes of exposure
B. The standard requires an analysis of job tasks and procedures so that job duties are
classified into exposure categories without regard to the use of personal protective
equipment (PPE). The employees in categories 1 and 2 (see Table 1, below)
comprise the groups who will come under the Bloodborne Pathogens Standard.
C. Not all BP employees are required to render first aid or CPR, unless the performance
of first aid is a part of an employees designated job duty or the employee is
participating in a special emergency medical response organization. Employees
designated to render life saving actions include those who voluntarily take on first
aid responsibilities as part of their job description, and are available during normal
work shifts.
D. BP trains many employees in first aid and CPR as part of the companys ongoing
safety program. It is felt that understanding the seriousness of injuries and illnesses
and the associated first aid procedures instills a positive attitude toward working
safely. When emergency situations occur, the company wants employees to have all
the skills necessary to handle the situation, but under no circumstances will any
employee be forced to perform first aid or CPR against their personal judgment.
E. Employees shall direct questions regarding the performance of first aid or CPR to
their supervisor or local HSE representative.

Table 1. Exposure Categories
Category 1 Category 2 Category 3

Job duties that routinely involve Job duties that normally do not Employees are not exposed to blood
exposure to blood or bodily fluids involve exposure to blood or bodily or bodily fluids because of their job
fluids, but employment may require duties but are trained in first aid
performing unplanned tasks procedures to enhance the overall
consistent in category 1 safety program of the company and
provide the employee with valuable
information/skills to use at home
and/or off the job. Any first aid
rendered by these employees is
rendered only as a collateral duty,
responding solely to injuries resulting
from workplace incidents.
Good Samaritan acts, such as

assisting a coworker with a nose-
bleed or controlling bleeding as the
result of a fall, are not considered
occupational exposures by OSHA.
Employees who are first aid trained
but are not required as part of their
job duties to render first aid shall be
informed of that fact, and they need
to report any exposure incident as a
result of a Good Samaritan act
immediately to their supervisor.
Category 1 Examples Category 2 Examples Category 3 Examples
Medical Dept physicians First aid trained employees who Job classifications in this category
Medical Dept. nurses are required by the company to include but are not limited to:
render first aid and emergency
rescue at a specific job site or Automation
location Technicians
Custodians who may handle Gang Foremen
regulated wastes in Company Computer Analysts
medical departments
Geologists
Control Room Operators
Geophysicists
Engineers
Plant Technologists
Exploration Technologists
Production Foremen
Field Foremen
Production Operators
Production Technologists
Administrative Staff
Field Technologists

V. Methods of Compliance
In general the best method of ensuring the health and safety for workers at risk is to
understand and follow the concept of universal precautions as it applies to an employees
duties and work practices. This concept refers to the assumption that all blood and bodily
fluids are contaminated with pathogens. Instruction in universal precautions shall take
place during initial and annual training as well as at other times when deemed necessary.
VI. Engineering and Work Practice Controls
A. Hand washing is a primary work practice control. The company will provide hand
washing facilities for employees to use following exposure to blood. If this is not
available or feasible, then alternative methods, such as antiseptic hand cleaners, in
conjunction with clean cloths or paper towels, or antiseptic towelettes, will be
provided. When these alternative methods are used, employees shall wash their
hands (or other affected areas) with soap and running water as soon as feasible after
exposure.
B. Rigid containers for used needle disposal, self-sheathing needles, and disposable
needles shall be used in medical and/or first aid rooms. Employees who bring kits
for insulin or other required injections shall be instructed by their supervisor to
provide rigid containers for proper needle disposal.
C. Cleaning, disinfecting, and sterilization of nondisposable equipment are defined in

Attachment 1.3-1.
VII. Personal Protective Equipment
A. Latex or vinyl gloves shall be worn when first aid or medical treatment begins and
until treatment stops. One should assume all patients may be infectious. Always
wear a new pair of gloves before handling another person.
B. If available, gloves, mouth shields, surgical masks, eyewear, and protective body
clothing (impervious to fluids) such as gowns, aprons, or Tyvek coveralls shall be
present in or as a part of all company first aid kits and shall be worn whenever there
is a reasonable probability for blood splashes or contaminated body fluids.
C. Recommendations for wearing personal protective equipment (PPE) are outlined in

Attachment 1.3-2.

VIII. Housekeeping
A. Exposed surfaces in medical departments, first aid rooms, ambulance seats, reusable
emergency equipment, etc. shall be cleaned of gross material and fluids, and then
wiped with an appropriate disinfectant/germicide. (See Attachment 1.3-1.)
B. Contaminated laundry shall be handled with care and placed in leak-proof, labeled
and/or color coded bags at the worksite. Gloves shall be worn by employees who
work with contaminated laundry. If laundry services are provided by independent
contractors, documentation verifying that the contractors employees have had the
required training mandated by the Bloodborne Pathogen Standard shall be reviewed
by BP management.
C. Employees who work in company medical departments or first aid rooms containing
refrigerators shall be instructed not to place food or drinks inside. This information
will be documented for workers at risk during their initial training and annually
thereafter. Inspections of these refrigerators and areas shall be conducted and
documented at least annually. These training and inspection records shall be kept on
file by the department responsible for the operation.
IX. Waste Handling
A. All medical wastes, blood specimens, and other body fluids shall be placed in
containers that are color coded and which exhibit the biohazard symbol. Medical
wastes include but are not limited to, needles, disposable equipment, and items such
as soiled dressings, sponges, and used gloves. The disposal containers shall be
constructed so that they are closeable, leak-proof, puncture-resistant, fluorescent
orange, orange-red, or red in color, and display the biohazard legend.
B. Filled biohazard containers shall be stored and locked in a designated area until sent
to the disposal facility. Consult your local HSE representative for a list of approved
disposal facilities.
Documentation of all waste disposal shipments shall be maintained indefinitely by

the Operations Center location.
C. Masks in combination with eye protection devices, such as goggles or glasses with
solid sideshields, or chin-length face shields, shall be worn when appropriate.
X. Hepatitis B Vaccination
A. Hepatitis B vaccination (HBV) will be made available to all Category 1 and

Category 2 employees. It shall be offered after the worker has received the required
training and within 10 working days of assignment at no cost, at a reasonable time
and place, and under the supervision of a licensed physician or licensed healthcare
provider. Documentation shall be on file of the dates of the workers immunization.

Prescreening may not be required as a condition of receiving the vaccine.
B. The employee who chooses not to be vaccinated must sign a declination form (see
Attachment 1.3-3 ). This form shall remain on file. The employee may later opt to
receive the vaccine, again at no cost. If, at a later date, booster doses are
recommended by the United States Public Health Service (USPHS), they will be
offered to the employee. HBV shall also be offered to any employee, irrespective of
designated category or classification, who has been involved in an occupational
exposure incident. An investigation of the incident shall be conducted and a written
report of the incident shall be kept on file.
C. Hepatitis B vaccination series shall also be made available as soon as possible, but in
no event later than 24 hours, to any employee, irrespective of designated category or
classification, and to all unvaccinated first aid providers who have rendered
assistance in any situation involving the presence of blood or other potentially
infectious material (OPIM) regardless of whether or not an actual exposure
incident, as defined by the standard, may have occurred. An investigation and a
written report of the incident shall be kept on file.
XI. Post-Exposure Evaluation and Follow-Up
A. BP will provide a confidential medical evaluation and follow-up subsequent to the

exposure incident. An exposure incident means a specific eye, mouth, or other
mucous membrane, non-intact skin, or parenteral contact (piercing, such as needle
sticks, cuts, or abrasions) with blood or other potentially infectious material that
results from the performance of an employees duties.
B. Reporting First-Aid-Rendered Incidents
All first-aid-rendered incidents involving the presence of blood or OPIM must be

reported to supervisors immediately, or as soon as is safely possible before the end of
the work shift during which the first aid care incident occurred.
The report will have the following elements:
1. The names of all first aid providers who rendered assistance, regardless of
whether personal protective equipment was used.
2. A description of the incident, including the time and date.
3. A determination of whether or not, in addition to the presence of blood or other

potentially infectious materials, an exposure incident, as defined by the
standard, occurred. This determination is necessary in order to ensure that the
proper post-exposure evaluation, prophylaxis and follow-up procedure required

by Section (f)(3) of the standard are made available immediately if there has
been an exposure incident, as defined by the standard.
4. Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and the circumstances under which

the exposure occurred.
5. Identification and documentation of the source individual, unless this is not

feasible or prohibited by state or local law.
6. The report shall be recorded on a list of such first aid care incidents. This report
shall be readily available to all employees.
C. Collection and testing of blood for HBV and HIV serological status as well as other
tests as deemed necessary will be provided to the exposed employee at no cost. The
company will provide the healthcare professional a copy of the OSHA Bloodborne
Pathogen Regulations, a description of the employees duties as they relate to the
exposure, and the circumstances under which the exposure occurred. (See
Attachment 1.3-4.)
D. Following any medical evaluation, the attending healthcare professional must

provide the employee with a written opinion within 15 days. This written opinion
must summarize the results of the medical evaluation, indicate any limitations on the
employees ability to receive HBV, state whether the employee has received HBV,
and state that the employee has been informed of the results of the evaluation. All
findings and diagnosis unrelated to the exposure shall remain confidential with the
healthcare professional and the patient and shall not be included in the written report.
The report shall be included in the employees medical records. If medical
evaluation determines a positive exposure, an Occupational Injuries or Illnesses
Report must be filed.
XII. First Aid Care Incident Reports
A. The reporting requirements are very specific regarding incidents where employees
render first aid assistance in any situation involving the presence of blood or OPIM,
regardless of whether or not an exposure occurred (see Reporting First-Aid-
Rendered Incidents, above).
B. The Operations Center or plant must assure that
1. Provisions for a reporting procedure are implemented
2. A list of incidents where first aid assistance is rendered is established
3. All reports of first aid care incidents are recorded on the list
XIII. Medical Records

A. All employee medical records shall be kept confidential and secure during the
workers employment plus one additional year on location. After this time such
records shall be archived.
B. A copy of the employees records may be released by the employees written

consent to any person within or outside of the workplace.
C. These records shall be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary of
Labor for OSHA, to the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Health
and Safety, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, or to their designated
representatives.
XIV. Labels and Signs
A. Warning labels shall be affixed to containers of regulated waste and to medical

department refrigerators and freezers containing blood or other potentially infectious
material. The label shall include the biohazard logo depicted in OSHA 29CR
1910.1030 (g), Communication of Hazards to Employees.
B. The labels shall be fluorescent orange or orange-red or predominantly so, with

lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.
C. Individual containers of blood or other potentially infectious materials (OPIM)

placed in a labeled container during storage, transport, shipment or disposal do not
need to be labeled.
XV. Information and Training
A. BP shall provide training to all affected employees at the following times:
1. Initial assignment
2. Annually
B. Training shall include the following elements:
1. A general explanation of the epidemiology and symptoms of bloodborne

infectious diseases
2. Transmission routes of bloodborne diseases
3. An explanation of the Exposure Control Plan
4. Recognition of exposure situations

5. Selection and use of PPE
6. Information regarding HBV vaccine
7. Procedures in the event of an exposure
8. The post-exposure evaluation and follow-up program
9. An explanation of signs, labels, and color coding
C. Training for all designated first aid providers shall include:
1. The role of rendering first aid by Onshore U.S. employees.
2. The availability of the full Hepatitis B vaccination series to be made as soon as

possible, but in no event later than 24 hours, to all unvaccinated first aid
providers who have rendered assistance in any situation involving the presence
of blood or OPIM, regardless of whether of not a specific exposure incident,
as defined by the standard, has occurred.
3. The specific reporting procedure (as outlined above) which ensures that all first
aid incidents involving the presence of blood or OPIM will be reported to the
employees immediate supervisor and the information forwarded to the location
HSE representative before the end of the work shift during which the first aid
incident occurred.
D. Contents of Training Records shall include:
1. The date of the training session
2. A description or summary of the training session
3. The names and qualifications of instructors
4. The names and job titles of all attendees
E. A training program entitled Avoiding Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens has been

developed to facilitate training requirements. The program consists of a video tape,
instructors manual, and workbooks, and it is available to all BP employees.
F. In addition, instruction in Medic First Aid-Basic (Emergency Medical Planning,

Inc.) provides important and useful information in the section, Communicable
Disease Protection. Course instructors shall remind students in all training modules
to wear gloves when handling or when in contact with body fluids and to use body
fluid barriers when performing first aid/CPR and to wash thoroughly afterward.

G. Training records will be maintained for a minimum of three years and also will be
entered into the applicable training data base system to ensure proper documentation.
XVI. Availability of Records
Employees may review their medical and training records during normal business hours
and copies of their records will be provided to them or their authorized representative
upon written request.
XVII. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR Part

1910.1030.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Instruction CPL 2-2.44B.
C. gHSEr Element # 2, Risk Assessment and Management.

Attachment 1.3-1
Cleaning, Disinfecting, And Sterilization
Cleaning, disinfecting and sterilization of non disposable equipment will be accomplished by the
following methods:
Sterilization
This process destroys all forms of microbial life. It is used for instruments or devices that
penetrate the skin or contact normally sterile parts of the body (scalpels and needles). The
following are methods of sterilization:
1. Steam under pressure (autoclave)
2. Gas (ethylene oxide)
3. Dry heat
4. Immersion in an EPA-approved chemical sterilizer (6-10 hours) or according to the

manufacturers instructions. This shall be used only if the heat process is not available.
High-Level Disinfection
This process destroys all forms of microbial life except high numbers of bacterial spores. It is
used on reusable instruments that come into contact with mucous membranes (laryngoscope
blades and endotracheal tubes). The following are methods of disinfection:
1. Hot water pasteurization (176-212 Fahrenheit for 30 minutes)
2. Exposure to an EPA-registered chemical sterilant for 10 to 45 minutes or as directed by the

manufacturer
Intermediate Level Disinfection
This process destroys mycobacteria, tuberculosis, most viruses, vegetative bacteria, and most
fungi, but not bacterial spores. This is used on surfaces that come into contact with intact skin
(stethoscopes, blood pressure cuffs, splints) and have been visibly contaminated with blood or
body fluids. Surfaces must be precleaned of visible material before disinfection. The following
are intermediate levels of disinfection:

1. Use of EPA-registered hospital disinfectant chemical germicides that claim to be

tuberculocidal on the label.
2. Hard-surface germicides as indicated above or solutions containing at least 500 ppm free
available chlorine (1:1000 dilution of common household bleachabout 1/4 cup bleach per
gallon of water.
Low Level Disinfection
EPA-registered hospital disinfectants (no claim on the label for tuberculocidal activity) are
used to destroy some viruses, most bacteria, and some fungi, but not mycobacterium tuberculosis
or bacterial spores. This is used for routine housekeeping or removal of soiling when there is no
visible blood.

Attachment 1.3-2
Recommendations For Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

The following are some typical activities with recommended guidelines for wearing personal
protective equipment by employees who may be exposed to blood or OPIM:
Task/Activity Disposable Gown Mask Protective Mouth Shield

Gloves Eyewear
Mouth-to-mouth Yes No No No Yes

breathing/CPR
Spurting blood Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Minimal bleeding Yes No No No No
Blood drawing Yes No No No No
Intubation Yes No Yes Yes No
Handling/cleaning Yes Yes No No No

contaminated
equipment
Measuring blood No No No No No
pressure
Measuring No No No No No
temperature
Giving injections No No No No No
Protective gloves shall be made of either latex or vinyl material. Gowns (aprons, surgeons
gowns, lab coats, etc.) shall be constructed of material such as Tyvek or plastic that do not allow
fluids to penetrate and soak clothing.
Masks shall have a NIOSH approval for dusts and mists. Respirators such as the 3M #8710 and
U.S. Safety Service, Inc., #AD-10B are appropriate for this use. However, these types of
respirators are not approved by BP for other types of occupational exposures such as asbestos.
Refer to other sections in this Standard for additional guidance. Employees provided with
respirators for protection against bloodborne pathogens will be included in the companys
Respiratory Protection Program.
Goggles and/or face shields shall be approved by ANSI.

Attachment 1.3-3
Hepatitis B Vaccine Declination (Mandatory)
_______________
Date
I understand that due to my occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious

materials, I may be at risk of acquiring Hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection.
I have been given the opportunity to be vaccinated with Hepatitis B vaccine at no charge to
myself. However, I decline Hepatitis B vaccination at this time. I understand by declining the
vaccine, I continue to be at risk of acquiring Hepatitis B, a serious disease.
If, in the future, I continue to have occupational exposure to blood or other potentially infectious
materials and I want to be vaccinated with Hepatitis B vaccine, I can receive the vaccination
series at no charge to me.
_____________________________________________________________
Employee Signature
______________________________________________________________
Employee Name (Print)

Attachment 1.3-4
Checklist of Information
To Be Provided To Healthcare Professionals
Performing Post-Exposure Evaluations
_______ 29CFR 1910.1030 Bloodborne Pathogens Standard
_______ Description of exposed employees duties
_______ Documentation of route of exposure
_______ Documentation of circumstances surrounding exposure
_______ Results of source individuals blood testing, if available
_______ Employees company medical records


Document Title: Bulletin Boards
I. General
A. Bulletin boards for posting safety notices shall be displayed at locations where
employees report to work. The operating supervisors are responsible for
implementing and enforcing this program at their respective locations.
B. Safety bulletin boards may be a section of an existing bulletin board or separate

bulletin board.
II. Items That Must Be Posted
A. OSHA poster: Federal general notification as well as state notification posters,

where applicable
B. OSHA citations resulting from inspections: Post as specified by OSHA
C. Access to medical records notice (See the Access to Employee Exposure and
Medical Records chapter in this Standard.)
D. Emergency notification information
E. Hearing conservation standard/amendment
F. OSHA Occupational Injury and Illness Summary from February 1 through March 1
G. Toxic Substance Control Act: Notices 8c and 8e
III. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR,

Parts 1903 and 1904.
B. gHSEr Element # 8, Information and Documentation.

NA Gas Onshore US Health & Safety Practice Page 4.2-1

Document Title: Combustible and Flammable Liquid Storage and
Handling
Authority: Onshore U.S. BU Leader Custodian: Onshore U.S. BU HSE Manager

Issue Date: 12/13/01 Scope: BP Onshore U.S. Business Unit
Revision Date: 04/14/03 Control Tier: Tier 2
1.0 Purpose/Scope
This chapter provides the minimum requirements for the safe storage and handling of combustible and
flammable liquids. It also includes minimum safe work procedures for tank car or truck loading and unloading.
2.0 Definitions
2.1 Flash point - the lowest temperature at which a liquid will give off sufficient flammable vapor for an
ignition to occur.
2.2 Flammable liquid - any liquid having a flash point below 100 F (37.8 C), except any mixture having
components with flashpoints of 100 F (37.8 C) or higher, the total of which make up 99 percent or more of
the total volume of the mixture, and having a vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia at 100 F (37.8 C).
Liquids meeting this definition are known as Class I liquids and are subdivided as follows:
Class IA liquids have a flash point below 73 F (22.8 C) and a boiling point below 100 F
(37.8 C); for example, gasoline.
Class IB liquids have a flash point below 73 F (22.8 C) and a boiling point at or above 100
F (37.8 C); for example, methanol.
Class IC liquids have a flash point at or above 73 F (22.8 C) and below 100 F (37.8 C); for
example, chlorohexane.
NOTE: The Department of Transportation (DOT) definition of flammable liquid is slightly different
from this. Refer to DOT shipping regulations for clarification.
2.3 Combustible liquid - a liquid having a flash point at or above 100 F (37.8 C). Combustible liquids are
subdivided as follows:
2.3.1 Class II liquids have flash points at or above 100 F (37.8 C) and below 140 F (60 C), except
any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 F (93.3 C) or higher, the volume of which
makes up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture, for example, diesel fuel oil.
2.3.2 Class IIIA liquids have flash points at or above 140 F (60 C) and below 200 F (93 C), except
any mixture having components with flashpoints of 200 F (93.3 C) or higher, the volume of which
makes up 99 percent or more of the total volume of the mixture, for example, phenol.
2.3.3 Class IIIB liquids have flash points at or above 200 F (93 C); for example, ethylene glycol.


Combustible and flammable liquids shall be stored and handled in a manner that complies with the applicable
federal, state and local regulations.

Operating supervisors shall ensure that the requirements of this program are implemented and enforced.
Operating supervisors shall ensure that all personnel are properly trained before being allowed to load or unload
flammable or combustible products, and shall ensure that all training is documented.
5.0 Procedure
5.1 Storage
5.1.1 Flammable or combustible liquids shall be stored in tanks or closed containers. The receptacles for
these liquids must identify their contents and display the appropriate hazard warnings. Contact the local
HSE representative or BP supervisor for labels used at your location.
5.1.2 The total quantity of liquid, including flammable aerosols, that may be located outside a storage cabinet
within a building or an inside storage room shall not exceed any one of the following:
25 gallons of Class 1A liquids, in containers, having a flash point below 73 F.
120 gallons of Class IB, IC, II OR III liquids, in containers, having a flash point above 73 F.
660 gallons of Class IB, IC, II, OR III liquid in a single portable tank having a flash point above 73 F.
5.1.3 Except as stated above, all storage must be within storage cabinets or interior storage rooms. (Interior
storage rooms must meet rigorous design specifications. Refer to NFPA 30 and 29 CFR 1910.106(d)(4)(i),
and consult the field HSE representative for specific construction requirements.)
5.1.4 Storage cabinets shall meet the following criteria:
Not more than 60 gallons of Class 1 or Class II liquids having a flash point below 140 F nor more than
120 gallons of Class III liquids having a flash point above 140 F may be stored in a storage cabinet.
The bottom, top, door, and sides of the cabinet shall be at least No. 18 gauge sheet iron and double
walled with 1.5 inches of air space.
Joints shall be riveted, welded, or made tight by some equally effective means.
The door shall be provided with a three-point lock (top, center, and bottom catches) and the doorsill
shall be raised at least 2 inches above the bottom of the cabinet.
The cabinet is not required to be vented, but if it is, the following shall apply:
(a) The cabinet shall be vented to a safe area outdoors in a manner that will not compromise
performance.
(b) If the cabinet is not vented but has vent openings, they shall be sealed with a properly fitted flash
arrestor.

Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering, FLAMMABLE KEEP FIRE AWAY.
5.2 Handling
5.2.1 Flammable liquids shall be kept in closed containers when not actually in use.
5.2.2 Flammable liquids may be used only where there are no open flames or other sources of ignition within
the possible path of vapor travel.
5.2.3 Flammable or combustible liquids must be drawn from or transferred into vessels, containers, or
portable tanks within a building only through a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means of a top
drawing device/pump, or from a container or portable tank by gravity through a self-closing valve.
Transferring by means of gas or air pressure on the container or portable tanks is prohibited.
5.2.4 Flammable liquids shall not be dispensed into containers unless the nozzle and container are electrically
interconnected. This can be satisfied by:
Having a metallic floor-plate on which the container stands while the fill pipe or nozzle is electrically
connected to the container or plate.
Bonding the container to the fill stem by means of a bond wire. (See the Grounding and Bonding
chapter of this Standard.) Plastic containers shall not be used to collect, store or transfer flammable
liquids, i.e., catching a sample, unless fluids would react with a metal container.
5.2.5 Combustible or flammable liquids shall be stored in metal tanks or containers unless the product being
stored will cause a reaction with the vessels.
5.2.6 To prevent the ignition of flammable vapors during the refueling of vehicles the following steps shall
be taken:
Place portable fuel containers on the ground prior to filling, under no circumstances should they be
left on lined truck beds while re-fueling. Doing so can result in a static discharge igniting the
vapors generate while refueling.
Ensure that the filler nozzle remains in contact with the vehicle at all times during re-fueling
Never leave filling nozzles unattended while filling the vehicle
5.2.7 Plastic buckets or pails shall not be used to collect flammable liquids due to the potential for a flash fire
being ignited by static discharge.
5.3 Tank Car/Truck Loading and Unloading
5.3.1 Safe loading procedures should be reviewed annually at those applicable locations.
5.3.2 All tank cars and tank trucks must be loaded in accordance with the safety procedures outlined below:
a. A qualified loader shall be present throughout the loading/unloading process.

b. Only approved and tested hoses and piping shall be used for the transfer of chemicals.
c. All tanks cars and trucks shall be inspected for mechanical damage or leaks before loading activities begin.
d. The loader shall be advised of the hazardous properties of the product being loaded/unloaded. The loader
must also be aware of the procedures to be followed if an emergency occurs.
e. The loader is authorized to stop the loading/unloading process whenever the conditions warrant.

f. Tank cars or truck tankers must be compatible for the product being loaded per the container specification
number affixed to each side of tank. The tank truck must also have valid and proper permits affixed to its
tank. The tank car or truck shall be placarded for the material being loaded.
g. Traffic controls shall be established in the loading area so that all trucks enter and exit as designated.
h. A Stop - Tank Car Connected sign as specified in DOT regulations shall be located on the active end of
the rail siding while the tank car is connected.
i. A derail or bumper block on the active end of the siding shall protect the tank car unless a closed and locked
switch protects the car.
j. The tank car or trucks handbrake shall be engaged in addition to chocking the rear wheels of the truck
before loading.
k. The tank car or truck shall be bonded from the fill line to the tank and grounded to the railway or a
grounding rod. Metal to metal contact for these connections must be made. After loading is complete, the
cable shall remain connected for a few minutes to dissipate accumulation of static charges before
disconnecting. Please refer to the chapter Grounding and Bonding Procedures in this Standard for further
information.
l. The tank cars safety relief valve test dates shall be checked to verify they are current. Tanks shall be
retested every ten years and valves every five years.
m. Plugs from all valves on the tank car shall be removed for the duration of the loading process.
n. The trucks engine, lights, radio, etc. shall be turned off before loading begins. The driver and passengers
shall remain out of the cab at all times during the loading/unloading process.
o. The maximum fill density of the tank shall never be exceeded.
p. The loading process shall be halted during any electrical storms.
q. Electrical equipment and fixtures installed or used within classified areas (Class I, Division 1 or 2) shall be
selected and installed in accordance with OSHA, 29 CFR 1910.301 - .399, Subpart S - Electrical.
r. Tank cars and trucks must be empty when loading begins to prevent possible contamination of our product
with a lower quality product and to prevent overloading.
s. Smoking shall not be permitted within 150 feet of the loading area.
t. If a spill occurs during loading, do not start the tank truck or allow other possible sources of ignition within
150 feet until the area is tested for combustible/flammable vapors and determined to be safe.
6.1 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1910.106, and 1910.301 - .399.
6.2 National Fire Protection Association; NFPA 30 and 58
6.3 gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
6.4 gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.
6.5 Department of Transportation; 49 CFR 174.67, 49 CFR 177.837
6.6 OUSBU Safety Standard Document Control Revision Log


Document Title: Compressed Gases and Air

Issue Date: 12/13/01 Scope: NAG Onshore U.S.
1.0 Purpose/Scope
This practice provides the minimum procedures required to safely work with compressed gases
and air.
NOTE: Requirements for loading and unloading compressed gases from tank cars are covered in
the Combustible and Flammable Liquid Storage and Handling practice of the NAG Onshore US
Safety Standard.
2.0 Definitions
None
Each employer shall determine that compressed gas cylinders under his control are in safe
condition to the extent that this can be determined by visual inspection.

Operating supervisors are responsible for ensuring that the provisions of this policy are
implemented and enforced.
5.0 Procedure
5.1 All Compressed Gases
5.1.1 All oxygen/acetylene cutting torches shall have a flashback arrestor installed in each
regulator, and a check valve installed on each torch/hose connection.
5.1.2 All compressed gas cylinders shall be stored with the valve closed and the protective
valve cover screwed on, hand-tight.
5.1.3 Connections and couplings used with compressed gas cylinders shall be rated for the
pressure and material in the cylinders.
5.1.4 Oxygen cylinders will not be stored near highly combustible material, especially oil or
grease, or near reserve stocks of carbide or acetylene.

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. THE
CONTROLLED VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND AT http://ousbuhse.bpweb.bp.com/.
5.1.5 Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel gas cylinders, such as acetylene,
or combustible materials at a minimum distance of 20 feet or by a non-combustible barrier at
least 5 feet high having a fire resistance rating of at least one-half hour.
5.1.6 Compressed gas cylinders shall be legibly marked with either the trade name or chemical
name of their contents. Whenever practical, the marking shall be on the shoulder of the
cylinder.
5.1.7 Compressed gas cylinders shall be stored in a vertical valve-end-up position. Empty
cylinders shall be marked EMPTY, stored with their valves closed, valve caps securely in
place, and separated from full cylinders.
5.1.8 Compressed gas cylinders shall be stored chained to a stationary object or secured in a
specially constructed storage rack, in the upright position, to prevent them from falling over.
5.1.9 Compressed gas cylinders shall be stored away from heat sources in well-ventilated and
dry spaces.
5.1.10 Cylinder valves shall be closed before moving cylinders.
5.1.11 When transporting compressed gas cylinders by a crane or derrick, a cradle, boat, or
similar platform shall be used. Slings or electric magnets shall not be used for this purpose.
5.1.12 Valve protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders from one vertical position to
another.
5.1.13 Cylinders shall not be placed where they might become part of an electric circuit.
5.1.14 Compressed gas cylinders shall be hydrostatically tested every 5 years, with the
following exceptions:
a. Cylinders that have a star stamped next to the last hydrostatic test date may be
tested every 10 years instead of 5, if they meet certain DOT criteria. Check with
your cylinder supplier to see if your cylinder meets this criteria.
b. Lightweight wrapped aluminum cylinders must be hydrostatically tested every 3

years and steel cylinders every 5 years. The dates shall be stamped on the
cylinder itself. These records are maintained by the local supplier of the
cylinders.
5.1.15 Utility stations and other gas cylinders that may be connected must be equipped with
unique couplings to avoid inadvertent connection of the wrong cylinders.
5.1.16 Breathing air cylinders must be refilled in accordance with the Respiratory Protection
practice. Under no circumstances shall breathing air cylinders be refilled with shop or facility
air.
5.2 Compressed Air Only
5.2.1 Compressed air shall only be used for cleaning parts when no other means are
acceptable.

5.2.2 All compressed air outlets used for parts cleaning will be regulated to no greater than 30
psi (pounds per square inch) and a sign will be posted designating so, or a cleaning tip that is
self-regulating to 30 psi must be utilized.
5.2.3 Before using compressed air for parts cleaning, make sure that debris will not be blown
onto someone else. If necessary, cover nearby equipment with a canvas to prevent damage
from debris.
5.2.4 Compressed air shall never be used for cleaning clothes or body parts.
5.2.5 Eye and face protection shall be worn to prevent injury from flying particles.
5.2.6 Before operating an air hose, examine all connections to make sure they are tight and will
not come loose under pressure. Hold the nozzle when turning air on or off.
5.2.7 Do not kink a hose to stop the airflow. Always turn air off at the control valve.
5.2.8 Check hoses regularly to ensure that they are in good condition.
5.2.9 Never use hoses to raise or lower tools.
5.2.10 Hoses shall be coiled and stored when not in use. Hoses shall not be left uncoiled where
they can become a tripping hazard.
5.2.11 Never point a compressed air nozzle at another person.
6.1 OUSBU Safety Standard Document Control and Revision Log
6.2 Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR, Part
1910.101, 166, 167, 168, 170, 242, and 252.
6.3 American National Standards Institute; ANSI 249. 1-1967.
6.4 Department of Transportation; 49 CFR 173.34.

NA Gas Onshore US Health & Safety Practice Page 3.21

Document Title: Confined Space Entry
I. Scope and Application
A. This program contains requirements for practices and procedures to protect

personnel from the hazards of entry into confined spaces. This program addresses
permit-required, non-permit-required and alternative-entry confined spaces and is
intended to:
1. Prevent unauthorized and unintentional employee entry into a confined space,

and
2. To assure safe entry into, and work within confined spaces by authorized
employees.
B. A confined space is a space that is large enough for personnel to enter, has limited or
restricted means of entry or exit, and is not designed for continuous occupancy.
C. A permit-required confined space means a confined space that has one or more of
the following characteristics:
1. It contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere.
2. It contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant.
3. It has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or

asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor that slopes downward
and tapers to a smaller cross- section.
4. It contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
D. Refer to Attachment 3.2-1 for detailed definitions for this section.
II. General
A. Supervisors are responsible for implementing and enforcing the confined space entry
program.
B. The locations permit space program shall be reviewed at least annually unless no
entry is performed within the previous 12-month time period. Each canceled permit
must be reviewed within one year of its cancellation. Revisions shall be made to the
program as necessary to protect employees from the potential hazards of permit
space entries. The annual review of the program (if required) must also include an
on-site evaluation of a confined space entry. Documentation of these reviews shall
be maintained for one year.
C. The facility shall be surveyed to identify confined spaces, which could be entered.
This survey must identify the classification of confined spaces and rationale for the
classification.
Employees shall be informed of the existence and hazards of confined spaces by

posting of Danger signs or by other equally effective means, such as documented
training.
Confined spaces that can be casually or inadvertently entered shall be effectively

guarded to prevent unauthorized entry.
III. Confined Space Entry Permits
A. Work in a confined space will not be allowed until a confined space entry permit or
equivalent is completed and a safety meeting has been held. Permits must have an
expiration time. Permits will not be valid for shifts other than the one in which the
work started.
B. The location shall retain each canceled entry permit for at least one year to facilitate
review of the permit-required confined space entry program. Reviews shall be
retained for one year from the review.
C. Place the completed permit in a transparent envelope, a large ziplock bag, or other
protective holder, at or near the entrance of the confined space for the duration of the
work.
D. The entry permit must contain the following information:
1. The permit space to be entered.
2. The purpose of the entry.
3. The date and authorized duration of the entry permit.
4. The names of authorized entry personnel by a means that will enable the
attendant to quickly and accurately determine which of the authorized
employees are inside the permit space.
5. Personnel, by name, currently serving as attendants.
6. Individual(s), by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, with a space for

the signature or initials of the entry supervisor who originally authorized entry.

7. The hazards of the permit space to be entered.
8. Measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit
space hazards before entry.
9. Acceptable entry conditions. Initial and periodic gas tests accompanied by the
names or initials of the tester(s) and when the tests were run.
10. Rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means for
summoning those services.
11. Communication procedures used by authorized personnel to maintain contact

during entry.
12. A list of equipment such as personal protective equipment, testing,

communications, rescue, and alarm systems required.
13. Any other information that is necessary, given the circumstances of the
particular confined space, in order to ensure employee safety.
14. The identity of any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been
issued to authorize work in the permit space.
E. The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry permit when:
1. The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed, or
2. A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the
permit space.
IV. Exceptions to the Confined Space Entry Permit System Procedures
A. There are two exceptions to the required use of the confined space entry permit
system that are dependent upon the nature of the confined space. The two
exceptions are:
1. Alternative Entry Procedures
2. Permit Space Reclassification (non-permit-required confined spaces)
B. Alternative Entry Procedures
1. Alternative entry procedures may be used when the only hazard in the space is a
potential hazardous atmosphere. These are spaces that:

a. Do not normally contain a hazardous atmosphere, but that might under

certain conditions
b. That employees may enter periodically
2. Examples of situations where alternative entry procedures may be used include,

but are not limited to, diked areas, telecommunication manholes and vaults,
non-connected tanks, and un-vented valve cans.
3. If alternative entry procedures are used, no attendant or supervisor is required,

and rescue provisions need not be used. Confined space training for the entrant
is required. Documentation of the confined space entry is required.
4. Conditions to be met to qualify for the alternative procedures:
a. The only hazard posed by permit space is a potential hazardous

atmosphere.
b. Visual inspection and air monitoring tests confirm that the only potential
hazard is a hazardous atmosphere.
c. If initial entry is necessary to obtain the above data, it shall be performed

under the full requirements of a permit-required confined space entry.
5. Entry must be in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Any condition making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover shall be

eliminated before removing the cover. When entrance covers are removed,
the opening shall be promptly and effectively guarded.
b. Before entry, the internal atmosphere shall be tested with a calibrated

direct-reading instrument at the working level for the following conditions,
in the following order:
(1) Oxygen content: 19.5 - 23.5%
(2) Flammable gases and vapors: <= 10% of Lower Explosive Limit
(LEL)
(3) Potential toxic air contaminants: < OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit
(PEL) or American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
(ACGIH) Threshold Limit Value (TLV), whichever is most restrictive.
c. There may be no hazardous atmosphere within the space whenever any

employee is inside the space.

d. Atmosphere within the space shall be continuously monitored to ensure

that ventilation is adequate. If a hazardous atmosphere is detected during
entry:
(1) Each employee shall leave space immediately.
(2) The space shall be evaluated to determine how the hazardous

atmosphere developed.
(3) Measures must be taken to protect employees from hazardous

atmosphere before any subsequent entry.
The entrant will notify a responsible individual that entry is being

made and the intended duration of the entry. Upon completion of
work in the space, the entrant will inform the responsible individual
that work is complete.
Documentation of pre-entry air monitoring must maintained for all

confined spaces entered using the Alternative Entry Procedures.
C. Permit Space Reclassification
A permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit space if the following apply and
are documented:
1. If there are no actual or potential atmospheric hazards and if all hazards within
permit space are eliminated without entry, space may be reclassified for as long
as the non-atmospheric hazards remain eliminated.
2. Hazards may be eliminated by such actions as purging or inerting tanks/vessels

of contaminants, emptying material from hoppers/bins, and the use of company
lockout/tagout procedures for electrical/mechanical hazards. The control of
atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation does not constitute
elimination of that hazard (it only controls the hazard: the Confined Space
Permit Procedures must be used in such cases).
3. If entry is required to eliminate hazards, it shall be performed under the full

requirements of the permit space program. The space may be reclassified for as
long as the hazards remain eliminated.
4. Entry supervisors will certify in writing that all hazards in permit space have
been eliminated and will make this document available to each entrant. This
certification must contain the date, location of the space, and the signature of the
entry supervisor.

5. If hazards arise in a declassified permit space, employees shall exit and the
employer shall determine whether to continue declassification of the space.
NOTE: A combination of reclassification procedures and alternate entry

procedures (e.g., using lockout/tagout to eliminate a physical hazard, then
continuous forced air to control an atmospheric hazard) may not be used
together. Situations as such must be entered under the permit program.
V. Preparation of Confined Space
A. Before anyone enters the interior of any vessel or tank, it shall be drained, washed,
purged, and flushed to the extent practical.
B. Blind all necessary flanges or disconnect all lines that may carry harmful agents to
ensure that no vapors or fluids can leak into the confined space area. Disconnect and
drain all extraneous sources of harmful agents such as sight glasses, level bridles,
and gauges. Double block and bleed isolation of equipment is not sufficient for
entry into permit-required confined spaces. Lockout and tag all necessary pumps,
motors, or any other energy source to ensure complete isolation of the confined
space. All established electrical lockout/tagout and blinding procedures for
equipment isolation shall be followed.
C. The use of purging and mechanical ventilation shall be considered prior to entering
confined spaces unless conditions prevent its use. Ventilation equipment must be
hazard classed for the area it will be used in; for example, Class I Division II
explosive-proof fans may be required if ventilation is used.
D. Special considerations must be given to tanks that are being purged with an inert gas.
Normal combustible gas indicators will not accurately measure the combustible
gas in a tank being purged with an inert gas, such as nitrogen. Consult the HSE
representative for the availability of specialized monitoring equipment.
E. Portable or fixed Danger signs must be posted at all points of entry to the confined
space which may not be safe for unprotected entry, or where a hazardous atmosphere
may accumulate. Signs shall state: Confined Space - Entry by Permit Only.

VI. Testing Confined Space Atmospheres
A. Confined space atmospheres must be tested before entry is allowed. Tests shall be
conducted in this order: first for oxygen content, second for flammable gases or
vapors, and then for toxic vapors and gases.
B. Tests for Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) shall be done prior to
entry into a tank or vessel if there are no previous NORM tests on file. The results of
these tests shall be sent to the local HSE representative.
C. In such instances, where entry is required to test the atmosphere, the individual
conducting the test shall wear an SCBA (self-contained breathing apparatus) or
airline positive pressure respirator with egress bottle. The Respiratory Protection
Program shall be followed when using respiratory equipment.
D. All equipment used for atmospheric testing shall be calibrated and operationally
checked prior to use according to the manufacturers specifications. The
atmospheric tests and operational checks that precede the issuing of a permit NOTE:
be done as close as practical to the time the work is to begin and recorded on the
entry permit.
1. Oxygen content: The percentage of oxygen for unprotected entry into a

confined space shall be no less than 19.5 percent and not greater than 23.5
percent. The oxygen level must be monitored before the flammability test is
conducted.
2. Entry will not be allowed if the LEL is greater than 10 percent.
3. Entry will not be allowed if measurements of toxic materials exceed the OSHA
PEL or BP-adopted TLVs, whichever is more stringent.
4. Direct Reading Instruments are the only units approved for confined space entry
jobs. Contact your HSE representative if you have questions.
E. Those confined spaces that do not require respiratory protection based on the test
results shall be continuously monitored with an oxygen meter during the
performance of work. The area must be evacuated immediately if the oxygen
content falls below 19.5 percent by volume if proper respiratory equipment is not
being used. The area must also be evacuated immediately if the oxygen content rises
above 23.5 percent by volume.
F. Continuous monitoring shall also be conducted for toxic gases and combustible
gases (LEL) that may be released during the course of work. Continuous monitoring
for toxic and combustible gases is mandatory for all confined space work, regardless
of the respiratory protection provided. The area must be evacuated if the

combustible gases rise above 10 percent LEL. The area must be ventilated to ensure
the LEL is at or below 10 percent before re-entry is permitted.
VII. Safety Equipment
A. To ensure safe entry conditions, the location will provide, maintain, and properly use
the following equipment if required:
1. Direct reading gas testing equipment for (a) oxygen content, (b) flammable
gases and vapors, and (c) potential toxic contaminants
2. Any necessary ventilating equipment
3. Communications equipment as required
4. Any required personal protective equipment such as self- contained breathing

apparatus (SCBAs)
5. Sufficient lighting equipment for both safe work and quick exits
6. Barriers and shields necessary to protect workers from external hazards
7. Any needed entry or exit equipment such as ladders
8. Adequate rescue and emergency equipment to effect a rescue and offer

immediate first aid and CPR
9. Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from permit
spaces
VIII. Duties of Authorized Entrants
A. The location shall ensure that all authorized entrants:
1. Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on how
exposure might occur, signs and symptoms of exposure, and their consequences
2. Are properly trained in the tasks and procedures they are required to perform
3. Use equipment properly
4. Communicate with the attendant as necessary to monitor the status of the space
and alert them of the need to exit the space
5. Alert the attendant whenever an entrant recognizes any warning sign or

symptom of exposure to a dangerous situation or detects a prohibited condition

6. Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:
a. An order is given to evacuate by the attendant or the entry supervisor
b. The entrant recognizes any warning sign of a dangerous situation or

symptom of exposure
c. The entrant detects a prohibited condition
d. An evacuation alarm is activated
IX. Duties of Attendants
A. The location shall ensure that each attendant:
1. Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the
mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of exposure.
2. Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure to authorized

entrants.
3. Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized personnel in the permit

space.
4. Remains outside the permit space until relieved by another attendant.
5. Communicates with authorized personnel as necessary to monitor entrant status

and to alert them of the need to evacuate the space.
6. Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe to

remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit
space immediately under any of the following conditions:
a. If the attendant detects a prohibited condition
b. If the attendant detects any behavioral effects of a hazardous exposure
c. If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the
entrants
d. If the attendant becomes unable to effectively and safely perform all the
duties required of him

7. Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant

determines that authorized personnel may need assistance to escape from permit
space hazards.
8. Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a

permit space while entry is underway:
a. Warns the unauthorized person to stay away from the permit space
b. Advises the unauthorized person that they must exit immediately if they
have entered the permit space
c. Informs the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized

persons have entered the permit space
9. Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the locations rescue procedure.
10. Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendants primary duty to
monitor and protect the authorized entrants.
X. Duties of Entry Supervisors
A. The location shall ensure that each entry supervisor:
1. Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the
mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of exposure.
2. Verifies that all tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all
procedures and equipment specified by the permit are in place before endorsing
the permit and allowing entry to begin.
3. Verifies that all persons involved in permit entry are properly trained and
competent in their assigned duties.
4. Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning
them are operable.
5. Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit
space during entry operations.
6. Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is

transferred and at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed
within the space, that entry operations remain consistent with terms of the entry
permit and that acceptable entry conditions are maintained.

7. Terminates the entry and cancels the permit when the entry operations specified
by the permit have been completed or when a condition not allowed under the
entry permit arises in or near the permit space.
XI. Rescue and Emergency Services
A. The following requirements apply to locations that have employees enter permit
spaces to perform rescue services:
1. The location shall ensure that each member of the rescue service is provided
with, and is trained to use properly, personal protective equipment and rescue
equipment necessary for making rescues from permit spaces.
2. Each member of the rescue team shall be trained to perform his/her assigned
rescue duties and each member shall also receive the training required of
authorized entrants.
3. Each member of the rescue service shall practice making permit space rescues
using dummies, mannequins, or actual persons and shall use representative
spaces which with respect to configuration, opening size, and accessibility,
simulate the types of permit spaces from which rescue is to be performed. This
training must be completed at least once every twelve months.
4. Each member of the rescue service shall be trained in basic first aid and in
cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR). At least one member of the rescue
service shall hold current certification in first aid and CPR.
B. If the location arranges to have outside persons perform permit space rescue, the
location shall:
1. Inform the rescue service of the hazards they may confront.
2. Provide the rescue service with access to all permit spaces from which rescue
may be necessary so that they can develop appropriate plans and practice rescue
operations.
C. To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be used, unless the
retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute
to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness with a retrieval
line attached at the center of the entrants back, near shoulder level or above the
entrants head. Wristlets may be used in lieu of the full body harness if the
employer can demonstrate that the use of a full body harness is infeasible or

creates a hazard and that the use of wristlets is the safest and most effective
alternative.
NOTE: Use of wristlets is the least desirable method of lowering or raising of

personnel, and shall be considered only in extreme circumstances.
2. The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical device or
fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as
soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical
device shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spaces
more than 5 feet deep.
D. If an injured entrant is exposed to a hazardous substance, the MSDS or written

information shall be made available to the medical personnel treating the exposed
entrant.
XII. Confined Space Entry Cancellation Procedures
Upon termination of entry and cancellation of the confined space entry permit, the entry
supervisor shall ensure that:
A. Personnel are out of the confined space and accounted for.
B. Equipment has been removed from the space.
C. Entry portals are restored to operating condition.
D. Inlet and outlet piping is restored to service.
E. Safety and automation systems are restored to normal service.
F. The confined space entry permit is removed from the work area.
G. Affected personnel (BP and/or contractors) are debriefed to identify any deficiencies
or hazards encountered during the entry. The debriefing and any deficiencies
identified shall be documented on the canceled permit for future review.
XIII. Contractor Requirements
A. When a location arranges to have contractors perform work that involves permit
space entry, the location shall:
1. Inform the contractor that the workplace contains permit spaces and that permit
space entry is allowed only through compliance with a permit space program
meeting the requirements of BPs Onshore U.S. program.

2. Inform the contractor of the elements, including the hazards identified and the
locations experience with the space, that make the space in question a permit
space.
3. Inform the contractor of any precautions or procedures that the location has
implemented for the protection of employees in or near permit spaces where
contractor personnel will be working.
4. Coordinate entry operations with the contractor when both the locations
personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces.
5. Debrief the contractor at the conclusion of the entry operations regarding the
permit space program followed and regarding any hazards confronted or created
in permit spaces during entry operations.
B. In addition to complying with the permit space requirements that apply to upstream
employees, each contractor who is retained to perform permit space entry operations
shall:
1. Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards and entry
operations from the entry location management.
2. Coordinate entry operations with upstream personnel when both contractor and
upstream personnel will be working in or near permit spaces.
3. Inform upstream management of the permit space program that the contractor
will follow and of any hazards confronted or created in permit spaces, either
through a debriefing or during the entry operation.

XIV. Training
A. Employees must be trained in the relevant aspects of their assigned duties regarding
confined spaces when:
1. First assigned confined space duties.
2. There is a change in assigned duties.
3. There is a change in permit space operations that presents a hazard about which
an employee has not previously been trained.
4. The entry supervisor or his designee believes that there are deviations from
acceptable entry conditions or that an employee demonstrates a lack of training
in the permit space entry procedures.
B. The training shall include, as a minimum:
1. Proficiency in the specific duties assigned
2. The type of confined space to be entered
3. Chemical or physical hazards involved
4. Work practices and techniques
5. Atmospheric testing procedures
6. Personal protective equipment to be used
7. Rescue procedures (Refer to XI, Rescue and Emergency Services.)
C. All training shall be documented. The trainer(s) must sign or initial the training
record. Records must be readily available for inspection by appropriate personnel.
XV. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29 CFR 1910.119(j), 1910.146.
B. ANSI 2117.1 Safety requirements for working in tanks and other confined spaces.
C. gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
D. gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.
Attachment 3.2-1

Definitions for Confined Space Entry
A. Attendant
An individual stationed outside one or more permit spaces who monitors authorized
personnel (entrants) and who performs all attendants duties assigned in the locations permit
space program.
B. Authorized Entrant
Personnel (may be BP or contract) who are authorized by the location to enter a permit space.
C. Engulfment
The surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely divided (flowable)
solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the respiratory
system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by strangulation,
constriction, or crushing.
D. Entry
The action by which a person passes through an opening into a permit-required confined
space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have
occurred as soon as any part of the entrants body breaks the plane of an opening into the
space.
E. Entry Permit (Permit)

The written or printed document that is provided by the employer to allow and control entry
into a permit space and that contains the information specified under Topic III, Confined
Space Entry Permits of this program.
F. Entry Supervisor
The person responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit
space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for
terminating entry as required by this program. An entry supervisor also may serve as an
attendant or as an authorized entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped as
required by this program for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry supervisor
may be passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry operation. The
entry supervisor will be named in writing on the entry permit. The entry supervisor is not
necessarily a BP foreman. He/she may be any properly trained person, and could be a
contractor.

G. Hazardous Atmosphere
An atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of
ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from a permit space), injury, or acute illness
from:
1. Flammable gases, vapors, or mists above 10% of the lower flammable limit
2. Airborne combustible dusts at a concentration that meets or exceeds its lower flammable
limit
3. Atmospheric oxygen concentrations below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent
4. Atmospheric concentrations containing a toxic substance above the OSHA or ACGIH

recommended exposure levels, whichever is most stringent
5. Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health
H. Isolation
The process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely protected
against the release of energy and material into the space by such means as:
1. Blanking or blinding
2. Misaligning and capping or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts
3. Lockout or tagout of all sources of energy
4. Blocking or disconnecting all mechanical linkages
I. Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere

An atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen by volume.
J. Oxygen Enriched Atmosphere

An atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent oxygen by volume.
K. Permit System
The employers written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for entry and for
returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.
L. Prohibited Condition
Any condition in a permit space that is not allowed by the permit during the period when
entry is authorized.
M. Rescue Service
The personnel designated to rescue employees from permit spaces.

Page 1 of 7
Document Type: Health, Safety, Security, Environmental (HSSE)

Document Title: Contractor HSSE Performance Evaluation Practice
DW SPU HSSE Convener

Authority: NAG HSSE Director Custodian:
NGL BU HSSE Manager
Issue Date: 09/01/2005 Scope of Application: NAG &GOM SPUs/NGL BU

Revision Date: 06/09/2005 Control Tier: 2
Next Review Date: 09/01/2006
1.0 Purpose/Scope
The purpose of this Practice is to ensure that Contractor operations are conducted with adequate Health, Safety,
Security, Environmental (HSSE) systems and practices. This Practice establishes how BP (hereinafter referred to as
Company) evaluates and reinforces Contractor HSSE performance improvement. Company will review Contractor
HSSE performance and practices before establishing a contract and commencing Contractor operations.
Company Business Units using this Practice include North America Gas North and South, GOM Deepwater
Development, GOM Deepwater Production, GoM Deepwater Exploration, and Natural Gas Liquids.
2.0 Definitions
The following definitions apply to this Practice.
Definitions
Real estate owned or leased by Company where Company is the
Company Site operator of record. Company Site may comprise multiple work
locations.
Real estate not owned or leased by Company where a contract
Company Project Site
stipulates that work performed is under the auspices of this Practice.
Site/On-Site Company Site or Company Project Site.
Any firm that provides people, material, service or equipment to
Supplier
Company.
Contractor A Supplier that provides services to Company.
A Supplier that provides tangible material or equipment. Company
Vendor defines any Vendor that provides On-Site services other than
delivery as a Contractor.
Any Supplier/Contractor that is required to have PPE while engaged
On-Site Supplier/Contractor
in work On-Site.
Off-Site Any Supplier that provides Company with people, material, service
Supplier/Contractor/Vendor or equipment that is not an On-Site Supplier/Contractor.
Contractor Performance A SPU/BU oversight team that monitors HSSE performance for all
Evaluation Team (CPET) Suppliers. See section 4.1 for further responsibilities.
A Contractor that provides hands off - no physical work on Site
Consultant
administrative or technical support to Company.

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING.
Page 2 of 7
Definitions
A Contractor that works On-Site accompanied by Company
BP Accompanied Contractor
Responsible Party.
The individual with delegated authority to act on behalf of
Company Responsible Party
Company.
Sub-Contractor A firm that performs work for a Contractor On-Site.
A Contractor whose risk level based on service line and historical
High Impact Contractor work performed creates a relatively higher HSSE and/or business
risk to Company.

All Contractors working On-Site will be accountable for compliance with BP Health, Safety, Security and
Environmental Requirements for Contractors (HSSE Requirements) as detailed in the contract between Company
and Contractor. Company will consider HSSE performance a critical factor when selecting Contractors.
HSSE Requirements includes all applicable federal, state/provincial, maritime and local statutes, regulations,
enforceable agreements, agency orders, permits, and contract documents. In addition, HSSE Requirements include
specific Company requirements.
Company may require participation in performance reviews and verification assessments. Company may further
require development of applicable HSSE management system bridging documents.
Contractors are accountable to ensure that their Sub-Contractors comply with HSSE Requirements when Sub-
Contractors are On-Site. Sub-Contractor incidents will be attributed to Contractors total recordable incident rate
(TRIR).

Each SPU/BU will further determine and establish the key roles and responsibilities for Contractor/Supplier
Performance Management.
4.1 Contractor Performance Evaluation Team (CPET)

Company may retain Contractors who meet business performance expectations, including TRIR and HSSE
Requirements, who have an approved Management of Change (MOC) process, or who are BP Accompanied
Contractors. Each SPU/BU will establish an appropriate oversight body for evaluating and improving Contractor
HSSE performance.
For example, Company SPU/BUs may elect to put in place a Contractor HSSE Performance Evaluation Team
(CPET) to provide visible and continuous support to Contractor HSSE performance improvement efforts. CPET
provides counsel to the Sector Teams, Contractor HSSE Performance Coordinators and Contractor HSSE
Technologists, who administer Contractor HSSE performance improvement efforts day-to-day. CPETs role is
advisory: it provides critical HSSE input to Sector Team leaders and other Company Responsible Parties who have
accountability for making decisions related to Contractor HSSE Status and Contractor use.
CPETs membership comprises both line (e.g., team leaders, asset/SPU/BU tags, etc.) and functional (e.g., PSCM,
HSSE, Legal, Communications, etc.) representatives, with membership changing as needs change. The Team will
meet regularly to organize and provide HSSE input to the Sector Teams, to operating personnel, and to Company
management. Generally, SPU/BU management will elect to have a line representative and the HSSE Manager co-
lead the Team.
The following issues and activities are likely areas for CPETs action and intervention: assessing Contractor risk;
reviewing verification protocol, schedules, and results, reviewing input provided by other committees, monitoring

Page 3 of 7
HSSE interventions by sector teams; reviewing HSSE Requirements, planning symposia, managing website(s),
suggesting HSSE Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and recommending action to improve this Practice and
Contractor HSSE performance overall.
CPET members are accountable to communicate Contractor HSSE performance issues to their SPU/BUs and to
CPET. CPET members are generally HSSE leaders or stakeholders who provide direction to Contractors within
their SPU/BUs.
5.0 Procedure/Process
5.1 HSSE Status of Contractors
System for Indicating Contractor HSSE Status
Company has established the following system for indicating Contractor HSSE Status following the standard
Company HSSE evaluation. The status is available in databases such as the Supplier Management System (SMS) /
Vendor Management System (VMS).
Contractor HSSE Status

2.0 TRIR On-Site (based on 12 month rolling average) and meets
Green/Approved
all other HSSE Requirements.
Yellow/Conditionally 2.0 TRIR On-Site (based on 12 month rolling average) but does
Approved not meet HSSE Requirements.
Yellow/New Conditionally New Contractor for whom no On-Site TRIR data is available but
Approved who meets all other HSSE Requirements.
> 2.0 TRIR On-Site (based on 12 month rolling average) or does not
RED/NOT APPROVED
meet HSSE Requirements.
> 2.0 TRIR On-Site or does not meet other HSSE Requirements.
RED Approved MOC Only Use of this Contractor is allowed only with an MOC approved by
Company Responsible Party enabling use under specific criteria.
New Contractor for whom no TRIR On-Site data is available and
who does not meet all other HSSE Requirements. Use of this
RED New Under MOC
Contractor is allowed only with an MOC approved by Company
Responsible Party enabling use under specific criteria.
Grey/No Status Contractor HSSE status not yet determined or not available.
HSSE verification is not required (e.g., BP Accompanied, Vendor,
Not Required
or Off-Site Contractors).
Clarifying Notes for Assigning Status
Each BU will determine how to sum the Contractor hours for calculating TRIR On-Site (OSHA formula).
Company may assign a Red/Not Approved Status to a Contractor for whom verification results indicate
failure to meet HSSE Requirements.
Company may at its sole discretion assign a Red/Not Approved Status to a Contractor when Company
determines continued use of the Contractor constitutes an unacceptable level of HSSE risk (e.g., Contractor
incurs fatality while working in non-Company operations).
Further Guidelines Related to HSSE Status

Page 4 of 7
Green/Approved
Contractor subject to verification based on incident occurrence and/or risk assessment.
Yellow/Conditionally Approved/New Conditionally Approved
Company requires that Contractor achieve 2.0 TRIR On-Site and meet HSSE Requirements within a 12
month period of above classification. Contractors failing to meet this expectation will be reclassified to
Red/Not Approved.
Company may, from time to time, verify Contractors progress toward meeting HSSE Requirements.
Before changing Contractor status to Green/Approved, each SPU/BU will determine the level of field
verification that must take place.
RED/NOT APPROVED
Company Responsible Party who requests to use a Red/Not Approved Contractor must obtain an approved
MOC. Each SPU/BU will establish its MOC approval process.
MOC will explicitly state under what circumstances (including scope of work), where and for what period
of time the Contractor may perform work On-Site.
All Company SPU/BUs operating under this Practice will classify any Contractor Red/Not Approved when
Company determines that continued use of the Contractor constitutes an unacceptable level of HSSE risk.
Any SPU/BU utilizing this Practice will advise all other SPU/BUs operating under this Practice of any
Contractor moving to a Red/Not Approved status.
Before changing status of a Red/Not Approved Contractor to Green/Approved or Yellow/Conditionally
Approved, each BU operating under this Practice will determine the level of field verification that must
take place.
When circumstances arise that change Contractor status to Red/Not Approved, Company Responsible
Party will determine whether work ceases.
Grey/No Status
BP Accompanied Contractor
From time to time, there are instances when a short duration or non-routine Contractor is needed to perform work
but the Company cannot conduct the typical HSSE performance evaluation due to time constraints or business
reasons. Contractor approved to work in this instance is a BP Accompanied Contractor.
HSSE Requirements do not apply in the typical way to a BP Accompanied Contractor. Rather, when hiring a
Contractor under these circumstances, the Company Responsible Party assesses HSSE risk and develops the
appropriate HSSE plan (including specific HSSE requirements) to mitigate that risk. Every HSSE plan requires that
a Company Responsible Party accompanies the Contractor while On-Site if the Contractor is required to wear PPE.
Company may employ a Contractor categorized as BP Accompanied Contractor when no approved Contractor is
available to perform the required work. Each SPU/BU may set further guidelines or requirements for employing BP
Accompanied Contractors.
Contractors that BP uses for emergency purposes may also be BP Accompanied Contractors.
General/Other Guidelines Related to HSSE Status
HSSE Status as outlined in this Practice does not automatically determine eligibility for participation in supply
opportunities (for example: bidding, tendering). The Company will evaluate Contractor HSSE performance as part
of the procurement process.

Page 5 of 7
5.2 Management of Change (MOC) and Use of Red/Not Approved Contractors
To foster an incident free workplace, appropriate communication concerning change is critical. For any variation
from general procedures, Company uses a MOC process. With respect to this Practice for Contractor HSSE
Performance Evaluation, all SPU/BUs operating under the Practice will utilize a standardized MOC process
whenever a SPU/BU employs a Red/Not Approved Contractor. In every instance of this kind, the Company
Responsible Party must prepare and obtain approval of an MOC, prior to Red/Not Approved Contractor
commencing work On-Site. The standardized MOC process contains the following elements, among others:
Electronic access to MOC utility across all SPU/BUs operating under this Practice
Detailed delineation of roles, actions, accountabilities, and timelines for any activity sets that Company
Responsible Party(ies), Contractor, and Sub-Contractors must perform prior to commencing work On-Site
An HSSE Action/Job Plan
5.3 Contractor HSSE Risk Management
Company continually evaluates Contractor HSSE risk as one element of overall risk assessment. Company
SPU/BUs operating under this Practice use various tools to measure the relative HSSE risk of Contractors and to
take steps to eliminate or manage that risk. Risk assessment and decisions as a result of that assessment typically
engage Company line and functional staff. Company assessments of Contractor HSSE risk are openly shared with
the Contractor, and risk mitigation planning is generally a joint exercise between Company and Contractor.
Company retains the right to stop employing any Contractor whose risk profile/risk mitigation plan does not meet
Company expectation. Generally, conformance to HSSE Requirements will be a significant factor in assessing
Contractor risk.
5.4 Contractor HSSE Performance: Company Monitoring Process

Company may utilize internal and external auditors to verify Contractor compliance with HSSE Requirements.
Each SPU/BU will determine the type and frequency of self-assurance/verification and will assign appropriate
assurance/verification coordinators to manage the monitoring process. Company will communicate verification
results to Contractor and will use results to assign HSSE Status.
Contractor is solely accountable and responsible for ensuring that Contractor and its Sub-Contractors comply with
HSSE Requirements and for improving HSSE performance in a manner consistent with the contract between
Company and Contractor.

Page 6 of 7
6.0 Key Documents, References, and Tools
Company SPU/BUs operating under this Practice rely on a variety of key documents, references, and tools to carry
out the intent of the Practice. While the majority of items described in this section are common across the BUs
operating under this Practice, certain items are unique and customized to individual locations (e.g., Safe Practices
Manuals, Sector Team Roles and Responsibilities, and CPET roles). Generally, the HSSE Manager and/or the
Contractor HSSE Performance Coordinator provide access to the appropriate key documents, references, and tools
for their respective BU.
6.1 Key Documents

HSSE Requirements Document that specifies the HSSE requirements for Contractors and its Sub-
Contractors performing work at Company Sites and at Company Project Sites.
Management of Change (MOC) Document authorizing a variation from standard requirements and
process. If Company employs a Red/Not Approved Contractor, Company Responsible Party(ies) will do
so only after identifying HSSE risks and undertaking mitigating actions.
Protocol for Monitoring Contractor HSSE Performance Company document that specifies what
Company will monitor and verify when evaluating Contractor compliance with HSSE Requirements.
6.2 References
The BP Golden Rules of Safety Company standards for safeguarding personal safety and the key
controls and procedures that the workforce must comply with in the workplace.
Getting HSE Right Company framework for managing HSE risk: getting HSE right (gHSEr).
Company Safety/Safe Practices Manuals Company reference and guidance manuals related to
Company safety and industry-established best practices.
SPU/BU C-EMS List Specific Contractors will have a fit-for-purpose Environmental Management
System (C-EMS) for the work or specific issue that poses a significant impact to the environment. The
C-EMS will incorporate planning for compliance, performing compliance tasks, and checking for
compliance with Environmental Requirements and the C-EMS, as well as implementation of corrective
actions.
Sector Team Roles and Responsibilities The key roles and responsibilities defined for those involved in
sector management (e.g., leadership team tag, sector lead, PU rep, SCM rep, HSSE rep, etc.). These are the
individuals who will provide the raw data by which performance is measured.
6.3 Tools
Advanced Safety Audit (ASA) ASA is a management tool that provides leaders a mirror reflection of
how their HSSE expectations are being translated into action in the field and industrial facilities. ASA is
used in facilities around the world where excellent safety performance was already the norm. The ASA
technique focuses on observations of people working and then engages them in a non-threatening
conversation about the safety aspects of his or her work. The end result is improved safety performance as
a result of recognizing and correcting unsafe conditions and behaviors
Supplier/Vendor Management System (SMS/VMS) Databases that contain Contractor information,
including HSSE Status.
Contractor HSSE Information Databases Company or third party databases (e.g., PEC and ISNet) that
provide Contractor statistical and HSSE information. Data typically supplements Companys knowledge
about Contractor HSSE performance.

Page 7 of 7
Traction Company database that allows line personnel to enter data about incidents, verifications, or
reviews, including close out of actions by Company Responsible Parties.
Supplier Hierarchy Diagram Diagram that indicates how the Company categorizes firms that provide
people, material, service, or equipment to Company.
Risk Tool Refers generally to instrument(s) Company SPU/BUs may use to assess relative level of
Supplier risk.
RASCI Chart Chart that defines sector team Responsibilities, Accountabilities, Supportive,
Consultative, and Informative roles with respect to this practice.
Frequently Asked Questions Set(s) of questions and answers related to Supplier performance
management, Contractor HSSE performance, or other topics, posted on Company websites, or otherwise
available to Company and Contractor employees.
Contractor External Website Website link that provides useful information and tools to enhance
Company and Contractor relationships.
Revision Log
Note: Changes must be approved by the NAG HSSE Director (authority), the NGL BU HSSE Manager, and the
DW SPU HSSE Convener.
Revision Date Authority Custodian Revision Details

Stan Garner
06/09/05 Ruth Germany-Bice New Practice for NAG/GOM/NGL/NAX SPUs
Dick Steward

Control of Work (CoW) Policy Page 1 of 20
Control of Work (CoW) POLICY

1.0 Purpose/Scope
This Policy applies to North America Gas (NAG) Onshore US and Canada operations. The
primary intent of this Policy is to set forth a formal approach for BP employees and
contractors to manage risk associated with control of work activities. This Policy also clearly
identifies and defines the Person In Charge (PIC) at any particular work site.
This Policy covers the means of safely controlling construction, maintenance, demolition,
remediation, operating tasks and similar work activities and applies to the workforce and BP
premises. Routine activities, such as taking readings, gauging tanks and operational
changes within defined parameters are covered by basic operator qualifications. These
routine activities shall be identified by the Operation Center and are outside the scope of
this Policy.
In addition, it is the intent of this Policy to promote adoption of like or equal in nature
standards, by companies working for BP on non-BP premises. BP will endeavor to hire
contractors with Control of Work (CoW) programs that meet or exceed this Policy and will
encourage those who do not have such a program to adopt one.
This Policy and all associated Control of Work (CoW) Practices will be issued in accordance
with a Document Control Management System (DCMS). Any changes to or proposed
deviations from this Policy must be recommended by the Control of Work Technical
Authority and approved by the Single Point of Accountability (SPA).
2.0 Definitions (See Appendix 1)

Link to Appendix 1
3.0 Control of Work Standard Requirements

1. A written Policy shall exist describing the Control of Work process.
2. All identified roles within the Control of Work Policy and associated procedures shall have
defined accountabilities.
3. All persons involved in the Control of Work process shall be appropriately trained and
competent to carry out their roles.
4. Planning and scheduling of work shall identify individual tasks and their interaction.
5. Tasks shall not be conducted without being risk assessed.
6. Before conducting work that involves confined space entry, work on energy systems,
ground disturbance, hot work or other hazardous activities, a permit shall be obtained.
Document#: K0000002586 Print Date: 23 October 2007 8:56 AM

Revision Date: 14Nov2006
7. The scope, hazards, controls and mitigations shall be communicated in writing and signed
off by all involved in the task.
8. All ongoing work requiring a permit shall be regularly monitored and managed by a
responsible person.
9. The work site shall be left in a safe condition on completion or interruption of work.
10. The Control of Work process shall be subject to a program of regular auditing.
11. Internal and external lessons learned that impact the Control of Work process shall be
captured, incorporated, and shared.
12. The Control of Work Policy and associated procedures shall make it clear to everyone that
they have the obligation and the authority to stop unsafe work.
3.1 A written policy shall exist describing the Control of Work process.
Intent: To ensure that the Control of Work Policy and associated procedures have
been issued in accordance with a Document Control Management System and that
any changes or developments are subject to a formal Management of Change control
process before authorization and adoption.
3.2 All identified roles within the Control of Work Policy and associated
procedures shall have defined accountabilities.
Intent: To ensure that all roles and responsibilities required to operate the Control of
Work Policy and associated procedures are identified, articulated to the designated
persons and that those persons are competent, authorized and that auditable
evidence is available.
3.2.1 BP and contractor employees working on BP Premises will:
Comply with the Policy.

Stop the job if it appears potentially unsafe.
Attend training on the Policy and associated practices/procedures, as appropriate.
Demonstrate understanding and acceptance of their accountabilities under the Policy.
Participate in/review Risk Assessments upon request.
Conduct a site inspection prior to commencing work.
Assist in the identification of deficiencies in the work process and help identify possible
improvements.
Actively monitor the worksite and surroundings for changes that might impact the
performance of the task or affect the safety of those involved in the task.
Be aware of Emergency Response Plans.
Report all allegations/occurrences of unsafe work.
Participate in incident investigations if requested.

3.2.2 Business Unit Leader will:
Designate the SPA for the Control of Work Policy, and provide the resources necessary
to support the implementation of this Policy.
3.2.3 Performance Unit Leaders and Asset Managers and Wells Program Managers
will:
Provide resources necessary to support the implementation of this Policy within

their areas of responsibilities.
Confirm the implementation is completed in their area of responsibility.
3.2.4 Single Point Accountable (SPA) person for the Control of Work
Policy will:
Have ultimate responsibility and accountability for overall performance and content of
the Control of Work Policy and associated practices/procedures.
Be responsible for authorizing and approving changes to the Policy and associated
practices/procedures, and for approving all categories of permits, and will confirm that
monitoring of compliance with the Policy is occurring under a program of regular audits.
Access knowledgeable experts within the company as required.
Have the skills to make decisions in areas of ambiguity and conflict, while maintaining
conformance to BPs Core Values.
Appoint a Technical Authority for the Control of Work Policy (TA/CoW) with the
necessary competencies.
3.2.5 Technical Authority (TA) for the Control of Work (CoW) Policy will:
Supervise the overall implementation of, and conduct operations pursuant to, the Policy.
Brief the SPA on issues arising under the Policy.
Recommend proposed changes to the Policy as necessary.
Be a resource for the NAG SPU in interpreting and answering questions about the Policy.
Participate in investigation of selected incidents and in the generation of appropriate lessons
learned.
Have Management of Change (MOC) and incident investigation training and experience in the
relevant subject matter areas.
Be a required signatory of MOC's regarding Control of Work to the extent the issues therein
do not fall within the domain of another TA.
Be a coach who will assist Operation Centers (OCs) with continued implementation of
the Control of Work process.
TA/CoW will be registered with the Lessons Learned database and will distribute or
advance any necessary changes to the Control of Work program. Link to Lessons
Learned Library

3.2.6 Operation Center Managers (OCMs), Wells Team Leaders, and

Major Projects Managers will:
Appoint and maintain an accurate list of Area Authorities (AA), Issuing Authorities (IA)
and Performing Authorities (PA). They may be members of BP or contractor work force
demonstrating required competencies.
Provide the resources necessary to implement and operate under the Policy.
Establish a process that clearly communicates what procedures and policies will be
followed for the transfer of Control of Work within work groups (e.g. a board or
electronic system showing all work activity for the day).
Establish a process for identifying a Person in Charge (PIC) of each worksite subject to
this Policy.
Enable the required training and assessments of the AA, IA and PA.
Be familiar with the intent of the provisions of the Control of Work Policy.
Confirm processes are in place to provide sufficient resources to carry out the intended
scope of work.
Confirm processes are in place to conduct suitable and sufficient assessment of risk
with regard to the health and safety of all involved personnel.
Be responsible for raising proposed MOC requests to the TA, and for confirming that
monitoring and auditing of Policy compliance is occurring as required by the Standard
and Policy.
Be competent in Job Safety Environmental Analysis (JSEA), Risk Assessment, MOC,
BPs Golden Rules of Safety, and all associated permit practices.
Confirm that personnel receive the necessary training and are assessed as competent,
and that the Control of Work register is updated as needed.
Confirm that appropriate lessons learned are captured, incorporated and shared with
appropriate OC and BU personnel (BP and Contractors).
3.2.7 The Health, Safety, Security & Environmental (HSSE) Monitor will:
Conduct assessments/audits and provide documentation as according to section 3.10.

Review and make recommendations for improvements on the application of the Control
of Work Policy.
Communicate results of assessments/audits to Site and NAG SPU Management.
3.2.8 Area Authority (AA)
The AA is the person appointed by the OCM or Wells Team Leader for confirming all
work activities conducted are consistent with the Control of Work Policy and
associated practices and permit requirements. In the case of major projects, the
Project Manager, in consultation with the OCM or Wells Team Leader, will assign the
AA.

The AA will:
Authorize all work activities within their designated area of responsibility.
Ensure appropriate permits are issued, closed, and filed per local operating
requirements.
Confirm competencies of BP and contractor personnel performing regular job duties.
Confirm work is appropriately planned and scheduled
Identify a Person in Charge (PIC) for each worksite prior to commencement of activity
and approve any replacements.
Assign a competent Issuing Authority (IA) and/or Performing Authority (PA) for each
work site and/or activity.
Confirm competency of the Issuing Authority (IA) and workforce involved in a task
consistent with the planned scope of work.
Confirm with the IA that all appropriate control measures have been, or will be, put in
place prior to commencement of activity.
Require that the IA and site work group perform a Risk Assessment and agree that
needed risk mitigation has occurred and that the work can proceed safely.
Contribute to lessons learned where appropriate to support improvement in the work
process or in hazard assessment.
Be trained as per, Section 3.3, Table 3.3.1.
3.2.9 Issuing Authority (IA):
The IA is the person appointed by the OCM or Wells Team Leader and assigned by
the AA for issuing permits consistent with all associated practice and permit
requirements. In the case of major projects, the Project Manager, in consultation
with the AA, will assign the IA.
The IA will:
Be responsible for the issuance and closure of permits in their area of competency, e.g.,
hot work, confined space entry, ground disturbance, lifting, and energy isolation work
permits.
Be on site for permit issuance and then as required by the specific permit practice.
Review with all site personnel a site-specific emergency response plan.
Coordinate with the PIC and maintain full knowledge of all work in progress in the area
concerned, including any work on the site that is under someone elses
authority/control, e.g., SIMOPS.
Communicate with the AA about the issuance and closure of permits.
Confirm that all site personnel involved in a work activity are competent and correctly
outfitted for the work they will perform.
Confirm that workers have clear understanding of the scope of work, hazards, controls
and mitigations.
Confirm that the correct tools and equipment are available and appropriate certifications
and/or inspections are reviewed or made as appropriate.

Confirm that required permits are in place and that work undertaken on site is
consistent with, and confined to, the original scope of work.
Prepare lessons learned where appropriate to support continuous improvement efforts
and share these with the AA and other personnel as they deem appropriate.
3.2.10 Performing Authority (PA)
The PA is the person who has been assigned by the AA to be responsible for
activities carried out on the work site under the Control of Work Policy and is
accountable to the IA/AA for the safe delivery of all work activities. The PA may be
performing a task or may be supervising a group that is performing a task. In special
cases the PA may also be the IA if competent in the permit practice and requirements
in question.
The PA will:
Confirm that non-essential personnel are kept a safe distance from the work activity.
Confirm with the oncoming PA that adequate handovers take place at shift and crew
change periods.
Accept and sign authorized permits for work activity being performed.
Confirm that the following have been clearly established, communicated and
understood: a process for the transfer of Control of Work between work groups; what
procedures and policies will be followed e.g., what permit tracking system will be used;
and who is in charge.
Participate in the Risk Assessment for the planned activity.
Confirm, by including in the JSEA discussion, that all persons involved in the task fully
understand the scope of the work and the hazards and controls for the job.
Confirm that all members of the work party sign the permit(s).
Confirm that only work within the scope of the permit takes place.
Confirm that the worksite is kept in a clean and safe condition both during and upon
completion of the job.
Observe work activities and if an individual feels that he/she cannot safely manage more
than one concurrent task, stop the appropriate portions of assigned work and request
assistance from the IA/AA.
Confirm that appropriate lessons learned from the job are captured, incorporated and
shared.
Confirm all workers involved in the permitted work activity sign JSEA and permit(s)
acknowledging their understanding and agreement. In the event that there is more than
one work team, there will be representation from each team during the Risk
Assessment.

3.2.11 Person in Charge (PIC):
The PIC is appointed by the AA to be responsible for coordinating among multiple PAs and IAs
working at one site to confirm safe delivery of all work activities. The PIC is an onsite individual
that has working knowledge of all work activities being performed by all groups/personnel
working on location. The PIC can be the AA, IA, or one of the PAs.
The PIC will:
Function as a liaison between all personnel and groups on location.

Coordinate any issues that could result in a change in work scope with the AA.
Confirm that all people working on site have reviewed and signed the JSEA(s) and
verified that the appropriate permits have been completed.
Remain on site until work activities have stopped, permits are closed, and appropriate
equipment has been secured for the shift.
3.3 All persons involved in the Control of Work process shall be appropriately
trained and competent to carry out their roles.
Intent: To provide assurance that everyone involved with the Control of Work
process has the required training and has reached the level of competence
required to ensure correct application of the process.
All personnel involved in work covered by this Policy will be trained to the
appropriate level. There are three levels of training (refer to Table 3.3.1).
Table 3.3.1
Required Training
Level Audience Initial Training Refresher Training
Level 1 General workforce in a non supervisory Awareness training (may be part Local Decision
role of initial orientation)
Level 2 AA, IA, PA, PIC, Field Team Leaders, Minimum xx hours instructor led Once every 3 years
(See Notes) Well Site Leaders, OCMs and Wells TBD once the implementation
Team Leaders. plan has been developed
Specialty AA, IA, PA, PIC as relevant for JSEA Process, Hot Work, Lifting, As required by the
confirmation of competency in areas of Confined Space, Energy Isolation, individual practices
responsibility Ground Disturbance, Hazard and VTA
Identification Risk Assessment,
and Emergency Response
Notes:

If a Level 2 trained AA or IA remains on location and physically observes the work

being performed, the PA is not then required to have Level 2 training.
Demonstration of Level 2 knowledge will be verified by successful completion of a
written exam which must be recorded in Virtual Training Assistant (VTA) Learner to
be considered valid.
The refresher period for Level 2 training will be every 3 years. If an individual has not
been a member of the BP work force for a period exceeding 3 months the OCM /
Wells Team Leader shall assess the need for refresher training before reassignment
as an AA, IA or PA.
Additional training is required as identified within the BP permitting practice, e.g.
competent person, hot work, confined space entry, ground disturbance.
3.4 Planning and scheduling (P&S) of work shall identify individual tasks
and their interaction.
Intent: To ensure that planning and scheduling of work delivers an integrated

planning function which accurately reflects the work to be carried out, the use of
resources, and the time period required for the safe completion of work.
3.4.1 Planning and scheduling will consider time and resource

requirements for hazard identification, Risk Assessment,
preparation and planning.
A documented work planning process must be in place that takes into account
the time required for Control of Work activities. In particular, hazard
identification, Risk Assessment, planning, scheduling, and preparation must be
integral to the work planning process for any activity. This includes the
identification of competent personnel and suitable equipment required for safe
execution.
Where necessary the appropriate subject matter experts must be included in the
planning stages.
Job plans will address BPs Golden Rules of Safety to remind personnel of potential
safety and environmental risks, permits or authorizations required, and details
concerning any of BPs Golden Rules of Safety that may apply to tasks they will be
performing.
When work is dependent on or affects another activity, the planning, scheduling and
implementation will be coordinated, and priorities of execution defined.
Each OC shall establish a plan to manage Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS).
o SIMOPS will be identified and consideration given to their compatibility.
o Measures shall be taken to mitigate identified risks.

3.5 Tasks shall not be conducted without being risk assessed

Intent: To ensure that a Risk Assessment is conducted and is capable of coping with
various levels of complexity, dependant upon the hazards, likelihood of those hazards
being realised and the extent of the controls and mitigation needed to ensure that
the work can be completed safely.
The work site will be inspected for potential hazards as a prerequisite for
conducting the Risk Assessment.
The AA and/or PA/IA/PIC will participate in the Risk Assessment and the
development of control measures for all work activity.
Regular tasks may be covered by a procedural approach provided a
documented Risk Assessment has been conducted and the associated
procedures are controlled and managed within the Document Control
Management System.
Where the Risk Assessment indicates a job-specific Emergency Response Plan
is needed, the plan will be in place prior to starting the task. This would usually
be done for Type 2 Risk Assessment tasks.
All equipment/tools used in performing work must be assessed by a
competent person as fit for purpose through inspection and/or review of
certification.
Risk Assessment Process

The process of Risk Assessment described in this Policy is a method for systematically
examining an individual work assignment (task) to identify the hazards, evaluate the risks
and specify appropriate control measures.
There are two types of Risk Assessments defined within this process:
Type 1 is a broad overview of the task by a competent person(s), typically the PA

and AA, to identify any significant hazards involved and appropriate control
measures which are required to be in place to allow the job to proceed. This will be
accomplished using the JSEA Process (NA Gas JSEA Process).
Type 2 requires additional assessment, which is initiated when the competent

person(s) judges that there are greater hazards or complexities associated with the
task which require a more rigorous level of assessment (e.g., permit required
activity, working at heights, handling hazardous chemicals, etc).

3.6 Before conducting work that involves confined space entry, work on
energy systems, ground disturbance, hot work or other hazardous
activities, a permit shall be obtained.
Intent: To ensure that a formal process of permitting is utilised for the specific high
risk work mentioned above and to allow such work to be safely carried out using the
appropriate level of control.
Permits will be issued as identified in the practices that support this Policy.
a. Hot Work Practice
Onshore US Hot Work Practice
Onshore US Hot Work Permit
a. Ground Disturbance Practice
Onshore US Ground Disturbance Practice
Onshore US Ground Disturbance Flow Chart
Onshore US Ground Disturbance Permit
Canada Gas Ground Disturbance
b. Confined Space Entry Practice
Onshore US Confined Space Practice
Onshore US Confined Space Permit
Canada Gas Confined Space
Currently each Operation Center has an individual Confined Space permit
c. Lifting Practice
Onshore US Lifting Practice
Onshore US Lifting Permit
Canada Gas Lifting
Common NA Gas Onshore US and Canada Gas Lifting Permit (to be issued 2006)
d. Work on Energy Systems Practice (under development)
Onshore US LOTO Practice
Canada Gas Energy Isolation
- Energy Isolation Permit (Under Development)
e. Canada's Standard Safety Practices Manual

Permit Requirements
Each OC will establish a system that tracks and manages permit open and closure
status.
A copy of all permits and associated certificates currently in force must be held at a
suitable location (e.g., the control room, the site office, or electronically). If a
designated location is not feasible, an individual will be designated as the
responsible person to track permit open and closure status.
The permitting process will provide:
A scope of work which defines all tasks and activities which encompass the
hazardous activities.
Identification of hazards and control measures.
Identify isolation of energy sources required to carry out the job.
Clear identification of the location and duration of activity.
Clear identification of conditions under which the permit(s) becomes void.
Specify those carrying out the work and verify that the risks and control
measures have been communicated to them.
The permit(s) will reference and be consistent with the Risk Assessment
performed.
3.7 The scope, hazards controls and mitigations shall be communicated in writing
and signed by all involved in the task.
Intent: It is vital for the safe execution of work that everyone involved is acquainted
with the identified hazards, likelihood of those hazards being realised, and the
controls and mitigation actions which have been applied in order to reduce the
possibility of an incident or accident.
At least one person at each work site will have the skills and competency to identify the
required work scope, hazards, controls and mitigation measures. All site personnel involved
in the work activity must confirm in writing their understanding of the scope, hazards,
controls and mitigations by signing the JSEA and/or required permits, acknowledging and
documenting their understanding and agreement.
Any significant change in job scope must be approved by the AA.
All persons performing work at remote or isolated work sites shall have the skills and
competency to identify the required work scope, hazards, controls and mitigation measures.
They must establish and maintain regular communications and validate permit requirements
with another competent person.

3.8 All ongoing work requiring a permit shall be regularly monitored and
managed by a responsible person.
Intent: To protect those completing the work, it is essential that competent persons
regularly visit and inspect the work site to ensure that the conditions detailed on the
permit have not been compromised: that only the work as described on the permit is
carried out and that the work is continuing in a safe manner.
All permit required activity will be monitored by the PIC.

In the event of an unplanned shutdown, unplanned interruption of work or
change in operating conditions that imposes new hazards or increases risks, all
permits are void. Prior to restarting work, the PA must re-evaluate the job to
confirm that work can progress in a safe manner and must work with the IA to
re-issue required permits.
Permits will be valid for no more than a single shift or continuous job.
At shift change, sufficient time must be set aside to discuss the work status
from the technical, safety, and environmental point of view. The original permit
will be reviewed and closed and the incoming IA must issue a new permit
before work can recommence.
In the event of a change in AA, the incoming AA will review and fully
understand existing permits and ongoing work activity.
3.9 The work site shall be left in a safe condition on completion of activity or
interruption of the work.
Intent: On completion or interruption of any work activity, it is essential that prior to
the permit being closed, the work site be visited by a competent person to ensure
that no potential sources of accidents remain and that the equipment can be safely
brought back into service without incident.
The PIC will confirm that the worksite is left in a clean and safe condition.
3.10 The Control of Work process shall be subject to a program of regular auditing.
Intent: In order to maintain a consistently high standard of Control of Work process
application, it is essential that a program of regular auditing be established. The
audits should review and make recommendations for improvements on the correct
application of the Control of Work process, including all documentation, controls,
training and competency. Any discrepancies noted should be communicated to the
site and business management with a requirement that corrective action plans are
developed and actions are closed out in a timely manner.
The NAG HSSE Monitor Advisor(s) will be responsible for establishing and implementing a
regular program of auditing of the Control of Work process, including: individual permits, the
Control of Work documentation processes and procedures, and use and application. Audit
results will be communicated to the site and business management and reviewed by the
Control of Work TA and SPA. Appropriate action will be taken based on audit findings.

Each Operation Center will be responsible for conducting required regulatory audits of the
permitted activities associated with Control of Work in their area. In addition to regulatory
required audits, each Operation Center will establish a process for completing internal
audits of the Control of Work program in their area at a minimum of every three years. All
site-specific findings will be managed at each Operation Center. Any findings that have an
impact on the NAG Control of Work Policy, Practices or Processes will be communicated to
the Control of Work TA for review and appropriate action.
All Control of Work audits and actions will be documented and tracked for completeness
closure in Traction.
3.11 Internal and external lessons learned that impact the Control of Work
process shall be captured, incorporated, and shared.
Intent: To ensure that any learnings on how to improve the Control of Work process
and the safe means of carrying out work are made available to and used by all
facilities across the BP Group.
Significant Control of Work incidents will be investigated and lessons learned will be
communicated in accordance with the "NA Gas Initial Internal Incident Reporting,
Investigation and Tracking" Practice
Control of Work TA will be registered with the Lessons Learned database and will
distribute or advance any necessary changes to the Control of Work program. Link to
Lessons Learned Library
3.12 The Control of Work policy and associated procedures shall make it clear to
everyone that they have the obligation and authority to stop unsafe work.
Intent: To stop the continuation of potentially unsafe work at the earliest stage
possible by making every member of the workforce responsible for its prevention.
All personnel must be made aware (e.g., orientation, JSEA, hazard recognition
training, etc.) of their obligation to stop work that they consider to be unsafe.
All reports from personnel that the work is unsafe must be respected, recorded,
properly investigated and if warranted, communicated throughout the workforce.

Appendix 1 Definitions
Accountable Person: The person in the organization who has ultimate responsibility.
Activities: Specific actions or pursuits (See operating tasks).
Assess: To consider and make a judgment upon.
Auditing: A formal or official examination and verification. The audit process should include
monitoring, review, and reporting of the outcome of the audit to those people who can implement
any changes needed.
Authority:
a) Official permission.
b) A position that has the power to make a judgment; an individual cited or appealed to as an
expert.
c) The power to influence or command.
BP Company: A company in the BP Group, or a company or other legal entity where BP has
operational control, is responsible for HSSE and has the right to impose this Standard.
BP Employee: A person employed by a BP Company.
BP Operations: BP Business Units, projects, facilities sites and operations.
BP Premises: Any site, location, or marine vessel that is owned or operated by or for a BP
Company.
Competency: The ability to perform a task in the correct manner with the correct understanding
and reasoning behind the task.
Competent Person: A person who has demonstrated that they have the knowledge, training and
experience required to perform the defined role to the standard required.
Confined Space: A confined space is one that is large enough for personnel to enter, has limited or
restricted means of entry, and is not designed for normal or continuous occupancy. It can be any
enclosed or partially enclosed space where there is a risk of death or serious injury from hazardous
substances or dangerous conditions (e.g. lack of oxygen).
Contractor Employees: Members of the workforce employed by and working on behalf of a

Contractor.
Contractors: Members of the work force who are not directly employed by BP.
Control:
a) A mechanism used to regulate a physical process or activity.

b) An action to mitigate risk.

c) The power to direct (usually through authority).
Document Control Management System (DCMS): An established means of controlling the

issue, use and updating of documents used in the management of a site. A full DCMS will include
reference numbers on documents, means of tracking changes and updates and regular audits of
the system to confirm compliance.
Emergency Response: Guidelines for initial responses to an incident that are based on the type of
activity or product involved in an incident.
Energy Systems: Systems which by their nature contain energy, e.g., hydraulic, mechanical,
electrical, chemical, thermal, potential and pneumatic.
Essential Personnel: Personnel whose direct involvement with work site activities is required.
Formal: A formal process or agreement is one that is written, recorded and audited. It may also
include tracking to ensure that work is following the process or agreement.
Ground Disturbance: Work that involves a man-made cut, cavity, trench or depression formed by
earth removal, or driving piles into the earth surface.
Hazards: Equipment, materials, activities, or conditions that have a significant potential to cause
injury.
Hot Work: Work which involves either the use or the possible creation of a flame, spark or high
energy discharge that could act as the ignition source for a fire or explosion.
Interaction: Acting upon each other.
Interruption: The actual definition of work interruption may be different at each site, but could
include coffee, smoke breaks and lunch breaks, fire alarms, suspension of work overnight,
emergency situations and shift changes.
Lone Worker: a person whose activity requires them to work or travel alone, at or to a site, in
circumstances when they cannot be seen or heard by another worker, they cannot expect a visit
from another worker for some time and when assistance is not readily available in the event of an
injury, illness or emergency.
Management of Change: An established means of managing and controlling changes within an

organization.
Mitigation: An action or event which prevents or minimizes the effects of an incident or condition.
Monitoring: The routine function of regular inspection carried out by a responsible and competent
person.

Non-Essential Personnel: Are those who do not have an active role in accomplishing the task or
activity at hand. e.g., employees who are not Essential Personnel, land owners, third parties,
visitors and delivery drivers.
Operational Control: Where BP has responsibility for the activity as owner or under a contractual
obligation with the owners of the entity and, as a consequence, has appropriate authority to
manage directly all HSSE aspects of the operational activities to meet BP policy and expectations.
Operating Tasks: Tasks carried out by personnel who run BP facilities and production units which
require interface with plant and equipment and are necessary to ensure ongoing plant operations
(e.g. sample taking, filter element replacement, etc).
Permit: A formal and detailed document containing location, time, equipment to be worked on,
Hazard identification, mitigation/precaution measure used, naming those authorizing the work and
those performing the work.
Planning and Scheduling (P&S): A systematic process of identifying and listing work and
determining when such work will be carried out.
Plan: The function of task (work) identification, interaction and sequencing including, preparation
and completion requirements, to achieve an outcome.
Policy: Plan of action pursued by the Company (BP) with which all personnel must comply.
Practice: A technical document on a high risk activity that states minimum expectations
and operating requirements for a specified activity or task. A Practice provides practical
guidance on ways to control and achieve a reduction or elimination of a health and/or
safety risk.
Procedure: A detailed document either in paper or electronic form which sets out sequential or
parallel actions which shall be followed by those engaged in carrying out an activity.
Process: A detailed description of a management system or a production operation.
Regular: An activity that is required to take place regularly will be defined by the site and should
cover the normal, typical, activities and explain the frequency of that work. Regularly is used to
indicate activities that must occur frequently enough to ensure the on-going safety of the work
force. For some activities this might be annually, for others it could be every few minutes.
Remote Location A location that is apart, secluded or isolated from another space or area. An
area that is not easily accessible and is not expected to be visited by another worker in the
immediate future. (A remote location does not have to be far away, certain process areas that
are rarely used can be considered remote or isolated.)

Responsible Person: A suitably trained and experienced individual who has been formally
assessed as competent and has been given specific actions or areas of responsibility by an
accountable person.
Requirements: The activities, tasks or deliverables that must be completed to comply with the
Mandatory Requirements
Risk: Possibility of loss, injury, damage, or exposure to hazard or danger.

Risk Assessment: The process of hazard identification and the assessment of the potential for
identified hazards to be realized in any given activity.
Roles: The documented description of personnel functions within a management structure.
Routine: A procedure that does not vary in its execution.
Scheduling: The systematic identification of activities into a time based work flow process.
Shift change: A period of time during which one work shift stops working and another
commences.
Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS): Separate activities or works, taking place at the same time
with the potential to impact on each other.
Single Point Accountable: The person in the organization (site/Business Unit) who has been
appointed as being accountable for the delivery and performance of an activity.
Subject Matter Expert: An acknowledged expert in a particular field.
Suspension: Temporary removal, withholding or postponement.
Task Risk Assessment: A means of identifying work related hazards, assessing the possibility of
those hazards being realized and defining the mitigating actions and controls required to reduce the
risk.
Technical Authority: A person responsible for confirming the accuracy and integrity of technical
content and changes.
Training: The bringing of a person to a desired degree of proficiency in some activity or skill.
Training should only be carried out by people who have been assessed as being competent to
train.
Task: An activity in support of a piece of work.
Virtual Training Assistant (VTA): A computer based training management tool that lists, tracks
and delivers training to individuals.
Work: An activity made up of a number of different tasks.

Workforce: BP employees and every employee of any other company or other legal entity that has
been engaged to perform work on BP Premises.
Work Planning: A systematic process of identifying and listing work and determining when such
work will be carried out.
Worksite: The location of the activity, work or tasks.


Document Name Control of Work Policy
Ruth NA GAS SPU Carleen NA GAS SPU CoW
Authority Germany-Bice HSSE Director
Custodian Leonhardt Technical Authority
Rev Revision
Revision Detail Authority Custodian
# Date
Ruth Germany-Bice, Carleen Leonhardt,
1.0 09/15/2006 Initial issue as controlled document. NA GAS SPU HSSE NA GAS SPU CoW
Director Technical Authority
Removed Cold Work from first bullet of
Section 3.2.9.
Ruth Germany-Bice, Carleen Leonhardt,
Formatted document to the NA Gas HS
1.1 11/14/2006 NA GAS SPU HSSE NA GAS SPU CoW
Document Management Template.
Director Technical Authority
Changed next review date from
09/15/2007 to 09/15/2008.
Link to Lessons Learned Library Internal Link Link to Lessons Learned Library
Hot Work Practice Onshore US 22Nov2004 Onshore US Hot Work Practice
Hot Work Permit Onshore US Onshore US Hot Work Permit

Ground Disturbance Practice Onshore US 18Apr2005 Onshore US Ground Disturbance Practice
Ground Disturbance Flow Chart Onshore US 18Apr2005 Onshore US Ground Disturbance Flow Chart
Ground Disturbance Permit Onshore US 18Apr2005 Onshore US Ground Disturbance Permit
Ground Disturbance Canada Gas 11Aug2006 Canada Gas Ground Disturbance
Confined Space Practice Onshore US 15Nov2001 Onshore US Confined Space Practice
Confined Space Canada Gas 27 Apr2006 Canada Gas Confined Space
Lifting Practice Onshore US 06Oct2003 Onshore US Lifting Practice
Lifting Permit Onshore US Onshore US Lifting Permit
Lifting Permit Canada Gas 19Oct2006 Canada Gas Lifting Practice
LOTO Practice Onshore US 15Nov2001 Onshore US LOTO Practice
Energy Isolation Canada Gas 18Oct2006 Canada Gas Energy Isolation
Standard Safety Practices Manual Canada Gas June 2003 Canada Standard Safety Practices Manual
NAGas SPU Initial Internal Incident Reporting, NA Gas Initial Internal Incident Reporting,
15Aug2005
Investigation and Tracking Investigation and Tracking

Document Approval
Approver Title Date
Authority
Custodian
Legal

BP Onshore U.S. Safety Standard Page 4.41
Section 4, Operations Procedures
Chapter 4, Defeated Safety Systems
Chapter 4
Defeated Safety Systems
I. Scope
A. During routine facility operations, it may become necessary to disable a control,

shutdown, or emergency shutdown (ESD) system through the use of bypasses such
as jumpers or forcing the contacts in a programmable logic controller (PLC) driven
system. Disabling a control or safety system may be required when performing
various testing or repair procedures on equipment while the facility is in operation.
B. Although bypassing these systems is a common practice in many facilities, if it is not

properly controlled, bypassing may impose a serious safety threat to the facility by
preventing the equipment from functioning as designed.
C. When a jumper is installed that defeats the intended purpose of a safety or control
system, proper approvals and notification procedures will prepare operations
personnel to maintain control of the facility while the system is disabled. Procedures
must also ensure the removal of the bypass when work is completed.
D. This program is intended to meet the requirements for safely bypassing safety and
control systems.
II. Requirements
A. A program to document and track the installation and removal of electrical jumpers
and electronic bypasses shall be utilized at each operating location.
B. The program shall provide procedures for obtaining approval for installing the
bypass prior to installation. The program will also document the installation and
removal of bypasses installed in control systems, shutdown systems or ESD systems
when the jumper alters the designed function of the system.
C. The program shall incorporate a form that documents the following information:
1. The system into which the jumper or bypass is to be installed
2. The reason for installation of the jumper or bypass
3. The effect the jumper will have on the systems operability
4. When the jumper is to be installed
Document Owner: Mike Thompson Revision Date: 11/15/01

Chapter 4, Defeated Safety Systems
5. When the jumper is to be removed
6. Installed by
7. Removed by
8. Authorized for installation by
9. Notification to operations personnel
10. Actions required by operations personnel in the event of an emergency
11. The length of time the jumper or bypass will remain in the system
D. The person installing the bypass or jumper shall ensure that the form is completed
prior to commencing work. Operating location management shall ensure that the
form and the program are effectively utilized by the operating location.
E. While the jumper or bypass is in service, the form(s) shall be posted in a

conspicuous location, accessible immediately by operations personnel. Once the
jumper or bypass is removed, the form shall be maintained on file at the operating
location for 3 years.
F. At operating locations affected by the Process Safety Management Standard (OSHA

1910.119), management shall ensure that proper Management of Change procedures
are incorporated into the process of installing jumpers or bypasses.
III. References
A. Occupational Safety Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR Part

1910.119.

OUSBU Safety Standard Page xxi
Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Standard

Document Control and Revision Log

1.0 Purpose/Scope
The Onshore U.S. Safety Standard contains the minimum policies and procedures to be followed
by the Onshore U.S. Business Unit (OUSBU) in order to comply with Federal and BP safety and
health requirements and regulations. This procedure describes the method used to update and
revise the Onshore U.S. Safety Standard (hereafter referred to as the Standard). It also describes
the process used to obtain a waiver (or exception) to a requirement of the Standard.
2.0 Definitions
Revision - A fundamental change to a key principle or tenet of a standard that will change the
basic meaning of that requirement, or will fundamentally change the methods necessary to
implement that requirement. A revision, as defined in this document, does not include minor
editorial changes to correct spelling, grammer, or typographical errors found within the Standard.
Minor changes may be made by the Document Administrator, without further review and
approval, in accordance with the approved OUSBU Document Control procedures.
Waiver - A Management of Change form used to document managements approval to set aside a
particular requirement of the Standard, either temporarily or permanently, for a single location or
operation. The OUSBUs Management of Change process and form is used for waivers.
OUSBU - Onshore U.S. Business Unit.
Safety Handbook - the small, pocket-sized field guide to the OUSBU Safety Standard. This
Handbook is a managed document.
The Standard is a controlled document. Control is maintained by the OUSBU HSE Department.
This document contains the master revision log for all sections and chapters of the Safety
Standard.
A Web-based version of the Standard shall be maintained as a controlled copy. All paper copies
are uncontrolled and are only good at the time of printing. Each chapter listed on the Contents
page shall have the current revision date for that chapter. A new Contents page shall be issued
with each revision to the Standard.
The release of any update to the Standard immediately rescinds all previous versions of the
Standard.

Document Number: S-01-067
OUSBU Safety Standard Page xxii
The Safety Handbook is a managed document. Control is maintained by the OUSBU Safety
Advisor (the Document Administrator for the Standard). The Handbook is maintained to
accurately reflect the most up-to-date version of the Standard. Updated versions of the Handbook
shall be printed and distributed approximately every 12 - 18 months.

OUSBU HSE Department - controls the original copy of the Standard and initiates periodic
reviews to assure the Standard remains up to date and in compliance with Federal regulations and
BP standards and policies.
OUSBU Webmaster - shall maintain and host the web-based version of the Standard on the
OUSBU HSE web site.
The Document Administrator - shall track all proposed changes and bring proposals to the
HS&E Team Leaders for assignment. He/she assures the Recordkeeping Chapter of the Standard
conforms with any revisions, and updates the Table of Contents dates for any revisions. The
Document Administrator shall assure that any revisions authorized by the OUSBU are published
on the Standard web sites (both Intranet and Internet sites), and that an email announcement of
this change and any changes to the Safety Handbook are distributed to the entire OUSBU. The
Document Administrator shall assure that HiPOs, Incident Investigations, or Lessons Learned
from outside the OUSBU are reviewed for impact to the Standard, and shall propose revisions as
needed to address findings from these reports.
OUSBU HS&E Team Leaders - shall assess the validity of proposed changes to the Standard
that originate within their area of responsibility prior to forwarding that proposal to the Document
Administrator. They shall assure that any printed Safety Handbook revisions are cascaded to all
employees in their organization. HS&E Team Leaders are responsible for assuring that any
HiPOs, Incident Investigations, or Lessons Learned from their area of responsibility are reviewed
for impact to the Standard, and shall propose revisions as needed to address findings from these
reports.
OUSBU H&S Team Leaders - along with the H&S Assurance Manager, shall evaluate all
proposals for changes, assign a responsible person to research and develop approved proposals
into a final draft change to the Standard, and approve all drafts prior to final authorization and
signature by the Business Unit. These Team Leaders shall request the participation of E Team
Leaders as needed for changes that result from or affect environmental requirements, and shall
solicit field input and the participation of the HSE Coordination Network as applicable.
Individual employees - are responsible for assuring that contract personnel who report to them
are informed of email announcements of revisions.
5.1 Revision Procedure
Revisions to the OUSBU Safety Standard shall normally follow this procedure. Revisions that are
deemed critical to safety and health may be submitted directly to the H&S Team Leaders for
immediate review and approval.
Revisions may be submitted because:

OUSBU Safety Standard Page xxiii
An accident, incident or lesson learned results in a proposed change in a BP policy or

procedure.
The OUSBU decides to adopt a best practice for its operations.
The Standard is found to incorrectly address an existing regulation or BP policy.
A new regulation or BP policy is issued that is not addressed in the Standard.
Part of the Standard is found to be ambiguous or needing clarification.
Any BP employee or contractor may propose a change to the Standard.
Proposed changes shall be forwarded to the cognizant Health and Safety Team Leader.
The H&S Team Leader shall assess the validity of the proposal and forward all legitimate
proposals to the Safety Standard Document Administrator (this position is assigned by the
OUSBU H&S Team Leaders).
On a quarterly basis, the H&S Team Leaders shall determine preliminary approval for all
proposals, then assign a responsible person to draft the revision to the Standard. The responsible
person shall assemble a team (if necessary) to make revisions to the Standard and the
corresponding section of the Safety Handbook.
The responsible person shall present a final draft revision of the Standard and Handbook to the
H&S Team Leaders for final approval. The responsible person assures that this final draft is in
the approved OUSBU format, including updates to document header and footer dates and
information. The approved final draft is sent to the Document Authority for authorization and
signatures. Revisions may be approved by the Document Custodian (OUSBU HSE Manager)
for the Document Authority (OUSBU Leader).
Upon approval, the Document Administrator shall update the OUSBU Safety Standard Internet
and Intranet pages, the Recordkeeping Chapter, the Table of Contents, and the Document
Control Revision Chapter and Log. The Administrator shall distribute an email announcement of
any revisions to the entire OUSBU.
5.2 Waiver Process
Performance Leaders may request to waive specific requirements of this Standard. These waivers
are used to reflect the individual needs of the Asset. Waivers are only necessary if the minimum
requirements of the Standard cannot be met; a waiver is not required if the requirements of the
Standard are met or exceeded.
Assets shall use the OUSBU Management of Change procedure and forms to obtain approval of
any waiver to the requirements of this Standard.
A waiver may only apply to a single operation within a single Asset. If the technical aspects of a
waiver might be useful to other operations, those other operations must submit their own
Management of Change to assure they have properly applied all prescribed methods of hazard
assessment, control, documentation and training prior to implementation of the waiver.

OUSBU Safety Standard Page xxiv
Permanent waivers to this Standard must be approved, in writing, by the Business Unit Leader.
Temporary waivers (for a single job or task) to this Standard must be approved, in writing, by the
cognizant Operations Center Manager or by the Business Unit Leader.
OUSBU Management of Change Procedures

OUSBU Safety Handbook
7.0 Revision Log
Revision Date Authority Reviser Revision Details

November 15, 2001 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Initial release
March 20, 2002 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Crucial safety change. Revised Section 4 Chapter 9, paragraph
II.D.2 to read test pressure shall be 110 percent of the current
pressure of the line. Added warning note.
May 16, 2002 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Removed references to blue pages in Document Control and
in Section 1 Chapter 14 Recordkeeping. Expanded the
Document Control chapter to add detailed revision procedures
and a method for obtaining a temporary MOC that can be
approved by OCMs.
August 1, 2002 Tim Holt Ralph Revised Section 1 Chapter 2 to standardize incident reporting,
DeLeonardis internal notifications, investigation methodology, and tracking
across the BU. Full definitions established for each type of
incident. Name of chapter was changed.
November 11, 2002 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Eliminated duplicate Document Control forms and incorporated
the master document change log into this chapter.
Jan Knight Included new chapter titled Short Service Employee
Management
November 11, 2002 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Revised Section 1 Chapter 2 by adding SOR definition for spill
and establishing SOR Template url link.
April 14, 2003 Tim Holt Ann Goulet Revised Section 1 Chapter 11 Incident Management Planning.
To reflect the new OUSBU organizational structure. Assets are
now required to perform annual drills. IMPs must link to other
plans such as RMP or H2S contingency plans. IMPs must now be
reviewed and updated annually.
April 14, 2003 Tim Holt Walter Adcock Revised Section 3 Chapter 10 Management of Change to
establish a unified BU policy for performing MOC. All existing
MOC procedures and forms must comply with this Standard.
April 14, 2003 Tim Holt Mike Langley Revised Section 4 Chapter 2 Combustible and Flammable Liquid
Storage and Handling to warn of danger of static ignition from
truck bed liners when filling gasoline cans. Also added in section
on tank car and truck loading and unloading.
April 14, 2003 Tim Holt Karen Carter Revised Section 4 Chapter 3 Compressed Gases and Air to
comply with DoT hydrostatic testing requirements.
April 22, 2003 Tim Holt Karen Carter Revised Section 1 Chapter 13 Office Safety Chapter to allow
power strips to be used for office equipment other than computers.
April 22, 2003 Tim Holt Jan Knight Revised Section 1 Chapter 20 Short Service Employee
Management to change the part of the definition of an

OUSBU Safety Standard Page xxv
inexperienced employee that states they have less than 6 months

in the same or similar type job with current employer. The
words with current employer were deleted. Also inserted the
subtitle Exceptions before the last 2 paragraphs of section 5.5.
April 22, 2003 Tim Holt Karen Carter Revised Section 3 Chapter 11 Personal Protective Equipment to
reference the new Fall Protection chapter of the Standard.
April 22, 2003 Tim Holt Mike Langley Added new chapter titled Section 3 Chapter 14 Fall Protection,
which expands the requirements of the old Personal Protective
Equipment chapter and assures compliance with current OSHA
requirements.
April 22, 2003 Tim Holt Karen Carter Revised Section 4 Chapter 10 Hot Work Program to define
combustible vs. flammable, and clarify the requirements of Class I
Division 1 and 2 locations. Eliminated the exception that stated a
permit is not necessary if an ignition source is introducted solely
to ignite a gas to control a hazard, i.e., the lighting of a pipeline
leak by a welder. Added fire watch duties per OSHA
requirements.
April 23, 2003 Tim Holt Ann Goulet Revised Section 1 Chapter 2 Initial Incident Reporting,
Investigation and Tracking Standard by revising the methods and
timetables used for initial incident reporting. A table and two
flowcharts were added to the chapter to aid in clarifying the new
reporting requirements.
April 23, 2003 Tim Holt Jan Knight Revised the chapter on Document Control and Revision Log to
reflect the new OUSBU organizational structure.
August 20, 2003 Tim Holt John Putnam Put into new ISO document format; 16 Min. Reqmts to revised 18
Min. Reqmts.

BP Onshore U.S. Operations Safety Standard Page 5.11
Section 5, Drilling and Well Operations
Chapter 1, Drilling, Completions, and Workover Operations
Chapter 1
Drilling, Completions, and Workover Operations
I. Introduction
Outlined below are general requirements to be used for all BP drilling, completions, and
workover operations. Specific requirements and best practices for these operations are
contained in the BP Drilling and Well Operations Policy Manual and the BP Well Control
Manual. Unique hazards or hazardous procedures associated with these operations
include:
H2S
Perforating
Rig up and rig down
Wire line intervention
High pressure pumping
Combustible gasses
II. General Requirements
A. The drilling/completions/workover supervisor is responsible for safety and

environmental performance at the well site. He shall resolve any questions or
procedures regarding safety before the job is started.
B. A pre-job risk assessment shall be conducted at the start of each shift and whenever
there is a change in operational activities. Documentation of these assessments shall
be maintained by the responsible contractor at the rig site for the duration of the
well.
C. Both drilling and workover rigs shall be inspected monthly. Both BP and Contractor
representatives shall participate in these inspections. Sample forms are included in
Attachment 5.1-1 and Attachment 5.1-2. These forms or an equivalent must be used
to document these inspections. Records of these inspections shall be maintained by
the responsible contractor at the rig site for a minimum of 6 months.
D. An adequate number and type of fire extinguishers shall be placed around the
location before work begins. A minimum of 60 lbs. total of ABC chemical
extinguishers shall be provided.

E. Any equipment that may come in contact with electrical current, including generator
skids and mobile trailers, shall be grounded. (See the Grounding and Bonding
chapter in this Standard.)
F. If any gas release occurs, the area shall be evacuated then surveyed with a
combustible gas monitor prior to restarting operations. The combustible gas monitor
must undergo a verification of calibration prior to use. Operations shall not resume
until gas concentrations are less than or equal to10 percent LEL.
G. All personnel working in potentially hazardous atmospheres such as H2S shall be

trained in the hazards and safe work practices for that environment. They must
maintain current certification for respiratory protection including medical evaluation
and annual fit testing.
III. References
A. BP Drilling and Well Operations Policy BPA-D-001.
B. BP Well Control Manual (Volumes 1, 2, and 3) BPA-D-002.

Attachment 5.1-1
Rotary Drilling Rig Safety Inspection Checklist
Company: Rig Number: Inspection Date:
Toolpusher: Driller: Inspected by:
Satisfactory Unsatisfactory Not Applicable
DRILL SITE DRILLING FLOOR AREA BLOWOUT PREVENTERS

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL signs Rotary table area BOP properly installed, tested
posted Kelly brushing guard used Wheels and stems in place
HARD HAT/SAFETY GLASSES signs Controls adequate if no guard used Stack properly stabilized
posted Rotary chain drive guarded All hydraulic lines connected
NO SMOKING areas designated All unused floor holes covered Although unused lines capped
NO PARKING near rig General housekeeping, lighting Accumulator unit properly located
H2S controls, if applicable Pipe slips, dies Gauges properly located
Escape and guy lines flagged Racking floor area Housekeeping, drainage
Outhouse provided Vee Door gate provided, in place Choke manifold and line secured
Hard hats/safety glasses available for Makeup and breakout tongs Blooey line used, pilot light used
visitors Tong snubbing lines, clamps Approved and adequate lighting
Toolpushers trailer grounded Tong counterweights Signage
Toolpushers trailer tied down Tong body and jaws condition
PIPE RACK AREA
Tong safety handle pin secured Ends of pipe racks chocked
DOG HOUSE
Tong dies sharp, keeper used
Layers of pipe chocked, spacers used
Adequate exits, doors installed Air hoist line, guide, guarded
properly, operate freely Pipe racks level, stable
Catheads Pipe rack catwalk
Approved heaters used
Catlines
General housekeeping Stairs with handrails provided
Kelly cock, wrench accessible
First aid kit and facilities Vee door slide, pipe stops used
Spinning chain, headache post Pipe tubs and bridles
Crew trained in first aid
Crown-O-Matic device, operating
Emergency phone numbers posted Derrick stand and ladder
Drilling line
Two-way radio provided General housekeeping, lighting
Drawworks and overrunning clutch Dead end of drilling line elevated
Safety equipment available
Drillers controls
Crew wearing hard hats and safety Employees not on top of pipe
glasses Hand tools, bench grinders
Crew wearing hard-toed shoes DERRICK BOARD AREA
STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDRAILS Derrick ladder
Proper clothing worn by crew
Adequate stairs provided off rig Derrick climber installed and used
No hazardous jewelry worn
Stairs level, secure, no obstructions Safety belt, safety catch
No Smoking rules observed
Adequate handrails provided (stairs) Safety lines or lanyards used
OSHA log posted ______ accidents
Stair treads uniform, of nonskid type Derrick emergency escape line
Ton miles logged ____________
Guardrails, midrails, toeboards Geronimo on line and ready for use
BOP drills, test logged ________
Safety meetings logged _______ Pipe fingers and tools secured
DERRICK AND SUBSTRUCTURE Mud standpipe secured
Driller at or near controls
Derrick, A-frame assembly pins Mudhose snubbed on both ends
Toolpusher/Rig Manager at rig in place, secured with keepers
location
Booms and boom lines MUD PUMP AREA
Approved and adequate lighting Approved and adequate liking Drive belts, pony rods guarded
Hazard communication/MSDS sheet
Derrick properly guyed, if applicable Head and valve covers fully bolted
on site
Substructures beams and braces Shear pin Pop-off valve
All assembly pins in place, secure covered/tested
Dead line properly anchored Ends of relief lines secured
Ends all of mud vibrator hose snubbed
General housekeeping

Approved and adequate lighting
Rotary Drilling Rig Safety Inspection Checklist

(Continued)
MUD MIXING AREA GENERATOR AREA FUEL STORAGE TANKS

Bagged material properly stacked Generators properly located Fuel storage tanks properly located
Adequate personal protective All generator moving parts guarded All storage valves marked as to
equipment Generators properly grounded connects
Adequate eyewash available Cover panels on electrical control Discharge nozzles, hoses, valves
General housekeeping boxes Liquified petroleum gas storage tanks
Adequate ventilation in area Electrical controls marked Piping and fuel lines
Elevated loading door opening HIGH VOLTAGE warning signs used General housekeeping, lighting
protected Insulating mats at electrical panels Stationary ladders on storage tanks
Approved and adequate lighting All electrical tools grounded
Condition of electrical wiring FIRE PROTECTION
MUD TANKS AND PITS Electrical wires properly strung Adequate fire extinguishers
Adequate stairs with handrails Unused electrical outlets covered Charged and properly located
Walkways and guardrails Air compressors properly guarded No open pit burning permitted
Condition of walkways, free from Air storage tanks equipped with pop- Flammables in UL safety cans
obstructions off NO SMOKING rules enforced
Guardrails provided on crossovers General housekeeping, lighting Flare area clear of combustibles
Approved and adequate lighting Hearing protection available Boiler and its safety controls
EYE PROTECTION REQUIRED warning SCR house, if available Welding performed safely
signs
Spark and heat arrester on engines
Shale shaker guarded
General housekeeping
Explosive-proof equipment at shale
shaker
Agitator shafts and couplings guarded
Mud guns and jetting hoses secured
Desander, desilter, degasser units
Unsatisfactory remark requires clarifying comment:

Section 5, Drilling, Completions and Workover Operations
Attachment 5.1-2
Well Servicing/Workover Rig Safety Inspection Checklist

Location: Rig Number: Inspection Date:
Operator: Supervisor: Inspected by:
Satisfactory Unsatisfactory Not Applicable
GENERAL Crown-sheave guards Cathead line divider/grip

Distance from overhead power Finger board safety chain Catline
lines, minimum 10 feet Derrick locking pins in place with Road gear lockout
Hazard signs displayed safety pins 3 wraps on drill line
First aid kit Lighting system Tubing/Sandline brakes
Guy wires flagged Purging of air from hydraulic raising
cylinder OPERATOR STATION/WORK
Fall lane of derrick clear
PLATFORM FLOOR
Vehicles out of guy pattern
VEHICLES All controls labeled
Overall housekeeping
Glass, mirrors Work floor
emergency number
Lights, reflectors, etc. Steps/handrails
50-foot smoking policy
Housekeeping, cab All gauges functioning properly
Spark arrestor/water on exhaust
Seatbelts
Pump location (exhaust) TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Doghouse
Spacing/return tanks/pump/all engines
Housekeeping Power Tongs Condition
Stove condition Tong door
GUYING
Electrical/lights Backup
Crown to ground guy lines
Hitch and safety chain Stiff arm. snub/safety line
Number of wind guys
Chock tires Disconnect tong hoses
Condition of wires
Brakes Rod tong safety sling
Diameter of lines
Tong positioner
Three clamps/turnbuckle minimum CARRIER
Ground anchors guardrails/handrails on elevated Traveling Assembly Condition
Tubing board guys walkways and steps Blocks
Strung and crossed for racking Head, tail, and signal lights Sheave guards/lock
Three clamps minimum Wheels chocked Bales/links
Internal guys adjusted for tension Condition of tires and wheels Elevators/air slips
Outriggers in place and pinned Fuel tanks labeled Rod hook
Exhaust system Transfer elevators
FOUNDATION No loose or flammable materials Condition of slings
Adequate supplemental footing stored in cab
provided Glass and mirrors Mud/Circulating System
Windshield wipers Standpipe secured
HAND TOOLS Flares Circulating hose secured to
Rod wrenches Hydraulic leveling jacks secured by gooseneck and swivel with safety
Others mechanical locknuts hobbles
Brakes/emergency High pressure fittings in high pressure
MAST/DERRICK system
Manufacturer's specification/operation DRAWWORKS CONDITION Safety pressure relief valves, shear
plate Guards pin
Ladder Tubing/drilling line Discharge line from relief valves
Tubing board Sandline anchored
Rod basket/board Sufficient wraps left on drum with Pump guards
Manual latch dog extension/retraction blocks in down position Mud pit walkways and steps
mechanism Deadline anchor and retainer All controls labeled
Scoping ram stabilizers Cathead friction surface Power swivel properly secured

Section 5, Drilling, Completions and Workover Operations
Well Servicing/Workover Rig Safety Inspection Checklist

(Continued)
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT (continued) Safety Equipment/Practices H2S equipment

Well control Equipment Safety harness, lanyard provided at Static line
tubing board, rod basket, and stabbing Emergency kill switches
BOPs installed, tested, and functional
board
Training Pumping unit power lockout with lock
Derrick ladder climbing device and tag
Safety valve for TBG
Emergency derrick escape Pumping unit safety line
Accum. valves in open/close position equipment/stake MSDS/EMER/SPCC Book
Fire extinguishers
Proper lifting
Personal protective equipment
Unsatisfactory remark requires clarifying comment:

Page 1 of 7
Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-103

Document Title: OUSBU Driving Safety Practice
Authority: OUSBU HS Manager Custodian: OUSBU HS Administrator

Issue Date: 12/13/01 Scope of Application: BP Onshore US BU
1.0 Purpose/Scope
The intent of this Practice is to ensure that there is a formal approach to managing driving risk for BP employees and
for BP Companies in respect of BP vehicles. The further intent is to recommend that a comprehensive driving
Practice be adopted by non-BP Companies whose employees are members of the workforce. Successful
implementation will result in fewer driving related incidents, injuries and fatalities. Adherence is mandatory, as is
compliance with relevant laws and regulations. Failure to comply will be subject to the OUSBU Disciplinary
Policy.
2.0 Definitions
Affected Vehicle:
Any company vehicle assigned to an employee or utilized as a pool vehicle
Any personal vehicle used on company business with operating expenses reimbursed by company
Any rental or leased vehicle used by employee on company business
Non-reimbursable commuting is excluded
Driving Time - The time a driver spends driving a vehicle on BP business whether the vehicle is in motion or not.
This excludes any time spent operating other functions of the vehicle e.g., loading, unloading and work breaks.
Heavy Vehicle Any vehicle greater than 3.5 t of fixed chassis or articulated trailer, excluding mobile plant.
Light Vehicle - Any vehicle less than 3.5 t excluding mobile plant.
License - A documented, personal identification authorising the named person to drive designated classifications of
vehicle on stated on-road or off-road locations. Licenses may, where not issued by a Public Authority, be issued by
an approved BP authority to be specified (e.g. OCM or Wells Superintendent)
Professional Driver - Any heavy vehicle driver, bus driver, chauffeur, and or any light vehicle driver who drives
more than 16,000 Kilometres (10,000 miles) per year on business (or pro-rata mileage for any part of a year) and is
thereby regarded as having driving as a core competency as part of their job. A mobile plant operator who as part of
their job drives for more than 15 percent of working hours (or pro-rata time for any part of the year) is deemed to be
a professional driver.
Vehicle Incident - Refer to OUSBU Initial Incident Reporting, Investigation & Tracking Practice
Working Hours - All paid hours on BP business, inclusive of work breaks.

Vehicle Requirements:
1. The vehicle is fit for the purpose, and has been maintained in safe working order, with seatbelts installed
and functional.
2. The number of passengers does not exceed manufacturer's specification for the vehicle.
Documentum Document NumberUPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00103 Revision Date: 04/19/04
Page 2 of 7
3. Loads are secure and do not exceed manufacturers specification and legal limits for the vehicle.
BP Driver Requirements:
4. They are appropriately assessed, licensed, trained, and medically fit to operate the vehicle.
5. They are appropriately rested and alert.
6. They do not use a mobile phone or other two-way communication device while operating the vehicle.
7. Pre-trip risk assessments and route planning activities are encouraged in order to minimize driver hazard
exposure. Drivers are responsible for challenging the necessity, frequency and/or extent of trips with the intent
to limit hazard exposure. Refer to OUSBU Pre-Trip Assessment Guidance Attachment 3.
8. Seatbelts are worn by all occupants at all times whenever a vehicle is in motion.
9. They are not under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or any other substance or medication that could impair
their ability to drive.
10. Safety helmets are worn by rider and passengers of quads, snowmobiles and similar types of vehicle.

Local HSE Representative
Assure affected drivers receive training within six months of driving on BP business and refresher training,
as required, is received thereafter. Update records in the VTA Database.
BP employee who operates any vehicle on BP business
Responsible for completing training as required.
Advise supervision or the Local HSE Representative of any medical, physical, or psychological condition
that would impair his/her performance of driving tasks.
Inspect the vehicle before using to ensure it is in proper working condition.
Promptly report any malfunction or problem with the vehicle to the supervisor.
Operational Department Heads and Supervisors
Ensure that BP personnel assigned to driving tasks, including new employees and transferees, are:
Trained and qualified to operate that class of vehicle, including fatigue training, for professional
drivers.
In the case of professional drivers, assessed pre-hire / selection and medically assessed with a
minimum follow up every three years to assure that they have the functional capacity to operate a
vehicle safely. When there is doubt that a potential driver has passed the screening assessment, the
individual should be referred to an appropriate registered health professional for a full assessment of
the issue raised.
Ensure drivers licenses are checked annually and records kept.
Ensure the purchase of vehicles meeting the BP Group Minimum Vehicle Specifications.
Ensure that manufacturers recommendations for vehicle maintenance are being met and records are kept.
Ensure that appropriate emergency response equipment is selected and supplied in each vehicle.
Enforce the OUSBU Driving Safety Practice.
Professional Driver
Responsible for obtaining/maintaining appropriate licenses to operate the type(s) of vehicle(s) the
employee assigned.

Page 3 of 7
Responsible for completing driver training covering the type(s) of vehicle(s) the employee operates,
including attachment of trailers, prior to operation of any Company vehicle.
Advise supervision or the Local HSE Representative of any medical, physical, or psychological condition
that would impair his/her performance of driving tasks.
Inspect the vehicle, including any attached trailers and hitching devices, before using to ensure proper
working condition.
Promptly report any malfunction or problem with the vehicle to the supervisor.
BP Medical
Participate in the development of medical assessment guidelines to assure that drivers have the functional
capacity to operate a vehicle safely.
Provide assistance to the operations centers in implementing the medical assessment guidelines and
referring individuals who have not passed the medical assessment to an appropriate registered health
professional for a full assessment of the issue raised.
Participate in the development of fatigue training to assure that professional drivers have training to
identify and reduce the impact of fatigue.
Human Resources
Human Resources is responsible for assisting field management with the application of disciplinary
consequences and the processing of affected employees who cannot pass the medical assessment.
Houston Supply Chain Management
Ensure ARI specifications are aligned with BP Group Vehicle Specifications
Works with legal to understand how to include the requirements of the OUSBU Driving Practice into new
and existing contracts
5.0 . Procedure/Process
5.1 Vehicles Requirements

Vehicle Equipment - All BP vehicles must have attributes and features specified and installed so that they
comply with the respective minimum specifications. Vehicles must be selected and purchased as fit-for-
purpose, assuring proper equipment and meeting a minimum set of safety specifications. Refer to BP
Group Minimum Specification Checklists Attachment 6. Where applicable, equipment changes will follow
the Management of Change process and/or consult Automotive Resources International (ARI) for
appropriate manufacturer options and proper aftermarket outfitting for the specified vehicle service.
Emergency Preparedness Equipment Each operating center will determine the appropriate emergency
equipment for the respective area (e.g., cell phones, radios, fire extinguishers, flares, cold weather gear,
SCBA, first aid kit, etc.) and ensure all BP vehicles are equipped.
Radar detectors - are strictly prohibited.
Motorcycles - are strictly prohibited.
Vehicle Data Recorder - All owned or leased BP light vehicles will be equipped with a vehicle data
recorder (VDR) able to record the following minimum data: seatbelt, speed, harsh acceleration, harsh
deceleration, and driving hours. Other vehicles may require VDRs per requirements outlined in the
OUSBU VDR guidelines. A proactive process of capturing and analyzing behavior data will be
implemented and actively used. Refer to OUSBU Vehicle Data Recorder Guideline Attachment 5 for
details.
Operations and Maintenance - The person assigned to a BP vehicle and the person assigned to the OC
pool vehicles is to assure vehicles are operating properly and maintained in accordance with the
Page 4 of 7
manufacturers recommendations and in compliance with regulatory requirements (e.g., state annual
inspections). Attachment 1 Vehicle Inspection Checklist, or equivalent, shall be documented quarterly.
Inspection records will be maintained locally for a minimum of three years.
Passengers - Drivers are to ensure that passengers are carried in vehicles appropriate for the passengers
(i.e. no passengers in the back of trucks, no more passengers than seatbelts, etc.). The number of
passengers shall not exceed the manufacturers design specification for the vehicle.
Passengers in company vehicles that are not BP contractors or business related are prohibited, unless
supervisor approval is received.
Loads - Loads are secure and do not exceed manufacturers specifications and legal limits for the vehicle.
Vehicles will be equipped with only necessary equipment, laid out or positioned in the safest configuration.
Where applicable, equipment changes will follow the Management of Change process. Loads, equipment
and other items shall be tied-down or secured before commencing motion and total weight should never
exceed the weight limitations of the vehicle. Attachment 7 Load Binder Policy shall be referenced prior to
the utilization of load binders.
5.2 Driver Requirements

Driver/Operator License/Certifications - All drivers of affected vehicles must possess a valid drivers
license for the class of vehicle operated from the state where they reside. All operators of specialty
vehicles (i.e. motorcycles, forklift, backhoe, bobcat, maintainer, front-end loader, etc.) must possess the
appropriate regulatory required certifications.
Drivers of affected vehicles will be required to submit license to supervisor initially upon hire.
Local supervision will conduct periodic (minimum of annual) checks of license validity of
employees with an assigned company vehicle or employees that may drive a pool vehicle. These
checks shall be documented and retained for the current year.
Drivers of affected vehicles must notify their supervisor if their license is suspended or revoked.
Operation of a motor vehicle to conduct company business will be prohibited until the license is
reissued.
Drivers of affected vehicles must follow any restrictions imposed upon a license (i.e., corrective
lenses, weight restrictions, etc.)
OC personnel and project management will conduct periodic checks of specialty certifications of
equipment operators.
Drivers require a commercial driver license for:
NOTE: State requirements may vary. Check local requirements.
A single vehicle with a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of more than 26,000 pounds.
A trailer with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds when the combined weight of trailer and pull
vehicle exceeds 26,000 pounds.
A vehicle designed to transport more than 16 persons (including the driver).
Any size vehicle, which requires hazardous material, placards. Any vehicle that transports
greater than 119 gallons or 1000 pounds of non-bulk hazardous material or a Table 1
hazardous material (49 CFR 172.101-102) or is greater than 882 lbs in weight in a container
larger than 119 gallons and is in solid form.
Attachment 2 D.O.T. Driver Qualification File Checklist may be used as a guide in establishing a
drivers qualification file.
Unattended Vehicles The parking brake must be engaged and the automatic transmission placed in park
anytime a vehicle is left unattended regardless of whether the engine is idling or shutdown. Or in the case
of vehicles with manual transmissions left idling in neutral, set parking brake and place wheel chocks in
front and rear of at least one drive wheel. Vehicles with manual transmissions left unattended while the
Page 5 of 7
engine is off must be parked with the transmission in its lowest forward gear or in reverse gear and with the
parking brake set.
Clear Path of Travel Review Prior to each operation of a vehicle the driver shall ensure that there are no
obstacles in the intended path of travel and visually in good working order before proceeding.
Parking Drivers must assess hazards and park in a manner or area that is legal and minimizes risk.
Parking shall be done in a manner that minimizes backing upon exit of parking space.
Backing Is to be avoided when possible. Drivers will park in spaces where they can legally drive
forward when leaving, otherwise they will back into the parking space upon arrival. A spotter shall be used
to assist the driver during backing operations of heavy vehicles and should be considered for light vehicles.
Jump Starting The following steps shall be followed:
Safety goggles must be worn when jump-starting vehicles.
Assure both batteries are of the same voltage and vehicles are not touching.
Connect booster cables to the positive terminal of the good battery first and then to the positive
terminal of the dead battery, then connect the negative cable to the good battery.
Ground the last cable to the engine block (or comparable engine frame negative ground) of the
vehicle with the dead battery. WARNING: Place this ground at least 18" from the dead battery to
prevent a possible battery explosion.
Reverse these steps to remove cables.
Trailer towing If a trailer must be towed, the driver must conduct a pre-trip safety inspection of the
trailer and vehicle. All federal, state and local requirements for towing shall be followed. Refer to
OUSBU Pre-Trip Assessment Guidance Attachment 3. A task specific JSA must be conducted.
Vehicle Towing Vehicles must be towed by competent personnel, using a vehicle and/or equipment (e.g.,
tow bar, dolly, etc.) designed specifically for towing applications. The pulling force shall not exceed
towing gear/equipment manufacturers specifications. Straps and/or chains shall not be used for towing
activities.
Vehicle Extraction - Constant tension shall be applied to the tow strap and it shall never be jerked. Only
equipment designed for extraction activities will be utilized. A task specific JSA must be conducted.
Personal Use BP vehicles may only be used with prior authorization by local management.
Fueling Vehicle Static electricity, non-intrinsically safe devices, spills, and health exposures (breathing
and skin) are of concern while fueling vehicles. Refer to Attachment 4 Safe Fueling Guidance. Filling
fuel cans in the truck bed is prohibited.
Daytime running lights to be more visible on the road, daytime running lights are required. If daytime
running lights are not available, the vehicle can be retrofitted with an after market kit or headlights must be
manually turned on during daylight hours.
Affected Vehicle Incidents Drivers are responsible to report all affected vehicle incidents (on-road and
off-road) to their immediate supervisor as soon as reasonable. Concern for personal safety should be the
first priority. Motor Vehicle Incidents will be reported, classified, recorded and investigated per the
OUSBU Initial Incident Reporting, Investigation and Tracking Practice.
In the event of a vehicle incident, VDR and mobile phone records shall be reviewed as a part of the local
incident investigation. Houston H&S staff may be utilized as a resource to provide mobile phone records.
Driver/Operator Training All BP personnel who drive while conducting BP business are required to
successfully complete BP approved driving safety course and assessment within six months of commencing
driving on BP business, and refresher training/assessment must be completed at least every three years
thereafter.

Page 6 of 7
BP employee professional drivers must attend an approved 8-hour driving safety course and a BP approved
driver tiredness/fatigue awareness training.
Driving Assessments - Professional drivers have successfully completed an on-road driving assessment as
part of their recruitment/selection.
Medical Assessments - Professional drivers must be medically assessed. A minimum follow up frequency
of every three years is required to assure that they have the functional capacity to operate a vehicle safely.
If a change in their medical condition occurs, which affects their ability to drive, they must immediately
inform their supervisor and cease operating a vehicle until medically re-assessed. BP Medical is
accountable for defining the parameters of the medical assessment and responsible, along with local
supervision, for coordination of these activities. The respective state Division of Motor Vehicles
assessment made during driver license acquisition/renewal constitutes the medical assessment for non-
professional drivers.
Training Documentation All driver training will be documented through the learning management
system - VTA
Working Hours - Business Segments, Functions and Regions must ensure that reward mechanisms do not
provide an incentive for professional drivers (whether or not they are BP employees) to drive excessive
hours which could lead to them driving whilst tired or fatigued.
Requirement Rule
Maximum working hours within a rolling 24 16 hours total
hour period
Maximum working hours 60 hours/rolling 7 day or
120 hours/14 days, subject to an 80 hours/7 days maximum and
an average of 60 hours per week over an extended period.
Maximum driving time within a rolling 24 10 hours total excluding commuting driving time
hour period
Work breaks (including meals) during a Minimum of 30 min break after every 5 hrs
working shift
Off-duty period per rolling 7 days Minimum of a continuous 24 hour break
Fatigue and Tiredness - Every BP employee is obliged to stop driving if they are tired or fatigued. They
should either make alternative travel arrangements or have an appropriate period of rest/sleep before
driving.
Mobile phones or two-way radios cannot be in use by the driver while the vehicle is in motion, except as
required by regulation, e.g. when moving oversized loads in a convoy with escort vehicle(s). This includes
hands-free devices and applies to:
BP mobile phones and two-way radios in any vehicle
Personal mobile phones and two-way radios in affected vehicles
Personal mobile phones and two-way radios on BP business in any vehicle
Personal mobile phones and two-way radios while on BP owned or leased property
Passive listening and response to operational emergencies using two-way radios is allowed, as supported by
the local documented risk assessment for these circumstances. Operational emergencies comprise those
situations that expose operational activities to immediate danger or require immediate attention due to
significant adverse business impact.
Seatbelts Driver must ensure that seatbelts are worn by all occupants when a vehicle is in motion. In
addition, certain mobile plant vehicles (i.e. forklift, backhoe, bobcat, maintainer, front end loader) must
have seatbelts worn while in operation. Excluded are occupants of vehicles that are not normally or not

Page 7 of 7
required to be equipped with seat belts, such as: buses, mass transit, 4- wheelers, golf carts and
snowmobiles.
Substance Abuse Employees are prohibited from operating an affected vehicle while under the influence
of drugs or alcohol. Employees must notify their supervisor when using prescription or over-the-counter
medications that advise against operating a vehicle and/or equipment. All BP employees involved in a BP
recordable vehicle incident will be subject to a drug and alcohol screen per BP D&A policy, when
determined that the employees actions contributed materially to the incident.
5.3 Operation of Vehicles in Proximity to Hydrocarbons Processing Equipment

Motor vehicles may not be operated within ten (10) feet of hydrocarbon containing process equipment and
piping unless a hot work permit has been issued.
The above requirement does not include:
Refueling operations
Buried equipment
Additional site-specific exceptions may only be allowed by utilizing the MOC process.

Department of Transportation, 49 CFR, various sections including, but not limited to, Parts 100-179,
391-397.
gHSEr element # 3, People, Training and Behaviors.
BP Road Safety Data Collection & Reporting Requirements
Westlake Campus Parking Garage Safety Policy
OUSBU Initial Incident Reporting, Investigation & Tracking Practice
BP US Substance Abuse Policy
Group Functional Standard - Personal Safety Driving
NFPA Fact Sheets - Safety at Service Stations
Group Vehicle Specifications
Revision Log
Revision Authority Custodian Revision Details
12/31/01 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Final Issue
04/19/04 Duane Kortsha Eric Brown Update to comply with Group Functional Standard

Attachment 1
Vehicle Inspection Checklist
Date Inspected: ________ Vehicle #: _______ Custodian: ________________ Mileage: _____________
Item OK N/A Needs Repair Comments

Vehicle Accident Report
Form Report Form 48-100
(2-02)
Shipping papers (hazardous
chemicals) if necessary
Vehicle Registration
Insurance information (self-

insured number)
Tires (Inflation, tread depth)
Springs
Shocks
Exhaust System
Engine
Steering
Horn
Mirrors
Mobile Radio
First Aid Kit/Eyewash
Fire Extinguishers
Winch Line & Hook
Winch Brake
Brakes working
Parking Brake
Windshield Wipers
Windshield
Washers
Headlights: Hi/Lo
Turn Signals
Brake Lights
Backup Lights
Instrument Lights
Tail Lights
Body Condition
Paper Work
Backup Alarm
Site Specific Requirements/Equipment:
Control Tier: 2 Print Date:6/8/2004

Documentum Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00105 Revision Date: 4/19/04
Attachment 3
PRE-TRIP ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES
A Pre-Trip Assessment is performed by the driver and/or passengers and should occur before driving an
affected vehicle. The driver and/or passengers of the vehicle should use this mental checklist before each
trip.
Pre-Trip Assessment & Checklist
Are the conditions right???
Weather Conditions (NOTE: the beginning letter of each element, WDRVC, can
Driver Conditions better be remembered by We Drive Really Very Carefully!!)
Route Conditions
Vehicle Conditions
Cargo/Passenger Conditions
We Drive Really Very Carefully!!
Weather Conditions What are the weather conditions?
Is it raining, snowing, icing, etc? If so, is the trip really necessary right now, or should I wait?
Will I need extra equipment/preparation for the weather? (Raincoat, umbrella, sand, survival kit, snow/mud tires, chains,
scraper, etc?)
Driver Conditions What is the drivers (or my) condition?
Am I licensed and competent to drive this particular vehicle?

Do I have adequate time to make this trip safely without being rushed? (If not, consider having someone else make the trip
for you, putting off the trip until another time, or postponing the after-trip plans, etc.)
Am I conditionally right to drive this vehicle? (Alert, not under the influence, 20/20 vision, mentally and emotionally
stable, not fatigued or tired, etc.)
Do I remember the 5 Keys to Defensive Driving?
Aim High in Steering Keep Your Eyes Moving Make Sure They See You
Get the Big Picture Leave Yourself an Out
Route Conditions What are the route conditions?
Do I know where I am going and how to get there?

Do I need a map or directions and need to study or plan the route?
What are the hazards of this particular route and how can I eliminate or minimize them? (dangerous intersections, high
speed limits, rush hour, no shoulders, two-lane, hills/curves, farm machinery, etc.)
Vehicle Conditions What is the condition of the vehicle?
current inspection sticker and automobile registration Seatbelts (working and enough for # passengers)
tires inflated with correct pressure and have correct tread depth
working wipers in good condition
breaking and blinker lights working and clean clear/unobstructed vision, adjustment of mirrors
oil, fuel and window washer fluid level Is the vehicle appropriate for the task?
working horn Size and type for passengers
Size and type for the cargo
Cargo/Passengers Conditions What are the cargo/passenger conditions?
Do ALL passengers have access to working seatbelts/shoulder harnesses?

Are ALL passengers buckled up before vehicle is put into motion?
Is ALL cargo and/or potential projectiles properly secured?
Does cargo require special provisions? (hazardous waste, cylinders, animals, pipe, instrumentation, etc.)

Attachment 4
Safe Fueling Guidance
To prevent fire and explosions while refueling vehicles or filling portable containers:
Turn off your vehicle engine while refueling. Put your vehicle in park and set the
emergency brake.
Do not smoke, light matches or lighters while refueling or when using gasoline anywhere
else.
Don't engage in other activities while pumping gas, you are transferring a hazardous
substance that requires your full attention.
Dont talk on your mobile phone or portable radio, use your computer, PDA, pager, or
other electronic device while refueling, unless these devices have been confirmed as
intrinsically safe.
Use only the refueling latch provided on the gasoline dispenser nozzle, never jam the
refueling latch on the nozzle open.
Don't get in and out of your vehicle while refueling. A static electric charge can develop on
your body as you slide across the seat, and when you reach for the pump, a spark can ignite
gasoline vapor. Discharge any static electricity by touching metal on the outside of the
vehicle, away from the filling point, before removing the nozzle from your vehicle.
In the unlikely event a static-caused fire occurs when refueling, leave the nozzle in the fill
pipe and leave the area immediately. Notify the station attendant immediately.
Do not over-fill or top-off your vehicle tank, which can cause gasoline spillage.
Avoid prolonged breathing of gasoline vapors. Use gasoline only in open areas that get
plenty of fresh air. Keep your face away from the nozzle or container opening.
When dispensing gasoline into a container, use only an approved portable container and
place it on the ground when filling to avoid a possible static electricity ignition of fuel
vapors. Containers should never be filled while inside a vehicle or its trunk, the bed of a
pickup truck or the floor of a trailer. Fill slowly to decrease the buildup of static electricity
and minimize spilling or splattering. Manually control the nozzle throughout the process,
keeping the nozzle in direct contact with the container. Fill it only about 95 percent full to
leave room for expansion. Place cap tightly on the container after filling - do not use
containers that do not seal properly.
If gasoline spills on the container, make sure that it has evaporated before you place the
container in your vehicle. Report spills to the attendant.
When transporting gasoline in a portable container make sure it is secured against tipping
and sliding, and never leave it in direct sunlight or in the trunk of a car.
Never siphon gasoline by mouth nor put gasoline in your mouth for any reason. Gasoline
can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. If someone swallows gasoline, do not induce
vomiting. Contact a doctor immediately.
Keep gasoline away from your eyes and skin; it may cause irritation. Remove gasoline-
soaked clothing immediately.
Use gasoline as a motor fuel only. Never use gasoline to wash your hands or as a cleaning
solvent.

Light Vehicle
Minimum Specification
Checklist
PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. This copy is valid only at the time of printing. The control version
of this document can be found at the Road Safety Intranet Homepage.
Issue Date: 13-Jan-2004
Revision Date: 05-Mar-2004 Page - 1 - of 5
Light Vehicle Minimum Specification Checklist
Overview: This checklist is designed to support the Group Functional Standard

Personal safety Driving Element 1 which reads: All categories of vehicle,
including mobile plant must only be operated if: The vehicle is fit for purpose,
inspected and confirmed to be in safe working order, with seatbelts installed and
functional. Further basis for these specifications can be found in a more
comprehensive document available in the Road Safety Toolbox.
Scope: This checklist can be used to evaluate the fitness of light vehicles
(under 3.5 tonnes) operated by the BP workforce in the conduct of company
business, to include all company cars and light trucks, rental vehicles, privately
owned/leased vehicles and vehicles contracted by or on behalf of BP. This
includes carriage of members of the workforce, or dedicated BP loads and/or
journeys dedicated to BP.
This checklist does not cover heavy vehicles (over 3.5 tonnes), motorcycles,
mobile plant and non-motorised vehicles.
LIGHT VEHICLE MINIMUM

SPECIFICATION CHECKLIST
Driver name: _________________________________________________________
Business/Location: ___________________________________________________
Vehicle Data: Year ______ Make ____________ Model/Style ________________
Vehicle Identification Number: __________________________________________
Vehicle Registration: Tag # __________ Expiration date: ___________________
Ownership data (circle one): BP Rental Contractor Employee Other _________
Date of inspection: dd/mm/year ____/____/_______
Inspected by: ________________________________________________________
Minimum Specifications Yes No Comments

Anti-lock brakes consult owners manual or look
for an ABS indicator light on the instrument
panel
Air Bag driver side as a minimum

N/A
Audible Reversing Alarm specify for mini-buses
and similar size vans
Brake Lights (rear) left, right and eye level

central mounted third stop light
Bull Bars/Brush Guards (metal) Do not specify

or fit Metal Bull Bars/Brush Guards
Emergency Lights (front & rear)-flashing emergency

Breakdown lights
Head Restraints driver & passenger front

seats at a minimum. Head restraints for
rear seats are strongly recommended
Mirrors outboard driver & passenger side

and internal rear view mirror
N/A
Rear fold down seat locking mechanism -
ensure fold down & removable seats can be
secured in place
N/A
Rollover Protection Open-top vehicles must be
fitted with rollover protection
N/A
Safety Screens/Bars & Load constraint features
Ensure occupants are protected from shifting
cargo by safety screen/bars, tie-down points,
or safety netting
Seat Belts Specify three point/diagonal seat

belts for front and rear outboard seats.
Specify lap belts for all other seats as a
minimum.
Minimum Specifications (cont) Yes No Comments

N/A
Seats in mini-buses sufficiently high and
designed without any hard or protruding
surfaces
Side impact protection side impact bars which

are internal to door structure and padded
internal door panels free from raised or hard
surfaces
Steering wheel and column padding on wheel

spokes and hub with wheel securing nut
set deep into the hub, and collapsible columns
Tires/Tyres radial tires/tyres with a minimum tread

depth of 1.6mm (2/32nd inch) across 75% of
the width of the tire/tyre. Tires/Tyres must be
fit for purpose, terrain and season (i.e., off-road
vs. on road, all-terrain, winter driving)
Vehicle Condition / Maintenance

Follow preventive maintenance
schedule in accordance with manufacturer
requirements and document compliance
N/A
Vehicle Data Recorder Required in countries
designated as high risk (see Element 7 of the
Functional Standard)
Vehicle Mass Vehicle must weigh more than

1000 kg or 2200 lbs (curb weight). Vehicle
weight can often be found on a metal data plate
affixed to the inside driver door
Windscreens / Windshields and Windows -

Specify laminated glass windscreens /
windshields and tempered glass side
and rear windows
This vehicle complies with BPs light vehicle

minimum specification requirements
Comments:
Inspector Name / Signature Date
REVISION CONTROL
Number Date Revisions Who By

0 13/01/2004 First issued RSLT
1 05/03/2004 First Revision RSLT
Attachment 7
SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES
Load Binder Policy Approved: OCMs
BP America Production Company Date: 10/6/03
BP America Production Company has determined that the use of lever-type load binders poses an unnecessary level of risk and
shall be phased out of BP operations. Advances in equipment technology provide the opportunity for continual improvement
by replacing lever-type load binders with the comparable, safer ratchet-type load binder.
Phasing Out Lever-Type Load Binders
Inform BP personnel and contractor workforce of plan to eliminate the use of lever-type load binders
Provide BP personnel and contractor workforce with a review and copies of MOC containing: safe operating
practices, hazard review and manufacturers Q&A
Inventory BP owned/operated locations & facilities, remove lever-type load binders from service and replace with
ratchet-type load binders
Request that contractor workforce provide a plan/schedule for replacing lever-type load binders
When planned work performed by contractors will require the use of binders inform the appropriate individual(s) of
BPs binder policy
Lever-type load binders that show-up unexpectedly shall be operated in accordance with safe operating procedures,
BP job sponsor shall inform contractor of BP policy and notify local safety representative, safety representative shall
be responsible for contacting contractors home office to provide BP policy information
Timing for transition shall be determined at the OC/Wells level, depending on operational complexity
In situations where the use of ratchet type binders is not applicable or have been determined to introduce unique
hazards, local management (OCM/Wells Manager) will be required to approve the use of lever type binders in
accordance with safe operating procedures.
Assurance shall be managed through field audits and the ASA process
The following information illustrates the recommended replacement load binders:
1. Standard ratchet-type load binder: Ratchet-type binders are the preferred style for replacement of the lever-type.
Min-Max Working Proof Weight Handle Barrel Take Dimensions

Chain Load Load Each Length Length Up (in.)
Size Limit (lbs.) (lbs.) (in.) (in.) (in.)
(in.) (lbs.) A B C E E1 F F1 G
5/16-3/8 6600 13200 11.23 14 10 8.0 14.00 1.38 2.75 22.94 30.94 25.13 33.13 .50
3/8-1/2 9200 18400 12.83 14 10 8.0 14.00 1.38 2.75 25.25 33.25 27.63 35.63 .63
1/2-5/8 13000 26000 14.55 14 10 8.0 14.00 1.38 2.75 26.38 34.38 29.44 37.44 .72

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING
Attachment 7
2. Load binder with a body load releasing capability (ACCO Pushover BX 600). Pushover type binders are acceptable for
situations that do not allow for the use of a ratchet-type load binder. Use of handle extension (cheater pipe) is prohibited.
The handle
The handle freely At this stage, the virtually remains
moves to the start center body starts to in the same
of the release rotate independently position as the
point of the handle. chain tension is
release.
Chain Binder
Working
Lever Take Wt.
Load
Size/Grade Length Up Ea.
Limit
Inches Inches Lbs.
Lbs.
5/16" Grade 70 4,700
12-1/2 4-1/2 10-3/8
3/8" Grade 40 5,400
5/16" Grade 70 4,700
16 4-1/2 7
3/8" Grade 40 5,400
3/8" Grade 70 6,600
16 4-1/2 10-1/2
1/2" Grade 40 9,200
5/16" Grade 70 4,700
15-3/4 8 9-1/2
3/8" Grade 40 5,400
3/8" Grade 70 6,600
15-3/4 8 11
1/2" Grade 40 9,200

Attachment 7
LOAD BINDER
WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS
Failure to use load binders properly may result in serious injury or even death to you or others.
Do not operate a load binder while standing on the load.
Move the handle with caution. It may whip Keep all body parts clear.
Keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle and any loose chain lying on the handle.
You must be familiar with state and federal regulations regarding size and number of chain systems required for securing
loads on trucks.
Always consider the safety of nearby workers as well as yourself when using load binders.
While under tension, a load binder must not bear against an object, as this will cause side load.
Do not use a handle extender (cheater pipe) - see instructions.
Do not attempt to close or open the binder with more than one person.
Instructions
Lever Type Load Binders
Hook the load binder to the chain so you can operate it while standing on the ground. Position the load binder so its
handle can be pulled downward to tighten the chain. Be aware of ice, snow, rain, oil, etc. that can affect your footing.
Make certain your footing is secure.
The use of a handle extender (cheater pipe) is prohibited. If sufficient leverage cannot be obtained using the lever type load
binder by itself, a ratchet type binder should be used.
During and after tightening chain, check the load binder handle position. Be sure it is in the locked position and that its
bottom side touches the chain link.
Chain tension may decrease due to load shifting during transport. To be sure the load binder remains in proper position:
Secure handle to chain by wrapping the loose end of chain around the handle and the tight chain, or tie handle to the chain
with soft wire.
When releasing the load binder, remember there is a great deal of energy in the stretched chain. This will cause the load
binder handle to move very quickly with great force when it is unlatched. Move the handle with caution. It may whip -
Keep all body parts clear.
Never use a cheater pipe or handle extender to release the handle. Use a steel bar and pry under the handle and stay out of
the path of handle as it moves upward.
If you release the handle by hand, use an open hand under the handle and push upward. Do not close your hand around the
handle. Always keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle.

Attachment 7
Instructions - Ratchet Load Binders

Manually unscrew the end hoods to get enough reach
Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from the ground, ideal placement is between waist & chest high
Attach one hook on the chain close to an anchor point to minimize hook rotation
Take up as much slack as possible and hook the chain to the opposite end of the load binder
Set the pawl and start closing the load binder, use clean gloves
Keep fingers and hands away from pawl and gear
Maintain a buffer zone from the end of the ratchet handle
Secure footing and stroke handle until desired tension is achieved, handle extensions are prohibited
Loads can shift, check the tension of the load binder frequently, re-tighten as needed
Maintenance of All Load Binders

Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks, or gouges. If bending or cracks are present - Do not use
load binder.
Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to
extend product life and reduce friction wear.

Study Title: Driving with Cell phone/2 Way Radio
Date: 2/20/2004
Risk Ranking Matrix
Likelihood
Unlikely (Category 1) Not likely to Remote (Category 2) Likely to Occasional (Category 3) Likely to Frequent (Category 4) Likely to
occur in the BU in 20 years. occur once in the BU in 5 years. occur more than once in the BU in 1 occur several times in the BU in 1
year. year.
Negligible (Level 1)
Operating Personnel:
Superficial Injury 1 2 3 4
Public: No impact.
Environmental:
Hazardous process fluid
contained.
Marginal (Level 2)
S Minor injury.
Public: No impact. 2 4 6 8
e Environmental: Small
release of hazardous
v process fluid.
e Critical (Level 3)
r Severe injury or With Communications
disability.
i Public: Exposed to
t accident. 3 6 9 12
y Environmental:
Uncontained release of
hazardous process fluid. Without Communications
Catastrophic (Level 4)
Death
Public: Exposed to life
threatening accident. 4 8 12 16
Environmental: Large,
uncontained release of
hazardous process fluid.
Documentum Document NumberUPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00113
PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. Print Date: 05/05/04
Control Tier: 2 Revision Date: 04/19/04
SAFE LOAD SECURING GUIDELINES
Loads are secure and do not exceed manufacturers specification and legal limits for the vehicle.
Loads
Loads are secure and do not exceed manufacturers specifications and legal limits for the vehicle.
Vehicles will be equipped with only necessary equipment, laid out or positioned in the safest
configuration. Where applicable, equipment changes will follow the Management of Change
process. Loads, equipment and other items shall be tied-down or secured before commencing
motion and total weight should never exceed the weight limitations of the vehicle. Attachment Load
Binder Policy shall be referenced prior to the utilization of load binders.
Guidance
Loads, equipment & other items transported external to the driving compartment or on a trailer:
shall be secured in such a manner to prevent against the loss of the load, leaking,
spilling, blowing off or falling from the motor vehicle.
shall be contained, immobilized or secured in such a manner to prevent shifting.
if likely to roll, shall be restrained by chocks, wedges, a cradle or other equivalent means
to prevent rolling.
if considered top heavy and capable of tipping, shall be secured in such a manner to
prevent tipping.
if placed beside each other and secured by transverse tie-downs must either: be placed
in direct contact with each other or prevented from shifting towards each other while in
transit.
Securing devices and systems must be capable of withstanding the following three
forces, applied separately:
o deceleration in the forward direction
o acceleration in the reverse direction
o acceleration in a lateral direction
Tie-down points added to a vehicle shall be applied by the manufacture or meet
manufacturer specifications. If manufacturer specifications cant be determined, the MOC
process shall be used to obtain approval of tie-down points.
Loads, equipment & other items transported under a pick-up, bed-covering devise shall be
considered secured.
Loads, equipment & other items transported internal to the driving compartment:
It is the drivers responsibility to assure loads, equipment and other items transported inside a
vehicle are secure and/or positioned to eliminate/minimize safety risks to the occupants. Regarding
these items, consideration shall be given to:
transporting in the trunk of a car, i.e. suitcase, computer bag

stowing under or behind a seat, glove box or armrest console
covering by netting
holding in the seat by a seatbelt or similar devise

Documentum Document NumberUPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00127-2 Revision Date: 04/19/04
Section 3, Processes
Chapter 4, Electrical Safety Program
Chapter 4
Electrical Safety Program
I. Scope
A. The Electrical Safety Program does not apply to electric utilities furnishing BP
operations with electric power. The equipment or systems owned or leased by an
electric utility, even if on BP property, are not covered by either the General
Electrical Safety nor the Power Generation, Distribution, and Transmission sections.
B. Application of the Electrical Safety Program starts at the point at which the electric
power becomes BPs. This will usually be the point at which the power is metered
for payment. For the purpose of this chapter, the service point is defined as the point
of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring.
C. The General Electrical Safety and the Electrical Power Generation, Distribution, and
Transmission sections of this chapter are mutually exclusive.
DEFINITION OF QUALIFIED PERSON.

One familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.
Note 1: Whether an employee is considered to be a "qualified person" will depend upon various
circumstances in the workplace. It is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual to be
considered qualified" with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but "unqualified" as to
other equipment.(See 29 CFR 1910.332(b)(3) for training requirements that specifically apply to
qualified persons.)
Note 2: An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of such
training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of training and
who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a qualified person
for the performance of those duties.
II. General Electrical Safety
The General Electrical Safety section applies to electrical equipment and systems from the
service point for the installation to the outlets. The point at which power becomes BPs
and the service point can be the same, without any equipment or systems in between. In
that event, only this section of the Electrical Safety Program applies.
The following are covered by the General Electrical Safety section:

In a plant, all equipment and systems from the service point to the outlets
Electric submersible pumps, beam type pumps, their motors, controllers and wiring
to the service point of the nearest transformer of the field distribution wiring
Thermal electric generators
Emergency power generators
Battery-powered systems and uninterruptible power supplies
Photogalvanic systems
Motor Control Centers (MCCs)
Compressor motors
Electrical panels, switch breakers, and GFCIs
A. Requirements
1. Some procedures in this chapter apply to only qualified personnel having

knowledge of the hazards and dangers of the work. These qualified personnel
shall be specifically identified for each type of work.
2. All live parts must be de-energized and secured with a lock and tag before
personnel begin work (see the Lockout/Tagout chapter of this Safety Standard).
Only personnel qualified by documented experience, training and/or license

may perform work on energized systems.
3. If the exposed parts are de-energized and locked and tagged out according to
procedure, a qualified employee must use test equipment to test the exposed
circuit elements and electrical parts of equipment and verify complete de-
energization. The test will also determine if any energized condition exists as a
result of inadvertently induced voltage or unrelated voltage backfeed. Rated
test equipment must be checked for proper operation immediately before and
after the test to ensure reliability. A non-contact voltage proximity meter rated
for the voltage being tested with warning light indicator and audible alarm is
recommended when working on motor control centers and high voltage
switchgear.
4. If the exposed live parts are not de-energized, work practices must be used to
protect the exposed employees. These include:

(a) Only qualified persons wearing required personal protective equipment

may perform the work.
(b) In the case of overhead lines, guarding, isolating, or insulating materials

must be used to prevent employees from direct contact with their body or
indirect contact with tools, equipment or other conductive materials.
(c) Illumination must be provided to enable safe work.
(d) Protective shields, barriers, or insulating materials must be used to avoid

inadvertent contact with energized parts in confined spaces such as
manholes or vaults. Doors, hinged panels, etc. must also be secured to
prevent their swinging into an employee.
(e) Conducting materials in contact with the employee must be handled

appropriately to prevent them from contacting energized parts.
(f) Only portable ladders with nonconducting side rails (fiberglass) be used.
(g) Conductive clothing or jewelry (such as, watch bands, bracelets, rings, key
chains, necklaces, metalized aprons or metal headgear) shall not be worn.
(h) Conductive cleaning materials such as steel wool, metalized cloth, silicon
carbide or any conductive liquid solutions shall not be used in proximity to
energized parts unless procedures are followed to prevent contact with
energized parts.
5. Only qualified persons can use test equipment and instruments on electrical
circuits or equipment that can expose them to energized parts. The equipment
must be rated and designed for the device to which they will be connected and
the environment in which they will be used. The equipment must be visually
inspected for damage before use. All defective or damaged cords and
equipment must be removed from service immediately until repaired and tested.
Hot work permits must be issued to use equipment in location where the
possibility of igniting flammable gases or liquids exists (see the Hot Work
chapter of this Standard).
6. Only load rated switches, circuit breakers, or other devices specifically designed
as disconnecting means may be used for opening, reversing, or closing circuits
under load conditions.
7. After a circuit is automatically de-energized by a fuse or circuit breaker, it shall

not be re-energized until determining the equipment and circuit can be safely

energized by a qualified person. Manual re-closing of circuit breakers or re-

energizing circuits by replacing a fuse more than once is prohibited.
8. Bypassing protective devices or using a fuse or circuit breaker with a rating too
high to protect the circuit or equipment involved is also prohibited.
9. The following procedures shall be followed when working at electrical control

panels:
(a) If you must touch anything on an electrical control panel, first check it with
a voltage meter.
(b) Before operating switches or breakers ensure all protective panels are
closed and fastened.
(c) To disconnect the electrical power from the equipment, Always move the
control switch to the off position, before moving the main switch to the off
position.
(d) To connect the electrical power, always ensure all control switches are off
before engaging the master switch.
(e) When operating the control or main switch, never stand in front of the
electrical panel. Always stand off to the side of the panel to operate the
switch. Never look at the control panel. Should the panel explode, your
eyes or body must not be in a direct line with the explosion.
10. All electrical disconnects must be legibly marked to indicate what each
disconnect controls unless located and arranged so the purpose is obvious. The
service, feeder, and branch circuit must also be legibly marked to indicate their
purpose. The applicable equipment must be identified to cross reference when
the disconnect is not obvious. The markings must be durable to withstand the
service environment.
11. Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts must have their covers
permanently marked HIGH VOLTAGE.
12. Where doors are used for access to voltage of 600 volts AC or DC or above,
either door locks or interlocks must be provided. A mechanical disconnecting
means to prevent access until voltage is removed from the enclosure must be in
place on doors where over 600 volts AC or DC is present.

13. The purchase of switches, controllers, circuit breakers, etc. must be limited to
only those types that can be mechanically locked out in the off position in order
to meet the requirements of the Lockout and Tagout Program.
14. Please refer to the Grounding and Bonding Procedures, Electrical Continuity
chapter for specific grounding requirements.
15. Use of portable electrical equipment:
(a) Portable equipment must not be handled in a manner that could cause
damage to the equipment.
(b) Electrical cords shall not be used for raising or lowering equipment, be
fastened by staples, or otherwise hung in a manner which could cause
damage to the outer insulation.
(c) Extension cords and cords on equipment must be visually inspected before
each use or at the beginning of each shift to determine if damage (loose
parts, deformed or missing pins, damage to the outer cover or insulation, or
pinched/crushed outer jacket) exists. All defective or damaged cords and
equipment must be removed from service immediately until repaired and
tested.
(d) Grounding type cords must be used with grounding type equipment.
Receptacles and plugs must not be altered in a manner which would
prevent proper continuity, and adapters cannot be used which defeat the
grounding connection of equipment.
(e) Only equipment and cords approved for use in wet locations may be used
on job locations where employees are likely to contact conductive liquids.
(f) Employees hands must be dry when plugging or unplugging energized

equipment. If energized plugs or receptacles are wet or could otherwise
provide a conducting path, only insulating protective equipment may be
used for handling the connection devices.
(g) Locking type connectors must be properly locked after connection.
(h) See the Assured Equipment Grounding chapter in this Standard for ground
fault circuit interrupter requirements.
B. Protective Equipment

1. Thermal protection from arcing of energy sources must be used when qualified
persons are working on live overhead or underground transmission lines or
other exposed live energy sources of 480 volts or greater when a potential for
flashover exists.
An electrical flash suit made of 10-ounce, 50-percent Nomex/50-percent Kevlar

brand fabric equipped with hood and polycarbonate viewplate must be worn,
even if other electrical protective equipment such as rubber insulating aprons
and leather gloves are worn.
2. Only rubber insulating protective equipment such as insulating blankets,

matting, covers, line hoses, gloves, and sleeves that are manufactured and tested
per the specifications in the applicable American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM) standard shall be used.
Requirements for the in-service care and use of rubber insulating equipment to
assure the safety of personnel utilizing that equipment are:
(a) Electrical protective equipment must be maintained in a safe, reliable

condition through proper usage, inspections, cleaning, storage, and testing.
(b) The insulating equipment shall not be used on voltages higher than it was
designed for.
(c) Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage before each days use
and after any incident that may have caused damage. These inspections do
not require documentation.
Rubber insulating gloves must also be given an air test, along with the
inspection. A visual inspection will not reveal pinhole defects in gloves.
Even a pinhole will allow current to pass through the glove and cause
electrical injury. To air test a rubber glove, roll the cuff to create an airtight
seal and inflate the glove. If the glove deflates or will not hold air, it must
be destroyed.
(d) Insulating equipment with any defect that would degrade the insulating
properties must not be used, and must be destroyed.
(e) Insulating equipment must be kept properly cleaned of foreign substances.
(f) Insulating equipment must be stored to protect it from light, temperature

extremes, excessive humidity, ozone, and other damaging conditions.

(g) Properly matched leather gloves must be worn over rubber insulating
gloves to provide abrasion and puncture resistance. Leather protective
gloves must be of a length to provide adequate arcing protection from the
leather to exposed skin.
(h) Electrical protective equipment must be electrically tested per the intervals
described below in accordance with the requirements of the applicable
ASTM standard. Insulating equipment failing to pass inspections or
electrical tests must not be used and must be destroyed, except in limited
repair situations. Repaired equipment must be electrically retested before
use.
Rubber insulating equipment test intervals are as follows:

Rubber insulating line hose: Upon indication that insulating value is suspect
Rubber insulating covers: Upon indication that insulating value is suspect
Rubber insulating blankets: Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter*
Rubber insulating gloves: Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter. *
Rubber insulating sleeves: Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter. *
*If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service,
it may not be placed into service unless it has been electrically tested within the
previous 12 months.
(i) Certification that the equipment is tested per the requirements must be
maintained.
To provide the required certification of the electrical tests, invoices or the

equivalent, identifying the equipment and the test date or purchase date,
must be maintained.
3. Only nonconductive hard hats are allowed for use where there is a potential for
injury from electric shock or burns due to contact with energized parts.
4. Only insulated tools or handling equipment may be used when working near
energized equipment if the tools or equipment might contact with the parts. The
insulating materials of the tools must be protected if subject to damage and rated
for the voltage which may be encountered.
(a) Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, must be used to
remove or install fuses when the terminals are energized.
(b) Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts must be
nonconductive and kept clean, dry and in an operable condition..
(c) Protective shields, barriers or insulating materials must be used to protect

each employee from shock, burns or other electrical injuries while the
employee is working near the energized parts which may be accidentally
contacted. This includes guarding the exposed energized parts from access
by unauthorized personnel.

5. Warning techniques will be used to protect employees from injury from

electrical equipment.
(a) Safety signs or tags will be used when necessary to warn employees about
electrical hazards (see the Safety Signs and Color Coding chapter of this
Standard).
(b) Barricades, along with safety signs or tags, will be used when necessary to
prevent or limit employee access to work areas where energized equipment
is exposed. The barricades shall not be conductive if the potential for
electrical contact exists.
(c) Where signs and barricades do not provide sufficient warning and
protection from electrical hazards, an attendant must be stationed to warn
and protect employees. All work shall stop if the attendant leaves for any
reason.
C. Overhead Lines
1. When an unqualified person is working in an elevated position near overhead

lines, the person and the longest conductive object he/she may contact may not
come closer than the following distances to any unguarded, energized overhead
line:
(a) For voltages to ground 50kv or below: 10 feet
(b) For voltages to ground over 50kv: 10 feet plus 4 inches for every 10kv
over 50kv
NOTE: For voltages encountered with overhead power lines, objects

which do not have an insulating rating for the voltage involved are
considered conductive.
2. When a qualified person is working in the vicinity of overhead lines, the person
may not approach or take any conductive object without an approved insulating
handle closer to the energized parts than:
(a) 300v and less: avoid contact
(b) Over 300v, to 750v: 1 foot
(c) Over 750v, to 2kv: 1 foot 6 inches
(d) Over 2kv, to 15kv: 2 feet

(e) Over 15kv, to 37kv: 3 feet
(f) Over 37kv, to 87.5kv: 3 feet 6 inches
(g) Over 87.5kv, to 121kv: 4 feet
(h) Over 121kv, to 140kv: 4 feet 6 inches
Exception to the above requirement is made when the person is insulated from
the energized part with personal protective equipment tested for the voltage
involved or the energized part is insulated from the person and all other
conductive objects at a different potential, or the person is insulated from all
conductive objects at a potential different from that of the energized part.
3. Any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having structure parts elevated

near energized overhead lines of 50kv or less must be operated so that a
clearance of 10 ft. is maintained. If the voltage is greater than 50kv, the
clearance must be increased 4 in. for every 10kv.
The following conditions may reduce these clearance requirements:
(a) If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance from
50kv or less overhead lines may be reduced to 4 ft. If the voltage is greater
than 50kv, the clearance must be increased 4 in. for every 10kv.
(b) If adequately rated insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with
the lines and are not part of or an attachment to the vehicle or its raised
structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within the designed
working dimensions of the insulating barrier.
(c) If an aerial lift is insulated for the voltage involved and if work is
performed by a qualified person, the clearance may be reduced to the
distanced noted in 2 above.
(d) Warning technique devices, as discussed in Protective Equipment

paragraph 5 above, must be used to ensure that employees on the ground
cannot contact aerial lift equipment or grounding points.
D. Training
1. All employees must be trained annually in the requirements of this program.

Employees who will not be working on or near exposed energized equipment

(unqualified persons) must be trained annually in the requirements of this

program.
2. Employees who may be working on or near exposed energized equipment must

be trained to become qualified to work on the equipment. This training
includes:
(a) Skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other
parts of electrical equipment.
(b) Skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of

exposed live parts.
(c) Clearance distances specified in the program and the corresponding

voltages to which exposure will result.
(d) When the work will involve either direct contact or contact by means of
tools or materials, qualified persons must also have training on proper use
of precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and
shielding materials, and insulated tools.
3. All training must be documented.
E. Classified Areas
1. Only equipment that is approved for that application shall be used in areas that
have been designated as a hazardous (classified) location.
2. Equipment and associated wiring approved as intrinsically safe shall be

permitted in any classified location. The National Electrical Code (NEC)
defines a intrinsically safe circuit as a circuit in which any spark or thermal
effect is incapable of causing ignition of a mixture of flammable or combustible
material in air under prescribed test conditions.
NOTE: Hazardous locations most likely encountered in upstream operations

will be:
(a) Class 1, Division 1:
(1) Where ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors exist

under normal operating conditions.
(2) Where ignitable concentrations of gases may exist frequently due to

repairs, maintenance, or leakage.

(3) Where breakdowns or malfunctioning equipment or processes might

release ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and
might also cause simultaneous failure of electrical equipment.
(b) Class 1, Division 2:
(1) Where volatile flammable liquids or vapors are handled, processed or

used. These are normally confined within closed containers or
systems.
(2) Where ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors are normally

prevented by positive mechanical ventilation and which may become
hazardous if this ventilation fails.
(3) Where the location is adjacent to a Class 1, Division 1, location which

might communicate ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or
vapors unless prevented by adequate positive pressure ventilation
from a source of clean air and where effective safeguards against
ventilation failure are provided.
(c) Hazard classed areas are also organized into groups. The group most
inherent to upstream operations will be Group D, which includes
flammable liquids, vapors, and gases.
3. All electrical equipment for hazardous locations shall conform to National

Electrical Code specifications.
4. Equipment installed in classified areas shall be legibly marked by the

manufacturer or testing agency indicating in what areas it is approved for use.
5. Pigtails or drop cords that are not appropriately rated for that hazard class shall
not be used unless a hot work permit has been issued.
F. Electrical Line Poles
1. BP employees who have been formally trained for pole work shall only perform
pole work from a bucket truck or other appropriate work platform. If pole
climbing is necessary to complete a job, it shall only be performed by
authorized and trained electrical contract personnel. A pre-job risk assessment
and safety discussion shall be performed for this work.
2. Only trained and authorized operators shall be allowed to operate a bucket

truck.

III. Electrical Power Generation, Distribution, and Transmission
This section applies to electrical equipment and systems between the point at which the
power becomes BPs, or is generated by BP, and the service point for the application of
power to an installation. This includes transformers, generators, overhead or underground
distribution systems, etc. which are owned or operated by BP. This may include
equipment and systems which are normally thought of as belonging to an electric utility,
but which are maintained by BP.
The following are covered by this section:
The main transformer(s) for a plant
Overhead or underground distribution wiring between the ownership point and

the service point of the step-down transformer for well controllers
Cogeneration units and the wiring and transformers between the cogeneration
unit and the service point
Electrical transformers that are normally kept locked and are accessible only to
qualified personnel
A. Requirements
1. Application
This standard does not apply to new construction work, emergency or standby
electric generation equipment.
2. Training
(a) Employees shall be trained in and familiar with all safety-related work
practices, procedures, emergency procedures, and requirements that are
related to their work and are necessary for their safety.
(b) Qualified employees are defined as those knowledgeable in the application

of electric generation, transmission, and distribution equipment and the
associated hazards. Such individuals shall also be trained and competent
in:
(1) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts
from other parts of electric equipment

(2) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage
of exposed live parts
(3) The minimum approach distances specified in OSHA 1910.269

corresponding to the voltages to which the qualified employee will
be exposed
(4) The proper use of the special precautionary techniques, personal

protective equipment, insulating and shielding materials, and
insulated tools for working on or near exposed energized parts of
electric equipment
(c) An annual inspection will be made, in addition to regular supervision, to

ensure employees are complying with the required work practices.
Additional training or retraining will be provided if the inspection or
routine supervision indicates failure to comply, if new technology is
introduced, or if employees must use practices that are not part of their
routine duties.
(d) This training can be either classroom or on-the-job, but must establish
employee proficiency. The supervisor shall certify that each employee has
received the required training and is proficient and shall maintain that
certification for the duration of employment. A skills list may be used to
document certification.
B. Medical/First Aid
(1) When employees are performing work on or are associated with exposed lines
or equipment energized at 50 volts or more, persons trained in first aid,
including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), shall be available as follows:
(a) For field work involving two or more employees at a work location, at least
two trained persons shall be available. However, only one trained person
need be available if all new employees are trained in first aid, including
CPR, within 3 months of their hiring dates.
(b) For fixed work locations such as generating stations, the number of trained
persons available shall be sufficient to ensure that each employee exposed
to electric shock can be reached within 4 minutes by a trained person.
However, where the existing number of employees is insufficient to meet
this requirement (at a remote substation, for example), all employees at the
work location shall be trained. Where EMT or medical emergency teams
exist, they may be used to comply with this requirement.

(2) First aid supplies must be placed in weatherproof containers and be

properly maintained so as to be readily available for use by
responders. Kits shall be inspected at least once per year.
C. Job Briefing
1. The employer in charge shall conduct a pre-job risk assessment and safety
briefing with the employees involved before they start each job. The employee
in charge does not have to be a supervisor.
The briefing shall always cover at least the following subjects:
Hazards associated with the job
Work procedures involved
Special precautions
Energy source controls
Personal protective equipment requirements
2. If the work or operations to be performed during the work day or shift are
repetitive and similar, at least one job briefing shall be conducted before the
start of the first job of each day or shift. Additional job briefings shall be held if
significant changes, which might affect the safety of the employees, occur
during the course of the work.
3. Existing conditions related to the safety of the work to be performed shall be

determined before work on or near electric lines or equipment is started.
Such conditions include, but are not limited to
The nominal voltages of lines and equipment
The maximum switching transient voltages
The presence of hazardous induced voltages
The presence and condition of protective grounds and equipment grounding

conductors
The condition of poles

Environmental conditions relative to safety
The location of circuits and equipment, including communication lines and

fire protective signaling circuits
D. Lockout/Tagout
Lockout/Tagout standards as outlined in the Lockout/Tagout chapter of this Standard

must be followed.
E. Confined Spaces
Confined Space Entry standards as outlined in the Confined Space Entry chapter of
this Standard must be followed.
F. Personal Protective Equipment
1. In addition to the general requirements, fall arrest equipment, work positioning

equipment, or travel restricting equipment shall be used by employees working
at elevated locations more than 4 feet above the ground on poles, towers, or
similar structures if other fall protection has not been provided.
2. Conductive ladders are prohibited near exposed energized lines or equipment.
G. Hand Tools
1. For electric tools connected by cord and plug, the tool frame must be grounded
or the tool be double insulated or the tool be supplied by an isolating
transformer with ungrounded secondary. The use of a GFCI alone to protect
employees using cord- and plug-connected equipment is not allowed.
2. Portable and vehicle-mounted generators must provide a means for grounding

cord- and plug-connected equipment. The frame of the generator shall be
grounded by either driving a ground rod or by connecting it to a grounding
system.
3. For pneumatic and hydraulic tools,
Safe operating pressures are to be maintained.
If the tool is used where it may contact exposed energized parts, the tool is
required to be designed and maintained for such use.

Hydraulic systems for tools used near live parts must provide protection
against the formation of a partial vacuum in the hydraulic line.
A pneumatic tool must provide protection against the accumulation of

moisture in the air supply.
H. Line Tools
Live-line tools shall be designed and constructed to withstand 100,000 V/ft. if made
of fiberglass, or 75,000 V/ft. if made of wood. The tools must be wiped clean and
visually inspected for defects before use each day. If defects or contamination are
found, the tool must be removed from service and tested. Line tools must be tested
every two years, or whenever removed from service as a result of an inspection.
I. Materials Handling
1. The general provisions for material handling and storage, found in Subpart N of
the OSHA general industry standards, apply. In general, material is not allowed
to be taken or stored within 10 feet of lines or exposed parts of equipment where
unqualified employees may have access to it.
2. In work areas restricted to qualified employees only, no material storage is

allowed in the work area around energized lines and equipment.
J. Electric Work Practices
1. Specific work practices for activities on electric power generation apply to the
following:
Working on or near exposed energized parts
De-energizing lines and equipment for employee protection
Grounding for the protection of employees
Testing and test facilities
Mechanical equipment
Overhead lines or equipment
2. For requirements concerning the items listed above, refer to 29 CFR 1910.269.
It is recommended that a review of current work practices vs. the requirements

of these sections be performed. This review shall be performed by the HSE

representative supporting that site and the person most knowledgeable about
current employee training for, and supervision of, ongoing electrical
maintenance work.
3. Fire resistant clothing (FRC) is required for employees who are exposed to
hazards of flames or electric arcs, so that in such an event the employees
clothing does not contribute to the extent of injury. Refer to the Personal
Protective Equipment chapter of this Standard.
K. Tree Trimming
1. When this work is performed by nonqualified employees, there are requirements

to determine the nominal voltage of lines, maintain normal minimum approach
distance, and stop work during adverse weather conditions. A second employee
is required under certain circumstances.
2. Specific requirements for the equipment used in tree trimming operations,

including brush chippers, sprayers, stump cutters, power saws, backpack power
units, ropes, and fall protection systems are referenced in 29 CFR 1910.269.
Your local Field Safety Coordinator may provide additional guidance.
L. Telecommunication Facilities
For work on communication facilities, procedures shall ensure that no employee

looks into an open wave guide or antenna that is connected to an energized
microwave source, leading to an exposure that may exceed radiation hazard limits.
M. Underground Vaults and Manholes
1. Access to such installations must be by ladder or approved means, with stepping

on cables or hangers prohibited. Equipment can be lowered into a manhole only
after all employees inside are clear. Entry into a manhole or vault with
energized equipment requires a top-side attendant trained in CPR.
2. If duct rods are used, they must be installed in the direction presenting the least
hazard to employees and an employee must be stationed at the far end to make
sure minimum clearances are maintained. If multiple cables are present,
positive identification of the proper cable must occur prior to work. An
energized cable that requires moving must be inspected prior to moving. A
cable with a defect must be de-energized prior to work if possible, or else
alternate protective systems are required. Sheath continuity must be
maintained, or the cable must be treated as energized.

N. Substations
1. Enough space is to be provided around electric equipment to allow ready and

safe access to and operation and maintenance of the equipment.
2. Draw-out type circuit breakers are to be inserted and removed while the breaker
is in the open position.
3. Conductive fences around substations shall be grounded.
4. Specifically identified areas in a substation are to be enclosed to minimize entry

of unqualified persons.
5. Warning signs are to be displayed.
6. Entrances not under the observation of an attendant have to be locked.
7. Unqualified persons are not permitted to enter these areas while equipment is
energized.
8. Live parts operating at more than 150 volts are to be guarded (by physical
guards or by location) or insulated.
9. Employees must receive pertinent information on conditions at the substation.
O. Special Conditions
Specific work practices are detailed in 29 CFR 1910.269(w) for:
Work on capacitors
Current transformer secondaries
Series street lighting
Protection from drowning hazards
Protection from backfeed hazards
Protection from laser hazards
Protection from hydraulic fluid hazards
Provisions are also given for employee protection in public work areas.

IV. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR

1910.269 (for the General Electrical Safety section).
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR,

Parts 1910.137, 1910.268, 1910.301 1910.308, 1910.331 1910.335 (Electrical -
General), and 1910.399 (for the Electrical Power Generation, Distribution, and
Transmission section).
C. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association,

NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code).
D. American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practices, 500.
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard C2, National Electrical

Safety Code (NESC).
F. gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
G. gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.

Chapter 5, Emergency Shutdown Systems
Chapter 5
Emergency Shutdown Systems
I. General
A. All emergency shutdown devices shall be tested at regular intervals to determine

whether they are in good operating condition.
B. The operating supervisor will be responsible to ensure that inspection and

maintenance are performed in accordance with this program so that all shutdown
equipment is in proper condition.
II. Shutdown Equipment Designations
There shall be two types of shutdown equipment designations. They are defined as:
A. Type I: Devices used for the protection of operating equipment where injury to
personnel could occur should equipment malfunction. For example, in a plant where
operations and maintenance personnel are continuously present, or where failure of
equipment would adversely affect the public.
B. Type II: Devices used for the protection of operating equipment where injury to
personnel would probably not occur should equipment malfunction. For example, in
field operations where personnel are not normally present.
III. Scheduled Testing of Shutdown Equipment:
A. Test Type I, including Emergency Shutdown Systems, at least annually.
B. Test Type II equipment during each major overhaul or more frequently when
conditions warrant.
C. Should the above schedules indicate inoperative shutdown devices, increase testing
frequency as necessary to assure that equipment is maintained in good operating
condition.
D. When testing the following shutdown devices, check them thoroughly for worn or
sticking parts:
1. Devices subject to periods of inoperation (i.e., no movement of liquid level

floats or pressure elements)

Chapter 5, Emergency Shutdown Systems
2. Devices subject to excessive operation (rapid fluctuation of pulsating pressures

on the pressure gauge)
IV. References
A. gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
B. gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.
C. gHSEr Element # 11, Crisis and Emergency Management.

OUSBU Safety Standard Page 3.14-1

Section 3 Chapter 14 - Fall Protection

1.0 Purpose/Scope
This standard describes the use of fall prevention equipment to minimize the potential for falls and associated
injuries when working in elevated locations.
2.0 Definitions
2.1 Anchorage - a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices.
2.2 Body harness - straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the
fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to
other components of a personal fall arrest system.
2.3 Competent Person - an individual who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards or
working conditions that are hazardous, unsanitary, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures to eliminate or control these hazards and conditions. Examples include
Safety Engineers, Field Safety Coordinators, and Safety Techs etc.
2.4 Connector - a device that is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and
positioning device systems together
2.5 Deceleration device - any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard,
tearing or deforming lanyards, automatic self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., which serves to dissipate a
substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee
during fall arrest.
2.6 Deceleration distance - the additional vertical distance a falling employee travels, excluding lifeline
elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to
operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an employee's body harness attachment point
at the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device during a fall, and the
location of that attachment point after the employee comes to a full stop.
2.7 Failure - load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the
ultimate strength is exceeded.
2.8 Free fall - the act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall.
2.9 Infeasible - that it is impossible to perform the construction work using a conventional fall protection
system (i.e., guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system) or that it is technologically
impossible to use any one of these systems to provide fall protection.
2.10 Lanyard - a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap that generally has a connector at each end for
connecting the body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage.
2.11 Lifeline - a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang
vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal
Control Tier: 2 Print Date: Last printed 6/9/2004

lifeline), and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to
the anchorage.
2.12 Low-slope roof - a roof having a slope less than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).
2.13 Lower levels - those areas or surfaces to which an employee can fall. Such areas or surfaces include,
but are not limited to, ground levels, floors, platforms, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks, material,
water, equipment, structures, or portions thereof.
2.14 Mechanical equipment - all motor or human propelled wheeled equipment used for roofing work,
except wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
2.15 Opening - a gap or void 30 inches (76 cm) or more high and 18 inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall
or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level.
2.16 Personal fall arrest system - a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It
consists of an anchorage, connectors, and a body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device,
lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. The use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited. Body belts
may only be used as a body positioning device as described below
2.17 Qualified Person - a person who by education or professional certification is qualified to interpret and
apply relevant specifications to the design, analysis and evaluation of engineered fall protection systems. In
most cases this person will be a professional engineer
2.18 Rope grab - a deceleration device that travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the
lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of
inertial locking, cam/level locking, or both..
2.19 Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard - a deceleration device containing a drum-wound line which can be
slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee movement,
and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall.
2.20 Snap hook - keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an
object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. Snap hooks are generally one of two
types:
The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which remains closed and locked until
unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or
The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper that remains closed until pressed open for connection
or disconnection. The use of a non-locking snap hook as part of personal fall arrest systems and
positioning device systems is prohibited.
2.21 Toe board - a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower
levels and provide protection from falls for personnel.
2.22 Unprotected sides and edges - any side or edge (except at entrances to points of access) of a
walking/working surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or runway where there is no wall or guardrail system at
least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
2.23 Walking/working surface - any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on which an employee walks or
works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete
reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located in
order to perform their job duties.


3.1 Each employee on a walking or working surface with an unprotected side, edge, or hole which is 6 feet or
more above a lower level shall be protected from falling by the use of guardrail systems, safety net systems,
or personal fall arrest systems.
3.2 Each employee will be protected from falling into an excavation, pit, shaft or well by the use of guardrail
systems, barricades, or personal fall arrest systems when the hazards are not easily seen because of plant
growth or other visual barrier or when the employee is required to work at the edge of the hazard.
3.3 Each employee working above dangerous equipment shall be protected from falling into or onto the
dangerous equipment by the use of guardrail systems, barricades, or personnel fall arrest systems or
equipment guards.
3.4 OSHA requires that all employees be trained in the proper use of safety body harnesses, lanyards, lifelines
and other fall protection equipment prior to use.
3.5 Work situations where fall protection is typically required includes the following:
When working on suspended scaffolds.

When work takes place adjacent to dangerous equipment or processes (e.g., open tanks, chemical
baths, etc. regardless of height.
When accessing any rooftop.
On scaffolds or elevated walkways with incomplete decking or handrail.
When using any type of ladder above 6 feet as a work platform. (Note: this does not apply when
simply using a ladder to move or climb from one level to another.)
When working from personnel platforms or man lifts.

4.1 Site Supervisor, Foreman or Manager
Verify that employees are properly trained in fall protection prior to working in areas requiring fall
protection
Ensure that employees have appropriate fall protective devices, and equipment when working
unprotected more than 6 feet above the nearest working surface.
Assure that the requirements identified under Section 3 of this document are adhered to.
4.2 Site Safety Representative

Verify that, where they exist, pre-job JSAs properly identify fall hazards and that mitigation steps are
in place that comply with section 3 of this standard.
Ensure that harnesses, fall arresters and other fall protective equipment meets all requirements
identified in OSHA Standard 1926.502 and in section 5 of this document
4.3 User of Fall Protection

Understand all fall protection requirements as they apply to the job you are performing
Use fall protective equipment in the manner for which it was designed
Comply with the requirements of paragraph 3 of this standard
5.0 Process
5.1 Selection of Safety Body Harnesses and Lanyards

a. Only full body harnesses will be utilized and they must be rated for the employees weight. Employees
who exceed 250 pounds will be required to wear a harness that is rated heavy duty and designed for
their weight.
b. Lanyards will be the shock absorbing type. A double or Y lanyard that allows for 100% tie off is
required
c. All components of fall protection equipment must be capable of withstanding 5,000 pounds breaking
strength without cracking, breaking or resulting in permanent deformation.
d. Buckles must hold securely without slippage or other failure.
e. Lanyard length must limit a free fall distance to less than 6 feet.
f. Lanyards should be secured whenever possible above the waist or overhead to minimize actual fall
distance.
g. Wire rope cannot be used for lanyards because it does not stretch, thus it does not have sufficient
energy absorbing capability
h. Only double lock snap hooks should be used to minimize the potential for "roll out" (See illustration in
the section below).
i. Lanyards and lifelines shall be kept free of knots.
j. Any lifeline, body harness or lanyard actually used to arrest a fall shall be immediately removed from
service and discarded or recertified by the manufacturer.
k. Lanyards shall always be manufacturer assembled and never "home made".
5.2 Lanyard Illustrations
a. Single and double lock snap hooks
5.3 Fall Protection Planning and Inspection
a. The user will be required to properly inspect the fall protection system they are using on a daily basis.
b. The designated competent person will be responsible to assist supervision with the development of the
appropriate fall protection requirements and plan for the specific jobsite or facility. The competent person
will have the final decision on fall protection requirements as outlined in the applicable regulations.
c. The safety representative will conduct periodic inspections of the fall protection equipment and the user
shall conduct a daily inspection prior to use. All damaged equipment will be removed from service and sent
to the safety department.

5.4 Horizontal and Vertical Lifelines for Anchor Point Connections
a. Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used under the supervision of a qualified person, as part
of a complete fall arrest system.
b. Each horizontal lifeline shall have a minimum breaking strength of 5000 pounds and each employee will be
attached to a separate lifeline.
5.5 Rescue Considerations
Supervisors shall provide for the prompt rescue of employees in the event of a fall, or, shall assure the self-
rescue capability of employees. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders, or other rescue equipment should
be evaluated during the job planning stage
6.2 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1910.269, Electric power generation,
transmission, and distribution
6.3 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1910.66, Powered Platforms
6.4 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1926.502, Fall protection systems criteria and
practices
6.5 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1926.501, Duty to have fall protection
6.6 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1926.451, General requirements
6.7 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1926.503, Training requirements
6.8 Occupational Safety and Health Administration; 29 CFR 1926.753, Safety nets
6.9 Manufacturer's Requirements

Chapter 5, Fire Protection Program
Chapter 5
Fire Protection Program
I. General
A. BPs upstream fire fighting philosophy is that trained employees will perform
incipient fire fighting only.
B. The HSE representative shall coordinate the fire protection program.
C. Operating supervisors are responsible for implementing and enforcing the program.
II. Fixed Fire Detection and Extinguishing Systems
A. All fire detection systems shall be tested and/or calibrated every 90 days.
Calibration/testing records shall be maintained at the local operations office.
B. Fixed fire extinguishing systems shall be inspected, maintained, and tested in

accordance with manufacturers specifications and National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) guidelines.
C. Stored pressure extinguishers that require a 12-year hydrostatic test shall be

subjected to applicable maintenance procedures every 6 years. This includes Halon
extinguishers and stored pressure dry chemical extinguishers.
D. Fixed systems must be inspected annually by an expert contractor or a BP employee

who is knowledgeable in the design and function of the system to assure the
equipment is properly maintained.
III. Employee Alarm Systems
A. Employee emergency alarm systems shall provide employees with the necessary
warning to facilitate implementation of the emergency action plan.
B. The employee alarm shall have a distinctive sound if a location has more than one
audible alarm. The alarm must have a sufficient decibel rating to be detected above
the locations ambient noise levels.
C. Employees shall be instructed at least annually in the proper method of reporting

emergencies. Local emergency telephone numbers shall be posted near telephones,
with an additional copy posted on the locations bulletin board for employee review.

The numbers shall be verified at least annually to ensure an efficient emergency

action plan.
D. Procedures for sounding the emergency alarm shall be established. Employees shall
be trained annually in these procedures, and training shall be documented.
E. The alarms shall be maintained in proper operating condition.
F. The alarms manual activation devices shall be easily accessible and clearly
identified as to their purpose.
G. Pre-discharge alarms are required for all fixed extinguishing systems where release
of the fire extinguishing agent could be harmful to personnel in the area.
H. The above information shall be reviewed and available to all contractors and visitors
entering plant locations.
IV. Fire Water Systems
A. Appropriate housing shall be provided for portable cart apparatus, hoses, and
equipment.
B. Hose carts shall be equipped with wrenches, nozzles and small equipment as
necessary.
C. Hand tools, ladders, and other auxiliary equipment shall be checked for availability
and serviceability at least once each six months.
D. The fire water supply tanks shall be maintained at the proper water level. Supply
tanks shall be equipped with a low level alarm.
E. The fire water pumps shall be started periodically (at least weekly) to ensure proper
operating conditions. Pumps shall operate long enough to ensure complete warmup.
F. The fire water system shall be flushed monthly, weather permitting.
G. Each section of fire hose shall be hydrostatically tested annually at maximum pump
pressure for at least three minutes. The test shall be documented, with the records
being maintained at the local office for three years.
H. Locations shall adopt a system whereby fire system isolation valves cannot be closed
without supervisor approval. This same system must provide a means so that the
valves are reopened immediately following the work which required their closure.

I. Locations having a fire water system shall conduct regular fire drills, at least
annually. The drills shall simulate various procedures to be completed by personnel
in the event of an actual fire/emergency. Drills and training exercises shall include
as a minimum:
1. Capabilities and limitations of the fire water system and its components
2. Fire pump operation and water deliverability
3. Hose handling techniques
4. Personal protective equipment
5. Foam making requirements, supplies, and limitations where foam is available
6. Manpower allocations to fight fire
7. The fire situation chain of command
8. The use of monitors and stationary equipment
J. A written critique of the performance of the drill shall be prepared by the locations
supervisor. The strengths and weaknesses of the Incident Management Plan (IMP)
shall be noted in this review. Appropriate action shall be coordinated by the HSE
representative.
V. Portable Fire Extinguisher Placement, Marking, Inspection, Maintenance, and Training
A. Portable wheeled or cart type extinguishers shall be placed in a location readily

accessible to personnel. If these extinguishers are maintained in a separate housing,
care will be exercised to provide good housekeeping and year-round access.
Wheeled foam units must be protected from freezing.
B. Portable hand type extinguishers will be placed along normal paths of travel,
immediately available in the event of fire.
C. Fire extinguishers, if used, will be recharged when required and returned to their
original location.
D. All extinguishers shall be clearly and properly marked. When practical, the area
behind the extinguisher shall also be painted red.

E. In areas where extinguishers cannot be seen due to visual obstructions, their

locations shall be marked with signs or painted symbols located high enough to be
seen.
F. Inspection of fire extinguishers is a visual check done at monthly intervals to

determine that extinguishers are available, operative, and:
1. Are located in their designated places and the nameplates, including operating
instructions, are legible and face outward
2. Have not been actuated
3. Have not been tampered with
4. Do not have any physical damage, corrosion, or other impairments
G. Recording the Inspection
The person making the inspection shall record their initials and the date on the
inspection record card attached to the extinguisher or on an inspection log.
H. Maintenance of fire extinguishers shall include a thorough examination of fire

extinguishers at regular intervals, not more than one year apart, or when need is
specifically indicated by inspection. Any deficiencies shall be remedied, or the
extinguisher replaced.
The thorough examination shall include three basic elements:
1. Mechanical parts (hose, shell, puncture lever, and other operating components)
2. Extinguishing material (for example, ensure there is adequate powder, and that
the powder is free flowing and designed for that extinguisher)
3. Expelling means (ensure the cartridge is of proper size and weight for that
extinguisher, and contains the appropriate gas)
I. Extinguishers removed from the premises for maintenance or recharging will be

temporarily replaced with spare extinguishers of the same type and rating during the
maintenance period.
J. Fire extinguishers shall be tested hydrostatically, in accordance with NFPA Standard

No. 10, at any time there is evidence of corrosion or mechanical damage, and at
intervals not to exceed the following period:

1. 12 years for dry chemical with brazed-brass, mild steel, or aluminum shells,
bromotrifluoromethane (Halon 1211 or Halon 1301), and dry powder
extinguishers for metal fires
2 5 years for all other types of fire extinguishers
K. All field and plant employees shall participate annually in a hand portable fire
extinguisher training program consisting of:
1. The general principles of fire
2. A review of extinguisher components
3. A fire fighting field exercise (This exercise may be as simple as extinguishing a

pan fire.)
4. A review of recharge procedures
L. All training shall be documented.
VI. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR,

1910.106, 1910.110, 1910.144, 1910.156, 1910.157, 1910.164, 1910.179, 1910.252.
B. gHSEr Element # 2, Risk Assessment and Management.
D. gHSEr Element # 12, Incident Analysis and Prevention.

Section 1, Common Requirements
Chapter 6, First Aid Material and Training
Chapter 6
First Aid Material and Training
I. First Aid Training
A. Locations that are not within 4 minutes of medical facilities shall train an appropriate
number of employees in first aid and CPR to assure a timely response is available
during all shifts. Trained employees must maintain a valid completion card or other
proof of current training. Employees who may be required to render aid in a
respiratory emergency or who may be required to work as standby personnel during
confined space entry must be trained in CPR. Proff of training shall be available at
the work site.
B. BP employees are not required to render first aid or CPR unless the performance of
first aid responsibilities are part of an employees designated job duty or the
employee is participating in a special emergency medical response organization.
C. Employees who are required to render medical assistance as part of their duties must
receive training in bloodborne pathogen exposure control. (See the Bloodborne
Pathogen Exposure Control Program chapter for additional information.)
D. Both Medic First Aid and American Red Cross training classes are approved training
courses for Performance Unit operations. Check with your local HSE Coordinator
for other approved courses.
II. First Aid Materials
A. First aid kits shall be located for easy availability and all employees shall be familiar
with their location.
B. First aid kits shall be stocked as specified by the Medical Director.
C. First aid kits/supplies shall be inspected at least quarterly to ensure they are
adequately stocked. These inspections do not need to be documented.
III. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, CFR 29

1910.151 and 1910.1030.
B. gHSEr Element # 11, Crisis and Emergency Management.

Chapter 6, Flammable and Combustible Gas Monitors, Use and Calibration
Chapter 6
Flammable and Combustible Gas Monitors,
Use and Calibration
I. Portable Combustible Gas Indicators
A. Combustible gas indicators shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendations for determining the lower explosive limit (LEL).
B. Calibration Policy
Site management shall assure calibrations are done per the manufacturers
recommendations. Attachment 3.6-1 provides some specific equipment calibration
schedules and set points.
All calibration records shall be maintained at the local field office. Attachment 3.6-2
or comparable may be used.
C. Training
1. Personnel required to operate portable combustible gas indicators shall receive

initial and refresher training on the use, limitation, and care of the instruments
per the manufacturers operating instructions.
2. All training will be conducted by personnel as designated by the Operations

Center.
3. All training will be documented and kept on file.
II. Fixed Combustible Gas Detectors
A. Fixed or automatic combustible gas detectors/systems shall be used to initiate alarms

and shutdowns in company facilities where hazardous levels of combustible gas
could accumulate and where deemed appropriate by local and Performance Unit
management.
1. Concentrations of combustible gases that will trigger alarms and shutdowns

shall be as follows (These are maximum set values; set points may be set
lower.):

2. In fully attended facilities, each condition that actuates a shutdown must actuate
a visual and audible alarm prior to the shutdown. These alarms shall actuate
sufficiently ahead of each shutdown point to give time for corrective measures
to prevent a shutdown.
a. 10% LEL - Low alarm, actuate alarm/indicator
b. 50% LEL - High alarm, actuate shutdown
B. Combustible gas detection systems shall be calibrated in accordance with the

manufacturers recommended procedures. Calibration gases shall not be used
beyond their expiration date.
III. References
A. Fire Protection Handbook, National Fire Protection Association, Section 15,

Chapter 5.
B. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Department of Labor: 29 CFR

1910.1000.

Attachment 3.6-1
Specific Equipment Calibration Schedules and Set Points

These records can be maintained either in the office file or in the carrying case of the portable equipment.
Records for fixed equipment shall be maintained in the office file.
Equipment Type Calibration or Set Points

Verification Frequency
Portable Combustible Gas 1 daily or before use (verification Per Manufacturer

Indicators of calibration)
Monthly per manufacturer
(calibration)
Fixed Combustible Gas Monitors 1 quarterly (calibration) Low - 10% LEL
High - 50% LEL
Portable H2S(Personal) 1 daily or before use (verification Low 10 ppm
of calibration)
High Max - 100 ppm
(calibration)
Fixed H2S Monitors 1 quarterly (calibration) Low 10 ppm
High Max - 100 ppm
Portable Oxygen Indicators 1 daily or before use (verification Low 19.5%
of calibration)
High 23.5%
NORM Meter Prior to and after use Pre- and post- readings are
(verification) within 10% of each other
Annual Factory Check
(calibration)
Portable Combination Monitors Daily or before use (verification H2S Low 10 ppm
of calibration)
H2S Max 100 ppm
LEL Low 10% LEL
(calibration)
LEL High 50% LEL
O2 Low - 19.5%
O2 High - 23.5%
CO 25 ppm
Fixed Oxygen Monitors Quarterly (calibration) Low-19.5%
Fixed Ammonia Monitors Quarterly (calibration) Low-25ppm
High-35 ppm
Fixed Chlorine Monitors Quarterly (calibration) Low-.5 ppm
High-1 ppm

Attachment 3.6-2
Field Calibration Check Of Combustible Gas Indicators

Location ____________________________________________________________
Instrument Type Serial Number Calibration Results Inspectors Name Date

(Satisfactory or
Unsatisfactory*)
* If unsatisfactory, state the action taken.

BP Onshore U.S. Operations Safety Standard
Chapter 3, Flare Guns Page 5.31
Chapter 3
Flare Gun Program
I. Scope
Flare launching devices (flare guns) are allowed to be used in our operations for the
purpose of igniting such things as flare stacks or pit blow-down lines. Flare guns
include flare shotguns and flare pistols.
II. Minimum Requirements
A. Flare guns shall only be used by assigned/designated personnel.
B. The purchase of any flare gun shall be authorized by the team leader who has
assigned/designated personnel using that equipment.
C. A list of flare guns must be maintained at the facility.
D. Modification of purchased flare guns is prohibited.
E. Flare guns must be identified with a label stating, "Flare Gun."
F. A training orientation shall be conducted for all assigned/designated personnel. The

orientation will include the safe use and storage of flare guns.
III. Areas of Special Emphasis
A. The flare guns shall be visually inspected for damage or unsafe conditions prior to
use.
B. Flare shotguns and flare pistols shall not be stored in a LOADED condition. Further,
the action shall be left OPEN to allow easily confirming the status of the gun.
C. No flare gun shall be transported in a loaded condition.
D. No flare gun shall be pointed or aimed at any human or animal, regardless of the
Guns status.
E. Federal, state, and local requirements shall be followed.

Chapter 7, Forklift and Industrial Truck Operations
Chapter 7
Forklift and Industrial Truck Operations
I General
A. All new forklifts shall meet design and construction requirements as established in
the "American National Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, ANSI
B56.1-1969.
B. Modifications which affect capacity or safe operation shall not be performed without
the manufacturers prior written approval.
C. All forklift trucks shall be provided with rollover protective structures (ROPS). The
rollover protective structure must meet applicable design, construction, labeling, and
performance requirements.
D. All new and existing forklifts/powered industrial trucks will be equipped with
operator restraint systems. Retrofitting of existing equipment must be done
according to manufacturers specifications.
E. All nameplates and markings shall be in place and maintained in a legible condition.
II. Training
A The operating supervisor is responsible for assuring that each forklift/powered

industrial truck operator is competent to operate the equipment he/she will use.
B. Prior to permitting an employee to operate any forklift/powered industrial truck, the

operating supervisor must assure that each operator has successfully completed
training as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.178 (l) (2)(i) through (l) (3) (iii)
C. Refresher training will be provided when:
1. The operator has been observed to operate the vehicle in an unsafe manner
2. The operator has been involved in an accident or near-miss incident
3. The operator has received an evaluation that reveals that the he/she is not
operating the truck safely

4. The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck
5. A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect safe

operation of the truck
III. Re-Evaluation
Each operators performance shall be evaluated every three years. This evaluation shall
take place in the area where the operator uses the truck and shall be documented.
IV. Safe Operations
A. All forklifts shall be inspected for any condition that may adversely affect the safe
operation of the vehicle. The inspection must be completed daily, prior to placing
the vehicle in service. When the vehicle is operated around-the-clock, it must be
inspected after each shift. Defects shall be immediately reported and corrected.
A. No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of a forklift,
whether loaded or not.
B. The forks shall be fully lowered, controls neutralized, power shut off, and brakes set
when the truck is left unattended. The truck is unattended when the operator is 25
feet away or out of view.
C. Forklifts shall be fitted with an overhead guard for operator protection against falling
objects.
D. When ascending or descending grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded trucks shall be

driven with the load upgrade.
E. Trucks shall not be refueled while the engine is running.
F. Seatbelts, or another active operator-restraint system, shall be provided on all forklift

trucks. The installations shall meet existing design and construction requirements.
G. Seatbelts, or other active operator-restraint systems, shall be used by the operator at

all times while operating a forklift.
V. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR,

1910.178.
B. American National Standards Institute; ANSI B56.1-1969.


Chapter 7, Government Inspections
Chapter 7
Government Inspections
I. Introduction
This chapter describes the procedures and policies for handling official government safety,
health or environmental inspections of BP property. As used in this chapter,
government may include Federal or State OSHA, EPA, DOT, DOE, Railroad
Commissions, and air or water quality regulatory agencies.
II. General Requirements
A. Verify the credentials of any individual who identifies himself or herself as a

government representative before allowing an inspection or visit upon company
locations. A search warrant shall not be required for entry. However, if one is
presented, keep the company copy and attach it to the inspection report.
B. Immediately escort the government representative onto the location and ask him/her
to wait while you contact the appropriate BP personnel to assist in the inspection.
1. Notify the Performance Unit operations manager, drilling supervisor or

operations center supervisor, and HSE representative.
2. If possible, defer the inspection until the supervisor in charge or his designated
representative arrives to accompany the representative.
3. An HSE representative shall accompany the inspection party during all

inspections, whenever possible.
4. The supervisor in charge must provide immediate notification (by telephone) of

any inspections or investigative type interview to the Performance Unit HSE
Manager.
C. Determine the basis for what type of inspection is to be conducted. There are usually
five types:
1. Employee Complaint: If the inspection was prompted by an employee

complaint, acquire a copy of the registered complaint.
2. Routine: If the inspection is referred to as routine, have the compliance

officer explain the criteria used for selecting this particular location.

3. Imminent Hazard: This is an inspection based on a hazard that is life

threatening and is moments away from occurring. Verify how and when the
hazard was observed.
4. Incident Investigation: Inspections are allowed by statute following certain

work-related accidents, releases, or upsets.
5. Media Referral: A government agency may justify an inspection because of

publicity in the media.
D. Determine the scope of the inspection and whether it is safety, health or

environmentally related.
1. Notify the appropriate BP HSE personnel.
2. Notify BP Legal for advice and to remain on call, if needed.
E. Determine the limits of inspection.
1. What facilities and areas will be subject to inspection?
2. What employees or positions do they wish to speak to or review?
3. What measurements, samples, or photographs do they wish to take?
NOTE: A designated employee shall perform and/or take and record the same
measurements, samples, or photographs as does the government compliance
officer. All items considered to be trade secrets and confidential material shall
be marked accordingly.
F. The government representative shall be accompanied at all times. Do not leave the
representative alone in break rooms or conference rooms unless a BP employee is
immediately available, in case the representative needs to leave, view the facility, or
ask questions.
G. The government representative must abide by all safety rules and regulations for the
work site, including wearing appropriate PPE and use of electrical equipment in
electrically classified areas.
H. Use reasonable efforts to comply with the representatives requests. Do not agree to
long-term abatement plans, but do immediately correct any minor problems found if
they can be resolved with the people and equipment you currently have available.
This demonstrates a good faith effort by BP to comply with government regulations.

I. A designated employee shall maintain a detailed record of the representatives

activities. Do not guess or speculate in answering questions. Be completely honest
in answering questions, but do not volunteer additional information that is not
requested. Do not allow tape recordings.
J. A review of documents that are relevant to the inspection shall be permitted.

Review all documents before releasing them. Keep copies of anything released.
K. A reasonable number of employees may be questioned by the officer about local

working conditions.
L. Upon the government representatives request, allow one employee to accompany

him during the inspection. Additional employees may accompany the inspection
team if additional representation will further assist the inspection.
M. All employees shall be advised not to sign anything prepared by a government

authority unless advised to do so by a BP legal representative.
N. During the closing conference:
1. Ask questions regarding any observations or citations as to why they were

issued and what standard they apply to.
2. Take extensive notes. Assign one individual to take notes.
3. Never give an abatement date for any citation.
O. The operations center shall prepare a comprehensive report of the inspection,

including notes, samples, photographs, and any documentation reviewed. This
report shall be submitted to the Performance Unit Leader with one copy kept for the
supervisor in charge. Additional copies shall not be kept on file unless directed to do
so by a BP legal representative.
III. References

1903.
B. gHSEr Element # 13, Assessment, Assurance, and Improvement.

HSE Initial Internal Incident Reporting, Investigation and Tracking Practice Page 1 of 11

Document Title: Ground Disturbance, Excavations, Trenching, and
Shoring
NA Gas Technical
Authority: NA Gas HSSE Director Custodian:
Authority
Issue Date: 02/29/2000 Scope of Application: BP Onshore US
1.0 Purpose/Scope
This practice establishes minimum Ground Disturbance requirements for all BP and contractor NA Gas
Onshore US personnel involved with ground disturbance activities as defined in this document. The scope
of this document is intended to include 3rd Party activity within the BP Right of Way or near any BP
pipelines or facilities. Operating Centers may deem it necessary to have more stringent requirements in
place for specific tasks, based on past work experience and hazard assessments.
2.0 Definitions
Ground Disturbance: Any excavation, construction or other activity that results in penetration of the
ground.
Ground Disturbance Permit is required for:
Any mechanical excavation (e.g., back hoes, augers) that results in penetration of the ground;
Any manual ground penetration (e.g., digging with shovels, hammering of stakes) greater than 12 inches;
Any mechanical scraping activity (e.g., road grading, bull dozing) that results in penetration of the ground,
includes company owned or maintained lease/well sites and roads.
Exceptions:
Using fill dirt as an alternative to grading low spots or areas where erosion has occurred, or using
stockpiled material, does not constitute a Ground Disturbance activity.
Snow removal does not constitute Ground Disturbance.
An MOC, including a risk assessment and action plan, is required to vary from permit or any other
requirements of this document. Any variation following completion of the MOC, must be approved by the
Asset Manager or their designee and the SPU Technical Authority (TA). Variations that are more stringent
than those required in this document, do not require the exceptions process.
Federal, State or local regulations, which are more stringent than Business Unit guidance, will be followed.
Underground Facility: Any manmade structure located below the surface of the ground.
Competent Person: Each NA GAS ONSHORE US Operations Center (OC) shall designate individuals
(employee or contract) who are capable, through experience and/or training, to identify existing and
predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are hazardous or dangerous to
personnel and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate such hazards. The
primary responsibility for ensuring a safe excavation and/or ground disturbance as defined by this
procedure is assigned to the Competent Person. Competent Person shall demonstrate competency by
means of a written evaluation. The OC shall maintain a list of Competent Persons.
Depressurization: Reducing the pressure on a line or piping system as to near 0 psig or as close as
practicable.
Qualified Equipment Operator: A person who through experience and/or training and with the
endorsement of their employer is competent to operate equipment used in ground disturbance and/or
excavation activities. The Competent Person shall verify that Operator is on the OC Qualified Equipment
Operator list prior to beginning work activity. The OC shall maintain a list of Qualified Equipment
Operators.
Qualified Line Finder: A person who through experience and/or training and with the endorsement of
their employer is competent to operate line finding equipment used to locate buried facilities prior to
ground disturbance and/or excavation activities. The Competent Person shall verify that the Qualified Line
Finder is on the OC Qualified Line Finder List prior to beginning work activity. The OC shall maintain a
list of Qualified Line Finders.
Contact: A puncture or crack in the facility, scratch, gouge, flattening or dent of the surface, or,
damage to the protective covering
Dig Zone area of ground to be disturbed
Search Zone a 25 area in all directions surrounding the dig zone, to be swept with line finding
equipment
Risk Assessment process of identifying potential hazards and implementing appropriate controls,
(JSA/JHA)
Potholing hand digging or using a vacuum excavator to make a hole that confirms the exact location,
depth, orientation and line size of a line or other underground facility
Vacuum Excavator an excavating unit that digs by combination of alternating water/air or air/air
pulsations
Excavation: Any man-made cut, cavity, trench or depression in the earths surface, formed/caused by earth
removal.
Encroachment crossing or paralleling within 10 feet of an existing line
Trench Excavation: A narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground where the depth is
generally greater than the width. However, the width of a trench as measured at the bottom is not greater
than 15 feet.
NOTE: Excavations more than 20 feet in depth must be designed by a registered professional engineer and
are not covered in this policy.
Protective System: Is a method of protecting employees from cave-ins of material that could fall or roll
from an excavation face or from the collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include support
systems, shield systems, and other systems that provide necessary protection.

A Ground Disturbance permit shall be completed by a Competent Person for all activities that meet the
definition as described in 2.0 of this document. The permit shall be available at the work site until the
activity is completed. A new permit shall be issued, at the start of each new work shift/day, if there is a
change in the job scope, and after job stoppages due to emergency situations.
The Competent Person must be thoroughly familiar with all sections of the permit outlining requirements
applicable to the job. Expired Ground Disturbance Permits shall be kept on file as per Operating Center
recordkeeping requirements.
Contractor procedures shall satisfy all requirements of this practice.
Any 3rd Party activity that encroaches (encroachment is defined as a line crossing or paralleling within 10
feet of a line) on the BP Right of Way or near any BP pipelines or facilities. Shall require a Competent
Person (contractor or BP) to be present for activity in the Right of Way and a formal crossing agreement
completed when applicable. De-pressurizing lines must be considered and a risk assessment completed by a
Competent Person for the 3rd party crossing. Any damage to BP property resulting from 3rd party activity
shall be reported to the BP Competent Person.
Mechanical excavation will not be done within the 2 foot minimum clearance limit around underground
lines or facilities, unless the requirements in 5.6.2, 5.6.3, or 5.6.4 are met.
The Exceptions Process in Section 5.6.4 of this document is required for any variation from the Ground
Disturbance Practice (see 5.6.4 for details).
Training
The OC shall ensure that all employees and/or contractors who participate in Ground Disturbance activity
receive BP Ground Disturbance Training prior to their involvement in the activity and a minimum of every
three years thereafter.
Each Competent Person shall receive training in the recognition of applicable hazards
associated with Ground Disturbance activities (to include OSHA excavation
requirements) and corrective measures required to eliminate such hazards.
Each Qualified Equipment Operator shall be instructed in the safe competent operation of
equipment used in Ground Disturbance activities. Competency training shall also include
OSHA excavation and BP ground disturbance requirements.
Each Qualified Line Finder shall be instructed in the safe and competent operation of
equipment used to locate buried facilities prior to Ground Disturbance activities.
Training and Curriculum for Line Locator
Awareness training shall be available for individuals that are impacted and/or involved in
ground disturbance activity.
The training shall include a mechanism of ensuring employee and/or contractors comprehension of the
Ground Disturbance process and/or associated equipment.
Retraining shall be provided whenever there is a change in the Ground Disturbance process, whenever job
changes or changes in equipment or processes present a new hazard, in response to a local OC incident, or
when there is reason to believe that there are inadequacies in the employee and/or contractors knowledge.
All training must be documented, including knowledge verification by means of examination with the date
and names of employees and/or contractors attending the training.

The OC shall ensure that the requirements of this program are implemented and enforced.
All employees involved in or impacted by Ground Disturbance activities shall comply with this
process and any site-specific procedures.
5.0 Ground Disturbance Permit Requirements

5.1 One Call Notification (permit item 1)
A Competent Person must ensure that the appropriate regional One Call Notification Center has
been notified of all planned excavation activities and a request for line locates has been registered.
The Competent Person will affirm that all lines have been located and marked prior to any
excavation activity. When in doubt, a Competent Person will investigate the possibility of
underground lines and contact appropriate parties as needed for verification.
5.2 Line location & Plot Plan (permit item 2)

Available records shall be referenced and contacts made to determine the existence and location of
underground facilities/pipelines and utilities in the vicinity of the work area.
It is a Competent Persons responsibility to ensure that all available sources of information have
been obtained and cross-referenced to ensure, as far as is reasonable and practical, the existence of
all facilities/pipelines and underground utilities. Sources of information, including but not limited
to, the following must be referenced when applicable to the job:
One Call - Provides a listing of companies who registered buried facilities in the
proposed work area. Some public utilities and private companies are not members of One
Call. A 48-hour waiting period is required prior to beginning work. Emergency situations
require less waiting time. State and local laws should be researched and incorporated in
local procedures.
Consult Area Operations Personnel - Plot plans, pipeline or facilities maps, or lease
drawings (as available) must be obtained and discussed with area operations personnel.
Company personnel familiar with area operations may have knowledge of
facilities/pipelines and abandoned lines not otherwise documented.
Visible Company Markers - Check the work area for facilities/pipelines, or utility
markers and ensure the company named has been contacted to supply any additional
information regarding underground facilities. (Never rely solely on company markers for
location purposes. Markers may have been knocked down or removed at some point in
the past and may have been repositioned inaccurately.)
Visible Indicators - Are there any signs of ground disturbance within the proposed work
area, including the search zone? This may include facilities/pipelines, power lines, gas
co-ops, utility cables, new clearings, spoil piles, road construction, pipeline signs,
settlement, vegetation color changes or growth. If there is any visual sign of activity that
is not reflected on the plot plan the plan shall be updated.
Discussion with Landowner - Landowner and/or Tenant may also have additional
knowledge of buried utilities not documented elsewhere and should be contacted when
reasonable and practical.
A plot plan, pipeline or facilities map or lease drawing indicating the location of all underground
facilities and utilities as determined from 5.2 above, shall be available for reference at the work
site.
Ground disturbance activities shall not proceed without a plot plan, facilities/pipelines map or
drawing clearly indicating the number of facilities/pipelines or utilities, line sizes, locations and
alignments. Available plot plans or lease drawings must be reviewed and cross-referenced with
other sources of information (as noted in 5.2 above) to ensure they are accurate and complete. Plot
plan should be retained in appropriate file with the applicable ground Disturbance Permit.
If a plot plan, facilities/pipelines map or lease drawing is not available, but it has been determined
from referencing other sources of information that buried lines do indeed pass within 25 feet of
both sides of the dig zone, a drawing must be prepared. This drawing may be hand drawn but must
reflect all available information accurately.
5.3 Approvals & Agreements (permit item 3)
Approvals and agreements (as applicable) either verbal or written have been obtained.
Pipeline Permits and Licenses (new installation, additions to existing lines,

abandonments)
Notification to pipeline owner regarding intent to cause ground disturbance within the
search zone, 25 feet on both sides of dig zone
Notifications of landowners and or tenant, where deemed reasonable and practical
Facility crossing agreements
Proximity and Common Right of Way Agreements will be checked, if available
5.4 Pre-Job Safety Meeting (permit item 4)

A pre-job safety meeting including Job Safety Analysis, Ground Disturbance Permit, and
Emergency Response Plan review, will be held. Appropriate documentation of such meeting will
be kept with the permit.
The following topics (as a minimum) have been discussed and the meeting minutes (with signed
attendance list) have been recorded and retained on file.
Review of potential hazards, safe work procedure, permitting requirements, etc.
Agreement that ground disturbance does not occur unless a Competent Person is present
at the job site. A Competent person does not need to be present during ground
disturbance activities if there is no underground facilities/pipelines in the search or dig
zones.
Mechanical excavation equipment must not be used to dig within 2 (or greater if
specified in the crossing agreement) of a known underground facility. A equipment
spotter must be in place for all excavation within proximity of any underground utility
and the 2 no dig zone must be adequately marked.
Proper cutback and shoring must be done in accordance with local, state and federal
regulations and BP Onshore US Safety Practice requirements.
Utilization of pick axes shall be evaluated and approved by a Competent Person prior to
use. Special consideration shall be given when working around non-metallic pipe and
utility wires/cables.
Agree that all workers have the right and responsibility to Stop the Job when they
suspect work procedures or conditions are unsafe.
Personal protective equipment requirements, including applicability of fire retardant
clothing use, will be evaluated.
All accidents, injuries, first aids and near miss incidents must be reported.
A site-specific Emergency Response Plan must be in place and reviewed at the pre-job meeting.
This Emergency Response Plan must be available at the work site at all times when work is being
performed. At a minimum, the Emergency Response Plan must include: facility contact names
and phone numbers, system isolation procedure and isolation valve locations, muster area, phone
numbers for emergency services, directions to the work site.
5.5 Facility Marking (permit item 5)

All known pipelines and utilities, as noted on the plot plan, pipeline map, or drawing, that pass
within the search zone of an underground facility (25 ft of both sides of the dig zone) have been
located, identified and marked to indicate location and alignment.

A Qualified Line Finder who is familiar with the area or lease and has in his possession a copy of
the lease drawing, shall conduct line-locating procedures utilizing available, pipeline maps, or plot
plan. The search zone shall be walked (swept) using a line finder.
If required the area will be electronically swept using four separate grid patterns (e.g., North -
South pattern followed by East - West as well as angular pattern) to ensure maximum detection
capabilities.
The lines must be clearly identified and marked within 25 ft of both sides of the dig zone (search
zone). Lines located using Witching Rods cannot be considered accurate and will be identified
on the plot plan as possible locations of lines.
The following color code to be used: (unless State requirements indicate otherwise)
Search zone perimeter White Temporary Survey Markings Pink.
Electrical Red Gas & Oil Yellow Potable Water Blue
Drainage/Sewers - Green Communication - Orange Nonpotable Water -
Purple
Plot plans; facilities/pipeline map, and drawing must be cross-referenced with the placement of
markers prior to mechanical excavation to ensure there are no apparent inconsistencies. If there are
inconsistencies between the plot plan, facilities/pipeline maps, or drawing and placement of
stakes, another line location must be done to verify correct line location and alignment.
The feasibility of locating all underground facilities and utilities and formal updating of plot plans,
facilities/pipeline maps, and lease drawings shall be considered prior to new construction
involving ground disturbance activities.
5.6 Verifying & Exposing Underground Facilities (permit item 6)

All underground facilities and utilities within 2 ft of the line have been hand exposed or vacuum
excavated as practicable to verify location, line size, and alignment. All underground facilities and
utilities, identified at facility crossing shall be exposed as is practicable.
An MOC, including a risk assessment and action plan, is required to vary from permit or any other
requirements of this document. Any variation following completion of the MOC, must be
approved by the Asset Manager or their designee and the SPU Technical Authority (TA).
Variations that are more stringent than those required in this document, do not require the
exceptions process.
When constructing a new pipeline that runs parallel to an existing line the operations should
maintain a minimum distance of 5 ft between lines. In circumstances where a 5 ft. distance cannot
be maintained, i.e. ROW agreements or landowner restrictions, additional precautions must be
implemented. (i.e. expose line at shortened intervals to ensure orientation)
5.6.1 Exposing Flagged Underground Facilities:

Use vacuum excavation or hand dig to expose. The vacuum excavated or hand
exposed hole(s) must be made large enough and suitably spaced to accurately
determine location, depth, orientation and line size.
If exposing for the purpose of crossing or repair, the vacuum excavated or hand
exposed hole(s) must extend a minimum of 2 from the line
When constructing a new pipeline that runs parallel to an existing line (within 10),
the existing line must be initially vacuum excavated or hand exposed to confirm
location, and then at appropriate intervals, to confirm alignment. Intervals will be

determined by the Competent Person and be indicated on the permit.
Note: You must always maintain 2 foot of clearance around facilities/pipelines with mechanical
equipment unless conditions exist as listed below.
5.6.2 Underground Facilities that cannot be exposed by hand digging or vacuum
excavation: or lines that cannot be located by line locating equipment.
Reasonable effort to hand dig or vacuum excavate.
Competent Person shall be on site during line exposure.
Pipeline must be properly isolated (locked and tagged out).
Preparation for mechanical excavation within the 2 foot clearance limit: Pipelines
containing flammable or non-flammable fluids will be properly de-pressured and
vented to the atmosphere. Depressurization shall mean reducing the pressure on a
line or piping system to 0 psig or as close as practicable. In determination of the
maximum acceptable pressure, Operating Center personnel must at a minimum take
into account factors such as line size, total stored energy, the total potential release
volume, and potential spill volume (i.e. 2-3 psig may be an acceptable risk for a short
small diameter line, but could be considered a more significant potential hazard for a
long large diameter line). The Operating Center Manager or their designee will
decide on a case-by-case basis whether lines are acceptably depressurized. It is the
expectation within this document that all lines be depressurized when mechanical
excavation is done within the 2 foot clearance limit. There may be some very
limited cases (e.g. water irrigation systems) that an exception to the 2 foot clearance
limit is made, but it would require adherence to the exception process covered in
Section 5.6.4 of this document. If a line in question is 3rd party owned, a request
shall be made to properly de-pressurize the line.
Mechanical equipment will be allowed to remove soil from around pipeline closer
than 2 feet following proper depressurization & venting to atmosphere. Caution
should be taken not to damage coating.
If during this process there is damage to pipe or coating, report immediately to BP
personnel. Competent Person will supervise repairs and document damage.
5.6.3 Underground Facilities that will not be exposed by hand digging or vacuum
excavation.
Determination to not expose pipeline shall require OCM approval to proceed with
ground disturbance, approvals shall be case specific based on an acceptable business
case with consideration for risk and cost.
Will often apply to situations involving nonmetallic pipeline, but can be equally
valid for metallic pipeline and other non-energized facilities.
Facility/Pipeline must be properly isolated (locked and tagged out).
Facility/Pipeline will be properly de-pressured/de-energized and vented to the
atmosphere.
All other Ground Disturbance permit requirements shall apply.
Competent Person shall be on site during pipeline crossing or exposure.
5.6.4 Exceptions Process.

An MOC, including a risk assessment and action plan, is required to vary from
permit or any other requirements of this document. Any variation following
completion of the MOC, must be approved by the Asset Manager or their designee
and the Business Unit Technical Authority (TA). Variations that are more stringent
than those required in this document, do not require the exceptions process.
The determination to reduce any requirements of this document must be given
careful consideration and follow the process outlined above. The following items at
a minimum must be considered as part of the MOC risk assessment: any regulatory
or legal requirements; potential for spills and proximity to waterways or other
environmentally sensitive areas; the amount of stored energy within the system;
potential for gas leakage and migration; the proximity of the operation to personnel,
public dwellings and other developed areas such as buildings, roadways, parks, etc.
Unless explicitly addressed in the MOC, all other provisions and requirements for
the Ground Disturbance Practice and Permitting shall apply (including requirements
for the Competent Person to be on site).
5.7 Additional Permits (permit item 7)

Additional Safe Work Permits (e.g., Hot Work, Confined Space Entry, etc.) as per the BP Onshore
US Safety Practices may be required. If the excavation is complex or involves multiple lines-
specific procedures must be developed.
5.8 Overhead Lines (permit item 8)

Overhead power lines that may pose a hazard during movement of equipment must also be clearly
indicated and clearances must be maintained. Barricades shall be placed to prevent equipment
from inadvertently crossing under a line. A spotter is required to assist equipment operators in
maintaining required safe distances while equipment is in operation.
5.9 Environmental Evaluation (permit item 9)

Ground disturbance activities in certain areas may require specific environmental permits or plans.
Ground disturbance activity projects such as remediation, location restoration and site
development may need Ground Disturbance Permits. Items such as wetland disturbance permit,
dredging or filling permits, storm water discharge permits, and critical or sensitive habitat
determination and pollution prevention plans may be required. Archaeological sites may also be
present and must be evaluated and permits issued as applicable if there is a possibility of their
presence.
Consult your Environmental Coordinator or Specialist prior to any ground disturbance activities
in environmentally sensitive or culturally rich areas.
5.10 Operating Center Communication (permit item 10)

Notifications to appropriate internal personnel (e.g., Managers, Supervisors, Team Leaders, etc.)
must be made prior to issuance of a permit per individual OC requirements.
5.11 Excavation Design (permit item 11)

All excavations shall be made in accordance with the rules, regulations, requirements, and
guidelines set forth in 29 CFR 1926.650, .651, and .652, the Occupational Safety and Health
Administrations standard on Excavations, except where otherwise noted below. Maximum
Allowable Slopes, OSHA Soil Classification, Soil Analysis
Excavations greater than 4 feet in depth in which oxygen deficient or hazardous atmospheres
could reasonably be expected to exist shall be treated as confined spaces. Atmospheric testing and
a confined space permit will be completed before employees enter such excavations.
A stairway, ladder, ramp or other safe means of egress shall be located in trench excavations that
are 4 feet or more in depth. A safe means of egress must be within 25 feet of each employee in the
excavation.
Ladders shall be secured in a manner to prevent movement while in use and shall extend 3 feet
over the trench top.
An earth ramp may be considered a safe means of egress only if employees are able to walk the
ramp in an upright manner when entering or exiting the trench.
The edges of all open trenches must be protected from falling items. Excavated soil and
equipment (such as tubulars) must be kept at least 2 feet from the edge of the trench (or have
retaining devices to prevent them falling into the trench).
All surface encumbrances that are located so as to create a hazard to employees shall be removed
or supported, as necessary, to safeguard employees.
No employees or contractors shall be permitted underneath loads handled by lifting or digging
equipment.
Employees and/or contractors shall not work in excavations in which there is accumulated water
or in which water is accumulating, unless adequate precautions have been taken to protect
employees against the hazards posed by water accumulation. Construction Checklist for
Trenching
Additional requirements related to protective system, i.e. sloping & shoring, are contained in
Excavation Protective Systems
5.12 Daily Inspections (permit item 12)

Daily inspections of excavations, adjacent areas, and protective systems shall be made by a
Competent Person for evidence of a situation that will result in possible cave-ins or other
hazardous conditions. Inspections shall be documented and be required when personnel are
entering trenches. Checklist example: Trench Safety Daily Field Report
A documented inspection shall be conducted by a Competent Person (BP or contractor) prior to
the start of work and as needed throughout the shift (e.g. when additional hazards may be created
due to weather.)
Where a Competent Person finds evidence of a situation that could result in a possible cave-in,
indications of failure or protective systems, hazardous atmospheres, or other hazardous conditions,
exposed employees shall be removed from the hazardous area until the necessary corrective
actions have been taken to ensure their safety.
Where the stability of adjoining buildings, walls, foundations, or other structures is endangered by
excavation operations, support systems such as shoring, bracing or underpinning shall be provided
to ensure the stability of such structures for the protection of employees.
Where employees, contractors or equipment are required or permitted to cross over excavations,
walkways or bridges with standard guardrails shall be provided.
Adequate physical barrier protection shall be provided at all remotely located excavations to
protect workers and the public. All wells, pits, shafts, etc. shall be barricaded or covered. Upon
completion of exploration and similar operations, temporary wells, pits, shafts, etc. shall be
backfilled.

5.13 New non-traceable underground installations shall be installed with line locating capabilities.
5.14 The Competent Person shall assure that the Qualified Equipment Operator and spotter, when
applicable, review/sign the Ground Disturbance Permit. Additionally, all personnel on-site shall
review/sign the JSA/JHA.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR, 1926.652.
gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction
gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance
7.0 Required Minimum Best Practices Incorporated by Reference

The following best practices are required and incorporated by reference into the NA Gas Onshore
US ground disturbance practice. Each Operating Center shall comply with the minimum
requirements set forth in each of these practices. An Operating Center may develop specific local
practices that meet or exceed the requirements of these best practices. Any specific local practices
must be developed in accordance with the Management of Change process. Additionally, all local
practices must be approved by the NA Gas SPU Technical Authority (TA)
Exposing Pipelines
Pipeline Repair and Modification
Backfilling
Probing
Driving T-Posts
Gas Pipeline Deactivation & Abandonment Procedures Onshore
Pipeline Purging
Maintenance & Installation of Pipeline Warning Markers
Installation of Non-Metallic Pipelines
Application of Protective Coating
Damage Prevention; One-Call; Pipeline Patrolling/Surveillance and Response to
Unauthorized Activity and Reported Damage
Pipeline Mapping Systems
8.0 Revision Log

02/29/2000 Tim Holt Mike Thompson Final Issue
04/08/2004 John Putnam Duane Kortsha Update to standardize across BU, including OSHA
Standard
04/18/2005 Ruth Germany- Jim Bertramson Major revision of complete policy
Bice

Page 1 of 2
Construction Checklist For Trenching

Date: ________________________________ Job No: ________________________________
Foreman: _____________________________ Location: _______________________________
I. Pre-Construction Considerations
A. On-site review between construction supervisor and design
department done before construction starts. Yes____ No____
B. One call requested. Yes____ No____
Date needed: _____________
C. Survey stake and elevation marks of job site set. Yes____ No____
D. Pre-construction meeting between construction supervisor and
construction crew leader done. Yes____ No____
E. Tailgate Safety Meeting between trenching and installation crews. Yes____ No____
F. Depth of groundwater table: ___________ft.
G. Length of time trench will be open: _________days
H. Will the trench:
Be near construction blasting? Yes____ No____
Be greater than 4 deep? Yes____ No____
Require walkways designed for crossing? Yes____ No____
I. Expected shoring/protection method:
_____none _____sloping _____ hydraulic shores _____trench shield
_________other
J. Are there utilities:
Overhead? Yes____ No____
Underground? Yes____ No____
II. Jobsite Review Checklist

A. Tailgate Safety Meeting conducted with all crews Yes____ No____
B. Trench conditions
1. Trench Dimensions:
Max. Depth ______ Width at bottom ________ Length ___________
2. Soil Type A_____ B_____ B1____ C____
Is there less than 10% gravel (by weight) in the soil? Yes____ No____
C. Protection System
1. Select Type of Protection
_______sloping ____ benching ____ hydraulic shoring ____ trench shield ____ other
____ none
2. Sloping & Benching:
Select Angle of Repose 1/2:1 ______ 3/4:1 _____ 1:1 _____ other _____
3. Hydraulic Shoring
type of system ___________________________________
upright height _______________spacing _____________
timber wale _____ size _____
wale length __________________ spacing _____________
sheeting required Yes ____ No ____
sheeting thickness and type ______________________
Contrl Tier: 2 Revision Date: 04/08/2004

Document Number: K0000000487 Print Date: 7/25/2005
Page 2 of 2
D. Special conditions (access-egress)

1. Power pole and/or adjacent structure bracing needed? Yes____ No____
2. Prior or existing excavations nearby? Yes____ No____
3. One call performed? Yes____ No____
4. Sidewalks, pedestrian safety? Yes____ No____
(a) Lighted barricades Yes____ No____
(b) Fencing Yes____ No____
(c) Plating material Yes____ No____
(d) Barricade tape Yes____ No____
5. Roadway traffic hazards
(a) Congested area Yes____ No____
(b) Cones Yes____ No____
(c) Lighted barricades Yes____ No____
(d) Fluorescent orange vests Yes____ No____
(e) Lane and/or street closures Yes____ No____
(f) Steel plating material Yes____ No____
(g) Traffic control officer Yes____ No____
6. Tunneling considerations
(a) Bore pit Yes____ No____
(b) Shoring Yes____ No____
(c) Bracing Yes____ No____
(d) Lighted barricades Yes____ No____
(e) Barricade tape Yes____ No____
E. Discuss emergency procedure for evacuation mishaps with crew? Yes____ No____
1. Check guideline for procedure? Yes____ No____
F. Security Protection
1. Protection provided during weekends and evenings after
crew has left site. Yes____ No____
2. Steel Plates for road crossing. Yes____ No____
3. Barricadingroadway, sidewalks, and excavations. Yes____ No____
Checklist completed by (name): ________________________________________
Contrl Tier: 2 Revision Date: 04/08/2004

Page 1 of 2
GROUND DISTURBANCE PERMIT - valid for 1 day / shift maximum

Date / Time Permit Initiated: Date / Time Permit Expires:
Location name and legal description:
BP Job Competent Person: Phone Number:
BP Job Site Representative: Phone Number:

Emergency BP Phone Number: Alt. Phone Number:
Locate Request Number: Date Request rec'd: time am / pm
Person Requesting Line Locate: Phone Number:
Locate Performed By: Phone Number:
Description of Project Work to be Performed:
Indicate Status of items 1 thru 16 - NOTE: for any item answered "NO" a MOC must be completed before work proceeds
1. One-Call has been notified and contacts have been made to determine the existence and location YES NO
of underground facilities in the vicinity of work area.
2. Available records have been referenced and a plot plan indicating the location of all underground YES NO
facilities has been provided and is available for reference at the work site.
3. All approvals, notifications and agreements have been obtained. YES NO
4. A pre-job safety meeting including Job Safety Analysis has been conducted by the Competent Person. YES NO
5. The Emergency Response Plan has be reveiwed and is available at the work site. The nearest pipeline YES NO
isolation valves have been identified and incorporated into the plan.
6. The proposed ground disturbance area(s) have been identified and all underground facilities in the YES NO
dig zone and search zone have been correctly marked.
7. Approved techniques for exposing underground facilities within 2ft. of ground disturbance have been YES NO NA
(or will be) used to verify the location of all known underground facilities.
8. Other Safe Work Permits, as applicable, have been issued (Confined Space, Hot Work, LOTO, etc). YES NO NA
9. Precautions have been taken to prevent contact with overhead power lines. YES NO NA
10. Possible environmental and archaeological issues have been considered and addressed. YES NO NA
11. Appropriate internal O.C. communications (team leader, field tech, land, etc) have taken place YES NO
12. New non-metallic underground facilities are being installed with line locating capability. YES NO NA
13. All personnel involved with the excavation have reviewed and/or discussed the BP Ground Disturbance YES NO
Code of Practice.
14. The Excavation Design and Construction Checklist for Trenching has been completed for the initial YES NO NA
ground disturbance.*
15. A Trench Safety Daily Field Report will be completed each day prior to the start of work.* YES NO NA
* Refer NAG SPU Gound Disturbance, Excavation, Trenching and Shoring
16. Risk has been assessed, and provisions have been/will be made to address unattended open YES NO NA
excavations to insure the safety of the general public, livestock and wildlife until the site is remediated.
Additional comments, instructions or requirements:
This Permit shall be regarded as "void" and must be reissued if:

a) The permit expires (expiration time noted at top of form).
b) There is a change or a need for a change to the scope of work.
c) Conditions change (weather, new people arrive on location, etc).
Once this form has been fully completed it must be The provisions of this permit have been discussed with the following people:
authorized by the designated (include everyone that is involved with the ground disturbance activity),
Competent Ground Disturbance Person.
Signature
Signature
Competent Person Printed Name Date Signature
Signature
Signature of Competent Designated Person
responsible for ground disturbance Signature
Note: use back of page for additional signatures or comments Signature
NOTE: See reverse side for site PLOT PLAN Signature
Control Tier:2 Revision Date: 04/18/2005
Document Number: K0000000482 PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT TIME OF PRINTING. Print Date 4/10/2007
Page 2 of 2
GROUND DISTURBANCE PERMIT
Railroad crossing =|= Power Line Bridge --C-- Cable Line

{ Power Pole ~FL~ Flow Line Water Dig Zone
Wellhead /////// Fence Line W. Water line North Direction
Excavation White Temporary Survey Markings Pink
Electrical Red Gas & Oil Yellow Potable Water Blue
Drainage/Sewers - Green Communication - Orange Non-Potable Water - Purple
Control Tier 2 PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. Revision Date: 04/08/2004
Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-All-All-All-HSE-DOC-00097 THIS COPY IS VALID ONLY AT TIME OF PRINTING. Print Date: 10/18/2004
Maximum Allowable Slopes (H:V)(1)
for excavations less than 20 ft.
Stable Rock Vertical 90
Type A Soil :1 53
Type B Soil 1:1 45
Type C Soil 1 :1 34
Mixed Soil Types 1 :1 34
Excavations in Type A Soil
Excavations in Type B Soil
Excavations in Type C Soil
Control Tier: 2 Revsion Date: 04/08/2004

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT TIME OF PRINTING.
OSHA Soil Classification
Type A Soil
Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton per square foot (tsf)(144kPa) or greater.
Examples of cohesive soils are clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam, silty clay loam, sandy clay loam,
caliches, and hardpan. (If soil is fissured, subject to vibration, or previously disturbed, it is not considered
Type A.)
Type B Soil
A less cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of greater than 0.5 tsf but less than 1.5 tsf.
Examples are angular gravel or crushed rock, silt, silt loam, sandy loam, dry rock that is not stable, partly
sloped material, and previously disturbed Type A soil not considered Type C soil.
Type C Soil
The least cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf or less. Examples are gravel,
sand, loamy sand, submerged soils or freely seeping soils, and submerged rock that is not a stable, layered
system.

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT TIME OF PRINTING
Page 1 of 2
Soil Analysis Tests
This checklist can be used in the field to determine soil type(s) present in an excavation. A separate
analysis is to be done on each layer of soil in the excavation.
Date: _____________________________________Time: ______________________

Dept. of Excavation: _____________________Width: __________________________
Length of Time Open: _____________________________________________________
Sample taken from: __________Wall __________Depth __________Bottom
Visual Tests
This analysis is to be taken to determine qualitative information regarding the excavation site in general,
the soil adjacent to the excavation, the soil forming the sides of the open excavation, and the soil taken as
samples from excavated material.
1. Observe a sample of soil that is excavated and observe soil in the sides of the excavation. Estimate the
range of particle sizes and the relative amounts of particle sizes. Soil that is primarily composed of
fine-grained material is cohesive material. Soil composed primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is
granular material
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
2. Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil that remains in clumps when excavated is cohesive. Soil that
breaks up easily and does not stay in clumps is granular.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
3. Observe the sides of the opened excavation and the surface area adjacent to the excavation. Crack-like
openings, such as tension cracks, could indicate fissured material. If chunks of soil spall off a vertical
side, the soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evidence of moving ground and are indications of
potentially hazardous situations.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
4. Observe the area adjacent to the excavation and the excavation itself for evidence of existing utilities
and other underground structures, and to identify previously disturbed soil.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
5. Observe the open sides of the excavation to identify layered systems. Examine layers for sloping
toward the excavation. Estimate the degree of slope of the layers.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
6. Observe the adjacent area of the excavation for sources of vibration that may affect the stability of the
excavation face.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
7. Observe the side of the excavation and the area adjacent to the excavation for any evidence of water.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________

Page 2 of 2
MANUAL TESTS
These tests are conducted to determine quantitative as well as qualitative properties of soil and to provide
more information for appropriate classification.
1. Plasticity: Mold a moist or wet sample of soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into threads as thin as
1/8-inch in diameter. Cohesive material can be successfully rolled into threads without crumbling.
For example, if at least a 2-inch (50-mm) length of 1/2-inch thread can be held on one end without
tearing, the soil is cohesive.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
2. Dry Strength: If the soil is dry and crumbles on its own or with moderate pressure into individual
grains or fine powder, it is granular (any combination of gravel, sand or silt). If the soil is dry and falls
into clumps, which break up into smaller clumps but the smaller clumps, can only be broken up with
difficulty, it may be clay in combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the dry soil breaks into clumps,
which can only be broken with difficulty, and there is no visual indication that the soil is fissured, the
soil may be considered unfissured.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
3. Thumb Penetration: The thumb penetration test can be used to estimate the unconfined compressive
strength of cohesive soils.
Type ASoil can be readily indented with the thumb only with very great effort.
Type BSoil can be readily indented with the thumb with some effort.
Type CSoil can be easily penetrated several inches with no effort and can be easily molded with
light finger pressure. This test is to be conducted on an undisturbed soil sample, such as a clump of
soil, as soon as practicable after excavation to minimize the effects of exposure to drying influences.
Reclassification is needed if the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences (rain, snow or
flooding) and documented accordingly.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
4. Estimates of unconfined compressive strength of soils can also be obtained by use of a pocket
penetrometer or by using a hand-operated shearvane.
Results: ____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
5. Drying Test: The basic purpose of the drying test is to differentiate between cohesive material with
fissures, unfissured cohesive material, and granular material. The procedure for the drying tests
involves drying a sample of soil approximately 1 inch thick and 6 inches in diameter until it is
thoroughly dry.
A. If the sample develops cracks as it dries, significant fissures are indicated.
B. Samples that dry and do not crack are to be broken by hand. If considerable force is
necessary to break the sample, significant fissures are indicated.
C. If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is either a fissured cohesive material or a granular
material. To distinguish between the two, pulverize the dried clumps by hand or by stepping
on them. If the clumps do not pulverize easily, the material is cohesive with fissures. If they
pulverize easily into very small fragments, the material is granular.
Results: _____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
Signature of person performing the tests:___________________________________

Page 1 of 2
Trench Safety Daily Field Report
Date: Job No:

Project name:
Project owner:
Project superintendent:
Location:
Weather Conditions:
Rainfall amounts 24 hrs previous:
I hereby attest that the following conditions existed and that the following items were checked or
reviewed during this inspection: (No responses require additional comments).
Yes
No
1. Was all open trenching was inspected? ____
____
2. Was all surcharge located the proper distance from toe to slopes? ____
____
3. Were any tension cracks observed along the top of any slopes? ____
____
4. Were slopes cut at the design angle of repose? ____
____
5. Was any water seepage noted in the trench walls or trench bottom? ____
____
6. Was the bracing system installed in accordance with design? ____
____
7. Was there evidence of shrinkage cracks in trench walls? ____
____
8. Was there evidence of caving or sloughing of soil since the last field inspection? ____
____
9. Were there any zones of unusually weak soils or materials not anticipated? ____
____
10. Was there any evidence of significant fracture planes in soil or rock? ____
____
11. Were there any noted dramatic dips in bedrocks? ____
____
12. Were all short-term trenches covered within 24 hours? ____
____
13. Were non-compliance items photographed? ____
____
14. Were trench box(s) certified? ____
____

Document Number: k0000000486
Page 2 of 2
15. Were hydraulic shores pumped to design pressure? ____

____
16. Type of shoring being used: _____________________________ Was it secure? ____
____
17. Did the shoring plan include a safety factor adequate to allow for equipment
actually being used? ____
____
18. Was traffic in the area adequately away from trenching operations
with barricades? ____
____
19. Were there trees, boulders or other hazards in the area? ____
____
20. Were there vibrations from equipment or traffic too close to the
trenching operation? ____
____
21. List heavy equipment near the operation:
22. List heavy equipment in use on site:
23. Contractor personnel by trade on site:
24. Excavation foreman on site was:

25. Compliance photo activity by station # and direction:
26. Changed subsurface conditions from those anticipated:
27. Activity by station:

Trench Box
Man Hole Construction
Side Sloping
Other: _______________________________________________________
28. Observations:
_____________________________________
_________________________________
____
Contractor Representative BP Representative
Copies of this form are to be kept at the jobsite until completion of the project.

Document Number: k0000000486
Excavation Protective Systems attachment (new attachment, removed from body)
Protective Systems
Each employee in an excavation shall be protected from cave-ins by an adequate protective system
designed in accordance with sloping and benching requirements, or by the use of designed support or shield
systems.
Any excavation over 4 feet in depth where employees and contractors are required or permitted to enter
(unless the excavation is entirely in stable rock) shall be sloped, shored, or shielded to protect employees.
An excavation 4 feet in depth or less that has the potential for a cave-in will be sloped shored or shielded.
A licensed Professional Engineer must approve any excavation greater than or equal to 20 feet in depth.
Sloping
Sloping Selected As the Method of Protection (where sloping means cutting trench walls to the
appropriate angle of repose)
Soil classifications shall be made per the OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.652, Subpart P, Appendix
A.
Options Available (select one):
Option 1.
The excavation will be cut to a slope of 1 1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical, or 34 degrees. (A slope of
this gradation is considered safe for any type of soil. This is also the minimum standard for Class
C soil).
Option 2.
Soil classification shall be made utilizing OSHA Soil Classification & Soil Analysis Tests
Soil must be classified as to Type A, B, or C by a Competent Person and at least one visual and
one manual test shall be performed. See OSHA Soil Classification for help in classifying soils and
Soil Analysis Tests for visual and manual tests.
Once the soil has been properly classified, the excavation shall be cut to the appropriate slope.
Maximum Allowable Slopes & Excavations in Type A, B, C Soils list the required depth and
width of trenches to meet the maximum allowable standards.
Option 3.
Soil classification and sloping shall be determined by a registered professional engineer and shall
meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.652 (b) (4).
Note: Benching may be allowed in certain situations for Type A & B soils, reference OSHA
1926.652 for acceptable practice.
Shoring or Shielding
Shoring Or Shielding Selected As the Method of Protection
(where shoring can be accomplished with the use of wood timbers, screw jacks, hydraulic rams,
etc. and shielding means the use of a trench box or shield)
Options Available:
Appendices A, C and D of 29 CFR 1926.652 (c) (1) are utilized.
The manufacturers data is followed for trench jacks, hydraulic shoring, etc. per 29 CFR 1926.652
(c) 2.
Other tabulated data is utilized to install shoring or shielding properly per 1926.652 (c) 3.
The shoring or shielding system is designed by a registered professional engineer per 1926.652 (c) 4

Final Version 1.0 3/11/05
Minimum Recommended Training and Curriculum for Line

Locator Personnel
Competency Requirements
Line locate accuracy is dependent upon the degree of difficulty and the
experience of the Line Locator Technician. Different configurations,
miscellaneous sources, and foreign structures can cause significant locate errors.
Training for Line Locators should include both basic knowledge and practical
skills.
The minimum learning objectives are as follows:
Basic Knowledge
Understand the science of location (electromagnetic theory)
Understand the different methods of locating
o Use of the Transmitter
o Use of the Receiver
o How to use and the advantages and disadvantages of different
signal application methods
o How to use a split box or equivalent device to sweep an area to
search for unknown buried utilities
Understand marking standards
Know and understand all local regulations
Understand how to use documentation, mapping, and other information
sources
Practical
Demonstrate a visual inspection to assess for buried facilities
Demonstrate a successful line locate with different application methods
Demonstrate a successful area sweep to search for unknown buried
utilities
Demonstrate how to mark a located line properly
gcw
Curriculum for Locator Training
The training outlined in Table 1 and item 1 below are recommended to ensure
that Line Locators have the minimum required knowledge and skills. Training
from an equivalent external source is acceptable, but it must be approved by the
Business Unit Technical Authority (TA). NOTE: Vendor training alone will NOT be
acceptable for qualification of Line Locators.
Source Description Duration Knowledge Practical Evaluation Frequency

Required
Global Training Line Locating Theory 4 hour X Y Once
Center Training Class
Global Training Line Locating Tech I 4 hour X X Y Once
Center Training Class
Aqua-tronics Cable Locating Part 1; The 53 X Y Annually
Basics DVD minutes
Aqua-tronics Cable Locating Part 2; The 26 X Y Annually
Techniques of Inductive minutes
Tracing DVD
Aqua-tronics Cable Locating Part 3; 28 X Y Annually
Advanced Techniques for minutes
using the Inductive
Coupler DVD
Aqua-tronics Cable Locating Part 4; 25 X Y Annually
Special Techniques and minutes
Field Problems DVD
Underground Best Effort Locating The 20 X Y Annually
Focus Magazine Art of Utility Locating Video minutes
DVD
Underground Seeing is Believing; Safely 29 X Y Once
Focus Magazine Exposing Buried Utilities minutes
DVD
BP Ground BPs Ground Disturbance X Y Every 3 Years
Disturbance and All Supplemental
Practice Practices
1) In addition to the above training, all new Line Locators must spend a
minimum of 2 weeks of on-the-job training with an experienced Line
Locator prior to solo locating.
Recommended Advanced Training and Professional Development for

Line Locators:
Table 2.
Source Description Duration Knowledge Practical Evaluation Frequency

Required
Aqua-tronics Line Locating Class and 1 day X X Y Every 3 years
Line Training Practical Demonstration
Session
Staking Line Locator Training 5 days X X Y Recommended
University once, but not
required
Locate Rodeo Conference, Workshop, N Recommended
Atlanta, GA and Competition every 3 years,
gcw
but not
required
Contact Information:
1) Global Training Center, Deb Denam, 403-248-2995,
www.globaltrainingcentre.com
2) Aqua-tronics, Merill Haddon, Kent Haddon, 541-548-2110, Redmond,
Oregon 97756, www.aquatronics.com
3) Underground Focus Magazine, www.undergroundfocus.com reference
Safety Videos (DVDs) 1) Best Effort Locate: The Art of Utility Locating,
2) Seeing is Believing; Safely Exposing Buried Utilities
4) Staking University, 877-825-8648, www.stakingu.net S of Chicago,
contact name Mike Parilac.
5) Locate Rodeo, Annual Line Locating Conference, www.locaterodeo.com
gcw
Page 1 of 2
Exposing Pipelines
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum Pipeline Exposing requirements for all BP and contractor
OUSBU personnel involved with activities as defined in this document. The scope of this
document is intended to include 3rd Party activity within the BP Right of Way or near any BP
pipelines or facilities. Operating Centers may deem it necessary to have more stringent
requirements in place for specific tasks, based on past work experience and hazard
assessments.
Definitions:
Vacuum Excavator an excavating unit that digs by combination of alternating water/air or
air/air pulsations
OC Operations Center
Poly pipe plastic pipe (polybutylene)
PVC plastic pipe (polyvinylchloride)
Competent Person: individuals (employee or contract) who are capable, through experience
and/or training, to identify existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working
conditions which are hazardous or dangerous to personnel and who has authorization to take
prompt corrective measures to eliminate such hazards.
General Requirements:
Consideration should be given to taking the line out of service, and/or lowering line pressure
as much as is practical. Wind direction should be noted and equipment and personnel
should be placed in an upwind position where possible.
A qualified BP or designated BP contractor employee will be present at the dig site during all
work associated with exposing pipelines.
Deviation from this procedure requires the completion of a Management of Change (MOC).
Compliance with USA Safety Manual
Compliance with BP spills and releases reporting procedure
Procedure/Process:
1. To determine line orientation, a competent BP or designated contractor employee shall
attempt to locate the pipeline with electronic line locating equipment and/or a probe where
appropriate.
2. After dig site and pipeline orientation has been electronically determined, probe for pipeline at
dig site and 25-feet on either side of actual dig site to confirm pipeline orientation and dig site
location.
2.1 Probe for steel or poly pipe carefully. Probe may penetrate line if excessive force is
used.
2.2 Probe for PVC and fiberglass pipelines with extreme caution. Be aware some
operators may NOT allow us to use a probe for these type lines.
WARNING: DO NOT PROBE electric lines, fiber optic lines, and/or cables. Hand dig only!
3. After probing has identified line, expose line at dig site by hand or vacuum excavation to a
point 2 below the exposed line.
4. Shovels can easily damage fiberglass, poly pipe, PVC, electric and fiber optic lines and
cables, even if only moderate force is used. PICKS SHALL BE USED WITH APPROVAL
ONLY. Mechanical means may be used to remove dirt that has been sufficiently probed
and/or loosened by shovel. Mechanical equipment (other than vacuum excavator) may not
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 2
be used as the primary excavation tool if the line to be exposed is known or suspected to
exist in the dig zone.
4.1 If the line cannot be located by probing, hand or vacuum excavate the dig zone to
expose the pipe. If the orientation of the line cannot be determined at that point, the
additional probe sites identified in step 2 will be hand excavated.
4.2 For depths greater than 12 feet, refer to trenching and shoring as per Safety Manual.
5. After the line has been exposed by hand, proceed with mechanical excavation. Mechanical
excavation will NOT be allowed, closer than 2-feet to the pipeline. Mechanical excavation
parallel to and within 10 of an existing line will require exposing the line as per step 3 to
confirm location and then at appropriate intervals to confirm alignment. Intervals will be
determined by the Competent Person on location and will be indicated on the Ground
Disturbance Permit. The dirt plug underneath the exposed line will be removed by hand.
Key Responsibilities:
Competent Person (BP or designated contractor) are responsible for the safe execution of
this procedure.
Key Documents / Tools:

The following applicable documents are required for the performance of this procedure:
Ground Disturbance Practice
BP gas release and spill reporting procedures
USA Safety Manual
The following special material and equipment are needed for the performance of this procedure:
Excavation equipment (backhoe, vacuum excavator, etc.)
Pipeline locator
OC Approved probe
Marking material
Shovels
PPE
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 4
Pipeline Repair and Modification
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum pipeline repair and modification requirements for
all BP and contractor OUSBU personnel involved with activities as defined in this
document. The scope of this document is intended to include 3rd Party activity within
the BP Right of Way or near any BP pipelines or facilities. Operating Centers may
deem it necessary to have more stringent requirements in place for specific tasks,
based on past work experience and hazard assessments.
Definitions:
Competent Person: Individuals (employee or contract) who are capable,
through experience and/or training, to identify existing and predictable hazards in
the surroundings or working conditions which are hazardous or dangerous to
personnel and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate such hazards. The primary responsibility for ensuring a safe repair or
modification as defined by this procedure is assigned to the Competent Person.
Vacuum Excavator an excavating unit that digs by combination of alternating
water/air or air/air pulsations
Follow Safety guidelines associated with this procedure.
Follow BP spill reporting procedure.
Proper evacuation of pipeline as per OUSBU Ground Disturbance Practice.
Procedure/Process:
1. Work on pipeline for the purpose of modification or to repair known or suspected
leaks shall be blocked in, locked and tagged out, and depressurised before
excavation of any type begins.
2. All Ground Disturbance, Line Locating, and Probing Procedures will be followed
to determine orientation of the pipeline and the existence of unknown pipelines in
the work area. One Call System will be notified of the pending repair.
3. At points to be determined by the Competent Person on the site location, the
pipeline will be exposed by hand or vacuum excavation at the suspected
leak/modification site and in at least two places on either side of the
leak/modification area to verify its orientation.
4. Flags will be placed every fifteen feet along the pipe section to assure alignment
while digging.
5. Mechanical excavation may begin when items #1 through #4 have been met.
The backhoe will be allowed to strip within two inches of the pipeline. Should
Competent Person determine that it is necessary to excavate more than the area
between the previously exposed points because of bad pipe, additional
excavation is permitted provided items #2 and #4 are adhered to.
6. Bell holes will be sloped according to BP Safety Manual Standards for class C
soils, which is 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical or 34 degrees, which is safe for any
type soil up to twenty feet in depth. Sloping procedures may be used for type A
and B soils where warranted, provided proper soil tests are documented.
7. Pipeline replacement section will be like kind, i.e., ERW 5-L-X-42 or greater wall
thickness or same grade pipe.
NOTE: All welding shall follow BP Welding procedure, which can be found on the web at
http://oiltech.bpweb.bp.com/mwc/wpspdf/weldindex.htm. The Standards of Weld Acceptability
shall be in accordance with Section 3 of API Standard 1104 or Section IX of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 4
8. Repairs should be properly coated and communication made with the I&E team
to ensure the proper cathodic protection is installed prior to backfilling.
Material and Equipment:

Always follow manufacturers recommendations for equipment that is used.
The following are the different options that can be used for safe repair / modification
of a section(s) of piping:
A. Vented Plugs (Stopples)

Mechanical device that is clamped inside the pipe ID and includes a vent
connection for safe venting of vapors via a hose. A vented plug is generally
installed on both open ends of piping, after a section of piping has been
cold cut out, and before any hot work is started.
CAUTION: This device is only designed to block very low-pressure
hydrocarbon vapors from entering the work area. It is critical that the
system be fully depressurized, and that other system vents are opened, to
insure no pressure build up on the vented plug.
Pros: Eliminates flammable vapors from hot work area without need for
purging.
Cons: 1) Requires flanges to be added. If flanges are left under ground,
have to be coated and wrapped, and Teflon coated bolts and nuts should be
utilized.
2) Very low pressure rating, therefore, this should only be used when the
piping system has minimal chances of vapor build-up or leakage into the
system.
B. Weld Plus (Slip over)

This device could also be called a High Pressure Dresser Sleeve. It is
designed to fully seal off the piping without any hot work. However, typically
the Weld Plus is fully welded in place, once set. This requires significant
welding time due to the very heavy wall and the need to cut off and weld up
the numerous set bolts.
Pros: Eliminates flammable vapors from hot work area without need for
purging.
Cons: 1) Stable soil is needed, 2) cannot perform X-ray (use penetrating dye)
3) has additional personnel exposure in Bell hole, due to additional welding
time required. 3) High Cost of materials.
C. Hot Tap
Use of a specialty pipe fitting (such a split tee) that is welded to the outside of
the piping, while the piping remains in service. Then a hot tap tool is used to
drill a hole into the process piping while controlling the pressure inside the
hot tap tool.
Pros: Connect can be added to piping without any service interruption
Cons: High exposure and risk to personnel 2) Requires UT to be
performed on pipe before tapping can be done.
D. Water Flush
Pumping from 1 to 3 piping volumes of water through piping, to remove
hydrocarbon vapor and liquids, so that hot work can be done without
additional controls.
Pros: 1) Eliminates need for any of the above listed specialty devices. 2) A
water full line eliminates the need for any additional purging, when ready to
place in line in hydrocarbon service, due to the absence of air in the system.
Revision Date:
Page 3 of 4
Cons: 1) Not always efficient removal of Hydrocarbons 2) Requires

extensive equipment and fluids handling.
E. Inert Gas Purge

Flowing nitrogen through piping, to dilute the flammable gas, and eliminate
potential for a flammable mixture inside the pipe.
Pros: 1) Eliminates flammable mixture inside pipe 2) Eliminates the need for
any additional purging, when ready to place in line in hydrocarbon service.
Cons: 1) High exposure and risk to personnel due to asphyxiation properties
of nitrogen 2) does not remove pooling Hydrocarbons
F. Gel Plug (Mud Plug)

Use of a drilling mud type material to temporarily block any flammable vapors
from entering the hot work area.
CAUTION: This method is only designed to block atmospheric pressure
hydrocarbon vapors from entering the work area. It is critical that the
system be fully depressurized, and that other system vents are opened very
nearby, to insure no pressure build up.
Cons: 1) Requires vent close to work (diameter X 100) (2) Difficulty in
sealing Mud Plug to inside pipe wall.
Pros: 1) Eliminates the need to flanges in piping 2) Eliminates need for any
of the above listed specialty devices 3) Difficulty in sealing Mud Plug to
inside pipe. Remove from Pros.
G. Cut and Flash

Intentional ignition of flammable vapors inside piping, to eliminate
unexpected flashing. This is done only after the piping is cold cut and at
least one end of the piping is fully opened, for ample venting.
CAUTION: This method should only be considered for short lines that have
no chances of liquid hydrocarbon pooling inside line. Otherwise, there is a
high potential of a delayed and very severe back flash inside the piping,
when hot work is re-introduced such as during weld out.
Pros: Eliminates need for any of the above listed specialty devices
Cons: No back-up protections, in the event of leakage into the system, or
liquid hydrocarbons are present after all.
Competent Person (BP or designated contractor) are responsible for the safe
execution of this procedure.

The following applicable documents are required for the performance of this
procedure:
Ground Disturbance Practice.
Line Locating for Ground Disturbance
Probing Procedure
Exposing Pipelines
Applicable Welding Procedures
USA Safety Manual
The following special material and equipment are needed for the performance of this
procedure:
Excavation equipment (backhoe, vacuum excavator, etc.), vacuum truck
Welder and associated equipment,
Revision Date:
Page 4 of 4
Pipe, marking materials, and coating materials.

As required by sub-tier procedures.
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 2
Backfilling Procedure
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum Backfilling requirements for all BP and contractor OUSBU
personnel involved with ground disturbance activities as defined in this document. The scope of
this document is intended to include 3rd Party activity within the BP Right of Way or near any BP
assessments.
Definitions:
PPE Personal Protection Equipment
Wheel pack - refers to using a backhoe wheel or a motor grader wheel used to pack dirt in a
ditch.
Follow Safety guidelines associated with this procedure.
A spotter is recommended where poor visibility or backfill conditions create a hazard.
Procedure/Process:
Backfilling
1. Visual inspection of the excavation must be done before backfill commences.
2. Where warranted, after lowering in, plugs of dirt shall be backfilled first at spacing of every 2-
3 joints to check location and movement before covering. Backfilling shall be performed by
means of company-approved equipment.
3. Backfilling where rock is encountered - Ditch excavated in loose or solid rock must be
backfilled in a manner that will not cause damage to the facility. No rocks, hard clods, or
other hard objects shall be placed on the facility. The pipeline shall be covered with 12
inches of soft earth before any rocks or hard objects are place in the ditch. Where there is
insufficient loose dirt available on the ROW to provide the minimum 12 inches of padding
over the facility, loose dirt shall be hauled in. After the 12-inch layer of padding covers the
facility, the remainder of the soil shall be placed in the ditch provided that any rock that will
interfere with ploughing and cultivation is removed. It shall be the responsibility of the
contractor to remove this rock from the ROW. Dirt shall be hauled in, if necessary to fill the
ditch.
4. In lieu of requiring dirt to be hauled for padding the excavation, BP may permit the use of
Rock Shield for protecting the coating. BP representative shall designate when and what
type of rock shield is permitted. (Note - certain types interfere with cathodic protection.).
When Rock Shield is permitted, contractor shall install it in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Once padding is complete, refer to normal backfilling procedures.
Packing of Backfill
1. After dig site has been backfilled to approximately of the ditch depth, wheel-pack the
existing fill.
2. Packing the backfill by use of wheel pack equipment shall not be done where the facility
might be damaged. In these areas, tractors or other machinery shall not be permitted to
travel down the backfilled excavation.
3. If water pack is required, fill excavation with appropriate fill as determined by competent
person and fill remainder of excavation with fresh water. Let set for minimum of 24 hours
before finishing backfill.
4. Complete backfill and wheel-pack the dig site. Leave dirt above dig site crowned to allow for
settling.
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 2
NOTE: PVC, FIBERGLASS, POLY PIPE, FIBER OPTICS CABLES, AND LONG
SPANS OF PIPELINES MIGHT NEED ADDITIONAL SUPPORT. SLEEPERS {i.e.
CONCRETE, SNADBAGS, FILL DIRT, SACKRETE, ETC.} SHOULD BE
CONSIDERED TO PREVENT UNDO STRESS ON THE PIPELINE. EXTREME
CAUTION SHOULD BE USED WHEN BACKFILLING AND PACKING THE ABOVE
TYPES OF PIPELINES.
this procedure.

BP gas release and spills reporting procedures
USA Safety Manual
Excavation equipment (backhoe, vacuum excavator, etc.)
Standard PPE
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 2
Probing Procedure
AUTHORIZED
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum Probing requirements for all BP and contractor OUSBU
personnel involved with ground disturbance activities as defined in this document. The scope of
assessments.
Definitions:
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride (plastic pipe)
BP Pipeline and contract personnel should be familiar with the general requirements for
prevention of pipeline strikes.
Procedure/Process:
1. Use caution probing for the following:
1.1 Probe for steel or polypipe carefully. Probe may penetrate line if excessive force is
used.
1.2 Probe for PVC and fiberglass pipelines with extreme caution. Be aware that some
operators may not allow BP to use a probe for these types of lines.
1.3 Do not probe electrical lines or fiber optic lines and cables.
2. Probe should be positioned and used directly above the center line of the pipeline
3. After probing pipeline, note depth then probe to each side of pipeline to insure that the initial
probe was an accurate indication of the pipeline.
4. Probe pipeline 30-feet, more or less, on each side of dig site and at dig site.
NOTE: If not sure of pipeline material (i.e.: PVC, poly pipe, fiberglass, and special coated
pipelines) seek additional information before continuing work.
this procedure.
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 2

USA Safety Manual
OC Approved Probe.
Standard PPE
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 2
Driving T Posts
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum T-Post Driving requirements for all BP and contractor OUSBU
personnel involved with activities as defined in this document. The scope of this document is
intended to include 3rd Party activity within the BP Right of Way or near any BP pipelines or
facilities. Operating Centers may deem it necessary to have more stringent requirements in
Definitions:
ROW Right of Way
T post Pipeline marker
BP Pipeline personnel should be familiar with the general requirements for prevention of
pipeline strikes.
Procedure/Process:
NOTE: This Procedure does not require a Ground Disturbance Permit.
1. Probe 20 1 off centerline of pipeline refer to Onshore US BU Probing Procedure (Proc #)

2. Drive t-post no deeper than 16.
3. On all road ROWs, where fiber optics or phone lines are suspected and pipeline markers
can not be placed on private property, probe 20 with extreme caution as close to private
property as possible (fence row). Once completed, proceed with Steps #2.
this procedure.

Probing Procedure (Proc #: )
USA Safety Manual
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 2
OC Approved T post driver
Probe
Standard PPE
T post
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 6
Document Number
Type of Document: Procedure
Gas Pipeline Deactivation and Abandonment Procedures - Onshore

Authority: Custodian:
Issue Date: Scope of Application:
Revision Date: Control Tier:
Next Review Date:
Table of Contents
1.0 Purpose/Scope ...................................................................................................................................... 1
2.0 Definitions .............................................................................................................................................. 1
3.0 General Requirements........................................................................................................................... 2
3.3 Code Reference Text of CFR Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.727 (current as of 4/8/2002) .......... 2
4.0 Key Responsibilities............................................................................................................................... 3
5.0 Procedure .............................................................................................................................................. 3
6.0 Key Documents/Tools/References ........................................................................................................ 6
Revision Log ................................................................................................................................................. 6
1.0 Purpose/Scope
The purpose of this Procedure is to define the minimum requirements for abandonment or
deactivation of onshore buried natural gas pipelines in the Onshore U.S. Business Unit. The
scope includes:
1. Requirements for disconnecting the pipeline from in-service facilities.
2. Guidelines for determining acceptability of abandonment-in-place versus physical removal.
3. Pigging, purging, and depressurization requirements.
4. Cathodic protection and maintenance requirements for abandoned or deactivated pipelines.
5. Pipeline marker requirements for abandoned or deactivated pipelines.
6. Reporting requirements.
2.0 Definitions
Jursidictional Pipeline As used in this document, a gas pipeline in the continental United States
subject to federal regulations codified in CFR Title 49, Parts 191 and 192.
Abandoned Pipeline A pipeline facility permanently removed from service.
Deactivated Pipeline A pipeline facility disconnected and removed from service. Note that CFR
Title 49, Part 192 does not provide a definition of this term, except that it may be inferred from
Documentum Document Number: S-01-067
OUSBU Error! Reference source not found.Error! Reference source not found.Document Number Page 2 of
192.727(c) that a deactivated (inactive) line does not require continued maintenance so long as it
is treated as an abandoned pipeline.
3.1 Jurisdictional Pipelines

Gas pipelines subject to federal jurisdiction shall meet the regulatory requirements of the Code of
Federal Regulations, Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.727 for abandonment or deactivation.
Note that jurisdictional pipelines require Federal Energy Regulatory Commission approval for
abandonment.
3.2 Non-jurisdictional Pipelines

Company policy shall be to perform abandonment and deactivation of non-jurisdictional
(intrastate) pipelines in the same manner as jurisdictional pipelines, except for specific reporting
requirements which may vary. Facilities remaining in service shall conform to ASME B31.8 or
other applicable code.
3.3 Code Reference Text of CFR Title 49, Part 192, Section 192.727 (current as of 4/8/2002)
Sec. 192.727 Abandonment or deactivation of facilities.
(a) Each operator shall conduct abandonment or deactivation of pipelines in accordance with the
requirements
of this section.
(b) Each pipeline abandoned in place must be disconnected from all sources and supplies of gas;
purged of
gas; in the case of offshore pipelines, filled with water or inert materials; and sealed at the ends.
However, the
pipeline need not be purged when the volume of gas is so small that there is no potential hazard.
(c) Except for service lines, each inactive pipeline that is not being maintained under this part must be
disconnected from all sources and supplies of gas; purged of gas; in the case of offshore pipelines, filled
with
water or inert materials; and sealed at the ends. However, the pipeline need not be purged when the
volume of
gas is so small that there is no potential hazard.
(d) Whenever service to a customer is discontinued, one of the following must be complied with:
(1) The valve that is closed to prevent the flow of gas to the customer must be provided with a
locking device or
other means designed to prevent the opening of the valve by persons other than those authorized
by the
operator.
(2) A mechanical device or fitting that will prevent the flow of gas must be installed in the service
line or in the
meter assembly.
(3) The customer's piping must be physically disconnected from the gas supply and the open pipe
ends sealed.

Document Number: X-00-000
VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND AT.
(e) If air is used for purging, the operator shall insure that a combustible mixture is not present after
purging.
(f) Each abandoned vault must be filled with a suitable compacted material.
(g) For each abandoned offshore pipeline facility or each abandoned onshore pipeline facility that
crosses over, under or through a commercially navigable waterway, the last operator of that facility must
file a report upon abandonment of that facility.
(1) The preferred method to submit data on pipeline facilities abandoned after October 10, 2000 is to
the National Pipeline Mapping System (NMPS) in accordance with the NPMS Standards for Pipeline
and Liquefied Natural Gas Operator Submissions. To obtain a copy of the NPMS Standards, please
refer to the NPMS homepage at www.npms.rspa.dot.gov or contact the NPMS National Repository at
703-317-3073. A digital data format is preferred, but hard copy submissions are acceptable if they
comply with the NPMS Standards. In addition to the NPMS required attributes, operators must submit
the date of abandonment, diameter, method of abandonment, and certification that, to the best of the
operators knowledge, all of the reasonably available information requested was provided and, to the
best of the operators knowledge, the abandonment was completed in accordance with applicable laws.
Refer to the NPMS Standard for details in preparing your data for submission. The NPMS Standards
also include details of how to submit data. Alternatively, operators may submit reports by mail, fax or e-
mail to the Information Officer, Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of
Transportation, Room 7128, 400 Seventh Street, SW, Washington DC 20590; fax (202)366-4566; e-
mail, roger.little@rspa.dot.gov. The information in the report must contain all reasonably available
information related to the facility, including information in the possession of a third party. The report
must contain the location, size, date, method of abandonment, and a certification that the facility has
been abandoned in accordance with all applicable laws.
(2)Data on pipeline facilities abandoned before October 10, 2000 must be filed by before {sic} April 10,
2001. Operators may submit reports by mail, fax or e-mail to the Information Officer, Research and
Special Programs Administration, Department of Transportation, Room 7128, 400 Seventh Street, SW,
Washington DC 20590; fax (202)366-4566; e-mail, roger.little@rspa.dot.gov. The information in the
report must contain all reasonably available information related to the facility, including information in the
possession of a third party. The report must contain the location, size, date, method of abandonment,
and a certification that the facility has been abandoned in accordance with all applicable laws.

4.1 Operations
Appropriate Operations Center personnel shall be responsible for identification of lines to be
abandoned or deactivated and shall be responsible for performing the abandonment or
deactivation in conformance with these procedures.
5.0 Procedure
5.1. General
Management of Change and project authorization procedures shall apply to all pipeline
abandonment or deactivation projects. Proper consideration shall be given to the safety,
legal, financial, tax, right-of-way, environmental, operational, and technical aspects of the
proposed project during the approval process.
Detailed work plans shall be prepared for each project. These shall include identification of
connections to be disconnected, method of purging and purge vent locations including
temporary connections, method of monitoring purge gas, and all other pertinent safety,
construction, and operational issues.

5.2. Guidelines for determining acceptability of abandonment in place versus physical removal.
Pipelines shall be abandoned in place only if no reason for removal exists such as:
a. Removal is required by the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission or other

governmental entity having jurisdiction.
b. Removal is dictated by the terms of the right of way agreement (fee or public).
c. Economics are favorable for recovery of the pipe.
5.3 Environmental Concerns
The Onshore U.S. BU Health, Safety, and Environment (HSE) group shall be consulted to
ensure conformance of the facilities with all applicable environmental regulations.
Consideration shall be given to possible contaminants remaining in the pipeline, and other
potential impacts to the environment of the abandonment project.
5.4 Requirements for Pipeline Abandonment In Place or Deactivation
5.4.1 The pipeline that is to be abandoned or deactivated shall be physically disconnected

from all piping that is to remain in service. To avoid the risk of damage to near
surface buried facilities, all piping and components that are abandoned or deactivated
shall have a depth of cover at least equal to the code-required depth of cover.
Facilities remaining in service shall either be cut off below grade and have a depth of
cover at least equal to the code required depth of cover, or shall be terminated above
grade and provided with sufficient pipe guards or barriers to prevent vehicular
damage. Care shall be taken to avoid creating deadlegs in the piping remaining in
service that could be susceptible to increased rates of corrosion. Nonjurisdictional
pipelines shall meet the minimum cover requirements of ASME B31.8 or other
applicable code.
5.4.2 The abandoned or deactivated pipeline shall be pigged if necessary to ensure that
hydrocarbon liquids have been removed.
5.4.3 The abandoned or deactivated pipeline shall be purged with a noncombustible gas
such as air or nitrogen. Purging shall continue until the segment is determined to be
free of a combustible mixture of gas. The pipeline may be cut into sections as
necessary to provide ease of purging and removal of liquids.
5.4.4 The abandoned or deactivated pipeline shall be sealed off with welded flat plates or
weld caps. The end sealing shall ensure that ingress by people or animals is not
possible.
5.4.5 For piping NPS 12 and larger in locations where eventual corrosion of the pipe could
lead to a collapse of the pipe and cave-in of the covering material (soil), consideration
shall be given to filling the abandoned pipeline with sand or other noncompactible
material where such a cave-in could create a safety hazard.
5.4.6 Cased crossings (highway or railroad) shall be abandoned as follows, unless

otherwise dictated by the crossing permit stipulations:
a. Remove all casing vents at the casing depth.

b. Remove carrier pipe from casing if practical to do so.
c. Purge gas and hydrocarbons from the piping and casing and seal the casing ends
with plates or caps.
d. For casing NPS 12 and larger, fill the casing and carrier pipe (if not removed) with
sand or other noncompactible material.
5.4.7 Uncased crossings (highway or railroad) shall be abandoned as follows, unless

otherwise dictated by the crossing permit stipulations:
a. For pipelines smaller than NPS 12 the crossing can be purged and sealed as a
part of a section of the abandoned pipeline.
b. For casing NPS 12 and larger, the crossing pipe shall be cut at the edge of the
right of way, purged, filled with sand or other noncompactible material, and
sealed with plates or caps.
5.5 Maintenance and Cathodic Protection Requirements for Abandoned or Deactivated Lines.
5.5.1 No further maintenance is required on abandoned pipelines. Deactivated pipelines

that are likely to be returned to service shall continue to receive all normal
maintenance in accordance with Company operating procedures and applicable
codes.
5.5.2 Cathodic protection is not required for abandoned pipelines. Deactivated pipelines that
are likely to be returned to service shall continue to be cathodically protected in
accordance with Company operating procedures and applicable codes.
5.6. Pipeline Marker Requirements for Abandoned or Deactivated Pipelines.
5.6.1 Permanent pipeline markers shall be installed and maintained for all abandoned in
place pipelines and deactivated pipelines in accordance with the same procedures
followed for active pipelines.
5.7 Reporting and Record Keeping Requirements
5.7.1 Maps and drawings shall be maintained showing the location of the abandoned in
place or deactivated facilities.
5.7.2 Records shall be completed indicating the purge method and results, the method and
location of sealing, and sections physically removed and sections filled with
noncompactible material.
5.7.3 Upon abandonment of a jurisdictional pipeline, the Company shall complete the
necessary reporting requirements of the authority having jurisdiction (for jurisdictional
pipelines, see Paragraph 3.3(g) above).
5.7.4 Pipelines abandoned in place or deactivated are subject to the one-call requirements
for locating and marking buried facilities prior to third party construction activity.
5.8 Dispensation of Right of Ways and Easements
5.8.1 Where the Company has no further interest in keeping the right of way or easement of
an abandoned line, consideration should be given to selling or vacating the right of
way or easement to reduce exposure to associated liabilities and taxes.


This section should include, as applicable, references to other documents/tools that interface with this
procedure. Any documents/tools referenced here shall be referred to in the text of this document. The
references can be modified administratively by the Custodian without creating a new revision to the
document.
Reference Organization (Acronym)

Acronym Ref Doc Number Reference Document Title(Edition/Revision if appropriate)
Revision Log
D t

Page 1 of4
Pipeline Purging Procedure
AUTHORIZED
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum requirements for all BP and contractor OUSBU personnel
involved with Pipeline Purging activities as defined in this document.This procedure addresses
pipeline commissioning, modification, and repair. It does not supercede the minimum
requirements of other established Practices / Procedures (i.e. Blinding and isolation, Confined
space, Hot tapping, Hot Work, MOC, etc.) Operating Centers may deem it necessary to have
more stringent requirements in place for specific tasks, based on past work experience and
hazard assessments.
Definitions:
New Pipeline pipeline that has never been in hydrocarbon service
Existing Pipeline pipeline that has been in hydrocarbon service
BP and contract personnel should be familiar with the general requirements for Ground
Disturbance activities and all associated practices.
Procedure/Process:
1) New pipelines (never in hydrocarbon service):
The water flush followed by the inert purge gas method is preferred because it
reduces two of the elements of the fire triangle (oxygen and hydrocarbon).
(Commissioning a new pipeline (never been in hydrocarbon service)):
All future pipelines should be designed and constructed with sufficient isolation valves
(ex: at least at both ends of the new pipeline segment)
Pipeline is full of hydrotest water after the hydrotest has been completed
Insert pig in pipeline, push it through with air and then purge the air out of the pipeline
with inert gas
As an alternate, blow most of the water out of pipeline with inert gas (any trash in the
pipeline may be left behind when just vapor is used without a physical pig)
As an alternate, blow most of the water out of pipeline with hydrocarbon gas (least
preferred method)
Displace inert gas with hydrocarbons by one of the listed purge methods
Commission pipeline
2) Modifying/repairing existing pipeline:
A. If the existing pipeline has limited entry/exits (ex: single inlet and outlet), the water flush
followed by the inert purge gas method is preferred because it reduces two of the
elements of the fire triangle (oxygen and hydrocarbon).
B. In cases where the existing pipeline network is more complex, the JSA/RAT must be
approved by the construction team (Team Lead, Construction Supvr, Safety Tech, and
Revision Date:
Page 2 of4
Facility Engineer) prior to commencing the physical work on the pipeline if an alternative
method is better for the particular pipeline scenario. Some alternatives may include:
i. two vented plugs (as vapor, not pressure, barriers) and install a
flanged spool underground
ii. vented plug to prepare pipe and then a mud plug for final weld
iii. full encirclement saddle for hot tapping
iv. etc
(Modifying/repairing an existing pipeline with limited entry/exits):
Isolate and drain pipeline (do not introduce air into the pipeline during this step)
Fill and flush with 2 to 3 pipeline volumes of water
Physical pig and / or soap could be used during water flush if pipeline system allows
Blow water out of pipeline with inert gas
Limited entry with non spark device (for LEL check and possible liquids), maximum %
LEL satisfied (if LEL reading is too high purge with inert gas again until it is satisfied)
Remember that hydrocarbon vapors may be produced from residual hydrocarbon liquids
or pipeline wall buildup
Install grounding strap to pipeline, cold cut, LEL checks, repair pipeline, test repair
(usually non-destructive test)
Displace inert gas with one of the listed purge methods
Recommission pipeline
Methods of Purging:
*** Do not ever use compressed air as a purge gas in an existing line!
Water Flush Followed by Inert Gas Purge:

This is the preferred method because it removes the greatest amount of residual
hydrocarbons
Fill and then pump 2 to 3 pipeline volumes of water through pipeline
Could introduce soap to enhance removal of residual hydrocarbons
Physical pig(s) could be used during water flush
Blow water out of pipeline with inert purge gas (could also use physical pig before purge
gas)
Removes greatest amount of liquid hydrocarbons from the pipeline
Increased environmental exposure due to handling water for disposal and possible
limitations of water trucks to both ends of the pipeline
Pressure / Depressure Cycling:

Introducing inert purge gas to increase system pressure to 15 psig and blowdown to 0
psig
Repeat this cycle a minimum of four times
Limit rate of purge gas to reduce the chance of bypassing hydrocarbon vapor
Limits the instantaneous pressure buildup if internal ignition occurs
Sweep-Through With Purge Gas:

Introducing inert purge gas at one opening while letting the system contents escape
through another opening at the opposite end of the system
Limit rate of purge gas to reduce the chance of bypassing hydrocarbon vapor
Revision Date:
Page 3 of4
Largest emissions and waste of hydrocarbon resources method

Slug flow may leave volume of liquid in the pipeline (ex: low spots)
Displacement or Slug:
Introducing inert purge gas to create a buffer zone (slug or pill)
Could use another inert chase gas after initial purge gas to limit dilution of purge slug
Limit flow rate to maintain purge gas slug
Physical pig could be used in certain circumstances
Siphon:
Fill the system with a liquid and introduce inert purge gas into the vapor space
Purge gas fills vapor space as liquid is drained from the system
Best application is for vessels and tanks
0 Combination of any of the previous types:
Nitrogen is not risk free and there are some items to consider:
Will not support life if oxygen is insufficient

Certain gas detectors are inaccurate in a nitrogenous atmosphere
Pressure and temperature handling precautions
Cylinder transportation and handling precautions
this procedure.

USA Safety Manual
Amoco Chemical Co: Texas City Refinery: Safety Regulation E #11 Plumbers plugs and
balloons for welding
Amoco Pipeline Co: SP-204: Nitrogen displacement of pipelines
Amoco Petroleum Prods: Process Safety Standard # 34 Use of nitrogen in refining
operations
Amoco Petroleum Prods: Process Safety Standard #8 Air blowing hydrocarbon lines and
equipment
BP America Production Company USA Operations: Safety Manual Pipeline repair
procedures
BP Chemicals: Chocolate Bayou Works: Procedure E #11 Safe use of expandable pipe
plugs
Phillips Alaska: SAF-088-VAR: Equipment Purging
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 5
Maintenance and Installation of Pipeline Warning Signs and

Markers
Overview:
BP Pipelines (North America), Inc. is committed to No Accidents, No Harm to People and No
Damage to the Environment. A key factor in obtaining this company goal is through a proactive
Damage Prevention Program. Pipeline damage can result in injury and death, as well as severe
property damage and loss of product.
At the heart of Damage Prevention is improved information, accuracy, and consistency in

communications between the general public, land owners, excavators, and pipeline operators.
To help minimize the hazards resulting from a pipeline emergency, it is the responsibility of each
operator to mark pipeline routes with accurate and visible warning signs.
The following BP procedure outlines the minimum federal safety standards for the maintenance
and installation of pipeline warning signs and markers.
Regulatory Requirements:
The U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) has established regulations, which require
pipeline markers for mains and transmission lines.
Part 192, TRANSPORTATION OF NATURAL OR OTHER GAS BY PIPELINE MINIMUM

FEDERAL SAFETY STANDARDS, Section 192.707 Line markers for mains and
transmission lines.
Part 195, TRANSPORTATION OF HAZARDOUS LIQUIDS BY PIPELINE, Section

195.410 Line markers.
Procedure/Process:
Pipeline Markers:
Pipeline rights-of-way and crossings shall be marked in accordance with DOT requirements to
Indicate the presence of the Pipelines to the public, contractors, and other outside
agencies.
Facilitate aerial patrol.
Guide its personnel engaged in maintenance operating activities.
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 5
Type and Placement:
Markers with warning signs installed to indicate the presence of a buried pipeline.
The markers shall be installed over the Pipeline, if practicable, or as close to it as

possible.
Markers shall be installed in a manner that will not damage the Pipeline or its coating.
Pipeline markers are not always placed on top of the pipeline. They cannot be relied
upon to indicate the exact position of the pipeline they mark. And, while markers are
helpful in locating pipelines, they are limited in the information they provide. They only
indicate the general location of a pipeline. They provide no information, for example, on
the depth or number of pipelines in the vicinity.
Marker Posts:
Posts may be made of steel, aluminum, reinforced concrete, wood, or other materials,
which will insure adequate strength, stiffness, and durability.
Protection against below ground corrosion or weathering shall be provided, as

necessary.
Vent pipe, aerial patrol markers or milepost markers may be used as posts for installing
pipeline warning signs.
Pipeline Warnings Signs:
Signs shall be made of strong, durable material and finished to resist the effects of exposure and
vandalism.
These signs should state at least the following: "WARNING" followed by the words
"PETROLEUM (or name of commodity transported) PIPELINE" in lettering at least one inch high
with an approximate stroke of 1/4 inch on a background of sharply contrasting color.
Signs shall also contain the name of the operator and an emergency telephone number
(including area code) where the operator can be reached at all times.
Locations for pipeline markers:
Where the placement of standard pipeline warning signs is impracticable, the presence of the
Pipeline may be
Indicated by stenciled markings, cast monuments, plaques, signs, or other devices

installed on curbs, sidewalks, streets, building facades, or wherever else practicable.
Other markers such as DOT approved curb markers should be considered or other
approved type markers that identifies the Pipeline and location should be used.
Revision Date:
Page 3 of 5
Highway, Roads, Railroads, and Stream/River Crossings Along the Pipeline Right-of-Way:
Permanent pipeline markers shall be located at each public road crossing and railroad crossing
and in sufficient numbers along the remainder of each buried pipeline so that its location is
accurately known.
Markers shall be sufficiently elevated above grade to allow them to be clearly viewed from a
distance and to remain visible above normal vegetation or snow accumulations where practical.
Markers shall normally be placed at locations where they will not interfere with normal right-of-
way maintenance and land used by landowners/tenants. Markers may be placed at fence lines,
property lines, right-of-way boundaries, and in open areas where the party exerting control over
the surface use of the right-of-way will permit such installations.
Special Locations:
Markers shall be installed at locations where the pipeline is above ground and is
accessible to the public.
Aerial crossings on any type of structure, either publicly or privately owned, should be
considered as being accessible to the public.
Markers shall be placed on each side of any lakes or reservoirs that are active source of
water supply.
Other Signs And Marking Practices:
Signs Around Pumping Stations and Breakout Tank Areas
Permanent signs shall be located and posted in sufficient numbers around pumping
stations and breakout tank areas to insure that at least one sign is visible to the public at
any place around the station/area.
Signs shall be made of strong, durable material and finished to resist the effects of
exposure and vandalism. These signs must have the name of the operator and an
emergency telephone number. Pipeline warning signs may be used for this purpose.
Aerial Milepost Markers:
Aerial milepost markers are generally installed at approximately five-mile intervals and are used
as reference points to establish and report the approximate milepost locations of leaks or other
reportable observances.
The markers are usually installed in fence lines, property lines, or right-of-way boundaries. The
faces of the signs are placed perpendicular to the route of the pipeline.
Revision Date:
Page 4 of 5
Posts:
Fence posts, mileposts, and markers should be painted to help Field Representatives identify
BP pipeline ROW markers.
Fence posts in fences crossing the pipeline at the point of entrance and point of exit of
property lines and those bordering on county roads, lease roads, streets, highways, railroads,
rivers, streams, drainage canals, and levees or dikes should be painted with the colors
unique to the system.
Casing Vent Pipes at Highway and Railroad Crossings:
Vent pipes should be painted to help Field Representatives identify BP pipeline ROW.
Other Structures:
Other equipment or facilities on the right-of-way, when possible and appropriate, should be
painted to help Field Representatives identify BP Pipelines facilities.
Marking Pipeline Spans by Painting, Banding, Decal, etc

Sharply contrasting colors for easy visibility shall be used.
Maintenance Of Markers And Signs:
Maintenance of markers and signs shall be a part of the operators regular maintenance
procedures.
Signs, along with their supporting structures, shall be maintained in their original state of
effectiveness.
Damaged or defaced signs shall be replaced upon discovery or as soon as possible.
Markers shall not be obscured by vegetation.
Markers whose effectiveness has been compromised by construction or development shall

be relocated to restore effective marking.
Federal Law:
It's a federal crime to remove or deface pipeline marker signs, because they are important to
public safety. The penalty for each offense is a fine of up to $5,000, imprisonment for not
more than one year, or both.
Recommendations:
Highway Crossings should be well maintained and highly visible
Area personal and field operators should be able to easily recognize the BP pipeline warning
signs and markers. Consideration should be given to using a standard type, size, and color
of warning signs and markers thru out the area or asset.
Revision Date:
Page 5 of 5
this procedure.

USA Safety Manual
Maintenance & Installation PowerPoint Presentation
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 2
Installation & Maintenance of non-metallic Pipelines
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum requirements for all BP and contractor OUSBU personnel
involved with activities as they pertain to the installation and maintenance of non-metallic
pipelines. Operating Centers may deem it necessary to have more stringent requirements in
Definitions:
PVC plastic pipe (polyvinylchloride)
Competent Person: individuals (employee or contract) who are capable, through experience
and/or training, to identify existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working
conditions which are hazardous or dangerous to personnel and who has authorization to take
prompt corrective measures to eliminate such hazards.
1. All buried lines (fiberglass & poly) will be buried to a depth to have at a minimum 4 feet of
cover. In rocky ground, fiberglass pipe will have a minimum of 12 of bottom padding and
12 of top padding. The pad material can be soil or sand with less that 1 small pebble
(3/4 inch or less) per every 5 handfuls of material sampled. The pad material can have
no angular or broken rock that may have gone through a rock crusher. Steel and poly
lines will have a minimum of 6 of bottom pad and 12 of top pad. Angular or broken
pebbles in the pad material for steel and poly pipe is acceptable. The amount of rock
material inch or less (round pebbles and angular or broken pebbles) can not exceed
25% of the pad material.
2. All ditch bottoms must be crumbed with the ditcher or trackhoe. In real rocky conditions,
the amount of bottom pad for steel and poly shall be 12.
3. All fiberglass and poly lines will have a minimum of a 10 ga wire banded to the pipe for a
tracer wire. This tracer wire needs to have a minimum of 10 of wire left outside of the
end of the trench so that it can be stubbed up in a test station or connected to some other
test point. Plastic marker ribbon will be run 18 above all buried lines (steel, poly, and
fiberglass).
4. Flanges will not be buried unless absolutely necessary as in the transition from steel pipe
to fiberglass pipe or in instances where a fiberglass Tee is cut into a line and no valve
can is installed. The flange bolts and metal will be coated and wrapped (with a product
non-damaging to the fiberglass) before the flanges are backfilled. At valve cans for tie-
ins, it is desirable to have all the flanges within the circumference of the valve can. It is
mandatory to have all of the valve within the circumference of the valve can.
5. All fiberglass and poly lines will be properly supported in the ditch with sack-crete bags
and sand bags. Sack-crete bags will be used to minimize the amount of settling
encountered with stacks of sand bags. A sand bag will be utilized on the top of the stack
to avoid rocks rubbing against the pipe. The pipe will be supported at all Tees and
valves. Where pipe is run through a conduit (as in a road bore) the pipe will be
supported right at the edge of the conduit (with the pipe in the upper most position in the
conduit) and the pipe will be supported for a minimum distance of 15 feet from the end of
the conduit with the spacing of the sack-crete/sand bag supports not to exceed 5
between the sack-crete/sand bag support pillars. For valve can installations the same
parameters apply with the minimum support distance to be 15 feet from the outside edge
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 2
of the valve can with the support pillar spacing not to exceed 5 feet between pillars (i.e., 4
support pillars in 15 feet).
this procedure.
Measuring / Monitoring / Calibration details:

None.

USA Safety Manual
Revision Date:
Page 1 of 2
Application of Protective Coating
Overview:
This practice establishes minimum Protective Coating Application requirements for all BP and
contractor OUSBU personnel involved with activities as defined in this document. The scope of
assessments.
Definitions:
MSDS material Safety Data Sheet
Sleepers - ?
Each external coating, whether conductive or insulating, applied for the purpose of external
corrosion shall:
(1) Be applied on a properly prepared surface;
(2) Have sufficient adhesion to the metal surface to effectively resist under film
migration of moisture;
(3) Be sufficiently ductile to resist cracking;
(4) Have a sufficient strength to resist damage due to handling and soil stress; and
(5) Have properties compatible with any supplemental cathodic protection.
Procedure/Process:
Damaged coating shall be repaired by the following procedure:
1. Remove damaged coating until good coating to pipe bond is observed.
2. Apply BP approved new coating to bare pipe. If pipe extends above ground, continue pipe
coating to 6 above ground level. Cover at least 6 of old coating with new coating.
NOTE: Consult MSDS for proper PPE to be worn when applying coating.
a) Each external protective coating which is an electrically insulating type shall also have
low moisture absorption and high electrical resistance.
b) Each external protective coating shall be inspected just prior to lowering the pipe into the
ditch and backfilling, and any damage detrimental to effective corrosion control shall be
repaired.
c) Each external protective coating shall be protected from damage resulting from adverse
ditch conditions or damage from supporting blocks.
To reduce the probability of damage to coating from backfilling operations the

following procedure shall be observed:
1. Confirm all work is complete on underground facility and excavation is ready for filling.
2. Inspect excavation and confirm excavation is free of all debris.
NOTE: No foreign substance such as skids, welding rods, containers, brush, trees, refuse of any
kind shall be permitted in the excavation or backfill. Earth, sand, or other soft and loose materials
that does not contain rocks or hard clods may be backfilled directly on the underground facility.
After the excavation has been filled to within 6 to 8 inches of the level of the surrounding ground,
Revision Date:
Page 2 of 2
rubber tired equipment shall be run down the ditch to compact the backfill.
3. Make sure underground facility is supported properly. PVC, Fiberglass, polypipe, fiber optics,
cables, and long spans of pipelines might need additional support. Sleepers (i.e. concrete,
sandbags, fill dirt, sackrete, etc.) should be considered to prevent undo stress on the
facilities. Extreme caution should be used when backfilling and packing the above facilities.
Note: If coated pipe is installed by boring, driving, or other similar method, precautions shall be
taken to minimize damage to the coating during installation.
this procedure.

BP gas release and spills reporting procedures
USA Safety Manual
MSDS for coating material
Standard PPE
Revision Date:
BP America Production Company - Minimum Requirements for
Damage Prevention; One-Call, Pipeline Patrolling/ Surveillance and
Response to Unauthorized Excavating Activity and Unreported
Damage
BP America Production Company is committed to No Accidents, No Harm to
People and No Damage to the Environment. A key factor in obtaining this
company goal is through proactive damage prevention on buried pipelines.
Pipeline damage can result in injury and death, as well as severe property
damage and loss of product.
The following are required components of this best practice:
1) Register BP facilities and fully participate in State One-Call

Programs. Comply with all state damage prevention laws.
2) Have an active Pipeline Patrolling/Surveillance program as outlined
in the document. The program must include communication and
documentation of surveillance activities and any violations of state
one-call laws.
3) Follow the minimum Damage Prevention Activities as outlined in
this document.
4) Mark pipelines and maintain right-of-ways as recommended in the
BP America Production Company Best Practice for Marking and
Warning Signs.
5) Have a Public Education Program that meets the requirements of
API Recommend Practice 1162 (including evaluation of program
effectiveness).
ONE-CALL Requirements
Purpose:
1) Prevent excavation damage to the Pipeline

2) Receiving and recording notification of excavation
3) Marking the location of the Pipeline
4) Educating excavators and the public about how to locate and
avoid damaging pipelines and underground facilities
5) Maintain a database of excavators
A. Participation in One-Call Systems
BP America Production Company must be a member of qualified One-Call

programs in states where BP owns and operates pipelines. The following
activities listed below will be performed either through the State One-Call
Page 1 of 32
Centers or by BP to minimize the likelihood of damage due to excavation
activities:
1. Receive and record notifications of pending excavations
2. Identify persons involved in excavating activities through the State One-
Call Centers, contractor associations, or Standard Industrial Classification
(SIC) codes.
3. Communicate marking information and method of marking to excavators
giving notice to dig. Markings shall be in accordance with the APWA
Uniform Color Code.
4. Excavation activities planned or unplanned preformed by BP Field
Representatives or approved company contractors will follow the State
One Call Laws.
Temporary marking of the pipeline:
1. When a notification is received and the Pipeline may be involved, it is the

responsibility of the Field Representative to arrange to have the Pipeline
location identified and marked in the field.
2. Marking shall be in accordance with the guidelines established by the State

One-Call Laws. Identification of the Pipeline will follow the APWA Uniform
Color Code. For example, petroleum pipelines should be marked in yellow,
whereas electrical lines should be marked in red.
3. The Pipeline shall be field located within the time requested or the time
specified by the State One-Call Laws.
4. If the Pipeline cannot be field located within the prescribed time, a Field
Representative shall contact the excavator.
B. Receiving Notification of Planned Excavation
Some areas of the Onshore US Business Unit are using the Tulsa
Control Center (TCC) and their computerized management system
(Dig-Track) for support and documentation of the one-call process. If
you area is not, then the Local Field Office will be expected to manage
the process and all required documentation.
Upon receipt of notification from the State One-Call Center, the Tulsa Control
Center (TCC) One-Call Dispatchers or a Field Representative reviews the
information for proximity to the Pipeline. Excavation activities taking place near
the Pipeline are transmitted to the appropriate Field Representative. The Field
Representative will determine if the Pipeline needs to be located and marked.
Page 2 of 32
Direct notification of excavations should be discouraged. Calls received directly
from excavators will be advised to call the appropriate State One-Call Center.
Excavators refusing to use the State One-Call Centers or excavators identified
working without having called the State One-Call Center will be documented and
recorder to the Contractor Data Base. Follow-up letters may be sent to
excavators explaining current state laws and notification requirements to State
One-Call Centers prior to excavation.
C. Recording of Notifications
All One-Call notifications, even those where BP America Production Company is

not involved, shall be recorded. If the State One-Call Center does not provide
this service, the Damage Prevention Group in Tulsa will maintain records of all
notifications received through a One-Call Ticket Management System (Dig
Tracker). Areas of the OUS Business Unit not participating shall maintain their
own records locally.
Pipeline segments not upgraded to the new TCC (Dig Tracker) system will retain
notification in their specific areas. Records of the notification will be retained for
three years. The recording system shall allow for the retrieval of a notification.
D. Notification to the Excavator
If the Pipeline is involved in an excavation, the excavator shall be notified that

the Pipeline is involved, that it has been, or will be, field located.
If a line locate request has been received and the Pipeline is not involved, there
is no requirement to contact the excavator unless state laws requires positive
response to all request.
E. Inspection of the Pipeline
A Field Representative will be dispatched to the location whenever there is

likelihood that the Pipeline may be involved in an excavation. The purpose of
the Field Representative is to assist in identifying the location of the Pipeline
during excavation, to inspect the Pipeline when it is exposed, to determine what
measures may be needed to protect and support the Pipeline during construction
and to promptly begin emergency response actions if the Pipeline is damaged.
The Field Representative will provide continuous monitoring of excavation

activities whenever:
1. Excavation of the Pipeline and foreign line crossings are taking place.
Page 3 of 32
2. Any ongoing excavation project which does not have to be monitored (based
on the excavation of the Pipeline and foreign line crossing requirement) will
be re-evaluated no less frequently than weekly or as frequently as necessary
if there is reason to believe the Pipeline could be damaged by the excavation
activity. This inspection, at a minimum, shall consist of a visual inspection of
the Pipeline and/or right-of-way. Documentation of each inspection will be
maintained on the Excavator/Locator Orientation Form (Exhibit A).
3. Whenever the Pipeline is involved in a foreign line or utility crossing, a Field

Representative must complete a Repair and Inspection Report (Exhibit B).
Pipeline Surveillance Patrolling and Visual Inspection

Purpose:
1) Inspect the pipeline for encroachments, excavation activities,
and leaks
2) Documentation of visual inspections
The general method of surveillance for most of the BP America Production

Company will be ground patrolling. The only major exception to ground
patrolling will be the Sheep Mountain Pipeline. The Sheep Mountain Pipeline
transports liquid CO2 and is a DOT 195 regulated line (hazardous liquid). This
particular line gets an aerial patrol 26 times per year.
Ground Patrolling
Ground Patrol Program, Reportable Observances, Documentation
A program of line walking and/or road patrol shall be developed. A log of each
ground patrol shall be kept for 3 years. If any reportable observances are found
as part of scheduled patrols or otherwise a Ground Patrol Report (Reference
Exhibit C) must be completed. The items listed on the Ground Patrol Report
must be used as a checklist for patrolling to ensure that appropriate visual
inspections are completed. If any line item on the checklist is answered YES,
then a Ground Patrol Report must be completed. These reports must also be
kept for 3 years. On all reportable observances, the Field Representative
performing a ground patrol shall contact a report the findings to their Team
Leader.
When a Field Representative spots activities of immediate danger to the pipeline,

they shall notify the party creating the danger and stop the activity if possible.
Other dangerous conditions must be reported immediately to the appropriate
Team Leader and mitigated by appropriately trained personnel.
Page 4 of 32
Minimum Required Patrol Frequency and Reporting for All Buried LInes
Regulated Lines
Any regulated lines must be patrolled as required by the applicable DOT

Regulation 192 for gas and 195 for hazardous liquids. Refer to DOT O&M
Manuals for the specific requirements.
Non-Regulated Lines
All segments of any buried piping system that operates at a positive

pressure and contain hydrocarbons or produced water must be patrolled a
minimum of once annually. The patrol frequency listed above is the minimum
for all buried piping. Other buried piping, even segments that are not regulated,
may require a higher patrol frequency. The Pipeline Team Leader (or Operations
Team Leader if there is no Pipeline Team) will be responsible for increasing the
patrol frequency to an adequate level for buried piping that has increased risk
factors such as high pressure, high levels of hydrogen sulfide, close proximity to
roadways and other public developments.
DAMAGE PREVENTION ACTIVITIES
Purpose:
1) Document excavation activities not utilizing the State One-Call
Centers.
2) Provide a 24-hour emergency phone number.
3) Provide Dig Safely educational materials
A. Excavator Tracking and Reporting of Unauthorized Excavation and

Unreported Damage
Excavators found not using the State One-Call Centers will be documented and
prioritized as excavators as having a higher probability of causing damage. In a
given area, there may be certain types of excavators ignoring the Call Before
You Dig message. Depending on any number of circumstances, this excavator
may be a contractor, a landowner, a farmer, or another utility (gas, electric,
water, sewer, cable, telephone, etc.). Based on local experience, if the type of
excavator most likely to cause damage is known, resources such as educational
information, face-to-face meetings, etc. will be used to promote the use of the
State One-Call Centers and Safe Digging practices. The following Response
Protocol to Third Party Damage and Unauthorized Excavations provides a
additional information to be used when dealing with excavators not using State
One-Call Centers.
Page 5 of 32
The best defense is a good offense. Zero-tolerance of unauthorized
excavating activity and unreported damage to the pipeline requires that all
incidents brought to BP America Production Company attention are
considered potentially serious and are promptly and meaningfully
addressed. Implementation of the forgoing procedures, in addition to publicizing
the initiation, settlement and/or other favorable disposition of legal proceedings
commenced to deter third party damage and to recover repair costs, represents a
thoughtful strategy initially to deter and ultimately to prevent unauthorized
excavating activity and unreported damage to BP America Production Company
facilities.
As part of the pipeline surveillance program, it is an expectation that all

unauthorized excavation near BP pipelines be detected. The pipeline team
Field Representatives will be responsible for obtaining the required
information to sufficiently complete the Third Party Excavation Incident
Report ( Exhibit D-1 or D-2 as applicable). All incidents must be tracked by
the Pipeline Team Leader or their designee. All incidents require
generation of the appropriate warning letters (D-3 through D-7) as outlined
in the following procedure. It is the Pipeline Team Leader or their
designees responsibility to ensure that the letters are sent. Any decisions
about whether to pursue reimbursement for damage shall be made by the
Operating Center Manager or their designee.
RESPONSE PROTOCOL TO THIRD PARTY DAMAGE AND UNAUTHORIZED

EXCAVATIONS
I. INTRODUCTION
This process sets forth a protocol for BP America Production Company. to

follow when dealing with instances of third party damage to BPs pipeline and/or
violations of state one-call statute by contractors.
II. BACKGROUND
Third party damage is the leading cause of pipeline accidents.

Accordingly, preventing excavation damage to pipelines by third parties (i.e.,
parties other than BP America Production Company or its contractors) is a top
priority of both government regulators and the pipeline industry. The most
obvious way for BP America Production Company to try and prevent, or at least
minimize, excavation damage by third parties is to educate them about and
encourage them to utilize their states mandatory One-Call Notification System.
Beyond efforts to educate third parties about the One-Call Notification

System, BP America Production Company will take action whenever it becomes
aware that an excavator whether a homeowner, licensed contractor or public
Page 6 of 32
employee has commenced digging in the vicinity of the pipeline without first
utilizing the One-Call Notification System or has utilized the One-Call System, but
then failed to report damaging the pipeline. BP America Production Company
response to such behavior should include promptly providing offending
excavators with written notice of their failure to comply with state and/or federal
law, and, where appropriate, providing offenders with a written demand for
reimbursement for BP America Production Company repair costs or other
damages. Through these responses, BP America Production Company will be
able to achieve its goal of deterring those who carelessly or intentionally bypass
the One-Call System and/or conceal damage they accidentally cause.
Under some circumstances, BP America Production Company may have

to take more aggressive action. For example, where unauthorized third party
excavation results in damage to a pipeline, the costs of which the excavator
refuses to repay, or where an excavator repeatedly excavates without first
notifying the One-Call Notification System, BP America Production Company
could initiate civil litigation to recover damages and seriously consider seeking a
court order barring the excavator from again digging without first notifying the
One-Call System. In addition, BP America Production Company should consider
referring the offending party to appropriate enforcement authorities for
prosecution.
Set forth immediately below is a brief summary of applicable federal and

state law governing underground excavating activity. Thereafter, a procedure is
outlined for BP America Production Company employees to follow once
informed that a third party has (1) excavated in the vicinity of a pipeline without
first contacting a One-Call center or (2) failed to report damaging a pipeline while
engaging in authorized excavating activity. In addition, a number of forms are
provided to assist BP America Production Company personnel in responding to
excavation-related incidents. These forms include: incident reporting forms, site
investigation reports, draft warning, and demand letters to offending excavators.
Finally, emphasis is placed on the importance of tracking the disposition of
excavation-related incidents and compiling accurate statistics.
III. FEDERAL AND STATE LAW REGARDING ONE-CALL SYSTEMS
Federal law provides that the Department of Transportation shall prescribe

standards for establishing and operating one-call notification systems. 49
U.S.C. 60114. One who knowingly and willfully engages in excavation activity
without first using an available one-call notification system to ascertain the
location of underground facilities in the excavation area, and subsequently
causes death, serious bodily injury or damage to a pipeline in excess of $50,000,
or causes a release of more than 50 barrels of product, is subject to a fine and to
imprisonment for not more than 5 years, or both. Id. at 60123(d).
Page 7 of 32
Each state within which BP America Production Company owns and/or
operates pipelines typically has a law regarding prevention of damage to
underground facilities, sometimes referred to as a onecall law. The state law
generally requires that anyone who plans to undertake any type of excavation
must call the states one-call notification center at least forty-eight (48) hours (two
(2) working days) prior to commencing with the excavation activity. The state
one-call laws vary from state to state so BP America Production Company
personnel should become familiar with the law applicable to the state or states
within which they work.
II. PROTOCOL FOR RESPONDING TO ONE-CALL VIOLATIONS OR

DAMAGE TO BP AMERICA PRODUCTION COMPANY FACILITY
A .Documentation of Unauthorized Excavating Activity.
Thorough, timely and accurate documentation of all relevant information

involving unauthorized excavating activity and/or previously undiscovered
damage to the pipeline is critical to successful implementation of BP America
Production Company third party damage prevention initiative and will
immeasurably enhance BP America Production Company prospects of
prevailing in any litigation that may ultimately be undertaken to protect BPs
interests. Accordingly, immediately upon learning that a person or entity has
engaged in excavating activity near the pipeline without first contacting the
appropriate One-Call Center or that damage to the line from third party
excavation has been discovered, a case file should be opened by BPs Damage
Prevention Coordinator for the area in which the incident has occurred and the
following information recorded:
1. Time and date of notification.

2. Name of person or entity engaged in excavating activity (if known).
3. Manner of notification and Contact Information (name, address,
phone number) -- ROW inspection; repair crew; local law
enforcement; utility company; farmer; etc.
4. Location and description of excavating activity reported.
5. Name of BP America Production Company employee receiving
notification.
At Exhibit D-1, there is a Third Party Excavation Incident Report with spaces
to record the above-referenced information. The unauthorized excavation activity
should be reported to the TCC One-Call Dispatcher @ 1 800 548-6482 to be
recorded in the Contractor Tracking Data Base. Areas not using the TCC will be
responsible for reporting to Local Field Offices. The Pipeline Team Leader at the
Local Field Office or their designee will be responsible for the tracking of all
occurrences and generating the required follow-up letters to all offenders.
Page 8 of 32
In addition to promptly recording all relevant information regarding
unauthorized excavation activity or unreported damage, efforts should be made
to photograph the scene of the excavation as well as any visible damage to the
pipeline as soon as possible following notification. Where there has been
damage to the pipeline, documentation of the labor and material costs involved in
repairing the line should be maintained. Even where there is no damage to the
line, but inspection of the line is necessary to verify that the line is not damaged,
photos of the exposed line segment and a record of the hours expended and
costs incurred by BP America Production Company employees or contractors
verifying the condition of the line should be maintained. Photos and other
documentation of expenses incurred on repairs should be appended to the
Report of Investigation of Third Party Excavating Activity form at Exhibit D-
2.
Where the name of the person or entity damaging the pipeline or that has
engaged in unauthorized excavating activity is unknown, an investigation should
be undertaken to determine, if possible, the identity of the offending party. An
obvious first step is to contact the appropriate One-Call center to obtain
information regarding calls received by persons or entities intending to dig in the
vicinity of the excavation site on or near the date that damage or excavating
activity was discovered. If the One-Call center has information that appears
relevant to the incident under investigation, contact information for the person or
entity that notified the One-Call center should be obtained and BPs Core Team
Leader should attempt to contact the party and inquire as to whether they were
excavating near the pipeline and/or whether they damaged the line. Contacts
based upon follow-up with the One-Call Center should be documented on the
Report of Investigation of Third Party Excavating Activity form.
Assuming no useful leads are available from the One-Call center, further
investigation at the site of the excavation/damage should be conducted in as
timely a manner as possible. If work crews are in the vicinity, inquire whether
they, or others they might have observed, were working at the site of the
excavating activity. Inquire of adjacent landowners or occupants of neighboring
commercial premises if they observed any excavating activity in the area. If
other utilities are located near the point of the excavating activity, contact the
utility and determine whether workers were recently in the area performing
maintenance work.
All steps undertaken, as part of any investigation should be recorded on

the Report of Investigation of Third Party Excavation Activity. In the event
that no information regarding the identity of the excavator can be located, all
relevant information concerning the incident should be sent to BPs Damage
Prevention Coordinator, placed in the case file and the file placed in inactive
status for a period of at least sixty (60) days, pending the discovery of additional
investigative leads or other new information.
Page 9 of 32
B. Warning Letters.
BP America Production Company considers prevention of third party

damage to its pipeline a top priority. Consequently, BP America Production
Company should respond in writing any time it learns the identity of a person or
entity that commences digging without first contacting the appropriate One-Call
notification authority or fails to report damaging the line. BP America Production
Company response should include a warning letter sent by certified mail, which
should:
1. Be prepared by the Damage Prevention Coordinator and signed by

BPs Core Team Leader with copies sent to BPs District Manager,
BPs Damage Prevention Coordinator and to the enforcing agency
(i.e. one-call center, states attorney, public utility commission, etc.)
for the jurisdiction within which the incident of non-compliance
occurred;
2. Be mailed to every offending party, regardless of whether that party

is a public entity, as promptly as possible after the unauthorized
excavation or failure to report damage;
3. Set forth the time, date, place and circumstances of the excavation
in issue;
4. Cite to the pertinent federal or state statute or ordinance setting

forth the requirement for notice to a One-Call notification center;
5. Provide the phone number of the appropriate One-Call center;
6. Put the offending party on notice that BP America Production

Company expects to be reimbursed the labor and material costs of
all repairs to the pipeline and that BP America Production Company
will initiate civil proceedings to recoup all such costs and expenses,
which, in some states, can be up to three times the costs of repair;
7. Clearly indicate that a copy of the letter is being sent to appropriate

enforcement authorities and state that subsequent incidents
involving the same party will result in a formal request being made
to authorities for prosecution and, possibly, in proceedings seeking
injunctive relief; and
8. Include a copy of the state one-call law in an effort to educate

offenders to the requirements of the one-call law as well as
consequences for failure to comply.
Page 10 of 32
An example of a warning letter informing contractors who previously
received and agreed to abide by the stipulations in BP America Production
Company standard excavation Action Memo, is included at Exhibit D-3.
Certified mail return receipts indicating that the warning letter was received
should be maintained in the Damage Prevention Coordinators case file.
C. Demands for Damages and Initiation of Civil Proceedings
Regardless of whether third party damage to the pipeline is caused by

persons or entities authorized by a One-Call center to engage in excavating
activity, or by a person or entity that failed to report damage to the line, BP
America Production Company should seek to recover reimbursement for all but
the most insignificant third party damage to the pipeline. As soon as possible
following transmittal of a warning letter, but in no event more than five (5)
business days after completion of repairs, BP America Production Company
Core Team Leader will send a certified demand letter explaining the nature of the
damage to the pipeline, the steps necessary to repair the line and formally
requesting reimbursement for the labor and material costs expended in
effectuating the repair. Photographs of damage to the pipeline and of the repair
process, as well as relevant documentation as to the costs of repair, should be
included with the demand letter. A model demand letter is included at Exhibit D-
4.
In those instances where a party is unwilling voluntarily to reimburse BP

America Production Company for the damage that the party with or without
One-Call center authorization caused the pipeline as a result of excavating
near the line, BP America Production Company must be prepared in case a
decision is made to initiate civil proceedings to recover the costs of repair. In
most states the one-call law provides for both a civil penalty and for recovery of
costs, sometimes up to three times the actual costs, incurred in repairing and/or
relocating the pipeline in the event an excavator fails to notify the One-Call center
when excavating near known underground facilities (including pipelines) and
subsequently damages such facilities.
Given the unavoidable costs and distraction associated with litigation, an

attempt should be made by the Core Team Leader to personally contact the
excavator before ultimately concluding that litigation is warranted. For example,
prior to recommending that civil litigation be commenced, at least one additional
attempt to contact the excavator by telephone should be made and documented
following receipt of proof from the Postal Service that the initial demand letter
was delivered. Absent a response, an additional certified letter should be sent
repeating BP America Production Company demand for reimbursement and
giving the excavator a final opportunity to agree to reimburse BP America
Production Company within ten (10) business days or to explain why immediate
reimbursement in full is not possible. If no satisfactory response is received, or if
Page 11 of 32
the excavator refuses to reimburse the costs of repair, prompt referral of the
excavator to counsel for initiation of civil litigation should be undertaken.
To summarize, the following steps should be taken in the event that third
party excavating activity, whether or not cleared by a One-Call center, is found to
have resulted in damage to the pipeline:
1. Send the excavator a certified letter requesting reimbursement for

damage to the pipeline, explaining the nature of the damage and
the steps required to repair the damage, and itemizing the labor
and material costs expended on the repair. Where available,
photos of the damage and the repair process should be included.
See Exhibit D-4.
2. If the excavator responds to BP America Production Company

demand letter and refuses to reimburse BP America Production
Company, BP America Production Company should send the
excavator a second certified letter stating that BP America
Production Company is considering to possibility of initiating civil
proceedings to obtain reimbursement in ten (10) business days,
unless the excavator alters its position and notifies BP America
Production Company in writing of its intention to reimburse BP
America Production Company in full or provides a satisfactory
explanation as to why immediate reimbursement in full is not
possible or is not appropriate under the circumstances. See
Exhibit D-5.
3. Alternatively, if no response is received to the initial demand letter,

at least one documented attempt should be made to contact the
excavator by telephone.
4. In the event that the additional attempt to reach the excavator by

telephone is unsuccessful, a second certified letter should be sent
repeating the demand for reimbursement and informing the
excavator that BP America Production Company will refer the
matter for initiation of civil litigation within ten (10) business days
unless the excavator agrees to reimburse BP America Production
Company or satisfactorily explains why immediate reimbursement
in full is either not possible or not appropriate under the
circumstances. Another copy of the itemized repair costs should be
enclosed. See Exhibit D-6.
5. If no response is received to the second demand letter, or if the

excavator responds by flatly refusing to reimburse BP America
Page 12 of 32
Production Company, the matter should be referred to counsel for
initiation of civil litigation. A sample complaint for damages
premised upon a scenario in which an excavator fails to call the
One-Call center and subsequently strikes and damages the
pipeline is attached at for your reference an Exhibit D-7. BP
America Production Company personnel should be prepared to
support and participate, as necessary, in any ensuing civil
proceedings.
As always, Certified Mail return receipts should be maintained in the case

file as evidence that BP America Production Company correspondence was
received by the addressee. Where contact between BP America Production
Company personnel and the excavator takes place by telephone, a detailed
memorandum of conversation should be created immediately after the
telephone call and placed in the case file.
D. Referral to Enforcement Authorities
Depending upon the circumstances, formal referral of offending

excavators to appropriate enforcement authorities should be considered. The
Office of Inspector General of the United States Department of Transportation
has advised that it is highly unlikely that federal authorities will be interested in
and/or take action upon such referrals. Accordingly, in all but the most extreme
circumstances, referrals should be made, if at all, to state enforcement
authorities in the state within which the incident occurred. Factors to be
considered include, but are not intended to be limited to:
1. Seriousness of threat or potential threat to lives and property in

vicinity of excavation.
2. Seriousness of damage or potential damage to the pipeline.
3. Whether the excavator has previously engaged in high-risk

excavating activity.
4. Attitude of excavator in response to BP America Production
Company warning/demand letter.
BPs District Manager for the Business District within which the incident
took place should approve the decision as to whether particular circumstances
warrant referral. Consultation with counsel regarding specific incidents is always
an option at the discretion of management. Because referral of an excavator for
criminal or civil prosecution or for imposition of administrative penalties is
presumably appropriate only in the most serious situations, if referral is deemed
appropriate, enforcement authorities should be notified as soon as possible after
the decision is made. Contact should initially be by telephone, informing
Page 13 of 32
authorities that a formal written referral is in process. This initial contact should
be documented and maintained in the case file.
After telephonic notification of enforcement authorities is made, a referral

letter should immediately be faxed to the appropriate federal or state
enforcement officials with a copy sent by certified mail. The substance of the
letter will be different depending upon the circumstances of the incident, hence
there is no model referral letter attached.
E. Injunctive Proceedings
An injunction is a court order requiring a person or entity to act or to cease

acting in a certain manner. In those presumably few instances where an
excavator engaging in excavating activity without first informing the One-Call
System, causes, or nearly causes, damage to the pipeline and then,
notwithstanding a warning letter and, possibly, a demand for reimbursement for
repair costs, again engages in unauthorized excavating activity, BP America
Production Company should seriously consider seeking an injunction barring the
excavator from engaging in similar activity. If BP America Production Company
is ultimately successful in obtaining an injunction and the excavator disregards
the injunction, the excavator can be found in contempt of court.
Seeking an injunction necessitates action by counsel and the filing of

papers in court. Here again, as with court proceedings to recover repair costs,
BP America Production Company personnel should be prepared to support and
to participate in such proceedings to the extent requested by counsel.
F. Tracking Incident Dispositions
Keeping track of the disposition of third party excavating incidents is

important for two reasons. First, to gauge the success of BP America Production
Company efforts in implementing a policy to deter unauthorized excavation in
the vicinity of the pipeline. And second, maintaining accurate statistics of not
only case dispositions, but of the number of timely warning and referral letters
that BP America Production Company has sent to offending excavators will allow
BP America Production Company to demonstrate to regulators, the community
and other interested parties that BP America Production Company is genuinely
committed to a substantive course of action to prevent the leading cause of
pipeline accidents.
Accordingly, BP America Production Company Damage Prevention

Coordinator should prepare on an annual basis a spreadsheet containing the
following information:
1. The number of unauthorized third party excavating notifications

received.
Page 14 of 32
2. The number of reported excavating incidents involving damage to
the pipeline.
3. The number of warning letters sent in response to notifications.
4. The number of demand letters seeking reimbursement for repair

costs.
5. Total amount of repair reimbursement demanded.
6. Amount of repair reimbursement recovered.
7. The number of civil lawsuits commenced to recover repair costs.
8. The number of referrals to enforcement authorities.
9. The number of injunctive proceedings commenced.
10. The number of injunctive proceedings resulting in the issuance of

an injunction.
Page 15 of 32
EXHIBIT A
EXCAVATOR/LOCATOR ORENTATION
FORM
Information noted on this form is intended to communicate general information about our pipeline(s) and is not to be
relied upon by any party for the purpose of excavation or any similar purpose.
By law, the One Call Center in your state should be notified of proposed excavation to enable all participating utilities
to mark their respective lines. BP America Production Company (North America) Inc. is a member of this one-call
enterprise and will automatically be notified through this system.
Understand Excavators intention (i.e. Pipeline Right-of-Way paralleled, crossed once crossed multiple
times?) and extent of work area.
Communicate Pipeline routing throughout the entire work area.
Discussed number of pipelines involved, tolerance zones, casing requirements, hand digging
requirements, etc.
Discuss pipeline size, approximate pressure, and characteristics of product in pipeline.
Any contact with the pipeline causing a nick or scratch in coating must be reported to us by the
excavator for further inspection to assure continued safe pipeline operations.
Discussed that a company representative must be on site during pipeline excavation and foreign line
crossing.
Flagged/marked pipeline(s) throughout the entire work area.
If the markings are destroyed or needs to be refreshed, call the One-Call Center for remarking.
If you are unable to reach the representative designated below, or in case of an emergency, call our Tulsa Control
Center at 800-548-6482 and request assistance by referring to the following information:
Line Segment ______________________________________________ Milepost ___________________
Lat._____________________________
State One Call
ID Ticket # __________________________GPS Coordinates: Long____________________________________
BP America Production Company (North America) Inc. Representative:
Name: _________________________________________________________________
Phone: _________________________________________________________________
Signature: _________________________________________ Date: ________________
Landowner/Contractor:
Name: __________________________________________________________________
Phone: __________________________________________________________________
Signature: _________________________________________ Date: _________________
Comments / Follow-ups:
Page 16 of 32
Exhibit B
Repair and Inspection Report

This Report Covers: Complete A1-Date of Report A2-Date Work Complete A3-Line Sheet (Dwr/Pos) #: A4- Report
Number
CP Installations Sect. A&B A5 - Company: BP America A6 County, and State A7 System,

Exposed Pipe Sect. A Production Company Segment or Station
Other Name:
Field Response/Locate Sect. A&E A8 - Location of Work Along Pipeline: A9 - System A10
Foreign Line Crossing Sect. A&D *From Inventory To Inventory ________ Type: Maximo
New Pipe Installations Sect. A&B Latitude: ____________Longitude:________________ Trunk Segment
Permanent Repairs Sect. A&B Gathering /Facility
Mile Post #: ________
Code
Internal Inspection Repairs A11a SAP Project#: A11b Maximo WO#: A11c ISN Project#:
Sect. A, B & Supplemental Report
Other (Specify)
*A14 - If Line Exposed, Indicate All of the Following:
AND a. Depth of Cover: ______ ft
OQ Covered b. Soil Condition: Clay Loams (Sandy, Clay, Rocky) Sand Rock, Concrete, Asphalt
Tasks Sect. Swamp, Marsh Exposed Eroded Unknown
c. Pipe to Soil Potential
A10 and C/F d. Pipe Condition: Bare Coated No Corrosion Slight Rust Film Thick Rust Film
A12- Property Legals: Minor Pits Deep Pits Random Pits
Tract or Line List No. ___________ If External Corrosion Present, Indicate: Pit Depth: Pit Length: Measured
Quadrant - NW NE SW SE Nominal WT:
e. Coating Condition: Well Bonded Poorly Bonded % Disbonded
Section - Township - Range
_______ - _______ - _______
A13 - Cathodic Protection Installation: A15-Coating Type:.
Anode Rectifier None Fusion Bonded Epoxy (FBE) Powercrete Painted (Above Ground Piping Only) Asphalt
Other (Explain) TGF
Location: Size: Tape Wrap ( Cold Applied Hot Applied Polyken ) Coal Tar Enamel Concrete
Description: Extruded ( Pritec X-tru Polyken/Synergy) Composites (Somatic Other
A16 Hand Sketch or Attach Sketch or Drawing Showing Changes N
S
Note: For all Section B (new pipe installations or repairs) work, a hand sketch or drawing must be shown above or attached to document all changes.
Include North Arrow and R&I Report Number (Line A4) on all attachments.
B1 - Reason for Repair: Casing Corrosion Cathodic Interference B2 - Type of Repair: Clock Spring Coating
Defective Matl Third Party Damage Outside Forces Repair Only
Relocation Soil Erosion Testing Other (Specify): Full Encirclement Sleeve Patch Pipe
Replacement
Other (Specify)
B3 If Clock Spring or Full Encirclement Sleeve Added: B4 Coating Applied:
From Inventory: To Inventory:
From Inventory: To Inventory:
*B5 -If Line Was Cut, Indicate Condition of Internal Surface: *B6 Location of Internal Corrosion on Pipe B7- If Internal Corrosion
Generally Corroded Isolated Pitting (Clock Position): Present
No Corrosion Amount of Wall Loss:
Measure Nominal WT:
B8 - Damage To Company Line: Yes No If Yes, Explain and Complete Line E2 Below:
* B9 - Pipe Replaced: From Inventory: To Inventory: *Coating Applied:

*Total Footage Installed: ____ ft. *Diameter:___________ in. *Wall Thickness:__________in. *Pipe Grade (eg. Grade
B, X-42):
*Pipe Manufacturer Name: *Pipe Seam (eg. Seamless, ERW): *Hydrotest Date of Pipe Installed: *Test Pressure:
_________psig
Page 17 of 32
* C1-Foreign Line Crossing Owner: C2-One-Call Report #: C3-Matl. (Steel, Cable, PVC) C4-Size Line/Cable No.
of Pairs:
C5BP Inventory #: C6-Foreign Line Depth: C7-Foreign Line Crossing Clearance: C8-Foreign Line Product C9-Foreign Line:
(in.) Over Under (in.) Carried:
D1 Cathodic Protection: D2 Test Wire Installed at Inventory: D3 Bonded at Inventory: D4 Approx. Angle at
Yes No Yes No If Yes - BP Foreign Yes No Crossing:
*E1 Field Response/Locate: *E2 3rd Party Contractor/Owner: Contractor Owner *E3 Contact: Time - AM PM
Locate BP Line Only Name - Name -
*E4 Investigation Due To: Address - Representing -
Air Patrol Vehicle Patrol City - State - Zip - Telephone Number -
One Call Other *E5 - Work Performed:
*Section F. List identification of BP employees performing or responsible for OQ Covered Tasks and Person Completing this Form:
*F1 Identification (Print Name or NT ID) Additional Comments:
*F2 Report Prepared By: Name (Please Print) Phone: ( ) Work Location:
DISTRIBUTION: (Original) Diagram Coordinator, Central Office; District Office; District Corrosion Specialist S&I Coordinator
Page 18 of 32
Ground Patrol Report EXHIBIT C
Date: Operating Pipeline / BP Phone Number
Center: Location: Representative:
If any Yes is checked, please describe in Comment Section listed below.
Yes No
___ ___ 1. Are there any stains, vegetation damage or other evidence of leaks?
___ ___ 2. Are there any washouts on the right-of-way?
___ ___ 3. Are there any deposits of debris on the right-of-way?
___ ___ 4. Is there any earth moving activity, excavation, or construction on or near the
pipeline right-of-way?
___ ___ 5. Is there any encroachment such as buildings, other structures,
fences, roadways, or any other entity close to or over the pipeline?
___ ___ 6. Is the pipeline exposed crossing streams, creeks, rivers, or other bodies of water?
___ ___ 7. If the pipeline is located near water, do the riverbanks show signs of excessive
erosion?
___ ___ 8. Are there any trees or debris collected on or near the pipelines crossing bodies
of water?
___ ___ 9. Is there any oil or products on the surface of waters adjacent to the pipeline?
___ ___10. Any evidence of fires adjacent to the pipeline?
___ ___11. Are there any dead animals or livestock on the right-of-way?
___ ___12. Are there any broken power or telephone lines on or near the right-of-way?
___ ___13. Is there excessive vegetation, which might impede inspection and/or
maintenance of the pipeline?
___ ___14. Have any warning signs been removed, defaced, or destroyed??
___ ___15. Have any line markers been removed, defaced, or destroyed?
___ ___16. Are there any problems with vents at a railroad or any other crossings (vents
should be visible and maintained)?
___ ___17. Is there any evidence of vandalism or theft?
___ ___18. Are their any other factors affecting the safety and operation of the pipeline?
IF YES IS CHECKED ON ANY ITEM, PLEASE EXPLAIN IN THE COMMENT SECTION.
Comments:
Completed by Date Completed Supervisor Date
Page 19 of 32
EXHIBIT D-1 BP AMERICA PRODUCTION COMPANY
THIRD PARTY EXCAVATION INCIDENT REPORT
DATE OF NOTIFICATION: ___________
TIME OF NOTIFICATION: ___________
INCIDENT REPORTED BY:

NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE
CONTACT:
IDENTITY OF EXCAVATOR (IF KNOWN):
NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE
CONTACT:
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF EXCAVATING ACTIVITY:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
REPORT TAKEN BY: _________________________
Page 20 of 32
EXHIBIT D-2 BP AMERICA PRODUCTION COMPANY
REPORT OF INVESTIGATION OF THIRD PARTY EXCAVATING ACTIVITY
DATE AND TIME OF FOLLOW-UP WITH ONE-CALL CENTER: _____________
RELEVANT INFORMATION OBTAINED FROM ONE-CALL CENTER:

________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
CONTACTS BASED UPON ONE-CALL CENTER FOLLOW-UP:
NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE CONTACT:
RELEVANT INFORMATION:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE CONTACT:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Page 21 of 32
DATE AND TIME OF SITE VISIT:
____________________________________________________
SITE VISIT CONDUCTED BY: _______________________
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF EXCAVATING ACTIVITY:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
PHOTOGRAPHS ENCLOSED? YES _____ NO _____
DESCRIPTION OF DAMAGE TO PIPE LINE (IF ANY):

________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
PHOTOGRAPHS ENCLOSED? YES _____ NO _____
ON-SITE INTERVIEW:
NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE CONTACT:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Page 22 of 32
ON-SITE INTERVIEW:
NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE CONTACT:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
COSTS INCURRED IN REPAIR/ INVESTIGATION:
DATE: COST DESCRIPTION: AMOUNT:
TOTAL COST:______________
Page 23 of 32
EXHIBIT D-3
{Date}
CERTIFIED MAIL
Name of Person or Entity
Address
City, State, Zip
Re: Failure to use State One-Call Notification Center Prior to Excavation
Dear [NAME]:
This letter is to inform you that we have learned you were engaged in excavating
activity in the vicinity of a pipeline owned and/or operated by BP America
Production Company (North America) Inc., in violation of the {insert applicable
state} law regarding underground utilities. {Insert reference to state one-call law}.
At this time we are uncertain as to whether your activity caused damage to the
pipeline, but are investigating and will notify you subsequently to inform you of
any such damage.
As set forth in Section {insert section of state one-call law}, prior to any
excavation, an excavator is required to contact {insert applicable state} States
One-Call Notification center and provide notice of the planned excavation. For
your convenience and for future reference, I have enclosed a copy of the States
One-Call Law. In addition, and for additional information, I encourage you to visit
the States One-Call Web site for further information related to the prevention of
damage to underground facilities at {www.XXXXXXX.org/com}. The phone
number(s) for contacting the One-Call Notification Center(s) are listed at the end
of this letter.
Industry and government regulators at both the state and federal level have
recognized for some time that third party excavating activity is the leading cause
of damage to natural gas and hazardous liquid pipelines. Most often, such
damage results from excavation projects related to construction, repair and/or
maintenance of nearby underground facilities.
There is no cost to the excavator to use the One-Call Notification service. On the
other hand, failure to utilize the One-Call service can be quite costly in terms of
unnecessary risk for the excavator, their employees, innocent bystanders,
personal property of others and the environment.
Violations of the States One-Call statute are similarly costly. Offenders who fail
to call the One-Call Center and subsequently cause damage to a hazardous
liquid or gas pipeline may be subject to a civil penalty of up to {insert dollar
Page 24 of 32
amount as cited within applicable states one-call law} per violation and may also
be liable for damage to the pipeline that results from a violation.
Although we are copying the {insert applicable states enforcing office or entity}
on this letter, we do not intend to ask the {insert applicable states enforcing
office or entity} to impose fines or penalties on you at this time. As far as we are
aware, this is the first instance in which you have excavated in close proximity to
BP America Production Company facilities without first utilizing the One-Call
Notification process. Accordingly, at this juncture we want to ensure that you are
aware of the One-Call Notification statute and the consequences for failing to
abide by its provisions. In the future, we expect that you will utilize the service
prior to each and every excavation project.
In most states, the use of One-Call Centers has drastically reduced excavation-
related damage. This system was created to promote public safety, avoid costly
damage to underground facilities, and reduce cost and time of notifications.
Please take advantage of the State One-Call Notification System the next time
you have an excavation related project.
From this point forward, we will consider a subsequent instance of non-

compliance with the One-Call Notification requirement as a willful disregard of the
law as well as for the safety and well being of others. After evaluating the
circumstances surrounding a subsequent instance of non-compliance, we may
choose to formally refer the matter to the {insert applicable states enforcing
office or entity} and, if the circumstances warrant, to request the imposition of
fines and/or penalties. In any case, we will seek reimbursement for any costs in
excess of $250.00 incurred inspecting for damage and/or repairing damage
caused by unauthorized excavating activity near BP America Production
Company underground facilities. Repeated failures to notify the One-Call center
will result in BP America Production Company going to court to seek an
injunction barring you from future unauthorized excavating activity.
If you have any questions about any aspect of this letter, please contact {NAME}
at {NUMBER}. The appropriate One-Call numbers are as follows:
Sincerely,
[NAME]
[Title]
cc: [ ]
Page 25 of 32
EXHIBIT D-4
Failure to comply with BPs General Right of Way Stipulations
And Requirements contained in Action Memo
{Date}
CERTIFIED MAIL Name of Person or Entity Address City, State, Zip
Re: Failure to Abide by BP America Production Company General Right of Way

Stipulations and Requirements
Dear {Name}:
This letter is to inform you that we have learned that {Name of Contractor} has
failed to abide by BP America Production Company General Right of Way
Stipulations and Requirements, which {Name of Contractor} previously received
and agreed to follow. Specifically, {Name} agreed on {Date} on behalf of {Name
of Contractor} to comply with certain stipulations and requirements set forth as
part of BPs Action Memo, an executed copy of which is attached.
Our information is that on {Date} your company was engaged in construction

activity near BPs pipeline and that representatives of your company failed to
{Describe failure to comply with Stipulations and Requirements provision}. This
failure to abide by the provisions of the Action Memo is not only a violation of
your prior agreement with BP, but could have presented a risk to public safety.
In the future, non-compliance with the terms of BPs Action Memo may result in
BP notifying appropriate state or federal enforcement authorities of {Name of
Contractor} conduct and/or commencing legal proceedings in state court to
compel {Name of Contractor} to abide by the Action Memos stipulations.
We appreciate your attention to this matter. If you have any questions about any
aspect of this letter or should you wish to clarify any of the stipulations and
requirements in the Action Memo, please contact {Name of BP Contact} at
{Telephone Number}.
Sincerely,
{Name}
{Title}
cc:
Page 26 of 32
EXHIBIT D-5
Draft Demand Letter
{Date}
CERTIFIED MAIL
Name of Person or Entity
Address
City, State, Zip
Re: Request for Reimbursement for Damage to BP America Production Company
Dear {Name}:
We are writing as a follow-up to our letter dated {Date}. In that letter, we stated that we had
become aware that you had engaged in excavating activity in the vicinity of BP America
Production Company petroleum products pipeline without first calling the appropriate One-Call
Notification Center, a violation of state law. We also stated that, as of the date of the letter, we
were uncertain as to whether youre excavating activity had caused any damage to the pipeline
and we hereby request that you reimburse BP for the costs associated with repairing the damage.
Your excavating activity {..describe damage}. Repair of this damage required { explain
nature and duration of repair process, including number of persons necessary to effectuate
repair}. Enclosed are photographs of the damage to the pipeline and of the repair process. Also
enclosed is an itemized bill of the costs of repairing the damage. As you can see, the cost of
repairing the damage your excavating activity caused is {$XXX).
We would appreciate hearing from you within ten (10) business days that you intend to reimburse
BP for the repair costs incurred as a result of your excavating activity. If you are financially
unable to remit immediate reimbursement in full or if you believe there are mitigating
circumstances that make this request for full reimbursement inappropriate, please contact the
undersigned at your earliest opportunity. Failure to respond to this letter will leave BP with no
alternative but to refer this matter to counsel for further consideration. BP may then elect to file a
civil lawsuit in state Superior Court in an effort to recover all costs associated with this incident.
Thank you for your attention to this matter.
Sincerely,
{Name}, {Title}
{Telephone Number}
cc:
Enclosures
Page 27 of 32
EXHIBIT D-5 (continued)
Draft Follow-Up Demand Letter (if Excavator Refuses to Pay Repair Costs)
{Date}
CERTIFIED MAIL
{Name of Person or Entity}

{Address}
{City, State, Zip}
Re: Refusal to Reimburse Repair Costs for Pipeline Damage
Dear {Name}:
By letter dated {date}, we requested that you reimburse BP America Production

Company for the cost of repairing damage to BPs petroleum products pipeline
that was caused by your having engaged in excavating activity without first
contacting the appropriate One-Call Notification center, a violation of state law.
You {contacted/wrote} us on {date} and informed us that you would not reimburse
BP for the cost of the repairs.
This letter constitutes notice that unless you alter your position and notify us in
writing within ten (10) business days of your intention to reimburse BP for the full
cost of repairs, or satisfactorily explain why full reimbursement is either not
possible or is inappropriate under the circumstances, we will, without further
delay, instruct our attorneys to file a civil lawsuit against you in state Superior
Court seeking to recover our repair costs.
Thank you for your immediate attention to this matter.
Sincerely,
{Name}, {Title}
{Telephone Number}
cc:
Page 28 of 32
EXHIBIT D-6
Draft Follow-Up Demand Letter (No response received to Initial Demand
Letter)
{Date}
CERTIFIED MAIL
{Name of Person or Entity}
{Address}
{City, State, Zip}
Re: Second Request for Reimbursement for Damage to BPs Pipeline
Dear {Name}:
This letter constitutes BP America Production Company Companys second and

final request for reimbursement for the costs of repairs to BP America Production
Company Companys petroleum products pipeline. As we previously informed
you by letter dated {date}, the repairs in question were necessitated because of
damage caused by excavating activity you commenced without first contacting
the appropriate One-Call Notification center, a violation of state law. We have
again enclosed an itemized bill of the costs incurred by BP in repairing the
damage to the pipeline.
Our previous letter put you on notice that BP would refer this matter to counsel
for the filing of civil action for damages in state Superior Court if we received no
response to our initial response for full reimbursement of our repair costs. After
having received no response, we attempted to contact you by telephone on
{date}, but were unsuccessful. This letter constitutes our final attempt to contact
you regarding this matter. If you do not agree to reimburse BP for the full cost of
repairing the pipeline within ten (10) business days or contact us to advise us of
any circumstances that you believe make our request for full reimbursement
inappropriate, we will ask our attorney to commence a civil action against you in
state court without further delay.
Thank you for your immediate attention to this matter.
Sincerely,
{Name} {Title}
{Phone Number}
Enclosure
Page 29 of 32
EXHIBIT D-7
Example of Complaint
SUPERIOR COURT OF WASHINGTON FOR { } COUNTY
OLYMPIC PIPE LINE COMPANY,

Case No.
Plaintiff,
COMPLAINT
v.
Defendant.
I. NATURE OF THE CASE
1. This is an action for damages pursuant to RCW 19.122 and Washington State common law.
II. PARTIES
2. Plaintiff OLYMPIC Pipeline Company, Inc. (OLYMPIC) is a Delaware Corporation doing

business in the State of Washington, with its principal place of business in King County.
3. Defendant { } (Defendant) is a { } corporation doing business in the state of

Washington, with its principal place of business in { } County. {OR: Defendant {John Doe}
{Defendant} is a natural person residing in { }, Washington.}
III JURISDICTION AND VENUE
4. This action arises under RCW 19.122 and Washington State common law.
5. This court has jurisdiction and venue over this matter pursuant to RCW 4.12.025 because
Defendant transacts business in { } County and Defendant has an office for service for process
in { } County. {OR: because Defendant resides in { } County.}
IV. FACTS
6. OLYMPIC is the owner of a 400-mile petroleum products pipeline known as the OLYMPIC
Pipeline, which transports refined hydrocarbons, including gasoline, diesel, and jet fuel, from
refineries near Ferndale and Anacortes, Washington southward through western Washington as
far as Portland, Oregon. The majority of the pipeline facility is physically located in the State of
Washington.
7. On or about { }, Defendant commenced excavation at { } without first providing notice of

scheduled excavation by calling the One-Call Notification Center (One-Call center) prior to
commencing the excavation, as is required under RCW 19.122.030 and 19.122.055.
8. On or about { }, while engaging in the above-referenced excavating activity, Defendant

struck and damaged Olympics pipeline, necessitating its repair by OLYMPIC.
9. OLYMPIC maintains sufficient field marking of its pipeline at and/or in the immediate vicinity of
Defendants excavating activity.
10. On { }, OLYMPIC sent Defendant a certified letter placing Defendant on notice of the
damage to Olympics pipeline and demanding reimbursement for the costs incurred by OLYMPIC
to repair the pipeline, {$ }. A true and correct copy of this letter is attached to the Complaint as
Exhibit 1.
Page 30 of 32
11. On { }, Defendant contacted OLYMPIC {OLYMPIC received a letter from Defendant},
stating that Defendant would not reimburse OLYMPIC for the costs of repairing the pipeline as
demanded. A true and correct copy of this letter is attached to the Complaint as Exhibit 2.
12. On { }, OLYMPIC sent Defendant a second certified letter demanding immediate

reimbursement for the costs of repairing the pipeline and informing Defendant that OLYMPIC
would commence civil litigation to recover such costs. A true and correct copy of this letter is
attached to the Complaint as Exhibit 3.
13. OLYMPIC received no further communication from Defendant and, consequently, filed this
action.
V. CAUSES OF ACTION
FIRST CAUSE OF ACTION: TREBLE DAMAGES UNDER RCW 19.122
14. Plaintiff re-alleges and incorporates by reference the allegations contained in Paragraphs 6
through 13.
15. At the time of Defendants excavating activity, RCW 19.122.030 required Defendant to call
the One-Call center prior to commencing excavation. In relevant part, RCW 19.122.030(1)
provides:
Before commencing any excavation, excluding agricultural tilling less than twelve
inches in depth, the excavator shall provide notice of the scheduled
commencement of excavation to all owners of underground facilities through a
one-number locator serviced.
16. RCW 19.122.033 expressly imposes an obligation to give notice of intended excavating
activity to pipeline companies through a one-number locator serviced. In relevant part, RCW
19.22.033(1) provides:
Before commencing any excavation, excluding agricultural tilling less than

twelve inches in depth, an excavator shall notify pipeline companies of the
scheduled commencement of excavation through a one number locator service
in the same manner as is required for notifying owners of underground facilities
of excavation work under RCW 19.122.030.
17. Under RCW 19.122.020, a pipeline company is a person or entity constructing, owning, or
operating a pipeline for transporting hazardous liquid or gas. OLYMPIC is a pipeline company
within the meaning of this definition.
18. Under RCW 19.122.020, an excavator is any person who engages directly in excavation.
Defendant is an excavator within the meaning of this definition.
19. Defendant did not call the One-Call Center prior to commencing excavating activity in the
vicinity of Olympias pipeline on our about {}.
20. RCW 19.122.070 provides that an excavator that intends to excavate in the vicinity of known
underground facilities and that fails to call a One-Call center prior to excavating is deemed to
have acted willfully and maliciously and shall be liable for treble the costs of repairing any
damage its excavating activity may cause. RCW 19.122.070(2) provides:
Page 31 of 32
Any excavator who willfully or maliciously damages a field-marked underground
facility shall be liable for treble the costs incurred in repairing or relocating the
facility. In those cases in which the an excavator fails to notify known
underground facility owners or the one-number locator service, any damage to
the underground facility shall be deemed willful and malicious and shall be
subject to treble damages for costs incurred in repairing or relocating the facility.
21. Defendant commenced excavating activity in the vicinity of OLYMPIC pipeline without first
notifying the One-Call center and subsequently damaged the pipeline. Defendant is, therefore,
liable to OLYMPIC for treble damages under RCW 19.122.070.
SECOND CAUSE OF ACTION: COMMON LAW NEGLIGENCE
22. Plaintiff realleges and incorporates by reference the allegations contained in Paragraphs 6
through 21.
23. Under Washington common law, the elements of a negligence cause of action are the
existence of a duty owed the plaintiff by the defendant, breach of the duty, and injury to plaintiff
proximately caused by the breach.
24. Pursuant to RCW 19. 122, Defendant had a duty to exercise reasonable care to avoid
damaging underground facilities, including a pipeline. Specifically, Defendant had a duty to
contact a One-Call center prior to commencing excavating activity to determine whether there
were underground facilities in the vicinity of the intended excavation that might be damaged by
such activity.
25. Defendant breached its duty of care when it failed to contact the One-Call center prior to
commencing excavating activity.
26. Defendants excavating activity subsequently damaged OLYMPIC pipeline.
27. Defendants failure to contact the One-Call center prior to excavating was the proximate
cause of Defendants damage to OLYMPIC pipeline.
28. Defendant is liable for the damages it negligently caused to OLYMPIC pipeline. These
damages include the reasonable costs of inspecting, repairing and restoring the pipeline to its
former condition, as well as any and all damages or financial loss incurred as a result of the
shutdown of the pipeline during the period of repair.
VI. PRAYER FOR RELIEF
WHEREFORE, having fully states its causes of action, Plaintiff prays for judgment:
1. Awarding OLYMPIC statutory treble damages against Defendant for the costs of
repairing OLYMPIC pipeline as a consequence of Defendants violation of RCW 19.122;
and
2. Awarding OLYMPIC its damages, including incidental and consequential damages,
against Defendant arising from Defendants negligence; and
3. Awarding OLYMPIC costs and attorneys fees incurred in bringing and prosecuting this
action; and
4. Awarding OLYMPIC such other and further relief as the court finds just and equitable.
DATED this _____ day of __________, ______.
____________________________
{Counsel of Record}
Page 32 of 32
BP AMERICA PRODUCTION CO. ONSHORE BU
BEST PRACTICE GUIDELINE PIPELINE MAPPING SYSTEMS
VERSION: 1.0 DATED 2/22/05
1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE:
The purpose of this document is to outline best practices for mapping underground piping
and pipeline systems in the Onshore BU. The overall goal of an effective mapping system
is to provide sufficient detail and ease of use to operating personnel to prevent
inadvertent line strikes causing damage and leaks with potential risk to personnel and the
public.
This document is not intended to cover rigorous mapping details for DOT regulated
transmission lines or Offshore pipelines. By references in this document, Bp Pipeline
Guidance Practices documentation provides significant information regarding mapping
procedures and standards and are highly recommended to be utilized as resources.
2.0 References:
These references are available online at BP ETP Library - Home
BP
GP 43-07 Selection of design basis for Pipelines
GP 43-09 Hydraulic design for Pipelines
GP 43-10 Route Data Acquisition and Route Selection for Pipelines
GP 43-13 Cost and schedule estimation and reporting for Pipelines
GP 43-15 Project team resourcing for Pipelines
GP 43-16 Regulatory approvals for Pipelines
GP 43-17 Risk management for Pipelines
GP 43-19 Contract strategy Options for Pipeline Projects
GP 43-24 GIS Systems for Pipelines
GP 43-25 Onshore Surveys for Pipelines
GP 43-27 Terrain evaluation and ground hazard assessment for Pipelines
GP 43-40 Onshore construction engineering issues for Pipelines
GP 43-44 Pipeline Construction in fragile environments
GP 43-45 Site restoration for Pipelines
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 19115:2003 Geographic Information Metadata
Bp America Production Co. page 1

Best Practice Guideline Pipeline Mapping Systems
Version 1.0 Date 2/22/05
3.0 Ground Disturbance Permit
Mapping documentation is required to identify the existence and location of underground
lines to facilities and utilities in the vicinity of any Ground Disturbance activity. The Bp
Ground Disturbance Permit requires that excavation activities can not proceed without a
plot plan, line to facilities or drawing that clearly indicates the number of lines or utilities,
line sizes, locations and alignments. The competent person completing the permit is
responsible for reviewing the drawings and cross checking with other sources of
information to ensure they are accurate and complete.
4.0 General Mapping Requirements

Avoidance of inadvertent line strikes is the primary goal of an effective underground
mapping system. Some of the data required to meet this objective and to accurately
identify the location of the line or utility are:
Geographical location (Section, Twnship, Rge reference and/or GPS coordinate)
Line size OD,wall thickness
Line type (steel/grade, fiberglass, poly etc.)
Valve & flange sizing, service and pressure rating
Process fluid/conditions (pressure, temp., flow rates, powerline voltage)
Isolation Valves locations
Depth of cover (protective cover, marking tape)
Other configurations (cased road crossings, drain lines, vent blowdowns,
cathodic protection, pigging stations, chemical injection sites, etc.)
3rd Party Crossings or Utilities (intersecting pipelines or utilities)
Public Impacts (road crossings, housing, schools, public buildings)
Environmental Impacts (wetlands, waterways, cultural resource areas)
A combination of Engineering type drawings that may accomplish these general

requirements are:
As-Built Alignment Sheets final construction drawings
Process Flow Diagrams (PFDs)
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings (P&IDs)
General Location Drawings and Aerial photo overlays
P/L Route Topographic maps
Facility Piping and Valve Operating Plans
Electrical One Line Diagrams
5.0 Mapping - Existing Piping Systems

Onshore U.S. facilities have been constructed over many years and complete drawings
may not be available in many operating areas. Under the requirements of PSIM, each
area is to review their inventory of underground lines and drawings and develop a plan of
action to establish their integrity through inspections and testing. Many OCs are in the
process of developing risk ranked inspection plans and drawings to meet this objective.
The North San Juan Asset is in the process of updating all their underground facilitiy
drawings using a risk based priority system. The attached document can be referenced
for the methodology used in this asset. The program is in progress and projects to be
50% completed by year end 2005.
GATHERING PFD
PROCEDURE.doc

6.0 Mapping - New Construction
New construction projects afford the most opportunity to obtain all the drawings desired
to meet these standards. Critical emphasis should be placed on completion of these
drawings in a timely manner after construction is finished. The MOC process is to be
used to designate the responsible person to ensure completion of the drawings and QC
for accuracy. It is recommended this work be completed within 30 days of onsite
construction.
Also of critical importance is to provide preliminary drawings to the damage prevention

team personnel (including the mapping group) as soon as possible with final drawings
provided when received. New construction also needs to be communicated to the
appropriate One-Call or damage prevention monitoring groups.
7.0 Mapping Systems In Use
A variety of mapping system methodologies are being utilized across the Onshore BU.
Most common are hand drafted blueline copies that are red-lined for modifications by OC
personnel. Drawing updates are in some cases not timely and close attention to
completing drawing revisions needs to be rigorously followed in the MOC process.
7.1 Anadarko
The Anadarko Asset uses AutoCad drawings linked to Access databases housed on an
inhouse PC server. Mapping features allow zoom-in and layering features to identify Bp
operated and intersecting 3rd party lines within the OC. The system databases identify
pertinent line characteristics, operating conditions, 3rd party crossings, leak histories,
cathodic data and links to field technician notes, pipeline surveys and digital photos. Data
access is provided to designated qualified personnel responsible for damage prevention
and construction. A full time technician is devoted to managing the mapping system in
Anadarko.
Contacts for more information on the Anadarko Asset mapping system are:
Jennifer Wells phone 806-371-4436
Larry Martin - phone 806-323-4118
7.2 San Juan

The San Juan Assets utilize a GIS based mapping system using ARCView for the
software interface. Hard copy map atlass are generated and distributed to qualified
personnel responsible for damage prevention and construction. The map atlass are
updated 2 times per year based on an active drilling & construction program. Due to this
activity level and need for accurate/current data, the San Juan Asset is researching a
web based mapping system to allow viewing online. A full time technician is devoted to
managing the mapping system in San Juan.
Contact for more information on the San Juan Asset mapping system
Kourtney Hadrick phone 970-247-6927
Jeff McDonald phone 505-326-9236

7.3 Outside Vendor Services
Limited inhouse Bp resources to development and maintaining an effective mapping
system can make outside vendor resources an attractive option. One such vendor
specializing in computerized mapping is Geofields Inc. Atlanta, GA.
Geofields manages data systems for a wide variety of industry applications with origins
from pipeline transmission company mapping, construction, operational and maintenance
data acquisition and management. This company uses a proprietary interactive web
based data management application called Facilty Explorer. Although developed
primarily for transmission pipeline applications, the system is now being used by several
major and independent oil companies for oil field underground facilty mapping
applications.
Underground piping or facility GPS data supplied by the company can be overlayed on
virtually any publicly available data system such as city street maps, state highways,
topographic maps, aerial photo maps, DOT NPMS maps for Integrity programs, etc. The
overlays can be viewed online in detailed scaling coupled with Engineering drawings,
operational data and construction data to identify One Call crossings, leak or corrosion
problems etc.
Geofields has three program application features that can be applied and used to assist
the company in managing and using the data.
Data Frame pipeline construction & maintainance details, as built alignment
maps, elevation profiles, piping schematics, database links to leak history,
corrosion & cathodic surveys, smart pigging inspections.
Risk Frame Risk modeling for gas & liquid lines based on operational
parameters, corrosion potential, HCA impacts, 3rd Party damage potential.
Modeling results can be utilized to determine integrity maintenance & inspection
programs for company and regulatory compliance.
Project Frame Survey and new construction planning sheets, ROW

acquisition, permitting and land management.
Contact for more information on the Geofields Inc. mapping systems. (Online
demonstrations are available)
Keith Chambless - phone 404-253-1543
Email kchambless@geofields.com

Chapter 7, Grounding and Bonding Procedures
Chapter 7
Grounding and Bonding Procedures
Electrical Continuity
I. General
A. Specific procedures as outlined herein are to be followed to ensure equipment is

properly grounded and static electricity is minimized.
B. Operating supervisors are responsible for the implementation and enforcement of

this policy.
C. Grounding and bonding equipment, including ground rods and ground grid systems,
are considered safety-critical systems, must be inspected annually, and quantitative
instrument tested every five years.
D. Grounding must meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code NFPA 70.
II. Definitions
A. Static Electricity
The electrification of materials through physical contact and separation and the
various effects resulting from the positive and negative charges so formed. Static is
generated when liquids move into contact with other materials, such as in pouring,
mixing, pumping, filtering, or agitating.
B. Static Spark
An impulsive discharge of electricity across a gap between two points not in contact.
C. Bonding
The process of connecting two or more conductive objects together by means of a

conductor to minimize potential differences between the conductive objects.
Bonding equalizes the potential between objects.
D. Grounding

The process of connecting one or more conductive objects to the ground to minimize
potential differences between the objects and the ground. Grounding dissipates an
electric charge to ground.
NOTE: The Attachments at the end of this chapter contain reference diagrams that
support the information below.
III. Static Electricity ControlsBonding and Grounding
A. Tank Vehicles
1. Bonding facilities must be used during the loading of tank vehicles through
open domes where liquids having a flash point of 100 F or below are present or
if vapors from these liquids may be present in the tank.
2. Bond connections shall be made before the dome cover is opened and shall
remain in place until the dome cover has been closed and secured after loading
is completed.
3. Bonding shall consist of a metallic bond wire permanently electrically

connected to the fill stem or to some part of the rack structure that is in
electrical contact with the fill stem.
4. The free end of the bond wire shall have a clamp or similar device for
convenient attachment.
5. Bond wires should be non-insulated.
6. If insulated bond wires are used, they shall be continuity tested annually.
7. All metallic parts of the fill pipe assembly for open dome loading shall form a
continuous electrically conductive path downstream of the bond connection. For
example, inserting a non-conductive hose equipped with a metal coupling on the
outlet must be avoided unless the coupling is bonded to the fill line.
8. During open-dome top loading, the fill pipe must reach as near as possible to the
bottom of the tank being loaded, preferably in contact with the tank. However,
the fill pipe shall not rest full circle on the bottom.
10. During bottom loading, care shall be taken during the initial stages to prevent
upward spraying of the product. Reducing filling velocity or using spray
deflectors is acceptable.

11. It is important with bottom loading that spark promoters, such as fixed gauging
rods or other internal metallic conductors, be extended to the tank bottom.
B. Drums and Cans
1. When filling metal drums and cans with liquids having a flash point of 100 F
or below, or other liquids heated above their conductive flash points, fill spouts,
nozzles or fill pipes shall be kept continuously in contact with the edge of the
fill opening. If this is not possible, the dispersing and receiving containers shall
be bonded together.
2. Bonding is not required when a container is filled through a closed system.
C. Storage Tanks
1. Avoid overshot splash filling. The outlet of the fill pipe shall discharge near
the bottom of the tank, with minimum agitation of the water and sediment on
the tank bottom.
2. Where the outlet of the fill line is attached to a downcomer, siphon breakers
that permit air or vapor to enter the downcomer shall not be used. Avoid
discharging product from a swing line elevated above the liquid level.
3. Ungrounded objects, such as loose gage floats shall be eliminated.
4. Avoid pumping substantial amounts of air or other entrained gas into the tank
through the liquid.
5. Personnel must wait at least five minutes after loading is completed before
conductive gauging or sampling materials are used in the tank.
6. Metallic tanks that are in contact with the ground are sufficiently grounded.
D. Purging and Cleaning Tanks and Vessels
1. If steam is used for either purging or cleaning a tank or other equipment, all
conductive insulated objects subject to impingement or condensation, including
the discharge pipe, shall be bonded to the tank or equipment to be grounded.
The use of steam is discouraged when suitable alternatives are available.
2. Carbon dioxide shall not be used to lessen a flammable atmosphere because of

the presence of solid particles (CO2 snow).

3. When applicable, Confined Space Entry, Lockout/Tagout, and Blinding and

Equipment Isolation procedures must be followed.
IV. Grounding
A. Equipment Grounding
1. The grounding of equipment is primarily for personnel protection and is

required for all metallic housings, enclosures, and structures which contain
electric conductors. Grounding shall be interconnected to the extent that a low
potential difference is maintained between nearby metallic objects.
2. Equipment grounding applies to motor frames, enclosures for controls,

transformer cases, transformer back fences, metallic houses, etc.
3. The National Electrical Code and National Electric Safety Code shall be
referenced to ensure equipment grounding requirements are met.
B. Lightning Arrestor Grounding
1. Arrestors must be connected to a low resistance ground in order to provide

effective surge protection.
2. Metallic tanks and structures that are in contact with the ground are sufficiently
grounded to provide for safe dissipation of lightning strikes.
C. Grounding at Well Installations
1. Grounding of electrical installations must be designed and installed under the

supervision by a qualified person. See the Electrical Safety Chapter for definition
of qualified person.
2. The ground wire connection at the well casing shall be located where it will not
be disturbed during well servicing operations and shall be mechanically secure.
D. Ground Rods
1. Information on locations and applications requiring ground rods may be found

in Engineering Instruction Guidelines Specification 3C200 and Specifications
for Engineering Specialties 4A200.
2. Multiple rods provide a reduction in resistance but may not provide adequate
performance.

E. Ground Wires
1. Ground wires must have sufficient capacity to carry a fault current until short
circuit protection opens the circuit.
V. References
A. National Fire Protection Association; NFPA 30, NFPA 70, NFPA 77 and NFPA 78.
B. American Petroleum Institute; API 650 and 2003.

Attachment 4.7-1

Attachment 4.7-2
NO SPARKING POTENTIAL BETWEEN THE

DOWNSPOUT (FILLPIPE) AND TRUCK

Attachment 4.7-3

Chapter 8, Hazard Communication Program
Chapter 8
Hazard Communication Program
I. Regulated Materials and Written Program
A. The OSHA Hazard Communication Standard regulates all chemical substances

which present a physical or health hazard in the workplace. Substances which meet
these criteria are defined in Attachment 1.8-1.
B. Chemical substances, as defined in Attachment 1.8-1, used at BP facilities are

subject to this policy. This program does not apply to chemicals subject to the
Consumer Product Safety Act, foods, or tobacco products. A consumer product
which is hazardous and used in the same manner as normal consumer use and which
results in a duration and frequency of exposure which is not greater than exposures
experienced by consumers is not subject to the requirements of the hazard
communication standardincluding MSDSs.
C. Each location must have a written Hazard Communication Program (HCP). This
program will satisfy the written requirements as long as the provisions set forth
below are followed and site specific program elements (i.e., method of labeling) are
documented and available upon the request of an OSHA compliance officer.
D. Operating supervisors at each location are responsible for implementing and

enforcing this program.
E. Each location must assign responsibility, in writing, to those who will implement
certain provisions of the Hazard Communication Program. Location-specific
information that is required includes the following:
1. Where the written HCP will be maintained. It must be accessible to employees

on all shifts. (For small or widely scattered field operations, such as well sites,
MSDSs may be kept at a central location accessible to all field employees.)
2. Labels and other forms of warning.
3. MSDSs.
4. Employee information and training.
5. Multi-employer workplaces.

Attachment 1.8-3 may be used to document the designations that are required
for your facility. The information shall be updated as applicable.
II. Multi-Employer Worksites
In addition to the written Hazard Communication Program required of each employer who
may have employees exposed to hazardous chemicals, there are other requirements that
are applicable to a multi-employer worksite (drilling/completion/workover location).
Some of the requirements are, but are not limited to:
A. A multi-employer worksite is intended to mean those establishments where

employees of more than one employer are performing work and are exposed to
hazardous chemicals.
B. Where employees of more than one employer are exposed to a hazards, the
employers with the responsibility for creating and/or correcting the hazard shall be
responsible for determining compliance with the Hazard Communication
(HAZCOM) Standard, including the methods the employer will use to make a
readable copy of MSDSs available. (See Attachment 1.8-2 for a suggested method
to be used.)
C. A list of the hazardous chemicals present at the worksite must be compiled and
maintained.
D. The HAZCOM Standard requires an employer on a multi-employer worksite to have

pertinent MSDSs readily available at a central location at that facility or worksite.
Also see VII. Contractor Notification, below. This requirement covers each
hazardous chemical to which the other employers personnel may be exposed. The
MSDS access requirement pertains to all employers who introduce hazardous
chemicals into the worksite. All employers and employees must know how to
retrieve the MSDSs.
E. All employers personnel who may be exposed must be trained on how to utilize
labels and MSDSs, to recognize hazards, and to follow appropriate protective
measures.
III. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs)
A. Each location shall maintain a current and accurate MSDS for each substance
covered by the Hazard Communication Standard that is used at that specific location
(BP-produced or -purchased products). MSDSs must be accessible to all employees
on all shifts.

B. A list of the hazardous chemicals known to be present in the work place that can be
cross-referenced to the MSDS and container labels must be present at each work
location.
C. Purchased products shall not be accepted unless an MSDS accompanies the delivery,
or you have a current version at your location. Every MSDS received must be
forwarded to the designated individual at the local operation who is responsible for
maintaining a current MSDS and chemical inventory file.
D. A chemical inventory shall be maintained at each facility office location and shall be
current. These updates shall be placed in all location manuals.
E. If a chemical is no longer in use, the MSDS shall not be thrown away. MSDSs are
considered employee exposure records and maintained on file locally for 30 years
from the date of the last known exposure.
IV. Labeling
A. Chemical Container LabelingContainers Received
All chemical containers received from vendors must be labeled and must be
delivered with a Material Safety Data Sheet unless a current MSDS is on location.
The labels must be legible, in English, and prominently displayed on the container,
or readily available in the work area throughout each work shift. Labels provided by
the manufacturer, importer, or distributor shall include:
1. Identity: The chemical or common name as it appears on the MSDS.
2. Hazard Warnings: Must convey the physical and/or health hazards, including
target organ effects associated with that chemical.
3. Contact Information: The name and address of the chemical manufacturer or

importer in case of spill or accident.
B. Container Labeling for Bulk Purchased ChemicalsIn Plant/In Field
1. All bulk chemical dispensing units shall be labeled with
a. Identity
b. Hazard Warnings
c. Contact Information

C. In-Plant LabelingIn Plant/In Field
1. In-plant labeling systems may use alternative methods from those that require
specific hazard warnings. General physical and health hazards may be
conveyed by in-plant labeling systems as long as:
a. the name of the label is linked to the MSDS available for that substance
b. personnel have immediate access to the MSDS
c. personnel understand the labeling system used
d. the training program is enhanced to address the target organ effects of the
those chemicals.
2. All storage tanks that contain substances regulated by the standard shall be
labeled.
3. It is not mandatory that the process vessels be labeled as long as the products
and general hazard warnings they contain are identified via the alternative
labeling provision of the OSHA standard. Alternative methods include signs,
placards, process sheets, batch tickets, operating procedures, etc., as long as the
method identifies the applicable containers, and conveys the identity of the
chemical and appropriate hazard warnings. Contact your HSE representative to
ensure full compliance with the alternative labeling provision.
4. Information on labels or signs identifying the substance must appear as stated

on the MSDS. Labels and signs may also correspond to a consistent numbering
system that correlates to a central sign specifying what the numbers mean. The
chemical names on the central sign must appear as stated on the MSDS.
D. Anything that is received and contains hazardous material and is required to be

labeled per U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations, such as packages,
rail cars, and transport vehicles, must not have the labels or markings removed until
the hazardous materials (contents) are sufficiently removed to prevent any potential
hazards.
V. Employee Information and Training
A. Employees who may be exposed to hazardous chemicals in the course of their

routine responsibilities or in a emergency, shall be provided with information and
training about these potential hazards. Such information and training shall be
provided at the time of initial assignment, annually thereafter, and whenever a new

hazard is introduced to the employees work area. All training and new employee
orientation will be documented and maintained.
B. Employees information and training shall include:
1. Requirements of the OSHA standard and any additional state requirements.
2. Notification of operations within their work area where hazardous chemicals are
present.
3. Location and availability of hazard communication material such as the written

program inventory lists and MSDSs.
4. Methods and observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of
a hazardous chemical.
5. The physical and health hazards, including target organ effects associated with
chemicals or classes of chemicals in the work area, and also including chemicals
in unlabeled pipes.
6. Actions necessary for employees to protect themselves from these hazards.
7. Details of the developed Hazard Communication Program, including an

explanation of the labeling system and how employees can obtain an MSDS.
VI. Informing Employees of Other Hazards
Employees must be informed as to the chemical hazards of nonroutine tasks and the
hazards associated with chemicals in unlabeled pipes in their work areas. The primary
methods to be used will include:
Pre-job (job planning) meetings
Scheduled safety meetings
Tailgate or Job Hazard Analysis meetings
Preparation and availability of procedures
Safety bulletins or posting of specific information
Required annual training sessions
VII. Contractor Notification

A. It shall be the operating supervisors responsibility to inform the contractors

representative at the start of a project, or upon assignment, as to the hazards
associated with the chemicals that the contractors employees may encounter during
their work at that facility. In addition, the contractor must be informed of the
precautionary measures they can take, and the labeling systems used
B. Each contractor must be notified of where the MSDSs are located as well as the
chemicals on location. An example of a letter that can be used to communicate the
location of and type of chemicals is available in Attachment 1.8-2.
NOTE: Contractors must have and be able to provide a copy of the MSDS to the
appropriate supervisor for any chemicals utilized by the contractor that may present
an exposure hazard to employees.
VIII. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR

1910.20, 1910.1200, and 1910.1201.
B. gHSEr Element # 3, People, Training, and Behaviors.
C. gHSEr Element # 8, Information and Documentation.

Attachment 1.8-1
Definition Of Physical And Health Hazards Of Chemicals

I. General
A. Any chemical that has a physical or health hazard as defined below constitutes an
OSHA-defined hazardous chemical.
II. Physical Hazards
A. Combustible Liquids
Any liquid having a flash point at or above 100 F (37.8 C) but below 200 F (93.3
C), except any mixture having components with flash points of 200 F (93.3 C) or
higher, the total volume of which makes up 99 percent or more of the total volume
of the mixture.
B. Compressed Gases
1. A gas or mixture of gases having, in a container, an absolute pressure exceeding

40 psi at 70 F (21.1 C)
2. A gas or mixture of gases having, in a container, an absolute pressure exceeding

104 psi at 103 F (54.4 C) regardless of the pressure at 70 F (21.1 C)
3. A liquid having a vapor pressure exceeding 40 psi at 100 F (37.8 C) as

determined by ASTM D-323-72
C. Explosives
Explosive. A chemical that causes a sudden, almost instantaneous release of

pressure, gas, and heat when subjected to sudden shock, pressure, or high
temperature.
D. Flammables
1. Aerosol flammable. An aerosol that, when tested by the method described in 16

CFR 1500.45, yields a flame projection exceeding 18 inches at full valve
opening, or a flashback (a flame extending back to the valve) at any degree of
valve opening;
2. Gas, flammable.

a. a gas that, at ambient temperature and pressure, forms a flammable mixture

with air at a concentration of 13 percent by volume or less
b. a gas that, at ambient temperature and pressure, forms a range of

flammable mixtures with air wider than 12 percent by volume, regardless
of the lower limit.
3. Liquid flammable. Any liquid having a flash point below 100 F (37.8 C),
except any mixture having components with flash points of 100 F (37.8 C) or
higher, the total of which makes up 99 percent or more of the total volume of
the mixture.
4. Solid flammable. A solid, other than a blasting agent or explosive as defined in

1910.109(a), that is liable to cause fire through friction, absorption of
moisture, spontaneous chemical change, or retained heat from manufacturing or
processing, or which can be ignited readily and when ignited burns so
vigorously and persistently as to create a serious hazard. A chemical shall be
considered to be flammable solid if, when tested by the method described in 16
CFR 1500.44, it ignites and burns with a self-sustained flame at a rate greater
than one-tenth of an inch per second along its major axis.
E. Organic Peroxides
Organic peroxide. An organic compound that contains the bivalent-O-O-structure

and which may be considered to be a structural derivative of hydrogen peroxide
when one or both of the hydrogen atoms has been replaced by an organic radical.
F. Oxidizers
Oxidizer. A chemical, other than a blasting agent or explosive as defined in

1910.109(a), that initiates or promotes combustion in other materials, thereby
causing fire either of itself or through the release of oxygen or other gases.
G. Pyrophorics (Iron Sulfide)
Pyrophoric. A chemical that will ignite spontaneously in air at a temperature of

130 F (54.4 C) or below.
H. Unstable
Unstable (reactive). A chemical which in the pure state, or as produced or

transported, will vigorously polymerize, decompose, condense, or will become self-
reactive under conditions of shocks, pressure, or temperature.

I. Water-Reactive
Water-reactive. A chemical that reacts with water to release a gas that is either
flammable or presents a health hazard.
III. Health Hazards
A. Carcinogen (cancer causing agent). A chemical is considered to be a carcinogen if:
1. It has been evaluated by the International Agency for Research on Cancer

(IARC) and found to be a carcinogen or potential carcinogen; or
2. It is listed as a carcinogen or potential carcinogen in the Annual Report on

Carcinogens published by the National Toxicology Program (NTP) (latest
edition); or
3. It is regulated by OSHA as a carcinogen.
B. Corrosive. A chemical that causes visible destruction of, or irreversible alterations

in, living tissue by chemical action at the site of contact.
C. Highly toxic. A chemical falling within any of the following categories:
1. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD50) of 50 milligrams or less per
kilogram of body weight when administered orally to albino rats weighing
between 200 and 300 grams each.
2. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD50) of 200 milligrams or less per
kilogram of body weight when administered by continuous contact for 24 hours
(or less if death occurs within 24 hours) with the bare skin of albino rabbits
weighing between 2 and 3 kilograms each.
3. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD50) in air of 200 parts per million
by volume or less of gas or vapor, or 2 milligrams per liter or less of mist, fume,
or dust, when administered by continuous inhalation for one hour (or less if
death occurs within one hour) to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300
grams each.
D. Irritant. A chemical which is not corrosive but which causes a reversible

inflammatory effect on living tissue by chemical action at the site of contact. A
chemical is a skin irritant if, when tested on the intact skin of albino rabbits by the
methods of 16 CFR 1500.41 for four hours exposure or by other appropriate
techniques, it results in an empirical score of five or more. A chemical is an eye

irritant if so determined under the procedure listed in 16 CFR 1500.42 or other

appropriate techniques.
E. Sensitizer. A chemical that causes a substantial proportion of exposed people or

animals to develop an allergic reaction in normal tissue after repeated exposure to
the chemical.
F. Toxic. A chemical falling within any of the following categories:
1. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD50) of more than 50 milligrams
per kilogram but not more than 500 milligrams per kilogram of body weight
when administered orally to albino rats weighing between 200 and 300 grams
each.
2. A chemical that has a median lethal dose (LD50) of more than 200 milligrams
per kilogram but not more than 1,000 milligrams per kilogram of body weight
when administered by continuous contact for 24 hours (or less if death occurs
within 24 hours) with the bare skin of albino rabbits weighing between 2 and 3
kilograms each.
3. A chemical that has a median lethal concentration (LD50) in air of more than
200 parts per million but not more than 2,000 parts per million by volume of gas
or vapor, or more than two milligrams per liter but not more than 20 milligrams
per liter of mist, fume, or dust when administered by continuous inhalation for
one hour (or less if death occurs within one hour) to albino rats weighing
between 200 and 300 grams each.
G. Target organ effects. The following is a target organ categorization of effects which
may occur, including examples of signs and symptoms and chemicals which have
been found to cause such effects. These examples are presented to illustrate the
range and diversity of effects and hazards found in the workplace, and the broad
scope employers must consider in this area. The list is not intended to be all-
inclusive.

Target Organ Categorization
Category Signs and Symptoms Chemicals

1. Hepatoxins: Chemicals Liver enlargement Carbon tetrachloride,
which produce liver damage nitrosamines
2. Nephrotoxins: Chemicals Edema: proteinuria Halogenated hydrocarbons,
which produce primary effect uranium
on the nervous system
3. Neurotoxins: Chemicals Narcosis: behavioral change; Mercury, carbon disulfide
which produce primary effect decrease in motor functions
on the nervous system
4. Agents which act on Cyanosis: loss of consciousness Carbon monoxide, cyanides
decreased hemoglobin
function. They deprive the
blood-forming body tissues
of oxygen.
5. Chemicals or substances that Cough, tightness in chest Silica, asbestos
irritate or damage the lungs
(pulmonary tissue)
6. Reproductive toxins: Birth defects, sterility Lead, DBCP
Chemicals which affect the
reproductive capabilities,
including chromosal damage,
(mutations) and effects on
fetuses (teratogenesis)
7. Cutaneous hazards: Defatting of the skin, rashes, Ketones, chlorinated compounds
Chemicals which affect the irritation
dermal layer of the body
8. Eye Hazards: Chemicals Conjunctivitis, corneal damage Organic solvents
which affect the eye or visual
capacity
Definitions and criteria taken from 29 CFR 1910.1200 will be considered updated as the
regulation is updated or revised.

Attachment 1.8-2
Date: ________________________
Contractors Name and Address
Hazard Communication Program (HCP)
BP, in compliance with the Hazard Communication Standard 1910.1200 of OSHA, is notifying
you of the type and location where your employees may encounter workplace chemicals.
The HCP requires that the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) are readily available to all BP
and contract employees on the chemicals that may be encountered in the work environment.
The attached list identifies chemicals that may be on-site at any given time at the following work
location(s):
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
The MSDSs are available at the BP offices listed above during normal working hours. If you or
any of your employees would like to review them, please contact any foreman or the HSE
representative at the _________________ ____________ office.
Please feel free to request any MSDSs that you may wish to review or copy for your employees
further review.
____________________________
Operations Management

Attachment 1.8-3
Hazard Communication Program

Facility ____________________________________________________Date_______
Applicable requirements of the Hazard Communication Program are being met with the
following designations:
Labels and Other Forms of Warnings
1. Designee(s) responsible for ensuring labeling of in-plant containers:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
2. Designee(s) responsible for ensuring labeling of any shipped container:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Description of labeling system(s) used:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
4. Description of alternative in-plant labeling system(s):
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
5. Procedures to review and update label information when necessary:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

Material Safety Data Sheets
1. Designee(s) responsible for obtaining and maintaining MSDSs:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
2. Designee(s) responsible for maintaining the list of hazardous chemicals present:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Description of how MSDSs will be kept, and how employees can obtain access to them:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
4. Procedures to follow if an MSDS is not received with the initial shipment:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
5. Description of alternatives to actual MSDSs in the workplace, if applicable:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Employee Information and Training
1. Designee(s) responsible for conducting training:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
2. Format of the training program:
_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________
3. Procedure to train new employees, and to train employees when a new hazard is introduced:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Multi-Employer Workplaces
1. Methods to provide access to hosts MSDSs:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
2. Methods to inform other employers of precautionary measures:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
3. Methods used to inform other employers of the labeling system(s) used:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Written Hazard Communication Program
1. Location of the written hazard communication program:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
Chapter 9
HAZWOPER
I. General
A. Key Terms and Interpretations
1. HAZWOPER: Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency ResponseOSHA

Standard 29 CFR 1910.120, effective March, 1990.
2. Emergency Response: A response effort by employees from outside the

immediate release area or by other designated responders (i.e., local fire
departments, mutual aid groups, designated HAZMAT teams, etc.) to an
occurrence which results in or potentially results in an uncontrolled release of a
hazardous substance.
3. Immediate release area: The assigned work area of the responding employee.
In most cases this will include operations centers, platforms and gas plants. In
some cases operations centers encompass too large a geographic area; in such
cases, the immediate release area is (more reasonably) a field office.
4. Work Area: The area to which the employee has been assigned. This
assignment includes training in hazards of the area.
5. Controlled Release: A releases that is contained by an in-place facility or

safeguard, does not go off the property, can be stopped by closing valve(s), or
absorbed/neutralized and promptly contained at the time of release.
II. Background
A. The OSHA HAZWOPER Standard was designed to regulate health and safety of
workers at hazardous waste sites, which are defined as:
1. Cleanup operations required by any government body at any uncontrolled

hazardous waste site
2. Corrective actions involving cleanup operations at RCRA sites
3. Voluntary cleanup operations involving hazardous waste sites recognized by

any governmental authority
4. Operations involving hazardous wastes that are conducted at TSD facilities

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
Exploration and production operations are generally exempt from the standard
definitions of hazardous waste. However, certain state laws and regulations
concerning hazardous wastes may require site-by-site evaluations to determine
whether your operation falls under such restrictions. Consult with your Field
Environmental Coordinator to determine regulations that apply to your location.
B. The regulation applies whenever employee exposures or the reasonable possibility of

employee exposures to safety and health hazards occur during the control and
cleanup of the spill or release.
C. Contractors are responsible for training their employees and providing a plan, if
necessary, to clean up the site.
III. Incident Management Plan
A. A written IMP must be developed and implemented to handle anticipated

emergencies. A decision tree is included as Attachment 1.9-1 to help you determine
when an incident is classified as a HAZWOPER emergency.
B. The plan must be available for inspection and copying by employees, their
representatives, and OSHA personnel.
IV. Training
A. All employees exposed to hazardous substances, health hazards, or safety hazards

shall be thoroughly trained in the following:
1. The names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health
2. Safety, health and other hazards present on the site
3. The use of personal protective equipment
4. Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards
5. Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site
6. Medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of symptoms and

signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards
7. Elements of the site IMP, including the following:
Decontamination

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
Emergency medical treatment and first aid

Emergency alerting and response procedures
PPE and emergency equipment
B. Only those employees who have met the training requirement above are permitted to
engage in hazardous waste operations that could expose them to hazardous
substances or to safety or health hazards.
Levels of Training and Requirements
Training Level Training Category Training Requirements

Cleanup Operations of General site workers: Those A minimum of 40 hours of on-
Hazardous Wastes Sites workers routinely exposed to site instruction.
various hazards at the site.
Plus 3 days of actual
supervised field experience.
Occasional workers: Those A minimum of 24 hours of on-
workers who work on the site site instruction.
only occasionally for a specific
limited task. Plus 1 day of actual
supervised field experience.
Management and supervisors: A minimum of 40 hours of on-
On-site managers and site instruction.
supervisors who are responsible
for the safety and health of Plus 1 day of actual
others. supervised field experience.
Plus at least 8 additional
hours of management related
training.
Refresher training: For all levels. 8 hours annually.
Certain Operations Conducted New Employees Documentation demonstrating
Under RCRA equivalent training specified
for new employees is
acceptable.
Current Employees Documentation demonstrating
equivalent training specified
for new employees is
acceptable.
Refresher training 8 hours annually.

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
Emergency Response to Skilled support employees Those employees who are

Hazardous Substance Releases skilled in the operation of
certain equipment and who
are needed temporarily to
perform immediate
emergency support work, and
who may be exposed to the
hazards of the emergency
response scene, are not
required to meet the training
required for the employers
regular employees. However,
skilled employees must
receive an initial briefing that
includes:
Instruction in wearing PPE
Information on chemical
hazards involved
Information on the duties to
be performed
Specialist employees Those employees who are
called upon to provide
technical advice or assistance
to the individual in charge at a
hazardous substance release
incident must receive training
or demonstrate competency in
the area of their specialization
annually.
First responder awareness leve: Those employees who may
discover or report the spill
must receive sufficient training
in the understanding and
identification of hazardous
substances, risks, potential
outcomes, and their role as
responders.

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
First responderoperations A minimum of 8 hours of

level: Those employees who training.
respond to releases or potential
releases of hazardous
substances as part of the initial
response to the site for the
purpose of protecting nearby
persons, property or the
environment from the effects of
the release. They are trained to
respond in a defensive fashion
without actually trying to stop the
release. Their function is to
secure, control, and contain the
release from a safe distance.
Hazardous material technician: A minimum of 24 hours
Those employees who respond equivalent to operations level.
to the incident for the purpose of
stopping the release, e.g., plug or Plus additional training on
patch. They are more highly implementation of the
trained and experienced than first emergency response plan,
responder operations level use of field survey
personnel. instruments, specialized PPE,
incident command system,
hazard/risk assessment
techniques, advance
control/containment
operations, decontamination,
and chemical and
toxicological terminology and
behavior.
Hazardous material specialist: A minimum of 24 hours
Those employees who respond equivalent to technician level.
with and provide support to
hazardous material technicians. Plus more in-depth training in
These individuals have more same areas as well as
direct knowledge of the materials knowledge of the local/state
that may be handled. They also emergency response plans
act as a technical liaison with and site health and safety
various agencies. plan.
On-scene incident commander: A minimum of 24 hours

The person(s) who organizes equivalent to first response
and controls the complete spill operations level.
response.
Plus additional training in
decision-making process
required of the position.

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
Post-emergency response: A minimum of 40 hours

Those employees who remove equivalent to general site
and clean up hazardous workers at hazardous waste
materials from the site. sites.
Or, if the cleanup is conducted
on BP property by BP
personnel, the employees are
required to have training on
emergency response and fire
prevention plans, hazard
communication, respiratory
protection and other
appropriate safety and health
training as required for the
task they are expected to
perform, e.g., the use of PPE
or decontamination
procedures.
V. References
A. 29 CFR 1910.120, Hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
B. gHSEr Element # 11, Crisis and Emergency Management.

Chapter 9, HAZWOPER
Attachment 1.9-1

Chapter 10, Hearing Conservation
Chapter 10
Hearing Conservation
I. Program Requirements
A. All operating locations shall comply with OSHA 1910.95 and BP policy regarding
the protection of employees from occupational noise exposure. A hearing
conservation program (HCP) will be established at those locations where employees
are exposed to noise levels of 85 dBA time-weighted average (TWA) for an eight-
hour shift or 82 dBA TWA for a twelve-hour shift. All employees whose noise
exposures equal or exceed those exposure levels shall be included in the hearing
conservation program.
B. The operating supervisor is responsible for implementing the requirements of the

program, except where specific duties are assigned to the HCP Administrator or
other named individuals.
C. The hearing conservation program shall include the following elements:
1. Initial workplace sound level surveys. Areas will be surveyed again when
significant process or equipment changes occur that may increase the noise level
or the number of persons exposed.
2. Noise dosimetry monitoring for employees to determine if they will be included

in the HCP. The sampling strategy shall be designed to identify employees for
inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the proper selection
of hearing protectors.
3. Proper selection and fitting of employees with hearing protection devices that
reduce employee exposure levels to below 85 dBA for an 8-hour TWA or 82
dBA for a twelve-hour TWA.
4. Annual audiometric testing and evaluation of employees in the HCP.
5. An annual training program for employees included in the HCP.
6. Assessment and implementation of feasible engineering and/or administrative

controls to reduce noise exposure. Economic or operational considerations will
sometimes make engineering controls impractical. The evaluation must be
documented and retained in the facility safety files.

II. Sound Level Surveys and Dosimetry Testing
A. A monitoring program shall be developed and implemented when information

indicates that any employees exposure might equal or exceed an eight-hour TWA
exposure of 85 dBA or a twelve-hour TWA exposure of 82 dBA or above.
B Sound level meter surveys shall be conducted in all areas where sound levels exceed
82 dBA.
C. Sound level surveys shall be conducted with an ANSI-approved Type II sound level
meter or equivalent. Meters will be calibrated and adjusted to altitude difference
prior to use in accordance with the manufacturers specifications. Post-survey
calibrations shall also be performed by the person conducting the survey.
D. Results of surveys shall be documented and retained on file. The sound level data
shall be plotted on a diagram of the location and posted in a manner convenient for
employee review. Survey information shall include a summary of equipment
operating at the time of the survey and other pertinent information that would affect
survey results.
E. The sound survey shall be completed shortly after a new installation is complete if it
generates significant noise. These surveys need to be repeated only if equipment is
removed or noise attenuated by engineering means that could lower the facilitys
original noise level. A new survey is usually not required if the noise level remains
above 82 dBA.
F. All surveys shall be conducted with the sound level meter in the A-weighted, slow-
response mode.
G. Dosimetry testing shall determine which employees or job classifications are to be

included in the Hearing Conservation Program. A representative sample from each
operating classification will be necessary to confirm noise exposure. (Employees
may be included in the HCP based upon sound level meter results until such time as
proper dosimetry evaluation can be made.)
H. Dosimetry results shall be documented and remain on file at each location.
I. Dosimetry testing shall be repeated whenever a change in production, process,

equipment or controls increases noise exposure to the extent that additional
employees may be exposed at or above the action level, or if the increase in exposure
might be sufficient to make the attenuation offered by hearing protectors inadequate.
J. All noise dosimeters shall be calibrated before and after each use. All
manufacturers instructions for dosimeter use shall be followed.

K. Employees shall be notified in writing of the results of their dosimetry monitoring.

The hearing conservation program administrator or their designee will review the
employee notification letter with the affected employee and document the review.
III. Audiometric Testing
A. The Site Hearing Conservation Program Administrator (HCP Administrator) is

responsible for coordinating the audiometric testing for the employees included in
the HCP. Unless otherwise designated, the Site HCP Administrator will be the HSE
representative responsible for coordinating the locations safety program.
B. All employees in the HCP shall receive annual audiometric testing. The initial
audiogram shall serve as the baseline upon which the subsequent annual audiogram
will be compared. The first audiogram shall be given within six months of an
employees first exposure to noise above 82 dBA TWA for a twelve-hour shift or 85
dBA TWA for an eight-hour shift. This time period for the first audiogram may be
shifted to within one year of initial exposure if a mobile test van is used for testing.
However, employees exposed over six months before the initial audiogram shall
wear hearing protectors for all work periods exceeding those first six months.
C. Testing to establish a baseline audiogram shall be preceded by at least fourteen hours

without exposure to workplace noise. Hearing protectors may be used during a work
shift as a substitute for the above requirement.
D. Operating locations shall ensure that audiometric testing is performed by

audiometers that meet the specifications of, and are used and maintained in
accordance with, American National Standard Specification Institute (ANSI)
Standard S3.6-1969.
E. Operating locations shall ensure that all audiometric testing is accomplished in

accordance with 29 CFR 1910.95 (h) of OSHAs Occupational Noise Exposure
Standard.
F. Audiograms shall be sent to the Medical Department. Audiograms will be evaluated

with reports and letters of result notification generated. The Medical Department
will send letters of notification of Standard Threshold Shifts (STSs) directly to
affected employees. The HCP administrator will also be notified of any 10- or 25-dB
STS.
G. Employees with a suspected STS may be retested within 30 days of original testing
if it is thought the STS might be unconfirmed, at the direction of the Medical
Department. Otherwise, a suspected STS will be considered confirmed without
retesting.

H. Employees with a confirmed STS shall be refitted and retrained for the hearing
protector used. Following Medical Department physician review, the employee may
be referred to a hearing specialist at company expense for consultation and opinion
concerning the following:
1. Probable cause of the hearing loss
2. Factors other than potential occupational noise exposure that could contribute to
the loss
3. Whether there is a medical pathology in the employees ears that may be

aggravated by the wearing of hearing protectors
4. Recommendations to improve, stabilize, or prevent hearing loss
The referral shall include results of available noise monitoring of the employees
work area and a summary of audiometric tests, including the employees baseline(s).
A copy of the specialists report shall be sent to the Medical Department.
I. A report shall be issued to the Site HCP Administrator identifying employees with a
25-dB accumulated shift. The Medical Department physician will review the
findings and determine if there is a medical reason for the hearing loss. Referral to a
specialist may be necessary at this point if not already done. Documentation shall be
placed in the medical record if a decision is made not to record the loss on the
OSHA log. If the employee is in the Hearing Conservation Program, the case shall
be reported on the OSHA 200 log.
IV. Hearing Protection Devices and Signs
A. All employees shall wear hearing protection when they enter areas where sound
levels exceed 85 dBA. Employees who work twelve-hour shifts shall wear hearing
protectors when they enter areas of 82 dBA or greater.
B. Hearing protectors shall attenuate employee exposure to an eight-hour TWA of 85

dBA or a 12-hour TWA of 82 dBA. For employees who have experienced a
standard threshold shift, hearing protectors must attenuate exposure to an eight-hour
TWA of 85 dBA or lower. Contact your HCP Administrator to ensure approved
hearing protectors are used.
C. Employees shall be given the opportunity to select their hearing protectors from a
variety of suitable hearing protectors provided by the facility. As a minimum, two
types of plugs and a type of muff shall be made available. Employees shall be given
the option of utilizing the protector that is most comfortable as long as the

attenuation value is not compromised. The use of muffs over large templebars from
glasses or other similar protrusions that may interfere with the seal of the muff is not
permitted.
D. The HCP Administrator is responsible for coordinating the training required to

assure each affected employee at his/or her facility is trained in the use and care of
the hearing protector chosen by that employee.
E. The HCP administrator shall ensure proper initial fitting and selection of all hearing
protectors. The employees supervisor will assure correct use of the chosen
protection.
F. All areas that require hearing protection to be worn by employees shall have a sign
posted stating this requirement at each entry point. The following wording is
recommended: NOTICE: Hearing Protection Required.
V. Training Program
A. All employees in the hearing conservation program shall participate in annual

training that shall include the following:
1. The components of the hearing conservation program.
2. The requirements of OSHA and BP regarding occupational noise exposure.
3. How the ear hears and the effects of noise exposure on hearing.
4. The importance, purpose, and attenuation rating of hearing protectors as well as

the proper selection, fitting, use, and care of hearing protectors.
5. Areas where noise exposures can occur within their workplace.
6. The purpose, procedure, results, and evaluation of audiometric testing.
B. An outline of the training program shall be retained on file by the HCP

Administrator.
C. All training will be documented. It is recommended that the applicable computer

system, such as CSIS, be utilized for this purpose. The HCP Administrators or their
designees are responsible for this documentation.
VI. Engineering and Administrative Controls

Locations shall use feasible engineering or administrative controls to reduce noise

exposures whenever practical. Economic or operational considerations will sometimes
make engineering controls impractical. The research and findings showing engineering
controls were not practical must be documented in the facility files.
VII. Recordkeeping
A. The HCP Administrator shall ensure that an accurate record of all employee
exposure measurements is maintained. These records shall be kept in accordance
with the Recordkeeping chapter of this Standard.
B. Audiometric test records shall be retained by the Medical Department for the
duration of an affected employees employment. These records shall include:
1. Name and job classification of the employee.
2. Date of the audiogram.
3. The examiners name.
4. Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer.
5. An accurate record of the measurements of the background sound pressure

levels in the audiometric test room.
6. The employees most recent noise assessment (actual or representative). These

assessments shall be recorded into the Performance Unit industrial hygiene
record.
VIII. References

1910.95.
B. American National Standards Institute, Specifications for Sound Level Meters,

ANSI S1.4-1983, Specifications for Audiometers, ANSI S3.6-1969, Specifications
for Personal Noise Dosimeters, ANSI S1.32-1980.

Chapter 8, Hot Oiling
Chapter 8
Hot Oiling
I. General
A. Hot oil units must be located at least 150 feet from any flammable/combustible
vapor source. When this distance is not possible to maintain, the unit may be
positioned closer; however, a hot work permit must be completed before work may
begin. When the hot oil unit is within 35 feet of the vapor source, a fire watch must
be assigned to the job.
B. The hot oil unit must be positioned so that there is a crosswind and the unit operator
will be on the upwind side. If this is not possible, the unit shall be placed upwind
from the well. Be sure the fuel vapors cannot get to the firebox air intake. Air intakes
shall be designed to accommodate flashback arrestors.
C. The service company shall position the hot oil unit so that drainage from the unit
will not be toward the well, other equipment, or test tanks on location, insofar as
practical.
II. Hot Oiling Procedures
A. A pre-job risk assessment must be performed prior to hot oiling operations and shall
include environmental concerns.
B. The hot oil unit shall not be parked over any flowline. If the operator is not sure of
the location of the flowline, they must contact the BP supervisor in charge of the
lease.
C. High pressure pipe and connections that meet or exceed the requirements of the job
must be used.
D. A high pressure check valve must be used in the line near the wellhead. The valve on
the well shall be checked to ensure the integrity of the check valve before connecting
the lines at the first union or flange. The valves must be closed on the well prior to
hooking up lines to the hot oil unit.
E. The service unit operator must pressure test the lines from the hot oil unit to the
wellhead to 150 percent of pressures anticipated during treatment before lighting the
burner.

Chapter 8, Hot Oiling
F. Pressure ratings of wellhead equipment and connections must not be exceeded while
pumping.
G. All chicsan joints and all connections must be tight and leak proof. If a leak
develops, the system (including lines and the hot oil unit) must be depressurized and
repairs made.
H. Cold oil shall be circulated through the heater coils before lighting the burner. This
is to ensure that oil is in the heat transfer tubes prior to heating. Cold oil shall be
pumped down the flowline or well before pumping hot oil. Light the burners and
visually check to see if they are burning properly.
I. When lighting the burners, a calibrated gas detector (if the device requires
calibration) must be used to detect explosive gas mixtures in the fire box. An
electronic ignition system, if installed, shall be used to place the operator as far away
from the fire box as possible. The operator shall stay or near the unit controls at all
times. Only necessary personnel shall be near pressurized lines, near lines with hot
fluids, or near the well head during hot oiling operations. Hot lines shall be
identified to all affected personnel.
J. The heater coils must be pressure tested to 750 psi annually.
K. Adjust packing glands on hot oil unit pumps to eliminate oil leaks which could allow
vapors to migrate into the burner box.
L. NO SMOKING signs must be installed on hot oil units and no-smoking rules
observed.
M. A portable 30# dry chemical fire extinguisher must be set off the truck and upwind
approximately 20 to 25 feet from the truck.
N. Hot oil operations must not commence until the operator is satisfied that safe
conditions exist. Leaks around and under the truck and along the line to the well
shall be prevented. An inspection shall be made after the first few minutes of
operation and periodically thereafter.
O. In the event of a fire, evacuate the work area.
III. References

Chapter 9, Hot Tapping Program
Chapter 9
Hot Tapping Program
I. General
A. Hot tapping is a technique used to attach connections to pipelines, vessels, or tanks

and involves cutting and welding on equipment which contains flammable or other
hazardous materials under pressure.
This program describes safe procedures that must be used in hot tapping operations.
Isolation, depressuring, inerting, etc. is required for safe work, as outlined in the
Lockout and Tagout Program and the Equipment Isolation and Blinding Program.
B. Operations center foremen are responsible for implementing and enforcing the Hot
Tapping Program. A Management of Change (MOC) must be completed in
accordance with Performance Unit policy before starting a hot tap.
C. Hot tapping operations are permitted only when all of the following conditions exist:
1. Continuity of service is essential.
2. Shutdown of the system is impractical or unsafe.
3. Documented procedures are followed.
4. Special equipment is used which will provide proven effective protection for
employees.
D. Hot tapping is not allowed on ASME coded pressure vessels.
E. The hot tap machine must be rated for the working temperature and pressure of the
material involved. The seals and materials of the machine must be compatible with
the contents of the line.
F. Before hot tapping is attempted, the machine, cutter, and pilot bit must be carefully
inspected by a qualified individual.
G. Vessels or lines to be hot tapped must be properly inspected for adequate wall
thickness and absent of imperfections/laminations.

H. The oxygen level in the equipment must be controlled to prevent formation of a

mixture in the flammable or explosive range.
I. Welders must be qualified in accordance with the applicable code and specification.
J. Personnel using hot tapping equipment shall be thoroughly familiar with the hot
tapping procedure and equipment.
K. Hot tapping closer than 18 inches to the flange or threaded connection, or 3 inches to
a welded seam, shall be avoided.
L. Hot tapping on tanks can only be performed at a minimum of 3 feet below the liquid
level. All valves on suction or discharge lines, agitators, and all other equipment
which can cause conditions inside the tank to change must be isolated by blinding or
energy isolation procedures before starting the procedure.
M. Work above or below grade must have easily accessible personnel exits. For
evacuations, refer to the Confined Space Entry Program and the Ground
Disturbance, Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring Program.
N. Welding cannot be performed on compressed air lines while air remains in the
lines/equipment. Such equipment may contain lube oil or other residue that may
ignite.
NOTE: Welding may be permitted with systems using noncombustible synthetic oil.
Cleaning or inerting is required.
O. Current engineering specifications (API and/or BP) shall be consulted and shall be in
full agreement with the procedure before starting.
P. Determine that the contents of the system will permit welding. Hot work on lines or
vessels containing hydrocarbon, corrosive or toxic materials, such as caustic soda,
sulfuric acid, ammonia, etc. shall be reviewed by a qualified engineer. Certain
materials may cause metallurgical changes in the heat-affected zone. Carbon steel,
for example, is changed metallurgically at elevated temperatures in the presence of
hydrogen, caustic or elemental sulfur. Some alloy steels and some thicknesses of
carbon steel require stress relieving, which normally cannot be done while the
equipment is pressured.
Q. Hot work on low temperature equipment (below 20 F) shall be reviewed, since

brittle fractures can occur in some steels at low temperatures.
II. Procedure

A. Before proceeding to hot tap, the following conditions must be satisfied:
1. The company representative must be present during the procedure and has been
given authority to oversee the project.
2. A copy of the completed MOC must be available for review.
3. The area must be clearly marked where the connection will be made.
4. The metal thickness must be measured and the absence of

imperfections/laminations verified.
5. Applicable permits (hot work, confined space entry, etc.) shall be issued; a fire
watch shall be assigned and appropriate rescue equipment available.
6. Signs and barricades must be provided to warn and isolate nonessential

personnel from the site.
7. Operations, field, and other affected personnel must be advised of the job and a
procedure of isolation and shutdown developed in case of line failure.
8. Misalignment of the hot tap machine must be prevented, to ensure that the
fitting is properly positioned and supported before welding.
9. The weld area shall be protected during cleaning, preparation and welding if
blowing dirt, snow, or rain is present.
10. Flame retardant clothing (per policy) shall be worn by all personnel involved.
11. A tailgate safety meeting must be held prior to commencing work to discuss
such things as the procedure, what to do in the event of an emergency, etc. A
Job Hazard Analysis must be completed.
B. The welding attachment must be inspected during and after welding and before the
hot tap machine is installed. Radiograph, dye penetrant, ultrasonic or magnetic
particle are recommended inspection methods.
C. The machine installation instructions of the manufacturer must be followed.

Additionally, check the following:
1. The hot tap valve must be properly sized, of appropriate metallurgy, and be a
full opening valve. It must be tested for seat leakage prior to installation.

2. The boring bar must be run through the valve opening to be sure the cutter does
not jam or drag.
3. The travel of the cutter must be calculated to ensure the tap can be completed
within the dimensional limits. Ensure the cut will be on the opposite side of the
tapped pipe, and the cutter can be retracted far enough to allow unimpeded
closure of the tapping valve.
4. Ensure the bleed-off valve will hold pressure and is not plugged. Also check to
see that precautions are taken for safe bleed-off and disposal of material
collected in the machine above the hot tap valve.
D. The welded attachment and hot tap machine must be tested before cutting is started.
1. Verify tightness of bolts, packing, packing nuts, and bypass line (if required) to
avoid possible leakage.
2. The new weld and hot tap machine shall be pressure tested simultaneously. The
test pressure shall be 110 percent of the current pressure of the line. (Not the
rated working pressure of the line as stated.)
Warning: If the line has a rated working pressure of 1440 PSI but has a
pressure of 500 PSI at the time of the pressure test, the test should be at 550
PSI NOT 1584 PSI. A test at 1584 PSI could collapse the line.
E. The manufacturers instructions must be followed when making the cut. If the blank
or coupon is lost, no attempt shall be made to search for it without isolating and
depressurizing the line per the energy isolation procedures and the Equipment
Isolation and Blinding Program.
III. References

1910.147.
B. American Petroleum Institute, API Publication 2201, In-Service Welding and Hot
Tapping.

NA GAS Onshore US Safety Practice Page 1 of 6

Document Title: Onshore US Hot Work Practice
Authority: NA Gas SPU HSSE Custodian: HSMS Technical Advisor

Director
Issue Date: December 13, 2001 Scope: NA Gas Onshore US
Revision November 22, 2004 Control Tier 2
Date: Tier:
Next Review November 30, 2006
Date:
1.0 Purpose/Scope
1.0 In designated areas, a hot work permit must be issued before the following are allowed: cutting, welding,
using non-explosion proof electrical equipment, opening energized explosion proof electrical equipment,
chipping, grinding, or other spark producing operations or other activities that may create an ignition source.
An Asset Designated Representative must issue the permit; he/she shall designate precautions to be followed
before granting authorization for hot work.
1.1 For example - Devices such as a flashlight, cell phone, Personal Digital Assistant, computer, pager, or
cameras that are not:
- Appropriately rated for use in areas designed under the API guidelines as Class I, Division 1 or 2
or
- Listed as intrinsically safe
are not allowed in Class 1 Division 1 or 2 locations without a hot work permit in effect.
2.0 Definitions
2.1 Asset Designated Representative: The individual responsible for ensuring that all hot work is
authorized and performed in accordance with this Practice and the requirements detailed on the Hot Work
Permit. This individual may be a BP employee or contractor. At a minimum this person must have
completed the following: BP Permit to Work training and training in atmospheric monitoring appropriate for
the device being used to complete the permit.
2.2 BP Accountable Party: The BP employee who must provide their personal approval of the hot work by
either signing the Hot Work Permit or by providing verbal approval to the Asset Designated Representative.
At a minimum, the BP Accountable Party must have completed BP Permit to Work Training.
2.3 Hot work: Any work that will generate sufficient heat to ignite combustible materials, liquids or vapors
and/or flammable liquids or vapors.
2.4 Combustible materials: Substances that are capable of igniting and burning and will freely support
combustion once ignited. Wood and paper are examples of such materials.
2.5 Flammable liquid or vapor: A liquid or vapor having a flash point below 100 F (37.8 C). Examples
include gasoline, methanol and toluene.
2.6 Fire Watch: A designated and trained person who observes hot work and monitors conditions to ensure
that a fire or explosion does not occur as a result of the work performed.

2.7 Combustible liquid or vapor: A liquid or vapor having a flash point at or above 100 F (37.8 C).
Examples include lubricating oils, many paints, and glycols.
2.8 Designated Areas: All well pads/well sites within the perimeter fencing of process facilities. (For
purposes of construction and fabrication, Asset Designated Representatives may designate specific areas
where hot work may be performed without a hot work permit. These areas will be a minimum of 35 feet from
a hydrocarbon containing line or vessel or areas that may contain a flammable environment, i.e. blow down
pits)
This definition also includes non-production related work environments such as office areas when
maintenance or construction activities are taking place. This practice does not apply to equipment
normally used in non-production areas such as computers, phones, coffee pots etc. Also exempt are
drilling rigs while they are performing well work.
2.9 JSA or JHA: Job Safety Analysis or Job Hazard Analysis
2.10 Hot oiling: Circulation of heated fluid, typically oil, to dissolve or dislodge paraffin deposits from the
production tubing or similar purposes. Such deposits tend to occur where a large variation in temperature
exists across the producing system. For the purposes of this Standard, hot oiling includes the treating or
circulating of a tank.

3.1 Assets shall develop specific procedures for vehicle entry into plants and field facilities.
3.2 The following activities are examples of hot work; specific locations may add additional activities based
on local conditions:
Welding
Flame cutting
Grinding
Portable heaters or steamers
Hot oiling (see the Hot Oiling chapter of the North America Gas Onshore US Safety Practice for
specific requirements)
Electrical tools/equipment (that are not explosion proof or intrinsically safe)
Sandblasting operations (static charges)
Some air equipment such as jackhammers, chippers or grinders

Asset Designated Representative This individual is responsible for evaluating the site, writing the permit,
testing the area and assuring the work is performed in accordance with the Hot Work Practice. Each
asset shall maintain a list of all qualified Asset Designated Representatives.
BP Accountable Party This individual is the single point of accountability for authorizing all activities
being performed under the authority of the Hot Work Permit. This employee must be a BP employee who
may provide permission for the work to take place either through signature on the permit or via verbal
approval to the Asset Designated Representative. If the approval is verbal the date and time must be entered
on the permit form next to their name in the approval box.

5.0 Procedure
5.1 Work Procedures
5.1.1 Authorization to perform hot work must be obtained from a BP Accountable Party.
5.1.2 The BP Accountable Party shall approve the hot work permit prior to the commencement of
hot work and must ensure that the Asset Designated Representative is trained in BP safety
policies and the use of the combustible gas meter.
5.1.3 The Asset Designated Representative must inform facility operators, and other affected
personnel, of the work that is going to be performed in their area. This notification can be
verbal.
5.1.4 The Asset Designated Representative must survey the area for cracks and/or openings in the
floor that may allow sparks to drop to lower levels. These cracks and/or holes must be
covered with a welding tarp or fire blanket, or protected by some comparable method.
5.1.5 All ducts and/or conveyor systems that may carry sparks outside the immediate work area
must be shut down, sealed, or covered.
5.1.6 All combustible materials on the floors, walls, or partition ceilings, or roofs that can be
moved shall be moved at least 35 feet away. When the combustible material cannot be
moved, all necessary precautions must be taken, such as covering it with fire protection
equipment, i.e., a welding tarp or fire blanket.
5.1.7 Checking, metering and testing that precedes issuance of a permit shall be as close as
practical to the time the work is to begin. The measured percent of the lower explosive
limit (LEL) shall be recorded on the permit. The work area shall be periodically rechecked
to ensure the conditions remain suitable for hot work. The work area shall also be
rechecked after any extended break in the job such as meals, coffee breaks, or meetings.
5.1.8 Continuous monitoring shall be provided in areas where changing conditions are likely and
in high risk areas such as in tanks or in the process areas of plants.
5.1.9 When testing for flammable gases, if the reading of the meter is above zero percent of the
lower explosive limit (LEL), the work must be conducted under the supervision of the
Asset Designated Representative.
5.1.10 No hot work shall begin or be conducted if a lower explosive limit greater than 10 percent
is measured. No exceptions to this rule shall be made.
5.1.11 When testing for flammable gases, the work must be conducted under the supervision of the
Asset Designated Representative.
5.1.12 If conditions change, so that hot work presents a potential danger, hot work operations shall
be suspended. Work shall not resume until the hazardous condition is eliminated and the
area is resurveyed and determined to be safe. Resurveyed results shall be indicated on the
existing hot work permit.
5.1.13 Calibration and verification of meters for combustible gas indicators must be performed
prior to use in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Calibration records
must be documented in a log, electronic file or database and must be readily available.

5.1.14 Individual assets will develop requirements for notifying the BP Accountable Party when
work has been completed.
5.1.15 Special consideration must be given to tanks that are being purged with an inert gas.
Combustible gas indicators and meters may not accurately measure the combustible gas in a
tank being purged with an inert gas, such as nitrogen. Consult your HSE representative to
determine if specialized monitoring equipment may be needed. Any hot work in a tank or
other confined space must also conform to the permit and work requirements of the
Onshore US Safety Practices, titled Confined Space Entry Program.
5.1.16 Hot oil operations must be conducted in accordance with the Onshore US BU Safety
Standard titled Hot Oiling. A hot work permit is required if the hot oil unit is located
closer than 35 feet from any combustible or flammable vapor source.
5.1.17 If work is not started within one hour of when the permit was issued or work has been
interrupted for two hours or more, the permit will be voided and a new one issued prior to
starting work.
5.1.18 Work shall not be started until the Asset Designated Representative and the BP
Accountable Party have completed their portions of the permit.
5.1.19 Should the job be interrupted or conditions change during the process of work, all work
must be stopped and reviewed to make certain it is safe to start again. Prior to restarting
work, the BP Accountable Party and the Asset Designated Representative must revalidate
the permit.
5.1.20 Upon completion of the work, the area must be cleaned up and restored to operational
condition.
5.1.21 Activation of facility operations alarms or any other warning alarms will void the permit.
5.1.22 Use of solely natural ventilation to mitigate LEL conditions is not an acceptable practice. In
these cases mechanical ventilation with fans, air movers or venturi devices must be used.
5.1.23 Motor vehicles may not be operated within ten (10) feet of hydrocarbon containing process
equipment and piping unless a hot work permit has been issued.
The above requirement does not apply to:
Refueling operations
Buried equipment
Additional site-specific exceptions to this work Practice may only be allowed by utilizing the
Management Of Change (MOC) process.
5.2 Hot Work Permit
5.2.1 The Asset Designated Representative shall document the following information as a minimum on
the permit:
Date and expiration time

Location of hot work

Object on which hot work is to be performed
All required fire prevention and protection requirements (as detailed in this chapter)
Fire watch name and requirements (See section 5.3 for specific fire watch requirements)
Any Verbal notifications made
Monitoring or survey results
Frequency of re-testing and results of each test
Completion of a Job Safety Analysis or Job Hazard Analysis
Required signatures for authorization of hot work
Post-work surveys or reactivation of fire protection systems and permit closeout signature, and
Serial number of gas detector/meter used to perform atmospheric test.
5.2.2 The permit must be reviewed and signed by the Asset Designated Representative and documented by
the person performing the work. If hot work is taking place inside a confined space the Safety
Specialist or their designated representative for the area must also sign the permit. If more than one
person is performing hot work under a single permit, then a team leader or crew representative may
sign the permit for the entire crew. This person must ensure and document that the entire crew is
informed of all details of the permit during the Job Safety Analysis or Job Hazard Analysis.
Some facilities may also require the signature of a control room operator, local area operator or other
affected individuals. These requirements will be identified at the specific asset where they are
required.
5.2.3 A copy of the signed permit shall be retained at the job site for the duration of the hot work.
5.2.4 Permits will not be valid for shifts other than the one in which the work started.
5.2.5 As a minimum, the current months plus one prior months expired hot work permits shall be
retained on file at the facility.
5.2.6 In the event the hot work will extend past the permits expiration time, a new permit must be
obtained.
5.3 Fire Watch
5.3.1 The Asset Designated Representative will determine if a fire watch is needed.
5.3.2 If required, the fire watch shall:
Be familiar with facilities for sounding an alarm in the event of a fire,

Watch for fires in all exposed areas, try to extinguish them only when obviously within the
capacity of the equipment available, or otherwise sound the alarm,
Be trained in the proper use of a fire extinguisher,
Understand the location and nature of the hot work,
Survey the area to be sure the necessary fire protection equipment is in place and ready for
use,
Survey the area for combustible and flammable materials, including vapors and liquids.
Remain in the area while the work is being performed, keeping the hot work in his/her line of
sight at all times
Remain in constant communication range with person(s) doing the hot work
Stop the work whenever he/she feels the conditions are unsafe, and
Have no duties other than fire watch.
5.3.3 When bulkheads or walls are involved in hot work, both sides require a fire watch. Caution must be
used so that heat transmission through the steel members or pipe does not cause a hazard.

5.3.3 A fire watch should be maintained for at least a half hour after completion of welding or cutting
operations to detect and extinguish possible smoldering fires.
5.4 Pre-Job Hazard Assessment
5.4.1 A pre-job meeting, tailgate meeting, Job Safety Analysis, Job Hazard Analysis JHA, or similar
review shall be conducted for hot work and shall be conducted prior to starting work. This is a
requirement of BPs Golden Rules of Safety.
5.4.2 The review will cover the following topics where applicable:
Hot work permit and gas testing/monitoring requirements,

Potential for changing conditions,
Appropriate emergency procedures and notifications,
Ensure the area is free of nonessential personnel, equipment, and vehicles,
The use of personal protective equipment,
The authority and responsibility of a fire watch,
Blinding, isolation, and purging of equipment, and
Ensure that at least two escape routes with easy access are provided if hot work is being conducted
in a bell hole or ditch. A second escape route must also be provided, if possible, when conducting
hot work in a tank or vessel.
6.1 North America Gas Onshore US Safety Practice Document Control and Revision Log
6.2 American Petroleum Institute, RP 500.
6.3 National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 51B Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting,
and Other Hot Work.
6.4 National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
6.5 Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR 1910.119 (k) and 252 (a).
6.6 BPs Golden Rules of Safety
6.9 gHSEr Element # 8, Information and Documentation.
Revision Log
11/22/2004 Duane Kortsha Mike Langley LEL greater than 0% requirement requires
designated representative to be on site.
Clarity provided around conditions under which a
non-BP employee can initiate Hot Work
Revision of the Hot Work Permit with the
requirement that the items on the permit must be
addressed prior to beginning hot work.

Hot Work Permit
Permit Originator/Company: Phone/Pager#
Date: Start Time: Permit Expires:
Location: Number of Workers:

BP Accountable Party: Tools Used:
Job Site Inspection and Communication

Work Description:
Fire Watch Required? Yes No Fire Watch Name:
Fire Extinguisher? Yes No Energy Isolation Complete? Yes No N/A

Could work cause remote Yes No Have remote alarms been disabled? Yes No N/A
alarm or shutdown?
IsAuthorized Asset Yes No Have combustible materials been Yes No N/A
Representative familure with removed or protected?
the BP Hot Work Practice?
Time % LEL Initial Special Precautions:

Gas Tests
Serial # of monitor: Calibration Date: Bump Test Date:
Permit Authorization
BP Accountable Party (BP Employee Only): Phone/Pager#
Asset Designated Representative (BP or Contractor): Phone/Pager#
Individual(s) performing work:
Safety Specialist (required when Hot Work takes place inside a confined space):
Permit Close Out

Job Completed? Yes No Work Area Clean? Yes No
Signature of person performing work: Date/Time:
Have by-passed systems been returned to normal?

Section 2, Regulated Materials
Chapter 1, Hydrogen Sulfide
Chapter 1
Hydrogen Sulfide
I. General
A. Each operating location where employee exposures to hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas
may exceed 10 parts per million by volume (ppm) in air shall have a written H2S
safety program to govern company activities that may expose personnel to H2S.
This program will satisfy that requirement if all provisions set forth below are met.
Any site specific procedures developed for a location in addition to this program
must be as stringent as those outlined herein and established in writing.
B. Each operating location that is considered "sour" as described above shall comply
with all aspects of governmental regulations (OSHA) and company policy regarding
operations where H2S may be present. The safety engineer will coordinate this
program. Operating supervisors are responsible for implementation and
enforcement.
C. No person shall enter an area where H2S concentrations are known or suspected to
be greater than ten (10) parts per million (ppm) by volume in air in the employees
breathing zone without wearing proper supplied air respiratory protective equipment.
(See Respiratory Protection chapter of this Standard for personnel and equipment
requirements.)
D. All contract personnel shall be required to comply with the same H2S safety
requirements as do company personnel.
II. Training Requirements
A. A safety training program shall be given to all personnel who may be required to
work in a known or suspected H2S environment. This training must be given prior
to working in an H2S environment. The following areas must be covered in the
program.
Hazards, properties and characteristics of H2S and sulfur dioxide (SO2) gases.
Sources of H2S and SO2.
Use of H2S detection devices.
Description of H2S and/or SO2 detection systems used at the workplace.
Symptoms of exposure.
Use and limitations of respiratory protection equipment. (Hands-on training is essential).
First aid procedures and equipment including location of safety equipment.

Use of the "buddy system" and emergency rescue procedures.

Wind direction awareness and routes of egress (exits).
Confined space and enclosed space entry procedures.
Contingency plans including gauging procedures.
BP policy and procedures for H2S locations. This should include a discussion of
workplace practices and relevant maintenance procedures established to protect
personnel.
B. All personnel who work in or may be required to work in an H2S area (employees
and contractors) shall complete a refresher course in H2S safety annually.
C. All training shall be documented. Contractors shall document and provide

verification of such training of their employees upon request.
III. Hydrogen Sulfide Respiratory Protective Equipment
A. Only positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or positive

pressure air line units with an escape unit will be used in any known or suspected
H2S environment of 10 ppm or greater in the breathing area. The use of canister
type gas masks for protection against H2S is prohibited in BP operations.
B. Only positive pressure SCBA or positive pressure air line respirators with an
emergency egress bottle shall be used when an employee is exposed to hydrogen
sulfide (H2S), oxygen deficient atmospheres, or atmospheres designated as
immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH). The safety engineer shall be
consulted if there are questions as to when or what type respiratory protective
equipment is necessary.
C. All SCBA and supplied air face pieces shall be fitted with a nose cup where
temperatures may drop below 32 F.
IV. Atmospheric Testing and General Sign Requirements
A. H2S concentrations are to be measured level with the thief hatch on all sour crude,
condensate, molten sulfur trailers or railroad tank cars and produced water tanks
where there is potential for employee exposure. H2S concentration measurements
for areas other than tank openings can be performed in the breathing zone. A
standby person is required when performing initial H2S concentration testing of
areas known or suspected to have H2S.
B. All field locations, plants, and production facilities that present potential H2S
exposures shall be so designated at all of their access points with danger signs that
warn personnel of potential H2S exposures. Additional signs may be posted as
appropriate.

C. Locations with limited public road access may use one H2S sign at each given
access point to a group of well locations rather that at each well.
V. Specific Work Procedures
A. No tank, line, valve, flange, etc. which may create a H2S concentration of 10 ppm or
greater in the employees breathing zone shall be opened to the atmosphere unless
proper respiratory protection is worn by personnel performing the job.
B. When possible, equipment that contains H2S should be depressured, isolated and
purged/cleaned before opening.
C. After opening equipment to atmosphere, the atmosphere inside the equipment shall
be sampled to determine the H2S level. Respiratory protection must be worn when
opening the equipment to atmosphere and during testing. If concentrations exceed
10 ppm in the breathing zone, respiratory protection must be worn for the duration of
the job or until the H2S level drops below 10 ppm.
D. Personal monitoring equipment shall be used by personnel working without

respiratory equipment where there is a probability that H2S levels may exceed 10
ppm in the breathing zone, i.e. catwalks at sour tanks, water stations and header
buildings where dissolved H2S in the water may create airborne levels in excess of
10 ppm. Operations supervision will determine where such probabilities might
occur in a given facility. Personal monitoring devices must be set to low alarm at 10
ppm so the employee is alerted to vacate the area to get respiratory equipment. If the
area is equipped with a fixed detection system then personal monitoring devices are
optional. These devices shall be calibrated per the manufacturers specifications.
E. A standby person is required when employees may be exposed to 100 ppm H2S in
their breathing zone during the course of their work in operations. OSHA equates
the breathing zone as being level with the thief hatch for tank gauging operations.
The standby person must be equipped with a SCBA and must wear the SCBA if the
potential exists for his exposure to exceed 10 ppm H2S.
F. Relief valves venting dangerous concentrations of (greater than or equal to 100 ppm)
H2S vapors must be vented to flare or where personnel will not be exposed.
G. Sour gas wells shall not be left unattended during blow-down.
VI. H2S Emergencies

A. Personnel responsibilities during an H2S alarm or emergency shall be established in

writing by each operating location. These responsibilities include, but are not
limited to, accounting for personnel, securing the area, and isolating the leak.
B. Field personnel will not respond to an H2S alarm/leak alone. The buddy system
must always be used in response to alarm situations.
C. The supervisor initiating the call out or supervisors in charge of persons subject to
call out, must comply with this requirement.
D. All personnel shall be trained in their responsibilities regarding H2S alarms or

emergencies. Training shall be documented. This training may coincide with annual
H2S training.
E. Contractors and visitors shall be informed of their responsibilities during an H2S

alarm before they begin work on any potential H2S location. Unless otherwise
defined, their responsibilities shall be to evacuate the area and report to a safe
briefing area immediately.
F. Safe briefing areas shall be established for all manned H2S locations. Safe briefing
areas shall be designated by conspicuous signs.
G. The supervisor in charge or the ranking employee on-site has the authority to decide
whether an H2S leak is to be ignited. Note: Some state law enforcement agencies
have jurisdiction on deciding whether or not to ignite an H2S leak.
VII. H2S Detection Equipment
A. Fixed H2S detection systems shall be considered for areas that may experience H2S
leaks where personnel are present on a daily basis or where the locations are near
residences or other public buildings. The system shall activate a distinctive alarm
that is consistent throughout the facility. Detection systems shall be installed and
maintained according to the requirements of the Flammable and Combustible Gas
Monitors, Use and Calibration chapter of this Standard.
B. All H2S alarms shall be treated as an actual gas release.
C. Hand held detection instruments shall be utilized for spot checking areas. All
electronic hand held instruments shall be calibrated per the manufacturer's
specifications.

VIII. Safe Operating Procedures for Tank Gauging
A. Equipment Requirements and Testing
1. Respiratory protective equipment shall be worn by all employees during tank

gauging operations when hydrogen sulfide concentrations in the breathing zone
are equal to or greater than 10 ppm. Local exhaust ventilation may be used in lieu
of respiratory protective equipment if it is capable of reducing the hydrogen
sulfide concentrations in the employees breathing zone to less than 10 ppm.
2. Positive pressure supplied air line respirator equipped with a five minute escape
pack, or a positive pressure SCBA shall be used by personnel gauging tanks.
3. When concentrations measured level with the thief hatch exceed 100 ppm of
hydrogen sulfide, or when performing other functions that equal or exceed 100
ppm in the breathing zone, the use of a standby person shall be required. This
standby person is required at all times, including call outs, when an employee's
exposure may equal or exceed 100 ppm H2S. The standby person must have a
positive pressure SCBA immediately available on the work site so he/she may
perform as a rescuer.
4. Tests may be done using hand held pumps and detector tubes or equivalent
approved electronic testers. Consult the safety engineer for testing equipment
requirements. Preferably, sampling of thief hatches shall be done during the
warmer months to determine the worst-case potential worker exposure.
Monitoring to determine H2S concentrations in the breathing zone must meet
accepted industrial hygiene practices. Consult a safety engineer for acceptable
practices.
B. Safety Sign Requirements
1. Safety signs shall be installed at the base of tank stairs indicating the presence of
H2S. These signs shall comply with the requirements of the Safety Signs and
Color Coding chapter of this Standard.
2. Those central tank batteries (CTB) that have various hydrogen sulfide
concentration levels in the tank must be properly identified on the individual tank
or with the appropriate warning sign installed at the base of the stairs. If a
standby man is necessary, this should be stated on the sign.
C. Additional Facility Guidelines - Sour Tank Batteries

1. At all tank battery locations where concentrations of hydrogen sulfide gas level
with the thief hatch can exceed 10 ppm (100 ppm level with the thief hatch), a
windsock or similar wind direction indicator shall be installed.
2. These wind indicators shall be so installed as to give an accurate indication of

wind direction at the height gauging operations will be performed.
IX. H2S Testing Requirements for Production Tanks
A. Production tanks are defined as all tanks that are used in storing, shipping, or holding
produced fluids. Produced fluids are oil, condensate, and water, or any combination
thereof. These tanks include but are not limited to production, shipping, slop,
recycle or pop tanks. Production tanks do not include process vessels, towers,
columns, or bullets.
B. All production tanks in areas known or suspected to have H2S contaminated

production must be tested initially to determine the H2S levels. A standby person is
required when performing initial H2S concentration testing of areas known or
suspected to have H2S. Documentation of previous tests will satisfy the initial
testing requirement.
C. All samples shall be taken level with the thief hatch or in the vapor space.
D. After the initial tests in areas known or suspected to have H2S contaminated
production, the following schedule shall be followed as a minimum for retesting:
Initial H2S Concentration Testing Schedule

Equal to or less than 10 ppm in the breathing Every 7 years.
zone.
Any change in the process which might cause Retest as soon as circumstances warrant.
or increase the generation of H2S.
Greater than 10 ppm * To be established by the Operations Center
foreman in consultation with the safety
engineer.
* The primary justification to retest a tank having measurements above 10 ppm in the breathing
zone is to determine if a standby person is necessary.
X. References
A. Facility PPE Hazard Assessment, 29CFR 1910,119.

B. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists: Threshold Limit Values for
Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices. ACGIH,
Cincinnati, OH (1996).

C. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health: NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical
Hazards. DHHS (NIOSH) Pub. No. 94-116. NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH (1997).
D. Occupational Health and Safety Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR 1910.134,

1910.1000.
E. American Petroleum Institute, RP 55.
F. American National Standards Institute, 286-1-1973 and 237.2-1972.
G. gHSEr Element # 3, People, Training, and Behaviors.
H. gHSEr Element # 1, Leadership and Accountability.

OUSBU Safety Standard Page 1 of 4

Section 1 Chapter 11 - Incident Management Planning

1.0 Purpose/Scope
Emergency preparedness and response planning is an integral factor in ensuring employees
health and safety, protecting the environment, public safety, and company assets. History has
shown that companies, which anticipate hazards and regularly exercise a plan for dealing with
them, perform at a higher level and are more successful in mitigating the emergency.
2.0 Definitions
No definitions specified.
This Standard shall be used to assist locations in the formulation of specific emergency
preparedness plans; generic checklists are provided as guidelines. Comprehensive planning and
exercise guidebooks are available from the Houston Crisis Center (HCC). The HCC is available to
assist with development and revision of IMPs.

4.1 The operating supervisor, HSE representative, and environmental coordinator shall
coordinate the preparation and implementation of Incident Management Plans (IMPs) where
needed for each facility.
4.2 The Incident Commander and the Business Crisis Manager will determine if a situation is to
be defined as a crisis calling for activation of the Houston Region Business Crisis Team
(BCT) and implementation of the Houston Region Business Crisis Plan.
4.3 The operating supervisor at each facility is responsible for initiating periodic drills to assure
understanding and provide evaluation of the plans effectiveness.
5.0 Process
The content of the procedure (how we are doing it). When using this template, identify if the
document is a procedure or a process and select accordingly. The document should not read 5.0
Procedure/Process in this section.
5.1 Procedural Requirements
5.1.1 The IMP shall be prepared with the thought that the facility may have to handle the
emergency alone. Mutual aid is of great benefit, but it may not be available when needed.

5.1.2 The framework of the emergency organization shall be based on the Incident Command
Structure utilizing available personnel from existing departments and functions.
5.1.3 Each operations center or facility should have a trained individual or individuals
responsible for making statements to the public. These individuals will follow the guidelines
as established in the BP Media Relations Guide as published by the Government and Public
Affairs group, and the Houston Region Business Crisis Plan.
5.1.4 Each location must maintain an IMP for use and implementation in case of an
emergency. All BP and contractor personnel must be trained as applicable in the facilitys
IMP.
5.1.5 It is recommended that the BU conduct a minimum of one major drill (BCT activation) in
conjunction with the HCC annually. Each Asset will schedule a minimum of one drill
annually (Incident Management Team and/or Tactical Response Team activation) and specify
additional frequencies and specific drill focus areas in their IMPs along with posting on the
HCC and/or BU websites. (Please note that tabletop exercises or responses to actual incidents
could be used to satisfy this requirement. Drills with an environmental component are
encouraged).
5.1.6 Facilities covered under OSHA 1910.119 (n) must include procedures in their plan for
handling small releases.
5.1.7 Each location having an IMP must ensure that the IMP links into or takes into
consideration other applicable plans affecting the facility, (i.e. Risk Management Plans, H2S
Contingency Plans, other applicable regulatory plans).
5.2 Guidelines and Strategies
5.2.1 Incident Management Plans (IMP) must be clear, concise, well organized, and
maintained in a current state of readiness to maximize potential benefits. IMPs should be
reviewed and updated annually.
5.2.2 One key to effective and efficient emergency/contingency planning is to conduct

appropriate risk assessments to identify those critical few or worst case scenarios which
could have the greatest potential for loss. This will ensure that the plans themselves, along
with the preparations enable responders to meet the challenge.
5.2.3 Each operation shall coordinate the preparation and implementation of Incident
Management Plans containing:
Emergency notification and actions of key personnel

Emergency response and evaluation
Emergency contact lists
Response equipment lists
Physical location details
Response plan training requirements
Public and media relations
5.2.4 The following generic analysis checklist will help locations strengthen or develop their
own preparedness/planning for emergency situations. Generic Analysis Categories are:

Organization and resources

Risk evaluation and analysis
Notification procedures and communication systems
Emergency equipment and facilities
Assessment of capabilities
Contingency/emergency preparedness
Simulations and tests
5.3 Mutual Aid Agreements and Plans
5.3.1 It is advantageous for each location to define and implement their own mutual aid
agreements and plans, if the situation exists. Key results of obtaining mutual aid agreements
are:
To develop a communications system and procedure to alert the mutual aid partners of
the undesired event.
To identify the responsibilities and capabilities of each mutual aid partner.
To review the plan with mutual aid agencies to ensure compliance through
understanding.
To conduct simulations of potential emergency scenarios to assess strengths and

weaknesses of the plan and associated activities. Simulations also serve to familiarize
participants with pertinent procedures and activities.
5.3.2 The following Implementation Steps can lead to a useful, effective and integrated mutual
aid plan. Some potential mutual aid partners will have emergency plans in place and it will
require little effort to complete some of these steps. In those cases, a review of their plan
associated with each step is necessary to assure that it is complete and usable. For example, a
well-written plan may exist, but training may be weak or there may be no provision for
testing the plan. In other cases, significant effort will be required to complete each step.
Mutual Aid Implementation steps are:
Identify mutual aid partners and establish their roles, resources, concerns and
relationships.
Establish a coordinating group.
Evaluate risks and hazards that may result in the need for a coordinated response.
Have participants review their own emergency/contingency plan for adequacy relative to
a coordinated response.
Identify the required response tasks, which are currently not covered by existing plans.
Match the tasks with the resources available from identified mutual aid partners.
Make changes necessary to improve existing plans, integrate them into overall mutual aid
plan, and gain agreement and necessary approvals.

Educate participating individuals and groups about the integrated plan and assure that all
mutual aid responders are qualified.
Establish procedures for annual testing, review and updating of the plan.
Educate the general community about the integrated mutual aid plan and the local
emergency planning committee (LEPC).
5.4 Plan Development
The HCC shall be contacted for assistance when developing IMP.
6.1 Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR 1910.38,
1910.119, 1910.120 and 1910.165.
6.2 BP Incident Command System (Incident Management System Volume 1).
6.3 gHSEr Element # 11, Crisis and Emergency Management. (Key process 4)
6.4 Environmental Management System (Endicott Corporate Compliance Committee). (ISO

14001 Emergency Preparedness 4.4.7)

Page 1 of 7

Document Title: Initial Internal Incident Reporting, Investigation and
Tracking
Authority: SPU HSSE Director Custodian: HSMS Technical Advisor
Issue Date: 11/15/2001 Scope of Application: NA GAS SPU
1.0 Purpose/Scope
This Practice describes the minimum internal BP reporting requirements for HSSE incidents in the E&P Segment
North American Gas Strategic Performance Unit (NA Gas SPU). Guidelines for investigating, tracking and sharing
the lessons learned from these incidents are also described. This Practice defines requirements beyond any external
reporting required by Federal, State or local law or regulations
2.0 Definitions
Action Level An unprotected exposure at one-half of the occupational exposure limit (OSHA Permissible
Exposure Limit, unless otherwise specified in a SPU or BU Safety Practice) for specific chemical, biological or
physical agents
Atmospheric chemical releases: Any unplanned or accidental release from primary containment of any pure
chemical, chemical mixture or compound in a gaseous state for which an MSDS is required or for which an agency
reporting requirement exits.
Comprehensive Environmental Response Comprehensive and Liability Act (CERRCLA) or Superfund
Amendment and Reauthorization Act (SARA) Reportable Release: A substance release from primary
containment in a volume that exceeds Reportable Quantity (RQ) as defined by CERCLA or SARA, including
gaseous, liquid or solid substances. Not all Chemical releases that exceed RQ are CERCLA or SARA Reportable.
Non-CERCLA or Non-SARA Reportable Release: Any substance release from primary containment in a volume
that exceeds a regulatory Reportable Quantity (RQ), including gaseous, liquid or solid substances. If a release has
been reported under the definition CERCLA or SARA Reportable Release it is not subject to this definition.
DOT Incident: An incident on a DOT pipeline or facility that is reportable pursuant to DOT reporting
requirements. Under the DOT requirements, incident means an event that involves a release of gas from a
pipeline and a death, or personal injury necessitating in patient hospitalization; or estimated property damage,
including cost of gas lost, of the operator, or others, or both, of $50,000 or more; or an event that is significant, in
the judgment of the operator, even though it did not meet these requirements. (DOT 49CFR 191.3 and 191.5)
Failure of an engineered system: Any failure of mechanical, electrical, structural, process or lifting systems where
actual/potential for harm to people or the environment exists.
Fatality (workforce): Any fatality that the answer to all of the three questions below is yes. If any of the answers
below are no, the fatality is classified as non-workforce. For either classification, reporting requirements exists,
which are summarized in the attached Initial Internal Incident Notification and Reporting Table.
1. Was the incident associated with BP activity? BP activities are any operation or other activities that are by,
for or on the behalf of BP or one of its associated companies (including joint ventures).
2. Was the deceased a member of the BP workforce? Every direct employee of BP plus joint ventures where
BP ownership is greater than 40%, or when BP either has operational control or is deemed to be the
Operator and every employee of every other company that has been engaged to perform direct work on BP
premises directly on behalf of BP, or to transport our people and/or materials.
Document Number: K0000000417 Revision Date 06/20/2005
HSSE Initial Internal Incident Reporting, Investigation and Tracking Practice Page 2 of 7
3. Was the incident work-related? BP uses the definition in the OSHA injury and illness reporting
regulations.
Fire and explosions: Any unplanned incident involving BP property, equipment or operations that results in a
combustion resulting in a fire or explosion.
First Aid: A treatment for a work related injury or illness that does not ordinarily require medical care, regardless
of who provides treatment. OSHA considers only the following types of treatments as first aid cases (any other type
of treatment is to be considered a Recordable Incident): 1) Using a nonprescription medication at non prescription
strength ; 2) tetanus shots; 3) cleaning flushing or soaking wounds on the surface of the skin; 4) Using wound
coverings such as bandages, butterfly bandages and steri-strips; 5) hot/cold therapy; 6) non-rigid support; 7)
temporary immobilization devices while transporting; 8) drilling of nail; 9) eye patches; 10) removing foreign
bodies from eye by using only irrigation and cotton swab; 11) removing splinter from other than eye by irrigation,
tweezers or other simple means; 12) finger guards; 13) massages; 14) drinking fluids for relief of heat stress.
High Potential Incident (HIPOs) An incident or near miss, including a security incident, where the most serious
probable outcome is a Major Incident.
Integrity Management Incident (IM): Any uncontrolled gas release; any uncontrolled liquid release, including
liquid hydrocarbons both crude and refined, produced or injected water (including salt water disposal outages), and
process chemicals, greater than or equal to 1 barrel in volume; and any failure of an engineered system. (See
Uncontrolled Release definition below)
Major Incident (MIA): An incident, including a security incident, involving any one of the following:
A fatality associated with BP operations; or third party fatality as defined below.
Multiple serious injuries
Significant adverse reaction from authorities, media, NGOs, or general public.
Cost of accidental damage or security event > $500,000
Oil spill from primary containment > 100 bbls, or less if at a sensitive location
Release of more than 10 tons of a classified chemical (regulated chemical or waste)
Near Hit/Miss: A Near Hit is an undesired event that, under slightly different circumstances, could have resulted
in harm to people, damage to environment or property, or loss to process.
No Treatment: An injury or illness of such a minor nature that no treatment is necessary, not even first aid.
Examples might be minor scratches, bumps, or bruises, visit to a physician solely for observation, diagnostic
procedures.
Notice of Violation or Enforcement Action Notice (NOV): Any written enforcement action (e.g. compliance
notice, compliance order, notice of noncompliance, citation, fine or penalty, notice of violation, etc) issued against
any BP operation. This may include health, safety, or environmental violations or notices, but does not include
minor deficiencies such as no location signs.
Notifiable Release - incidents being reported that are also reportable to an external agency must have the notifiable
release box checked yes
OSHA Data Request A data request from OSHA resulting from a complaint or potential/actual occupational
exposure.
Occupational Exposure contact with a chemical, biological or physical agent that occurs during the course of
employment
OSHA Recordable Incident (RI): Any work related injury or illness that results in death, days away from work,
restricted work, transfer to another job, medical treatment (except first aid), loss of consciousness, or significant
injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional.

Document Number: K0000000417 Revision Date: 06/20/05
Days Away From Work Case (DAFWC): Any work-related injury or illness where the employee could
not have worked on any day after the injury or illness, irrespective of whether there was scheduled work,
or when a physician or other licensed health care professional recommends that the worker stay at home
but the employee comes to work anyway. Each full calendar day is counted, not including the day of
injury, even if the employee was not scheduled to work that day (including weekends and holidays).
Restricted Work: Any work-related injury or illness as a result of which (1) you keep the employee from
performing one or more of the routine functions of his or her job, or from working the full workday that he
or she would otherwise have been scheduled to work; or (2) a physician or other licensed health care
professional recommends that the employee not perform one or more of the routine functions of his or her
job, or not work the full workday that he or she would otherwise have been scheduled to work.
Medical Treatment: Treatment for a work-related injury or illness beyond first aid, regardless of who
provides treatment. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even though provided by a
physician or registered professional personnel, observation, counseling, or diagnostic procedures.
Occupational Illness: Any abnormal condition or disorder, other than one resulting from an occupational
injury, caused by exposure to environmental factors associated with employment. It includes acute and
chronic illnesses or diseases, which may be caused by inhalation, absorption, ingestion or direct contact.
Process Safety Management (PSM) Incident: An event, or series of events, that results in, or could have
reasonably resulted in, a catastrophic release of the process fluid from the equipment within a PSM-covered process.
Security Incident: An incident involving terrorist activity, or theft of company, personal, or Business Partner
(contractor) property or information, burglary, robbery, assault, arson, information loss, threats, alcohol or drugs,
firearms, fraud, or other violation of company policy that warrants notification of Management Team.
Serious Occurrence Report (SOR): Any near hit or potential hazard incident that does not become classified as a
MIA or HIPO, but based upon the professional judgment of line or HSSE personnel, is worth sharing across the
BU. Any hydrocarbon spill of 10 bbl or greater unrecovered volume outside of secondary containment that is not
reported as an MIA. Any Produced Water spill of 50 bbls or greater unrecovered volume outside of secondary
containment. Finally, where the persons involved decide that there is some lesson, information, or uniqueness about
a spill that should be shared across the BU and might prevent future spills.
Spills: The unplanned or accidental loss of primary containment from any operation owned or operated by BP or
managed by a contractor on behalf of BP, irrespective of any secondary containment or recovery. Any material
release from primary containment that reaches ground and/or water is a spill and shall be reported.
Oil, Condensate, Produced Water Spill: An oil, condensate, or produced water spill is defined as a
release from primary containment of any form of oil, condensate, or produced water. Oil is defined as
crude oil, lubricating oils, hydraulic oil, gasoline and diesel fuels, aviation fuel, kerosene, and any other
products refined from crude oil. Synthetic lube oils are included.
Chemical Spill: A chemical spill is defined as a release from primary containment of any pure chemical,
chemical mixture or compound (excluding gaseous releases to the atmosphere) for which an MSDS is
required or for which an agency-reporting requirement exists.
Transportation/Maritime Incident: Any incident involving air transportation, and/or water/sea based vessels
where BP workforce or BP property / equipment are involved.
Uncontrolled Release An uncontrolled event where hydrocarbons or chemicals are released in any form (e.g. gas,
liquid or solid) from primary containment and which results in the need for immediate corrective action (e.g.
shutdown, evacuation or isolation) to mitigate the effects of loss of containment.
Vehicle Incidents: Any unplanned incident involving:
All Motor Vehicles includes heavy vehicles (3.5 tonnes and heavier), light vehicles (under 3.5 tonnes),
self-propelled mobile plant. This includes accidents when using a hire/rental vehicle on company business,
or when using a private vehicle on company business for which a member of the workforce is reimbursed.

o Serious Vehicle Accident (SVA) A vehicle accident involving one of the following will be
classified as a SVA:
> $10,000 damage, or
Involving a recordable injury, or
Vehicle rollover, or
Resulting in a BP work force or third party vehicle that cannot be driven from the scene
Workforce all employees and contractor personnel (including sub-contractors).
Work Related Kilometers the number of kilometers driven during work related activities (excludes
kilometers driven between a drivers normal place of work and home). This includes all work related
kilometers driven in hire/rental vehicles, or private vehicles (see all motor vehicles definition above).
Motor Vehicle Accident an accident involving a motor vehicle resulting in injury, or loss/damage, or
harm to the environment, whether this impacts BP and/or its contractors directly, or impacts a third party.
This is irrespective of whether the accident was preventable or non preventable.
o It excludes all accidents where:
o The BP workforce vehicle was legally parked
o The journey is to or from the drivers normal place of work
o Minor wear and tear is the case (e.g. stone damage to a windscreen, minor paintwork damage)
o An incident is the result of vandalism, or theft
o A company provided vehicle is being driven on non work related activities (e.g. private business,
leisure)
3.0 General Requirements Reporting and Distribution

Templates:
MIA Announcement http://ousbuhse.testweb.bp.com/Newfor2003/Forms/Forms/ousbu_forms.htm
HiPo Announcement http://ousbuhse.testweb.bp.com/Newfor2003/Forms/Forms/ousbu_forms.htm
Lessons Learned Reports Template -
http://ousbuhse.testweb.bp.com/Newfor2003/Forms/Forms/ousbu_forms.htm
Distribution:
Distribution of NA Gas SPU HIPO and MIA announcements and Lessons Learned is via e-mail to: G
MOR HIPO E&P and G MOR MIA E&P, G NAG SPU ELT, G NAG SPU OCM, G NAG Asset Mgrs, G
NAG Wells LT, G NAG HSE Operations, G NAG HSSE Field and G NAG Health & Safety Team- All.
Distribution of outside HiPo and MIA Announcements and Lessons Learned is distributed internally by
HSSE Director if applicable via e-mail to: G NAG SPU ELT, G NAG SPU OCM, G NAG Asset Mgrs, G
NAG Wells LT, G NAG HSE Operations, G NAG HSSE Field and G NAG Health & Safety Team- All.
4.1 All BP employees and contractors

Responsible for reporting all HSSE incidents and if assigned the responsibility, ensuring appropriate data
input in Tr@ction per Tr@ction Guidelines, including incident classification/data changes.
Responsible to actively participate in the investigation as requested.

4.2 HSSE Team Leaders

Responsible for reviewing lessons learned and announcement draft reports.
Responsible for ensuring announcements and lessons learned from incidents occurring in the NA Gas SPU
are communicated within the NA Gas SPU and to Group.
4.3 NA Gas SPU HSSE Director

Responsible for ensuring announcements and lessons learned from incidents occurring outside the NA Gas
SPU are shared across the NA Gas SPU as appropriate.
4.4 Operational Department Heads and Supervisors

Responsible for ensuring data entered in Tr@ction are timely and accurate with assistance from Field
HSSE staff.
Responsible for ensuring that actions resulting from investigations to prevent future occurrences are
followed to completion.
Responsible for considering the application of lessons learned from other areas to their own operations.
4.5 NA Gas SPU HSSE Techs

Responsible for reporting on database quality assurance/quality control.
Responsible for ensuring that incident data are trended and analyzed.
Responsible for tracking incidents at the NA Gas SPU level for the HSSE scorecard and for maintaining
this document.
5.1 Incident Reporting and Tracking

Incidents, OSHA data requested and occupational exposures above the action level will be reported to the
appropriate NA Gas SPU staff according to Table 1.0. Reporting accountabilities are defined NA Gas SPU
reporting RACI. Although not required until the BST is activated, Government and Public Affairs and/or
Legal may be notified at managements discretion at this initial notification stage
Initial Tr@ction reports must be input and approved for all incidents listed in Table 1.0 within 48 hours
(excluding weekends and holidays) and according to the NA Gas SPU Tr@ction Reporting Quick Guide.
Corrective actions entered into Tr@ction must be followed through to closure. All Hydrocarbon spills
greater than or equal to 1bbl, produced water spills and chemical spills greater than or equal to the
reportable quantity (RQ), atmospheric chemical releases, and vehicle incidents may require additional
reporting in accordance with federal, state and local requirements. Changes to incident classification must
be reported to HSSE TL and HSSE Techs.
An Incident Notification and Documentation Flowchart have been included in this procedure to illustrate
NA Gas SPU incident reporting and documentation requirements.
5.2 Incident Investigation

All MIAs, HIPOs, DAFWs, and RIs will require a Root Cause Analysis and use of the Comprehensive List
of Causes (CLC) (or contractor equivalent). Less serious incidents should be investigated with a degree of
rigor appropriate to the potential for loss or injury. The appropriate local OC, Asset, or Performance
Leadership Teams will decide whether a root cause investigation will be performed for those less serious
incidents.
When a lessons learned is required it shall be completed within 60 days of the incident.
PSM Incidents involve different investigation requirements (e.g. investigations to start within 48 hours).
Refer to the BP PSM Implementation Plan at the facility where the incident occurred for those
investigation requirements).
The investigation team makeup will be determined based on the severity of the incident. (In the event of a
fatal incident, the BP Group Protocol for Investigating Fatal Accidents will be implemented.):
MIA Team members from outside the BU/Assets as approved by BUL
HIPO/DAFW team determined by PUL/ Asset Manager
SOR and RI team determined by Asset Manager/Wells Team Leader
Roles for Investigating leader and team are defined in the Root Cause Analysis training.
Prior to completing a HiPo or MIA investigation a close out incident teleconference will be held with the
appropriate Business Unit Leader. Additional participants may include the appropriate Performance Unit
Leader, Asset Manager/Wells Manager and/or Well Team Leader, HSSE Team Leader and OCM/Wells
Advisor/HSSE professional, Contractor, etc.
An incident teleconference (among the appropriate Performance Unit Leader, Asset Manager/Wells
Manager and/or Well Team Leader, HSSE Team Leader and OCM/Wells Advisor/HSSE professional,
Contractor, etc.) will be conducted once the investigation team has completed the investigation and
recorded all findings and actions in Tr@ction for the following types of incidents:
SORs
Recordable injuries
Gas Releases determined to be an immediate HSSE hazard to workers or the general public, or results
in an explosion or an evacuation
Vehicle Accidents involving disciplinary action or harm to the public,
Events requiring a Performance Leader decision to take advantage of voluntary self-disclosure.
The purpose is to demonstrate interest and concern, provide awareness of significant incidents, to have a
conversation regarding the root cause stopping point, to provide feedback regarding the rigor of the
investigation, and the opportunity to inquire if the investigating team has any quick learning that should be
shared immediately.

4.5.2.1 Environmental Violation/Nonconformance and Near Miss Tracking and Reporting Procedure
http://traction.bpweb.bp.com/
Anonymous Hotline Reporting poster

BP Group Protocol for Investigating Fatal Accidents
Lessons Learned Form
BP Group Guidelines
E&P Segment Fatality Process; Guideline for Classification, Reporting and Investigation of Fatal
Incidents; 5/1/2004
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR Part 1904.8
Process Safety Management Performance Baseline Manual, Section 13
Root Cause Analysis and Comprehensive List of Causes (CLC) chart
49 CFR 390, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations

49 CFR 191.3 and 191.5 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline
29 CFR 1910.119 Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals
NA Gas SPU Tr@ction Reporting Quick Guide
GHSEr Element # 12, Incident Analysis and Prevention
Key HSE Process # 5, Major Incident and High Potential Incident Reporting
Key HSE Process # 6, Incident Investigation Guidelines
Key HSE Process # 8, HSE Reporting Requirements
Key HSE Process # 10, HSE Reporting Definitions
BP Drilling and Well Operations Policy
Revision Log
11/15/2001 OUSBU BUL OUSBU HSE Mgr Final/Issued
04/23/2003 Tim Holt Ann Goulet Revised methods/timetables/added flow charts
05/06/2004 John Putnam Eric Brown Issued control number/changed authority &
custodian/updated key responsibilities
06/20/2005 Ruth Germany-Bice Glenn Harper Revised to meet the NA Gas SPU reporting requirements
Integrity Management definitions and requirements to be
consistent with Group (IM Incident and Failure of
engineered system)
Occupational Exposure and Action Level definitions to
clarify reporting requirements for Health incidents
Definition for Serious Vehicle Accident
Clarified time line for completing Lessons Learned and
Teleconferences consistent with Group requirements
Requirement for a close out teleconference with
appropriate BUL for HiPos & MIAs
Table 1.0
Serious Vehicle Accident, Unprotected Occupation
Exposure, Uncontrolled Release, Failure of
engineered system,
Consistent Root Cause, traction, lessons Learned and
conference call requirements

NA Gas SPU Internal Incident Notification and Documentation Flowchart
Employee reports
INCIDENT incident to supervisor
Required :
ASAP: MIA or PSM
24 HRS: HiPO, DAFW, DOT Incident, Security Incident
Is Telephone Notification
Yes
Required?
Appropriate Primary
telephones Secondary Supervisor telephones
Notification (see Table 1.0; Primary Notification (see
required for MIA, PSM, HIPO, Table 1.0)
No DAFW, DOT)
HSSE TL sends out Is an Asset or OCM may refer to the

Announcment within 24 hours Announcement Initial Incident Assessment
Yes Checklist in Paragraph 5.1 for
(See Templates in Paragraph Required? (MIA or
3.0) HIPO) further assistance
No
Primary Level emails to

Initial Tr@ction Incident Supervisor emails IR to Secondary Level
The IR should be approved as soon Report (IR) is entered by Primary Level Notification Notification (See Table
as practical to assure the data is the Originator (See Table 1.0; all incidents 1.0; MIA, PSM, HIPO,
available for others to view (Automatically sent to except 1st Aid and Near DAFW, DOT, CERCLA
Approver for review) Miss) or SARA, SOR, OSHA
RI, Fire/Explosion, NOV)
Required for PSM, MIA,

HiPO, DAFW, RI, SOR, or if The draft investigation
OC/Wells or Asset report and action items are
Is a formal
No further action Leadership determines it sent to the participating
No investigation using CLC
necessary merits Root Cause Asset LT prior to the
necessary?
Analysis. PSM conference call for their
investigations start within review
48 hours.
Yes
PUL OCM or Wells PUL Incident

Supt'd initiates conducts Investigation
determines and team conference call. Any legal Report and Action
need for Legal conducts implications of the report Items are
review Investigation are discussed. Approved
Is a Lessons Learned report Traction IR is updated

with Investigation Tr@ction Action Items are
No further action necessary? (See Table 1.0; Report and Action
No automatically distributed to
necessary MIA, PSM, HIPO, DOT, Items the responsible parties.
DAFW, SOR)
Required: If the incident was a HiPo and involving one of

Yes the HSSE Themess (i.e. driving, lifting, etc.) it shall be sent
to the HSSE Theme Tag for review & action
HSSE TL sends out Distribution of MIAs and

Lessons Learned developed HSSE TL posts
Lessons Learned to BU ELT HiPOs automatically made
(See Template in Paragraph Lessons Learned to Group
(See Templates in Paragraph from Group Website to
3.0) Website (HIPO & MIA only)
3.0) Group distribution

Document Number K0000000480 Revision Date: 05/20/05
Table 1.0 Group Notification and Reporting
Class of Primary& Tr@ction Lessons BUL Required Actions GVP Required Actions E&P HSSE VP Required
Incident Secondary Report Learned Actions
Level Required Report
Notifications
Fatality Consistent Yes Yes 1.) Contact tagged GVP immediately 1.) Coordinate SET review of None
(Workforce w/MIA 2.) Contact HSSE Head of Discipline to findings and action within
) initiate formal investigation, including 30 days of investigation
external BUL and Root Cause Analyst completion. Review to
3.) Develop and communicate MIA within include BUL and HSSE VP.
24 hours of incident using G MOR MIA 2.) Arrange E&P Leadership
E&P distribution conference call within 7 days
4.) Communicate lessons learned document of first action.
using G MOR MIA E&P immediately
following the GVP arranged conference
call
Fatality Consistent No Determined 1.) Contact tagged GVP immediately None 1.) Advises SET on need for
(Non- w/MIA by BUL 2.) Contact HSSE Head of Discipline further action at next
Workforce) immediately to agree initial monthly SET meeting,
classification of incident, reporting i.e., Fatality Leadership
requirements and investigation Conference Call, face-to-
methodology consistent with GVP face meeting with SET,
direction. BUL and HSSE VP,
3.) Develop and communicate MIA within segment intervention,
24 hours of incident using G MOR issuance of Lessons
MIA E&P distribution Learned Document
4.) Review investigation results with GVP
and E&P HSSE VP within 30 days of
investigation completion.

Table 1.0 Initial Internal Incident Notification and Reporting
Primary Level Notifications Secondary Level Notifications
Line Notification to BUL,
Field Notification to Tr@ction Lessons Conf. Call
PUL, Wells Mgr & Director, Root Cause
Class of Incident Asset Mgr/Wells TL, PUL Report Learned or Face-to-
HSSE Director, HSSE Ops Required
HSSE TL Required Report face mtg.
Mgr
ASAP ASAP Within 60
MIA Phone Phone Yes Yes Yes
1 hour or less 1 hour or less days**
Within 60
HIPO Phone Same Day Phone Same Day Yes Yes Yes
days**
Within 60
Serious Vehicle
Phone Same Day Phone Same Day Yes Yes Yes days**
Accident (SVA)
Yes No
PSM Incident Actual E- initiated
Within 48 hours At Asset Manager Discretion Yes Yes
Potential mail within 48
hours
DOT Incident Phone Same Day Phone Same Day Yes Yes Yes No
DAFW or Restricted Within 60

Phone Same Day Phone Same Day Yes Yes Yes
Duty Injury/Illness days**
CERCLA or SARA At HSSE Manager At HSSE
Reportable Release No later than Next At Asset Manager & Manager &
Phone E-mail Optional No
(after immediate Work Day Discretion HSSE L HSSE TL
external reporting) Discretion Discretion
No
Security Incident Phone Same Day At Asset Managers Discretion Optional Yes Optional
SOR No later than Next No later than Next Within 60

Phone Phone Yes Yes Yes
Work Day Work Day days**
OSHA Recordable No later than Next No later than Next Within 60

Phone Phone Yes Yes Yes
Incident Work Day Work Day days**

Line Notification to BUL, Lessons
Field Notification to Initial Tr@ction Conf. Call
PUL, Wells Mgr & Director, Root Cause Learned
Class of Incident Asset Mgr/Wells TL, HSSE Report or Face-to-
HSSE Ops Mgr, H&S Mgr or Required Report
TL Required face mtg.
E Mgr
If notification
First Aid or No At HSSE TL is made The
N/A Not required N/A Not required Optional No
Treatment Discretion HSSE TL
Discretion
Unprotected At HSSE
Occupational Exposure Notify IH Team & At Asset Manager At HSSE TL Manager &
Phone Phone Optional No
above the Action Level HSSE TL*** Discretion Discretion HSSE TL
for > 15 min. Discretion
At HSSE
No later than the No later than the At HSSE TL Manager &
OSHA Data Request Phone Phone Optional No
next day next day Discretion HSSE TL
Discretion
If notification
Near Hit/Miss (that is is made The
N/A Not required N/A Not required Optional Yes No
not also MIA or HIPO) HSSE TL
Discretion
At HSSE
Fire/Explosion (that is No later than Next No later than Next Manager & Within 60
Phone E-Mail* Yes Yes
not also MIA or HIPO) Work Day Work Day HSSE TL days**
Discretion
Vehicle Incident or
No later than Next At HSSE TL
Transportation/ Phone At PULs Discretion Optional Yes No
Work Day Discretion
Maritime Incident
Hydrocarbon Spills
1bbl or any oil on E- No later than Next At HSSE TL
At PULs Discretion Optional Yes No
waters of the U.S. or a Mail* Work Day Discretion
state
Uncontrolled Release
E- No later than Next At HSSE TL
(that is not also MIA or At PULs Discretion Optional Yes No
Mail* Work Day Discretion
HIPO)
At PSIM
Failure of an engineered
E- No later than Next At PSIM Program Managers Program
system (that is not also Optional Yes No
Mail* Work Day Discretion Managers
MIA or HIPO)
Discretion

Line Notification to BUL, Lessons
Field Notification to Initial Tr@ction Conf. Call
PUL, Wells Mgr & Director, Root Cause Learned
Class of Incident Asset Mgr/Wells TL, HSSE Report or Face-to-
HSSE Ops Mgr, H&S Mgr or Required Report
TL Required face mtg.
E Mgr
Chemical exceeds
Reportable Quantity
(RQ) or >1bbl,
E- No later than Next At HSSETL
whichever is less At PULs Discretion Optional Yes No
Mail* Work Day Discretion
(includes gaseous,
liquid or solid
substances)
Produced Water/Other
Spills exceeding E- No later than Next At HSSE TL
At PULs Discretion Optional Yes No
Reportable Quantity Mail* Work Day Discretion
(RQ) or >1bbl
Notice of Violation At HSSE TL
E- No later than Next No later than Next
(NOV)/Incident of Non- E-Mail* Optional Yes Discretion No
Mail* Work Day Work Day
Compliance (INCs)
* E-Mail notification will include the Tr@ction incident number when available
** 60 days from when the incident occurred
*** The IH Team and HSSE TL will determine the need for action and further notification
NOTE: If notification is left up to a managers discretion, these incidents will not normally require lessons learned report unless their seriousness qualifies as a SOR
NOTE: The preferred method for reporting incidents is through this Practice. However, if you prefer to report an environmental incident anonymously, you can do so
using the BP Business Conduct Hotline (1-800-225-6141). All reports via the hotline will be referred to the proper persons for timely resolution and the matter will be
treated in strict confidence. Duplicate reporting is not necessary.
NOTE: If incident is classified by more than one category, the more stringent notification requirements apply. Notification to HSSE TL, HSSE Techs and appropriate
other individuals to be made if classification changes.

NA Gas SPU Tr@ction Reporting Quick Guide
This document is a Quick Reference tool for inputting all incidents into Tr@ction. For details regarding incident definitions, general requirements and procedures, please refer to the NA Gas SPU
Safety Practice, Section 1 Chapter 2 - NA Gas SPU HSSE Initial Incident Reporting, Investigation and Tracking Standard which can be found at http://ousbuhse.bpweb.bp.com/
Traction Data Entry Requirements

Entry "Create New" Incident Report, Advanced Safety Audit, Audit or Other Event from the Traction Home Page after logging into Traction at
Traction Inputs Required? the following url: http://traction.bpweb.bp.com
Enter as "Incident - Occupational Injury or Illness". Select "Fatality" from the Classification dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer
FATALITY screen.
Enter as "Incident - Occupational Injury or Illness". Select "Days Away from Work" from the Classification dropdown box on the Incident Report
DAFWc Interviewer screen.
Enter as "Incident - Occupational Injury or Illness". Select "Medical Treatment" or "Restricted Work / Job Transfer" from the Classification
RECORDABLE INJURY/ILLNESS dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer screen.
Enter as "Incident - Occupational Injury or Illness". Select "First Aid" from the Classification dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer
FIRST AID screen.
Enter as "Incident - Occupational Injury or Illness". Select "No Treatment" from the Classification dropdown box on the Incident Report
NO TREATMENT Interviewer screen.
NEAR MISS / POTENTIAL HAZARD Enter as "Incident - Near Miss / HSE Opportunity".
Enter as "Incident - Transportation - Road". Does NOT include vehicle incidents involving commute (to or from the drivers normal place of work and
VEHICLE/ROAD home). Reference Property Damage .
BOAT OR AVIATION Enter as "Incident - Transportation - Maritime" or "Incident - Transportation - Air".
FIRE AND EXPLOSION Enter as "Incident - Loss or Damage - Equipment / Property / Explosion / Fire".
Enter as "Incident - Loss or Damage - Equipment / Property / Explosion / Fire". Includes vehicle incidents involving commute (to or from the drivers
PROPERTY DAMAGE normal place of work and home).
SECURITY Enter as "Incident - Security - (Select Appropriate Security Type)".
Enter as "Incident - (Select Appropriate Incident Type)." Mark the MIA or HIPO check box on the Incident Report Interviewer screen. There is no
HIPO, MIA or SOR check box for an SOR .
Enter as "Incident - (Select Appropriate Incident Type)." Mark the PSM check box on the Incident Report Interviewer screen. Mark the MIA or
PSM HIPO check box if appropriate; there is no check box for an SOR .
HYDROCARBON GAS OR OTHER Enter as "Incident - Material Release." Select Release Type: "Atmospheric" and appropriate hydrocarbon gas or other atmospheric gas released
ATMOSPHERIC RELEASE from the Material Released dropdown box on the Incident Report Interview - Material Release screen, e.g., Natural Gas, Ammonia, NOX, H2S.
SPILLS
Enter as "Incident - Material Release." Select Release Type "Spill" and appropriate hydrocarbon released from the Material Released dropdown
Hydrocarbon equal to or greater than 1 bbl box on the Incident Report Interviewer - Material Released screen.
Enter as "Incident - Material Release ." Select Release Type "Spill" and Produced H2O from the Material Released dropdown box on the Incident
Produced Water equal to or greater than RQ Report Interviewer - Material Released screen.
Enter as "Incident - Material Release." Select Release Type "Spill" and appropriate chemical type from the Material Released dropdown box on the
Chemical equal to or greater than RQ Incident Report Interviewer - Material Released screen.
Enter as "Incident - Transportation - Pipeline." Select "DOT Regulated Pipeline" from the Pipeline Affected dropdown box on the Incident Report
Interviewer - Pipeline screen. If incident involves a material release, select "Incident - Material Release" in addition to "Pipeline" incident (as above)
DOT PIPELINE from the Incident Report Interviewer - Incident Type screen..
SAFETY EVENT
Enter as "Incident - Compliance/Conformance - Safety Event." Approvers must press the Categorize button and select "Safety Violation" from the
Enforcement Action (OSHA Fines, Citations, etc.) Incident Type dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer - Safety Event screen.
Revised: 06/20/2005
Onshore U.S. HSE Technologist
ENVIRONMENTAL EVENT
Enter as "Incident - Compliance/Conformance - Environmental Event." Approvers must press the Categorize button and select "Environmental
Enforcement Action (NOV, INC, Fines, etc.) Violation" from the Incident Type dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer - Environmental Event screen. (Note: INCs include
Reported to Corporate Compliance Committee environmental related INCs only.)
Self Reported Incidents Immediately Reportable to

an Agency (Other than a Material Release) Enter as "Incident - Compliance/Conformance - Environmental Event." Approvers must press the Categorize button and select "Environmental
Reported to Corporate Compliance Committee Nonconformance" from the Incident Type dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer - Environmental Event screen.
Self Reported Incidents NOT Immediately
Reportable to an Agency (Permit Condition/Limit
Exceedence, Upsets in Maintanence, Records, Enter as "Incident - Compliance/Conformance - Environmental Event." Approvers must press the Categorize button and select "Environmental
Engine Calibration) Non Issue" from the Incident Type dropdown box on the Incident Report Interviewer - Environmental Event screen.
Enter as "Advanced Safety Audit" . Select an " Observer" and "Partner" from the dropdown box. If you are ASA trained and need to be added to
the dropdown list, contact your Local Tr@ction System Administrator. (Note: Excludes JSA's, employee observations, safety meetings and
ASA inspections.)
AEA
SIP
Enter as "Audit" . The Audit is Approved when the Originator distributes the action items by depressing the "Distribute Action Items" button from the
AUDITS top of the Investigation Explorer screen.
gHSEr External See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
EMS External See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
PSM / RMP See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
PSIM See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
GHG See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
Compliance - H&S See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
Compliance - Environmental See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
Contractor Audit See above "Audit" instructions and select appropriate "Audit Type" .
Enter as "Other Event" . The Other Event is Approved when the Originator distributes the action items by depressing the "Distribute Action Items"
OTHER EVENT button from the top of the Investigation Explorer screen.
Drill/Exercise See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
gHSEr Self Assessment See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
Rig Inspection See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
Inspection See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
MOC See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
HSE Meetings See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
Health Map See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
IH Survey See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
Contractor Issues (Improvement Plan, Variance) See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
Agency Visits See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
Regulatory Notices See above "Other Event" instructions and select appropriate "Event Type" .
HOURS WORKED/MILES DRIVEN User must have the Hours Worked access role in Tr@ction.
NEW TO TR@CTION:
Number of HSE Training Hours User must have the Hours Worked access role in Tr@ction.
Number of Safety Observations User must have the Hours Worked access role in Tr@ction.
Revised: 06/20/2005
DATA ENTRY LEGEND
GROUP AND/OR BU REQUIRED

Currently input in Tr@ction
Do not enter in Tr@ction
Reminders for all Tr@ction Users

1. All incidents must be Submitted for Approval and Approved by the 10th of the month following the month in which incident occurred (Example Incident date: 2/24/03; Must be approved by 3/10/03)
2. Upstream reports will pull from Tr@ction all hydrocarbon spills > 1 bbl.
3. Any liquid hydrocarbon that escapes Primary Containment is entered into Tr@ction as a Spill (never Leak).
4. First Aids and Near Misses must be approved like any other Incident.
5. When an Incident Classification changes, edit the Tr@ction report.
6. All Action Items from Incidents, Audits, ASAs and Other Events are tracked from entry to closure.
7. Electronic files can be attached to any Incidents, Audits, ASAs and Other Events. Be sure to mention files are attached in the Event Description field on the General Information 1 screen.
8. Multiple incident types may be selected in one incident report except for a Near Miss/HSE Opportunity.
9. Questions on T@ction terminology and other support materials are located at http://traction.bpweb.bp.com under Tr@ction Support Materials.
Revised: 06/20/2005
Job Safety Environment Analysis (JSEA) Procedure Page 1 of 8
Job Safety Environmental Analysis (JSEA) Procedure

1.0 Purpose/Scope
Certain categories of work or tasks, including those covered by documented procedures, shall be analyzed
using a risk assessment process. The NA Gas Control of Work Policy requires that processes are in place
to conduct suitable and sufficient assessment of risk with regard to the health and safety of all involved
personnel. The purpose of a risk assessment is to examine a proposed method of carrying out a task in a
controlled and safe manner - not to design the task itself.
A JSEA emphasizes the activities or sequence of job tasks; actual or potential energy sources associated
with each job task; specific hazard identification; environmental impact; actions and risk control measures
and who is responsible for implementing the control measures. JSEA is also critical to improving
communication above and beyond procedures already in place.
This Procedure describes effective and appropriate development and application of a JSEA which is a Type
1 Risk Assessment as defined in the NA Gas Control of Work Policy. This Procedure applies to the entire
workforce working on NA Gas premises.
2.0 Definitions
Actions activities or measures which eliminate, control, mitigate or protect against hazards
Competency the ability to perform a task in the correct manner with the correct understanding and
reasoning behind the task.
Competent Person a person who has demonstrated that they have the knowledge, training and experience
required to perform the defined role to the standard required.
Control of Work A formal approach to manage work risk with a procedural form of control.
Essential Personnel personnel whose direct involvement with work site activities is required.
Non-Essential Personnel personnel who do not have an active role in accomplishing the task or activity at
hand. e.g. employees who are not essential personnel, land owners, third parties, visitors and delivery
drivers.
Frequency how often the job is performed; example: daily/weekly
Hazard equipment, materials, activities, or conditions that have a significant potential to cause injury or
harm to people, loss of property, or negatively impact the environment
Incident an undesired event that did or could have resulted in personal harm, property or environmental
damage or impact.
Energy the capacity for action or accomplishment (motion, chemical, radiation, electrical, gravity, heat/cold,
biological, pressure)
Risk Assessment the process of hazard identification and the assessment of the potential for identified
hazards to be realized in any given activity.
Risk possibility of loss, injury, damage, or exposure to hazard or danger

Revision Date: 06/12/2007
Paper copies are uncontrolled. This copy is only valid at the time of printing. The electronic version of this document is
located at http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/documents/K0000002051
Residual Risk refers to the risk that remains after the identified actions have been put in place
Routine Job a procedure that does not vary in its execution, a set of customary and often mechanically
performed procedures and activities; operational changes within defined parameters which are covered by
basic operator qualifications
Task an activity or segment of a job in support of a piece of work
Type 1 Risk Assessment (hazard identification) a broad overview of the task to identify potential and
recognized hazards and identify appropriate controls. A more detailed description can be found in the NA
Gas Control of Work Policy
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/dknag/component/hssems?passparm=0900a88e80018127:Control%20of%20Wo
rk:NAG:U
Type 2 Risk Assessment a structured, semi-quantitative assessment which is required when there are
greater hazards or complexities associated with the task. (A Type 2 Risk Assessment process is not
described within this procedure. The definition provided here is for the purpose of clarifying the difference
between a Type 1 and Type 2 risk assessment process. Type 2 Risk Assessment is a subject to be defined
in a separate document.) A more detailed description can be found in the can be found in the NA Gas
Control of Work Policy
rk:NAG:U

A written JSEA is required for work as defined by the Area Authority. When a Type 2 Risk Assessment is
required, a JSEA must also be done prior to work execution. If a previously used JSEA is available, it may
be used for another work activity providing it has been reviewed by a PA or a person who is recognized by
the AA or PIC as suitably trained and competent. The PA or person who is recognized by the AA or PIC as
suitably trained and competent shall approve the previously used JSEA as acceptable for use for the
current defined scope of work.
Use of third party JSA or JSEA equivalents, such as those utilized by NA Gas Contract Partner companies,
is permitted provided it addresses, at a minimum, the following information:
1. A list of activities or sequence of tasks
2. Identification of energy sources
3. Identification of hazards
4. A conversation regarding environmental impacts
5. Appropriate actions or risk control measures
6. The name of who will be responsible for implementing the control measure
7. Signatures of persons participating in the tasks
Member(s) of the workforce performing the task shall participate in the JSEA. Where more than one team is
assigned to carry out the work, a Performing Authority (as referenced in Section 4.0) from each team/crew
shall participate in the JSEA development.
The JSEA shall be communicated in writing and signed off by persons involved in the task to show that they
have agreed and understood the scope, hazards, controls and who is responsible for implementing the
controls.
The work site shall be inspected by the Performing Authority or Issuing Authority (or by a Performing
Authority or Issuing Authority from each team/crew if SIMOPS are occurring) to identify worksite hazards
arising from the location features.

A JSEA shall consider Eliminate, Control, Protect measures. Wherever possible, hazards shall be
eliminated from the task. If the hazard cannot be eliminated; control measures must be put in place. Note:
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall only be considered as the last protective barrier before a person
is exposed to a hazard. Reliance on PPE shall only occur after other efforts have been made to eliminate or
reduce the hazard. Mitigation measures (measures to reduce the affects of an accident or condition) must
be in place even when controls are in place because residual risks will still remain.
A site specific emergency response action will be a part of the JSEA. Each person involved in the work
activity must be made fully aware of the control measures and emergency response actions to be taken or
in place and the actions required of them in an emergency.
US OSHA regulation 1910.132 requires that an assessment of the workplace be conducted to evaluate
hazards that require the need for personal protective equipment (PPE). The JSEA will serve as a certificate
of the hazard assessment for the use of PPE for the task and workplace.
The JSEA will be kept readily available at the worksite until the job is completed. Records retention for
completed JSEA forms will be for thirty days after completion of the work. In cases where a third party BP
JSEA equivalent form is used, the third party shall keep a copy of the completed JSEA equivalent form at
their local work office for the same period of time. Copies of completed third party JSEA equivalent forms
shall be made available when requested by a BP representative.

Roles and responsibilities with any Control of Work procedure must have identified accountabilities. The
levels of authority for approval to proceed with work are commensurate with the level of risk in executing the
work. Identified roles with defined Control of Work accountabilities can be found in the NA Gas Control of
Work Policy
rk:NAG:U
The following roles have defined accountabilities within the JSEA procedure:
Area Authority (AA) a person delegated the authority to authorize work activities within their designated
area of responsibility and confirms that work activities conducted are consistent with the Control of Work
Policy and associated practices and permit requirements.
Person in Charge (PIC) - an onsite individual that has working knowledge of work activities being
performed by other groups/personnel working on location and is designated by the AA to be responsible for
coordinating among multiple PAs and IAs working at one site to confirm safe delivery of work activities.
Issuing Authority (IA) an individual who is assigned by the Area Authority to be responsible for issuance
and closure of permits in their area of competency and ensures work activities conducted are consistent
with the Control of Work Policy and associated practices and permit requirements.
Performing Authority (PA) - an onsite individual that is responsible for the safe execution of work activities
and ensures that work activities conducted are consistent with the Control of Work Policy and associated
practices and permit requirements.
5.0 Procedure
JSEA is a communication and planning tool. It focuses on the relationship between the worker, the task, the
tools, and the work environment. Persons who will be performing tasks within the defined scope of work will

participate in each phase of the analysis, from defining the key tasks of the job to anticipating and
discussing hazards and recommended actions.
Development of the JSEA involves:
1) breaking a job into a sequence of individual key tasks that are analyzed in a methodical way to
identify the eight energy sources, (Motion, Chemical, Radiation, Electrical, Gravity, Heat/Cold,
Biological, Pressure) associated with each task,
2) anticipating/recognizing/identifying potential or existing hazards that each energy source may

present for the tasks and analyzes tools, equipment, or other hardware involved in the work
process
3) developing actions to eliminate, substitute, control, mitigate or protect against the hazard(s)
4) assigning responsibility to a specific person(s) for carrying out each action
5) A review of the work activity and associated JSEA by a Performing Authority after completing the
job to identify areas of improvement and lessons learned from the job or the process.
Improvements and lessons learned shall be considered referenced for future similar jobs
5.1 Completing the NA Gas JSEA Form
Information on the NA Gas JSEA form will be completed by a PA or by a person who is recognized by
the AA or PIC as suitably trained and competent. All areas on the form where information is requested
shall be completed.
Activity/Sequence of Job Tasks - break the job into a sequence of key tasks, each describing what is
being done.
Remember to tell WHAT is done and not HOW it is done. Review each job task looking for timing and
sequencing errors. Avoid the two most common errors; making the tasks too detailed or making the
tasks too general so those important sub-tasks are lost.
If the number of tasks becomes very large, then consider breaking the job into parts and create an
additional JSEA for the subsequent jobs.
Energy Sources - circle one or more energy sources associated with each task (Motion, Chemical,
Radiation, Electrical, Gravity, Heat/Cold, Biological, Pressure).
Specific Identified Hazard - Against each task, list the hazards that could cause injury when the task
is performed. Ask the question Can the hazard hurt me or anyone working on the site? Identify
anticipated or potential hazards for each energy source.
Environmental Impacts Identify any potential impacts to the environment as a result of the task to be
performed. Ask the questions Could there be a release to the air, soil or water? Will a waste be
generated?
Action(s) and Risk Control Measures - List the actions and control measures required to eliminate or
minimize the risk of injury and or incident arising from the identified hazard and impact to the
environment. Identify one or more actions, existing or proposed, for each identified hazard. Do not
make general statements about the procedure, such as "Be Careful". List exactly what the worker
needs to know in order to perform the job. Each JSEA shall consider Eliminate, Control, Protect
measures.

During this part of the JSEA development consider possibilities such as combining tasks, changing the
sequence, substituting less harmful chemicals or determining whether other safety equipment is
needed to reduce the hazards. Writing a JSEA is about identifying the safest, most effective work
methods, not just documenting the way it has always been done. If hazards are still present, continue
to reduce the risk of performing the task.
Who is Responsible - Write the name, not job title, of the person responsible to implement the control
measure identified. The accountability for carrying out actions will be clearly assigned, understood, and
initialed by the responsible person indicating their personal commitment and accountability for that
action.
Signatures are required by persons onsite who are involved in the work activity and performing
operational tasks.
Area Authority (AA)

An Area Authority confirms work activities comply with associated safe practices. Signature
required only if AA is on the worksite and participates in JSEA tasks.
Issuing Authority (IA)

An Issuing Authority shall issue permits which are consistent with NA Gas safe practices. A
signature is required only if a permit has been issued.
Performing Authority (PA)

A Performing Authority performs or supervises work activities identified and agreed to in the
scope and is accountable for safe execution of the work. They must remain on site until work
activities are completed. Signature is required.
Person in Charge (PIC)

The PIC will coordinate work activities among multiple PAs and IAs and communicate changes
in work scope with AA. The PIC must remain on site until all work is completed and the site is
safe and secured. Signature is required. The PIC may also be the AA, IA and PA.
Others performing work

Other essential personnel who are performing or supervising tasks or work activities will sign the
JSEA acknowledging their understanding and agreement of the tasks, hazards, impacts, controls
and responsibilities.
Site Visitors
Site visitors or non-essential persons will receive a site review from the PIC and be informed of
the worksite activities. The review shall include the site hazards, controls and associated
emergency actions. Signatures on the NA Gas JSEA form are at the discretion of the PIC.
Emergency Action Section Information in this section shall include a description of the agreed
Muster Point and emergency contact telephone numbers.
Worksite GPS Coordinates it is preferred that worksite Global Positioning System coordinates be
provided as a navigational aid in locating remote worksites for the purpose of 911 Emergency Service
response. This can be done using a general purpose handheld GPS receiver or known predetermined
GPS data. If GPS coordinates are not available, detailed driving directions shall be recorded to help
emergency responders in reaching remote locations quickly.
Post Job Review This area can be completed on an exception basis. A Performing Authority shall
record best, recommended and noteworthy improvements in safe work execution or safe working
behaviors.

Area for Improvement This area can be completed on an exception basis. A Performing Authority
shall record identified or witnessed areas for improvement. Also record the name of the person
responsible for communicating this to the Area Authority to ensure that proper action is taken.
6.0 Training
Training for the JSEA Procedure will be bundled with Decision Point - Hazard Recognition Training to align
work site hazard recognition and analysis with JSEA form development and completion. Independent
training for the JSEA procedure and form development is available to accommodate personnel who have
previously taken a hazard recognition or equivalent course and need only to attend the Control of Work
JSEA Competency level course. Refer to the SPU Training program for more detail.
http://hsetrain.bpweb.bp.com

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Handbook 3071, Job Safety Analysis
National Safety Council, Supervisor's Safety Manual
Dept. of Energy Barrier Analysis Report- 1995
Energy source methodology based on Decision Points Hazard Recognition Training Content
BP Group Standard Control of Work
NA Gas Control of Work Policy

Document Name Job Safety Environmental Analysis (JSEA) Procedure

Revision Date Next Review 06/12/2010
Ruth Control of Work
Carleen Control of
Authority Germany- SPA NAGas SPU Custodian Leonhardt Work TA
Bice HSSE Director
1.1 06/12/2007 New Issue Ruth Germany-Bice Carleen Leonhardt
Associated Documents / Links
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/dknag/component/dk_searc
NAG SPU Health & Safety Manual LINK h_results?chkControlled=ON&input_doctype=bp_hse
_content_object&combo_iso_18001=4.3.4&
NAG SPU Training Website LINK http://hsetrain.bpweb.bp.com/

NAG SPU Control of Work (CoW) http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/
11/11/06
Policy documents/K0000002586
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/
JSEA Form 06/12/07
documents/K0000001340
JSEA Form Task Identification 06/12/07
CoW Typical Permit Lifecycle 06/12/07
Document Approval
Approver Title Date

Authority [Signature on File] Control of Work SPA 08/13/07
Custodian [Signature on File] Control of Work TA 08/13/07

Appendix A
JSEA Form Final

12-JUN-2007.doc
JSEA Form
JSEA Form additional

page FINAL 12-JUN-2
JSEA Form Additional Task Page
Typical Permit
Lifecycle Handout Rev
Typical Permit Lifecycle Work Flow

Page _____ of ______
Job Safety Environmental Analysis
Date Form Completed: Name of Person Completing Form:

Equipment/Location: Job Description:
Permit(s) Required Hot Work Ground Disturbance Confined Space Energy Isolation (LOTO) Lifting Operation Other _________ No Permit Required
SIMOPs or Multi-Crew Activity Yes No Name of Person in Charge __________________________ Person Works for (Company Name) ____________________
Does the work activity require an eMOC? Yes No If Yes, has it been authorized by BP management for start-up? Yes No If No, state reason
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Provide brief description of SIMOPs activities ___________________________________________________________________________________
Actions and Risk
Environmental Control Measures
Activity / Sequence of Job Tasks Energy Sources Specific Hazard Identified Who is responsible?
Against each task list the hazards that could cause Impacts List the actions and control measures Write the name of the person
List the tasks required to perform the activity in the (circle all that apply) injury when the task is performed. Can the hazard hurt Could there be a release to required to eliminate or minimize the responsible to implement the
sequence they are carried out. the air, soil or water? Will a risk of injury arising from the identified
me or anyone working on the site? control measure identified.
waste be generated? hazard and impact to the
environment.
Motion; Chemical;
Radiation; Electrical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Biological; Pressure
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Was Emergency Response Plan and Actions Reviewed and Agreed? Yes No If No, give reason _________________________________________________
This document is a certification of the hazard assessment for the task and workplace per US OSHA 1910.132 Document #: K0000001340
Page _____ of _____

Additional Page for Task Identification
Must Accompany Initial JSEA Lead Page
Date Form Completed: Name of Person Completing Form:

Equipment/ Job
Location Description
Name of Person in Charge _________________________________ Person Works for (Company Name) __________________________________
Actions and Risk

List the tasks required to perform the activity in the sequence (circle all that apply) injury when the task is performed. Can the hazard hurt Could there be a release to required to eliminate or minimize the responsible to implement the
they are carried out. the air, soil or water? Will a risk of injury arising from the identified
environment.
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Stop the job at any time anyone is concerned about safety. Stop the job if anyone identifies a hazard not recorded on the JSEA. Be alert to any changes in personnel, conditions at the
work site, or hazards not covered by the original JSEA. If it is necessary STOP THE JOB, re-assess the task and hazards, amend the JSEA as needed.
This document is a certification of the hazard assessment for the task and workplace per US OSHA 1910.132
Document #: K0000001341
Control of Work
Control of Work C o W
Permit Process Pride Ownership Excellence
1 Performing Authority
and/or
Request permit
Look for previous Risk Assessments (Type 1(JSEA) & 2)
Conduct worksite visit
Request Issuing Authority
2
Review work request
Area Authority Assemble Type 2 Risk Assessment Review Team (if needed)
(if Type 2 Risk Assessment, both JSEA + Permit Required)
Define appropriate risk controls
Initial Review Discuss with Performing Authority and/or Issuing Authority
Visit worksite (if needed)
3 Area Authority Review ongoing/scheduled jobs SIMOPS and permitted

activities
Assess available resources
Identifies Person in Charge at worksite
Authorize Authorize permit to be issued
Issuing Authority Inspects worksite
4
Verifies controls are in place
Verifies isolations are in place
Face-to-face meeting with Performing Authority
Identify hazards and controls (JSEA)
Issue Permit Issues permit
5 Performing Authority Identify hazards and controls (JSEA)

Gathers all relevant paperwork to perform activity
Conducts toolbox/safety talk
Accepts permit
Permit Live Commence work
(Work Execution)
Discuss and agree with Area and Issuing Authority on
ongoing monitoring of work activities
6 Performing Authority Worksite clean up

Signs permit for termination of permit required task
Return completed JSEA and permit to Issuing Authority
Job complete
Issuing Authority
7
Inspects worksite
Verifies controls removed and isolations reinstated
Authorizes permit closure
Permit to Work Complete
8 Area Authority Receives closed permit and JSEA from Issuing Authority
Ensure permit is properly closed
Files permit and JSEA
Work Complete and Permit Closed
TYPICAL PERMIT LIFECYCLE
Created 12/15/2006 Custodian: Carleen Leonhardt

Revised 07/23/2007 Document #: K0000001342
Page _____ of _____
Additional Page for Task Identification
Actions and Risk

List the tasks required to perform the activity in the sequence (circle all that apply) injury when the task is performed. Can the hazard hurt Could there be a release to required to eliminate or minimize the responsible to implement the
they are carried out. the air, soil or water? Will a risk of injury arising from the identified
environment.
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Motion; Chemical;
Gravity; Heat/Cold;
Stop the job at any time anyone is concerned about safety. Stop the job if anyone identifies a hazard not recorded on the JSEA. Be alert to any changes in personnel, conditions at the
work site, or hazards not covered by the original JSEA. If it is necessary STOP THE JOB, re-assess the task and hazards, amend the JSEA as needed.
This document is a certification of the hazard assessment for the task and workplace per US OSHA 1910.132
Document #: K0000001341
Page _____ of ______
Signatures are required by all persons involved with the work described on the JSEA
JSA Team: Individual Name / Company Name Signature Mobile Phone #
Area Authority (AA)
Confirms all work activities comply with associated
safe practices. Signature required only if AA is on
the worksite and participates in JSEA tasks.
Issuing Authority (IA)
Issues permits consistent with safe practices,
signature required only if a permit has been issued
Performing Authority (PA)

Responsible for conducting or supervising all work
identified and agreed in the scope and accountable
for safe execution of the activities
Person in Charge (PIC)
Coordinates among multiple PAs and IAs and
coordinates changes in work scope with AA
Others Names of site visitors not involved in

Essential personnel who are performing or the work activities:
supervising tasks or work activities.
__________________________________
Helicopter Services Describe Muster Worksite GPS coordinates (Lat/Long) or driving directions for
Emergency Rescue:
Life Flight Point:
__________________________________________________
Emergency Contacts
Sheriff Post Job Review: Start/Stop/Continue
Ambulance BEST - Practice/Activity(s) Observed:
____________________________________________________
Fire Department
Police ___________________________________________
Hospital
Civil Defense AREA FOR IMPROVEMENT Practice/Activity(s) Observed:
____________________________________________________
Highway Patrol
____________________________________________
Stop the job at any time anyone is concerned about safety. Stop the job if anyone identifies a hazard not recorded on the JSEA. Be alert to any changes in personnel, conditions at the work
site, or hazards not covered by the original JSEA. If it is necessary STOP THE JOB, re-assess the task and hazards, amend the JSEA as needed.
This document is a certification of the hazard assessment for the task and workplace per US OSHA 1910.132 Document #: K0000001340
Chapter 8, Laboratory Safety
Chapter 8
Laboratory Safety
I. General
A. This section specifically refers to facilities at BPs Earth Science Facility (Houston)
and analytical labs supporting gas plant facilities within production operations.
However, the information provided shall be used as a guide in all production
operations as appropriate.
B. Laboratory fume hoods shall be evaluated on an annual basis for proper air flow and
the results documented. Contact HSE representative or industrial hygienist for
proper air flow velocities.
II. Safety Guidelines
A. Housekeeping
B. Toxic, flammable and other dangerous materials shall be properly stored in an

approved safe location. Only quantities necessary for short-term operational needs
shall be kept in the work area.
C. All spilled material, whether liquid or solid, shall be cleaned up promptly and
completely according to established response procedures.
D. Waste, rags, broken glassware, waste oils, reagents, etc. must be properly disposed
of in approved safety waste receptacles on a daily basis. Glassware, syringes, and
chemical containers must be placed in disposal containers so labeled.
E. Areas around eyewash fountains, emergency showers, fire fighting equipment,

electrical controls, etc. are to be kept free of obstructions at all times.
F. Excess wearing apparel, such as coats, hats, overshoes, etc. shall be kept in lockers
or some other place away from the laboratory.
III. Glassware
A. When using glassware, protect your hands by using gloves, heavy cloth or rubber
hand protectors. Eye protection is required.

B. As a general practice, laboratory flasks, beakers, or other containers shall never be

used as containers for food or drink.
C. Suitable laboratory jacks or tripods are to be used rather than ring clamps, whenever
possible, for the physical support of large flasks, beakers or other glass items.
Provide proper rigidity by using additional clamping devices.
D. All glass equipment used in testing, analysis or experimental work shall be properly
shielded if there is any possibility of rupture due to chemical reaction or pressure.
E. Suitable eye and face protection shall always be worn in laboratory operations, when
appropriate.
F. Damaged glassware is not to be used for any purpose.
IV. Chemicals
A. Only a minimum amount of flammable liquids required for the job or short-term
operational needs shall be kept in the work area to reduce the potential fire hazard.
(See the Combustible and Flammable Liquid Storage and Handling chapter.)
B. All containers of chemicals must be properly labeled to identify their contents. This
includes all glassware containing chemicals.
C. Flammable liquid spills require immediate action to assure that vapors do not reach a
source of ignition. In the event of a spill, eliminate all sources of ignition and shut
off all electrical devices (from a remote location if possible).
D. Surplus or waste flammable liquids must not be poured into sink or sewer drains.
Such liquids shall be accumulated in approved marked containers for later disposal.
E. The handling of chemicals which might emit toxic fumes, vapors or gases shall be
performed in a fume hood.
F. The location of the nearest safety shower shall be known by every employee
working in the laboratory. If burns occur, immediately flood the burned area with
large quantities of water. Remove clothing if necessary so water will reach the
affected area. Inform your supervisor of any chemical exposure.
G. Seek medical attention immediately if any skin reddening or irritation has resulted
from a chemical exposure. A higher grade of protective equipment may be
necessary.

H. Some chemicals such as ether, picric acid, etc. have shelf lives. These materials
must not be kept beyond the time period specified by the manufacturer. Cylinders
containing corrosive gases (indicating H2S) shall be dated upon receipt and returned
to the supplier after 6 months.
V. References
A. 29 CFR 1910.1450, Laboratory Safety Standard.

Chapter 11, Ladder Inspection and Use
Chapter 11
Ladder Inspection and Use
I. General
Operating Supervisors are responsible for the implementation and enforcement of this
program. Since ladders must be inspected prior to use, no documentation is required.
II. Inspection
A. Fixed Ladders
1. All fixed ladders shall be inspected before use to determine if they are in a safe
and operable condition. Ladders or stairs found defective shall be repaired or
replaced before further use.
2. Fixed ladders (except wooden ladders) shall be painted or treated, as applicable,

to prevent any deterioration that could be caused by the environment in which
they are used.
3. All fixed ladders shall be constructed and installed to comply with OSHA
regulation 1910.27.
4. All fixed ladders that are 20 feet in height as measured from the ground must
have a cage or a ladder safety device. On ladders with climbing devices, the
device shall be visually inspected then tested by puling back on it from its base.
The person conducting this test shall be certain that the device is tight and
secure prior to each use of the device.
Caged ladders that exceed 20 feet in continuous length must have a platform
breaking the length for each 30 feet of height, or fraction thereof. They must
also be equipped with a cage or a climb-assist device. Where ladder safety
devices are provided on tower and water tank ladders, no landing platforms are
required.
B. Portable Ladders
1. All portable ladders must be inspected prior to each use.
2. Metal ladders must have a decal or stencil warning that the unit shall not be
used near electrical equipment.

3. Never use a ladder with a weight in excess of its load capacity. ANSI requires a
duty-rating sticker be placed on the side of every ladder.
4. Ladder labels are required by ANSI standards to list the highest standing level.
III. Ladder Use
The following safety precautions must be observed when using ladders.
A. Ladders must be tied off at the top support if at all possible. Ladders shall be placed
as to prevent slipping.
B. Ladders used to gain roof access shall extend at least 3 feet above the point of
support.
C. Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal position as platforms, runways, or

scaffolds.
D. Ladders shall not be used by more than one person at time.
E. Ladders shall not be placed in front of doors opening toward the ladder unless the
door is blocked, locked, or guarded.
F. Ladders shall not be placed on unstable bases to obtain additional height.
G. Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side rails, or other
faulty equipment shall not be used. Improvised repairs shall not be made.
H. Short ladders shall not be spliced together to provide long sections.
I. Ladders shall not be used as braces, skids, or other than their intended purposes.
J. Tops of ordinary types of stepladders shall not be used as steps.
IV. Maintenance
All ladders must be maintained, with special attention given to the following:
A. Joints between steps and side rails must be tight.
B. Hardware and fittings must be securely attached.
C. Moveable parts must be free and operable.

D. Moveable bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc. must be frequently lubricated.
E. Frayed or worn rope shall be replaced.
F. Safety feet must be operable and other auxiliary equipment shall be kept in good
condition to ensure proper performance.
G. Rungs and steps must be kept clean and free of defects.
H. Always mark unsafe ladders by using a damaged-ladder tag. Store damaged ladders
away from usable ladders. Have them repaired as soon as possible. Destroy
unrepairable ladders immediately.
V. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor,

29 CFR, Part 1910.25, 1910.26, 1910.27.
B. American National Standards Institute: ANSI A14.1 - 1968, Safety

Code for Portable Wood Ladders; ANSI A14.2- 1956, Portable Metal
ladders; ANSI A14.3-1956, Safety Code for Fixed Ladders.

Lead Management Page 1 of 7
Lead Management
1.0 Purpose/Scope
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this safe practice is to minimize exposure to lead during maintenance and
construction activities that involve lead-containing materials. It provides general guidance for worker
and environmental protection and compliance with regulatory requirements. For detailed procedures
in the management of lead exposure, refer to the BP NAG and DW Lead Operations and
Maintenance Manual.
1.2 Scope
The requirements of this safe practice apply to all maintenance, construction, or demolition work at
BP U.S. North America Gas (NAG) onshore facilities and well sites involving materials that
potentially contain lead. This means any paint or coating, when tested, contains greater than 0.5
wt% or 1 mg/cm2 lead when dry. Job tasks covered include the removal or application of lead
based paints, performing hot work on any metal surface containing lead, handling lead contaminated
materials, machining lead containing metals, or any other maintenance or construction task having
potential exposure to lead.
1.3 Background
Lead has been used for many years in industrial and commercial applications. Employee exposure
to lead can be safely managed if appropriate controls are put in place. Proper engineering and
administrative controls coupled with good work practices and use of personal protective equipment
can virtually eliminate any risk of lead exposures.
Most exposures occur with inorganic lead via ingestion or inhalation routes of entry. During inhalation,
inorganic lead is not metabolized in the body, but is directly absorbed, distributed and excreted. The
rate depends on its chemical and physical form, also on dose, duration and exposure and on the
physiological characteristics of the exposed person (e.g. nutritional status and age). Once in the blood,
lead is distributed primarily among three compartments blood, soft tissue (kidney, bone marrow, liver,
and brain) and mineralizing tissue (bones and teeth). Absorption via the gastro-intestinal (GI) track
following ingestion is highly dependent upon the presence and levels of calcium, iron, fats and proteins
in the body.

2.0 Definitions
Permissible Exposure Limit - an exposure limit established by the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA). For lead the PEL is 50 g/m3 for an 8 hour shift. If the shift is greater than 8
hours the allowable exposure limit is calculated by the following formula:
For shirts greater than 8 hours, the allowable PELs are 40 g/m3 (10 hours) and 33 g/m3 (12 hours).
Action Level - OSHA term to express the level of a contaminant in which specific requirements (i.e. air
sampling, medical monitoring and control measures) must be done when the level is exceeded. The
action level for lead is 30 g/m3 for an 8 hour shift. If the shift is greater than 8 hours the adjusted
action level is calculated by the following formula:
Adjusted Action Level (g/m3) = 30 g/m3 x 8 hours / hours worked in a shift
For a 10 hour shift the action level is 26 g/m3.

For a 12 hour shift the action level is 20 g/m3
Lead Based Paint Any paint or coating containing greater than 0.5 wt% or 1 mg/cm2 lead when dry.
Non-Lead Based Material Any paint, coating, or metal containing amounts of lead that are less than
0.5 wt% or 0.1 mg/cm2 lead when dry.
Regulated Area - An area of appropriate distance from the work location based on the type of work
being conducted that is barricaded and has limited entry with the appropriate signage
XRF - X-Ray Florescence, an instant read-out sampling device which gives concentration of lead in
units of milligrams per square centimeter (mg/cm2)

In order to comply with regulatory requirements and protect workers and the environment from lead
contamination, maintenance and/or abatement work must be conducted in accordance with the
procedures outlined in BP NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance Manual. Management and
supervision must provide for the evaluation of potential lead exposure hazards and for the proper
management of control measures inclusive of proper training, resources, equipment and administrative
support. Employees must actively take responsibility for reducing their risk of exposure.
3.1 Regulatory Requirements
The OSHA Lead Standards, 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1910.1025, require employers conducting
construction activities involving lead or lead containing materials to:
Perform industrial hygiene monitoring;

Use engineering and work practice controls;
Develop written compliance programs;
Provide respiratory protection;
Provide protective clothing, equipment and hygiene facilities;
Conduct employee training;
Provide medical surveillance; and
Post signs at lead work areas where exposures exceed 50 ug/m3 to establish regulated areas.

3.2 Regulated Activities/Tasks
Specific activities/tasks covered by the regulatory standards include:

Abrasive blasting
Cleanup and removal of abrasive blasting material and containments;
Welding, grinding, cutting, and torch burning;
Manual scraping, sanding, and structure demolition;
Power tool cleaning (wire wheel buffing, needle guns, etc), heat gun applications;
Rivet busting, use of lead pots; and
Spray painting onto any material or coating containing lead.
Refer to Section 4.0 of the BP NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance Manual for
activity/task specific requirements.

Before working on Lead contaminated equipment, refer to Section 3.3, Roles and Responsibilities of
the BP NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance Manual.
Operating Supervisors:
Are responsible to verify that personnel receive proper lead training appropriate to their job
responsibilities and according to Section 3.1, of the NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance
Management Manual.
Must verify that proper risk evaluations are conducted to identify potential activities that may be
associated with lead-contaminated material and that the appropriate resources and equipment to
conduct any such lead abatement activities are provided.
Must verify that monitoring of any vessel or confined space associated with any lead abatement
activity is conducted before personnel enter and that the appropriate permit(s) are completed
according to the NAG Confined Space Entry Practice.
Must verify that all sampling and/or monitoring conducted to evaluate the potential for lead
exposure are documented and retained.
5.1 Lead Operation and Maintenance Program
Refer to Section 4.0 of the BP NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance Manual for further
clarification of these and other task specific requirements.
Minimum requirements necessary to perform lead operations and maintenance tasks:
Inspection of coatings and metals for lead content must be conducted prior to work being started.
Follow a written compliance program prior to work involving lead containing materials. (See site
specific work plan - Attachment A)

Onsite lead competent person for the job.

Train BP employees who will be working with lead containing materials initially and annually
thereafter. Contracted services must be in compliance with regulations.
Ensure employees who are required to wear a respirator are medically approved, fit tested and
trained on the use of the respirator annually.
Ensure employees who will be working in Lead Regulated Work Areas receive medical
surveillance initially and additional monitoring on a frequency based on their exposure level.
Communicate existence of lead work area to other employees and contractors in the area before
start of job.
Provide hand and face wash facilities.
During the job provide clean change areas if exposures are greater than the PEL, also provide
showers whenever feasible.
5.2 Requirements for Testing a Coating or Metal for Lead
Before maintenance, construction, abatement, or demolition work is to begin, the materials involved in
the job must be inspected to determine the presence or absence of lead containing materials. For
specific testing procedures involving collection of a paint chip sample or use of an XRF, refer to
Section 4.2 of the BP NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance Manual.
5.3 Training
All employees that are required to work with lead-contaminated equipment and/or materials must
attend the appropriate level of training course as defined by the BP NAG and DW Lead Operations
and Maintenance Manual.
Medical surveillance will be made available to any employee exposed over the action level > 30
days/year.
5.5 Waste Handling
All lead contaminated waste generated during any lead work will be collected (i.e. plastic sheeting
will be placed under the work) and placed in 35 gallon plastic hazardous waste drums.
Any waste drum containing lead contaminated personal protective equipment will be labeled in
accordance with state and federal regulations.
If the waste is found to be hazardous, the area under whose authority the waste was generated will
follow the procedures found in the areas BP Waste Management Manual.
5.6 Contractors
Contractors will be required to follow the requirements of this safe practice and maintain compliance
with the OSHA Lead Standard including the development of a lead compliance program and develop a
site specific work plan (See Appendix A) prior to performing work involving lead contaminated
materials.

5. 7 Lead Work Plan
APPENDIX A
LEAD WORK PLAN
Date: ________________________ to ________________________
Division: _______________________ Unit or Equipment: ___________________________
Work Description: ____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Work Practices/Engineering Controls to Reduce Exposure:

_________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Required PPE:
Half-Mask Air-Purifying Respirator, HEPA Filter Supplied-Air Respirator
Full-Face Air-Purifying Respirator, HEPA Filter Saranex coated Tyvek
Nitrile Gloves Boot Coverings Other: _____________________________
Decontamination: ___________________________________________________________________
Required Information & Training:
Lead Abatement Training Lead Warning Signs
Inform these affected employees: ______________________________________________________
Medical Surveillance (pre- & post-): Blood Lead Zinc Protoporphyrin (ZPP)
Air Monitoring: Area Personal Clearance
Hygiene Practices: ___________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________
Other: _____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________ ______________________
Job Representative Date
__________________________________________ ______________________
Contractor Date

NAG and DW Lead Operations and Maintenance Manual

29 CFR 1910.1025, OSHA Industry Lead Standard
29 CFR 1910.252, OSHA Welding, Cutting, and Brazing Standard
29 CFR 1926.62, OSHA General Construction Lead Standard
40 CFR 50.12, USEPA Clean Air Act
40 CFR 261, USEPA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)

Document Name Lead Management

Document # K0000002614 Issue Date 10/262006
Revision Date 10/262006 Next Review 10/262008
Industrial
Duane Health & Safety
Authority Custodian Jack Kogut
Hygiene
Kortsha Program Manager
Coordinator
Initial issue as controlled
document. Prior revision history
1.0 10/26/2006 Health & Safety Industrial Hygiene
located in hard-copy consolidated Program Manager Coordinator
manual.

http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/us_wl_dk_gom_hse:/content
BP NAG and DW Lead Operations 19 Jul
/hssems/gom_unified/UPS-US-SW-GOM-HSE-DOC-
and Maintenance Manual 2006
00542-2
Document Approval
Approver Title Date
Authority
Custodian

Page 1 of 27
Lifting Operations (Cranes, Hoists, Slings and Other Lifting

Equipment Inspection and Operation)
Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00052-2
Authority: Onshore U.S. BU Leader Custodian: Onshore U.S. BU

HSE Manager
Scope: Onshore U.S. Business Unit
Review Date: 10/06/03 Control Tier: Tier 2- OUSBU
1.0 Purpose/Scope
Lifting operations are an important aspect of BPs business. Mistakes made during lifting can result in
loss of life via, electrocution, falls crushing injuries, explosions and release of toxic substances. Property
damage and loss of production can be severe when lifts go wrong. Extreme caution must be used at all
times during lifting activities.
This standard provides minimum requirements for safe lifting operations and applies to all OUSBU
Operation Center facilities, construction sites, company leases, and pipeline right-of-ways. It applies to all
hoisting, lifting and rigging equipment and operations, including the hoisting and lifting equipment
utilized on drilling and work over rigs. Operations covered within the scope of this process are those
associated with lifting operations involving mobile cranes, overhead cranes, derricks, backhoes, gin pole
trucks, drilling rigs and work over rigs.
Wire rope, ratchet and pawl, or lever-operated hoists, such as come-alongs, are not included in this
Chapter and shall not be used as lifting devices. Only fit-for-service types of equipment shall be used for
lifting. Refer to the manufacturers requirements for the use, inspection and maintenance of this type of
equipment.
In addition to this standard, each Operations Center (OC) shall have an OC Lifting Champion who will
liaise with the OUSBU Lifting Authority.
2.0 Definitions
Competent one who is capable, by acquired knowledge, demonstrated skills and experience, of
identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, working conditions, or behaviors, which
are hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures
to eliminate them.
Crane - a machine used for lifting and lowering a load vertically. It may also move it horizontally. It has
a hoisting mechanism as an integral part of it.
Hoist an electric or air powered lifting device using either chain or wire rope as the lifting medium, or a
manually operated hoist actuated by a hand chain and utilizing chain as the lifting medium.
Mobile Crane a crane consisting of a rotating or fixed superstructure with power plant, operating
machinery, and boom, mounted on a base consisting of an automotive truck equipped with a power plant
for travel, or platform equipped with axles and rubber-tired wheels or crawler treads for travel. Mobile
cranes include wheel-mounted cranes, truck cranes, crawler cranes, gin trucks, etc.
Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00052-2 Print Date:6/9/2004
Page 2 of 27

3.1. An anti-two blocking device is equipment, which prevents the load blocks from coming into
physical contact with the head, or crown, blocks, which can result in damage to the lifting equipment
and a dropped load. Anti-two block devices must be installed on all cranes and hoists and must be
kept operational. Bypassing this device for any reason is prohibited.
3.2. All cranes, chain hoists, and lifting equipment shall be tested, inspected and maintained in
accordance with the applicable safety and health regulations and this program.
3.3. Only competent operators, lift leaders and riggers shall perform lifting operations.
3.4. Backhoes, track hoes, front-end loaders and similar earth moving equipment may be used only for
minor incidental lifting. Such use of this equipment shall comply with the equipment
manufacturers requirements, specifications and designs for lifting use.
3.5. The command STOP may be given by anyone and must be obeyed by everyone including the crane
or hoist operator.
3.6. Lifting will not commence unless an assessment of the lift has been completed and a competent
person has determined the lift method and equipment.
3.7. Lifting will not commence unless the load does not exceed the dynamic and/or static capacities of
the lifting equipment.
3.8. Lifting will not commence unless safety devices installed on lifting equipment are operational.
3.9. Lifting will not commence unless a competent person has visually examined all lifting devices and
equipment before each lift.

Onshore U.S. BU Lifting Authority - designated single point of contact to be responsible for
consistency and uniformity of application of lifting procedures throughout the OUSBU.
Operations Center Lifting Champion - designated lifting subject matter expert within the asset to
coordinate the implementation of the various aspects of this chapter.
Operating supervisors - responsible for implementing and enforcing this program.
Supervisors of crane, hoisting, rigging and lifting operations - shall be knowledgeable of the types of
operations under their supervision and the operational hazards of those activities. Supervisors are not
required to be qualified operators or riggers.
Competent Crane or Hoist Operator - one who has appropriate training, as outlined in this Standard
and with assurance by the OC, and demonstrated knowledge, competence and skill, in the safe operation
of the lifting equipment to be used.
Designated Lift Leader - one who has sufficient training, knowledge and experience to ensure a lift is
conducted in a safe manner, equipment is in safe condition, equipment is set up and positioned properly
and proper rigging equipment and techniques are used. This person is responsible for the overall lifting
operation.
Competent Rigger - one who has appropriate training, as outlined in this Standard and with assurance
determined by the OC, and demonstrated knowledge, competence and skill in the safe operation of the
Page 3 of 27
rigging equipment to be used.
Signal Person one charged with the responsibility of observing the load and lift and providing direct
instructions to the crane/hoist operator. The signal person shall have sufficient knowledge and experience
to ensure that the lift is not maneuvered in a manner creating a hazardous situation.
Competent Crane Inspector one who has met the qualifications of a crane operator.
Competent Rigging Inspector one who has met the qualifications of a rigger.
5.0 Procedure
5.1 - Overhead Cranes and Hoists
Overhead Crane and Hoist Maintenance

A preventive maintenance program based on the crane manufacturers recommendations shall be
established and all maintenance documentation shall be maintained.
Overhead Crane and Hoist Inspections

Manufacturers recommendations for inspections and equipment condition shall be followed.
Inspections of overhead hoists shall include items listed in Table 1 Overhead Hoist/Crane
Inspection Requirements. Particular attention shall be paid to the condition and correctness of all
sheaves used on lifting equipment. The written crane /hoist inspection verification must be
available upon request.
At a minimum, all overhead hoists shall be inspected as follows:

Before daily use (Documentation is not required).
Monthly (Documentation is required).
Annually (Documentation is required).
All deficiencies or hazards found during an inspection shall be corrected or repaired before the overhead
crane or hoist is placed into service. No crane, hoist, or sling shall be used until all deficiencies are
corrected.
Overhead Crane and Hoist Testing

Operational tests - Prior to initial use, all new and altered hoists shall be tested and documented
for the following functions:
Hoisting and lowering
Trolley travel
Bridge travel
Limit switches, locking and safety devices
Load tests - Prior to initial use, all new, extensively repaired or altered overhead cranes and
hoists shall be load tested. A report confirming the load rating of the equipment shall be
furnished and kept on file. Tests shall not exceed 125 percent of the rated load. The rated
load of each hoist shall be plainly marked on each side of the hoist. This marking must be
clearly legible from the ground/floor level. It is not necessary to mark the traveling beam,
but it is a good practice.
5.2 - Mobile Cranes
This section applies to crawler cranes, wheel mounted cranes of both truck and self-propelled type and
any variations, which have the same fundamental characteristics. This section includes requirements for
autocranes and gang trucks, gin trucks, boom trucks or winch trucks.
Page 4 of 27
A preventive maintenance program based on the crane manufacturers recommendations shall

be established and all maintenance documentation shall be maintained.
Inspections
Manufacturers recommendations for inspections and equipment condition shall be followed.
Inspections of cranes shall include items listed in Table 2 Mobile Crane Inspection
Requirements. Generic checklists (Crawler, Truck And Wheel Mounted Crane Inspection
Checklist, Mobile Crane Operator Daily Inspection Checklist, and Winch Truck Inspection
Checklist) are provided; the manufacturers equipment specific checklists shall be obtained and
utilized. The written crane /hoist inspection verification must be available upon request. At a
minimum, all cranes shall be inspected as follows:
Visual before daily use (Documentation is not required).
All deficiencies or hazards found during an inspection shall be corrected or repaired before the overhead
crane or hoist is placed into service. No crane, hoist, or sling shall be used until all deficiencies are
corrected.
Mobile Crane Requirements

All mobile cranes, winch trucks and similar equipment shall have an accurate load-rating chart
affixed to the unit in plain view of the operator when the crane is being used. A crane capacity
evaluation shall be completed before a lift is attempted. The evaluation shall include the gross
load, boom radius, boom angle, boom length, and jib length. The crane load chart should be
consulted to obtain the gross capacity percentile of the crane as configured. It is recommended
that the gross capacity not exceed 75% of total rate capacity.
Load tests - Prior to initial use, all new, extensively repaired or altered overhead cranes and
hoists shall be load tested. A report confirming the load rating of the equipment shall be
furnished and kept on file. Tests shall not exceed 125 percent of the rated load. The rated load of
each hoist shall be plainly marked on each side of the hoist. This marking must be clearly
legible from the ground/floor level. It is not necessary to mark the traveling beam, but it is a
good practice.
5.3 - Wire Ropes, Chains, and Slings
Safe rigging practices shall be followed at all times.

The use of wire rope, chains, slings and associated fittings shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers recommended guidelines.
All lifting equipment shall be visually inspected for damage before use. No documentation of
this before use inspection is necessary. Synthetic fabric slings, wire rope slings and steel alloy
chain slings must have a legible load rating attached. If the load rating is missing or cannot be
read, the sling shall not be used.
Prior to the initial use, any new, repaired or reconditioned chain sling, shall be proof-tested by
the manufacturer and applicable certification kept on file.
Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts. Knots are never to be used with any sling,
chain, or wire rope.
Slings shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the sling.
Employees shall not place hands or fingers between the sling and the load.
Any sling found defective shall be removed from service immediately and destroyed. Refer to
the manufacturers specifications on when a sling is defective.
All chain slings used for lifting shall be grade 80, or better, alloy steel chain.
All slings, shackles, eyebolts, and wire rope shall be inspected preceding a lift. This inspection
shall be performed in addition to the monthly and annual inspections. Any damaged or defective
Page 5 of 27
components shall be replaced. Replaced components shall be destroyed or retired in a manner

that prevents them from being used again.
Sling Inspections
Inspections of slings shall include items listed in Table 3 Sling and Rigging Attachment
Inspection Requirements. A generic checklist (Hardware/Chains/Wire Rope/Slings
Checklist) is provided; the manufacturers equipment specific checklists shall be
obtained and utilized. The written sling inspection verification must be available upon
request. At a minimum, all slings shall be inspected as follows:
Before daily use (Documentation is not required).
All deficiencies or hazards found during an inspection shall be corrected or repaired before the sling is
placed into service. No crane, hoist, or sling shall be used until all deficiencies are corrected.
5.4 Drilling and Well Servicing Rigs
Drilling and Well Servicing rigs will be maintained and inspected in accordance with the manufacturers
and American Petroleum Institutes (APIs) specifications. Inspections of drilling and well servicing rigs
shall include items listed in Tables 4 and 5, respectively. Generic checklists (Load Path Inspection
Drilling Rig Checklist and Load Path Inspection Well Servicing Rig Checklist) are provided; the
manufacturers equipment specific checklists shall be obtained and utilized. All inspection and
maintenance documentation shall be available for review upon request.
5.5 General Safety Rules
Standard Hand Signals

Hand signals to the mobile crane operator shall be in accordance with the standards prescribed in
OSHA regulations for the type of crane being used, unless voice communications equipment
(telephone, radio, or equivalent) is used. Signals shall be discernible or audible at all times.
Some special operations may require addition to or modification of the basic signals. For all
such cases, these special signals shall be agreed upon and thoroughly understood by both the
person giving the signals and the operator, and shall not be in conflict with the standard signals.
An illustration of the signals shall be available at the job site. See Attachment 1 Standard Hand
Signals for Crane Operators. Immediate communication is always required between the operator
and the lift leader/signal person. One individual shall be designated as the signal person and
communicates with the operator. This individual should be positioned to have continuous visual
contact with the operator. If visual contact cannot be maintained, a Critical Lift Assessment and
Plan must be completed. Alternate means of continuous communication must be used, i.e. radio,
telephone or equivalent. If communication is interrupted or lost the operator must stop moving
the load immediately until communication is re-established.
Moving and Lifting the Load
o Each lift shall have a JSA completed prior to the lift.

o Each lift involving two or more persons shall have a signal person.
o Hoisting and rigging operations for all lifts require a designated lift leader, who shall be
present at the lift site during the entire lifting operation. The lift leader designation may
be by written instructions, specific verbal instructions for the particular job, or clearly
defined responsibilities within the crews organizational structure. If only one person is
making the lift, that person assumes all responsibilities of the designated lift leader.
The designated lift leader shall make certain the load is correctly rigged. It is
recommended that Lift Leader not be the same person as the crane operator.
Page 6 of 27
o All personnel in the vicinity of the crane operations who are not directly involved with
the lift shall stay out of the area of maximum boom radius. If necessary, the area shall
be barricaded to keep personnel out.
o Loads shall not be carried over people. Personnel shall not pass under suspended loads
or the loaded crane boom. Never allow anyone to get close or under the load.
o Work on suspended loads is prohibited. Suspended loads include the lifting hook,
rigging, spreader bars and any other attachments below the lifting hook.
o No one shall be on the load, hook or rigging during hoisting, lowering or swinging of
the load, or traveling of the lifting equipment except as noted in the Critical Lifts
section this procedure.
o If the load must remain suspended for any considerable length of time, the load shall be
physically immobilized with a positive acting mechanical device.
o Tag lines shall be used to control the load. Tags lines will minimize the danger of
grabbing or touching the load. Usually at least two tag lines are needed.
o The load shall be secured and balanced in the sling or lifting device before it is lifted
more than a few inches.
Lifts
Lift leader shall be present at the site during lift operations.

A Job Safety Analysis and Risk Assessment shall be completed when the velocity
of wind exceeds 20 mph, or lower if so indicated by the manufacturer. Do not lift
loads when winds create an unsafe or hazardous condition, regardless of wind
speed. Lifting operations shall be suspended when wind speeds reach 30 miles per
hour.
If the visibility of the riggers, hoist crew or load is impaired by weather conditions
such as dust, snow, rain, fog or darkness, lifting operations must be suspended.
All employees shall be kept clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads.
It is recognized that operators on the floors of drilling or service rigs may work in
direct proximity to suspended loads and may have portions of their bodies under
the load. This shall be controlled to a minimum by the use of Risk Assessment
tools and Job Safety Analyses addressing the specific hazards and their control
during these operations.
All personnel shall keep hands out of pinch points while slack is removed from
slings and load lines.
The gross load should not exceed the dynamic or static capabilities of the lifting
equipment. An evaluation of crane capacity shall be completed for each lift and
kept for the duration of the job. Any load exceeding 80% of the rated crane
capability, at the boom angle that is required to complete the lift should be
considered a Critical Lift.
Power lines are a high potential hazard during any lifting operation. Power lines
within twice the maximum swing radius of the crane, plus the required clearance,
constitutes a Critical Lift. The minimum clearance between the maximum boom
extension, load or load line and a power line is ten (10) feet for all voltages up to 50
kilovolts (kV). Higher voltage lines required greater clearances as indicated below.
Normal Voltage (phase to phase) Minimum required clearance

To 50 kV 10 ft
Over 50 to 200 kV 15 ft
Over 200 to 350 kV 20 ft.
Over 750 to 1000 kV 45 ft.
Critical Lifts
Page 7 of 27
o Additional precautions shall be taken for operations determined to be Critical Lifts. A

critical lift is one in which the dropping, upset, or collision of parts, components, or
assemblies, could present a potentially unacceptable risk of personnel injury or property
damage. Or it is a lifting designated as a critical lift by the OC because of special
circumstances or hazards.
o The designated lift leader in charge of each critical lift shall prepare a Job Safety
Analysis, Risk Assessment, lifting permit and a critical lift plan for safe performance of
the lift. The critical lift plan, JSA and RA must be communicated to, discussed with,
and approved by all personnel involved in the critical lift.
o Examples of critical lifts included, but are not limited to:
Lifting of personnel. All Lifts of personnel utilizing man baskets must conform to 29
CFR 1926.550 (g).
Lifting where electric power lines are within twice the maximum swing radius of the
crane, plus the required clearance.
Lifting where the crane operator cannot see the load.
Lifting directly over energized or pressurized equipment.
The use of two or more cranes to simultaneously lift one load.
Lifts exceeding 80% of the crane capacity.
Lifts to be made over normally occupied facilities
Lifting Permit
The Lifting Permit must be completed prior to operations using a winch truck, mobile crane or
any lift determined to be a Critical Lift.
The following guidance is provided for completing the Lifting Permit.

o Expired Lifting Permits shall be kept on file at the Operating Center for one month
beyond their expiration date.
o All permit line items shall be completed. Signatures are required on the permit and all
areas requiring signatures shall have the signatures in place.
o The load weight should include the weight of the load, block, ball, lattice extension, jib,
hoist rope, rigging and any other weight that would affect the gross load.
o The crane / hoist must be inspected as required by this Standard.
o A Critical Lift Assessment must be performed before every lift. A YES response to
any of the critical lift questions requires the lift leader to perform a Critical Lift Plan.
o Procedures that call for the lifting of personnel by a crane or derrick are prohibited,
unless it can be demonstrated that no other means are available or that all other options
are more hazardous. Scaffolding, man lift devices, erection of temporary work
platforms are a few alternatives to crane lifts. If personnel need to be lifted by means of
a crane it is a Critical Lift. The mandatory requirements for lifting personnel can be
found in the OSHA regulations 29CFR1926.550(g). The OSHA regulations shall be
followed exactly.
o When eye bolts or other lifting attachments are used they must be verified to be of
sufficient strength and used in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. The
name of the individual that has verified the mode of attachment must be entered in the
permit.
o During the planning of the lift, if clearances from structures are a concern, an individual
must be stationed so they can observe the clearance and warn of any impeding danger.
o If the potential exists for people to move into the area of the lift, a person shall be
assigned to control access to the area.
o During Critical Lifts a diagram of the lift and rigging must be prepared.
6.0 Competency
Page 8 of 27
6.1. Lift Leader competency

This defines the competency necessary for the planning, implementation, and post-action review of
lifting operations involving, but not limited only to operation of cranes, hoists and lifting equipment,
and the inspection of such equipment. Lift Leaders shall be trained and certified to the level of
competency consistent with their assigned role.
To be competent as a lift leader, the person shall:

Be designated as a competent Lift Leader by their employer. This competency is based
on acquired classroom knowledge, demonstrated skills and testing.
Understand the requirements associated with Rigger/Signaler and Crane/Hoist
Complete a formal Lift Leader training program, or equivalent.
Receive practical operations training.
Satisfactorily pass a written examination covering all aspects of Lift Operations and
demonstrate practical knowledge through demonstrated actions. .
6.2. Crane and Hoist operator competency
This defines the personnel competency necessary for the operation of cranes, hoists and lifting
equipment, and the inspection of such equipment. Only competent personnel shall perform lifting
operations. Personnel who operate equipment or perform lifting operations shall be trained and
certified to the level of competency consistent with their assigned role.
To be competent as a crane and hoist operator, the person shall:

Be designated as a competent operator by their employer to operate cranes and/or hoists.
This competency is based on acquired classroom knowledge, demonstrated skills and
testing.
Meet the requirements of a competent rigger and signaler.
Complete a formal operator training program, or equivalent.
Receive practical operations training.
Satisfactorily pass a written examination covering crane and hoist operational
characteristics, controls, emergency control skills and inspections.
Complete an actual, or simulated, practical operating skill evaluation test for the specific
type of equipment for which the operator is being evaluated.
Demonstrate the ability to read and comprehend load capacity charts, in the language of
the crane manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction materials.
Satisfactorily complete an evaluation on load chart usage that covers a selection of the
operating configurations for the specific type of equipment.
A competent crane operator is also considered competent to perform the pre-use, initial, monthly
and annual crane inspections as described in this procedure.
6.3. Competency for Rigger/Signaler
This defines the personnel competency necessary for the conduct of rigging and signaling
activities and the inspection of rigging equipment. Only competent personnel shall perform
rigging and signaling. Personnel shall be trained and certified to the level of competency
consistent with their assigned role.
To be competent as a rigger, the person shall:

Be designated as a competent rigger by their employer to perform rigging activities. This
designation is based on experience, classroom training and field training in rigging.
Complete a formal rigging training program, or equivalent.
Page 9 of 27
Receive practical operations experience training.

Satisfactorily pass a written examination covering the use and characteristics of the
various rigging equipment to be used.
Complete an actual, or simulated, practical rigging skill evaluation test, that requires the
use of rigging equipment in safe configurations and demonstrates competency and basic
knowledge in handling the specific type of equipment for which the person is being
evaluated.
Demonstrate the ability to read and comprehend sling capacity charts.
A competent rigger is also considered competent to perform the pre-use, initial, monthly and
annual rigging inspections as described in this procedure.
Signal personnel are competent by experience and knowledge of the appropriate hand signals for
crane and rigging operations. Signal persons will generally be competent riggers.
7.0 Training
Safety and health regulations require that only trained and qualified personnel operate cranes, hoists, and
lifting equipment and perform rigging. OCs, contractors and subcontractors shall provide training
programs for their crane operators, riggers and inspectors. Training programs shall be based on the needs
of the individual OC.
As a minimum the Lift Leader competency training as appropriate to type of equipment shall
include:
The information in the Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Standard Lifting Operations
(Cranes, Hoists, Slings and Other Lifting Equipment Inspection and Operation)
BPs Golden Rules for Lifting Operations
Pre-Job Risk Assessment Procedures
Operating characteristics and practices.
Weather hazards.
Electrical and power line hazards.
Traveling with and without load.
Inspections and tests.
Lifting capacity, load weight estimation, load dynamics, stability, load radius, boom
angle and load charts, and crane setup and outriggers.
Block Basics and Application
Emergency procedures.
Rigging and Slings.
Communication techniques- hand signals
Safety features of equipment.
Wire ropes and reeving.
Two-blocking and prevention.
Limit switches and warning devices.
Crane components and structures
Boom structure.
Lift planning.
Critical Lifts
Multi-Crane Lifts
Suspended Personnel Platforms
Documentation & Records
Page 10 of 27
As a minimum crane and hoist operator competency training as appropriate to type of equipment
shall include:
The information in the Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Standard Lifting
Operations (Cranes, Hoists, Slings and Other Lifting Equipment Inspection and
Operation)
Operating characteristics and practices.
Weather hazards.
Traveling with and without load.
Lifting capacity, load weight estimation, load dynamics, stability, load radius, boom
angle and load charts, and crane setup and outriggers.
Block Basics and Application
Emergency procedures.
Rigging.
Two-blocking and prevention.
Limit switches and warning devices.
Crane components and structures
Boom structure.
Lift planning.
Critical Lifts
Multi-Crane Lifts
Suspended Personnel Platforms
As a minimum rigger/ signaler competency training will be fit for purpose and shall include:
The information in the Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Standard Lifting Operations
(Cranes, Hoists, Slings and Other Lifting Equipment Inspection and Operation)
Stability of equipment.
Operating characteristics of equipment.
Weather hazards.
Traveling with load and load control.
Load weight estimation and lifting capacity.
Lift planning.
Sling types and application, sling configurations, sling handling and storage and
rejection criteria
Sling angles and their effects
Hooks and rigging hardware and accessories.
Unbinding loads.
Load stability.
Applicable standards and regulations.
D/d ratio.
Page 11 of 27
Re-qualification
Operator, rigger/signaler, and inspector competency is for a period not to exceed 3 years, unless the
employees supervisor revokes the competency sooner.
The program for re-qualification includes:
Satisfying the requirements for competency or,

Completion of a written or verbal skills evaluation or,
Participating in company sponsored refresher training or,
Completion of a performance evaluation.
Training and record keeping for BP or contractor personnel are the responsibility of the employer.
Records will be available for review.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR, Part 1910.179, 180, 181,
and184.
American National Standards Institute, ANSI B30.2.0, B30.5, B30.9, B30.10, B30.11, B30.16, B30.17.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR, Part 1926.550 (g).
gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.
Mobile Crane Operator Daily Inspection Checklist (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00088-2)
Crawler, Truck And Wheel Mounted Crane Inspection Checklist (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-

00089-2)
Hardware, Chains, Wire Rope, Slings Checklist (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00090-2)
Load Path Inspection - Well Servicing Rig Checklist (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00091-2)
Load Path Inspection - Drilling Rig Checklist (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00092-2)
Winch Truck Inspection Checklist (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00086-2)
OUSBU Lifting Permit (UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00093-2)
Revision Log
Revision Date Authority Reviser Revision Details
October 6, 2003 Tim Holt Lifting Immersion Theme Rework Sect. 3, Chapter
Team 3 of Safety Standard,
addition of check lists,
competency/training
Page 12 of 27
Attachment 1
Standard Hand Signals for Crane Operators
Page 13 of 27
Page 14 of 27
Table I
Overhead Hoist/Crane Inspection Requirements
Pre- Monthly Annual
use
1. All functional operating mechanisms, including hoist limit X X X
switches, for maladjustment, which would interfere with proper
operation.
2. Air or hydraulic systems, where applicable, for leaks or X X X
deterioration.
3. Inspect hooks for deformation or cracks, or lack of safety latch. X X X
All hooks must have functional safety latches in good condition.
Hooks that are bent, cracked, or twisted shall be discarded and
replaced.
4. Inspect hoist or load attachment chains, including end connections, X X X
for excessive wear and for twisted or distorted links that would
interfere with proper function or which stretch beyond the
manufacturers recommendations.
5. Inspect any sling assembly, including end connections, for X X
excessive wear, broken strands or wires, stretch, kinking or
twisting.
6. Inspect all functional operating mechanisms for excessive wear of X X
components.
7. Rope reeving for compliance with manufacturers X X
recommendations
8. Deformed, cracked or corroded members. X
9. Loose bolts or rivets. X
10. Cracked or worn sheaves and drums. X
11. Worn, cracked or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, shafts, X
gears, rollers, and locking and clamping devices.
12. Excessive wear on brake system parts, linings, pawls and ratchets. X
13. Excessive wear on chain drive sprockets and excessive chain X
stretch.
14. Crane hooksmagnetic particle detection or other suitable crack- X
detecting inspection shall be performed if any cracks are detected
or suspected.
15. Electrical apparatus, for signs of pitting or any deterioration of X
controller contactors, limit switches and push-button stations.
16. Load, wind and other indicators work over their full range for X
significant inaccuracies
17. Internal combustion, electric or other power plants for improper X
performance or hazards.
Page 15 of 27
Table 2
Mobile Crane Inspection Requirements
Pre- Monthly Annual
use
1. All control mechanisms for maladjustment interfering X X X
with proper operation.
2. All safety devices for malfunction, including anti-2 X X X
block devices, back up alarms and load computers.
Bypassing any safety device is prohibited.
3. Deterioration or leakage in air or hydraulic systems. X X X
4. All control mechanisms for excessive wear of X X
components and contamination by lubricants or other
foreign matter.
5. Crane hooks with deformations or cracks. X X
6. Rope reeving for noncompliance with manufacturer's X X
recommendations.
7. Electrical apparatus for malfunctioning, signs of X X
excessive deterioration, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
8. Deformed, cracked, or corroded members in the crane X
structure and boom.
9. Loose bolts or rivets. X
10. Cracked or worn sheaves and drums. X
11. Worn, cracked, or distorted parts such as pins, bearings, X
shafts, gears, rollers and locking devices.
12. Excessive wear on brake and clutch system parts, X
linings, pawls, and ratchets.
13. Load, boom angle, and other indicators over their full X
range, for any significant inaccuracies.
14. Gasoline, diesel, electric, or other power plants for X
improper performance or noncompliance with safety
requirements.
15. Excessive wear of chain-drive sprockets and excessive X
chain stretch.
16. Travel steering, braking, and locking devices, for X
malfunction.
17. Excessively worn or damaged tires. X
Page 16 of 27
Table 3
Sling and Rigging Attachment Inspection Requirements
Pre- Monthly Annual
use
1. . All slings and fastenings are free from defects or X X X
damage.
2. . Alloy steel chain slings with cracked master links, X X
coupling links or other components
3. . Alloy steel chain slings wear, defective welds, X
deformation and increased length.
4. . Alloy steel chain slings shall be removed from service if X
hooks are cracked, have been opened more than 15% of
the normal throat opening or twisted more than 10
degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.
5. . Wire rope slings for 10 randomly distributed broken X X
wires in one rope lay or five broken wires
6. Wire rope slings wear or scraping of one-third the X X
original diameter of outside individual wires.
7. Wire rope slings kinking, crushing, bird caging or any X X
other damage resulting in distortion of the wire rope
structure.
8. Wire rope slings evidence of heat damage. X X
9. Wire rope slings end attachments that are cracked, X X
deformed or worn.
10. Wire rope slings hooks that have been opened more X X
than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured
at the narrowest point or twisted more than 10 degrees
from the plane of the unbent hook.
11. Wire rope slings corrosion of the rope or end X X
attachments.
12. Synthetic web slings acid or caustic burns; X X
13. Synthetic web slings melting or charring of any part of X X
the sling surface;
14. Synthetic web slings snags, punctures, tears or cuts; X X
15. Synthetic web slings broken or worn stitches; X X
16. Synthetic web slings distortion of fittings. X X
17. Synthetic web slings appearance of wear/overload X X
indicator threads.
Page 17 of 27
Table 4
Drilling Rig Load Path Inspection Requirements
DRILLING LINE TIE DOWN ANCHOR Days Month Year
Are proper bolts and nuts in place and in good condition 7

API RP 8B Cat. II
Is the anchor body free of cracks or damage API RP 8B 6
Cat. III
Complete range of motion 1
Is the sensor body in good condition (properly attached 1
to weight indicator)
Are the fittings in good condition without hydraulic oil 1
leaks
Is the line properly installed on anchor 1
All the bolts & dies (if required) in place & tight (proper 6
size for line use) API RP 8B Cat. II
Is the tie down free of oil & grease 1
Perform a visual inspection of the deadline anchor each rig up API RP 8B Cat. I
CROWN Days Month Year
Are the crown sheaves API stamped conforming to API 5

Spec 8A and/or API Spec 8C
Is the crown attached to mast or derrick w/ proper bolts, 1
washers & locking nuts API RP 8B Cat. I
Are the crown beams in good condition, no bent beams 1
Are the pillar blocks anchored properly & in good 1
condition
Are all cluster & fast line sheaves free of cracks - API 5
RP 8B Category IV
Have all sheaves been gauged for wear, proper sheave 6
size for line size - API AP 9B
Are all sheaves free of nicks, gouges & sheave shoulder 6
damage - API AP 9B
Have all bearings been inspected - API RP 8B Cat. III 6
Are all the bearing seals in good condition 1
Are the tine keeper bars in place, sound and secured 1
Is the crown shafts anchored with bolts and locking nuts 1
Is the safety mesh and blocks in good condition 1
Perform a visual inspection of the crown each rig up API RP 8B Cat. I
Page 18 of 27
Table 4 continued
MAST/DERRICK Days Month Year
Does the mast / derrick have a valid API derrick 5

certification available API RP 8B Category IV (This
will be a detailed inspection of all load bearing
equipment including pipe tongs, load bearing top drive
components (for top drive rigs), kelly, swivel, elevators,
links, link adapters, traveling block, connectors, hook,
crown, line anchor, BOP hoisting equipment, brake
bands, brake linkage & assembly, derrick lifting pad
eyes, lugs, etc, using nondestructive means, such as a
magnetic particle inspection, dye penetration,
radiography, ultrasonic, etc.)
Has the rig had a Load Path inspection by a qualified 3rd 1
party inspection company conducted within the past year
Are all beams straight 1
Are pins and bolts with safety pins in good condition 1
No cracked welds 1
Is the standpipe and hose properly anchored to the derrick per API Spec 8A and API Spec 8C
Is the rotary hose properly secured with safety cable to derrick leg
Have all critical repairs been made at time of recognition and follow up inspection
Does the contractor perform a visual inspection on each rig up following API RP 4G Appendix
A field inspection
RAISING LINES Days Month Year
Is the line free of rust and corrosion 1

Are the sockets, pins & keepers in good condition 1
Are wickers in the raising lines 1
Are kinks in the line(s) 1
Are the sockets solid 1
Are the lines secured properly 1
Are the raising line sheaves in good condition 1
Are all the sheave pins secured 1
Documented date that the lines were installed
Is there a wire rope management system in place to determine inspection and replacement
procedures - API RP 4G
A field inspection
Page 19 of 27
Table 4 continued
DRILLING LINE Days Month Year
Is the drill line visually inspected daily 1
Are the ton miles properly calculated per manufacture 1

recommendation
Are there kinks in line 1
Are there wickers in line 1
Is the line stored off of the ground
Is the proper size line installed
Is the ton mile book current - API RP 9B
TRAVELING BLOCKS & HOOK Days Month Year
Does the sheaves / shafts have a valid API 5 year 5

certification available API RP 8B Category IV
Have all bearings been inspected API RP 8B Category 6
III
Are the sheave dividers in place & not bent API RP 8B 6
Category III
Are all bolts tight & secured 1
Is the becket & bail in good condition Any wear 1
Are the becket & bail pins in place and secured 1
Is the hook & hook latch in good condition 1
Is the hook-swivel contact surface in good condition 1
Do the elevator link ears comply with API 1 year 1

Do the elevator links comply with API 1 year 1
Do the elevators comply with API 1 year certification 1
available API RP 8B Category IV
A field inspection
Page 20 of 27
Table 4 continued
SWIVEL Days Month Year
Does the swivel / bail eyes / bail pins comply with API 2 2
year certification available API RP 8B Category IV
Has the body been inspected for cracks API RP 8B 6
Category III
Has the swivel stem been inspected for cracks API RP 6
8B Category III
Has the swivel sub been inspected for cracks & damaged 1
threads
Are flanges (top & bottom) bolts in place & tight 1
No oil leaks 1
Does the gooseneck / hose / standpipe comply with API RP 7L
Is the rotary hose properly secured with safety cable API Spec 7K or API RP 7L
KELLY & SAVER SUB Days Month Year
Is the kelly saver sub visually inspected daily for thread 1

wear
Is the kelly straight 1
Is the kelly connections been inspected before each well API RP 7G
Is the kelly saver sub inspected before each well API RP 7G
DRAWWORKS Days Month Year
Are eye bolts inspected and free of cracks or damage - 5

API RP 8B Category IV
Is the drilling line properly anchored to drum 1
Are the line guides properly installed 1
Are the kick pads proper size & properly placed to 1
reduce line cut in
Are the brake flanges in good condition (wear 1
monitored)
No water jacket leaks in brake flanges 1
Are the brake pads in good condition 1
Are the brake pads properly installed to brake bands- 1
bolts secure
Are brake bands visually inspection daily 1
Are eye bolt, nuts & jam nuts in good condition & tight 1
Page 21 of 27
All pins, bushings in brake linkage in good condition (no 1

wear)
Table 4 continued
Are the equalizer & equalizer pins in good condition 1
Are the brakes adjusted properly 1
No kick back on brake handle when draw works is 1
engaged
Are brakes & flanges free of oil and grease 1
No welds on brake bands other than factory (no weld across bands, length wise welds only)
Is the draw works properly anchored to sub
Have the brake bands been inspected - API RP 8B Category IV
AUXILARY LIFTING EQUIPMENT Days Month Year
Inspect all lifting/hoisting chains, slings, straps & cables 1

Are air hoists / winches in good condition 1
Are hoists mounted properly 1
Is the brake in good condition & adjusted properly 1
Is the hoist cable in good condition with a factory 1
thimbled eye
Hook & attachments rated, tagged and in good condition
1
with register
All lifting and hoisting chains grade 80 or 100 with 1
proper hooks and attachments
Only rated 80 or100 grade suspending equipment 1
All lifting / hoisting equipment inspected & measured 1
to tags
Are the hoisting/lifting equipment tags legible and 1
permanently attached
Are the rig floor hoists used for man riding are certified for man-riding
Does the rig have a written permit system for man-riding when using rig floor mounted hoists
A lifting equipment (wire rope, chains, hooks, shackles, connecting links, etc) register is being
used and available on site, with in-service dates, size, and length and inspection date.
Does the rig have a rig specific and documented Dropped Object Prevention program which
includes detailed derrick equipment inventory, risk and control assessments, inspection
protocols and feedback process
Draw works catheads are not being used for any lifting or make-up and are guarded or have
been removed
SUSPENDING EQUIPMENT
Are floor support cables and chains in good condition Grade 80 or 100 and tagged
Is the proper clevis in use
Page 22 of 27
Are proper floor support pockets in use

Are work floor support hinges in good condition and pinned properly
Table 4 continued
Inspection frequencies are based on and should follow API Recommended Practice 8B,
Seventh Edition, March 2002 for Procedures for Inspections, Maintenance, Repair and
Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment. This above mentioned API Recommended Practice
clearly outlines the specific Category and Frequency for inspection and maintenance routines.
Reference Title
API Specification 4F Drilling and Well Servicing Structures
API Recommended Practice 4G Maintenance and Use of Drilling and Well
Servicing Structures
API Recommended Practice 7G Drill Stem Design and Operating Limits
API Specification 7K Drilling and Well Servicing Equipment
API Recommended Practice 7L Inspection, Maintenance, Repair and
Remanufacture of Drilling Equipment
API Specification 8A Drilling and Production Hoisting Equipment
API Recommended Practice 8B Procedures for Inspections, Maintenance, Repair
and Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment
API Specification 8C Drilling and Production Hoisting Equipment
API Specification 9A Wire Rope
API Recommended Practice 9B Application, Care and Use of Wire Rope for
Oilfield Service
Page 23 of 27
Table 5
Well Servicing Rig Load Path Inspection Requirements
TUBING LINE, TIE DOWN ANCHOR Days Month Year
Perform a visual inspection of the tie down anchor each 1

rig up
Is the line properly installed on anchor 1
Tie down mounting inspected daily 1
Line guide rod in place 1
Clamp secured in anchor 1
Are proper bolts and nuts in place and in good condition API RP 8B Cat. II
CROWN Days Month Year
Perform a visual inspection of the crown each rig up 1

API RP 8B Cat. I
Are the crown beams in good condition, no bent beams 1
Are the pillar blocks anchored properly & in good 1
condition
All cluster and fast line sheaves free of cracks. Visual 1
each rig up.
Have all sheaves been gauged for wear, proper sheave 6
size for line size - API AP 9B
Are all sheaves free of nicks, gouges & sheave shoulder 6
damage - API AP 9B
Have all bearings been inspected - API RP 8B Cat. III 6
Are all the bearing seals in good condition 1
Are the tine keeper bars in place, sound and secured 1
Adequate line keeper gap 1
Are all cluster & fast line sheaves free of cracks API 1
RP 8B Category IV
Pillow blocks and shafts anchored with proper bolts and 1
locking nuts (inspected)
Is the crown attached to mast or derrick w/ proper bolts, washers & locking nuts API RP 8B
Cat. I
Page 24 of 27
Table 5 continued
MAST/DERRICK Days Month Year
Does the mast / derrick have a valid API derrick 5

certification available API RP 8B Category IV (This
will be a detailed inspection of all load bearing
equipment including pipe tongs, load bearing top drive
components (for top drive rigs), kelly, swivel, elevators,
links, link adapters, traveling block, connectors, hook,
crown, line anchor, BOP hoisting equipment, brake
bands, brake linkage & assembly, derrick lifting pad
eyes, lugs, etc, using nondestructive means, such as a
magnetic particle inspection, dye penetration,
Has the rig had a Load Path inspection by a qualified 3rd 1
party inspection company conducted within the past year
Does the contractor perform a visual inspection on each 1
rig up following API RP 4G Appendix A field inspection
Have all critical repairs been made at time of recognition 1
and follow up inspection
Does the gooseneck / hose / standpipe comply with API 1
RP 7L
Is the rotary hose properly secured with safety cable 1
API Spec 7K or API RP 7L
Are all hydraulic lines properly secured in derrick 1
No cracked welds 1
Are all beams and braces straight 1
Are the raising cylinder or cylinders anchor points, pins 1
with keepers free of wear or cracks
Are there hydraulic leaks on the raising cylinder(s) 1
Insure that the latch dogs are in good working order, 1
lubricated and flagged
Are all pins with keepers 1
Are the tail pin screws not out over 6 of threads 1
Are steel mats under the load bearing portion of the rig 1
and jacks where the foundation is questionable
Are all ropes tied back when not in use 1
Do all blocks and sheaves have secondary retention 1
Are only approved clevis in use at tongs and above bolt 1
/ nut / key
Are all guy lines in good condition 1
Are all crown guy wires 5/8 minimum with factory 1
thimble eyes and proper clevis with proper sag (+/-10)
Page 25 of 27
Table 5 continued
Are the tubing board guy wires 9/16 minimum crossed 1
with factory thimble eyes and proper clevis
Are the back lines in good condition, properly anchored 1
at crown, carrier with factory thimbled eyes and proper
clevis
TUBING LINE & SAND LINE Days Month Year
Is the tubing and sand line visually inspected daily 1

Are there wickers in the lines 1
Are there kinks in lines 1
Are the lines free of rust and corrosion 1
Is the proper size line installed for the sheaves 1
Is there a wire rope management system in place to determine inspection and replacement
procedures - API RP 4G
CARRIER Days Month Year
No cracked welds in the frame 1

Are the jack(s) in good condition with good foundation 1
Are the derrick braces, pockets and pins in good 1
condition
TRAVELLING EQUIPMENT Days Month Year
Does the bearings / sheaves / shafts have a valid API 5 5

year certification available API RP 8B Category IV
Are the sheave dividers in place & not bent API RP 8B 1
Category III
Are all bolts tight & secured 1
Is the becket & bail in good condition Any wear 1
Do the elevator links comply with API 1 year 1
Do the rod hook and elevators comply with API 1 year 1
Is the rod transfer in good condition with safety ring 1
Eye good
A field inspection
TUBING DRUM & SAND DRUM Days Month Year
Are all guards in place 1

Is the line properly tied back for pick up weight 1
Are there any kinks or broken wires 1
Page 26 of 27
Table 5 continued
Is the line properly mounted on drum 1
Is there 5 wraps on the tubing drum at ground level 1
Is there 7 wraps on the tubing drum at floor level (Max 1
6)
Is there 2-1/2/3 wraps on deadline anchor, correctly 1
wrapped, clamp secured, retainer and guide pins in place
Is the Hydro-Matic in good condition 1
All pins, bushings in brake linkage in good condition (no 1
wear)
Are the brakes adjusted properly 1
Are the bands, pads and hardware in good condition 1
Have the brake bands been inspected - API RP 8B Category IV
AUXILARY LIFTING EQUIPMENT Days Month Year
Inspect all lifting/hoisting chains, slings, straps & cables 1

A lifting equipment (wire rope, chains, hooks, shackles, 1
connecting links, etc) register is being used and available
on site, with in-service dates, size, and length and
inspection date.
Catheads are not being used for any lifting or make-up 1
and are guarded or have been removed
Are all cable inspected No nicks or broken wires 1
Are cables spooling properly 1
All lifting and hoisting chains grade 80 or 100 with 1
proper hooks and attachments
Are the hoisting/lifting equipment tags legible and 1
permanently attached
Is the transfer line in good condition with proper 1
attachments No kinks or knots
Does the rig have a rig specific and documented Dropped Object Prevention program which
includes detailed derrick equipment inventory, risk and control assessments, inspection
protocols and feedback process
Does the rig have a written permit system for man-riding when using rig floor mounted hoists
Are the rig floor hoists used for man riding are certified for man-riding
Page 27 of 27
Table 5 continued
SUSPENDING EQUIPMENT Days Month Year
Are floor support cables and chains in good condition 1

Grade 80 or 100 and tagged
Is the proper clevis in use 1
Are proper floor support pockets in use 1
Are work floor support hinges in good condition and 1
pinned properly
Inspection frequencies are based on and should follow API Recommended Practice 8B,
Seventh Edition, March 2002 for Procedures for Inspections, Maintenance, Repair and
Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment. This above mentioned API Recommended Practice
clearly outlines the specific Category and Frequency for inspection and maintenance routines.
Reference Title
API Specification 4F Drilling and Well Servicing Structures
API Recommended Practice 4G Maintenance and Use of Drilling and Well
Servicing Structures
API Recommended Practice 7G Drill Stem Design and Operating Limits
API Specification 7K Drilling and Well Servicing Equipment
API Recommended Practice 7L Inspection, Maintenance, Repair and
Remanufacture of Drilling Equipment
API Specification 8A Drilling and Production Hoisting Equipment
API Recommended Practice 8B Procedures for Inspections, Maintenance, Repair
and Remanufacture of Hoisting Equipment
API Specification 8C Drilling and Production Hoisting Equipment
API Specification 9A Wire Rope
API Recommended Practice 9B Application, Care and Use of Wire Rope for
Oilfield Service
MOBILE CRANE OPERATOR DAILY INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Crane Name/Number Crane Type Crane Capacity Date of Inspection
Location Hour Meter Total Hours Operated

Start: _________
Stop: _________
Operators Name Oilers Name
INSTRUCTIONS: Check all items indicated. Inspect and indicate as Okay or Correction Needed
Walk Around OK Correction Operator Cab OK Correction
Inspection Needed Inspection Needed
Safety guards and plates Gauges
Carrier frame, rotate Warning and
base indicator lights
General hardware Control/brakes
Wire rope Visibility
Reeving Load rating chart
Block Safety devices
Hook Emergency stops
Sheaves List/trim
indicators
Boom/Jib Boom
angle/radius
indicator
Gantry, pendants, boom Machinery OK Correction
stops House Needed
Inspection
Walks, ladders, handrail Housekeeping
Wind locks, chocks, Engine/compress
stops or
Tires, wheels, tracks Leaks fuel, oil,
lube, water
Leaks - fuel, oil, lube, Lubrication
water
Radius indicator Battery
Outrigger/locking device Lights
Operation Inspection OK Correction Glass
Needed
Area safety Clutch/brake
linings
Unusual noises Electric motors
Control action Warning tags
Brakes/boom/load/rotate Fire extinguisher
Crane stability Comments
No load test
Fleeting sheave
Limit switches
Operators signature Supervisors signature
This checklist is based on EM 385-1-1, dated 3 September 1996.
Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00088-2 Print Date: 6/9/2004
CRAWLER, TRUCK AND WHEEL MOUNTED CRANE INSPECTION
CHECKLIST
Contract Name and Number Contractor/Subcontractor
Government Inspector Location
Contractor Inspector Date
Equipment Name and Number
PERFORMANCE LOAD TEST RESULTS

(Data and results of performance test required by EM 385-1-1,
Sections 16.C.13, 16.D.06a and Appendix H)
Date Weight of Performance Test Maximum anticipated load
Safe Working Load Length of Boom Maximum radius at which test

was performed
OK Correction Needed
1. Is the slow moving emblem used on all vehicles, which by
design move at 25 mph, or less on public roads? (08.A.04)
2. Are seats or equal protection for each person required to ride

on the equipment? (16.A.07a)
3. Is equipment operating on streets and highways equipped

with headlights, taillights, brake lights and turn signals (visible
from front and read)? (16.A.07b)
4. Is all equipment equipped with operable windshield wipers

and defrosting or defogging equipment? (16.A.07c)
5. Does the unit have an emergency brake, which will

automatically stop the equipment upon brake failure? Is this
system manually operable from the drivers position?
(16.A.07d)
6. Is the area where the crane is to work level, firm and

secured? (16.A.10)
7. Is there a record of manufacturers approval of any

modification of equipment, which affects its capacity or safe
operation? (16.A.18)
8. Is a dry chemical or carbon dioxide fire extinguisher rated at

least 5-B: C on the crane? (16.A.26)
9. Is there an effective, working reverse alarm? (16.B.01)
10. Is there a signalperson or warning device when there is a

danger to persons from moving equipment, swinging loads,
buckets, booms, etc.? (16.B.02)
11. Are all belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles,
drums, flywheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating or
moving parts guarded? (16.B.03a)
12. Are fuel tanks located in a manner to prevent spills or

overflows from running onto engine exhaust or electrical
equipment? (16.B.04)
13. Are the following with the crane at all times: manufacturers
operating manual and a manual for any crane operator aids;
load rating chart; and the cranes log book documenting
operating hours, maintenance, inspections and tests? (16.C.02)
14. During crane operation, does the operator have full view of
the load and the load travel path at all times or is a signal
person used? (16.C.03b)
15. Is the crane operator designated as qualified by a source,

which qualifies crane operators? (16.C.04c)
16. Is the crane operator qualified for each type of crane he/she
is to operate? (16.C.05a 1)
17. Does the operator meet the physical qualifications listed in

Appendix G? (16.C.05b)
18. Is there adequate clearance from overhead structures and

electrical sources for the crane to be operated safely? (16.C.09)
19. Is there an adequate clearance maintained between

moving and rotating structures of the crane and fixed objects?
Minimum clearance is 16 inches. (16.C.09b)
20. Are there at least three full wraps of cable on the drums of
hoisting equipment at all times? (16.C.10a)
21. Is a pre-operational checklist used for daily inspections?

(16.C.12c)
22. Is a written report of the performance test maintained with

the crane or on site? (16.C.13b)
23. Is riding on loads, hooks, hammers, buckets, material

hoists, or other hoisting equipment prohibited? (16.C.15)
24. Where practical are tag lines used to control loads?

(16.C.16)
25. Before making a critical lift, has a critical lift plan been
prepared and reviewed and signed by all personnel involved
with the lift? (16.C.18)
26. Are lattice boom cranes equipped with a boom angle

indicator; load indicating device, or a load moment indicator?
(16.D.01)
27. Are lattice boom and hydraulic cranes equipped with a
means for the operator to visually determine levelness?
(16.D.02)
28. Are lattice boom and hydraulic mobile cranes (except

articulating booms cranes) equipped with drum rotation
indicators? (16.D.03)
29. Are lattice boom and hydraulic mobile cranes equipped with
a boom angle or radius indicator within the operators view?
(16.D.04)
30. Are lattice boom cranes, with exception of duty cycle

cranes, equipped with an anti-two blocking device? (16.D.05)
31. Has the boom stop test on cable-supported booms been

performed? (16.D.06)
32. Do the boom stops, which, at the angle specified by the

crane manufacturer, limit the movement of that portion of the
boom below the point at which the boom stops acts on the
boom? (16.D.06a)
33. Has the cranes foundation been evaluated for stability?

(16.D.07)
34. Before boom assembly and disassembly have the

manufacturers assembly and disassembly procedures been
reviewed by all members of the assembly/disassembly team?
(16.D.08a)
35. Are the outriggers fully extended? (16.D.09)
36. Unless the manufacturer has specified an on-rubber rating,

are the outriggers fully extended and down? (16.D.10)
37. Are truck and crawler cranes attached to a barge or

pontoon by a slack tie down system? (16.F.06)
38. Have load ratings been modified to reflect the increased

loading from list, trim, wave, and wind action? (16.F.04b 1)
39. Are all deck surfaces above the water? (16.F.04b 2)
40. Is the entire bottom area of the barge or pontoon

submerged? (16.F.04b (3))
41. Are tie downs available and used? (16.F.04b 4)
42. Are cranes blocked and secured? (16.F.04b 5)
This checklist is based on EM 385-1-1, dated 3 September 1996. Use of this checklist is optional.
Hardware/Chains/Wire Rope/Slings Checklist
Company fit Asset Area
Well/Yard/Location
Principle Uses Stored or Active Uses
Inspected By
Inspection Witness
Date Inspected
INSTRUCTIONS: Check all items indicated. Inspect and indicate as OK Correction

Okay or Correction Needed Needed
HARDWARE / ATTACHMENTS (hooks, clips, swivels, shackles, clevis, connecting links,
master links, oblong links, pear shaped links, etc.)
Are inspections records kept
Is there deformation such as stretched or bent
Is there excessive wear
Any cracks, nicks, breaks or gouges
Has the hardware been modified
Is it used for the proper function
Are moving parts functioning properly
CHAIN SLINGS (ANSI B30.9 and OSHA CFR 1910.184)
Are inspection records kept
Are permanently attached tags clearly specifying grade, size, rated load,
angle and configuration
Any cracks, nicks, breaks or gouges
Is there deformation such as stretched or bent
Are there signs of welding splatter
Are there signs of scrubbing
Are there signs of wear
WIRE ROPE SLINGS (ANSI B30.9 and OSHA CFR 1910.184)

Are inspection records kept
Is the wire rope kinked
Have any rope strands been crushed
Hardware/Chains/Wire Rope/Slings Checklist (continued)
Is the wire rope un-stranding
Are there any broken or cut strands
Is there stranding displacement
Is there core protrusion
Is any corrosion present
Is the wire rope bird caging
Are there any broken wires 10 per lay; 5 per strand
SYNTHETIC SLINGS (ANSI B30.9 AND OSHA CFR 1910.184)
Are permanently attached tags clearly specifying manufacture trade

mark, code / stock number, rated load for 3 hitches and material
Are there any acid or caustic burns
Has the material been melted or charred
Are there any holes or cuts
Are there any tears or snags
Are there any broken stitches
Are there any worn stitches
Is there signs of excessive abrasion
Is the sling or has the sling been knotted
Are the core fibers exposed to surface round slings
Are there signs of welding splatter
Load Path Inspection
Well Servicing Rig Checklist
Company Asset Area
Well/Yard/Location Rig #
Manufacturer Manufacture Date
Manufacturers Rating Mast Serial #
Mast Type Telescopic Cantilever Mast Position Standing Laid Down
Mast Nameplate on Substructure
Component Numbers Present
Certification Date Certification Attached
Inspected By
Inspection Witness
Date Inspected

TUBING LINE, TIE DOWN ANCHOR
Visual inspection (each rig up)
Proper bolts, nuts and keepers in place

Line installed properly
Tie down mounting inspected daily
Line guide rod in place
Clamp secured in anchor
CROWN (5 YR DISASSEMBLE & INSPECT)

Crown to Mast / Derrick proper attachment
Crown beams in good condition No bent beams
Pillow blocks anchored properly and in good condition

All cluster and fast line sheaves free of cracks. Visual each rig up.
All sheaves gauged for wear with proper sheave size for line used
All sheaves free of nicks, gouges and shoulder damage (NDT - ____
Yrs)
All bearings inspected
All bearing seals in good condition
All line keepers in place
Adequate line keeper gap
Cluster and fast line shafts (NDT - _____ Yrs)
Pillow blocks and shafts anchored with proper bolts and locking nuts
(inspected)
MAST / DERRICK
Rig has a valid API 5 yr Derrick Certification available
Fit for Service Inspection (1 Year)
Rig has had a Load Path inspection by a qualified 3rd party inspection
company conducted within the past year. (This will be a detailed
inspection of all load bearing equipment including pipe tongs, load
bearing top drive components (for top drive rigs), kelly, swivel, elevators,
links, link adapters, traveling block, connectors, hook, crown, line
anchor, BOP Hoisting equipment, Brake Bands, Brake Linkage &
assembly, derrick lifting pad eyes, lugs, etc, using nondestructive
means, such as a magnetic particle inspection, dye penetration,
Visual inspection (each rig up) following API 4E Field Inspection
All critical repairs made at time of recognition and inspected.
Standpipe properly anchored to derrick
Rotary hose properly secured with safety cable to derrick leg
All hydraulic lines properly secured in derrick
Inspect all welds for cracks
Inspect for bent beams and braces
Inspect raising cylinder or cylinders anchor points, pins with keepers
No wear or cracks
No raising cylinder leaks.
Insure latch dogs in good working order, lubricated and flagged
All pins with keepers
Tail pin screws not out over 6 of threads
Steel mat under load bearing portion of rig and jacks where foundation
is questionable
All ropes tied back when not in use
All blocks and sheaves with secondary retention
Only approved clevis in use at tongs and above bolt / nut / key
All guy lines in good condition
Crown guy wires 5/8 minimum with factory thimble eyes and proper
clevis with proper sag (+/-10)
Tubing board guy wires 9/16 minimum crossed with factory thimble eyes
and proper clevis
Back lines in good condition, properly anchored at crown, carrier with
factory thimbled eyes and proper clevis
TUBING LINE & SAND LINE
Visual inspection (daily)
Good condition No broken wires
No kinks
No major corrosion
Proper size line and sheaves
In service records
CARRIER
No frame cracks
Jack(s) in good condition with good foundation
Derrick braces, pockets and pins in good condition
TRAVELLING EQUIPMENT
Disassemble and inspect (NDT 5 Yr) bearing, shafts and sheaves
Sheave dividers in good condition Not bent
All bolts and nuts tight and secured
Becket and bail in good condition Wear?
Elevator links in good condition Wear?
Rod hook and elevators in good condition
Rod transfer in good condition with safety ring Eye good
TUBING DRUM & SAND DRUM

All guards in place
Line properly tied back for pick up weight
No kink or broken wires
Line properly mounted on drum
5 Wraps on tubing drum at ground level
7 Wraps at floor level (Max 6)
2-1/2/3 Wraps on deadline anchor, correctly wrapped, clamp secured,
retainer and guide pins in place
Hydro-Matic in good condition
Brake and brake linkage, all pins and bushings in good condition and
secured
Proper brake linkage adjustment
Bands, pads and hardware in good condition
AUXILARY LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Rig has a rig specific and documented Dropped Object Prevention
program which includes detailed derrick equipment inventory, risk and
control assessments, inspection protocols and feedback process
Rig has a written permit system for man-riding when using rig floor
mounted hoists
Rig floor hoists used for man riding are certified for man-riding
Inspect all lifting/hoisting chains, slings, straps & cables
A lifting equipment (wire rope, chains, hooks, shackles, connecting links,
etc) register is being used and available on site, with in-service dates,
size, and length and inspection date.
Draw works catheads are not being used for any lifting or make-up and
are guarded or have been removed
Cable inspected No nicks or broken wires
Cable spooling properly
All lifting and hoisting chains grade 80 or 100 with proper hooks and
attachments
All hoisting and lifting equipment properly tagged with register
Transfer line in good condition with proper attachments No kinks or
knots
SUSPENDING EQUIPMENT
Floor support cables and chains in good condition Grade 80 or 100
and tagged
Proper clevis in use and properly used
Proper floor support pockets in use
Work floor support hinges in good condition and pinned properly
Floor support cables and chains in good condition Grade 80 or 100
and tagged
Load Path Inspection
Drilling Rig Checklist
Company Asset Area
Well/Yard/Location Rig #
Manufacturer Manufacture Date
Manufacturers Rating Mast Serial #
Mast Type Telescopic Cantilever Mast Position Standing Laid Down
Mast Nameplate on Substructure
Component Numbers Present
Certification Date Certification Attached
Inspected By
Inspection Witness
Date Inspected

DRILLING LINE TIE DOWN ANCHOR

Proper bolts and nuts in place and in good condition
Anchor body free of cracks or damage
Complete range of motion
Sensor body in good condition (properly attached to weight indicator)
Fittings in good condition, no leaks
Line properly installed on anchor
All bolts & dies (if required) in place & tight (proper size for line use)
Tie down free of oil & grease
CROWN (5 YR DISASSEMBLE & INSPECT)

Visual inspection each rig up
Crown attached to mast or derrick w/ proper bolts, washers & locking
nuts
Crown beams in good condition, no bent beams
Pillar blocks anchored properly & in good condition

All cluster & fast line sheaves free of cracks (MPI)
All sheaves gauged for wear, proper sheave size for line size
All sheaves free of nicks, gouges & sheave shoulder damage
All bearing seals in good condition
Line keeper bars in place & sound
Cluster & fast line shafts (MPI)
Crown shafts anchored w/ bolts, locking nuts
Safety mesh / block in good condition
MAST/DERRICK
Rig has a valid API 5 yr Derrick Certification available
Fit for work inspection (1 year)
Rig has had a Load Path inspection by a qualified 3rd party inspection
company conducted within the past year. (This will be a detailed
inspection of all load bearing equipment including pipe tongs, load
bearing top drive components (for top drive rigs), kelly, swivel, elevators,
links, link adapters, traveling block, connectors, hook, crown, line
anchor, BOP Hoisting equipment, Brake Bands, Brake Linkage &
assembly, derrick lifting pad eyes, lugs, etc, using nondestructive
means, such as a magnetic particle inspection, dye penetration,
Visual inspection (each rig up) following API 4E field inspection
All critical repairs made at time of recognition & inspected
Beams straight
Pins / bolts with safety pins in good condition
Cracked welds
Standpipe properly anchored to derrick
Rotary hose properly secured with safety cable to derrick leg
RAISING LINES
Visual inspected (each rig up)
Date installed
Number of picks on line
Line in good condition
Sockets, pins & keepers in good condition
Wickers in raising lines
Kinks in line
Sockets solid
Lines secured properly

All raising line sheaves in good condition
All sheave pins secured
DRILLING LINE
Visual inspected (daily)
Proper size line installed
Ton mile book current
Ton miles properly calculated (per manufactures rep)
Kinks in line
Wickers in line
Line stored off of ground
TRAVELING BLOCKS & HOOK (5 YEAR DISASSEMBLE AND INSPECT)
All sheaves in good condition free of cracks (MPI)
Shaft free of cracks (MPI)
Sheave dividers in place & not bent
All bolts tight & secured
Becket & bail in good condition
Becket & bail pins in place and secured
Hook & hook latch in good condition
Hook-swivel contact surface in good condition
Elevator link ears in good condition
Elevator links inspected for wear & damage
All elevators inspected for wear & damage
SWIVEL
Bail & bail pins inspected for wear
Gooseneck in good condition
Rotary hose properly secured with safety chain
Body inspected for cracks
Bail eyes & bail pins inspected for cracks & wear
Swivel stem inspected for cracks
Swivel sub inspected for cracks & damaged threads
Flanges (top & bottom) bolts in place & tight
No oil leaks
KELLY & SAVER SUB

Kelly connections inspected before each well
Saver sub inspected before each well
Saver sub visually inspected daily (thread wear)
Kelly straight
DRAWWORKS
Draw works properly anchored to sub
Drilling line properly anchored to drum
Line guides properly installed
AUXILARY LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Rig has a rig specific and documented Dropped Object Prevention
program which includes detailed derrick equipment inventory, risk and
control assessments, inspection protocols and feedback process
Rig has a written permit system for man-riding when using rig floor
mounted hoists
Rig floor hoists used for man riding are certified for man-riding
Inspect all lifting/hoisting chains, slings, straps & cables
A lifting equipment (wire rope, chains, hooks, shackles, connecting links,
etc) register is being used and available on site, with in-service dates,
size, and length and inspection date.
Draw works catheads are not being used for any lifting or make-up and
are guarded or have been removed
Air hoists / winches in good condition
Hoists mounted properly
Brake in good condition & adjusted properly
Hoist cable in good condition/w/factory thimbled eye
Hook & attachments rated, tagged and in good condition with register
Only rated 80 or100 grade hoisting/lifting equipment
Only rated 80 or100 grade suspending equipment
All lifting / hoisting equipment inspected & measured to tags
BP OUSBU WORK PERMIT SYSTEM
Lifting Operations Permit
Date: bp Contract Company OC
Emergency #: Time Issued: Time Expired: Location:
LIFTING OPERATIONS
Qualified Crane Operator Signature: Date of Planned Lift: Time of Planned Lift:
L Designated Lift Leader Signature: Weight of Load: Was the weight estimated or confirmed ?
I Designated Rigger Signature: Method in which weight was determined:
FY N Y N
T Is Crane/Hoist inspection current? Load does not exceed dynamic or static capabilities of lift equipment?
I Rigging inspected prior to the lift? Tag lines needed to control the load?
N Crane/Hoist inspected prior to the lift? Assured line of communication between Operator & Lift Leader?
G Safety devices installed on lift operational? Precautions taken to keep other personnel out of area?
Other: Crane Capacity Worksheet has been completed?
Wind speed over 20 mph during the lift requires a reassessment of JHA/RAT. Wind speed over 30 mph during the lift require suspension of operations.
CRITICAL LIFT ASSESSMENT
If the answer to any of the following questions is YES, proceed to CRITICAL LIFT PLAN
Y N Y N
C Are personnel being lift If yes, refCFR OSHA 1926.550 g Can Crane/Hoist Operator lose sight of the load during lift?
R Power lines within the maximum boom swing radius? Lifting over energized or pressurized equipment?
I Using two or more cranes to simultaneously lift one load?

Would the dropping, collision, or upset of the load or components present a potentially unacceptable risk of personnel injury or property damage?
T
I CRITICAL LIFT PLAN
Were any discrepancies noted
C between Rigger/ Operator/ Y N
If yes, refer to OC Mgr & document resolution:
A Leader?
L
Is the item a freely suspended Y N
If no, describe holding forces (i.e., load
(free to move) load? must be lifted off of mounting bolts:
L Name of the individual that
I If eye bolts or similar lifting attachments are used, have Y N verified the capacity of the
F they been verified to be sufficient size and capacity? attachments:
T Is there sufficient clearance for If so, whom?
the load at every point along the Y N Has an individual been designated to observe any Y N
path? area that people could move into the load path?
Has a Test Lift of the
Has a Rigging diagram been
Has the Personnel Platform Y N Personnel Platform been Y N Y N
completed?
been Inspected? Completed?
Additional Information:

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY IS VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. Print Date: 6/9/2004
WINCH TRUCK INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Company Asset Area
Well/Yard/Location
Truck Number Manufacturer
Manufacture Date Manufacturers Rating
Inspected by
Inspection Witness
Date Inspected
INSTRUCTIONS: Check all items indicated. Inspect and indicate as

OK Correction Needed
Okay or Correction Needed
Frame in good condition
Winches mounted properly
Winches in good condition
Winch cable spooled properly, look for crushing
Winch controls in good condition
Winch poles in good condition, pockets & eyes inspected (NDT)

annually, snatch blocks (NDT ____ yr)
Pole pins & poles inspected daily <10% wear
Snatch blocks in good condition w/bolts pinned
Winch cables in good condition, inspect for kinks & broken wires,
hooks in good condition
Winch line socket knots in use & in good condition replaced

regularly
All lifting chains rated grade 80 or100 with tag & register inspected in
good condition
Cable slings in good condition
All hoisting attachments in good grade 80 or100 condition
Spreader beams in good condition, no bent iron or broken welds
Tag line in use
Good lifting practices in use
Daily inspection with documentation

Chapter 12, Lighting Gas Fired Vessels
Chapter 12
Lighting Gas Fired Vessels
I. General Requirements
A. All gas fired vessels shall be lighted in accordance with the procedures delineated
below. Operating supervisors are responsible for the implementation and
enforcement of this program.
B. Operating supervisors are responsible to ensure that all employees are properly
trained in the correct lighting procedures.
C. If manufacturers instructions are available they shall take precedence over the
procedures delineated in this chapter.
D. Lighting procedures shall be posted at the fired vessel, or a pocket card with these
procedures printed on it may be distributed to employees.
II. Safety Procedures for Lighting Gas Fired Vessels with an Auto-Ignitor
Electric Ignition Systems
A. With the access/lighting port in the closed position, slowly open the pilot valve and
activate the ignitor, utilizing the manufactures suggested instructions.
B. When pilot burner is lit, go to Step K.
CAUTION: If the pilot does not light, close the pilot valve and go to step III F. 2.
III. Safety Procedures for Lighting Gas Fired Vessels with a Manual Ignitor
A. Close all gas supply valves (main burner & pilot).
B. Shut in all automatic dumps.
C. Open the access/lighting port into the firebox. (Allow 5 minutes to vent.)
D. Drain the fuel gas scrubbers, if equipped.

E. Check for an adequate fluid level above the fire box/tube and temperature sensing
elements where applicable.
F. Test for combustible gas in the immediate area and in the fire box/tube as follows:
1. Verify calibration has been performed on the gas detector.
2. Insert the combustible gas indicator probe into the fire box/tube to verify the
absence of combustible gas accumulations in the fire box/tube area of the
vessel. If combustible gases are present, reclose all gas supply valves, wait
another 10 to 15 minutes, and retest. When determined safe, test for gases in
front of the firebox/tube before lighting the torch.
NOTE: If utilizing an electric ignitor system go to Step J.
G. Light the torch, standing away from and upwind of the vessel, if possible.
Each fired vessel has its own properly-sized and shielded lighting torch. Do not use
tubing or other makeshift lighting torches. Use kerosene or a low volatile solvent.
Do not use gasoline to assist in igniting the torch. Starting fluids may be used as
long as the container is separated from the actual lighting of the torch.
H. While standing to the side of the access/lighting port end plate of the fire box/tube,
position the lit torch in front of the opening to check for possible flashback. Be
aware of adjacent fire boxes. Insert the torch, placing it next to the pilot burner.
WARNING: Do not stand in front of adjacent fire boxes.
I. Leave the torch in position and slowly open the pilot burner valve.
J. When pilot burner is lit, remove and extinguish torch. Do not throw it on the ground
or near starting fluid.
J. Close the access/lighting port opened in Step C.
K. Slowly open the main burner supply valve. Adjust the thermostat to actuate the
main burner if necessary.
L. Do not look into the fire box/tube to see if the burner is lit.
Utilize the sight glass to identify if the burner is lit, if the vessel is so equipped. If
there is no sight glass, listen for the characteristic sound of the main burner igniting,

or check for a temperature rise on the exhaust stack. If the burner does not appear to
be lit, close the main burner and pilot valves and start over.
M. The flame shall be centered in firetube, not to one side. Adjust the burner position,
if required. Regulate the thermostat, fuel pressure, and fuel control valve for a
balanced flame.
N. Open the automatic dumps closed in step III B.
O. Attachments 4.12-1 through 4.12-3 contain Fired Vessel Safety Inspection Forms for
your use. Information contained on this form may be incorporated into the operating
locations Fired Vessel Inspection Program.
P. Attachment 4.12-4 contains specifications which may be used for the fabrication of a
fired vessel lighting torch.
III. References
A. American Petroleum Institute, RP 12N Operation, Maintenance and Testing of

Firebox Flame Arrestors, latest edition.

Attachment 4.12-1
Fired Vessel Safety Inspection Form

Part 1 of 3
Unit: Location:
Equipment Part Yes No Corrective Action Date Signature

Required Repaired
Condition of flame arrestor and

shell element
Good
Corroded
Damaged
Seals in Place
Firebox
Faceplate
Access port
Pilot gas inlet
Fuel gas inlet
Element
Element flange
Instrument ports
(BSL, igniter)
Other
Bolts missing
Firetube/firebox
Stack
Flame arrestor
Faceplate
Flame/stack element flange
Other

Attachment 4.12-2

Part 2 of 3
Unit: Location:
Equipment Part Yes No Corrective Action Date Signature

Required Repaired
Safety system in service
Burner/pilot assembly
Secured
Aligned
Fuel leaks
Burner tip
Flame length
Flame pattern
Firetube/firebox
Corrosion
Hot spots
Leaks
Deposits/scale
Deformed
Stack
Corrosion
Cracks
Deposits/scale
Deformed

Attachment 4.12-3

Part 3 of 3
Media pH
Reading:
Chemical Added: oz.
Comments:
Inspectors Signature:
Date:

Attachment 4.12-4
Recommended Specifications for a Fired Component Lighting Torch

Chapter 9, Lockout/Tagout Procedure
Chapter 9
Lockout/Tagout Procedure
The Control of Hazardous Energy
A. This section covers the lockout/tagout requirements that shall be used when
servicing and performing maintenance on machines and equipment in which the
unexpected energization, startup, or the release of stored energy could cause injury.
This section specifies minimum requirements for the control of hazardous energy.
Each site is required to develop equipment-specific lockout/tagout procedures,

following the guidelines outlined in this chapter.
B. Definitions:
1. Authorized employee: Any person who locks out or tags out machines or
equipment in order to perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or
equipment.
2. Affected employees: Persons who work in areas where energy sources are
locked or tagged out but is not directly involved in the isolation activity.
3. Energy isolating device: A mechanical device that physically blocks or isolates

energy.
4. Energy source: An energy source is any electrical, mechanical, hydraulic,

pneumatic, gravitational, chemical, nuclear, thermal, or other source of energy
that could cause injury.
C. All energy sources associated with equipment must be locked and tagged in the
position which isolates the employee(s) from the hazardous energy when
maintenance/servicing work is being performed by either company or contract
personnel.
D. Operating supervisors will be responsible for ensuring that all equipment and energy
sources are properly locked and tagged prior to starting work. An electrical watch
person (similar to a fire watch) is prohibited as a substitution for this procedure.
E. The use and procedures of the lockout/tagout program shall be reviewed annually by
appropriate operations personnel. Training shall be documented.

F. The Operations Center is responsible for determining the degree of specificity of

written lockout procedures for equipment within their area.
G. Whenever contract employees are scheduled to perform work covered by this

program, both employers (BP and contractor) must comply with the requirements of
this section.
H. This program does not apply to:
Handheld power tools or stationary equipment whose electrical power may be

controlled by the unplugging of equipment from the energy source when the plug
and cord are under the control of the employee performing the servicing or
maintenance.
II. Lockout and Tagout Procedure
A. Work will not be conducted without a pre-job risk assessment and a safety
discussion appropriate for the level of risk.
B. Employees involved in the lockout must be knowledgeable of the type and amount
of the energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to
control the energy before turning off a machine or equipment.
C. Notify all affected employees (before and after) about the lockout/tagout procedure
and the prohibition regarding attempts to restart or reenergize equipment
locked/tagged out.
D. Machinery or equipment shall be turned off or shut down using the procedures
established. An orderly shutdown must be utilized to avoid any additional or
increased hazards to employees as a result of equipment shutdown.
E. All energy isolating devices which are needed to control the energy to machinery or
equipment shall be physically located and operated, as appropriate to isolate the
machinery or equipment from the energy source(s).
F. Lock out the equipment with a personal lock approved by the supervisor in charge.
The tag shall be dated and signed by the person performing the work.
G. Lockout or tagout devices must be affixed to each energy or isolating device by the
employee authorized by the supervisor in charge. The devices shall be attached in a
manner that will hold the energy isolating devices in a safe or off position.

H. No lock shall be affixed without a tag stating who locked out the equipment and the
date and reason it was locked out.
I. Tagout devices, where used, shall be attached to clearly indicate that the operation or
movement of energy isolating devices from the safe or off position is prohibited.
1. Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the
capability of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point
at which the lock would have been attached.
2. Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag
shall be located as closely and safely as possible to the device, in a position that
will be immediately obvious to anyone attempting to operate the equipment.
J. If more than one group is working on the same item (including different
maintenance crafts) each authorized person from each craft will place a lock on the
multiple hasp and will sign and date the DANGER, DO NOT START tag. Each craft
or group will test the equipment at the start station to determine that the equipment is
inoperable.
K. Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices,

all potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected,
restrained, or otherwise rendered safe. If there is a possibility of re-accumulation of
stored energy to a hazardous level, verification of isolation shall be continued until
the servicing or maintenance is completed, or until the possibility of such
accumulation no longer exists.
L. After ensuring that all personnel are clear, the equipment must be tested to verify
that it is properly locked out and will not operate.
NOTE: Be certain to return the switch or start button that was used to test the
lockout to its off or neutral position.
M. At the beginning of each shift, or after any substantial absence from the job (breaks
or meals), any craft persons who have equipment locked out will check the
equipment and the disconnecting device to determine that all equipment is safe for
work and has not been returned to service during their absence.
III. Generic Energy Isolation Methods
The following methods may be used as a guideline in developing site-specific and

equipment-specific lockout/tagout procedures:
A. Electrical (motor controllers, capacitors, circuit breakers, etc.)

1. Shut down the equipment using the selector switch, followed by the master
disconnect.
2. Ensure that all power sources are locked and tagged out.
3. Stored electrical energy must be bled to obtain zero energy state.
4. When working on or near exposed de-energized electrical equipment, a

qualified person shall use test equipment and shall use a tester to ensure that all
circuits are dead.
5. If additional energy sources are present, follow the applicable method of energy
isolation listed in this section.
B. Pneumatic (starting air, control valves, instrument air, etc.)
1. Identify the system to be isolated.
2. Close the block valves upstream and downstream of the section.
3. Release the pressure to reach a zero energy state, utilizing a controlled bleed-
off.
4. Use chains, energy isolation air valves, shutoff valves, padlocks and lockouts to
lock out the energy source. Disconnecting the line is the preferred means of
isolation.
C. Hydraulic (valve actuators, presses)
2. Isolate the system.
3. Release the pressure to reach a zero energy state.
4. Use lockout valves, chains, padlocks, and lockouts to lock out energy source.

D. Fluids and Gases (piping systems, vessels, production/process equipment, and

storage tanks, etc.)
2. Isolate all inlet and outlet piping by disconnecting, by inserting blinds, or by the
use of double block and bleed. (Double block and bleed is not acceptable for
confined space entry).
3. Release the pressure to reach a zero energy state.
5. Refer to the Confined Space Entry Program chapter, if applicable.
E. Mechanical (pumping unit, counterweights, flywheels, etc.)
1. Release all stored mechanical energy or block the energy. Be aware of gravity,
springs, tension, and other sources of energy that are not always obvious.
2. Use blocks, pins, or chains to restrain energy when equipment cannot be

brought to a zero potential energy state.
3. Padlocks, lockouts, and tags shall be used to lock out and tag out mechanical
energy.
4. If additional energy sources are present, follow the applicable methods of

energy isolation listed in this section.
IV. Restoring Service to Equipment
A. After each phase of the work is complete, the locks for that crew may be removed.
1. The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential items have been
removed and that machine or equipment components are operationally intact.
2. The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have been safely
positioned or removed.
3. The person authorized by the supervisor in charge will remove the last lock and
release the Do Not Start tag and will notify the individual responsible for the
plant or satellite equipment that the repairs are complete and the equipment is
ready for service.

4. After lockout or tagout devices have been removed and before a machine or
equipment is started, affected employees shall be notified that the lockout or
tagout devices have been removed.
5. Contractors will not be authorized to return plant or satellite equipment to

service. However, the Field, Production or Maintenance Foreman may authorize
contractors to return field equipment to service.
B. Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by
the employee who applied the device. When the authorized employee who applied
the lockout or tagout device is not available to remove it, the device may be removed
under the direction of operating supervisors (see item 4 below), provided that
specific procedures and training for such removal have been developed, documented,
and incorporated into the companys energy control program.
Each location must have its own site-specific written procedure for the removal of an
employees lock, or the location may adapt procedures presented by this Standard. It
must be demonstrated that the specific procedure provides equivalent safety to the
removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it. The specific
procedure shall include at least the following elements:
1. Determine conclusively that the job has been completed and no personnel
remain in the affected area.
2. Verify that the employee is not at the facility.
3. The supervisor in charge will make a reasonable effort to contact the affected
employee to inform him that his lockout/tagout device has been removed and
will ensure that the employee has this knowledge before the eresuming work at
the facility.
4. The field, plant and platform foreman, maintenance or operations foreman, the
employees immediate supervisor, or the employees relief are authorized to use
the above procedure and then remove the lock or tag.
C. The individual restoring energy to the equipment must:
1. Inspect the work to ensure that nonessential items have been removed.
2. Ensure that the equipment components are operationally intact.
3. Check the work area to ensure that all employees are safely positioned or
removed from the equipment.

V. Locks and Tags
A. While repair or other work is being performed on equipment powered by an external

source, that equipment must be locked out as required in paragraph B of this section
or, if a lockout provision does not exist on the equipment, must be disconnected
from the power source or otherwise deactivated, unless the nature of the work being
performed necessitates that the power be connected or the equipment activated.
B. If the equipment has a lockout or other device designed to prevent unintentional

activation of the equipment, the lockout or other device must be engaged while the
work is being performed on the equipment, unless the nature of the work being
performed necessitates that the equipment be activated.
C. A tag must be placed at the point where the equipment connects to a power source
and at the location of the control panel activating the power
1. Warning that equipment is being worked on.
2. Warning that the power source must not be connected or the equipment
activated, if the power source is disconnected or the equipment deactivated.
D. The tags must not be removed without the permission of either the person who
placed the tags, that persons immediate supervisor, or their respective relief.
E. Each facility shall provide standardized tags and individually keyed locks as
required to execute the above outlined procedure. The uniquely keyed locks shall be
of a specific design used only for the lockout/tagout program.
F. BP tags or their equivalent shall be used. Tags are available from Stationary stock
(forms).
G. Tag attachment devices must be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-

locking and non-releasable, with a minimum unlocking strength of no less that 50
pounds. A one-piece all-environment-tolerant nylon cable tie-type device is
acceptable for this application.
VI. Periodic Inspection
A. Each facility must conduct a periodic inspection and test of every site lockout/tagout
procedure (at least annually) to ensure it is effective and is being followed. The
inspection and test must be documented.

B. The review shall be performed by an authorized person other than one currently
utilizing the lockout/tagout procedure under review. This will include a review
between the inspector and each employee utilizing the lockout/tagout of the
responsibilities under the procedure being inspected. Attachment 3.9-1 contains a
sample inspection checklist that shall be used for the inspection and inspection
documentation.
C. Any deficiencies found during the inspection must be immediately corrected.
VII. Training
A. All employees who participate in the lockout/tagout program or who may be affected
by the program must be trained prior to their participation in the program and
annually thereafter.
1. Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable

hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the
workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and
control.
2. Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy
control procedure.
3. All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where
energy control procedures may be utilized shall be instructed about the
procedure and about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize
machines or equipment that is locked out or tagged out.
B. The training shall ensure that the purpose and function of the lockout/tagout program
is understood and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application,
usage and removal of energy controls are conveyed to the employees.
C. Training shall specifically encompass recognition of hazardous energy sources, type

and magnitude of energy in the workplace, methods and means necessary for energy
control and the purpose and use of the lockout/tagout program. The training shall
also include rules and techniques to be used for authorization and the means that will
be used for enforcement of the program.
D. Explanation of tags and their means of attachment.
It should be emphasized that the tags and their means of attachment must be made of
materials which will withstand the environmental conditions encountered in the
workplace. Tags are essentially warning labels affixed to energy isolating devices,
and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.

E. Retraining shall be provided whenever there is a change in the lockout/tagout

program and whenever job changes or changes in equipment or processes present a
new hazard.
F. All training must be documented, including the date and names of employees
attending the training.
VIII. References
A. American National Standards Institute; ANSI 2244.1-1982.
B. National Fire Protection Association; NFPA 706, 5-3.
C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR

1910.147, 1910.269, and 1910.301-399

Attachment 3.9-1
Lockout/Tagout Inspection Report
Date: Time:
Facility: Location:
Equipment Involved in Lockout/Tagout:
Employees Involved in Lockout/Tagout:
Employees Knew Responsibilities? (Circle One) Yes No
Deviations/Inadequacies Observed:
Recommendations Addressing Deviations/Inadequacies or Program Enhancements:
Signature of person completing the inspection: __________________________________________
Send the completed form to your OC Foreman for corrective action (if any) and send one copy to your
Field Safety Specialist for filing.

Chapter 13, Machine Guarding
Chapter 13
Machine Guarding
I. General Guarding Principles
A. Rings, wrist watches, loose clothing, unsecured long hair and other loose accessories
should not to be worn within arms reach of operating machinery, tools, electrical
switch gear or locations where these present a hazard.
B. All guards shall protect the operator and other employees from hazards such as those
created by point of operation, ongoing nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and
sparks.
C. The operating supervisors are responsible for ensuring that guards are adequate and
in place. The HSE representative shall be consulted if questions arise as to what is
adequate guarding.
D. All guards will be affixed to the machine where possible. If it is not feasible to
attach a guard directly to the machine, the guard shall be secured elsewhere.
E. Manufacturers guards shall not be removed or altered on portable grinders or any

other machinery.
F. Barrier guards may be used in lieu of point-specific guards where appropriate.
G. For information concerning specific types of machinery, consult 29 CFR 1910.221-

222, 1910.243, or your HSE representative.
II. Abrasive Wheel Machinery
A. Inspection
1. All abrasive wheels shall be checked upon installation to assure that the
machine or spindle RPM speed is not greater than the safe RPM recommended
for that particular wheel being installed.
2. The wheels shall fit freely on the spindle.
3. The spindle bushing, if used, must be narrower than the wheel.

4. Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded
by the user (using a ring test) to assure the wheels' integrity.
A ring test consists of the wheel being gently tapped with a light nonmetallic
implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light wheels, or a wooden
mallet for heavier wheels. If they sound cracked (dead), they shall not be used.
5. Fixed machines shall be securely anchored to prevent movement or tipping.
B. Guards
1. Guards must be in place for each abrasive wheel and brush.
2. The safety guard for fixed grinders shall cover the spindle end, nut, and flange
projections and shall be mounted to maintain proper alignment and limit the
wheel exposure to 90 degrees.
3. Wheel exposure shall not begin more than 65 degrees above the horizontal
plane of the spindle. See Attachment 4.13-1 for an illustration.
4. Work rests shall be used on all fixed grinding machines and will be set within
1/8 inch of the wheel.
5. All bench pedestal grinders must have an adjustable tongue guard, with the
guard being set to clear the abrasive wheel by not more than 1/4 inch.
C. Personal Protection
1. Appropriate eye and face protection (goggles/face shield) shall be available and
worn when using all permanent abrasive wheel machines as well as portable
grinders.
2. A sign shall be posted near all fixed abrasive wheel machinery noting that
goggles/face shields are required.
III. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor, 29 CFR, Part

1910.215 and 1910.243.


Attachment 4.13-1
Fixed Abrasive Wheel Machinery Guards
The angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on fixed
machine stands shall not exceed 90 degrees or one-fourth of the periphery. This exposure shall
begin at a point not more than 65 degrees above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle (see
Figures 1 and 2).

Document Number NAG SPU STP GP 00-05
Applicability NAG SPU
Date Sept 11, 2007
Site Technical Practice
MOC
Management of Change
NAG SPU STP GP 00-05
U.S. Operations
Paper Copies of the Document are Uncontrolled

NAG-STP-00-00-05
Table of Contents
1.0 Scope ...............................................................................................................................4

2.0 Normative References ....................................................................................................5
3.0 Glossary of Terms...........................................................................................................5
3.1 Terms .......................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Use of Language ......................................................................................................... 5
3.3 Definitions.................................................................................................................... 6
4.0 MOC Determinatiion........................................................................................................8
4.1 Technical MOC............................................................................................................ 8
4.2 Administrative MOC .................................................................................................... 8
4.3 Organizational / Personnel MOC................................................................................. 8
4.3 Drilling and Wells MOC ............................................................................................... 9
4.5 Replacement in Kind ................................................................................................... 9
5.0 MOC System and Key Responsibilities.......................................................................10
5.1 Management ............................................................................................................. 10
5.2 Employee .................................................................................................................. 10
5.3 MOC Initiation............................................................................................................ 10
5.4 MOC Verification ....................................................................................................... 10
5.5 MOC Coordination..................................................................................................... 11
5.6 MOC Review and Evaluation .................................................................................... 11
5.7 MOC Approval........................................................................................................... 13
5.8 Pre-Implementation Action Item Assignment and Completion .................................. 14
5.8.1 Training Completed ................................................................................................... 14
5.8.2 PSSR Completed ...................................................................................................... 14
5.9 MOC Authorization to be Implemented (Started-up) ................................................. 15
5.10 Post-Implementation Action Item Assignment and Completion................................. 15
5.11 MOC Close-Out......................................................................................................... 15
6.0 Emergency Changes.....................................................................................................16
7.0 Temporary MOCs ..........................................................................................................16
8.0 MOC Training.................................................................................................................16
9.0 Document Retention .....................................................................................................16
10.0 Cancelled MOCs ............................................................................................................17
11.0 MOC Audit Process.......................................................................................................17
12.0 Appendicies ...................................................................................................................17
13.0 Technical References and Relevant Links..................................................................18
14.0 Appendix A - MOC Workflow ........................................................................................19
15.0 Appendix B Guidelines for Performing Hazard Reviews........................................19
16.0 Appendix C Example Pre Start Up Safety Review (PSSR) Checklist ....................21
17.0 Appendix D Technical MOC Decision Tree..............................................................23
18.0 Appendix E Organizational MOC Decision Tree......................................................24
19.0 Appendix F Administrative MOC Decision Tree......................................................25
Paper Copies are Uncontrolled Page 2 of 25

NAG-STP-00-00-05
Revision Log
Revision # Date Reason Approval
A 14 July 06 Issued for Review HSSE Committee
B 17 Aug 06 Issued for Approval HSSE Committee
C 17 Aug 06 Approved with comments HSSE Committee
D 23 Aug 06 Issued for Approval N/S Engineering Authority(s)
E 7 May 07 Approved N/S Engineering Authority(s)
F 7 May 07 Issued for Approval SPU Engineering Authority
G 30 Aug 07 Approved SPU Engineering Authority
0 11 Sept 07 Issued Final

NAG STP GP 00-05
1.0 Scope
NAG SPU has developed the following document regarding the Management of Change (MOC) System
which outlines the manner in which U.S. Operations will manage change. This MOC System applies to
existing and future facilities.
MOC is a system to confirm that changes are properly recognized, reviewed, approved, communicated and
documented. Temporary and permanent changes which impact the Strategic Performance Units (SPU)
operation or equipment and that are not replacement in kind, will be evaluated and managed to confirm that
health, safety, security, operational, and environmental risks arising from these changes remain at
acceptable levels. A MOC system that complies with IM and gHSEr Element 7 is designed to confirm that:
temporary and permanent changes to organization, staffing levels, procedures, equipment,

products, materials and substances are evaluated,
processes are in place to confirm the MOC procedure has been correctly applied, the proposed
modification is safe to commission and/or strategies to manage organizational risks (transitional
and long tem) are developed,
authority for approving MOC decisions is clearly defined,
documentation requirements including the scope, justification for change and updates to all
engineering drawings and operating procedures are defined,
potential consequences, required mitigation and any time limitations are communicated
throughout the SPU to affected staff,
a Pre-Startup Safety Review (PSSR) is completed after modification to confirm the change was
made as designed with relevant details / training communicated,
the proposed changes do not compromise approved emergency response plans,
individual MOCs are not closed out until relevant documentation is updated and made available
to staff, and
annual or more frequent assurance by competent person to verify the SPU MOC system is being
applied correctly.
For major modifications or additions to facilities where the CVP for projects will be used, MOC will also
apply. The operating facility will need to manage the modification/addition through the MOC practice. In
addition, the project team may need to utilize the MOC practice after the design PHA has been completed
to manage ongoing design changes.
The Environmental Management System (EMS) Document Control Procedure provides MOC for the various
procedures and documents in the EMS. The EMS Document Control Procedure may also be used for other
procedural revisions, as appropriate, except for those management systems, operating and maintenance
procedures required as part of OHSAs Process Safety Management (PSM) program, EPAs Risk
Management Plan or BPs Integrity Management (IM) program.
Those US properties covered by the OSHA 29 CFR 1910.119 regulation for Process Safety Management
(PSM) are required to have a site-specific procedure that details how MOC is accomplished for the location.
Each location will need to confirm that their site MOC process is consistent with this STP. The MOC section
of the PSM Performance Baseline provides additional guidance on how the site MOC procedure will be
applied.
All locations shall utilize the Electronic Management of Change Application (eMOC) to document, track, and
audit the MOC process against this Site Technical Practice (STP).

NAG STP GP 00-05
2.0 Normative References
BP
GP XX-XX Title
GP YY-YY Title
3.0 Glossary of Terms
3.1 Terms
The following terms are utilized in this STP
CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CVP Capital Value Process
DPIC Designated Person in Charge
EA Engineering Authority
eMOC Electronic Management of Change Application
EMS Environmental Management System
ETP Engineering Technical Practice
FMEA Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
gHSEr Getting Health Safety and Environmental Right
HSSE Health Safety Security Environmental
HAZOP Hazard and Operability Analysis
IM Integrity Management
ISO International Organization for Standardization
KPI Key Performance Indicator
MOC Management of Change
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PHA Process Hazard Analysis
PSM Process Safety Management
PSSR Pre Start-up Safety Review
RIK Replacement in Kind
SPU Strategic Performance Unit
STP Site Technical Practices
TA Technical Authority
3.2 Use of Language

Throughout this document, the following words when used in the context of actions by BP or others
have the specific meanings:
Will is used normally in connection with an action by BP, rather than by a contractor or
supplier
May is used where alternatives are equally acceptable
Should is used where a provision is preferred or recommended
Shall is used where a provision is mandated by the IM Standard and is a minimum
requirement
Must is used only where a provision is a regulatory requirement
Compliance means meeting the requirements of applicable regulations
Conformance means meeting the requirements of the IM standard

NAG STP GP 00-05
3.3 Definitions
The following definitions are used in this STP
Administrative Change - Temporary or permanent changes to a policy, procedure, process

or form made at SPU, OC or plant level that affects process safety and integrity
management.
Approver Approvers are responsible for approving an MOC to take place after a proper
review has been completed. The DOA document lists the job titles which are required for
each of the MOC types.
Authorizer - Authorizers are responsible for authorizing an MOC to be implemented after all
pre-implementation action items have been completed. The DOA document lists the job titles
which are required for each of the MOC types.
Coordinator - Responsible person that is charged with coordinating the local MOC process
and providing assurance to local management that they are meeting expectations.
Coordination of eMOC, if used, may be part of the MOC Coordinators responsibilities or
assigned to another individual.
Emergency Change An action necessary to remedy an emergency that poses imminent

danger to safety, health, the environment or has a serious financial impact, which demands
an immediate response.
Formal Safety Assessment - The process of understanding hazards by hazard

identification and analysis of the causes, consequences, potential for escalation, and
preventions.
Initiator (Originator) - Person involved with an asset who recognizes a change and initiates
the MOC process.
Organizational/Personnel Change - A temporary or permanent change in the organization

or in personnel with specific knowledge or experience who supervise or operate a facility
which would lead to a loss of knowledge or experience.
Permanent Change A change that will remain in effect until another MOC is completed to
remove it from service. Permanent MOCs are closed once all signatures have been
gathered, all signatures received, and all filing requirements have been met.
Pre-Implementation Action Item Action items which must be completed prior to an MOC
being authorized for implementation (start-up).
Post-Implementation Action Item Action items which must be completed prior to an MOC
being closed.
Risk Assessment / Hazard Analysis - A broad term for formal and informal tools used to
identify health, safety and environmental hazards and to develop controls to minimize,
mitigate and/or eliminate them. Examples: RAT/JSA, Risk Matrix, What-if (brainstorming),
What-if Checklist, HAZOP, Organizational Change Risk Assessment, Quantitative Risk
Assessment, etc.

NAG STP GP 00-05
Replacementin-Kind (RIK) - Replacement-in-Kind (RIK) is the replacement of an item
(e.g., equipment, chemical or procedure) with another item that meets the original design
specification of the item being replaced.
Reviewer - Individual whose expertise and experience qualify them to be recognized as
technically competent on issues such as process design, mechanical design,
instrumentation/control, electrical, civil/structural design, rotating equipment, etc.
Technical Change - A permanent or temporary change to an existing facility or process or

deviation from the documented design limits.
Temporary Change - A change not intended to be permanent and that will not exceed the
indicated time frame for the change without additional review and approval. A time must be
specified when the temporary change is to be returned to the original conditions and is
subject to the same evaluation as a permanent change.
Verifier - Individual, usually the initiators first line supervisor, who confirms feasibility of a
proposed change.

NAG STP GP 00-05
4.0 MOC Determinatiion
4.1 Technical MOC

A Technical MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):
ValveIf style, pressure rating, size, packing, seals or Pressure Safety Valves (PSV) setting
changes.
Piping and FlangesIf size, schedule, or material flange rating changes.
Pumps and CompressionIf material (including internals), flange size, rating, capacity, head
or type of seal changes.
DriversIf horsepower (hp) rating, motor electrical classification or lubrication system
changes.
Vessel/TanksIf nozzles, service configuration, Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
(MAWP), or relief capacity is changed, or if there is welding on shell, head or walls.
Introduction of new or different process chemicalsif composition, function, or reaction is
changed.
Equipment changes/modifications that cause changes to pressure relief requirements.
Construction of new production or process facilities or new projects tied into existing facilities.
Installation or relocation of temporary or permanent occupied buildings.
Changes to process safety system design, function or information.
Permanent bypassing of any safety system device. (Temporary bypassing of safety systems
for routine testing, maintenance or start up purposes is excluded)
Bypass connections around equipment normally in service or removing equipment from
service
Introduction of new or different process chemicalsif composition, function, or reaction is
changed
Refer to the Technical MOC Determination Tree Appendix D for further assistance.
4.2 Administrative MOC

An Administrative MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):
Modifications are made within one of the elements of the PSM Baseline, where specified, to
adjust for site-specific conditions
Updates to the overall PSM performance program are made at the SPU level
Regulatory changes are made to the PSM Program
Deviation from a policy, procedure, process or form made at the SPU OC level that affects
process safety and integrity management
Refer to the Administration MOC Determination Tree Appendix F for further assistance.
4.3 Organizational / Personnel MOC

An Organizational/Personnel MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):
The change results in a net reduction in number of workers from agreed or current level
The change results in a change of duties or authority levels for an individual or group
There is a change to the shift schedule or staffing approach
An Organizational/Personnel MOC is not normally required for filling an existing position with
a new person or for moving persons from one position to another. Existing job competencies
and training processes are sufficient
Refer to the Organizational MOC Determination Tree Appendix E for further assistance.
An Organizational/Personnel MOC is not normally required when filling an existing position with a
new person or for moving persons from one position to another. Existing job competancies and
training processess are deemed sufficient.
NAG STP GP 00-05
4.3 Drilling and Wells MOC

A Drilling and Wells MOC shall be performed if (this list is not all inclusive):
Changes in typical location construction
Major rig modifications
Deviations from the original well or well work plan
Changes in completion program / design
Changes in the well testing program
Changes in the initial production procedure
Changes in critical manpower at the rig site
Is is not the intent to circumvent the dispensation process for changes that deviate from the Drilling
and Wells Operations Policy Manual.
4.5 Replacement in Kind

Replacement-in-Kind (RIK) includes changes that use the same size, material, style, type, range,
chemicals, control, operation, procedure, etc.
Examples of RIK are as follows:
ValvesReplacement of existing valves with valves of same design capabilities (e.g.,

pressure rating, materials of construction, nominal size, style, and flange facing)
Piping and flangesReplacement piping and flanges must have matching nominal size and
bore with the piping and flanges being removed. The manufacturer may change but the
weight, schedule (wall thickness), flange rating, facing and materials of construction must be
the same
Pumps and compressorsReplacement must match the existing equipment in pumping
capacity, materials of construction, seal type, suction and discharge rating and flow rate and
must also have same environmental standards (e.g., emissions and lubricants)
ElectricalReplacement of a breaker or fuse with one of the same rating, replacement of
wiring with same gauge and current carrying rating, or replacement of insulation
Electric motorsReplacement must have matching materials, horsepower, efficiency, voltage
rating, RPM, and frame size and type
Instrumentation/safety systemsNew control valve with no change in design capabilities or
materials of construction, adjusting operational set points within established operating range,
or routine testing and maintenance of safety devices and alarms
ChemicalChanging the recommended concentration of a chemical additive, within
established limits or product name change without alteration to composition
OperationsVariations in operating parameters (flow, pressure, and temperature) that are
within the design limits as described in current standard operating procedures or changes in
operating efficiency that do not adversely affect the HSE Performance Agenda
OrganizationalReassignment and replacement of qualified personnel or regular crew
change

NAG STP GP 00-05
5.0 MOC System and Key Responsibilities
5.1 Management
All levels of Management are responsible for:
Implementing the requirements of the MOC system,
Identifying the competent persons and delegating to them the responsibility for detailed
development of MOC proposals,
Approving and authorizing implementation of applicable changes, and
Coordinating assurance assessments.
5.2 Employee
All core personnel assigned to work for BP in NAG are responsible for:
Understanding the MOC System,
Must identify/recognize technical, administrative, and organizational changes, and
Are responsible for confirming the MOC system is initiated.
5.3 MOC Initiation

MOC Initiation may begin with any employee assigned to NAG.
The MOC Initiator is responsible for:

Discussing proposed change with Line Supervisor, other key personnel and actioning the
INITIATE stage of the MOC process,
Initiating an eMOC, selecting a Verifier(s) and providing information regarding a proposed
change to the Verifier(s), to include such items as title, scope, justification, identification of
the affected drawings, and comments or concerns associated with the change,
Assisting the Verifier(s) in selecting the technical Reviewers, and
Confirming that the MOC documentation is forwarded to the Verifier(s).
Notes:
It is encouraged (but not required) that discussions be generated with and verbal agreement obtained
from key personnel, prior to actioning the INITIATE stage of the MOC process.
5.4 MOC Verification

MOC Verification is normally performed by the initiators line supervisor, facility engineer or an
employee delegated by BP management.
The Verifier shall:
Scrutinize the requested change to determine whether the change fits within the MOC
applicability guidelines,
Appoint the MOC Coordinator, and
Confirm the selection of the Reviewers in consultation with the MOC Coordinator, Initiator
and or Facility Engineer.
The VERIFY stage of the MOC practice is in alignment with the CVP SELECT Stage.

NAG STP GP 00-05
5.5 MOC Coordination

Every MOC has one Coordinator assigned. The MOC Coordinator is the person assigned by the
Verifier(s) to manage the MOC process from Review through Closure.
The MOC Coordinator shall:
Assign personel responsible to review, approve, complete required acction items, and
authorize a proposed change,
Confirm that technical reviews have been completed,
Confirm that relevant documentation is update,
Confirm than required Risk Assessments are conducted and recommendations are
addressed,
Resolves conflicts/concerns associated with the MOC,
Consult with the Line Supervisor to confirm that assigned personnel are addressing their
responsibilities in a timely and efficient manner,
Identify and document Pre/Post Implementation action items,
Confirm that the required PSSR is conducted, and
Confirm proper communication, documentation, and follow-up of each assigned MOC.
Action the HOLD function during the process for changes which may be delayed.
Confirm that the MOC process is completed by actioning the CLOSED or CANCELLED function.
Notes:
1. There SHALL be an assigned MOC Coordinator for every MOC.
5.6 MOC Review and Evaluation

The review cycle is an integral part of the MOC process and the level of detail for each review
should be appropriate for the complexity of the proposed change and for the potential hazards the
change poses. Reviews are in place to confirm all changes meet the following:
Fulfillment of getting Heath, Safety, and Environment right (gHSEr) expectations,

Adherence to all applicable codes and industry standards,
Design specifications and generally accepted engineering practices,
Compatibility with existing processes or equipment, and
Consideration of the impact on future operations.
Reviewers must have a thorough understanding of the MOC practice and be knowledgeable, trained
and experienced with the equipment, practices and process changes under consideration. Review
team members are responsible for documenting the review if hazards or consequences associated
with the change are identified. If no hazards are identified, the reviewer should annotate as such on
the MOC form.
5.6.1 Facility Engineer

The Facility Engineer at each location plays a vital role in the MOC practice. This individual is
at times involved from start to finish of every MOC and filling roles such as Initiator, Verifier,
Coodinator, and/or Technical Reviewer.
It is the responsibility of the Facility Engineer to:
Understand when an MOC is required,
Confirm conformance to the MOC Practice,
Review Technical MOCs for their assigned location,
Assist in the selection of discipline Reviewers and appropriate Technical Authorities,
and
Assist in determining the appropriate level of Risk assessment to be performed.
NAG STP GP 00-05
5.6.2 Technical Reviewer

Technical Reviewer is an individual selected by the Initiator, Verifier and/or Coordinator to
conduct a specific discipline review for an MOC. The level of review should be appropriate
for the complexity of the proposed change and for the potential hazards the change poses.
This includes evaluation of the proposed change as described in the MOC and making the
appropriate recommendations which shall be documented. The primary focus of the
discipline Reviewer(s) is in their area of expertise, but should highlight any other issue that
may be identified.
The Technical Reviewer shall:
Document comments and further recommendations to the MOC,
Recommend other personnel as additional discipline Reviewers,
Identify hazards that the proposed change can create along with itigations actions
required,
Fulfill gHSEr expectations,
Confirm adherence to applicable codes and industry standards,
If necessary request that a team conduct a more extensive hazard evaluation
(formal PHA or risk assessment),
Determine if the change can be easily implemented. (This should include
consideration of both Process Safety and HSSE concerns including
industrial/personal hygiene and PPE),
Determine whether the appropriate controls are identified. (Special permits,
additional staffing, specific supervision during implementation),
Determine what additional activities should be accomplished prior to the
implementation of the change. (Developing operating procedures, training of
personnel, communicating the change, purchasing special materials),
Determine if a PSSR is required,
Identify and confirm conformance with applicable Codes and Standards,
Confirm compatibility with existing processes or equipment,
Consider the impact on future operations,
Select the appropriate Technical Authority (TA) for changes requiring clarification
of existing codes and standards or a higher level of functional expertise, and
Selects the appropriate Engineering Authority (EA) for changes outside the
confines of accepted industry codes and standards, approved internal company
standards and/or regulatory requirements.
Notes:
1. Every MOCshall be reviewed, and all Reviewers shall agree before proceeding to the APPROVE
stage.
2. Disapproval of an MOC shall be justified in writing.

NAG STP GP 00-05
5.6.3 Technical Authority (TA)

The IM Standard defines TA as persons with specific discipline expertise appointed by the
EA. The primary role of TAs is to act as the Technical Integrity Advisor within their
designated engineering discipline or activity by confirming the safe and consistent application
of company and regulatory codes and standards and good engineering practices.
General areas of responsibility for TAs are:
Technical Risk and Integrity Management,
Application and upkeep of Engineering Technical Practices ,
Application and upkeep of Site Technical Practices,
Identification of risk and mitigation recommendations,
Technical MOC Reviewer,
TAs are frequently engaged for the following types of activities,
Review/approval of Technical modification or change beyond company technical
practices or industry standards,
Technical reviews of non-major projects in CVP Select and Define stages, and
To provide technical assistance to engineering staff.
5.6.4 Engineering Authority

The EA is accountable for confirming processes and systems are in place for the
identification and management of engineering risk. The EA shall also review and approve all
changes which do not fall within company or industry standards. The EA shall also be
responsible for the controlled application of Site Technical Practices (STPs) appropriate to
the BP Operation (SPU, OC or Project). The Engineering Authority is responsible for the
annual audit of the MOC System.
Rejection by the evaluation team will be documented and the Coordinator will include/attach the
rejection rationale with the MOC documentation to file for future reference. All affected personnel will
be advised of the rejection rationale.
5.7 MOC Approval

All MOCs shall be approved prior to the requested change going forward. The Approver shall have
the appropriate delegation of authority for the MOC involved and is responsible for:
Confirming that all appropriate Reviewers have reviewed/recommended the change,
Confirming that all relevant personnel have indicated agreement of the change by either
electronic or hardcopy signature,
Confirming that required documentation is available and is up to date,
Confirming that the proposed changes shall accomplish their original intent,
Recommending additional Reviewers,
Requesting additional information, and
Actioning the APPROVE stage of the MOC practice.
The APPROVAL stage of the MOC practice is in alignment with the CVP EXECUTE Stage.
Note:
1. APPROVAL of an MOC gives permission to begin pre-implementation action items related to the
change.
2. Disapproval of an MOC SHALL be justified in writing.

NAG STP GP 00-05
5.8 Pre-Implementation Action Item Assignment and Completion

Most MOCs will have some form of pre-implementation action items associated with them. The
number of these actions can vary greatly based on the risk, complexity and magnitude of the
change. The appropriate pre-implementation action items shall be choosen for completion along
with a person responsible for completing each assigned action item.
Pre-implementation action items may include, but are not limited to:
Updating Process Safety Information as required,
Redlining facility drawings (PFD, P&ID, area classification, etc),
Redlining operating procedures,
Redlining maintenance procedures and equipment data files,
Redlining Emergency Response Plan,
Updating applicable regulatory requirements (fugitive emissions inventories, emission
factors, new regulatory reporting, etc),
Confirm that training has been completed and documented, and
Confirm that the PSSR has been completed and documented.
5.8.1 Training Completed

The individual assigned the responsiblity of providing training (face to face, email notification,
etc) and/or confirming that affected personnel have been trained shall sign off on the training
completed pre-implementation action actem if this action is required.
Training should include the following:
The change and its effects on the process,
Updates or changes to the Incident Emergency Plan (IMP),
PHA recommendations and/or resolutions,
Changes to regulatory compliance obligations,
Changes to job duties or work tasks, and
Changes to startup, operations and maintenance procedures,
Training should fit the complexity of the change, be documented and provide assurance of
understanding, as needed. Email notification in lieu of formal training for minor, lower risk
changes should provide an audit trail of who was notified and when.
5.8.2 Pre Startup Safety Review (PSSR) Completed

The E&P Integrity Management Standard Implementation Guide refers to assessing the need for
a PSSR be completed for every change. NAGs requirement is for a PSSR to be completed for all
Technical MOCs. For OSHA PSM covered properties, a PSSR is legally required if the Process
Safety Information will be affected by the change. The individual assigned the responsibility of
conducting the PSSR shall sign off on the PSSR complete pre-implementation action item upon
completion. The PSSR must be documented with supporting data and attach to the MOC prior to
MOC closeout.
Notes:
1. PSM facilities should use the Affected Documents form to aid in determining what process
information needs to be updated.

NAG STP GP 00-05
5.9 MOC Authorization to be Implemented (Started-up)

Prior to employees implementing a change in the office or field, that change must be authorized. The
Authorizer shall have the appropriate level of authority, as prescribed in the NAG SPU Delegation of
Authority document, for the MOC involved and is responsible for:
Confirming conformance to the MOC practice,
Confirming compliance with regulatory agencies, company and industry standards,
Confirming that assigned pre-implementation actions were appropriate/completed for the
change and that post-implementation actions are identified and assigned,
Confirming that the change accomplishs its original intent, and
Sanctioning the change by actioning the IMPLEMENT stage of the MOC practice.
The AUTHORIZATION stage of the MOC practice is in alignment with the CVP OPERATE Stage.
Notes:
1. All Pre-Implementation Action Items shall be completed before the MOC can be AUTHORIZED.
2. The need for a PSSR shall be determined and if required shall be introduced prior to Authorization.
3. Persons responsible for Post- Implementation Actions SHALL be established before Authorization.
5.10 Post-Implementation Action Item Assignment and Completion

The appropriate post-implementation action items shall be choosen for completion along with a
person responsible for completing each assigned action item. Prior to close-out of an MOC all these
post-implementation action items must be completed. It is the Coordinators or designated persons
responsibility to confirm all required actions have been completed prior to MOC close-out. The
number of these actions may vary greatly based on the risk, complexity and magnitude of the
change.
Post-implementation action items may include but are not limited to:
As-building facility drawings (PFD, P&ID, area classification, etc),
As-building of operating procedures,
As-building of maintenance procedures and equipment data files,
As-building of Emergency Response Plan,
Updating MAXIMO/Work Management System (WMS), and
Distribution of documents which have been updated to the designated individuals.
5.11 MOC Close-Out

The MOC Coordinator or designated person(s) will be responsible for closing out the specific MOC
to which they were assigned upon completion of the project by:
Confirming the change was performed as intended,
Confirming that required / relevant MOC specific documentation has been filed, and
Closing out the MOC in a timely manner. There is a 90-day window after implementation
of the change in which an MOC must be closed out.

NAG STP GP 00-05
6.0 Emergency Changes
In Emergency Situations, it is understood that completion of the MOC practice usually cannot be applied
until after the change has been implemented. The MOC practice shall be completed after the fact to confirm
that the change(s) have been made and that there are no additional actions necessary to secure the long-
term acceptability of the change. The asset has 96 hours to complete a formal MOC having it progressed
though the Authorized stage (MOC Status = Implement).
Emergency changes require coordination between local management and facility engineering. Local
management shall approve the change based on facility engineerings hazard analysis.
7.0 Temporary MOCs
Temporary MOCs will be of relatively short duration, from a few days to several weeks. A few MOCs for
various reasons will be required to be open for an extended period of time. When the time period expires,
the change shall either become permanent or changed back to its original state. For a change to become
permanent, the change must be resubmitted through the MOC system as a permanent MOC. The maximum
time frame for a temporary change to be in effect is no longer than 90 days after the change was
authorized. When the approved timeframe has been reached the MOC will EXPIRE. When a temporary
MOC expires, and the temporary changes must remain in place, the asset has 96 hours to extend the
expiration date and have the MOC re-reviewed and re-approved as necessary.
8.0 MOC Training
MOC Training will be required for every employee on a 2 year cycle and for all new hires. This training will
be in the form of computer based training (CBT) which has been developed and uploaded into the virtual
training assistance program (VTA). For additional training contact the NAG MOC Specialist.
9.0 Document Retention
MOC documentation will be maintained for the life of the facility due to the electronic process in which they
are maintained; however, specific filing requirements have been established:
Technical MOCs should be retained for 6 years or until incorporated into the next PHA
revalidation. After the PHA revalidation, it may not be necessary to retain the MOC files,
depending on local documentation practices for facility design data.
Administrative MOCs for life of process. (PSM Only)
Organizational MOC for six (6) years or until incorporated into next major PHA revalidation.
Drilling Well MOCs: Keep in WELLS Document Management System
Workover MOCs: Keep in OC Well file if done at OC or in Wells Management System if done at
Houston level.
Notes:
Technical MOC design documentation for equipment, piping, PSV, etc should be retained in the facility
files, equipment file, drawings, etc. for the life of the facility.
CAUTION: US operations subject to the OSHA Process Safety Regulations must retain ALL hazard studies for
the life of the facility.

NAG STP GP 00-05
10.0 Cancelled MOCs
If the MOC is rejected for any reason, that MOC is considered cancelled. Before the MOC is cancelled in
the system, the person canceling the MOC is responsible for confirming that a reason for the cancellation is
documented on the MOC form and notifying the MOC Coordinator. The MOC Coordinator then cancels the
MOC.
* Cancelled MOCs remain in the system and may be viewed at any time.
11.0 MOC Audit Process
Periodic assessments are necessary to give assurance that the MOC practice is meeting expectations. SPU
assurance that MOC expectations are being met are the responsibility of the Engineering Authority and will
be achieved through audits associated with the gHSEr, Eight Golden Rules, IM, PSM, DWOP and EMS
programs. NAG Engineering Authorities will be responsible for coordinating assessments to prevent
duplication of effort. The appropriate level of engineering review and approval should be a focus of any
assurance review.
12.0 Appendicies
The following appendices support the MOC practice and are to be used whenever applicable.
Appendix A MOC Practice Flowchart

Appendix B Guidelines for Performing Hazard Reviews
Appendix C Example PSSR Form
Appendix D Technical MOC Decision Tree
Appendix E Organizational MOC Decision Tree
Appendix F Administrative MOC Decision Tree

NAG STP GP 00-05
13.0 Technical References and Relevant Links
Below are technical relevant links (if known):
gHSEr, Expectations, Element 7, Management of Change
BP Integrity Management Segment Implementation Guide, Version 1.0, January 2006
Engineering Technical Practices http://etp.bpweb.bp.com/
BP Group Integrity Management Portal http://integritymanagement.bpweb.bp.com
Process Safety Management Performance Program, Rev 3 http://psm.bpweb.bp.com.
Process Safety/Integrity Management Standard, Element 2, Management Of Change
EMS, Document Control Process http://contentstore.bpweb.bp.com/content/hsems/upstream/UPS-

US-AK-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00010-1
Delegation of Authority Document
Engineering Assurance Guideline
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.119 (Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals,

Explosives, & Blasting Agents)
Drilling and Well Operations Policy http://dwo.bpweb.bp.com//documents/BPA-D-001/default.htm

eMOC Appplication Reference Guide (available on the eMOC BU Documents Page)

NAG STP GP 00-05
14.0 Appendix A - MOC Workflow
RESPONSIBILITY MOC STATUS
INTIATOR UNNAPPROVED
IDENTIFY NEED FOR CHANGE
DESCRIBE / DOCUMENT
PROPOSED CHANGE
YES
VERIFIER -
SCREENING AND CHANGE CONCEPTUALLY NO NO
VERIFICATION APPROVED? MODIFY SCOPE/REQUIREMENTS
YES
YES
REPLACEMENT-IN-KIND? NO MOC REQUIRED
NO
COORDINATOR
ESTABLISH MOC
REQUIREMENTS / ASSIGN ALL
RESPONSIBLE PARTIES
REVIEWER -
EVALUATION TEAM
REVIEW AND REVIEW CHANGE, IDENTIFY AND
RECOMMENDATION ASSESS HAZARDS
NO
SAFE TO IMPLEMENT?
YES NO
CHANGE FOLLOWS NO ENGINEERING AUTHORITY (EA) YES

INDUSTRY/COMPANY DISPENSATION / TECHNICAL
STANDARDS / REGULATIONS REVIEW AND APPROVAL
YES NO
TECHNICAL REVIEWERS (TR) NO TECHNICAL AUTHORITY (TA)

RECOMMEND THE CHANGE RECOMMEND THE CHANGE
YES YES
APPROVER
APPROPRIATE
CHANGE IS APPROVED
MANAGEMENT LEVEL
ALL ASSIGNED - APPROVED

PREIMPLEMENT
COMPLETE ALL PRE-
ACTIONS
IMPLEMENTATION ACTION ITEMS
AUTHORIZER -
CHANGE MAY NOW BE
IMPLEMENTED
AUTHORIZE THE CHANGE
IMPLEMENT
ALL ASSIGNED -
POSTIMPLEMENT COMPLETE ALL POST-
ACTIONS IMPLEMENTATION ACTION ITEMS
CLOSURE - CLOSED OR
MOC MAY BE CLOSED VERIFY FILING REQ., CHANGE CAPTURE REASON FOR CANCELLED
OR CANCELLED WAS PERFORMED AS INTENDED CANCELLATION AND CANCEL
- CLOSE THE MOC THE MOC

NAG STP GP 00-05
15.0 Appendix B Guidelines for Performing Hazard Reviews
A thorough and accurate assessment of the potential hazards in a facility minimizes the risk of personnel
injuries, loss of equipment, and damage to the environment. The assigned Reviewer should not be the
originator of the change and must be experienced in the relevant subject matter. If there are parts of the
scope of change that are beyond the Reviewers area of knowledge, additional subject matter experts
should be added to the review team. Whoever performs the hazard review, the objectives are the same.
The Reviewers shall adhere to the following:
Identify specific hazards that the proposed change may create. Changes that increase the
possibility of an undesirable event should receive more rigorous review methods (e.g., a formal
process hazard analysis or a risk assessment).
Consider the level of risk reasonableness, determine how to eliminate or mitigate hazards and
identify opportunities to reduce the probability and consequence of an incident.
Determine if the change has adverse affect on the HSE Performance Agenda and review
aspects of the change and how it relates to the potential environmental impacts outlined in
gHSEr (e.g., emissions, overboard disposal, energy efficiency, wastes and regulatory
compliance).
Determine if the change can be safely implemented. This should include consideration of both
process safety and traditional safety concerns such as industrial hygiene and the use of personal
protective equipment (PPE).
Determine whether the proposed controls (e.g., permits, staffing, or specific supervision required
during implementation) for implementation are acceptable.
Determine what additional activities (e.g., updating drawings and procedures, training of
personnel, and appropriate communication of the change to personnel) must be accomplished
before implementation of the change.
Identify the actions that need to be accomplished and documented after the change is complete
to satisfy regulatory or BP requirements.
All hazard reviews shall be documented and filed (electronically or in hard copy) with the MOC
file in the form of a completed hazards study report, checklist, or hazards review statement.

NAG STP GP 00-05
16.0 Appendix C Example Pre Start Up Safety Review (PSSR) Checklist

Pre Start Up Safety Review
PRE-STARTUP SAFETY REVIEW CHECKLIST
MOC NUMBER: MOC TITLE:
FACILITY:
Item Question Responsibility / NA Initials
PIPING
1 Piping is routed and valved according to the P&ID. Construction
2 Inspect valves, flanges and spec breaks to confirm proper pressure rating and compatibility. Construction
3 Piping and equipment has been inspected for damage, debris, integrity, and anodes Operations
4 All critical piping systems have hydro, pneumatic or non-destructive testing completed and QA documentation Construction
has been reviewed.
5 Relief systems, PSV's, PCV's, vent piping, flare stacks, and vent booms are installed per construction dwgs. Construction
6 All permanent blinds are in place; all temporary blinds have been removed. The blind list has been reviewed Operations
and approved.
7 Flange installations have been inspected for proper bolting, gaskets, isolation kits, and restriction orifices. Construction
8 All purging, flushing, draining, and pickling complete. Operations
9 All drains and sewers have been inspected for plugs and covers. Operations
10 Proper installation, operation and orientation of valves (process, instrumentation, utility...) have been ensured. Construction
11 All filters, screens, and strainers (temporary or permanent) are properly located and installed. Construction
12 Piping systems have been reviewed allowing for equipment/facility blowdown and isolation Construction
13 Vents have spark / detonation arrestors, where appropriate. Engineering
14 The integrity of all thermowells and bull plugs have been inspected. Construction
15 Exhaust lines / vents are properly located away from air intakes, air conditioners, fans, sources of ignition, etc. Construction
16 All block valves on the relief systems have been locked or car sealed open and are in a functional state Construction
17 Lock open and lock closed valves have been inspected and are properly secured in their intended position. Construction
18 All block valves have been reviewed for normal position (norm. open or closed) and handle has full travel. Construction
19 All fail safe valves have been reviewed for proper action (fail open, fail close, fail unchanged); and location. Construction
CIVIL
20 Structural steel installed to engineering design specifications. Engineering
21 Supports required meet design structural engineering standards. Engineering
MECHANICAL
22 All equipment meets design specifications. Engineering
23 Mechanical equipment has been checked for proper alignment, lubrication, and rotation; functional checkouts Construction
have been performed on equipment and controls.
24 All equipment has been filled with proper fluids to the appropriate level and charged as necessary. Construction
25 Adequate spare parts are available. Operations
ELECTRICAL
26 Electrical Motors (check for proper rotation and heaters are connected). Construction
27 All equipment and structures grounded and tested. Operations
28 Electrical relays, circuit breakers, transformers, lighting and emergency power systems inspected and tested. Construction
29 Controllers and disconnects are labeled if the device being controlled is not obvious. Construction
30 All electrical equipment installed to design specifications. Construction
31 All electrical seals have been packed and poured; all explosion-proof boxes, conduit covers are properly Construction
secured and all electrical connections tightened and checked.
32 Any equipment and associated breaker panels not to be used or not available for use are out of service. All Construction
lockouts are flagged, tagged and listed.
33 Rotating equipment trip points, especially overspeed, have been checked and tested. Construction
34 The UPS and/or emergency power systems have been tested. Construction

NAG STP GP 00-05
INSTRUMENTATION
35 All instrumentation installed to engineering design specifications (API RP 14C) Engineering
36 All electrical and pneumatic loop checks completed. Operations
37 Interlocks (Electrical and Mechanical) have been reviewed and tested for proper operation. Operations
38 All tubing and tubing fittings have been inspected for proper fit-up and leakage. Operations
39 All instruments weatherproofed. Operations
40 Emergency equipment (i.e. ESD/PSD), alarms, communication equipment, and shutdown devices calibrated, Operations
tested, documented and activated.
41 The fire and gas detection systems have been inspected and tested and are in auto mode. Operations
42 All bypasses and jumpers on control or safety circuits have been removed. Operations
43 PLC logic tested and documentation completed. Engineering
44 Backup batteries at full charge. Operations
SAFETY AND HEALTH

45 The fire fighting system complies with 30 CFR 250.803 (8). Engineering
46 Safety equipment, including fire fighting devices, escape devices, safety showers and eye wash stations, have Operations
been inspected and reviewed for proper operation and location.
47 Platforms ladders, handrails, and guards (rotating equipment and heat) constructed correctly. Operations
48 Fire detection system has been reviewed for proper detector location and correct response / action. Operations
49 All safeguards including signs (DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP OUT, HEARING PROTECTION Operations
REQUIRED), chains, safety equipment boxes, PPE boxes, etc. are installed and adequately stocked.
50 Area has been cleared of construction equipment, surplus equipment, combustible materials, extraneous tools, Construction
unused parts, scaffolding and empty drums.
DOCUMENTATION
51 All applicable permits and approvals have been received from regulatory agencies (MMS / USCG) Engineering
52 Emergency response and evacuation procedures/plans updated, communicated, and in place. Operations
53 Hazard analysis recommendations have been addressed and implemented. Engineering
54 Flare System /PSV/ Ventilation System design basis updated. Engineering
55 Safety information is complete and in place. Operations
56 A start-up plan has been prepared and applied. Operations
57 Written startup, operating and shutdown procedures are in place (SOPs). Engineering
58 Training of all affected personnel has been completed (operations, maintenance, emerg. resp etc.). Operations
59 All construction punch list items have been reviewed and completed Construction
60 MFD/P&ID's redlined. Engineering
61 Process Flow Diagrams (PFD's) redlined. Engineering
62 Process and Safety Flow Diagrams (PSFDS) redlined. Engineering
63 SAFE chart redlined. Engineering
64 Fire and Safety Equipment Locations Plans redlined Engineering
65 Electrical Area Classification Plan drawings redlined. Engineering
66 Electrical One-line drawings redlined. Engineering
67 Structural and Isometric drawings redlined. Engineering
68 MSDS files updated. Operations
69 Weight Management Program impacts addressed. Engineering
70 PS/IM program updated. Engineering
71 Inspections and Maintenance requirements addressed in MAXIMO. Engineering
72 All applicable vendor data updated. (i.e., mechanical, electrical, instrument, etc.) Engineering
APPROVALS
All Responses agreed
to/reviewed by: Title/Position Name Date
Title/Position Name Date

NAG STP GP 00-05
17.0 Appendix D Technical MOC Decision Tree
ee
TECHNICAL MOC DECISION TREE START
YES
Does anyone need to receive training (formal or informal) or be notified as a result of this change?
NO
YES
Is this a change in any operating parameter or capacity of the equipment outside the present operating/design limits?
NO
YES
Is this a change which may may have a cummulative impact over time on the current process?
NO
YES
Is there a change of a chemical or composition or concentration used in the process outside of operating/design limits?
NO
YES
Does this change bring a new technology into the facility (e.g. Mechanical or Electronic) or change current feedstocks?
NO
YES
Is a change to Operating/ Maintenance procedures (to include testing and inspection frequencies) required as a result of this change?
NO
YES
Does the change require alteration of the current Emergency Response Plans?
NO
YES
Is a change to site documentation required as a result of this change (P&IDs, PFDs, equipment database info, Area Class) Drawings?
NO INTIATE
YES TECHNICAL
Is a planned turnaround or major maintenance activity being deffered? MANAGEMENT
NO
OF CHANGE
YES
Is this a change to the process flow path?
NO
YES
Does this change require changes to material, pressure rating, capactity, throughput of the original design?
NO
YES
Does this change alter protective systems including settings of mech. devices, alarms, trips, shutdown and blowdown systems?
NO
YES
Does this change add additional weight to current structural supports or require load transfer of current process equipment?
NO
YES
Does this change alter the current location or require the installation of an occupied building (temporary or permanent)?
NO
YES
Does this change deviate from design codes, standards, ETPs, STPs or specification requirements?
NO
YES
Does this change require changes in Engineering contracts, contractors, or equipment suppliers?
NO
Does this change require the purchasing/leasing of land or office space which may contain a hazard (ie pipeline) to employees?
NO
Paper Copies are Uncontrolled NO MOC REQUIRED! Page 23 of 25

NAG STP GP 00-05
18.0 Appendix E Organizational MOC Decision Tree
ORGANIZATIONAL MOC DECISION TREE
START
YES
Does anyone need to receive training (formal or informal) as a result of this change?
NO
YES
Is this a change in the number of operators or maintenance personnel in the facility?
NO
YES
Is this a change in the hours worked?
NO
YES
Is this a change in the delegation of authority where safety, health, security or environment is impacted? INTIATE
ORGANIZATIONAL
NO
MANAGEMENT OF
YES
CHANGE
Is this a change in the Organizational structure (addition or deletion of a job position)?
NO
YES
Is this a change from Company employees to Contract employees?
NO
YES
Is this a change in the Operating Philosophy (staff)?
NO
YES
Is this a change to the amount of personnel per shift?
NO
NO MOC REQUIRED!

NAG STP GP 00-05
19.0 Appendix F Administrative MOC Decision Tree
ADMINISTRATIVE MOC DECISION TREE
START
YES
Is this a change in existing BP Policy and/or applicable laws and regulations?
NO
YES
Are you deviating from the NAG HSSE Policy/Manual
NO
YES
Does this change require changes in Engineering contracts/contractors? INTIATE
ADMINISTRATIVE
NO MANAGEMENT OF
YES CHANGE
Is this a change in work processes?
NO
YES
Is this a change in Job Description?
NO
YES
Does this change require changes to field equipment suppliers?
NO
NO MOC REQUIRED!

Medical Case Management
Page 1 of 8
Safety Practice Medical Case Management

Authority: HSSE Manager Custodian: Jack Kogut
Scope: NAG SPU, BP America Document H&S Programs
Production Company Administrator Manager
:
Issue Date: Feb. 15, 2006
Revision Date: Feb. 15, 2008 Control Tier: Tier 2
1.0 Purpose/Scope
This Practice establishes the minimum requirements for all BP employees working in North American
Gas (US operations) and Gulf of Mexico Business Units that are impacted by injury or illness and is
intended to ensure effective and timely decisions regarding securing medical attention and return-to-
work practices.
2.0 Definitions
BP Employee: An employee who is hired by BP and receives job duties, payroll, benefits, discipline,
transfer and other related matters from BP.
Employee Staffing Company: A company that employs individuals who are essentially leased to
BP and are assigned to work at a BP workplace (e.g., Kelly, Clover)
Third Party Service Provider: A company that is retained by BP to provide complete service or
function at a BP workplace (e.g., Flint, Brown and Root). The third party service provider hires and
assigns employee to job duties and is responsible for all payroll, benefits, taxes, discipline, transfer,
staffing and related matters.
Contract Employee: An employee who is leased from an employment staffing company or hired and
assigned by a third-party service provider to provide a service to BP.
Fitness-for-Duty: Employee is physically fit to safely perform their assigned duties without risk of
harm to themselves or others.
Medical Case Manager: BPs US Medical Case Management Team (or Third Party medical
consultant) who coordinates, and assists BP supervisors/HR/management in making decisions and
coordinating communications regarding immediate medical care of employees and assisting
employees who are returning to work after an injury or after an extended illness (either occupational
or non-occupational). Case managers facilitate timely return to work with the goal of meeting or
exceeding published return to work guidelines.
Non-Minor Work-Related Accident/Incident: Injury requiring medical treatment (as defined by
OSHA), SOR, and HiPo.

3.1 Occupational (On the Job) Injury or Illness (BP Employee)
Employees are required to inform their supervisor or designated alternate immediately

upon knowledge that an injury or illness they suffered (including first aid, soft tissue injury,
twisted ankle, etc.) may be work related.
In situations of an obviously severe nature, an ambulance or air ambulance is to be

summoned immediately to transport the injured or ill employee to an appropriate health care
facility without delay. Notify BP Government and Public Affairs in the event an emergency
Life Flight helicopter is summoned.
In all other situations (first aid, soft tissue injury, twisted ankle, etc.), supervisors will respond
immediately to determine whether medical attention is indicated and, if so, to promptly
arrange for such attention. If the supervisor needs assistance (e.g. in determining the
seriousness of the employees condition, assisting in determining where to receive medical
Page 2 of 8
care, etc.) the supervisor will consult with BPs US Medical Case Management Team.
(866.877.0173). After hours, call rotating pagers. If attempts to contact BPs US Medical
Case Management Team are unsuccessful and immediate assistance is required, contact
the designated Third Party Medical Provider. Upon opening of regular business hours, the
Third Party Medical Provider will inform BP US Medical Case Management of the event
history and status. BP US Medical Case Management may request transfer of the case
from the Third Party Medical Case Manager if the situation warrants. Otherwise, the Third
Party Medical Provider will keep BP US Medical Case Management informed in a timely
manner of the ongoing details of the case.
If it is necessary to transport the injured/ill employee for medical care, the supervisor, or
suitable designate, shall accompany the injured/ill worker to the selected health care
provider or emergency facility. The injured/ill employee will be asked to sign applicable
medical forms. The BP US Case Management medical form packet can be access at the
following website: http://lshealthservices.bpweb.bp.com
The Medical Case Managers duty is:

(a) To assist the supervisor in determining whether medical assessment beyond first aid is
recommended.
(b) To coordinate communications with the medical treatment facility regarding the transport
and condition of the injured/ill employee being transported,
(c) To advise the medical treatment facility or professional of the nature of the injured/ill
employees normal job duties,
(d) To clarify any questions about the restrictions, if any, applicable to the injured/ill
employees return to work,
(e) Assist the injured/ill employee with scheduling and following up on any rehabilitation or
similar follow-up visits, and
(f) To confirm, in two situations only, that the medical treatment facility has considered the
suitability of equivalent medical treatment. Those two situations are
(i) Where a non-prescription medication might, in the treating physicians opinion, be
substituted for an equivalent prescription medication and
(ii) Where a butterfly bandage might, in the treating physicians opinion, be
substituted for stitches. Further, if the injured/ill employee has signed an appropriate
consent, the Medical Case Manager can assist with the transfer of medical records and
other discussions with the treating physician or medical facility.
The treating physician shall be requested to complete the Health Care Provider Report
form. The completed form shall be forwarded to the appropriate Medical Case Manager.
BP Supervisor shall complete the First Report of Injury/Illness form and initiate a
workers compensation claim by following appropriate procedures and submitting the form to
the appropriate BP Workers Compensation representative.
If an injured/ill worker is not returned to work following initial assessment (i.e., DAFWC), the
Medical Case Manager will maintain contact (with the employee, supervisor and necessary
healthcare providers), monitor care and arrange for any necessary fitness for duty
evaluations prior to the employees planned return to work.
Following a work-related incident which involves transport to a medical facility for evaluation,
the employee may be required to submit to prohibited substance testing when the
employee's conduct either contributed, or cannot be completely discounted as a contributing
factor, to the accident/incident. The employees supervisor will make the determination if
prohibited substance testing will be required. Testing will occur within a maximum of eight
hours for alcohol and within 32 hours for other substances. Delayed testing may be
considered for drugs only, if circumstances exist which do not allow for testing within these
timeframes. If the job is not a DOT-covered job, the employee will be temporarily removed

Page 3 of 8
from his/her position until the test results are complete. Refer to BP US Substance Abuse
Policy. If the job is a DOT-covered job, the medical case manager will coordinate
mandatory testing to meet compliance requirements.
3.2 Non-Occupational (off-the-job) Injury or Illness (BP Employee)

BP employees with injury/illness not attributed to the workplace, but that could be
reasonably expected to impact their fitness for duty or their ability to report to work, are
required to advise their supervisor. The supervisor shall contact the BP US Medical Case
Management Team to discuss the situation; the case manager will determine if additional
information and/or evaluation is recommended.
Note: For offshore operations, if the supervisor is unsure whether the injury or illness
requires additional medical attention beyond that which can be provided at the offshore
location, the supervisor should consult with the Medical Case Manager.
3.3 Occupational Injury or Illness to Staffing Company or Third Party Service

Provider Employee (hereinafter referred to collectively as contractor employees)
Each employment staffing company and third-party service provider is required to notify BP
of any injury or illness sustained by one of its employees or an employee of one of its sub-
contractors while doing work at a BP workplace.
Contractor employees are subject to their own employers incident reporting and medical
policies for injury or illness treatment in the event of an injury or illness and are not covered
by or subject to BPs medical policies.
If a contractor employee should become injured or ill while doing work at a BP workplace,
the local BP representative should confirm as soon as possible that the injury or illness has
been reported to the contractor employees employer and initiate BP internal reporting
requirements.
Each employment staffing company and third-party service provider is responsible for
managing the medical situation and return to work status for its employees and for
communicating work status to the local BP representative. If the contractor employees
employer wants to arrange for the services, at its own cost, of a Third Party Medical
Provider and does not have one, BP may provide the employer the name and contact
details of Third Party Medical Provider.
A contractor employee requesting accommodation in connection with medical restrictions
should make the request to his/her employer. The contractors authorized representative
should then submit the request for accommodation to the local BP representative.
In emergency situations or situations where the injured/ill contractor employees well-being
is believed to be at risk, BP representatives may be relied upon to seek referral
recommendations from a Medical Case Manager on behalf of the injured/ill contractor
employee, with the costs to be charged to the contractor.

Local HSSE Representative
Ensure requirements of the Medical Case Management Practice are communicated
throughout the local organization.
Ensure that Medical Case Manager has been notified in the event of a BP employee
work related injury/illness.

Page 4 of 8
Accompany injured/ill BP employee to selected health care provider or emergency

facility, or verify that suitable designate (as determined by supervisor) is in
attendance.
Ensure the First Report of Injury form has been completed and submitted to
Workers Compensation representative.
Assist BP employees with follow-up visits to the health care provider.
Ensure required Traction entries are completed.
Document BP employee OSHA recordable cases on the 300 log.
BP Employee
Report all incidents to supervisor or designated alternate.
Where possible, notify supervisor or designated alternate prior to obtaining medical
evaluation for work related injury/illness, including follow-up visits.
Adhere to any prescribed work restrictions and treatment / recovery plan and keep
Medical Case Manager informed of status.
Advise supervisor of any non-work related injury/illness that could be reasonably
expected to impact the employees fitness-for-duty.
Will provide medical information to the US Medical Case Management Team as
appropriate.
Operational Department Heads and Supervisors

Ensure that HSSE representative has been notified in the event of a BP employee
work-related injury/illness. (Include OCM, Asset, and HR Representative.)
Ensure injured/ill BP employee is accompanied to selected medical facility.

Ensure BP employee is adhering to any prescribed work restrictions and is keeping
Medical Case Manager informed of status.
Notifies the BP Claims Reporting Center (ACTEC) to provide required information;
Claims Reporting Center will complete the appropriate form and send to the
appropriate Workers Compensation claims office. (ACTEC) phone number is 877-
274-7093).
Notify BP Manager, Workers Compensation if injury is out of ordinary, i.e., life
threatening, or possible questionable claim; work number (630) 836-2402 pager
number (800) 520-6203.
Ensure BP employees returning to work after an incident have been deemed fit-for-
duty.
Medical Case Manager

Speaks with injured BP employee, supervisor, and other necessary BP
representatives regarding the nature of the injury or illness.
Contacts medical treatment facility to provide information on employee injury status,
job description and physical requirements, restricted duty program and other
required information for assessed/transported BP employee; assures treatment

Page 5 of 8
facility considers equivalent medical treatment options for (a) prescription drugs
where an over-the-counter equivalent exists and (b) a butterfly bandage as an
equivalent option for stitches; discusses treatment plan with employee to assure
he/she understands the requirements.
Ensures applicable post incident drug and alcohol testing is conducted per BU
policy.
Ensures the Health Care Provider Report (or equivalent) is completed by the
appropriate medical facility.
Provides existing case status report to the Workers Compensation Claims Adjuster
and BP customers including Operations, Medical, HSSE and HR.
Assists with OSHA injury/illness classifications.
Ensures Fitness-for-Duty/Return to Work evaluations are completed prior to an

employee being medically cleared by the case management team, as appropriate,
(i.e. DAFWC). Initiates and medically certifies federally mandated Family Medical
Leave Act (FMLA) process.

A. HSSE Initial Incident Reporting, Investigation and Tracking Standard
B. GoM Incident and Action Tracking Procedure

http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/dkgom/custom/dk/dk_view_content.jsp?objectid=0900a885800
0c1b0&path=/us_wl_dk_gom_hse:/content/hssems/gom_unified/UPS-US-SW-GOM-
HSE-DOC-00114-2
C. BP US Substance Abuse Policy
D. BP US Medical Case Management Team Web Site:
http://lshealthservices.bpweb.bp.com
6.0 Attachments
Attachment 1- Health Care Provider Report
C:\Documents and
Settings\kogutja\Desk
Attachment 2 - First Report of Injury (Not currently included - State Specific)

Attachment 3 ACTEC Information Request Form
Attachment 4 - Onshore Medical Case Management Flowchart
Attachment 5 - Phone List

Page 6 of 8
Attachment 3
ACTEC INFORMATION REQUEST FORM

ACTEC contact number: 877-274-7093
INJURED EMPLOYEE INFORMATION: Identify yourself and be prepared to give injured

employee information when calling.
BP Facility: Address/Phone Number:

Employee's Name:
Employee's Address/Phone Number:
Date of Birth: Date of Hire:
Social Security Number: Occupation:
Weekly Hours: Wages:
Date of Injury: Time of Injury:
Date of Knowledge: Scheduled Shift on Date of Injury:
Lost Time: Yes or No Last Day Worked:
Return to Work: Yes or No Full Wages Paid on Date of Injury: Yes or No
Martial Status: Married or Single
How Did the Accident Occur: Where Did the Accident Occur:
Body Parts Affected: Wages Continued: Yes or No
Number of Days Worked per Week: Full-Time or Part-Time Employee
Did the Employee Seek Medical Treatment: Yes or No, if Yes
Name, Address, Telephone Number of Treating Doctor:
DO YOU QUESTION THE VALIDITY OF THIS CLAIM? YES OR NO ---- WHY

Page 7 of 8
Attachment 4 - Medical Case Management Flowchart

Injury/Illness
Reported
Yes No
BP Contractor
Is the incident work Employee Employee
related?
Notify BP Contractor Mgt.

Medical fitness-for-duty
fitness-for-duty BP concurrence
Contractor BP
Employee Employee
Notify Notify Medical

Contractor Mgt. Case Manager
Yes No
Restricted
Monitor Case Duty
Mgt. Return to Relieve From
Work Duty
BP Rep. Medical Case Manager
Accompany Contact
Employee to treatment facility
facility
In emergency situations or situations

Complete 1st Notify Workers where the injured/ill contractor
Report of injury Compensation employees well-being is believed to
be at risk, BP representative may
seek treatment recommendations
from a 3rd party case management
Assist w/ Health Care service on behalf of the contractor.
Provider Report
Fitness For Duty

Contractor Mgt. Assessment
fitness for duty
assessment,
BP concurrence
Yes No
Restricted
Duty
Return to Work DAFW
BP HS Coordinator
Document OSHA Recordables on
300 Log, for BP employees

Page 8 of 8
Attachment 5 - Phone List
US Central Health Shared Services 630-420-5425

US Case Management Team 866-877-0173
Us Case Management Team FAX 630-420-4500
Naperville/Cantera Medical Department 630-420-5675

Houston/Westlake Medical Department 281-366-3403
Axiom Medical 281-419-7063
BP Manager, Workers Compensation 630-836-2402

Pager 800-520-6203
Workers Compensation Claims Office 877-274-7093

Page 1 of 10

Document Title: HSSE Orientation Onshore US
HSSE Training
Authority: NA Gas HSSE Director Custodian:
Coordinator
Scope of
Issue Date: November 15, 2001 Onshore US
Application:
Revision Date: June 30, 2005 Control Tier: Tier 2
Next Review June 30, 2008
Table of Contents
1.0 Purpose/Scope ...................................................................................................................................................1
2.0 Definitions .........................................................................................................................................................1
3.0 General Requirements .......................................................................................................................................2
4.0 Key Responsibilities ..........................................................................................................................................2
5.0 Procedure/Process..............................................................................................................................................3
6.0 Delivery Methods ..............................................................................................................................................4
7.0 Key Documents/Tools/References ....................................................................................................................4
Revision Log .................................................................................................................................................................6
1.0 Purpose/Scope
The purpose of this document is to define and standardize the framework for HSSE orientation
for the North American Gas Strategic Performance Unit NA Gas SPU Onshore US (Onshore
US). Completion of this prescribed orientation process shall be accepted throughout the Onshore
US. This practice identifies the basic BP HSSE overview required by all employees and
contractors coming to work for the BP Onshore US. This practice does not cover site specific
training for local hazards or operating conditions or deliver competence in other HSSE required
training such as confined space entry, energy isolation or lifting to name a few. Those training
requirements must be identified and delivered by the local operating center(s) for BP employees.
Contractors are responsible for delivering their own training requirements.
2.0 Definitions
You Have to Want to Be Safe Video - Video developed by BP and used in conjunction
with the HSSE orientation. There is a 16 minute and 30 minute version.
Virtual Training Assistant VTA is a program that lists, delivers and tracks training
for individuals.
Approved Regional Safety/Training Council Safety councils established on a

regional basis by industry to provide consistent basic HSSE training.

Onshore US Document TypeDocument TitleDocument Number Page 2 of 10
This practice applies to all OUSBU employees; on-site contractors, sub-contractors,

visitors and vendor/suppliers doing work on OUSBU property.
o On-site contractors, sub-contractors and BP- Accompanied Contractors shall
complete the BP OUSBU HSSE Orientation video You Have to Want to Be Safe
(or BP approved regional safety/training program), and site specific orientations prior
to working on an OUSBU location.
o Each BP location will determine the orientation need for visitors and
vendors/suppliers appropriate for the level of risk. A Job Safety/Hazard Analysis as
well as a tool box talk can be used for this.
This practice addresses the indoctrination and orientation process, focusing on Health,
Security, Safety and Environment at BP.
The purpose of this practice is to ensure that:
o OUSBU employees, on-site contractors, sub-contractors, visitors and suppliers are
indoctrinated and understand:
OUSBU HSSE policy, expectations and guidelines
Individual responsibilities when on OUSBU premises and work site
Potential hazards for the locations they will visit and understand what is
expected of them
A process overview of the operations, local safety practices and local hazards.
Documentation of the orientation shall be kept in Virtual Training Assistant (VTA) and
the sign up sheets shall be kept on file. Records shall be kept until the orientation expires.
BP Supervisors

Documentum Document Number:
4.1 Supervisors shall use the new & transferred employee orientation check list to
identify training needs, and shall file all documentation in an employees individual
training file and VTA. (See attachment 1, BP New/Transferred Employee Safety
Orientation Program)
4.2 The employees supervisor is responsible for ensuring that BP employees complete
the HSSE Orientation Program (You Have to Want to Be Safe) within two weeks
of their start date. This prerequisite must be completed prior to working onsite. If
the employee is transferring within the Onshore US and has already completed this
training, then this obligation may be considered complete.
4.3 Job Site Supervisors shall be instructed in their responsibilities for the safety of
their subordinates and equipment during normal operations and during possible
emergencies.
4.4 Each new/transferred BP employee, regardless of prior experience, will have

his/her job outlined and explained by the supervisor. Observation of the
new/transferred BP employees work performance shall be maintained until the
applicable supervisor is satisfied that he or she can fill the position in a safe and
effective manner. Each new/transferred BP employee will have a mentor assigned
to them as required in the Onshore US Short Service Employee Practice, Document
# K435.
4.5 BP Supervisors shall ensure that On-site contractors, sub-contractors, visitors and
vendors/suppliers have completed either the required BP HSSE Orientation or
equivalent regional safety/training program and BP-site specific / process overview
for the Asset they will be working.
4.5.1 Contractors who have completed the BP HSSE Orientation (You Have to
Want to Be Safe) either will be documented in a common data base for
tracking and verification or paper copies must be available.
5.1 Instruct the BP employee on how to access and use the HSSE Web site and explain
BPs attitude toward safety. Show the employee where copies of the Practices are
located.
5.2 Schedule BP employee to attend the You Have to Want to Be Safe HSSE
Orientation.
5.3 Complete Orientation Part I - Checklist (Attachment 1) with the BP employee.

5.3.1 Identify training needs and work with the HSSE department using VTA to
schedule applicable training.
5.4 Ensure that the BP employee reviews Hazard Communication program
5.5 Follow the Short Service Employee Practice and assign the employee a mentor.
5.6 Each asset shall offer a site specific/process overview training for information not
covered in the general Onshore US orientation. Each Asset will choose the delivery
method that is appropriate for their area. The following are requirements. This
should be include but not be limited to:
5.6.1 Location of MSDS
5.6.2 Local Emergency Response information
5.6.3 Local Permitting to Work process (i.e. Confined Space, Hot Work and
Energy Isolation)
5.6.4 Local Environmental Management System and other site specific
Environmental issues
5.6.5 H2S or other site specific hazards
5.6.6 Site specific practices (i.e. Cell phones, jewelry, knife, etc.)
Retain the signed originals of Orientation Parts 1 the BP employees training file
and document completion in VTA.
6.0 Delivery Methods
6.1 Each operation center will determine the appropriate method for delivery for the HSSE
Orientation. BP employees, contractors or area safety councils may be used for this
purpose. In order for anyone of these groups to be authorized to deliver the training,
they shall complete the BP-sponsored instructor development course for the HSSE
Orientation. If the HSSE Orientation is provided by a non BP employee they shall be
assessed against the course descriptions and outcomes by the local operation center
periodically.
7.1 gHSEr Element # 1, Leadership and Accountability.
7.2 gHSEr Element # 3, People, Training, and Behaviors.
7.3 Onshore US Short Service Employee Practice, Document # K435

Reference Organization (Acronym)
Acronym Ref Doc Number Reference Document Title(Edition/Revision if appropriate)


Revision Log
6/30/2005 Duane Kortsha Glenn Harper Added HSSE orientation requirements and updated
new new/transferred employee check list

Attachment 1
BP NEW/TRANSFERRED EMPLOYEE SAFETY ORIENTATION PROGRAM
Orientation Part I Checklist
Instructions:
Each new/transferred employee, regardless of prior experience, will have their job outlined and explained,
and be given a thorough overview of hazard recognition and the proper associated safeguards against
those hazards. The initial orientation shall include, but not be limited to, the items listed below. The
operating supervisor and new/transferred employee shall initial and date each item when completed.
Note: Please refer to the Table of Contents and review the applicable section of this practice as it
relates to the subject discussed below.
Operations
Supervisor Employee
1. Check for valid drivers license. __________ ________
2. Check to see if employee has taken a

driving/vehicle safety course within last
three (3) years. Obtain documentation
and place in employees training file. __________ ________
3. Employee understands and will follow

these vehicle safety rules.
a. Observe the speed limits.

Lower speed may be required
due to weather or road conditions. __________ ________
b. Driver and passengers wear seat belt when vehicle is in

motion . __________ ________
c. When necessary to leave the vehicle,

turn off motor, put in park or in
low gear, set emergency brake. __________ ________
d. If vehicle must be left running to

operate auxiliary equipment (pumps),
the wheels must be chocked to prevent
vehicle from rolling. __________ ________
e. Before moving a vehicle in any direction,

all sides of the vehicle should be cleared
to avoid potential obstacles. The backing
policy should be practiced when appropriate. __________ ________
f. Explain the use of vehicles in

restricted areas (Class 1 Div1 or 2) . __________ ________
4. The operating supervisor shall discuss and

demonstrate where applicable special
hazards and related personal safety
in lease operations.
a. Hydrogen sulfide orientation. Obtain

documentation and place in employees
training file. (If applicable) __________ ________
b. Respiratory equipment orientation

and correct method of wearing Self Contained
Breathing Apparatus (SCBAs)
and Air Purifying Respirators
(APRs). SCBAs will be worn in oxygen-
deficient or toxic atmospheres. Explain
the jobs for which APRs
are required. (If applicable) __________ ________
c. Personal protective equipment orientation

and issuance (i.e., safety hard hat, clothing,
FRC, safety glasses/goggles, rubber/electrical
gloves, hearing protection, fall
protection, etc.) __________ ________
d. Orientation for working around

high pressure fluids/gases. __________ ________
e. Hot/cold fluids or gases hazards __________ ________
f. Extreme cold/hot weather operations __________ ________
g. Energy Isolation (Lockout/Tagout)

orientation - all energy sources
shall be locked,
tagged and tested to make safe
when maintenance work is being performed.
Energy sources include electrical, pneumatic,
hydraulic, etc. __________ ________
h. Safe work habit orientation. Clean up while

you are working. Do not leave tools and other
tripping hazards lying around. Make
housekeeping a priority. __________ ________
i. First Aid/CPR training. Obtain

documentation and place in employees
training file. __________ ________
j. Fire prevention, protection, and control

orientation (extinguisher use/maintenance
will be explained). __________ ________
m. Everyone has an obligation to stop

work that is unsafe.
Assure that employee has signed the
HSSE Commitment __________ ________
n. Plant safety orientation. Discuss site-specific

hazards and precautions. (If applicable) __________ ________
o. Explain the definition and location of confined

spaces. Before entering such an area, consult
your supervisor so a permit can be issued and
proper procedures followed. Explain that
entering a confined space means putting any
part of your body (head, hand, foot) within the
opening.
__________ ________
p. Explain the local sites hot work policy and

permitting requirements. __________ ________
q. Grounding/bonding/flammables - flammable
liquids shall not be dispensed into containers
unless the nozzle and container are
interconnected. __________ ________
r. Emergency Procedures - responsibilities for

various scenarios (what to do in the event of
fire, gas release, etc.) Gathering points in
facilities should be shown to employee.
Explanation of alarm systems and required
employee actions. __________ ________
s. Review BP incident reporting requirements __________ ________
t. HSSE meetings - required to attend

or review information with the supervisor. __________ ________
u. Smoking policy - Inform employee as to where

it is permissible to smoke. __________ ________
v. Work will not be conducted without a pre-job

risk assessment and a safety discussion
appropriate for the level of risk. __________ ________
w. Use of LEL/O2/H2S meters. Explain the use of

these meters and the training required for

their use. (If applicable) __________ ________
x. Supervisors will review the site specific

Chemical inventory and Hazard Communication
program __________ ________
y. Review the training matrix and schedule

other required HSSE training.
z. Enter the employee name in VTA if needed __________ ________
Operating supervisor discusses the accident prevention

disciplinary policy with the employee __________ ________
Employees name_________________________________________________________
(Print in Full)
I have completed the Employee Safety Orientation checklist.
___________________________________________________________________
Employees Signature Date
___________________________________________________________________
Supervisors Signature Date
___________________________________________________________________
Health & Safety Coordinators Signature Date

Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) Page 1 of 3
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM)

1.0 Purpose/Scope
This safe practice provides an awareness of naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM) found in
the oil and gas industry. When NORM is present at greater than 50 R/hr (micro roentgens per hour)
or twice background in R/hr, refer to detailed guidance in the BP US NAG and GoMP NORM Manual.
Field measurements shall be taken by trained personnel using calibrated NORM surveying equipment,
e.g. a Ludlum Model 19 or gamma RAE pager.
2.0 Definitions
NORM occurs naturally in the earth's crust, soil, plants, and many living organisms. NORM scale can be
produced where naturally occurring radium and thorium in formation shale are dissolved into the water.
During drilling, NORM can be deposited as solids inside down-hole equipment (e.g. tubing, landing
nipples and subsurface safety valves) and on the inner surfaces of meters, separators, chokes, drains,
and oil/produced water tanks. During production of gas and water, these materials can be transported to
the surface where they may be found as scale inside heater treaters, separators, tubing, flow lines,
pumps, filters, and on rare occasions, inside short sections of process pipe downstream from elbows or
transitions. NORM is most commonly found where there is a pressure drop, change in velocity or
direction of flow.
The following health information is provided for NORM:

NORM is an internal hazard that causes biological damage.
Routes of entry include airborne inhalation and ingestion.
Health effects at elevated exposures include blood changes, radiation sickness, reproduction
effects and lung cancer.
The following radiological precautions should be followed when working with or around NORM
contaminated pipe, equipment, soil, or wastes.
Avoid direct skin contact with radioactive scale, solids and liquids.
Do not eat, drink, smoke or chew in the work area.
Decontaminate clothing, boots and skin after working with contaminated equipment and before
eating, drinking, or smoking, and at the end of the workday.
NORM contaminated materials should be kept wet to limit the possibility of NORM becoming
airborne.
For any equipment where survey readings indicate that the NORM contamination is over 50 R/hr
or twice background, the additional NORM Procedures outlined in Section 4.3, Specific NORM
Work Procedures, of the BP NAG and GoMP NORM Manual must be implemented and alpha/beta
sampling should be conducted to determine risk of employee respiratory exposure.

For any equipment where survey readings indicate that the NORM contamination is over 2,000
R/hr, a licensed NORM contractor must perform any work with the equipment or materials.

Before working on NORM contaminated equipment, refer to Section 3.2, Roles and Responsibilities of the
BP NAG and GoMP NORM Manual.
Operating Supervisors must be familiar with the information in this manual and verify:
That personnel receive proper NORM training appropriate to their job responsibilities.
That NORM measurements are conducted on all stationary and recovered equipment (i.e., tubulars,
valves, vessels, etc.) that may be contaminated or potentially contaminated with NORM. The
measurements must be completed by trained personnel, be completed before any equipment is
moved off location.
That monitoring of any vessel or confined space contaminated or potentially contaminated with
NORM is conducted before personnel enter and that the appropriate permit(s) are completed.
That monitoring plans, procedures and designation of responsibility for completing the monitoring
are included in all NORM-related written plans and activities (e.g., vessel entries, re-completions,
vessel cleanouts, JSEAs, etc.).
At a minimum, follow these procedures:
Survey all stationary and recovered equipment (i.e., tubulars, valves, vessels, etc.) that may be
contaminated or potentially contaminated with NORM. Trained personnel must do this before
equipment is moved off location.
Identify/label NORM Contaminated equipment.
All personnel who work with, or may work with NORM, must be properly trained.
Survey any vessel or confined space potentially contaminated with NORM before personnel enter.
A Confined Space Entry Form must be issued in all cases. Maintain documentation of the
monitoring results in the facility HSE files. Notify all personnel involved in the operation of the
results of the monitoring.
Test all well solids for NORM contamination.
NOTE: Contact your Environmental Coordinator for additional information on waste
disposal.
Wear proper personal protective equipment, including SCBA or airline supplied breathing apparatus
when entering contaminated vessels or when handling equipment materials with exposed NORM.
Thoroughly wash hands and face immediately following any skin contact with NORM, especially
prior to eating, drinking or smoking.
Minimize the number of personnel in the NORM work.
BP NAG and GoMP NORM Manual

Confined Space Entry Form

Document Name Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM)

Health &Safety Industrial
Authority Duane Kortsha Program Custodian Jack Kogut Hygiene
Manager Coordinator
1.0 09/27/2006 New Issue Health & Safety Industrial Hygiene
Program Manager Coordinator

http://ih.bpweb.bp.com/hygiene/1191_norm_manual_
BP NAG & GoM NORMP Manual 19 Jul 2006
dot_%202005_final.doc
Document Approval
Approver Title Date

Authority NAG Health & Safety Program Manager
Custodian Industrial Hygiene Coordinator

OUSBU Safety Practices Page 1 of 5
Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Practices

Personal Protective Equipment
Authority: Onshore US BU H&S Manager Custodian: Onshore US BU Practices

Administrator
1.0 Purpose/Scope
Protective clothing and equipment (PPE) is intended to shield or isolate personnel from chemical
and physical hazards. This practice outlines PPE requirements for contractors and employees in
OUSBU operations.
2.0 Definitions
PPE - Personal Protective Equipment and clothing
FRC - Fire or Flame Retardant Clothing and garments
3.1 Hazard Assessment
A hazard assessment of the workplace must be performed to determine if hazards are or may be
present that necessitate the use of PPE. Refer to 29 CFR 1910, Subpart I, Appendix B, to
determine the proper method of conducting an assessment. Hazard assessments must be reviewed
to determine proper PPE selection.
A written certification must be prepared that contains the following information:
The location or workplace evaluated

The name of the person certifying that the evaluation has been performed
The date(s) of the hazard assessment
A statement that identifies the document as a hazard assessment certification
3.2 Inspection and Use
Personal protective equipment must be sized to fit the employee. It shall be visually inspected
before each use to assure that defective PPE is not used.
3.3 Training
Each employee required to use PPE shall be initially trained to know the following:
When PPE is necessary

What PPE is required
How to properly put on, remove, adjust, and wear the PPE
The limitations of the PPE

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. THE CONTROLLED VERSION OF THIS
DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND AT http://onshoreus.bpweb.bp.com/hse.htm
The proper care, maintenance, useful life, and disposal of the selected PPE
The employee must demonstrate an understanding of the training and the ability to use PPE
properly before being allowed to perform work requiring the use of PPE. Retraining must be
performed when one of the following conditions exists:
There are changes in the workplace which makes previous training obsolete
There are changes in the types of PPE to be used
There are inadequacies in the employees knowledge of or use of the chosen PPE
The hazard assessment is changed
Employee training and understanding shall be certified in a written document containing the name
of the employee trained, the date(s) of training, and identification of the subject of training.

Operating supervisors - are responsible for implementing and enforcing this program.
5.0 Procedure
Specific requirements for PPE selection and use are contained in this section.
5.1 Foot Protection
Foot protection will be selected based upon each locations individual PPE hazard
assessment and will meet the requirements of ANSI Z41.1.
5.2 Regular Clothing
Rings, wrist watches, loose clothing, unsecured long hair and other loose accessories
must not be worn within arms reach of operating machinery, tools, electrical switch gear
or locations where these present a hazard.
All employees must wear a sleeved shirt (covering half of the upper arm) and full-length
trousers while in operational areas. The preferred cloth is cotton or wool. Synthetic
clothing will melt and severely burn the skin when exposed to heat such as a flash fire.
Additionally, flame retardant clothing is required when performing certain jobs or while
located in certain areas as identified on the hazard assessment and addressed in the FRC
section of this chapter.
5.3 Hand Protection
As determined by the hazard assessment, employees shall use hand protection when
performing jobs that expose the hands to absorption of harmful substances, severe cuts or
lacerations, severe abrasions, punctures, chemical burns, thermal burns and harmful
temperature extremes.
Selection of hand protection shall be based on evaluation of the task being performed,
conditions present, duration of exposure, potential hazards identified, and performance
characteristics of glove material. Refer to the locations PPE hazard assessment.

5.4 Head Protection
Hard hats meeting ANSI Z89.1 standards are mandatory in all operation areas except as
designated in the local hazard assessment. Upstream operations typically use Type I
Class E & G hard hats, however, the local PPE hazard assessment shall specify the Type
and Class to be used at your location.

Hard hats shall be inspected daily or prior to each use per the manufacturers
recommendation. If a hard hat becomes brittle, cracks, or is otherwise damaged, it shall
be replaced immediately.
Suspensions and shells must be replaced per the manufacturers recommendation. (For
example: MSA recommends that suspensions be replaced at least annually and that
shells be replaced at least every 5 years.)
5.5 Eye Protection
Approved safety glasses with side shields or goggles meeting ANSI Z87.1 standards are
mandatory in all operation areas except as designated in the local hazard assessment.
Prescription safety glasses will be purchased for employees when an employee wears
corrective lens and performs tasks where eye protection is necessary. Contact lenses may
be permitted but require the use of eye protection.
Operations which require additional eye protection shall be assessed on an individual

basis. Chemical handling may require the use of specific safety glasses/goggles per the
MSDS.
5.6 Face Protection
During all operations involving grinding, chipping, and buffing, or where material could separate
and become a projectile, a face shield shall be worn in conjunction with safety glasses/goggles per
the local hazard assessment. Chemical handling may require the use of specific face shields per
the MSDS.
5.7 Hearing Protection
The hazard assessment shall identify areas where hearing protection is necessary and at what level
or degree of protection it is necessary. Signs shall be posted at or before each location where
continuous noise levels are at 85 dBA or greater. Various forms of hearing protection are
available and must be worn in posted areas. Hearing protection must also be worn during
operations that generate noise in excess of 85 dBA, such as blowing down lines or certain
workover or drilling activities.
5.8 Fall Protection
Fall protection requirements are contained in the chapter titled Fall Protection in this Safety
Practices.
5.9 Fire-Retardant Clothing (FRC)

5.9.1 FRC shall be worn in accordance with the site hazard assessment, but at a minimum, full
body FRC will be required for all BP employees, contractors and visitors when:
Personnel are located within 35 of any hydrocarbon-containing field or plant

equipment (eg. piping, vessels, tanks, & wells).
Involved in well servicing, well testing, or underbalanced operations during drilling
or completion operations.
Personnel are exposed to potentially live electrical circuits.
An employee and/or supervisor identify a site-specific job and/or area with potential
exposure to flash burn injuries.
5.9.2 FRC is not required as described below unless specified otherwise in local policies:
Fueling vehicles.
While located inside a vehicle including areas within 35 of any hydrocarbon
containing equipment.
In the area of buried hydrocarbon containing facilities (e.g. piping), unless those
facilities are in the process of being exposed.
While located in administration or shop buildings.
5.9.3 FRC shall be worn and maintained accordingly:
Personnel shall wear FRC as the outer-most garments except when other personal
protective clothing is required (e.g. chemical resistant suits, welders leather, personal
flotation devices, etc.). Attempts should be made to use FR materials for external
protective garments such as slicker suits.
Personnel should not wear synthetic blends such as nylon, polyester, rayon,
polyethylene, etc., under FRC. Natural fibers such as cottons and wools are
recommended when layers are worn under FRCs.
Only long-sleeved FRC may be worn in designated FRC areas/jobs. FRC shall be
worn in such a manner as to completely cover the torso, arms, and legs (sleeves
rolled down & body fully zipped or buttoned up).
FRC shall be laundered, repaired, and taken out-of-service per the manufacturers
recommendations by employees.
In situations where FRC clothing becomes saturated with flammable liquid or
chemicals, the personnel exposed shall withdraw to a safe area, remove saturated
clothing, wash contaminated skin and change into clean clothes prior to commencing
work.
5.9.4 FRC garments shall comply with the requirements below:
Thermal protection: If the protective garment is worn over another layer of fabric,
the protective fabric shall exhibit an average Thermal Protective Performance (TPP)
value of 4 (before and after washing). If the protective garment is to be worn next to
the skin, without another layer underneath, the protective fabric shall exhibit an
average TPP value of at least 6.
Fabric Weight: FRC material shall not be less than 4.4 oz/yd2 (150 gram/m2).
FRC materials shall comply with NFPA 2112 and tested to ASTM F 1930.
Optional reflective stripes shall conform to the ANSI/ISEA 107-1999 Level 2.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR

1910.95, 132-139; and 1926.104, 105, 951, and 959.
gHSEr Element # 2, Risk Assessment and Management.
gHSEr Element # 3, People, Training, and Behaviors.
American National Standards Institute; ANSI 10.14; ANSI Z41.1, ANSI Z87.1,
ANSI Z89.1, current revisions.
NFPA 2112; Standard on Flame-Resistant Garments for Protection of Industrial

Personnel Against Flash Fire
ASTM F 1930; Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Flame Resistant Clothing
for Protection Against Flash Fire Simulations Using an Instrumented Manikin
Revision Log
12/13/01 OUSBU BUL OUSBU HSE Mgr Final/Issued
04/23/03 OUSBU BUL OUSBU HSE Mgr Remove fall protection to own practice; hard hat
replacement to manufacturers recommendation
01/01/04 Duane Kortsha Eric Brown Update 5.9 FRC

Fire Retardant Clothing Change
Why was the FRC Standard reviewed?
A recommendation arising from the Wamsutter flash incident
investigation to review the adequacy of the OUSBUs FRC
standard. In particular, work activities where FRC is required to
be worn.
A review of other flash fire incidents within the BU showed that
FRC was not required to be worn by personnel in all cases.
What was done?
A sub team consisting of OC, Wells, HS & SCM leadership was
assembled to review and modify the existing standard to be
appropriate for OUSBU operations.
Document#: K0000001300 Revision Date: May 2004

Paper copies are uncontrolled. The electronic version of this document is located at: http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/documents/K0000001300
Fire Retardant Clothing Change
New FRC Requirements - When is FRC required

according to the modified PPE Standard?
Within 35 of any hydrocarbon-containing equipment.
Involved in well servicing, well testing, or underbalanced
activities during drilling or completion operations.
Exposed to potentially live electrical circuits.
Exposed to other activities with flash fire potential.

FRC Status
What is the current status of the modified

standard?
Approval of the modified standard occurred on 12/15/03.
Lea Souliotis of SCM is coordinating a BU wide contract
for FRC. Contract completion date is scheduled for 1/30.
Complete OUSBU compliance is required by 7/1/04.

FRC Options
Each BP employee may select up to a

maximum of each of the garments below
(5) pairs of FRC coveralls or shirt/pant sets
(1) FRC parka jacket or insulated vest
(1) FRC light jacket
(1) FRC insulated coverall or insulated bib
For light duty workers, fewer garments may be
provided per local managements discretion
FRC Colors
Available colors include Royal Blue and Tan.

Only one color in a particular Operating
Center may be available depending on local
management discretion.

Warehoused FRC
It is recommended that each Operating Center

have an appropriate volume of the following
warehoused garments:
Winter hardhat liners
Rain Gear
Visitor coveralls
Other area specific FRC garments necessary
to comply with the Standard

Next Steps
In the February H&S Coordinators Meeting in Houston, HS

Coordinators were asked to:
Work with OCM to generate a list of required garments for each
employee that is within the maximum allowable quantities.
Work with SCM and vendor to develop fitting schedule for your OC.
Educate yourself on why we are making this change and be prepared
to answer questions, proactively support the program, and assist in a
smooth implementation.

FAQs
Will contractors be required to comply with this Requirement? Yes, but only to
the expectations of sections 5.9.1 and 5.9.2 of the Requirement should be enforced;
Contractors are expected to be in compliance by 7/1/04.
Will contractors have to wear Nomex and our approved colors? No, Contractors
will be required to comply with 5.9.1 and 5.9.2 of the requirement; color, material,
weight and fire resistivity shall be the contractors decision. Additionally, the
guidance document at the end of the Standard applies to BP personnel only.
Will BP directly subsidize FRC garments for contractors? No.
Will we modify contracts to cover contractors cost for FRC? Excerpts from
Bryant Chapmans guidance on this issue to the organization, I would also expect
the contractors to pick this up as just a cost of doing business. I know this is an add
on, but for most it shouldn't be a deal breaker to invest in FRC for their employees.
However, if it is, than there does need to be a means to break the deadlock. BP
personnel can get help from SCM. If we state that contracts are up for re-negotiation
due to FRC, you can pretty much count on 100% take-up. Do agree that we need
some consistency, and my suggestion would be that it is discussed at the
OCM/Wells forums, pending how this is received with our contractors.
Will operation center budgets be adjusted for this increase in cost? This
decision will be made between respective PULs, AMs, OCMs, and Wells leadership

FAQs
Will contractors be allowed to utilize our agreement with the FRC
supplier? The FRC provider will be encouraged to pass along our pricing to
BP contractors; however, we will not be directly providing FRC to contractors
or utilizing BP staff to support those activities.
Will employees be required to launder their own garments? BP
employees will be required to launder their own garments.
How will contractors be informed? A letter will be issued to the contractor
workforce from Tim Holt to inform contractors of this new requirement on the
week of 2/16/04.
Are there exceptions to when FRC is worn? Yes, refer to the PPE
Requirement.
When/How will personnel be measured for garments? Vendor
representatives will visit the OCs in February/March/April to get individual
measurements.
What FRC material will be utilized in the OUSBU? Nomex IIIA.
Will other FRC materials be available? An MOC process may be utilized for
unique circumstances where Nomex may not be the best option.
FAQs
How will heat concerns related to FRC in certain regions be

addressed? Heat is definitely an issue to be managed. Each operation will
need to perform a risk assessment, taking into consideration factors such
as administrative controls (eg. Work rotation & acclimatization), training,
PPE (cool vests), engineering controls (fans, AC). Other operations in
equally severe climates such as our refining, chemicals and NGL groups
have similar issues that we will be learning from. Our BU Industrial
Hygienists are available for additional guidance.
How will the OUSBU meet the 7/1/04 timeframe for compliance? The
vendors that have bid on the project have all indicated that this time frame
will not be a problem, even if all of our contractors also utilize the same
vendor. The successful vendor will be selected in mid February and field
measurement/order visits can be arranged after that time.

FAQs
Nomex jeans What is the price? $131.95 Not endorsed by the
leadership team.
FRC outerwear and insulated coveralls/bibs What colors are available? Is
there a price difference for tan? Tan will be made available. Kevin will
confirm price and schedule of availability with WorkRite.
Size kit for Houston. Pay Key ZHRZ04HSE1 Being sent to Molly.
6 oz. WorkRite shirt What is the price? $71.38
Rain wear What is the status? Is it available? What is the price? Kevin will
provide information from 3 suppliers. A sample may be available at the end
of April for another alternative.
Washing instructions (fabric softener, with other garments, etc.) suggest a
one pager. This will be sent from UniFirst along with a measuring tape and
measuring instructions.
Name tags. Duplicate first names will include the surname initial. In the
event of first and surname initial duplication, first initial and full surname will
be used. All names will be in script due to price and availability.
Warehouse Are they taking orders? With a pay key, the warehouse is
taking orders.
FAQs
Are we going to meet the July 1st deadline? Yes- primary wear will be
available with the exception on non-standard sizes and the outerwear/
insulted garments. UniFirst will update Eric and Molly every week to
10 days on inventory. We are holding UniFirst to the June 1st delivery
date and they feel they can have most people in their primary wear by
the deadline with the exception of non-standard sizes, the insulated
outerwear and some tan garments. The BP Leadership has heard
your concerns and recognizes the difficulties, therefore is has agreed
that the deadline can be pushed back to July 1st.
Need to deliver a consistent message per our agreement. UniFirst will
clearly state and show during sizing visits the two colors available;
royal blue and khaki. The navy blue pant is not in the offering.
At what point are OCs (field) billed for size kits? 30 days from delivery
date or ship date? Not to worry; Kevin is covering these expenses.
South La. is waiting on tan garments prior to the April visit. No tan
garments are available at this time; they are currently being
manufactured.

FAQs
Concern about the garments sent in the size kits is not adequate for
fittings and navy garments sent and that is not a color selection.
Suggestions were:
o actually use a tape measure for better fitting information
o provide other lengths such as short and tall
o provide other sizes in the parka for fittings.
o Do Not include colors that are not available choices.
Kevin is addressing this in future size visit communications as well as
sending the measuring tape, instructions, etc.
How will alterations be addressed (for proper fitting)? What about
mending? All garments ordered will be delivered to that exact size.
Kevin will send a note to Molly with regard to future alteration and
mending needs and availability.
Wyoming insists that their coveralls need leg zippers Can that be
accommodated? At what additional cost? Zippers are not standard in
coveralls. Therefore, it will not be available except for insulated
coveralls were it is standard.

FRC Guidance Document for BP Personnel Page 1 of 1
BP America North America Gas SPU

FRC Guidance Document for BP Personnel
(Contractors are not included in this guidance)
Each location within the NAG SPU shall implement the PPE Practice consistent with the following
requirements:
All FRC garments shall be secured through the NAG SPU wide FRC program.
Employees shall be provided with up to a maximum of each of the following FRC garments.
(5) pairs of coveralls or shirt/pant
(1) FRC parka jacket or insulated vest
(1) FRC light jacket
(1) FRC insulated coverall or insulated bib
(Fewer garments per employee should be provided for light duty workers (ex. office staff, board
operators, team leaders, etc.)
Each Operating Center shall have an appropriate volume of the following warehoused FR garments:
Winter hardhat liners
Rain gear
Visitor coveralls
Other area specific FR garments as required to comply with this policy
All FRC garments shall be either Tan or Royal Blue in color with the BP logo.
All garments shall meet the requirements of 5.9.4 of this practice.
All garments shall be replaced as necessary consistent with the manufacturers
recommendations.
Existing garments purchased or leased through prior agreements may be used for their remaining
life or until 1/1/2006 whichever comes first. These garments shall be replaced with FRC
garments consistent with this practice.
Full compliance with this practice is required by July 1, 2004
Document#: K0000001301 Print Date: 17 May 2007 8:01 AM

Home Laudering & Maintenance of CXP Nomex Garmets Page 1 of 2
North America Gas SPU

HOME LAUNDERING & MAINTENANCE OF CXP
NOMEX GARMENTS
GENERAL GUIDELINES
Garments of CXP Nomex can be washed and dried by any conventional home method, followed by
hand ironing if necessary. No special technology is needed. However, home procedures may not
remove the last traces of very heavy, widespread or ground-in soils, which may be flammable and could
adversely affect the thermal protective performance of garments. If home laundering does not remove
such build-up, garments can be periodically dry cleaned or commercially laundered.
When garments are contaminated by hazardous materials, only commercial laundering or dry-cleaning
should be used, along with the appropriate wastewater treatment techniques.
Use of the following procedures can help provide optimum cleaning:
Sorting -- garments of CXP Nomex should be sorted and washed separately from other garments to
prevent contamination with lint of flammable fibers.
Pretreating -- Stains, as well as deep soil lines on the collars and cuffs of garments, are more readily
removed if pretreated. Stains should be pretreated at the earliest opportunity and sufficient time
allowed for the pretreatment material to penetrate and loosen the soil. The heavily soiled or stained
areas should be rubbed with a full-strength, heavy-duty liquid detergent or any off-the-shelf laundry
pretreatment product.
Garment Preparation -- Before laundering garments of CXP Nomex, pockets should be emptied, pant
cuffs cleaned out and zippers closed.
Load Size -- When laundering garments of CXP Nomex, it is important not to overload the machine.
To ensure a cleaner wash and avoid setting wash wrinkles, the load size must permit clothes to move
freely through the wash water and rinse cycle. Regardless of the machine's rated capacity in pounds,
bulk-- not weight -- should be the limiting factor.
Wash Water Temperature -- Moderate soil levels may be removed adequately at normal wash water
temperature settings. Heavily soiled and stained garments require a higher wash temperature setting.
Detergents -- Synthetic, heavy-duty liquid laundry detergents are recommended for washing. These
products do a superior job of removing soils and are less likely than soap to form sticky deposits of lime
soap curds, which are difficult to rinse out. Fatty-based soaps should not be used. Under-use of
detergent results in poor soil removal and frequently causes suspended soils to redeposit on the
clothes. Failure to use a sufficient amount of detergent is the single greatest cause of inadequate home
cleaning.
Water -- For best results, an adequate supply of "soft" water is required for home laundering garments
of CXP Nomex. "Hard" water contains minerals, such as calcium and magnesium salts, that combine
with fatty based soaps to form insoluble films. These insoluble contaminants are difficult to rinse from
fabrics, may be flammable and could adversely affect the thermal protective performance of garments if
not adequately removed.

http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/documents/K0000001302.
Home Laudering & Maintenance of CXP Nomex Garmets Page 2 of 2
Soap is not recommended, but if it is used in hard wash water (more than approximately seven grains
per gallon or 120 parts per million), a non-precipitating type water conditioner should be added.
Softening the water reduces soap consumption and improves the quality of washing.
Bleaches -- Only oxygen-based bleaches should be used on garments of CXP Nomex. Chlorine
bleach should not be used. Although chlorine bleach will not affect the inherent flame resistance of the
material, it may cause strength and color loss in garments over time.
Fabric Softeners and Anti-Stats -- Under normal conditions, garments of CXP Nomex do not require
the use of anti-stats because Nomex IIIA contains a proprietary static-dissipative fiber. Nevertheless,
numerous washer and dryer applied fabric softeners are available for use in-home laundry equipment.
These products improve the "feel" of items of Nomex and can reduce the nuisance effects of static
electricity -- such as lint pick-up and garment "clinging".
NOTE: Anti-static additives cannot ensure safety in situations where the discharge of static electricity
could create a potential hazard to life or property. If garments of CXP Nomex will be worn in an area
where explosive or highly flammable materials are present, it is important that personnel and equipment
be properly grounded for maximum safety.
Tumble Drying -- Garments of CXP Nomex will have a smoother appearance when tumble dried
instead of being line or drip-dried. To ensure maximum removal of wrinkles, tumble dryers should not
be overloaded.
Drying time varies with the nature and size of the load. Garments of CXP Nomex dry faster than all-
cotton garments of the same weight. When tumble-dried at the medium or high temperature setting, a
properly sized load usually dries in approximately 20 minutes.
Ironing -- If garments of CXP Nomex need touch-up pressing, a steam or dry iron may be used at the
medium setting.
DRY CLEANING
General Guidelines -- There are times when dry-cleaning garments of CXP Nomex is desirable for
economic reasons or because greases and oils cannot be adequately removed during home or
commercial laundering. Garments of CXP Nomex can be satisfactorily dry cleaned in any conventional
commercial dry cleaning system. With heavily soiled garments, using a two-bath cycle may improve
soil removal and minimize redeposition. Garments of CXP Nomex should be cleaned separately from
articles of other materials to avoid contamination with lint of flammable fibers. The practice of
maintaining a clean solvent supply must be observed.
GARMENT REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
Garments of CXP Nomex are assembled/sewn using 100% Nomex thread. Should your garment
become torn, ripped or in need of mending, do not attempt to mend at home or with a local alterations
person unless 100% Nomex repair materials and Nomex thread are used.
Replacement and repair of garments should be coordinated through your local Health and Safety
Representative.

http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/onshore/documents/K0000001302.
Managing the Heat - Safely
Introducing FRC
Kate Murray, CIH, CSP
OUSBU Industrial Hygienist
Topics for Todays Meeting
Introduction
Will FRC make heat issues worse for you?
How was NOMEX selected with regard to heat?
What can I do to minimize heat issues?
Document#: K0000001303 Revision Date: 05/14/2007

Factors contributing to heat stress
Environment Work load

Air Temperature Harder work
Humidity generates more
Air Movement Total Heat Load heat inside
Direct sunlight on Worker the body
Personal Factors
Hydration
Clothing
Medical Condition
Impermeable
Medications
Thermally insulating
Alcohol
Weight
Heat Strain - the bodys response to
heat stress
The physiologic adjustments the body makes to
remove excess heat from the body
When the body starts to have problems removing the

excess heat, it can result in:
Heat Rash
Heat Cramps
Dehydration
Heat Exhaustion
Heat Stroke

What are they wearing now?
Currently, most locations utilize 3 8 ounce (t-shirt or

cotton) shirts and 8 10 ounce pants (cotton or denim)
in the work area.
Testing was performed to compare street clothes

against the most popular FRC materials.

Heat Stress Clothing Comparison
Worst Case Condition (90F, 90% RH)
Cool zone Comfort zone Hot zone Heat Stress
4.2 oz. Poly/Cotton
5.9 oz. NOMEX
8.7 oz. FRT Cotton
8 oz. Poly/Cotton
0 100 200 300 400 500
Standing Heavy
Walking Tennis Wrestling
Labor
Factors Affecting Garment Comfort
Fit of Garment
Experts recommend selecting a garment that is not
tightly fit. By having a looser fit, air gets pushed in
and out when the wearer moves which increases air
flow over the skin and cools the wearer.
Layering of clothing
Layering of clothing reduces the amount of
evaporation that occurs off of the skin. Both
weights of FRC that the OUSBU has selected
provide adequate thermal protection to be used
without undergarments underneath, if desired.

Managing the Heat - Heat Stress
Hygiene Practices
Fluid Replacement
Fluids easily accessible Adjust work expectations based
Employees drink approximately on Acclimatization
8 oz of fluids every 20 minutes
Water should be cool, not cold Implement job specific controls
Job Planning / Scheduling
Permit self-limitation of exposures Shade area when possible
Encourage co-worker Provide Cooling Mechanisms
observation Consider PPE Options
Encourage Healthy Lifestyles

National Weather Service Heat
Index Chart Rule of Thumb

Sites Currently Using FRC
All BP Refining & Chemical Sites
Gulf Coast Sites With Similar Hot Conditions
Texas City Refinery
Chocolate Bayou Chemical Plant
Pasadena Chemicals
Gulf of Mexico Offshore has a PPE requirement by

task. This program has been in place since 2000.

Available Resources
Heat Stress course # HSEEDU040 in VTA (Login to VTA, Search
for Heat Stress to find course)
GoM Heat Stress Presentation for sharing w/ Contractors
Microsoft
owerPoint Presentatio
Heat Stress Checklist

Microsoft Word
Document
Heat Stress Calculator

Microsoft Excel
Worksheet
Conditions & Medication Contributing to Heat Stress

Microsoft Word
Document
Control Equipment Ordering Info from Supply Chain Heat Stress Control
Equipment ...
Heat Stress Monitoring done by BU IHs

OSHA Heat Stress Card
These are pocket cards from

OSHA that you can hand out
to your employees.

Document #: K0000001304
Document Owner: J R Edwards Hard Hat Inspection / Replacement Requirements Revision Date:
15 March 2005
BP REQUIREMENTS
Hard hats meeting ANSI Z89.1 standards are mandatory in all operation areas except as designated in the local
hazard assessment. Upstream operations typically use Type I Class E & G hard hats, however, the local PPE
hazard assessment shall specify the Type and Class to be used at your location.
Hard hats shall be inspected daily or prior to each use per the manufacturers recommendation. If a hard hat
becomes brittle, cracks, or is otherwise damaged, it shall be replaced immediately.
Suspensions and shells must be replaced per the manufacturers recommendation. (For example: MSA
recommends that suspensions be replaced at least annually and that shells be replaced at least every 5 years.)
New Suspension Flex Test
INSPECTION
Shell- Visually inspect for:
Breakage, Cracks
Craze pattern-cracks in surface coating
Discoloration, chalky appearance
Or, other unusual conditions
Also, check for brittleness by flexing the
brim (look & listen)
Any of the above conditions can
Worn Out Suspension indicate a loss of impact, penetration
and/or electrical resistance, and the
helmet must be replaced Damaged Hats, removed from service
Suspension Check for loss of:

flexibility, cracks, breaks, frayed straps
or damaged stitching.
Replace immediately if any of the
above are found
MSA USEFUL LIFE GUIDELINES Useful life begins when the helmet/suspension is put in service, date-code on brim is date of manufacture
Suspension Replace after NO MORE than 12 months - if other than MSA follow manufacturers recommendations
Shell Replace after NO MORE than 5 years - if other than MSA follow manufacturers recommendations
Replace when an inspection indicates unacceptable wear, ALWAYS replace the entire helmet Frequently asked questions,
after it has withstood impact or penetration. MSA - FAQ link not active in slide show
Chapter 14, Pipeline Repair Procedures
Chapter 14
Pipeline Repair Procedures
A. This procedure has been written for the repair of low- and high-pressure gas lines as
well as crude oil flow lines.
B. Operating supervisors are responsible for the implementation of these procedures.
NOTE: Prior to opening a ditch for pipeline repair, the area must be checked for the
proximity of other pipelines and/or buried utility lines. The local Performance Unit
Ground Disturbance Policy must be followed and appropriate One Call notifications
made.
C. How you prepare the ditch, trench, bell hole, etc. is vitally important to repairing a
line in a safe manner.
D. The ditch, trench, bell hole, etc. must always be excavated per OSHA, state, or local
excavation requirements, whichever is more stringent.
E. A Hot Work Permit may be required when repairing a line leak, depending on
location, conditions, and equipment used. The purpose of a Hot Work Permit is to
ensure that a gas source does not unexpectedly arise, causing a fire or explosion.
1. A Hot Work Permit is not necessary if gas is going to be introduced for the sole
purpose of ignition of the gas to control the hazard. For example, a Hot Work
Permit is not necessary if a welder is attempting to control a pipeline leak.
2. Consult an HSE representative if you have any questions.
F. Use a windsock to help determine where the safe area should be located or where
the breathing air trailer should be placed. There is no exact distance because of wind
variations, but as a general rule it should be no closer than 35 feet from the leak in a
generally upwind location.
G. A pre-job risk assessment must be conducted prior to any pipeline repair work.

II. Excavation
A. The applicable area needs to be excavated in such a way as to prevent a cave-in or

gas accumulation.
B. The soil type dictates the amount of sidewall slope required and depth that is
permitted without shoring. Shoring may be required, depending on the depth and soil
type of the area. Contact an HSE representative to address this specific issue.
C. Do not block the ditch opening in any way. Park the backhoe or other equipment
away from the exits.
D. Provide a means of egress every 25 feet if the trench is deeper than 4 feet. Ensure
the excavated material is placed at least 2 feet away from the ditch so as not to create
an impedance when evacuating the trench, and so that it will not fall back into the
ditch.
III. Leak Repairs on Live Lines
A. Every effort shall be made to avoid line leak repairs on live lines.
B. A live line is any collection system line, gathering system line, flow line, etc. that
has not been blocked in and depressured before it is repaired.
C. The use of respiratory equipment may be required, depending on the toxicity of the
gas. Consult the local HSE representative if there are questions as to the need for
respiratory protection.
D. Remove all unauthorized personnel from the immediate work area. The immediate
work area will vary, depending on the wind conditions. Windy conditions will help
dissipate the amount of gas accumulated in the excavated area or on the surface.
E. Do not permit any ignition sources within 150 feet of the line once the leak is
uncovered, unless a hot work permit is utilized. Ignition sources not associated with
the repair and within 150 feet (fire boxes, vehicles, etc.) must be shut off prior to
starting the line repair.
IV. Leak Repairs on Shut-In Lines
A. The use of respiratory equipment may be required, depending on the toxicity of the
gas.
B. Properly blind and depressure the line to be repaired. Refer to the Blinding and
Equipment Isolation chapter of this Standard.

C. Remove all unauthorized personnel from the immediate work area. Again, the
immediate work area will vary, depending on the wind conditions. Windy
conditions will help dissipate the amount of gas accumulated in the excavated area
or on the surface.
D. Do not permit any ignition sources within 150 feet prior to the line being
depressured, unless a hot work permit is utilized. Ignition sources not associated
with the repair and within 150 feet (fire boxes, vehicles, etc.) must be shut off prior
to starting the line repair.
E. Once the line is depressured and gas accumulation has been allowed to dissipate, the
welder or other designated person will ignite the remaining gas in the line via a
pilot hole that has been established in the line. The lighting of the pilot will ensure
the escaping gas is properly dissipated. Caution must be exercised to ensure
flammable liquids are not trapped in an area where hot taps are being made.
F. A hot work permit is not necessary when the line is blinded and the gas is being
intentionally released for the sole purpose of igniting it.
V. References

1926.650-652.
B. OSHA 29 CFR 1910.252.

Chapter 15, Pressure/Vacuum Safety Valves and Rupture Disks
Chapter 15
Pressure/Vacuum Safety Valves and Rupture Disks
A. All pressure relieving devices (pressure or vacuum) shall be sized, selected,

installed, and inspected/tested in accordance with the following industry documents
and/or governmental regulations. Inspections and tests shall be conducted and
documented at regular intervals as specified in these documents and/or regulations to
ensure that all pressure-relieving devices are in good operating condition. However,
inspection/test intervals shall not exceed those listed in III, B and C.
1. Pressure Vessel Relief Valve Sizing & Selection:
API RP 520 Part I

API RP 521
ASME B&PV Code Section VIII, Division 1
2. Pressure Vessel Relief Valve Installation:
API RP 520 Part II

API RP 521
3. Isolation Block Valves for Relief Valves:
4. Pressure Vessel Relief Valve Inspection & Testing:
API 510
API RP 576
National Board Inspection Code
5. Rupture Disks:
API RP 576

API RP 520 Parts I & II

API RP 521
ASME B&PV Code, Section VIII, Division 1
6. Low Pressure Storage Tank Venting (includes vacuum relief):
API Standard 2000

API RP 576
NFPA 30
7. Steam Boiler Relief Valve Inspection & Testing:
National Board Inspection Code (NBIC)
8. Boilers and Pressure Vessels within special jurisdictions such as states or cities
with boiler and/or pressure vessel regulations:
See applicable state law (takes precedence over industry documents)
9. Pressure Vessel or Piping systems within Department of Transportation (DOT)

jurisdiction:
49 CFR Parts 190 - 199 (takes precedence over industry documents)
B. Operating supervisors will be responsible for ensuring that inspection/tests,

maintenance, and documentation are performed in accordance with this program so
that all pressure safety devices are in proper operating condition.
C. For facilities that fall under 29 CFR 1910.119 (OSHAs Process Safety Management
regulation), if capacities of the process have changed, the relief system design
(valves and/or rupture disks, and piping) must be revalidated by an engineer,
Management of Change procedures shall be implemented as appropriate, and the
affected portion of the facility must undergo a Process Hazard Analysis.
II. Definitions
A. PSV Test: PSV testing is the procedure of attaching the PSV to a pressure testing
apparatus and applying pressure to determine the point at which the valve operates
and reseats. It is done in conjunction with the inspection as defined below.
B. Satisfactory Test: A PSV test result is considered satisfactory only if the "as-
received" test is satisfactory. The testing company must report the pressure at which

the valve operates in the as-received condition. The as-received test is satisfactory
only if the valve operates within 2 psi of the set point on valves set at 70 psig or
below, or within 3% of the set point for valves set above 70 psig (as per ASME
B&PV Code, Sec. VIII, Division 1).
C. PSV Inspection: The use of the word inspection in this policy refers to the act of
visually inspecting the relief valve or its parts. Visual inspection may reveal
problems, even when the PSV test does not show a problem, or it may reveal the
cause of an unsatisfactory test.
III. Pressure/Vacuum Safety Valve Inspection/Testing
A. The requirements of pressure safety valve inspection/testing are addressed in the

following sections of industry documents:
1. Pressure Vessels and Low Pressure Storage Tanks:
a. Requirements for relief valve repair organizations:
API 510
b. Recommended frequency and timing of inspections and tests (see III.B and
III.C below):
API RP 576
API 510
c. Preparation, tools, and equipment:
API RP 576
d. Inspection, Transportation, Testing, Maintenance, and Setting:
API RP 576
e. Records and Reports:
API RP 576
2. Steam Boilers:

a. Requirements for relief valve repair organizations:
b. Recommended frequency of inspections and tests:
B. The following guideline shall be followed for increasing or decreasing the

inspection/test interval based on as-received test results:
1. The next inspection/test interval of a relief valve may be increased by 50%

(current inspection/test interval multiplied by 1.5) if there are two consecutive
satisfactory tests on record at the current inspection interval, i.e., each new
inspection interval must be utilized twice before a longer inspection/test interval
may be set.
NOTE: The maximum inspection/test interval allowed in paragraph III C may

not be exceeded.
2. If a test result is not satisfactory (see definition in II B) the current

inspection/test interval must be reduced 50% (current inspection interval
divided by 2) for the next test.
Example:
If the current inspection/test interval for a specific PSV in a PSM-covered

facility is 2 years, and if the last two inspection/tests have met the conditions for
a satisfactory test (as defined above), then the next inspection/test interval can
be increased to 3 years (1.5 X 2).
Now this PSV must have two consecutive satisfactory tests at the 3-year
inspection/test interval before the interval can be increased to 4.5 years (3 X
1.5).
If there are two consecutive satisfactory inspection/tests at the 4.5-year interval,

the inspection/test interval can be increased to 5 years (the maximum interval
allowed for PSM-covered facilities per III C below).
C. The absolute maximum allowable inspection/test intervals are as follows:
1. Facilities covered by State or Local regulations:

Refer to the most recent version of the law.
2. Facilities covered by D.O.T. regulations:
For facilities/pipelines containing natural gas, liquefied natural gas, and non-
highly volatile liquids, 15 months, but at least one inspection/test per
calendar year.
For facilities/pipelines containing highly volatile liquids, 7-1/2 months, but at
least 2 inspections/tests per calendar year.
3. Facilities covered by OSHA's Process Safety Management Regulation:
5 years
4. Facilities not covered by any of the above:
10 years
D. Trained BP or contract personnel may be used to determine if PSVs relieve and

reseat at the proper pressure. However, such testing shall be performed in
accordance with API RP 576, API 510, and/or NBIC. Valve inspection and repair
must be performed by a person or organization meeting API 510 and/or NBIC
criteria. See II A for the criteria of a satisfactory test.
E. Whenever a PSV relieves, a visual inspection of affected equipment shall be

performed to assure the integrity of that equipment.
F. If valves become inoperative because of dirt, corrosion, or other environmental

conditions, the inspection/testing frequency must be increased as necessary to assure
that they are maintained in working condition.
G. Where testing is impossible without shutting down the unit or facility, the supervisor
in charge shall schedule the valves for inspection/testing at the next scheduled
shutdown or turnaround on items fabricated in accordance with Section VIII,
Divisions 1 and 2, of the ASME B&PV Code. Installation of full-port block valves at
the time of unit shutdown shall be considered to facilitate safety valve
inspection/testing in the future. Operation of such block valves shall meet the
requirements of Appendix M of Section VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Code.
NOTE: The installation of block valves on PSVs is prohibited on steam boilers

fabricated in accordance with Section I of the ASME B&PV Code. This prohibition
is a specific requirement of Section I and not just a BP requirement.

H. If the service for which the vessel was designed has changed, the operating
supervisor will verify with engineering assistance that the relief system (valves,
rupture disks, and piping) capacity and materials of construction are adequate for the
protected equipment. A change in the relief system capacity must be supported by
Management of Change as required by 29 CFR 1910.119 (l), provided the facility is
covered by the regulation.
IV. Rupture Disks
A. General
The following policy outlines the use of rupture disks in US operations. Facilities where
rupture disks are currently in use must be modified to comply with this policy.
1. Townsite Operations
Rupture disks shall not be used in any applications within a townsite or

residential area unless the well or vessel is protected from uncontrolled release
through automation with sufficient system redundancy or failsafe protection or
when demonstrated that the release will not cause a significant safety or
environmental impact.
2. Remote Operations
Remote operations may utilize rupture disks. If release of liquids could pose an
environmental problem, the discharge shall be piped to a containment tank
located 150 feet away from any fired vessel. Existing safety relief valves will
not be substituted with rupture disks unless protected from uncontrolled release
by automation.
3. Rupture disks shall not be installed upstream of relief valves unless there is a
means of monitoring and relieving the pressure between the rupture disk and
relief valve.

V. Relief ValvesVacuum Service
A. Equipment that can be exposed to a vacuum condition must be designed to withstand

the vacuum condition or be protected from vacuum. This is in addition to any
requirements for operation at positive pressure.
B. If the service for which the equipment was designed has changed, the operating
supervisor will verify with engineering assistance that the relief valve volume is
adequate for the protected equipment. A change in the installed valves relief
capacity must be supported by Management of Change as required by 29 CFR
1910.119 (1), provided the facility is covered by the regulation.
C. Inspections will consist of visual inspections followed by an in-place or bench

vacuum test.
VI. References
A. BP Corporate Engineering Specifications:
A PC-PRD-00-E, Device Selection and System Design Specification

A PC-PRD-00-C, Installation Specification
A PC-PRD-RD-P, Rupture Disks Supply Specification
B. American Petroleum Institute (API) 510, Pressure Vessel Inspection Code:

Maintenance Inspection, Rating, Repair, and Alteration, current edition.
C. American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 520, Part I, Sizing, Selection, and

Installation of Pressure-Relieving Devices in Refineries; Part I Sizing and
Selection, current edition.
D. American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 520, Part II, Sizing, Selection, and
Installation of Pressure-Relieving Devices in Refineries; Part II Installation,
current edition.
E. American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 521, Guide for Pressure-Relieving and

Depressuring Systems, current edition.
F. American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 576, Inspection of Pressure-Relieving

Devices, current edition.
G. American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 2000, Venting Atmospheric and Low-
Pressure Storage Tanks; Nonrefrigerated and Refrigerated, current edition.

H. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels, current
edition.
I. The National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors ANSI/NB-23, National
Board Inspection Code (NBIC), current edition.
J. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30, Flammable and Combustible

Liquids Code, current edition.
K. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Part 1910 Occupational, Safety, and Health
Standards, 1910.119, Process Safety Management of Highly Hazardous Chemicals.
L. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Subchapter D (Parts 190-199), Pipeline

Safety.
M. gHSEr Element # 5, Facility Design and Construction.
N. gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.

Chapter 12, Process Safety Management
Chapter 12
Process Safety Management
I. Process Safety Management
A. Process Safety Management (PSM) of Highly Hazardous Chemicals refers to OSHA

Standard, 29 CFR 1910.119. It contains regulations which are intended to minimize
the incidence of, and/or mitigate the consequences of, highly hazardous chemical
releases, fires, and explosions.
B. The PSM Standard affects all upstream locations which maintain, possess, or process
any of the following substances:
1. Natural gas hydrocarbons in excess of 10,000 pounds
2. Hydrogen sulfide in excess of 1,500 pounds
3. Systems which use ammonia in excess of 10,000 pounds
4. Systems which use chlorine in excess of 1,500 pounds
5. Others per 1910.119, Hazardous Chemicals Index
C. The PSM Standard contains essentially fourteen elements covering process safety
related matters. The elements are:
Employee Participation
Process Safety Information
Process Hazard Analysis
Operation Procedures
Training
Contractors
Pre-Startup Safety Review
Mechanical Integrity
Safe Work Practices (including Hot Work Permit)
Management of Change
Incident Investigation

Chapter 12, Process Safety Management
Emergency Planning and Response

Compliance Audits
Trade Secrets
D. The Risk Assessment Group through Performance Unit risk assessment coordinators
in conjunction with field HSE representatives and field risk assessment coordinators
are responsible for coordinating the implementation of Process Safety Management.
E. Operating supervisors at each location covered by the standard are responsible for
implementing PSM and enforcing compliance with the standards requirements.
F. The Performance Unit Leader (PUL) and Asset Managers are responsible for
providing adequate resources to implement, enforce, and audit the PSM program at
their locations. The PUL has ultimate responsibility for the success of the PSM
program in each Performance Unit (PU).
G. Additional information on implementation of PSM may be found through the local

risk assessment coordinator and the HSE Department.
H. PSM-covered facilities shall comply with the requirements of the PSM, Performance
Baseline, USA Operations.
II. References
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Department of Labor; 29 CFR

1910.119.
B. E&P Sector Process Safety Management Performance Baseline, USA Operations,

Current revision.
D. gHSEr Element # 5, Facilities Design and Construction.
E. gHSEr Element # 6, Operations and Maintenance.
F. gHSEr Element # 7, Management of Change.

Chapter 16, Purging Air from Piping and Vessels in Hydrocarbon Service
Chapter 16
Purging Air from Piping and Vessels in Hydrocarbon Service
A. After motor vehicle accidents and underground excavation accidents, purging air
from piping and vessels in hydrocarbon service is the next most dangerous activity
undertaken within the oil and gas business.
B. The goal of purging lines and vessels is to:
1. Ensure that an explosive mixture will not form
2. Ensure that no mixture will be exposed to an ignition source
By rigorously striving for both parts of the goal we will significantly reduce the
risk of personal injury from the failure to meet just one of the goals (i.e., if an
explosive mixture does form, keeping that mixture away from any possible
ignition source will still prevent personal injury or property damage).
C. This document is intended to provide guidance as to the necessary elements and

options for local purge procedures and it does not substitute for local procedures or
local engineering review of those procedures.
II. Definitions
A. Clearing purge: Replacement of one substance so rapidly that there is a minimum

of mixing, thus reducing the duration of any explosive mixture.
B. Critical flow: Whenever pressure downstream of a choke is less than the critical
pressure, the flow rate of a gas through the choke will be a constant that is
dependent upon the upstream pressure and the speed of sound.
C. Critical Pressure: The pressure downstream of a choke at which flow changes from
critical to sub-critical with increasing downstream pressure. The critical pressure is
k

2 k 1
Pcf = Pf where both pressures are in absolute units and k is the ratio of
k + 1
specific heat at constant pressure to the specific heat at constant volume (k has a
value of about 1.3 for methane at 100 psig and 60F). Generally, critical pressure
will be about of upstream pressure.

D. Dilution purge: Introduction of enough inert gas to ensure that an explosive mixture
cannot form.
E. Displacement purge: Replacement of one substance with another without

appreciable mixing. Displacement purges are typically done by separating the two
substances with an inert fluid or with a mechanical pig.
F. Lower Explosive Limit (LEL): The lowest concentration of an explosive gas in air
that will support combustion. Methane has a LEL of 5% at atmospheric pressure
and 60F. As pressure or temperature increases, the LEL will decrease.
NOTE: combustible-gas detectors are calibrated as a percent of LEL, so when the

detector registers 100% the concentration is at the LEL for atmospheric pressure and
60F (or 5% methane by volume).
G. Upper Explosive Limit (UEL): The highest concentration of an explosive gas in air
that will support combustion. Methane has a LEL of 15% at atmospheric pressure
and 60F. As pressure or temperature increases, the LEL will increase.
H. Auto-ignition temperature: The temperature that will cause an explosive mixture to

spontaneously ignite. As pressure or temperature increases, the auto-ignition
temperature will decrease.
III. Ignition Sources
Since one of the goals of a purge process is to prevent a mixture of gases from contacting
an ignition source, any purge procedure must identify possible ignition sources.
A. Normal sources: These ignition sources include unclassified electrical equipment,

engine exhaust, welding equipment, etc.
B. Static electricity: Whenever a mass moves relative to another mass (e.g., stocking
feet on a carpet, or gas flow through a pipe) there is a possibility of one of the
masses accumulating a static charge. This charge can become significant when long
runs of piping are included. If there is a path to allow a built-up charge to pass to
ground by arcing, then the arc can be hot enough to ignite an explosive mixture.
C. Heat of compression: A high-velocity gas stream will not mix with a static fluid
volume within a pipe or vessel. The high-velocity stream will try to compress the
static volume against a closed valve or other dead end. This compression will
continue until the downstream volume is at a high enough pressure that further flow
of the high-velocity stream is impossible. While compressing the static volume its
temperature can rise above the auto-ignition temperature of an explosive mixture.

IV. Purging Guidelines
A. Clearing Purge
Using produced gas to purge air from piping and vessels is the most common
purging activity undertaken in our business. This can be done very safely if the
procedure takes into account all of the prerequisites and design considerations
below.
1. Prerequisites
a. Evaluate system volumes: Clearing purges are most effective for a single
straight path from the source to the vent. As a rule of thumb, the sum of
the volume of all branches and deadlegs shall be less than about 10% the
main volume being purged.
b. Source gas: Ensure that the source of gas is free of oxygen.
c. Automated valves: Ensure that any automated valve in contact with the
purge flow (e.g., the dump valve on a separator that is being purged) can be
disabled in the position that the purge requires (e.g., remove control
pressure from a fail-closed valve that you want to purge against or block
open a fail-closed valve that you want to purge through).
d. Purge monitoring: Ensure there is a pressure gauge downstream of the

valve controlling the purge to ensure that required pressures are
maintained.
2. Design Considerations
a. Vents: The placement and size of the flow outlet is critical to a safe purge
procedure.
(1) Number of ventsone: Having multiple vents open results in an

unacceptable chance that the entire purge stream will flow out the
first vent and the subsequent vents will ingest air, increasing the risk
of an explosion or fire.
(2) Vent location: The single vent shall be located as close to the dead-
end point as possible to minimize the quantity of trapped air in the
deadleg between the vent and the last block valve.
(3) Vent size: The size of the vent determines the largest pipe or vessel
diameter that you can purge at a given pressure. At a purge pressure

of 15 psig, you can purge a 36-inch vessel through a 1-inch valve and
a 72-inch vessel through a 2-inch valve. At 200 psig purge pressure
the largest line that can be purged through a 1-inch valve is 4 inches,
and a 2-inch valve can be used to purge a 24-inch vessel.
b. Purge pressure: You are trying to purge a volume of pipework and the
purge rate is based on the pressure within the piping. To allow an adequate
purge, the purge pressure must be high enough so that you reach critical
flow. When venting to atmosphere, any pressure above approximately 15
psig will ensure critical flow. Using purge pressures substantially above 15
psig will require increased purge time and will result in venting excessive
quantities of gas to the atmosphere with no improvement in purge
efficiency.
c. Purge rate: The introduction of purge gas shall be done at a rate consistent
with the flow out the vent so that a constant pressure is maintained in the
line. This can be controlled by throttling the source valve open in very
small increments to raise the pressure.
Once the purge has started it must continue to completion. Stopping or

significantly slowing a purge in progress will result in rapid mixing of the
purge gas with the air in the line and can create an explosive mixture.
If the purge must be interrupted, then the line shall be blown back down to
zero and the purge re-started from step one. If the source valve is open too
far and the pressure in the line increases, then increase the duration of the
purge. Add 10% of the remaining time for each 15 psig above the purge-
design pressure (e.g., if you are 10 minutes into a 15-minute purge and the
pressure has crept to 30 psig, then the remaining time shall be adjusted to
5.5 minutes).
Records of the purge pressure, the time required, and the volume purged
shall be maintained to satisfy reporting requirements for green-house gas
emissions.
d. Purge time: Through extensive experimentation, it has been determined

that purging 2.5 pipe volumes will provide almost 100% probability that
the entire original atmosphere of the pipeworks has been replaced with
purge gas. As a practical consideration, it is generally better to round the
required purge volume to 3 pipe volumes.
As long as the exhaust pressure is at or below the critical pressure, purge

time can be calculated by:

IDseg
2
Lseg Pf TS Z S
t =3
ID v2 PS T f Z f
vent
In most cases, temperature and compressibility at flowing conditions are

close enough to temperature and compressibility at standard conditions to
drop those terms from the calculation. The vent inside-diameter is the ID
of the reduced cross-section in the ball of a reduced-port ball valve, not the
ID of the vent piping.
Converting the times from the calculation to minutes yields the following
table:
Purge Time (1-inch) per Purge Time (2-inch) per

Pipe
Vol/1000 (ft3) 1,000 ft at 15 psig 1,000 ft at 15 psig
Size
(minutes) (minutes)
2 21.8 0.40 0.10
4 87.3 1.62 0.40
6 196.3 3.64 0.91
8 349.1 6.47 1.62
10 545.4 10.11 2.53
12 785.4 14.56 3.64
16 1,396.3 25.89 6.47
20 2,181.7 40.46 10.11
24 3,141.6 58.26 14.56
30 4,908.7 91.03 22.76
It is unacceptable to rely on explosive-gas detectors to determine when a

purge is complete. The fluid dynamics of a critical-flow clearing purge are
such that it is normal for the purge gas to bypass considerable volumes of
air during the initial phase of the purge. Consequently, you will often see
100% LEL at the vent long before you have completed purging 3 pipe
volumes, and a gas detector would tell you to stop the purge before the air
has been removed. Further, a stream at 100% LEL may still be below the
UEL and be explosive when you stop a purge based on a gas detector.

B. Dilution purge
In a closed, air-filled system at atmospheric pressure, adding enough nitrogen to fill

49% of the pipe volume will ensure that an explosive mixture cannot form (with a
20% safety factor). Because of the physical relationship between pressure, volume,
and temperature it is very easy to determine when you have injected 49% of the pipe
volumethe pressure (in psia) will increase by 49%. For example, if your
atmospheric pressure is 12 psia you can introduce nitrogen to raise the pressure in
the line to 18 psia (6 psig) and you will have injected 50% of the pipe volume with
the inert gas. Other inert gases can be used, but each has a different dilution rate
(e.g., CO2 will provide proper dilution at 38%).
Dilution purges are very effective when the system configuration has large pipe
volumes that would not be swept by a clearing purge. For example, a gathering
system with three trunk lines coming together that would require two vents to be
open during the purge.
Since injection rates, equilibrium temperature, and product removal are so specific to
a given piping configuration, dilution-purge procedures shall be developed by
engineering personnel each time a dilution purge is considered.
C. Displacement purge
If you can physically separate the air in the system from the explosive gas being
introduced, you can reduce the potential for explosion to near zero. The problem
with this is ensuring that you have absolutely separated the two gases and that none
has leaked past the separating media. You can use a slug of inert gas, a slug of
liquid, or pigs to isolate the gases. With inert gas or liquid you are relying on very
high gas velocity to minimize mixing, and the high velocities bring with them a risk
of the explosive gas bypassing the slug and compressing the air to auto-ignition
temperatures. With pigs, you will generate a large static charge from the pig moving
through the piping, and any bypassed explosive gas could be ignited. Displacement
purges are seldom the best choice.
V. Conclusions
A. Always assume that an ignition source is present and develop procedures to address
possible ignition sources.
B. The key to a safe purge is control. Manual valves shall be exercised to ensure that
they are not frozen. Automated valves shall be disabled and/or blocked in a known
position.
C. The source of purge gas shall be verified to be oxygen free.

D. It is reasonable to develop standard clearing-purge procedures for frequent

operations (e.g., purging a meter run, or purging a well site). Infrequent tasks,
dilution purges, or displacement purges shall be designed for each specific job, and
engineering participation in the development of those procedures shall be
encouraged.
E. The procedure shall specify opening one vent. The vent shall be at least 1-inch
nominal, and it shall be located as near the end of the purged piping as possible.
Under no circumstances shall more than one vent valve be open.
F. Pressure on the line being purged with a clearing purge shall be kept as low as
possible while still high enough to provide critical flow out the vent.
G. Once a clearing purge has started, do not stop (or significantly slow) the introduction
of gas until the purge is complete. If pressure on the line increases during the purge
time, then increase the remaining purge time 10% for each 15 psig increase in
pressure.
VI. Nomenclature
Pcf Critical flow pressure (psia)

Pf Upstream flowing pressure (psia)
k Ratio of specific heats (cp/cv)
t purge time (seconds)
IDseg Inside diameter of piping in a segment (inches)
Lseg Length of a constant-ID segment (feet)
IDvent Inside diameter of vent valve (inches)
v Gas velocity (critical velocity of methane is 1,315 ft/sec)
PS Standard pressure (14.73 psia)
TS Standard temperature (60F or 520R)
Tf Flowing temperature (R)
Zs Gas compressibility at standard temperature and pressure
Zf Gas compressibility at flowing conditions
VII. References


Respiratory Protection Program

Authority: Onshore U.S. BU Vice Custodian: Onshore U.S. BU HSE

President Manager
Scope: BP Onshore U.S. Business Unit Document OUSBU CIH
Administrator
:
Issue Date: 11/15/01 Issuing Dept: BP Onshore U.S.
Business Unit
1.0 Purpose/Scope
It is the policy of the Onshore U.S. BU to provide a safe and healthy working environment for all employees,
free from potentially harmful exposures to airborne contaminants. The primary objective is to prevent
atmospheric contamination as far as feasible through effective elimination, substitution, engineering, or
administrative controls. Where such controls are not feasible, employees will use appropriate respirators.
This program addresses the use of air purifying and supplied air respirators by all employees at Onshore U.S.
BU controlled worksites and provides procedures in the selection, use, and care of respiratory protection
equipment. Employees affected by this policy will be trained in respirator procedures necessary to perform their
job duties. Contractors using respirators will be enrolled in their companys respiratory protection program.
Voluntary use of tight fitting respirators where exposures are below regulatory limits, as well as voluntary use of
dust masks where exposures are below regulatory limits, are also included.
2.0 Definitions
Air-purifying respirator means a respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister that removes
specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.
Assigned protection factor (APF) means the minimum anticipated protection provided by a properly
functioning respirator or class of respirators to a given percentage of properly fitted and trained users.
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means a respirator that supplies the respirator user with breathing air from a
source independent of the ambient atmosphere, and includes supplied-air respirators (SARs) and self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.
Canister or cartridge means a container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of these items, which
removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Emergency situation means any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of containers,
or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant release of an airborne
contaminant.
Employee exposure means exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the
employee were not using respiratory protection.
Control Tier: 2 Revision Date: 1-Sept.-2003

VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND http://amhoud105/us_wl_dk_hse:/content/hsems/L48_unified/UPS-US-SW-
ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00062-2
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means a system that warns the respirator user of the approach of the end
of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is approaching saturation or is no longer
effective.
Escape-only respirator means a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit. Escape respirators,
which also are known as escape hoods, come in two types. One type, called a self-contained escape respirator,
consists of a hood with a tightly fitting neckpiece and a contained source of breathing air. The hood provides a
barrier against contaminated outside air, and the user breathes air from the attached source. In the other type,
called an air purifying escape respirator, a filter canister is mounted on the hood. The user breathes outside air
through the canister, which filters out harmful contaminants before the air is breathed.
Filter or air purifying element means a component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from
the inspired air.
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means a negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter as an integral part
of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium.
Fit factor means a quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific individual, and typically
estimates the ratio of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to its concentration inside the respirator
when worn.
Fit test means the use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a respirator on an
individual. (See also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means a filter that is at least 99.97% efficient in removing
monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate filters are
the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means an atmosphere that poses an immediate threat to life,
would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an individual's ability to escape from a
dangerous atmosphere.
Maximum use concentration (MUC) means the product of the assigned protection factor times the Permissible
Exposure Limit.
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means a respirator in which the air pressure inside the facepiece is
negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere with an oxygen content below 19.5% by volume.
Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an atmosphere with an oxygen content above 23.5% by volume.
Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means an individual whose legally permitted
scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her to independently provide, or be
delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of the health care services required by paragraph (e) of this
section.
Positive pressure respirator means a respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet covering
exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means an air-purifying respirator that uses a blower to force the
ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering.

Pressure demand respirator means a positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing
air to the facepiece when the positive pressure is reduced inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that relies on the
individual's response to the test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by numerically measuring
the amount of leakage into the respirator.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the
breathing air source is designed to be carried by the user.
Service life means the period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory equipment provides
adequate protection to the wearer.
Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for which the
source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.
Tight-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that forms a complete seal with the face.
User seal check means an action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is properly seated
to the face.

Respiratory hazards will be identified and evaluated. The evaluation will include a reasonable estimate of the
employee exposure and identification of the contaminants chemical state and physical form. If employee
exposure cannot be reasonably estimated, the atmosphere will be considered IDLH.
Appropriate NIOSH-certified respirators will be selected based on the respiratory hazard(s) to which the worker
is exposed as well as workplace and user factors.

4.1 Local HSE Representative
4.1.1 Conduct job safety analyses, in conjunction with operations, of various job tasks to determine
the respiratory hazards and select appropriate NIOSH-certified respirators to ensure worker
exposure is below the OSHA PELs.
4.1.2 Assure that all BP and contractor employees assigned to wear respirators have been medically
approved before the employee is fit tested or required to wear a respirator in the workplace.
4.1.3 Assure that employee fit tests are conducted prior to initial use, and whenever changes occur in
an employees physical condition that could affect respirator fit.
4.1.4 Assure employees complete BP Medicals Periodic Self-Assessment Respirator User
Questionnaire annually and that the results are reviewed by the fit tester prior to testing.
4.1.5 Assure participants receive training prior to using a respirator and annual re-training is
received thereafter. Update records in the VTA Database.
4.1.6 Determine purchase or rental specifications for all respiratory protection equipment used on
site, including compressor units used to supply breathing air.
4.1.7 Assure equipment is properly inspected, maintained and used.
4.1.8 Evaluate exposure complaints relating to the use or misuse of respiratory protective equipment.

4.1.9 Conduct annual respirator program evaluation.
4.2 OUSBU Industrial Hygienist(s)

4.2.1 Establish and maintain a written program and associated procedures governing the selection
and use of respirators, including a review of the program every three years or sooner if
regulations change.
4.2.2 Consult on respirator selection.
4.3 Operational Department Heads and Supervisors

4.3.1 Ensure that personnel assigned to tasks requiring the use of respirators including new
employees and transferees, have completed the following before being assigned tasks requiring
respirator use:
Medical certification prior to the use of respiratory protective equipment.
Initial and annual respirator training and fit-test
Renewed medical approval annually.
Clean shaven in the respirator seal area per the fit-testing protocol.
4.3.2 Industrial hygiene evaluation is requested when needed for tasks involving respirator usage.
4.3.3 Respirators are cleaned, inspected and maintained according to the Respirator Cleaning and
Disinfecting Procedure.
4.3.4 Face-to-facepiece seal integrity is maintained and user seal checks are performed each time
respirators are donned.
4.3.5 Breathing air systems installations shall be provided, installed, serviced and retrieved by
skilled personnel trained in their use. Systems shall be inspected and approved by the local
HSE Representative before use.
4.3.6 Emergency use five-minute escape packs in their facilities are inspected monthly and
inspections are documented.
4.4 Workers Assigned to Wear Respirators

4.4.1 Responsible for using respirators in accordance with their training and the instructions from
their supervisor.
4.4.2 Complete and submit the initial OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire.
Complete annual Periodic Self-Assessment Respirator User Questionnaire.
4.4.3 Advise supervision or the Local HSE Representative of any medical, physical, or
psychological condition that would preclude use of a respirator.
4.4.4 Ensure that nothing is allowed to interfere with a proper respirator to skin seal. An enrolled
employee with hair, including stubble, mustache, sideburns, beard, low hair hairline, bangs,
which interferes with the skin to mask seal shall not be permitted to wear a respirator.
4.4.5 Inspect the respirator before using to ensure it is in proper working condition. Perform a
positive/negative fit check before each use or when adjusted to assure the respirator is properly
seated to the face.
4.4.6 Select proper cartridges for air purifying respirators in accordance with usage charts, labels,
and direction from safety and health staff. Do not use cartridges more than eight hours and
replace cartridges if odor is detected.
4.4.7 Promptly report any malfunction or problem with the respirator to the supervisor.
4.4.8 Clean, sanitize, and properly store the respirator according to 5.6 Cleaning and Storage.
4.4.9 Provide input to Local HSE Representative, team leader, or supervisor regarding respiratory
protection program issues for self and others.
4.5 BP Medical

4.5.1 Maintain an Occupational Health Database listing workers enrolled in the OUSBU Respiratory
Protection Program. The database contains all records pertaining to required respirator
medical approval, fit testing and training.
4.5.2 Evaluate the medical status of persons assigned to job tasks where respiratory protection is
used. The company Physician or Physicians Assistants under the Physicians direction shall
medically approve or disapprove an employees ability to wear a respirator. Additional
follow-up assessment where recommended will be determined by the Physician. The follow-
up assessment may include a physical examination. The evaluation will include completion of
the OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire and may include: Pulmonary
Function Testing, Electrocardiogram, Chest X-ray or any other test deemed necessary by the
Physician.
4.5.3 Notify the affected employee, employee's supervisor and Human Resources when an employee
cannot medically qualify to wear respiratory protective equipment.
4.6 Human Resources Manager

The Human Resources Manager is responsible for assisting field management with the processing of
affected employees who cannot pass the medical evaluation and/or cannot be fitted with a required
respirator.
5.0 Procedure
5.1 Administration
Respiratory protection will be provided to employees at no cost. The program will be administered by
the Local HSE representative. More stringent regulations imposed by state or local authorities shall be
followed where applicable.
5.2 Job Safety Analysis/Job Hazard Assessment
Each location shall identify the jobs conducted in their areas for which respiratory protection equipment
is required and shall select appropriate equipment to be worn while conducting those jobs using the
Respirator Selection Checklist.
Procedures for respirator use in routine and foreseeable emergency situations must be available. These
procedures may be contained in the Safety Standard or be developed locally. This information shall be
documented in the Job Safety Analysis/Job Hazard Assessment or equivalent.
5.2.1 Respirator Selection
The selection of respirators shall be determined by the chemical state and physical form of the hazard;
all respirators must have current NIOSH-approval numbers. The Respirator Selection Checklist shall
be used to evaluate respiratory hazard(s) and document the findings.
5.2.2 Respirator Usage
Respirators shall be used as issued; no modifications or substitutions to equipment are permitted.
Face piece seal checks must be performed each time a negative pressure respirator is donned.

Only positive pressure SCBAs or positive pressure air line respirators with a full emergency egress
bottle shall be used when an employee is exposed to hydrogen sulfide (H2S), oxygen deficient or
enriched atmospheres, IDLH, or unknown atmospheres.
Air-purifying respirators (APRs) may be utilized when contaminants are present in concentrations
which exceed the PEL/TLV but are less than IDLH. APRs may not be used for H2S. Oxygen
concentration must be between 19.5 23.5%. They must only be used in accordance with
manufacturers guidelines for the contaminants they are designed to protect against at or below the
MUC. The respirator and cartridges must have current NIOSH approval numbers. The Local HSE
representative shall be contacted in order to select the proper respirator to protect against any
respiratory hazard.
Filter masks for nuisance dusts have very limited capabilities and are recommended only for sawdust,
sweeping (floor dust), and some types of sanding. Consult the Local HSE representative prior to using
this type of respiratory protection. Personnel using dust masks on a voluntary basis for nuisance dusts
only are not required to be in the Respiratory Protection Program.
In cold weather, tasks requiring respirators shall not be done if the exhalation valve freezes. A nose cup
shall be used with all respirators when operated in temperatures of 32 F or less.
Employees may use respiratory protection at their discretion (voluntary use) when not required by
OSHA or may use a respirator with a higher level of protection than that specified, for example
supplied air instead of air purifying respirator (negative pressure).
Employees should leave the work area where respirator use is required to do any of the following:
Wash their face to avoid skin irritation.
When breakthrough occurs (can smell chemical)
When replacing filter cartridges.
5.2.3 Air Purifying Respirator and SAR Mask Donning
5.2.3.1 Half Mask

Fasten bottom strap at back of neck
Position respirator on face with wider portion under the chin
Fasten top or cradle strap at the crown of the head
Adjust straps for comfortable fit
5.2.3.2 Full Face or SAR mask

Start with straps of head harness fully open
Center chin in chin cup
Place mask on face
Grasp harness with thumbs through straps from inside
Spread straps
Push top of harness up your forehead
Remove hair between forehead and sealing surface of facepiece
Center harness at rear of your head
Tighten straps pulling evenly to rear, in the order below. Pulling outward may
damage straps and prevent proper engagement with adjusting buckles.
o Lower
o Temple
o Top

5.2.3.3 Positive and Negative Pressure Checks

The following user checks, test the seal and the condition of inlet exhaust check
valves.
Negative Pressure Check
Cover the inlet of the canister, cartridge(s) filter(s), or hose with the palms
Inhale gently so that the face piece collapses slightly
Hold breath for ten seconds
If the face piece remains slightly collapsed and no inward leakage is
detected, the respirator is properly donned, and the exhaust valve is
functioning.
Positive Pressure Check
Close off the opening of the exhalation valve by covering with the palm.
Exhale gently into the face piece.
If slight positive pressure can be built up inside the face piece without any
evidence of outward leakage, the respirator is properly donned, and the
intake valves are functioning.
5.2.4 Cartridge Changeout
The OSHA Respiratory Protection Standard (29 CFR 1910.134(d)(3)(iii)(B)) requires users to change
sorbent cartridges (such as used with organic vapors) according to a schedule developed from objective
data on cartridge breakthrough times or according to indications from an end-of-service-life indicator.
Neither objective data nor end-of-service-life indicators exist at this time (exception: mercury
cartridges have an ESLI color band). Until one or the other is available, the BP OUSBU will require
that fresh sorbent cartridges be installed at the start of the task requiring a respirator and that the
cartridges not be used longer than one 8-hour shift.
If the worker does detect an odor indicating breakthrough, the cartridge should be changed out
immediately.
5.3 Medical Evaluations
Company personnel shall not be assigned such tasks requiring the use of respirators unless it has been
determined by a company-designated physician that they are physically able to perform the work and
use the respiratory equipment. This evaluation must be made prior to fit testing or the required use of a
respirator.
Employees who are required to wear respirators, other than escape-only respirators, as a condition of
employment must have an initial respirator user certification, which shall be completed prior to fit-
testing.
An Initial Respirator User Questionnaire is to be completed by each individual respirator user and
sent via regular mail (BP Westlake Occupational Health Services, P. O. Box 3092, MC 1.370, Houston,
TX 77253), or faxed (1-281-366-7575) to Houston Westlake Health Services for review. This form is
available at http://houston.bpweb.bp.com/houoccmed/forms.htm .

Upon receipt of the completed questionnaire, the employee may receive a phone call or e-mail to gather
more information or may be approved or disapproved if the information available is considered
adequate.
A form, indicating full or partial approval or disapproval for respirator use, is then completed and sent
to both the affected employee as well as his/her Local HSE representative.
Respirator users are also required to be reassessed annually, prior to repeat fit testing. Complete the
Periodic Respirator User Questionnaire, available at http://houston.bpweb.bp.com/houoccmed/forms.htm,
and provide it to the Local HSE Representative prior to testing.
If the respirator user, using other than an escape only respirator, answers yes to question 1 and no to
questions 2-5, fit testing can proceed.
If the respirator user, using other than an escape only respirator, has answered no to question 1, or yes
to any of questions 2-5, the full OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire (Mandatory)
shall be completed and faxed or sent to BP Westlake Occupational Health Services, P.O. Box 3092,
Houston, TX, 77253, fax no. 281-366-7575. Upon receipt and review of the completed questionnaire,
the respirator user status will be determined and communicated back to the user and the Local HSE
representative.
All employees can use escape only respiratory equipment. SCBAs are not considered escape-only
respirators.
5.4 Respirator Fit
All employees who are required to wear respirators in the performance of their duties must be annually
fit tested using the quantitative fit test (QNTF). The PORTACOUNT is the preferred instrumentation.
Often, SCBAs are available for emergency egress. Although personnel may only use the equipment
infrequently, the programs requirement for annual fit testing is applicable. SCBAs are not considered
escape-only respirators.
Contact lenses may be used by persons who must wear a respirator, provided the person has previously
demonstrated that they have had successful experience wearing contact lenses. The contact lens wearer
shall be required to have practice wearing the respirator while wearing contact lenses. If contact lens
use is compatible with the respirator, wearing contact lenses may then be permitted. Prior to using
respiratory equipment, employees wishing to use approved contact lenses must wear them during
respirator fit testing.
The face-to-facepiece seal must not be interrupted by the temple bars of glasses or facial hair. Those
employees wearing glasses and using a full-face mask respirator will be provided with a corrective lens
for the respirator or with a prescription kit that accommodates the use of glasses without affecting the
face-to-facepiece seal.
5.4.1 Facial Hair Policy
Employees who may wear respirators shall not have facial hair that comes between the sealing
surface of the facepiece and the face or interferes with valve function, i.e., no beard growth in
these areas. Facial hair is normally considered to be growth 24-hours old.

5.5 Respirator Maintenance
Respirators shall be inspected prior to and after each use to ensure they are in proper operating
condition. SCBAs and other supplied air respirators shall be inspected monthly to ensure the equipment
is properly maintained and ready for use in an emergency situation. The manufacturers
recommendations for inspection shall be followed in detail.
The Local HSE Representative is responsible to ensure the monthly inspection described above is
completed and documented. Inspection records shall be kept and available for review; records may be
hard copy, electronic files, or database applications, e.g. Maximo. The Monthly SCBA, Escape-only
Respirator, and Emergency use Respirator Inspection Record, or equivalents, will be used.
Respiratory protective equipment found defective during an inspection or during use shall be removed
from service, tagged, and repaired or replaced.
Compressed breathing air cylinders, including self-contained breathing apparatus, shall be

hydrostatically tested per the manufacturers recommendations. Breathing air cylinders that have a star
or asterisk stamped into the cylinder collar following the hydro test date are in compliance 10 years
from that date. Typically, the testing of most steel cylinders will be required at a 5-year interval and
lightweight aluminum or composite (fiber reinforced) type will be on a 3-year interval. Composite type
cylinders have a maximum service life of 15 years following the original manufacturers hydro test date
and regardless of the last retest date.
5.6 Cleaning and Storage
Shared respirators must be cleaned after each use to ensure that the equipment is ready for the next user.
Single user respirators may be cleaned as often as required. Between thorough cleaning, respirators can
be wiped with alcohol-free disposable wipes.
5.6.1 Cleaning and Disinfecting
5.6.1.1 Remove any filters, cartridges or canisters and discard as warranted (usually after 8
hours of use).
5.6.1.2 Wash face pieces and breathing tubes in detergent and warm water (120 F) or
cleaner-disinfectant solution. Use a hand brush to facilitate removal of dirt.
5.6.1.3 Rinse completely in clean, warm water.
5.6.1.4 Air-dry the equipment in a clean area.
5.6.1.5 Clean other parts as recommended by manufacturer.
5.6.1.6 Inspect valves, head straps and other parts and replace them with new parts if
defective.
5.6.2 Storage
5.6.2.1 Place the facemask in a plastic bag or container for storage to protect from damage,
contamination, dust, excessive moisture, and damaging chemicals. It should be stored
away from direct sunlight and extreme temperatures and in a manner that keeps the
facepiece and exhalation valve from being deformed.

5.6.2.2 Emergency equipment shall be stored in its carrying case in a convenient location to
facilitate easy access in an emergency situation. The storage area must be clearly
identified, indicating the type of equipment, such as SCBA or air-purifying respirator.
5.6.2.3 Routinely used respirators, such as dust respirators, may be placed in plastic bags and
stored in clean cabinets in convenient locations in the work area, such as a warehouse.
5.7 Quality of Breathing Air
SCBAs and airline respirators shall contain a minimum of Grade D Breathing Air (Appendix).
The supplier of compressed air used for respirators must furnish, at each batch filling of air cylinders,
written documentation certifying that the air meets or exceeds specifications for Grade D breathing air.
Documentation confirming the air purity shall be kept on file at the facility. Records shall be
maintained until the bottle is replaced.
Company-owned breathing air compressors shall be tested every 90 days or before use (whichever is
less frequent) to assure that the air meets Grade D specifications. These test results shall be kept on file
in the Respiratory Protection Program file. Documentation shall be kept for 10 years.
Cylinders must be topped off if the pressure falls to 90% of the manufacturer's recommended
pressure level.
5.8 Breathing Air Systems
Breathing air systems are critical to the health of workers completing tasks in potentially hazardous
atmospheres. The systems must be installed and operated as follows:
5.8.1 Breathing air for atmosphere-supplying respirator systems shall be provided only from
breathing air compressors and shall meet the Grade D specification in accordance with ANSI
Standard Z86.1-1973, Commodity Specifications for Air.
5.8.2 Local HSE Representative assures that only Grade D air is being supplied by controlling the
sources, monitoring the supply systems and by sampling air from supply systems quarterly for
laboratory analysis.
5.8.3 In confined space work, supplied air respirators shall be equipped with 5-minute escape
bottles, regardless of backup air outside the confined space. Back-up bottles are not required
for sandblasting in a confined space that has ventilation sufficient to prevent atmospheric
conditions that are immediately dangerous to life and health.
5.8.4 For all airline respirator system use, an attendant shall be positioned where he/she can monitor
the supplied air system, react to alarms, and remove workers from the work area in the case of
a malfunction.
5.8.5 At no time will any other tools or equipment be allowed to be supplied by the certified
breathing air system. The breathing air system must be supplied from a certified source
independent from any other tools or equipment to prevent cross-contamination of the lines.
5.8.6 If a third party Air Systems cart and CO monitor is to be used, documentation must be
provided to demonstrate third party air compressors supply grade D breathing air prior to be
placed into use at the job site.
5.8.7 Use Bottled Air System Installation, Breathing Air Compressor Installation, and Breathing Air
Systems Daily Operations Checklists to ensure proper installation and operation.

5.8.8 Regulators used with SARs must be flow checked in accordance with manufacturers
requirements.
5.9 Training
The Local HSE representative is responsible for coordinating respiratory equipment training activities
for operating personnel. Employees who may encounter potentially hazardous atmospheres shall be
trained at least annually to ensure that they understand the proper method of wearing the equipment and
are familiar with the potential hazards they may encounter.
The training as a minimum shall include:
Why the respirator is necessary: Types of hazardous atmospheres and their health effects
on worker health.
Function of the respirator and the limitations and capabilities of the respirator.
How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations, including situations where
the respirator malfunctions.
How to inspect, put on, and remove, use, and check the seals of the respirator.
How to maintain and store the respirator.
When to change cartridges on air purifying respirators.
How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective use
of the respirator.
Facial hair policy
The general requirements of this program.
Respirator training is not required for voluntary use of disposable dust respirators in non-hazardous
environments. However, workers must be provided the information on voluntary use of respirators in
the Appendix D of 29 CFR 1910.134.
Training records shall be maintained in the VTA Learner and may also be maintained in the local
Respiratory Protection Program file.
5.10 Evaluating the Effectiveness of the Program
At least annually, an evaluation of the Respiratory Protection Program must be conducted and
documented using the Checklist For Respirator Program Evaluation. This evaluation includes three
mandatory items:
5.10.1 A review of all required documentation contained in the hard copy, electronic, or database
system files.
5.10.2 A workplace evaluation to determine that the current written program is being effectively
implemented and is effective
5.10.3 A consultation with affected employees to assess employees views on program effectiveness
and identify problems
5.11 Recordkeeping
The local HSE representative as administrator of the program will maintain all records relating to the
program. The Respiratory Protection Program records must contain at the minimum:

5.11.1 Job Safety Analyses/Job Hazard Assessments with attached Respirator Selection Checklist
5.11.2 A list of individuals in the Respiratory Protection Program, what the individuals are medically
qualified to wear, date of assessment, fit test sizing, results and dates
5.11.3 Respirator inspection and maintenance records
5.11.4 The location of emergency respirator equipment and the individual in charge of maintenance
5.11.5 Breathing air documentation
5.11.6 The location of training materials and the location of training records
5.11.7 Records of program effectiveness

5.12 Task Summary Table
Task Description Regulatory Citation Responsible Party Frequency Recordkeeping Retention

1. Establish and maintain a written respiratory protection 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1) OUSBU Industrial Initial and All versions of Safety Life of
program. Hygienist periodic review. Standard Corporation +
20 years
2. Send copies of written program to PLHCPs. 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(5)(iii) OUSBU Industrial Initial and as Cover letters with Life of
Hygienist revised. distribution list. Corporation +
20 years
3. Implement respiratory protection program with work-site 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(i) and Local HSE Initial and JSAs with completed Life of
specific procedures (JSAs with completed Respirator 1910.134(d)(1)(iii) Representative updated to Respirator Selection Corporation +
Selection Checklist attached). Create and maintain a list of reflect changes Checklist attached. 20 years
respiratory program participants. in workplace
conditions List of program
participants.
4. Complete Initial Respirator User Questionnaire (OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(2)(ii) Employee Initial
Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire (Mandatory))
and send to BP Medical prior to medical evaluation or use of
respirator.
5. Send the following information regarding respirators to be 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(5)(i) Local HSE Initial Job Exposure Profile Life of
worn by the employee to the PLHCP - type and weight of the Representative Corporation +
respirator, duration and frequency of respirator use (including 20 years
use for rescue and escape), expected physical work effort,
additional protective clothing and equipment to be worn,
temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered.
6. Evaluate Initial Respirator User Questionnaire (OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(2)(i) BP Medical Initial Initial Respirator User Duration of
Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire (Mandatory)) Questionnaire (OSHA Employment
Respirator Medical +30 years
Evaluation
Questionnaire
(Mandatory))
7. Conduct follow-up medical examinations, if deemed 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(3)(i) BP Medical Initial Duration of
necessary by the PLHCP, based on employee responses to and 29 CFR Employment
the OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire 1910.134(e)(3)(ii) +30 years
(Mandatory). Exam shall include any medical tests,
consultations, or diagnostic procedures that the PLHCP
deems necessary to make a final determination.

PAPER COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED. THIS COPY VALID ONLY AT THE TIME OF PRINTING. THE CONTROLLED VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND
http://amhoud105/us_wl_dk_hse:/content/hsems/L48_unified/UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00062-2

8. Written recommendation regarding the employee's ability to 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(6)(i) BP Medical Initial Letter to OCM Duration of
use the respirator, based on employee responses to the Employment
OSHA Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire +30 years
(Mandatory) and the follow-up medical evaluation, if
performed.
9. Fit test employee who is using a tight-fitting facepiece 29 CFR 1910.134(f)(2) Local HSE Prior to use and Fit test records Until the next
respirator prior to initial use of the respirator, whenever a Representative Annually fit test is
different respirator facepiece (size, style, model or make) is administered
used, and at least annually thereafter. (annual)
10. Complete the BP US Upstream, Power, NGL Periodic Self- 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(7) Employee Annual
Assessment Respirator User Questionnaire and present to
the Local HSE Representative.
11. Evaluate the BP US Upstream, Power, NGL Periodic Self- 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(7) Local HSE Annual BP US Upstream, Duration of
Assessment Respirator User Questionnaire. Representative Power, NGL Periodic Employment
Self-Assessment +30 years
Respirator User
Questionnaire
12. Conduct follow-up medical examination, if deemed necessary 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(7) BP Medical As needed
by the PLHCP, based on employee responses to the BP US
Upstream, Power, NGL Periodic Self-Assessment Respirator
User Questionnaire and send to BP Medical). Exam shall
include any medical tests, consultations, or diagnostic
procedures that the PLHCP deems necessary to make a final
determination.
13. Send written recommendation regarding the employee's 29 CFR 1910.134(e)(7) BP Medical As needed Letter to OCM Duration of
ability to use the respirator, based on the BP US Upstream, Employment
Power, NGL Periodic Self-Assessment Respirator User +30 years
Questionnaire and follow-up medical evaluation, if performed.
14. Inspect all respirators maintained for use in emergency 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(3)(i)(B) Local HSE Monthly Monthly Inspection Annual
situations. Representative Checklist
15. Inspect emergency escape-only respirators before carrying 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(3)(i)(C) Local HSE Initial Record of Purchase Until unit is
them into the workplace for use Representative replaced
16. Inspect self-contained breathing apparatus to ensure they are 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(3)(iii) Local HSE Monthly Monthly Inspection Annual
maintained in a fully charged state (recharging when the Representative Checklist
pressure falls to 90% of the manufacturer's recommended
pressure level), and that regulator and warning devices
function properly.


17. Inspect cylinder label and Certificate of Analysis of purchased 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(4)(ii) Local HSE Upon receipt Certificate of Analysis Until bottle is
breathing air to ensure contents meet Grade D Breathing Air Representative replaced.
specifications.
18. Ensure compressed breathing air cylinders, including self- 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(4)(i) Local HSE Per Invoice or work order Until next
contained breathing apparatus, are hydrostatically tested per Representative manufacturers from testing facility hydrotest
the manufacturers recommendations and DOT regulations. and DOT
Typically, the testing of most steel cylinders will be required at requirements
a 5-year interval and lightweight aluminum or composite (fiber
reinforced) type will be on a 3-year interval. Composite type
cylinders have a maximum service life of 15 years following
the original manufacturers hydro test date and regardless of
the last retest date.
19. Ensure regulators used with SARs are flow checked in 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1)(vi) Local HSE As Certificates from the Until next flow
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Representative recommended testing facility check
by manufacturer
20. Maintain and replace or refurbish sorbent beds and filters on 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(5)(iii) Local HSE As Tags placed on Annual
compressors used to supply breathing air to respirators Representative recommended compressor
periodically, following the manufacturer's instructions by manufacturer
21. Company-owned breathing air compressors shall be tested to 1910.134(i)(1) Local HSE Every 90 days or Laboratory analysis 10 years
ensure that the air meets Grade D specifications. Representative before use results
(whichever is
less frequent)
22. Conduct effective training for employees who are required to 29 CFR 1910.134(k) Local HSE Prior to use, VTA Duration of
use respirators. Representative annual, or more Employment
often if +30 years
necessary
23. Conduct respirator program evaluation. 29 CFR 1910.134(l) Local HSE Annual Checklist For 3 years
Representative Respirator Program
Evaluation (NIOSH)


6.1.1 Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Department of Labor; 29 CFR, Part 1910.134.
6.1.2 American National Standards Institute: ANSI Z88.2-1980.
6.1.3 Compressed Gas Association; Commodity Specification G-7.1-1973.
6.1.4 gHSEr Element # 2, Risk Assessment and Management.
6.1.5 gHSEr Element # 3, People, Training, and Behaviors.

Appendix
Grade D Breathing Air Specifications
Carbon Monoxide (Maximum) 10 ppm

Carbon Dioxide (Maximum) 1,000 ppm
Oxygen 19.5 - 23.5 percent by volume
Oil Mist (condensed hydrocarbon) 5 mg/m (Maximum)
Odor Free from pronounced odor
Water Line pressure dew point shall at least be 18 F
below the minimum ambient temperature for
that location.

Job Safety Analysis/Hazard Assessment Worksheet for:
Tank Gauging
Sequence of Job Steps Hazard Category Guide Word Specific Hazard Identified Control Responsible
Party
1. Position vehicle correctly, prepare to gauge tank. Improper PPE Head, eye, hand, foot If proper PPE is not worn, injury could Wear hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses with
protection occur. side shields, gloves, and any other PPE as
required by hazards present.
Additional PPE Toxic chemicals H2S release H2S is a health concern. Knock down is a
possible outcome.
Additional PPE Toxic chemicals Benzene is a known contaminant in the Half face respirator with organic vapor cartridge.
oil. High concentrations of benzene Body position upwind, open thief hatch slowly
exist in the tank headspace. with head and face away from opening and
relieving pressure slowly to ensure no exposure
in breathing zone.
Improper PPE Head, eye, hand, foot, Driver could have arrived without BP personnel have an opportunity to verify that
hearing protection proper PPE for the loading task. the driver has the appropriate PPE (hard hat,
safety glasses, nitrile gloves, safety toed boots,
and ear plugs) for the task.
2. Ascend to the top of tank. Oil Spill Oil spills can result when samples are Observation and good housekeeping inspect
taken from tank. area prior to ascending, clean up any oil
observed.
Static Electricity Clothing Clothing materials can cause static Wear cotton or rubber gloves.
buildup.
Static Electricity Grounding/bonding If at least single hand contact is not Maintain at least single hand contact to drain
maintained with the hand rail, a static static charge.
charge could build up.
Work at height Slips/falls Standing too close to edge of platform Ensure body position is in the center of the
could cause a slip over the edge. working platform. Ensure that mid-rails and toe-
boards are present.
Wind Stability High wind conditions could cause you Wear chin strap on hard hat and maintain contact
to lose your balance. Hard hat could with guard rails to help maintain balance.
also be blown off and reacting to catch
it could cause you to lose your balance.
Equipment/Tools Guards Corners of hand rails and guard rails Wear proper gloves while ascending ladder, eyes
could be sharp or have protruding on task, repair hand rails with burrs.
bolts, causing possible hand injury.
Slips/Trips/Falls/Injuries Walking surfaces Oil/ice/mud will create a slipping Observation and good housekeeping inspect
hazard on the stairs. area prior to ascending, clean up any oil
observed. Sand can be applied to the stairs to
remediate slippery surfaces.
Slips/Trips/Falls/Injuries Stairs Ascending too fast could cause you to Do not hurry.
miss a step or slip.
Tank Gauging
Party
Slips/Trips/Falls/Injuries Ice/sanding procedures Ice can be present during the winter Observation and good housekeeping inspect
months. area prior to ascending. Sand can be applied to
the stairs to remediate slippery surfaces.
3. Release hatch to gain access to gauge the tank Fire/explosion Hydrocarbon release Flammable gases may be present in the Release hatch slowly and maintain upwind
headspace of the tank. position.
Toxic chemicals H2S release H2S is a health concern. Knock down Wear H2S monitor. Alarms at 10 ppm. Leave
is a possible outcome. area and go upwind or crosswind.Body position
upwind, open thief hatch slowly with head and
face away from opening to ensure no exposure in
breathing zone.
Toxic chemicals Benzene Benzene is a known contaminant in the Half face respirator with organic vapor cartridge.
in breathing zone.
Handling Caught between/pinch points Wind could blow the thief hatch closed Ensure hand/fingers are never placed in the line
unexpectedly. of fire. To protect gauge tape, secure hatch in
open position.
4. Gauge tank. Lower gauge tape slowly to the tank Lack of Competency Vision deficiency Poor or non-existent training causes If plumb bob strikes tank bottom too hard, tank
bottom while maintaining contact between gauge equipment damage and inaccurate could be damaged, creating a hole.
tape and tank. When the bottom is felt, raise gauge readings.
tape while maintaining contact between tape and
tank. When the fluid level is visible on the tank
tape, take reading to within inch. Continue
raising gauge tape completely. Wipe fluid off
plumb bob.
Static Electricity Grounding/bonding Static charge could build up if not Maintain contact between gauge tape and tank at
bonded. all times to ensure static does not build up.
5. Close the gauge hatch. Handling Caught between/pinch points Grip could slip while lowering the Ensure hand/fingers are never placed in the line
hatch, could drop the thief hatch closed of fire.
too rapidly.
6. Descend from tank top. Oil Spill Oil spills can result when samples are Observation and good housekeeping inspect
taken from tank. area prior to descending, clean up any oil
observed.
None None Descending too fast could cause you to Do not hurry and maintain at least single hand
miss a step or slip. contact with hand rail.
Tank Gauging
Party
hazard on the stairs. area prior to descending, clean up any oil
Hazard Category Guide Word Control
Chemical/Physical/Biological Agent
Air emissions Black smoke
Fuel use/quality restrictions
Fumes
Leaks
Permit Exceedances
Venting
Area control Line of fire
Vehicles
Asbestos Breathing
Disposal
Encapsulation
Gasket
Insulation
Monitoring
Removal
Wall penetration
Asphyxiation Confined space
Constraint by clothing or equipment
H2S
Inert gases
Monitoring
Oxygen deficiency
Tight space
Toxic chemicals
Biological agents Bacteria
Bears
Bloodborne pathogens
Bugs
Disposal
Pollen
Sanitation
Breaking Containment Confined space permitting
Containment
Control of access
Hot bolting
Line opening
LOTO
Return to service
Source of ignition
Capabilities Attitude
Physically fit
Self Confidence
Training
Change As built drawings
Communication
MOC
Replacement in kind
Cold Cold weather
Cryogenics
Frostbite
Hypothermia
Lifting equipment
Pressure reduction/expansion
Refrigeration
Wind-chill
Confined space entry Access control
Asphyxiation
Atmospheric testing
Entry guidelines
Illumination
Permits
Physical hazards
Rescue preparation
Temporary
Training
Ventilation
Control systems Alarm system
By-passed
Failure of
Out of service
Shutdown failure
Stored commands
Temporary
Documentation Approvals
As builts
Inaccurate documentation
Permits
Records management and retention
Reporting requirements
Timely reporting
Electrical Energy Bonding/grounding
Electric shock
Energy isolation
Grounding and bonding
Induction heating
Return to service
Source of ignition
Static electricity
Electrical Isolation High to low voltage systems
LO/TO
Return to service
Stored energy
Equipment Isolation LO/TO
Lock brake
Return to service
Excavation As built
Buried cables
Buried objects
Buried pipe
Civil area work permits
Confined space
Fall protection
Hand excavation/proximity
Trenching & shoring
Falling object Crane/lifting
Fall protection
Forklift/loaders
Lifting plans
Line of Fire
Material storage
Pipe handling
Scaffold
Tagline
Warning signs/area control
Wind
Work overhead
Fire/explosion Atmosphere monitoring
Evacuation plans and safe areas
Housekeeping
Hydrocarbon release
Iron sulfide
Material storage locations
Non-intrinsically safe equipment
Permits
Radio frequency
Smoking
Spark producing work
Welding and grinding
Flammable gas/vapor Accumulations (high/low points)
Entry guidelines
Explosion
Fire
Loss of containment
Notification
Hand tools Disposal/red tag
PPE
Repair and maintenance
Suitability
Training
Hazardous chemicals Acids
Battery acid
Benzene
Caustics
Clean up
Disposal
Exposure to/contact with
Glycol
H2S
Hazardous waste
Methyl carbitol
MSDS
PPE
Release reporting (EPA, CERCLA,
SARA, state, local)
Solvents
Spill
Storage
Written HAZCOM program
Heat Burns
Damage to materials or equipment
Fire
Heat exhaustion
Hot surfaces
PPE
Hygiene Decontamination
Drinking water
Food handling
Health
PPE
Regulations
Illumination Glare/blinding driving
Poor visibility
Walking
Warning
Working
Improper for Task Braking too quick
Descending too fast
Feels Rushed
Jerky
Not in synch with other worker(s)
Rushing
Too slow
Improper PPE Chemical/material handling
Disposal
Flash fire
Head, eye, hand, foot protection
Purchasing
Temperature extremes
Training
Inadequate communication 2-way radios
Alarms
Emergency notification
Hazard identification
Incomplete/incorrect information
Notification of the wrong person
Pre-job risk assessment
Timely
Too much information
Installation less than adequate As builts not completed
HSE concerns to be addressed
Improper pre-startup review
Incident reporting
No MOC
Wrong parts
Wrong procedure
Ionizing Radiation Gamma rays
Inspection
Personnel monitoring equipment
Posting
Reporting
X-rays
Lack of Competency Certification
Competency for specific task
Documentation
Experience
Hearing deficiency
Preoccupation
Records retention and management
Reduced respiratory capability
Supervision
Training
Vision deficiency
Lack of employee involvement Amount of participation
Communication
Distracted from task
HSE concerns not addressed
Inadequate incident investigations and
reporting
Inadequate procedures or systems
Land use Archeological sites
Snow removal/disposal
Wildlife interactions
Lubricant Oil Disposal
Fire
MSDS
Reporting
Slips/Falls
Spill
Storage
Machinery Operating erratically
Operating too fast
Operating too slow
Equipment/Tools Access and use control
Energy isolation
Guards
LO/TO, red tag
Maintenance
Noise
Procedures
Records
Stored energy
Testing and inspection
Tiedowns/stakes
Training
Maintenance Calibration
Clean lenses
Dirty
Torn
Handling Back strain
Caught between/pinch points
Ergonomics
Line of Fire
Overextension
PPE
Uneven Terrain
Visibility
Material storage Chemicals
Cold, heat, moisture
Control and reporting
Emergency contingency equipment
Fork lifts/cranes
Improper securing of load
Incompatible materials
Load limits on racks
Secondary containment
Separation from other materials
Shipping
Weight or stack height restrictions
Lifting Area control during operation
Beams
Below hook equipment/rigging
Cranes
Ergonomics
Forklift/loaders
High temp operations
Inspection of rigging
Line of fire (lifting into)
Low temp operations
Manufacturers requirements
Operator certification
Pinch points
Pipe elevators
Procedures and rules
Proper use of tag line
Records
Repair and maintenance
Securing loads
Testing and certification
Use around power lines and live
Winches
Medical Baseline information
Benzene (blood)
Bloodborne pathogens
First aid, EMT, PA
HAZCOM
Hearing conservation monitoring
Incident reporting
Medical surveillance
Medivac
PPE
Restricted duty
Return to work
Tuberculosis
Workman's comp reporting/claims
Meters Proper rating
Proper scale
Mind Not on Task Illness
Lack of sleep
Personal problems
Nitrogen/Inert Gas Accumulation high/low or pockets
Asphyxiation
Connections to other systems
High pressure
MOC
Oxygen depletion
PPE
Noise Annual audiogram
Construction/fabrication
Emergency announcement
Hearing loss
Machinery
Posting
PPE
Problems baseline audiogram
Process
Non-ionizing Radiation Flare
High temperature process
Non-routine activity Approvals
Communication/notification
Hazard checklists
Pre-job hazard analysis
Procedures
Oil Benzene
Exposure to mist, vapors, contact
Fire
H2S
Loss of containment
Slips/trips/falls
Smoke
SPCC Plan
Spill
Oxygen Fire
Iron sulfide
Lack of oxygen
Oxygen rich atmosphere
Purity of breathing
Portable equipment Caught in
Inspection
Maintenance responsibility
Operation
Pre-use check out
Records
Rotating equipment
Source of ignition
Power tools Electrical
GFCI
Grounding
Maintenance and records
PPE
Pre-use checkout
Source of ignition
Suitability
Training
Pressure Air tools
Bleeding
Chemical exposure
Compressed gas cylinders
Energy isolation
Equipment rupture
Hot taps
Hydrotesting
Pressure burst explosion
Pressure rating
Purging/sampling
Rapid buildup
Vacuum
Procedures Inaccurate
Including hazard id/safe guards
Not available
Not current
Not followed
Process isolation Chemicals/MSDS
LO/TO
Loss of containment
Purging and venting
Return to service
Specification of
Stored energy release
Vessel entry
Quality Control Audits
Documentation
Procedures
Record management
Responsibilities
Repetitive motion Carpal tunnel
Equipment design and layout
Ergonomics
Pre-existing conditions
Strains
Tendonitis
Sand blasting Area control
Eye protection
Lead
PPE
Pressure
Respiratory
Silica
Spill
Working at Heights Equipment maintenance
Hand tools
Inspection
Ladders
Line of Fire
Proper Fall protection
Scaffold Assembly
Training
Uneven Terrain
Use
Slips/Trips/Falls/Injuries Clutter
Control of work area to others
Entering/leaving vehicle
Footwear
High traffic areas
Housekeeping
Ice/sanding procedures
Inaccessable Tools/Equipment
Ladders
Spill cleanup
Stairs
Uneven Terrain
Walking surfaces
Snow/ice Access for emergency equipment
Approved disposal areas
Break through ice
Damage to equipment or instruments
Drifting snow
Driving hazard
Falling ice
Footwear
Frozen lines
Sanding
Snow removal
Traction/slipping
Walking surfaces
Weight buildup
Static Electricity Clothing
Computer/control equipment
Explosion
Fire
Grounding/bonding
Low humidity
Non-conductive fluids (transfer into tanks)
Stress Anger management
Changing conditions
Coping skills
Job
Personal
Preoccupation with problems
Repetitive motion
Subsidence Crane footings
Erosion
Road strength
Tank pads
Toxic chemicals Benzene
CO
Exposure to fumes, contact with
Extremely hazardous substances
H2S release
Medical monitoring (benzene)
MSDS
Release reporting (CERCLA, SARA)
Transport road Approved parking areas
Emergency equipment
Icy road conditions
Large, wide, heave loads
Lights and PPE
Off the road
Radios
Road maintenance
Security
Vehicle accidents
Vehicle Parking Backing
Brakes/chocks
Hazardous Atmosphere
Line of Fire
Spotter
Uneven Terrain
Vehicles/Trailers Brakes/chocks
Lights
Line of fire
Proper hitch
Safety chains
Spotter
Ventilation less than adequate Confined space
Engine exhaust
Inhalation hazard
Monitoring
Permitting
Welding/Cutting Approved welding procedures
Argon
Cylinder storage and transport flashback
Damage to internal coatings
Electric shock
Flash burns
Grinding
Hot work permit
On/to live systems
Post weld inspection
PPE
Proximity of hydrocarbons
Qualified welders
Source of ignition
Ventilation/fumes/coated materials
Wildlife Aquatic
Habitat
Interaction
Mammals
Rabies
Waterfowl
Wind Crane operations
Direction
Material storage
Snow drifting
Stability
Visibility
Wind chill
Work at height Contact with electrical lines
Dropped objects
Fall protection
Harnesses/restraint systems
Leading edge
Scaffolding/ladders
Slips/falls
Work on safety systems As builts
Defeated safety devices log
Documentation
Halon isolation
Isolation of safety systems
MOC (temporary)
BP US Upstream, Power, NGL
PERIODIC SELF-ASSESSMENT
RESPIRATOR USER QUESTIONNAIRE
Standard Number 29 CFR 1910.134(e)
This form is to be completed by respirator users currently holding a valid Medical

Certificate for Respirator Use.
Date: ___________________
Employee Name:__________________________________SS # _____________________
Business Unit: _________________________ Work Location: ______________________
Phone number where you can be reached during working hours: ______________________
Do you use a respirator for any purposes other than escape? Yes
No
If the answer to the above is Yes, please complete the following
questions:
1. Have you previously completed the full OSHA Respirator Medical Yes
Evaluation Questionnaire(Mandatory)? No
2. Have you experienced medical signs or symptoms(difficulty breathing, chest
pain or tightness, dizziness, claustrophobia, etc) that are related to your ability Yes
to use a respirator? No
3. Has a Physician or other Licensed Health Care Provider, supervisor or your Yes
respirator program administrator informed you that your medical status, as
No
regards your ability to use a respirator, needs to be reevaluated?
4. Has information from the respiratory protection program, including

observations made during fit testing and program evaluation, indicated that Yes
your status should be reevaluated? No
5. Has a change occurred in your workplace conditions (e.g., physical work Yes
effort, protective clothing, temperature) that may result in a substantial
No
increase in the physiological burden placed on you?
PLEASE PRESENT THIS COMPLETED FORM TO THE FIT-

TESTER AT THE TIME YOU UNDERGO RESPIRATOR FIT
TESTING
Form originated 071200 CAP

Revised: 022703 CAP
Bottled Air System Installation Checklist

The purpose of this checklist is to ensure consistent installation and utilization of breathing air systems from
bottled air sources during maintenance operations where supplied air respiratory protection is specified. Use this
checklist whenever staging and preparing bottled breathing air systems.
Is the bottle rack staged in an manner that will allow the vessel watch to be the bottle watch? Can the
attendant read the regulator pressure gauges without leaving the confined space entry manway? If this
cannot be arranged, notify the BP supervisor that a separate bottle watch will be required.
Are all bottles manifolded together and opened to the supply regulator?
If any bottles have been removed from the rack, are they properly secured?
Is the pressure regulator set to allow normal operating pressure between 80 and 125 psi? Do not exceed
125 psi. Optimum is 100 psi.
Is the alarm bell for the pressure regulator set and tested to alarm at approximately 300 psi?
Are no more than four individual hoses from the regulator installed?
Are hose lengths from the regulator to individual respirators less than 300 ft?
Are the hoses routed where they will not be a tripping hazard?
Are the hoses routed to avoid sharp edges?
Are the hoses routed where they will not be subject to temperatures over 100F?
Are hoses installed free of damage, kinks, bulges, etc.?
Are respirator head pieces in clean, sanitary and operable condition?
Are the respirators equipped with five minute escape bottles for confined space operations? (Five
minute escape bottles may not be required for abrasive blasting, welding or painting in clean
environments with good ventilation. Review conditions with the Local HSE Representative.)
If the operation is in a confined space, is the rescue air apparatus staged at the work site?
Control Tier: 2 Revision Date: 8-Aug-2003 DRAFT

VERSION OF THIS DOCUMENT CAN BE FOUND AT http://amhoud105/rs-
bin/RightSite.dll/dk_search_code.htm?DMW_DOCBASE=us_wl_dk_hse&input_title=Bottled%20Air%20System%20Installation%
20Checklist
Breathing Air Compressor Installation Checklist

The purpose of this checklist is to ensure consistent installation and utilization of breathing air systems from
compressor sources during operations where supplied air respiratory protection is specified. Use this checklist
whenever staging and preparing compressor-supplied breathing air systems.
Is the compressor staged in a hazard free atmosphere/environment?
Is supply air from the compressor routed through an auto air cart staged at the entry point?
Has a hot work permit been obtained, if needed, to operate the compressor?
Are the air filters in proper condition and ready for use?
Are the reserve air cylinders full?
Is the CO monitor calibrated to alarm at 10 ppm CO? The monitor must be calibrated daily during use.
Has the CO audible alarm been tested?
Has the loss of pressure or electrical failure audible alarm been tested?
Are hose lengths from the regulator to individual respirators less than 300 ft?
Are the hoses routed where they will not be a tripping hazard?
Are the hoses routed to avoid sharp edges?
Are the hoses routed where they will not be subject to temperatures over 100F?
Are hoses installed free of damage, kinks, bulges etc.?
Are respirator head pieces in clean, sanitary and operable condition?
Are the respirators equipped with five minute escape bottles for confined space operations? (Five
minute escape bottles may not be required for abrasive blasting, welding or painting in clean
environments with good ventilation. Review conditions with the Local HSE Representative.)
If the operation is in a confined space, has the rescue air apparatus staged at the work site?

Document Number: UPS-US-SW-ONS-ALL-ALL-ALL-ALL-HSE-DOC-00020-2 Print Date: 6/9/2004
bin/RightSite.dll/dk_search_code.htm?DMW_DOCBASE=us_wl_dk_hse&input_title=Breathing%20Air%20Compressor%20Instal
lation
Breathing Air Systems Daily Operations Checklist

The purpose of this checklist is to provide daily verification of the integrity of installed breathing air systems.
The checklist provides guidance for the equipment user/operator as well as the Local HSE Representatives and
I/E Technicians.
Operator /User
_____ Open and bleed manual moisture drain valve(s) on compressors

_____ Check oil level and for oil leaks (unit needs to be de-energized)
_____ Check belts for proper tension and condition
_____ Check filters on air systems air carts for contamination
_____ Perform a visual inspection of all equipment to ensure conditions havent changed
_____ Check compressor air intake filter for cleanliness
_____ Radio checks to be made between confined space attendant and compressor/bottle watch
_____ Function test low pressure alarms and verify correct pressure in cylinders
_____ Verify that low pressure regulator is not set to exceed 125 psi.
Instrument/Electrical Technician
_____ Function test low air back up bottle switchover

_____ Calibrate CO monitors
_____ Verify flow meters are in appropriate range
Local HSE Representative
_____ Verify checklist completed by responsible parties

_____ Verify no tools or apparatus is being powered by or tied into breathing air
_____ Ensure all required personnel have received breathing air training
_____ Visually inspect filters for color change-indicating need for replacement

bin/RightSite.dll/dk_search_code.htm?DMW_DOCBASE=us_wl_dk_hse&input_title=Breathing%20Air%20Systems%20Daily%2
0Operations
Monthly SCBA, Escape-only Respirator, and Emergency use Respirator

Inspection Record
Location: ______________________ Year: ______ Model & No.: _______________
To complete the inspection form, put a check (9) if the item is OK, or an X (8) if it needs repairs.
Month Location Cylinder Connections Condition of Mask Harness Cond. of Bypass Main Stored Hydrotest Inspected
pressure tight mask & straps straps lens valve line correctly date within by
headbands extended extended regulator closed valve compliance
(> 90% of & position
the
warning
manuf.
recomme
device
nded
pressure
level)

bin/RightSite.dll/dk_search_code.htm?DMW_DOCBASE=us_wl_dk_hse&input_title=Monthly%20Respirator%20Inspection
Checklist For Respirator Program Evaluation (NIOSH)
A. Program Administration
__________ Is there a written policy which acknowledges employer responsibility for providing a safe and
healthful workplace, and assigns program responsibility, accountability, and authority?
__________ Is program responsibility vested in one individual who is knowledgeable and who can coordinate
all aspects of the program at the job site?
__________ Can feasible engineering controls or work practices eliminate the need for respirators?
__________ Are there written procedures/statements covering the various aspects of the respirator program,
including:
designation of an administrator;
respirator selection;
purchase of MSHA/NIOSH certified equipment;
medical aspects of respirator usage;
issuance of equipment;
fitting;
training;
maintenance, storage, and repair;
inspection;
use under special conditions; and
work area surveillance?

B. Program Operation
Respiratory Protective Equipment Selection:
__________ Are work area conditions and worker exposures properly surveyed?
__________ Are respirators selected on the basis of hazards to which the worker is exposed?
__________ Are selections made by individuals knowledgeable of proper selection procedures?
__________ Are only certified respirators purchased and used; do they provide adequate protection for the
specific hazard and concentration of the contaminant?
__________ Has a medical evaluation of the prospective user been made to determine physical and
psychological ability to wear the selected respiratory protective equipment?
Control Tier: 2 Revision Date: 8-Aug-2003

bin/RightSite.dll/dk_search_code.htm?DMW_DOCBASE=us_wl_dk_hse&input_title=Checklist%20For%20Respiratory%20Progr
am%20Evaluation
__________ Where practical, have respirators been issued to the users for their exclusive use, and are there
records covering issuance?
Respiratory Protective Equipment Fitting
__________ Are the users given the opportunity to try on several respirators to determine whether the respirator
they will subsequently be wearing is the best fitting one?
__________ Is the fit tested at appropriate intervals?
__________ Are those users who require corrective lenses properly fitted?
__________ Is the facepiece-to-face seal tested in a test atmosphere?
__________ Are workers prohibited from wearing respirators in contaminated work areas when they have facial
hair or other characteristics that may cause face seal leakage?
Respirator Use In The Work Area
__________ Are respirators being worn correctly (i.e., head covering over respirator straps)?
__________ Are workers keeping respirators on all the time while in the work area?
Maintenance Of Respiratory Protective Equipment
Cleaning and Disinfecting
__________ Are respirators cleaned and disinfected after each use when different people use the same device,
or as frequently as necessary for devices issued to individual users?
__________ Are proper methods of cleaning and disinfecting utilized?

Storage
__________ Are respirators stored in a manner so as to protect them from dust, sunlight, heat, excessive cold or
moisture, or damaging chemicals?
__________ Are respirators stored properly in a storage facility so as to prevent them from deforming?
__________ Is storage in lockers and toolboxes permitted only if the respirator is in a carrying case or carton?
Inspection (RPP file should have inspection forms for each month)
__________ Are respirators inspected before and after each use and during cleaning?
__________ Are qualified individuals/users instructed in inspection techniques?
__________ Is respiratory protective equipment designated as "emergency use" inspected at least monthly (in
addition to after each use)?
__________ Are SCBA incorporating breathing gas containers inspected weekly for breathing gas pressure?
__________Is a record kept of the inspection of "emergency use" respiratory protective equipment?
Repair
__________ Are replacement parts used in repair those of the manufacturer of the respirator

am%20Evaluation
__________ Are repairs made by manufacturers or manufacturer-trained individuals?

Special Use Conditions
__________ Is a procedure developed for respiratory protective equipment usage in atmospheres immediately
dangerous to life or health?
__________ Is a procedure developed for equipment usage for entry into confined spaces?
Training
__________ Are users trained in proper respirator use, cleaning, and inspection? (Run QA/QC report from
VTA and verify that there are no exceptions.)
__________ Are users trained in the basis for selection of respirators?
__________ Are users evaluated, using competency-based evaluation, before and after training?
Program Review By:
_____________________________________Date____________________________
_____________________________________Date____________________________

am%20Evaluation
JOB EXPOSURE PROFILE
Job Tech II and III (Click to go to Physical Capabilities
Location/Facility: SAMPLE PG: Central
Classification: Checklist)
Health
JOB
CHEMICAL/PHYSICAL/ Health Risk
JOB DUTIES Exposur RISK
BIOLOGICAL AGENT CONTACT Effect Rating
(Click to go to JSA PERFORMED FREQUENCY DURATION SPECIFIC HAZARD IDENTIFIED CONTROL e Rating RATIN
(Click to go to Chemical Hazard Rating (HRR)
for the task) (ER) G=
Assessment) (HER) = (HER *
HRR
ER)
Task I X Routine X Daily 0-15 min
Check wells be Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min 1. Wildlife Interaction Snakes, spiders bites. Awareness, leather gloves. 2 4 8
sure theyre flowing, Weekly 30-60 min
rate on meters, 2-3/mo 1-2 hr
2. Repetitive Ergonomics In and out of the truck frequently None 1 4 4
motion
pressure, check for Monthly X 2-4 hr
leaks 2-3/yr 4-6 hr 3. Flammable Explosion Vapor cloud, truck as source of ignition Observation, odor 4 4 16
Yearly 6-8 hr gas/vapor Fire
Special > 8 hr 4. Heat Heat exhaustion Heat exhaustion due to high ambient Drink water 2 4 8
temperatures
5. Inadequate Working alone Check in am and pm with Freer 4 4 16
communica Injuries office
tion
6. Lack of Environmental release Training and experience 3 4 12
competenc Loss of production
y
7. Equipment/ LO/TO improperly applied LO/TO Training and verification 3 4 12 100
tools
8. Pressure Line of fire When operating valves, stand 3 4 12
to the side.
9. Slips/Trips/ Uneven ground, rocks, holes, pipes Awareness 1 4 4
Falls/
Injuries
10. Vehicle Uneven terrain Kill engine, apply emergency 1 4 4
Parking brake
11. Wind Direction Dust Awareness 1 4 4
Stability High wind conditions could cause you Wear chin strap on hard
to lose your balance. hat and maintain contact
Hard hat could also be blown off and with guard rails to help
reacting to catch it could cause you to maintain balance.
lose your balance.
Task II X Routine Daily 0-15 min 1. Improper Head, eye, hand, If proper PPE is not worn, injury could occur. Wear hard hat, steel toe boots, 1 4 4
Gauge tanks Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min PPE foot protection safety glasses with side shields,
checking fluid level X Weekly 30-60 min gloves, and any other PPE as
112
(water cut) 2-3/mo 1-2 hr required by hazards present.
Monthly X 2-4 hr Driver could have arrived without proper PPE BP personnel have an 1 4 4
2-3/yr 4-6 hr for the loading task. opportunity to verify that the
Yearly 6-8 hr driver has the appropriate PPE
Special > 8 hr (hard hat, safety glasses, nitrile
gloves, safety toed boots, and
ear plugs) for the task.
2. Capability Physically fit Physically fit for climbing stairs None 1 4 4
C:\Documents and Settings\pulnikdf\My Documents\Safety_Manual_pdf\Originals\tech.doc Last Printed June 9, 2004 Page 1 of 15
Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
3. Cold Cold weather Frostbite, lack of dexterity Wear adequate clothing and 2 4 8
gloves.
Postpone job
4. Static Grounding/ Static charge while gauging Gauge tape with ground 1 4 4
electricity bonding wire.
Maintain contact between
gauge tape and tank at all
times to ensure static does
not build up.
5. Fire/ Iron sulfide H2S in wells can form iron sulfide. Awareness 1 4 4
explosion
Hydrocarbon Light ends from condensate. Flammable Release hatch slowly and 1 4 4
release gases may be present in the headspace of maintain upwind position.
the tank.
6. Hazardous Benzene Benzene is a known contaminant in crude oil. Wear air purifying respirator 3 4 12
chemicals High concentrations of benzene exist in the (half face respirator) with
tank headspace. organic vapor cartridge
Change cartridges before
task
Fit test, training
Negative fit test before use
Clean shaven
Body position upwind,
Open thief hatch slowly with
head and face away from
opening and relieving
pressure slowly to reduce
exposure in breathing zone.
H2S Knockdown/dizziness/nausea from If source of product is known 1 4 4
exposure in unprotected breathing to contain H2S, test product
zone. and/or tank headspace to
determine exposure
potential.
If concentrations in the
breathing zone can be
greater than 10 ppm, a SAR
must be worn.

Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
7. Heat Heat exhaustion High temperatures and high humidity Drink fluids 3 4 12
conditions increase the risk of heat Gauge in am before hottest
exhaustion. temperatures
Extra PPE or heavy winter clothing Space work
severely restrict heat removal from the
body; under these conditions, heat
exhaustion can occur even when ambient
temperatures are relatively cool.
8. Lack of Training Environmental release from overfilling tank. Training and experience 1 4 4
competen-
cy
9. Working at Slips/falls Standing too close to edge of platform could Ensure body position is in the 1 4 4
heights cause a slip over the edge. center of the working platform.
Ensure that midrails and toe
10. Slips/Trips/ Walking surfaces Oil/ice/mud will create a slipping hazard on Wear defined heel on work 1 4 4
Falls/ the stairs. shoes/boots.
Injuries Observation and good
housekeeping inspect area
prior to ascending, clean up
any oil observed.
Hold handrail
Uneven terrain Awareness 1 4 4
Stairs Ascending too fast could cause you to miss a Do not hurry and maintain at 1 4 4
step or slip. least single hand contact with
hand rail..
Descending too fast could cause you to miss Do not hurry and maintain at 1 4 4
a step or slip. least single hand contact with
hand rail.
Ice/sanding Ice can be present during winter months. Sand can be applied to the 1 4 4
procedures stairs to remediate slippery
surfaces.
11. Static Clothing Clothing materials can cause static buildup. Do not wear nylon clothing. 1 4 4
electricity Wear cotton or nitrile gloves.
Maintain at least single hand
contact to drain static
charge.
12. Vehicle Uneven terrain Kill engine, apply emergency 2 4 8
Parking brake
13. Wind High wind Postpone work 2 4 8

Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
14. Weather Lightning Postpone work 1 4 4
15. Oil Spill Oil spills can result when samples are taken Observation and good 1 4 4
from tank. housekeeping inspect area
prior to ascending, clean up any
oil observed.
16. Handling Caught Wind could blow the thief hatch closed Ensure hand/fingers are never 2 4 8
between/pinch unexpectedly. placed in the line of fire. To
points protect gauge tape, secure
hatch in open position.
Grip could slip while lowering the hatch, could Ensure hand/fingers are never 2 4 8
drop the thief hatch closed too rapidly. placed in the line of fire.
Task III X Routine X Daily 0-15 min 1. Wildlife Snakes, spiders bites. Awareness 108
Check compressors Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min
check oil level, add Weekly 30-60 min 2. Cold Cold weather Wear adequate clothing 1 4 4
water, vibration 2-3/mo X 1-2 hr 3. Control PMs done to check the
Monthly 2-4 hr
Shutdown failure 1 4 4
systems shutdown system
2-3/yr 4-6 hr
Yearly 6-8 hr 4. Flammable Accumulations (high/low points) Awareness when approaching 4 4 16
Special > 8 hr gas/vapor the compressor; odor or vapor
cloud
5. Heat Hot surfaces Engines are hot; avoid contact, 1 4 4
wear leather gloves..
Heat exhaustion Drink fluids, check compressors 1 4 4
in am before hottest
temperatures, space work
6. Improper Head, eye, hand, foot protection Training 1 4 4
PPE
7. Inadequate Working alone Check in am and pm with Freer 4 4 16
communicat Injuries office
ion
8. Lack of Mechanical failure Training and experience 2 4 8
competency Loss of production
Environmental release
9. Lubricant Mechanical failure Low level shutdown 2 4 8
Oil Slips/falls Training and experience
10. Machinery Operating too fast or too slow Check RPM gauge 1 4 4
11. Noise Hearing loss Wear hearing protection 3 4 12

Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
12. Pressure Pressure burst explosion Equipment rupture possible for 4 4 16
the suction or discharge
separator. High pressure
shutdowns are in place.
13. Slips/Trips/ Housekeeping Awareness of where you are 1 4 4
Falls/ Spill clean up walking.
Injuries Walking surfaces
Uneven terrain
Piping
Entering/exiting vehicle
14. Vehicle Line of fire Park to avoid line of fire. Kill 1 4 4
Parking engine, set brake.
Task IV X Routine Daily 0-15 min 1. Capabilitie 2. Physically fit Proper lifting technique. Back 1 4 4
Change dump valves Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min s up truck as close as possible
53
Weekly 30-60 min 3. Equipment 4. LO/TO LO/TO inlet and outlet valves. 1 4 4
2-3/mo X 1-2 hr Isolation Training.
X Monthly 2-4 hr
2-3/yr 4-6 hr 5. Flammable 6. Explosion Gas can escape when knocking 2 4 8
Yearly 6-8 hr gas/vapor Fires unions loose. Bleed off liquids
Special > 8 hr in a bucket.
7. Hand tools 8. Suitability Use correct tools (hammer and 1 4 4
Repair and Maintenance pipe wrench). Be sure certain
handle is tight and not split on
hammer. Be sure jaws of pipe
wrench are not worn.
9. Heat 10. Heat exhaustion Drink fluids, change dump 1 4 4
valves in am before hottest
temperatures, space work.
11. Improper 12. Head/eye/hand/foot protections Wear proper PPE. Training. 1 4 4
PPE
13. Lack of 14. Competency for specific task Would not operate correctly and 1 4 4
competenc production would go in wrong
y tank, potentially overfilling tank.
Training and experience.
15. Lifting 16. Ergonomics Use proper lifting techniques 1 4 4
Pinch points and watch hand placement.
17. Pressure 18. Bleeding Gas can escape when knocking 2 4 8
unions loose. Bleed off liquids
in a bucket.
19. Process 20. LO/TO LO/TO inlet and outlet valves. 1 4 4
isolation Training.
Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
21. Slips/Trips/ 22. Walking surfaces Awareness of where you are 1 4 4
Falls/Injuri Uneven terrain walking. Tools can present
es Piping tripping hazard.
Inaccessible tools & equipment
23. Vehicle 24. Uneven terrain Kill engine, set brake. 1 1 1
Parking
Task V X Routine Daily 0-15 min 1. Capabilitie 2. Physically fit Training and self confidence. 1 1 1
Work on salt water Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min s
disposal pump Weekly 30-60 min 3. Cold 4. Cold weather Wear adequate clothing. 1 1 1
(change valves); 2-3/mo 1-2 hr Postpone work.
assist mechanic. Monthly 2-4 hr
X 2-3/yr X4-6 hr 5. Electrical 6. LO/TO Training. 3 1 3
Yearly 6-8 hr Isolation
Special > 8 hr 7. Equipment 8. LO/TO LO/TO inlet and discharge 3 1 3
Isolation valves. Training.
9. Hand tools 10. Suitability Hand wrenches use box end 1 1 1
Repair and maintenance to avoid slipping off nut. Be
sure box end is not worn.
Training
11. Heat 12. Heat exhaustion Drink fluids, change work on 1 1 1
pump in am before hottest
temperatures, Take breaks as
needed. 13
13. Improper 14. Head/eye/hand/foot protection Training and use correct PPE. 1 1 1
PPE
15. Inadequate 16. Incomplete/incorrect information Do JSA to communicate who 1 1 1
Communic will do what.
ation
17. Handling 18. Caught between pinch points Proper lifting technique; training 1 1 1
Ergonomics proper PPE; proper body
position.
19. Slips/Trips/ 20. Housekeeping Awareness of where you are 1 1 1
Falls/Injuri Walking surfaces walking. Tools can present
es Uneven terrain tripping hazard.
Piping
Inaccessible tools & equipment
21. Vehicle 22. Uneven terrain Kill engine, set brake. 1 1 1
Parking
Suggestions for
Future Monitoring:

Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
Task VI X Routine Daily 0-15 min

Assist mechanic on Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min 4.
compressor pms Weekly 30-60 min
2-3/mo 1-2 hr 5.
X Monthly 2-4 hr 6.
2-3/yr X 4-6 hr
Yearly 6-8 hr 7.
Special > 8 hr
8.
9.
10.
Task VII X Routine Daily 0-15 min 1. Air Fumes Observe for the well to 2 2 4
Blowdown wells Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min emissions Venting unload liquids. 44
Weekly 30-60 min
Permit Exceedances
2-3/mo 1-2 hr
X Monthly 2-4 hr 2. Area control Line of fire Keep extra personnel 1 2 2
2-3/yr X 4-6 hr out of the area.
Yearly 6-8 hr 3. Capabilities Training Training and 2 2 4
Special > 8 hr experience.
4. Cold Cold weather Wear adequate 1 2 2
clothing. Postpone
work.
5. Control Bypassed HiLo valve on well is 1 2 2
systems bypassed because
liquids will not unload.
6. Documentat Reporting requirements Complete permit and 1 2 2
ion fax to Field
Environmental Coord.
7. Flammable Accumulation in high/low points Observe for vapor 2 2 4
gas/vapor cloud accumulating.
8. Heat Heat exhaustion Drink fluids. 2 2 4
9. Inadequate 2-way radios Radio check before 0 2 0
communicat job.
ion

Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
10. Lack of Experience Training. 1 2 2
Competenc
y
11. Noise Hearing loss Loud noise when gas 3 2 6
is blowing in the tank.
Wear hearing
protection. Training.
12. Pressure Pressure burst explosion Wear proper PPE and 2 2 4
Chemical exposure (benzene) training.
Equipment rupture
13. Quality Responsibilities Documentation and 0 2 0
control Lack of Procedures training
14. Slips/Trips/ Entering/exiting vehicle Awareness and 1 2 2
Falls Uneven terrain training.
Walking surfaces
15. Static Fire explosion caused by non- Grounding and 2 2 4
electricity conductive fluids transferred into tanks bonding tanks.
16. Vehicle Uneven terrain Kill engine, set brake. 1 2 2
Parking
Task VIII Routine Daily 0-15 min 1.
Repair small leaks X Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min
Weekly 30-60 min 2.
2-3/mo 1-2 hr 3.
Monthly X 2-4 hr
X 2-3/yr 4-6 hr 4.
Yearly 6-8 hr 5.
Special > 8 hr
Task IX X Routine Daily 0-15 min 1.
Oversee roustabout Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min
crews Weekly 30-60 min 2.
2-3/mo 1-2 hr 3.
X Monthly 2-4 hr
2-3/yr 4-6 hr 4.
Yearly X 6-8 hr 5.
Special > 8 hr
Task V X Routine Daily 0-15 min 1.
Oversee truck Non-routine 2-3/wk 15-30 min
loading Weekly 30-60 min 2.
2-3/mo X 1-2 hr 3.
X Monthly 2-4 hr
2-3/yr 4-6 hr 4.

Health
JOB
HRR
ER)
Yearly 6-8 hr 5.
Special > 8 hr
Suggestions for
Future
Monitoring:

JOB FUNCTIONS CHECKLIST
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
LIFTING Max wt.: 100 lbs. Frequency per day: 1 or 2 per day
PULLING Max wt.: 100 lbs. Distance: 3-5 ft. Freq. per day:
PUSHING Max wt.: 100 lbs. Distance: 3-5 ft. Freq. per day:
CARRYING Max wt.: 100 lbs. Distance: 3-5 ft. Freq. per day:
Alone X Assisted
SITTING Hrs. per day: 1
DRIVING Hrs. per day: 2 1/2 Car Truck X Type of Truck: Pickup
STANDING Hrs. per day: 1/2 Type of Surface: Caliche/gravel
WALKING Hrs. per day: 4 Distance: @100 ft. Type of Surface: Caliche/gravel
CLIMBING None Ladder Stairs once/week
Freq. per day: Height: 20 ft. Distance: ft.
REACHING Distance: None ft. Freq. per day:
REPETITIVE
Body Part: Legs/Back Activity: In and out of truck Freq. per day: 20
MOTION
BENDING Freq. per day: very infrequent; once/week; draining water from tank
STOOPING Freq. per day: very infrequent
SQUATTING Freq. per day: very infrequent
KNEELING Freq. per day: very infrequent
SENSORY REQUIREMENTS (Mark those that apply)

Far: X Near: X Color: X
VISION
Peripheral: X Depth Perception: X
HEARING Normal conversation X
TOUCH Finger dexterity X
SMELL X
COGNITIVE REQUIREMENTS (Mark those that apply)

READING X WRITING X SPEAKING X GOAL SETTING X
SIMPLE MATH X CALCULATIONS X ESTIMATES X DECISION-MAKING X
OCCUPATIONAL / ENVIRONMENTAL / SAFETY ASPECTS
Days X Evenings Nights

SHIFT WORK
Variable
NORMAL SHIFT Hours: 0700 - 1530
ON-CALL SCHEDULE 24 Hours X Shift Only
Alone X Team
Indoors: 10 % Outdoors: 90 %
WORK
Elevations: Noise Exposure
Confined Space No
Height 20 ft. (> 85 dB TWA) ?
Dust X Fumes X Gases X

EXPOSURE TO:
Particles X Cold X Heat X
Duration and Expected physical

Additional protective Temperature and
Type and weight of the frequency of respirator work effort (Light,
clothing and humidity extremes that
respirator use (including use for Moderate, Heavy, or
RESPIRATORY equipment to be worn may be encountered.
rescue and escape) Very Heavy)
PROTECTION Half face ~8 oz 1 hour/one Moderate Winter clothing 20 deg F 100
day/one week deg F; 40% RH
and ad hoc 98% RH
OTHER
Please document other items that should be considered (equipment, tools, computers, vehicles,
travel, etc.). Also use this space to comment on any of the above items.

Chemical Manufacturer Health Fire Reactivity Specific Purpose Frequency - Duration Type of Goggles Resp. Other Health Exposure Health
Name Hazards of Times/ Day of Gloves or Face- PPE Effects Rating Risk
Chemical / or Times / Exposure shield Rating (ER) Rating
How it's Week (HER) (HRR)
used = (HER *
ER)

Tank Gauging (Example)

Party
1. Position vehicle correctly, prepare to Improper PPE Head, eye, hand, foot If proper PPE is not worn, injury could Wear hard hat, steel toe boots, safety glasses with
gauge tank. protection occur. side shields, gloves, and any other PPE as
required by hazards present.
Additional PPE Toxic chemicals H2S release H2S is a health concern. Knock down is a
possible outcome.
Additional PPE Toxic chemicals Benzene is a known contaminant in the Half face respirator with organic vapor cartridge.
in breathing zone.
2. Ascend to the top of tank. Oil Spill Oil spills can result when samples are Observation and good housekeeping inspect
taken from tank. area prior to ascending, clean up any oil
observed.
Static Electricity Clothing Clothing materials can cause static Wear cotton or rubber gloves.
buildup.
Static Electricity Grounding/bonding If at least single hand contact is not Maintain at least single hand contact to drain
maintained with the hand rail, a static static charge.
charge could build up.
Work at height Slips/falls Standing too close to edge of platform Ensure body position is in the center of the
could cause a slip over the edge. working platform. Ensure that mid-rails and toe-
boards are present.
Wind Stability High wind conditions could cause you Wear chin strap on hard hat and maintain contact
to lose your balance. Hard hat could with guard rails to help maintain balance.
also be blown off and reacting to catch
it could cause you to lose your balance.
Equipment/Tools Guards Corners of hand rails and guard rails Wear proper gloves while ascending ladder, eyes
could be sharp or have protruding bolts, on task, repair hand rails with burrs.
causing possible hand injury.
hazard on the stairs. area prior to ascending, clean up any oil
Slips/Trips/Falls/Injuries Stairs Ascending too fast could cause you to Do not hurry.
miss a step or slip.


Party
Slips/Trips/Falls/Injuries Ice/sanding procedures Ice can be present during the winter Observation and good housekeeping inspect
months. area prior to ascending. Sand can be applied to
the stairs to remediate slippery surfaces.
3. Release hatch to gain access to gauge Fire/explosion Hydrocarbon release Flammable gases may be present in the Release hatch slowly and maintain upwind
the tank headspace of the tank. position.
Toxic chemicals H2S release H2S is a health concern. Knock down Wear H2S monitor. Alarms at 10 ppm. Leave
is a possible outcome. area and go upwind or crosswind.Body position
upwind, open thief hatch slowly with head and
face away from opening to ensure no exposure in
breathing zone.
Toxic chemicals Benzene Benzene is a known contaminant in the Half face respirator with organic vapor cartridge.
in breathing zone.
Handling Caught between/pinch points Wind could blow the thief hatch closed Ensure hand/fingers are never placed in the line
unexpectedly. of fire. To protect gauge tape, secure hatch in
open position.
4. Gauge tank. Lower gauge tape slowly to Lack of Competency Vision deficiency Poor or non-existent training causes If plumb bob strikes tank bottom too hard, tank
the tank bottom while maintaining equipment damage and inaccurate could be damaged, creating a hole.
contact between gauge tape and tank. readings.
When the bottom is felt, raise gauge tape
while maintaining contact between tape
and tank. When the fluid level is visible
on the tank tape, take reading to within
inch. Continue raising gauge tape
completely. Wipe fluid off plumb bob.
Static Electricity Grounding/bonding Static charge could build up if not Maintain contact between gauge tape and tank at
bonded. all times to ensure static does not build up.
5. Close the gauge hatch. Handling Caught between/pinch points Grip could slip while lowering the Ensure hand/fingers are never placed in the line
hatch, could drop the thief hatch closed of fire.
too rapidly.
6. Descend from tank top. Oil Spill Oil spills can result when samples are Observation and good housekeeping inspect
taken from tank. area prior to descending, clean up any oil
observed.

Party
None None Descending too fast could cause you to Do not hurry and maintain at least single hand
miss a step or slip. contact with hand rail.
hazard on the stairs. area prior to descending, clean up any oil

Table 1 - Health Effects Rating
(Source: American Industrial Hygiene Association: A Strategy for Assessing and Managing Occupational Exposures. Fairfax, Va.:
American Industrial Hygiene Association, 1998. p93.)
Category Health Effect

4 Life Threatening or disabling injury or illness
3 Irreversible health effects of concern
2 Severe, reversible health effects of concern
1 Reversible health effects of concern
0 Reversible effects of little concern, or no known or suspected adverse health effects
Table 2 - Exposure Rating
Yearly 1 1 1 1 1
Quarterly 1 1 2 2 2
Monthly 2 2 2 3 3
Frequency
Weekly 2 3 3 4 4
Daily 3 3 4 5 5
0-15 mins 15 60 mins 1-4 hours 4-8 hours > 8 hr
Duration

protocol.xls Page 1
OUSBU RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PROGRAM EVALUATION FORM
FACILITY NAME:
% Overall Compliance with OSHA Regulations

DATE: 6/9/2004 29 CFR 1910.134 and/or 29 CFR 1926.103
23%
ITEM
CITATION REFERENCE DESCRIPTION Y N N/A AUDITOR'S GUIDANCE NOTES
NO.
Written Respiratory Protection Program
1 29 CFR 1910.134(c) Do you have a written respiratory 1 Employers are required to establish and maintain a written
29 CFR 1926.103 protection program with required worksite- respiratory protection program with worksite-specific procedures
whenever respirators are required to protect the health of the
specific procedures and elements for
employee. The program must be in writing and contain all of the
required respirator use? elements specified in 1910.134(c). Elements addressed in Q. 2-12
below.
2 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1)(i) Does the program include Procedures for 1 Respiratory hazards must be identified and evaluated. The
29 CFR 1926.103 selecting respirators for use in the evaluation must include a reasonable estimate of the employee
exposure and identification of the contaminants chemical state
workplace?
and physical form. If employee exposure cannot be reasonably
estimated, the atmosphere will be considered IDLH. Ensure the
means used to document the evaluation includes the relevant
details above.
3 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1)(ii) Does the program include Medical 1 Ensure provision is made to complete the Initial and Update
29 CFR 1926.103 evaluations of employees required to use Questionnaires and pass them to Medical.
respirators?
4 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1)(iii) Does the program include Fit testing 1 OC's are required to ensure employees pass a quantitative
29 CFR 1926.103 procedures for tight-fitting respirators? fit test (QNFT) before initial use, if a different respirator is used,
and annually. SARs are required to be fit tested as well.
5 29 CFR Does the program include Procedures for 1

1910.134(c)(1)(iv) proper use of respirators in routine and
29 CFR 1926.103 reasonably foreseeable emergency
situations?
6 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1)(v) Does the program include Procedures and 1

29 CFR 1926.103 schedules for cleaning, disinfecting,
storing, inspecting, repairing, discarding,
and otherwise maintaining respirators?
7 29 CFR Does the program include Procedures to 1

1910.134(c)(1)(vi) ensure adequate air quality, quantity, and
29 CFR 1926.103 flow of breathing air for atmosphere-
supplying respirators?
8 29 CFR Does the program include Training of 1 Training of exposures to respiratory hazards is handled in
1910.134(c)(1)(vii) employees in the respiratory hazards to separate training programs for H2S and Benzene.
29 CFR 1926.103 which they are potentially exposed during
routine and emergency situations?
9 29 CFR Does the program include Training of 1

1910.134(c)(1)(viii) employees in the proper use of respirators,
29 CFR 1926.103 including putting on, and removing them,
any limitations on their use, and their
maintenance?
10 29 CFR Does the program include Procedures for 1 Procedures need to include a means of documentation of
1910.134(c)(1)(ix) regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the annual respiratory program evaluation.
29 CFR 1926.103 the program?
protocol.xls Page 2
OUSB
FACILIT
DATE:
ITEM
FIELD GUIDANCE NOTES AUDITIOR'S FINDINGS
NO.
Writte
1 Interview employees to ensure they know how to access the
written program from the web and that they can identify the
appropriate section in the OUSBU Safety Handbook.
3 Must be confidential, during normal working hours, convenient,

understandable, employee given chance to discuss results with
PLHCP.
4
10
protocol.xls Page 3
ITEM
NO.
11 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(3) Have you designated a qualified program 1 Administrator must be knowledgeable of the complexity of
29 CFR 1926.103 administrator to administer or oversee the the program, conduct evaluations, and be properly trained.
respiratory protection program and
conduct the required evaluations of
program effectiveness?
12 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(1) Has the program been updated as 1 When regulations, equipment or processes are changed, the
29 CFR 1926.103 necessary to reflect changes in regulations changes can result in increases or decreases in workplace
exposures.
or workplace conditions that affect
respirator use?
Voluntary Use of Respirators

13 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(2)(i) If employees are using their own Observe/interview voluntary respirator users to determine that an
29 CFR 1926.103 respirators, have you determined that such evaluation was conducted and that the respirator use is not
creating a hazard.
respirator use will not in itself create a
hazard?
14 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(2)(i) If you have determined that voluntary Interview voluntary respirator users to determine that a copy of 29
29 CFR 1926.103 respirator use is permissible, have you CFR 1910.134 Appendix D was provided. Review training course
content to ensure the topic of Appendix D is addressed.
provided the respirator users with the
information contained in Appendix D of
1910.134?
15 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(2)(ii) Have you established and implemented Medical capability to wear a respirator is determined by a PLHCP by
29 CFR 1926.103 those elements of a written respiratory reviewing the Initial Respirator User Questionnaire, Periodic
Respirator User Questionnaire and/or follow-up medical
protection program necessary to ensure
examination.
that any employee using a respirator
voluntarily is medically able to use that
respirator?
16 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(2)(ii) Do you ensure that respirators are

cleaned, maintained, and stored
properly?
Medical Evaluations
17 29 CFR 1910.134(e) Have you established and implemented
those elements of a written respiratory
protection program necessary to ensure
that any employee required to use a
respirator is medically able to use that
respirator?
Selection of Respirators
18 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(1)(iii) Have you identified and evaluated all The employer is required to identify hazards, select and provide
29 CFR 1926.103 respiratory hazard(s) in the workplace, respirators based on those hazards and factors affecting
performance. Brands and models must be listed. The employer is
including a reasonable estimate of
required to estimate exposures and contaminant information.
employee exposures to respiratory
hazard(s) and an identification of the The Respirator Selection Checklist guides the evaluation of the
contaminant's chemical state and chemical, estimate of the employee exposure and identification of
physical form? the chemical's state and physical form.
Exposures to levels of air contaminants which exceed ACGIH

Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) or NIOSH recommended exposure limits
(RELs) but which have no OSHA PEL and which are considered to
19 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(1)(i) Have you selected and provided an User factors affecting respirator performance and reliability are
29 CFR 1926.103 appropriate respirator based on the identified in the Job Exposure Profile (Job Functions Checklist).
respiratory hazard(s) to which the worker is
exposed, and the workplace and user
factors that affect respirator performance
and reliability?
protocol.xls Page 4
ITEM
NO.
11 The Local HSE Representative is assigned the Respiratory Program
Administrator role. Interview the Local HSE Representative to
ensure s/he is the performing the assigned tasks listed in Table 5.12
Task Summary Table.
12 Examine management of change documents for evidence that

changes in respiratory exposures have been considered as part of
the MOC.
Volun
13 Verify that written recommendation regarding the employee's
ability to use the respirator pre-dates the initial training date.
14
15 Interview employees who wear respirators voluntarily to

determine that they have completed the Initial Respirator User
Questionnaire and Periodic Respirator User Questionnaire,
forwarded the completed questionnaire to Medical and received
a written recommendation regarding wearing a respirator.
16
Medi
17 Interview employees required to wear respirators to determine
that they have completed the Initial Respirator User Questionnaire
and Periodic Respirator User Questionnaire, forwarded the
completed questionnaire to Medical and received a written
recommendation regarding wearing a respirator.
Selec
18 Hazards and controls are identified when conducting a Job
Safety Analysis. When respiratory hazards are identified on a JSA,
ensure a completed Respirator Selection Checklist is attached.
Verify record retention.
19 Verify that Medical has a Job Exposure Profile with Job Functions
Checklist for each worker in the Respiratory Protection Program.
protocol.xls Page 5
ITEM
NO.
20 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(1)(ii) Are all respirators NIOSH-certified, and Respirators are required to be NIOSH-certified.
29 CFR 1926.103 used in compliance with the conditions of
their certification?
21 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(1)(iii) If you are unable to identify or reasonably Unknown atmospheres must be treated as IDLH and require the
29 CFR 1926.103 estimate the employee exposure, do you highest level of respiratory protection, SARs.
consider the atmosphere to be IDLH?
22 29 CFR Do you select respirators from a sufficient

1910.134(d)(1)(iv) number of respirator models and sizes so
29 CFR 1926.103 that the respirator is acceptable to, and
correctly fits, the user?
Respirators for IDLH Atmospheres

23 29 CFR For IDLH atmospheres do you provide a full Program must address outside standby persons, maintaining
1910.134(d)(2)(i)(A) facepiece pressure demand SCBA communication, proper training and equipment, notification
procedures, and necessary action. Mandatory equipment must
29 CFR certified by NIOSH for a minimum service
include SCBA or SAR with auxiliary air supply & appropriate retrieval
1910.134(d)(2)(i)(B) life of thirty minutes, or a combination full equipment.
29 CFR 1926.103 facepiece pressure demand with auxiliary
self-contained air supply?
24 29 CFR 1910.134(d)(2)(iii) Are all oxygen-deficient atmospheres .

29 CFR 1926.103 considered IDLH?
Respirator Storage
25 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(2)(i) Are all respirators stored so that they are Protection from damage, contamination, etc. For emergency use,
29 CFR 1926.103 protected from damage, contamination, stored accessible, clearly marked. Inspections: Routine use - before
use and during cleaning; emergency - monthly, and before and
dust, sunlight, extreme temperatures,
after each use; escape-only - before being carried into workplace.
excessive moisture, and damaging
chemicals?
26 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(2)(i) Are all respirators packed and stored to

29 CFR 1926.103 prevent deformation of the facepiece
and exhalation valve?
27 29 CFR Are emergency respirators kept accessible
1910.134(h)(2)(ii)(A) to the work area, stored in compartments
29 CFR or in covers that are clearly marked as
1910.134(h)(2)(ii)(B) containing emergency respirators, and
29 CFR stored in accordance with any applicable
1910.134(h)(2)(ii) manufacturer instructions?
29 CFR 1926.103
Respirator Inspection
28 29 CFR Are all respirators used in routine situations
1910.134(h)(3)(i)(A) inspected before each use, and during
29 CFR 1926.103 cleaning?
29 29 CFR Are all respirators maintained for use in

1910.134(h)(3)(i)(B) emergency situations inspected at least
29 CFR 1926.103 monthly and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations?
protocol.xls Page 6
ITEM
NO.
20 Verify by observation of the NIOSH# on the respirator and
cartridge.
21 Interview employees to ensure they are aware that unknown

atmospheres can only be entered wearing a SAR with backup
responder standing by and prepared to enter.
22 Observe respirator selection of brands and sizes. Interview

respirator users to determine that their masks fit correctly and are
acceptable.
Resp
23 Observe/interview respirator users to determine that SARs are
utilized in IDLH atmospheres. Observe/interview respiratory
program participants that wear SCBAs to ensure standby persons
are present when SCBA is worn. Ensure emergency escape
bottles are present and correctly used (bottle full, but turned off
unless escaping) when airline hoses are used.
24 Interview respirator users to determine understanding of

characteristics of oxygen-deficient atmospheres and how to
measure them.
Resp
25 Observe/interview respiratory program participants re: inspections
of equipment. Field check cleanliness of masks, cartridges are
removed and disposed, and respirators are properly stored to
protect them against physical damage, contamination, excessive
moisture, extreme temperatures, sunlight, and damaging
chemicals.
26 Field check.
27 Field check. Emergency use respirators must be stored in

compartments OR in covers, both of which must be clearly
marked as containing the emergency respirators. An inspection
must be conducted monthly for all emergency use respirators.
The employer must certify in writing that an inspection was
performed. The certification must include the name (or signature)
of the person who made the inspection, the findings of the
inspection, any remedial action, and a serial number or other
means of identifying the inspected respirator. The respirator must
also be checked before and after each use.
Resp
28 Observe/interview respiratory program participants re: inspections
of equipment. A minimally acceptable inspection procedure for
ALL respirators includes a check of respirator function, tightness of
connections and the condition of the various parts, including but
not limited to, the face piece, head straps, valves, connecting
tube, and cartridges, canisters, or filters, and a check of the
respirator's elastomer parts for pliability and signs of deterioration.
29 Record check.
protocol.xls Page 7
ITEM
NO.
30 29 CFR Are all respirators maintained for use in
1910.134(h)(3)(i)(B) emergency situations checked for proper
29 CFR 1926.103 function before and after each use?
31 29 CFR Are all emergency escape-only respirators

1910.134(h)(3)(i) inspected before being carried into the
29 CFR 1926.103 workplace for use?
Respirator Repairs
32 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(4) Are respirators that fail an inspection or are
29 CFR 1926.103 otherwise found to be defective, removed
from service, and discarded, repaired, or
adjusted?
33 29 CFR 1910.134(h)(4)(ii) Are repairs made according to the

29 CFR 1926.103 manufacturer's recommendations and
specifications for the type and extent of
repairs to be performed?
Breathing Air Quality and Use

34 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(1)(ii) Are employees using atmosphere- Compressed breathing air must meet at least the requirements for
29 CFR 1926.103 supplying respirators (supplied-air and Grade D breathing air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas
Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989.
SCBA) provided with breathing gases that
meet Grade D Breathing Air?
35 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(1)(i) Do compressed and liquid oxygen meet

29 CFR 1926.103 the United States Pharmacopoeia
requirements for medical or breathing
oxygen?
36 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(2) Are provisions in place to ensure that

29 CFR 1926.103 compressed oxygen is not used in
atmosphere-supplying respirators that
have previously used compressed air?
37 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(3) Do you ensure that oxygen concentrations

29 CFR 1926.103 greater than 23.5% are used only in
equipment designed for oxygen service or
distribution?
38 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(6) For compressors that are not oil-lubricated, For air compressors that are not oil lubricated, a CO alarm is
29 CFR 1926.103 do you ensure that carbon monoxide not required. However, the employer is required to ensure
levels in the breathing air do not exceed that carbon monoxide levels in the breathing air do not
10 ppm? exceed 10 ppm. Some practical methods for ensuring that
the carbon monoxide level does not exceed 10 ppm
include; placing the air intake for the compressor in an area
that the employer knows is free from contaminants;
frequent or continuous monitoring of the breathing air
supply; the use of carbon monoxide filters; or the use of a
high temperature alarm or shut off devices.
39 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(7) If the employer is using an oil-lubricated air compressor, it

must have either a carbon monoxide alarm, high
temperature alarm, or both. If only a high temperature
alarm is used, then the breathing air must be tested for the
presence of carbon monoxide at intervals sufficient to
ensure that carbon monoxide levels do not exceed 10 ppm.
The alarm must be able to alert the users or another
employee who knows to alert any respirator users.
protocol.xls Page 8
ITEM
NO.
30 Record check.
31 Record check.
Resp
32 Record check.
33 Record check.
Breat
34 Record check.
35 Record check.
36 Field check that systems can not be cross-connected.
37
38 Field check: Tag containing the signature of the person

authorized by the employer to change the in-line sorbent beds
and filters and the date of the latest change must be maintained
at the compressor.
Ensure location of the compressor intake is located in an area

uncontaminated by either combustion exhaust gases produced
by vehicles or the compressor itself (if applicable), or by other
exhaust gases ventilated from plant processes.
39 Field check.
protocol.xls Page 9
ITEM
NO.
40 29 CFR 1910.134(i)(8) Do you ensure that breathing air couplings All breathing air couplings must be incompatible with those
29 CFR 1926.103 are incompatible with outlets for of non-respirable air or other gases used at the site to
nonrespirable worksite air or other gas prevent inadvertent servicing of air line respirators with non-
systems? respirable gases or oxygen.
SARs
41 1910.134(c)(1)(vi) Do you follow procedures to ensure
adequate air quality, quantity, and flow of
breathing air for atmosphere-supplying
respirators?
Identification of Filters, Cartridges, and Canisters

42 29 CFR 1910.134(j) Do you ensure that all filters, cartridges The employer must ensure that all canisters and filters are properly
29 CFR 1926.103 and canisters used in the workplace are labeled and color coded with the NIOSH approval label and that
the label is not removed, obscured, or defaced while in service. This
labeled and color coded with the NIOSH
requirement enables the employee using the respirator to check
approval label? and confirm that the respirator has the appropriate filters before the
respirator is used and also allows fellow employees, supervisors, and
the respirator program administrator to readily determine that the
employee is using the appropriate filters.
Training and Information

43 29 CFR 1910.134(k)(3) Is the training provided before employees
29 CFR 1926.103 are required to use a respirator in the
workplace?
44 29 CFR 1910.134(k) Do you provide effective training to The effectiveness of the training program can be evaluated by
29 CFR 1926.103 employees who are required to use determining how well employees understand how to use their
respirators? respirators. If respirators are improperly worn, missing parts, dirty,
improperly stored, or the wrong cartridges are being used, the
program is not effective.
45 29 CFR 1910.134(k) Is the training comprehensive,

29 CFR 1926.103 understandable, and given annually (or
more often if necessary)?
Program Evaluation
46 29 CFR 1910.134(l) Do you conduct evaluations of the
29 CFR 1926.103 workplace to ensure that the written
respiratory protection program is being
properly implemented, and consult
employees to ensure that they are using
respirators properly?
Recordkeeping
protocol.xls Page 10
ITEM
NO.
40 Field check.
SARs
41 Record check to ensure flow tests are performed on regulators
annually. Record check monthly inspections are documented.
Field check: date stamp on SARs to ensure hydrotest of cylinder
has not expired, cylinder pressure is >/= 90% of manufacturer's
recommended pressure level, regulator and low pressure warning
devices function properly. To assure that both the regulator and
low pressure warning devices function properly the warning
device must be activated and heard by the person performing
the inspection.
Ident
42 Fiedl check that properly labeled filters and canisters are being
used, and that the labels remain legible.
Date and time labels applied to the filters/cartridges are

permitted, but the employee must obscure as little as possible of
the label to allow ready identification.
Traini
43 Verify that List of Respiratory Program Participants agrees with the
list in VTA. Confirm that training occurred prior to use through
employee interviews. Verify initial and annual training dates are
entered in VTA.
44 Interview employee for knowledge of the respirator requirements.

Employees should be interviewed to determine if they have
received the required training and the extent of that training. If a
trend in employee responses indicates training is not being
conducted, or is conducted in a cursory manner, a closer review
of the training program is necessary.
Lack of knowledge about the hazards for which the respirator is

being used, could also indicate a deficiency in the Hazard
Communication training [1910.1200(h)
45
Progr
46
Reco
ITEM
NO.
47 29 CFR 1910.134(m) Do you establish and retain written
29 CFR 1926.103 information regarding medical
evaluations, fit testing, and the respirator
program?
48 29 CFR Do you retain fit test records for respirator

1910.134(m)(2)(ii) users until the next fit test is administered?
29 CFR 1926.103
49 29 CFR 1926.103 Are appropriate records maintained?
Fit Testing
50 29 CFR 1910.134 Do you conduct fit testing using the Fit test records must be kept until the next fit test is administered.
Appendix A procedures set forth in Appendix A to Each fit test record must contain the employee identification, type
of fit test, date last tested, the results of the test, and the make,
29 CFR 1926.103 1910.134?
model and size of the respirator tested.
User Seal Check

51 29 CFR 1910.134 Do individuals who use a tight-fitting Things that can affect the seal must be prohibited and include facial
Appendix B-1 respirator perform a user seal check to hair, glasses, etc. The program must address checking of the seal
each time the unit is put on.
29 CFR 1926.103 ensure that an adequate seal is achieved
each time the respirator is put on?
52 29 CFR 1910.134 Is the seal check performed either by the

Appendix B-1 positive and negative pressure checks
29 CFR 1926.103 listed in Appendix B-1 to 1910.134, or by the
respirator manufacturer's recommended
user seal check method?
Cleaning
53 29 CFR 1910.134 Are respirators cleaned according to the Respirators are required to be provided in a clean and sanitary
Appendix B-2 provisions of Appendix B-2 to 1910.134, or manner using procedures in Appendix B or equally effective
manufacturer's procedures.
29 CFR 1926.103 according to the recommendations of the
manufacturer?
AUDITOR: NEW 27-Aug-2003

BP
ITEM
NO.
47
48
49
Fit Te
50 Review fit test records to verify that fit-testing is being done
annually and confirm that the fit-tested respirators are the same
models and sizes as those observed in the workplace.
Verify that site has fit test results within the past year for each
person on the site's List of Respiratory Program Participants.
User
51 Sample representative number (10%) of site's List of Respiratory
Program Participants. Have them don their masks and check for
facepiece seal interference, e.g. facial hair, eyeglasses, etc.
52
Clea
53 Observe cleaning of masks. Ensure masks are cleaned at the end
of use, cartridges are removed and disposed, and masks are
stored properly.
The use of individually-wrapped cleaning towelettes may be used

as an interim method in the cleaning schedule for individually
assigned respirators, but they must not be the only method in
place.
AUDITO
ITEM
NO.
RESPIRATORY SCORING
ITEM # 2003
1 1
2 1
3 1
4 1
Written Program
5 1
6 1
7 1
8 1
9 1
10 1
11 1
12 1
13 0
14 0
15 0
16 0
17 0
18 0
19 0
20 0
21 0
22 0
23 0
24 0
25 0
26 0
27 0
28 0
29 0
30 0
Field Implmentation
31 0
32 0
33 0
34 0
35 0
36 0
37 0
38 0
39 0
40 0
41 0
42 0
43 0
44 0
45 0
46 0
47 0
48 0
49 0
50 0
51 0
52 0
53 0
WRITTEN PROGRAM 100%
FIELD IMPLEMENTATION 0%
ITEM
NO.
Written Program
Field Implmentation
ITEM
NO.
OVERALL PROGRAM 23%
Disclaimer: The information contained in these forms, questionnaire and monitoring procedures, when assessing a contractor, is provided as written guidance
to assist contractors in complying with the OSHA regulations and/or BP requirements. BP, the operators who participated in the development of this program
and their employees disclaim all warranties both express and implied. The information presented here will give contractors a reference document, which
should be used as guidance or as a "first step" toward bringing the contractor company into compliance. This monitoring program is based on sound safety
and environmental concerns. We urge contractors to view their OSHA and DOT compliance efforts as a way to make their workplace safer for their employees.
Each contractor is still responsible for full compliance of all applicable State and Federal regulations.
ITEM
NO.
Disclaim
to assist
and the
should
and env
Each co
BP Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Handbook
Chapter X.X Respiratory Protection Program
In the control of those occupational diseases caused by breathing air contaminated with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists,
gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the primary objective shall be to prevent atmospheric contamination. This shall be
accomplished as far as feasible by accepted engineering control measures (for example, enclosure or confinement of the
operation, general and local ventilation, and substitution of less toxic materials). When effective engineering controls are not
feasible, or while they are being instituted, appropriate respiratory protection shall be used.
When jobs are identified for which respiratory protection equipment is required, respirators are selected based on the chemical
state, physical form of the hazard and expected concentration.
Only positive pressure SCBAs or positive pressure air line respirators with a full emergency egress bottle shall be used when an
employee is exposed to hydrogen sulfide (H2S), oxygen deficient (less than 19.5% O2) or oxygen enriched atmospheres
(greater than 23.5%), IDLH, or unknown atmospheres.
Prior to using respirators, and annually thereafter, workers must be medically evaluated, fit tested and trained.
Respirator users must ensure that nothing is allowed to interfere with a proper respirator to skin seal. This includes stubble
(growth 24 hours old), mustache, sideburns, beard, or bangs.
Respirators must be correctly donned, pressure checked, cleaned and stored. Follow the procedures below to ensure correct
use.
Air Purifying Respirator and SAR Mask Donning
Half Mask
Fasten bottom strap at back of neck
Position respirator on face with wider portion under the chin
Fasten top or cradle strap at the crown of the head
Adjust straps for comfortable fit
Full Face or SAR mask

Start with straps of head harness fully open
Center chin in chin cup
Place mask on face
Grasp harness with thumbs through straps from inside
Spread straps
Push top of harness up your forehead
Remove hair between forehead and sealing surface of facepiece
Center harness at rear of your head
Tighten straps pulling evenly to rear, in the order below. Pulling outward may damage straps and prevent proper
engagement with adjusting buckles.
o Lower
o Temple
o Top
Positive and Negative Pressure Checks

The following user checks, test the seal and the condition of inlet exhaust check valves.
Negative Pressure Check
Cover the inlet of the canister, cartridge(s) filter(s), or hose with the palms
Inhale gently so that the face piece collapses slightly
Hold breath for ten seconds
If the face piece remains slightly collapsed and no inward leakage is detected, the respirator is properly donned, and
the exhaust valve is functioning.
Positive Pressure Check
Close off the opening of the exhalation valve by covering with the palm.
Exhale gently into the face piece.
If slight positive pressure can be built up inside the face piece without any evidence of outward leakage, the respirator
is properly donned, and the intake valves are functioning.
Revision Date:
Print Date:
BP Onshore U.S. Business Unit Safety Handbook
Cartridge Changeout
Install fresh sorbent cartridges at the start of the task requiring a respirator. Cartridges must be changed out and
disposed of according to the end-of-service-life indicator (if available), at the end of the task or at the end of one 8-
hour shift, whichever comes first.
If the worker does detect an odor indicating breakthrough, the cartridge should be changed out immediately.
Cleaning and Storage
Shared respirators must be cleaned after each use to ensure that the equipment is ready for the next user. Single
user respirators may be cleaned as often as required. Between thorough cleaning, respirators can be wiped with
alcohol-free disposable wipes.
Cleaning and Disinfecting
Remove any filters, cartridges or canisters and discard as warranted (usually after 8 hours of use).
Wash face pieces and breathing tubes in detergent and warm water (120 F) or cleaner-disinfectant
solution. Use a hand brush to facilitate removal of dirt.
Rinse completely in clean, warm water.
Air-dry the equipment in a clean area.
Clean other parts as recommended by manufacturer.
Inspect valves, head straps and other parts and replace them with new parts if defective.
Storage
Place the facemask in a plastic bag or container for storage.
Emergency equipment shall be stored in its carrying case in a convenient location to facilitate easy
access in an emergency situation. The storage area must be clearly identified, indicating the type of
equipment, such as SCBA or air-purifying respirator.
Routinely used respirators, such as dust respirators, may be placed in plastic bags and stored in clean
cabinets in convenient locations in the work area, such as a warehouse.
Promptly report any malfunction or problem with the respirator to the supervisor.
Revision Date:
Print Date:
RESPIRATOR SELECTION CHECKLIST

FACILITY ________________ Task Date
Chemical Substance Physical Form Anticipated

(MSDS product name) State Concentration
Was the concentration measured or estimated?________________ If estimated, please explain ____________

________________________________________________________________________________________
Any changes in the operations which might significantly increase anticipated contaminant level: ____Yes___ No
Is environment potentially immediately dangerous to life to health .
Can contaminant be absorbed through skin ________ Eye irritant________
On the basis of the above information, the following respirator(s) have been selected and approved for
the area or operation listed above:
Manufacturer's Name Model Name/Number (incl. filter) Approval Number
Signed____________________________________ Date______________________________
Respirator Selection Considerations

The following factors must be considered in making this selection:
The identity of the substance(s) present in the work The need for eye and face protection..
environment for which protection is needed.
The physical state of the contaminant (gas, vapor, dust, mist, The possibility of oxygen deficiency.
etc., or combination).
The permissible exposure limit or toxicity of the substance. Exposure measurements or professional judgment assessing the
concentrations likely to be encountered.
Any limitations or restrictions applicable to the types of Measurements to determine or predict the potential exposure
respirators being considered which could make them unsafe in concentrations will be made by, or in consultation with, the
the environment involved. OUSBU Industrial Hygienist(s).
The assigned protection factor listed for the respirator type. Only MSHA and/or NIOSH approved respirators will be
selected.
At no time will a respirator be selected which offers less protection than required for the particular conditions
under which it is to be used. However, if desired, a respirator type offering a greater protection factor than
needed may be selected.

bin/RightSite.dll/dk_search_code.htm?DMW_DOCBASE=us_wl_dk_hse&input_title=Respirator%20Selectionj%20Checklist
Chapter 17, Safety Signs and Color Coding
Chapter 17
Safety Signs and Color Coding
I. Safety Signs
A. Operating supervisors are responsible for ensuring that the appropriate safety signs
and color coding is used.
B. Since some employees may be color-blind or not English-speaking, uniformity in

color and design of safety signs is essential.
C. Standard highway signs are utilized for in-plant vehicle traffic.
D. Replacement of existing signs is warranted if the sign does not conform to standards,
contains misleading information or is damaged to the extent that it cannot be easily
read.
E. When it is impractical to immediately obtain permanent signs, the supervisor in

charge will ensure that temporary signs are installed in the appropriate place. The
required information shall be entered on the sign and with freehand lettering and a
permanent sign shall be ordered as soon as possible.
F. Signs shall be furnished with blunt or rounded corners and shall be free from sharp
edges, splinters, burrs, or other sharp projections. Fastening devices need to be
positioned so they dont constitute a hazard.
II. Specific Sign Applications
A. Equipment that starts automatically and presents a hazard shall be designated by a

sign that is visible from the normal walking pattern around the equipment.
B. Where exits are required, exits shall be marked by a readily visible sign that is
distinctive in color and provides contrast with its surroundings. They shall be
illuminated by a reliable light source providing not less than five footcandles on the
sign surface. The word EXIT shall be in legible letters at least 6 inches high and -
inch wide. Passages that may be mistaken for exits shall be so designated by a sign
with wording such as NOT AN EXIT.
C. Areas where noise levels exceed 82 dBA where employees work 12-hour shifts and
85 dBA where employees work 8-hour shifts shall be posted with hearing protection
required signs.

D. Signs used for compliance with Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations

shall conform to the applicable section of CFR 49.
E. Biohazard signs shall be visible on items used for the disposal of materials that may
be contaminated with body fluids or other biological hazards.
F. A slow moving vehicle emblem will be placed on the rear of any vehicle with
maximum speeds of 25 miles per hour or less on public roads.
G. Typical safety signs required in production operations include:
1. HAZCOM signs in accordance with the Hazard Communication chapter of this

Standard.
2. Caution signs requiring that trucks and tank cars are to be properly prepared for
loading hydrocarbons:
Caution - Chock Wheels

Bond and Ground Before Transferring
Hydrocarbons
3. Danger signs warning personnel that equipment may start automatically:
Danger
Equipment Starts Automatically
4. Danger signs warning of the presence of Hydrogen Sulfide.
a. Hydrogen sulfide signs at the entrance to buildings of locations where

hazardous concentrations of H2S may be present shall read as follows:
Danger
Hydrogen Sulfide Gas May Be Present
Authorized Personnel Only
b. When concentrations of hydrogen sulfide gas exceed 10 ppm, the following

sign shall be posted:
Danger
Hydrogen Sulfide
Positive Pressure
Respiratory Protection Required

c. The following sign is to be located at the base of tank stairways that contain
H2S with a concentration of 100 ppm or greater when measured level with
the thief hatch:
Danger
Hydrogen Sulfide
Positive Pressure Respiratory Protection
and Standby Person Required
III. Summary of OSHA and ANSI Safety Color Code
A. The following color code applications are to be used for painting and marking of
company facilities and equipment. See Attachment 4.17-1 for some examples.
1. "DANGER" - Red, or predominantly red, with lettering or symbols in a

contrasting color. Red shall be the basic color for the identification of:
a. Fire. Fire protection equipment and apparatus, including fire alarm boxes,
fire blanket boxes, fire extinguishers, fire exit signs, fire hose locations, fire
hydrants, and fire pumps.
b. Danger. Safety cans or other portable containers of flammable liquids,

lights at barricades and at temporary obstructions, and danger signs.
Indicates presence of Hydrogen Sulfide gas.
c. Stop. Stop buttons and emergency stop bars on hazardous machines.
2. "WARNING" - Orange, or predominantly orange, with lettering or symbols in a

contrasting color. Orange shall be the basic color for the identification of
dangerous parts of machines or energized equipment which may cut, crush,
shock or otherwise injure. Fluorescent orange or orange-red shall be used to
designate biological hazards.
3. "CAUTION" - Yellow, or predominantly yellow, with lettering or symbols in a

contrasting color. Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution and
marking physical hazards such as falling, stumbling, tripping, striking against,
and caught in between. Also may be used for containers for corrosives or
unstable materials.
4. Green and/or White. Green and/or white shall be the basic colors for
designating emergency exit routes and the location of first aid equipment.

5. Blue. Blue shall be the basic color for identifying safety information, such as
prohibiting the starting, use of, or movement of equipment under repair or being
worked upon.
6. Magenta on Yellow. Identifies radiation such as X-ray, alpha, beta, gamma,

neutron, and proton radiation.
7. Black, White and Combinations of Black and White/yellow. Black,

white/yellow and combinations of black and white/yellow in stripes and checks,
are used for housekeeping and traffic markings.
Black and white, or black and yellow, can signify boundaries of traffic aisles,
stairways (risers, direction, and border limit lines), and directional signs.
B. The following colors of warning beacon globes are to be used at all BP locations:
1. Red: Fire or Immediate Danger and Hydrogen Sulfide Gas
2. Yellow/Amber: Mechanical or operational problems (warning)
C. The colors utilized by each facility must be specified in writing and communicated
to all employees.
IV. References

Parts 1910.37, 1910.97, 1910.144, 1910.145, 1910.147.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z535.1 - 1998.

Attachment 4.17-1
Examples of Color Code Markings



Attachment 4.17-2
Danger Signs
Caution Signs

Size: 16 wide and 14 high
Center: 12 triangle of
yellow-orange fluorescent
material
Border: 1 dark red, highly

reflective, beaded material
Slow-Moving Vehicle Emblem
Traffic Signs

Information Signs
Safety Instruction Signs

NA Gas Onshore US Health & Safety Practice Page 1

Document Title: Scaffolding
I. Policy
A. It is the policy of BP to provide its employees with safe working conditions. When
working at elevated heights, necessary precautions will be taken to ensure safe work
practices. Should scaffolding be utilized it will be erected and used in accordance
with the procedures established in this policy. A pre-job risk assessment shall be
performed prior to construction, use, and disassembly of scaffolding.
B. The following information provides guidance and insight into the safe construction
and usage of scaffolds. Specific locations and circumstances may necessitate the
need for exceptions to this policy. These exceptions must be approved by the
appropriate Operations Center Manager or his designee.
II. Purpose
The purpose of this policy is to establish criteria for the safe erection, dismantling and use
of scaffolding, to prevent injuries, and to ensure compliance with applicable regulatory
requirements.
III. Responsibility
A. Only Competent Persons (see Attachment 4.18-1, Definitions) shall supervise the
erection, modification or dismantling of scaffolds.
B. All personnel erecting, modifying, or dismantling scaffolding shall be trained and

shall have received hands-on experience to perform these tasks.
C. Scaffolds shall be inspected and tagged by a Competent Person prior to use and after
any modifications are made to the scaffold (see Attachment 4.18-2).
D. Scaffolds shall be inspected by a Competent Person prior to use during each work
shift (see Attachment 4.18-2).
E. Anyone who may access a completed scaffold shall be trained by a Competent

Person in the recognition of hazards associated with scaffolds.
F. The HSE Department shall verify all outsourced training.
G. The Supervisor of the Scaffold Builders is responsible and accountable for the
proper building of the scaffold in accordance with this regulation. If an exception

has been granted, the grantor of the exception assumes the responsibility for the
exception.
IV. Construction of Scaffolds
A. All scaffolds will be designed by a Qualified Person.
B. Scaffolding shall be erected, modified, and dismantled under the direct supervision
of a Competent Person. All personnel erecting, modifying, or dismantling
scaffolding shall be trained and have received hands-on experience in performing
these tasks.
C. Construction of scaffolding near exposed energized electrical conductors or circuits

will be done in accordance with the Electrical Policy.
D. Scaffold construction in advance of a gas plant shutdown must be approved by the

Operation Center Manager and precautions will be taken to make sure that access for
equipment operation and fire fighting is not jeopardized. Wood scaffold boards for
turnaround scaffolds may be installed during the last week before the turnaround
with the approval of the Operations Center Manager.
E. Solid scaffold footing will be used at all times. Supports will always sit on metal
bases. Planking and/or mudsills are required if the footings do not rest on a concrete
slab.
F. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose bricks or concrete blocks shall not be
used to support scaffolds or planks.
G. Scaffolds and their components must be capable of supporting at least four times the
maximum intended load.
H. Uprights will be plumb and all cross-members are to be level. If the physical layout
is such that the scaffold legs cannot be installed plumb, then the scaffold will be
reinforced by tying it into a permanent structure. A leaning or out-of-level scaffold
must be approved in accordance with the Policy section.
I. All scaffolds 6 feet or higher with open sides will be equipped with handrails 38 to
45 above the scaffold floor, a midrail (half the distance between the handrail and
the toeboard), and a 2 X 4 wood or metal toeboard. If for any reason handrails
cannot be used, personnel using the scaffold are required to use fall protection. This
scaffold will have a properly completed caution tag attached to it. A Competent
Person must determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection for
employees erecting or disassembling scaffolds.
J. Install 1/2-inch mesh standard wire (No. 18 gauge) between the toeboard and the
midrail of the handrail along the entire opening where persons are required to work

or pass under the scaffold or where materials stored on the scaffold extend above the
toeboard. Barricades can be substituted to limit access to an area where overhead
work is performed.
K. Handrails and midrails will be 2 scaffold tubing or the equivalent. The supports
will not exceed a 10' spacing.
L. Scaffolds will be secured at least every 30 feet horizontally and 20 feet vertically to
the building or equipment that is being worked on.
M. Wood scaffolding boards that may come into contact with surface temperature 120F
or higher will be constructed and maintained in a manner to prevent fires.
N. The use of wood scaffold boards on operating process units will be kept to a
minimum. Any scaffold boards not in active use will be removed soon after
completion of the job.
O. All scaffold boards(wood or metal) will be secured to the scaffold.
P. Wood scaffold boards will be OSHA approved, of smooth or unfinished 2 X 10

nominal dimensions, of yellow pine or fir wood, and free of major splits, knots and
warps. Douglas fir laminated scaffold planks of the same dimensions may be
substituted.
Q. If possible, scaffolds will be fitted with a minimum of two wood scaffold boards or
one 18-inch-wide metal scaffold board. Scaffold platforms shall be planked as fully
as possible.
R. All scaffolds boards, except lapping wood boards, will be fitted with cleats or wiring
to prevent slippage.
S. All scaffold boards will fit the scaffold. Wood scaffold boards will extend over their
end supports not less than 6 inches nor more than 12 inches. Metal scaffold boards
must be within their cleats and not extend more than 9 inches over either end.
T. Continuous wood scaffold boards will overlap a minimum of 12 in each direction

over the center of scaffold supports. They will be secured in place, and the top
lapping board shall not have a cleat.
U. Scaffolds shall not block fire protection equipment, egress, egress routes, or other
safety equipment.

V. Use of Scaffolds
A. Scaffolding equipment will be kept in good condition at all times. Defective

scaffolding planks, clamps etc. will be taken out of service and repaired or replaced.
B. No one is permitted to ride mobile scaffolding while it is being moved.
C. Tools, materials and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on a scaffold in

quantities such that they become a hazard.
D. All personnel using scaffolds shall be trained to recognize the hazards associated
with working on and around scaffolds.
E. All personnel using scaffolds will use ladders to access the scaffolds. Climbing the
scaffold is not allowed.
F. No scaffold will be used without either a Complete or a Caution tag.
VI. Ladders
Ladder breaks are required every 35 feet.
Ladder runners must extend at least 60 above the deck.

Ladders and other makeshift devices shall not be used to extend the working level
height of the platform.
VII. Scaffold Inspection and Tagging
A. All scaffolds utilized on BP Locations will be built according to the requirements

under the general provisions and receive one of the tags described below.
B. No scaffold will be used without a tag.
C. Upon completion of building a scaffold, a Competent Person will affix a

COMPLETE, CAUTION, or DANGER tag on the scaffold ladder or at a readily
visible location.
1. A green COMPLETE tag will be tied to a complete scaffold after it has been
inspected by a Competent Person.
2. A yellow tag labeled CAUTION will be tied to complete scaffolds which have
very special requirements due to inadequate clearances, space restrictions, holes
in the planking, missing handrails, missing midrails, missing toeboards or any

hazards not normally associated with completed scaffolds. Such deviations

shall be listed along with other special precautions required.
3. A Danger tag labeled DANGER will be tied to incomplete scaffolds that are
Not complete by shifts end

Disassembly or erection of the scaffold is in progress
Scaffold has been damaged or deemed unsafe.
D. Scaffolds will be inspected and the back of the scaffold tag signed by a Competent
Person/Scaffold Builder prior to use during each work shift and after any
modifications are made to the scaffold. System scaffolds can be inspected and the
back of the scaffold tag signed by a Scaffold Inspector (see Attachment 4.18-1)
prior to use during each work shift. The Scaffold Inspection Checklist (Attachment
4.18-2) may be used for guidance when inspecting scaffolds.
VIII. Training Requirements
A. A Competent Person must attend a Competent Person Course and must have
received hands-on experience in performing the following:
General overview of Scaffolding

Regulations and Standards
Erection/Dismantling Planning and Procedures
PPE and Proper procedures
Fall Protection
Access
Working Platforms
Foundations
Guys, Ties, and Braces
Part Inspection
General Safety
Buttresses, Cantilevers and Bridges
B. A Qualified Person must attend a Competent Person Course or be a Registered

Professional Engineer.
C. All Scaffold Inspectors must attend a Scaffold Inspector Course.

D. All Scaffold Builders shall be trained and have received hands-on experience in
performing the following:
General overview of Scaffolding

Regulations and Standards
Erection/Dismantling Planning and Procedures
PPE and Proper procedures
Fall Protection
Access
Working Platforms
Foundations
Guys, Ties, and Braces
Part Inspection
General Safety
Buttresses, Cantilevers and Bridges
Rolling Scaffold Assembly
E. The training listed above must be verified by the HSE department.
F. All personnel using scaffolds will be trained to recognize the hazards associated with
working on and around scaffolds and have training verified by their HSE
Department.
IX. References
A. 29 CFR 1926 Subpart L Scaffolds (1926.450-454).
B. 29 CFR 1910.28, Safety Requirements for Scaffolding.
C. ANSI A10.8-1988.

Attachment 4.18-1
Definitions
Bearer: A horizontal member of a scaffold upon which the platform rests and which may be
supported by ledgers.
Brace: A tie that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position with respect to another member.
Competent Person: Must attend a Competent Person training course and have training
verified, by the training department. Only a Competent Person will be allowed to supervise the
erection, modification, or disassembly of scaffolds.
Coupler: A device for locking together the component parts of a tubular metal scaffold. The
material used for the couplers shall be of a structural type, such as a drop-forged steel, malleable
iron, or structural grade aluminum.
Double pole scaffold: A scaffold supported from the base by a double row of uprights,
independent of support from the walls and constructed of uprights, ledgers, horizontal platforms
bearers, and diagonal bracing.
Handrail: A rail secured to uprights and erected along the exposed sides and ends of platforms.
Heavy duty scaffold: A scaffold designed and constructed to carry a working load not to exceed
75 pounds per square foot, distributed uniformly.
Ledger (stringer): A horizontal scaffold member which extends from post to post and which
supports the putlogs or bearers forming a tie between the posts.
Light duty scaffold: A scaffold designed and constructed to carry a working load not to exceed
25 pounds per square foot, distributed uniformly.
Maximum rated load: The total weight of all loads, including the working load, the weight of
the scaffold, and such other loads as may be reasonably anticipated.
Medium duty scaffold: A scaffold designed and constructed to carry a working load not to
exceed 50 pounds per square foot, distributed uniformly.
Midrail: A rail approximately midway between the guardrail and platform, secured to the
uprights erected along the exposed sides and ends of the platforms.
Professional Engineer: Must be used for highly unusual scaffold designs, for example, tube and
coupler scaffolds greater than 125 feet in height.

Qualified Person: A Competent Person or a Registered Professional Engineer. All scaffolds

will be designed by a Qualified Person.
Scaffold: Any temporary elevated platform and its supporting structure used for supporting
workers or materials, or both.
Scaffold Inspector: A Scaffold Inspector will be trained in scaffold inspection and tagging
requirements for scaffolds by a Competent Person.
Scaffold user: Anyone who may access a completed scaffold. Scaffold users will be trained by a
Competent Person in the recognition of hazards associated with scaffolds.
Toeboard: A barrier secured along the sides and ends of a platform to prevent objects from
falling off the platform.
Tube and coupler: An assembly consisting of tubing which serves as posts, bearers, and braces
and which ties scaffold and runners. It also consists of a base supporting the posts, and special
couplers which serve to connect the uprights and to join the various members.
Work load: The load imposed by workers, materials and equipment.

Attachment 4.18-2
Scaffold Inspection Checklist

This is a list of basic requirements for scaffold inspections. The following checklist applies to basic
scaffolds:
Working Levels and Planking
Gap between planks is less than 1 inch
Planks are tied together with #9 wire
Planks are cleated or extend at least 6 inches beyond support
Planks are not painted
Makeshift devices and/or ladders are not used to increase the height of the working level
Planks are not damaged
Wood planks are not placed near high heat sources above 120F
Easy access to working levels
Ladders
Ladder installed to prevent climbing on scaffold
Rest platforms and ladder breaks are required every 35 feet
Falling Objects
Toeboards are installed
Safety mesh installed from toeboard to midrail if personnel walk/work under scaffold or if material is
stacked over the height of the toeboard (unless barricaded)
Barricades erected to limit personnel passing under scaffold
Limited amount of material stored on scaffold
Proper material handling techniques are used to minimize falling object hazards
Personnel Fall Protection
Handrails and midrails installed
Handrails between 38 and 45 inches high
Safety harness and adequate tie-off points as required

Scaffold Stability
Scaffold has secure footing, base plates, and/or mud sills
Scaffold is tied to structure (vertically and horizontally) as required
Cross bracing is used as required
Maximum intended load and capacity not exceeded (scaffold must be designed to withstand 4 times
the maximum intended load)
Other Issues
Fire protection and other safety equipment is not blocked by the scaffold
Electrical hazards are identified and controlled and proper clearances are maintained
Overhead obstructions are identified and controlled
Scaffold is not over 125 feet high, unless designed by a Registered Professional Engineer (PE)
Dissimilar metals are not used (this prevents galvanic action)


Document Title: Short Service Employee Management

1.0 Purpose/Scope
The purpose of Short Service Employee (SSE) Management is to ensure that new or transferred BP employees,
contractors and subcontractors are identified, appropriately supervised, trained and managed in order to prevent injury
to themselves or others, property damage or environmental harm.
2.0 Definitions
Short service employee - an inexperienced worker; defined as anyone with less than six (6) months of continuous
employment with present employer, or less than six (6) months in the same or similar job type. Includes BP
employees, contractors and subcontractors working on BPs behalf. Excludes office workers and vendors/suppliers
that do not meet the contractor definition.

This process establishes the basic requirements for indoctrination and safe integration of new or transferred employees
into existing or start-up operations.

4.1 The Team Leader (drilling foreman, supervisor, crew lead, etc.) shall:
ensure that an on-site safety orientation is provided to the SSE by a knowledgeable, experienced employee
prior to SSEs initial work assignment.
assign a mentor to the SSE from among the experienced crew members that has proper operations
knowledge and skills and displays the appropriate safety leadership and work ethic
conduct an HSE performance review with the SSE after 3 months and 6 months, documenting progress to
date and areas in need of continued improvement, counseling SSE on areas for improvement (NOTE:
Contractors shall be evaluated by their own companys appropriate supervisor or foreman.)
accept responsibility for the safety of a SSE assigned to his crew or area through example setting and
observation skills.
ensure Job Safety Analyses (JSAs) are utilized as a training tool with the SSE.
provide daily coaching and informal feedback to the SSE about safe work practices.
4.2 The Mentor shall:
accept responsibility for the safety of an assigned SSE through example setting and observation skills.

teach and coach the SSE in his/her roles and responsibilities and safe work practices for all assigned duties;
review the known potential hazards for the work to be performed.
display a positive work ethic and lead HSE by example at all times.
review the purpose of and how to participate in the development of a JSA with the SSE.
observe SSE during each task he/she performs and provide adequate feedback by using the Safety
Observation process techniques
provide prior approval for any new task initiated by the SSE .
be knowledgeable of applicable BP and Contractor HSE policies, procedures, standards and expectations
participate in the performance review with the SSE after 3 months and 6 months.
4.3 The Short Service Employee (SSE) shall:
attend an on-site or area safety orientation upon arrival at their first field assignment and prior to
performing any work.
learn designated roles and responsibilities; adhere to all policies and procedures taught or shown to
him/her.
learn the location and application of all emergency response equipment (fire extinguishers, eye wash
stations, showers, emergency shutdowns, first aid kits, etc.).
actively participate in and review the JSA for any task they are directed to perform.
seek assistance and guidance from the mentor when uncertain about any part of the job or for a task never
he/she has never performed.
understand the obligation to stop work that he/she feels is unsafe or does not understand, or when
conditions have changed.
when required, wear a hardhat of a distinguishing color or marking at all times when working as an SSE.
understand and clarify any concerns during performance reviews.
5.0 Process
5.1 Identifying SSEs
Contractor shall notify BP of the intent to use one or more SSEson a job. The BP employee or designee shall
communicate the information to the appropriate Team Leader.
The Team Leader (drilling foreman, supervisor, crew lead, etc.) shall approve the proper identification of all
SSEsassigned to their location or area whether they are a BP employee, contractor or subcontractor worker.
5.2 Orientation
All SSE personnel must attend a location or area-specific HSE orientation prior to beginning work on location or in
the area. For BP SSE, the OUSBU Safety Standard, New and Transferred Employee Safety Orientation should be
utilized. For all SSE, applicable Contractor and BP HSE policies, procedures and standards shall be discussed,
including but not limited to:
Site or area specific Emergency Response Plans, including location of equipment/supplies
Contractor and applicable OUSBU Safety Standards
BPs Golden Rules of Safety
Job Safety Analysis purpose and process
Job Observation purpose and process
Worker responsibility to stop the job when appropriate
Incident and Near-Miss reporting

5.3 Mentoring SSEs
Each SSE shall be assigned a Mentor who shall be responsible for providing individual oversight and training. The
Mentor shall be knowledgeable of the appropriate BP and Contractor policies, procedures and standards. No new
work shall be assigned to or initiated by the SSE without prior approval from the Mentor.
Exceptions: Small worksites, one and two-person teams, and office work groups may adopt the mentor process as
needed to provide adequate guidance to the SSE while minimizing adverse impact to personnel assignments and
scheduling. Consideration may include, but not be limited to, assigning more than one person to perform the specific
duties of the Mentor, allowing the Team Leader to also act as the Mentor and condensed mentoring process upon
demonstration of skills and knowledge.
5.4 Visible Identification
Where hardhats are required to be worn, SSEs will wear a hardhat of a distinguishing color or marking, as designated
by local procedures and approved by local BP management. The distinguishing color or marking should not be in
conflict with BP or other companies working onsite. Upon graduation from the SSE status, the employee will wear a
hardhat of the appropriate color designated by local procedures and approved by local BP management.
5.5 Graduation from SSE Status
The Team Leader shall meet with the Mentor to discuss, document and approve the SSE's professional development
after three (3) and six (6) months of hands-on experience. Discussions can occur earlier, at managements discretion,
based upon the SSEs assignments and/or individual progress. Within the first six (6) months, the SSE must:
demonstrate a working knowledge of the applicable BP/Contractor safety policies and procedures.
demonstrate safe work practices and be receptive to constructive criticism for observed practices.
improve or correct unsafe practices in a timely manner.
apply accident prevention tools in a pro-active manner.
Exceptions:
The Team Leader and Mentor may agree upon an earlier graduation from SSE status provided the SSE
fully demonstrates all of the above criteria and has completed all required HSE training.
Failure to meet any of the above criteria will result in an extension of the SSE status (by BP approval) or a
discipline process according to BP or Contractor progressive discipline procedure, leading up to and possibly
including termination if warranted by observed unsafe performance.
Documentation shall be retained by the appropriate employer and per their retention requirements.

6.2 OUSBU Short Service Employee Presentation
6.3 HSE 16 Minimum Requirements for Contractors
6.4 BP getting HSE right Elements 1-4, 6, 11, 12, 13
6.5 OUSBU Progressive Discipline Procedure
6.6 OUSBU HSE Contractor Standard
6.7 Contractor, PU or local procedures/policies


Document Title: Tank and Vessel Cleaning Procedures
I. General
A. Operating supervisors are responsible the enforcement of this program and for the
safety of employees during tank entry/cleaning operations.
B. Consult the HSE Department prior to beginning all tank cleaning or disassembly
jobs.
C. The requirements of the Confined Space Entry, Blinding (isolation), Hot Work, and
Lockout/Tagout Programs must be followed for oil tank cleaning jobs that require
personnel to enter the tank.
II. Tank Preparation
A. Tanks scheduled for cleaning must be prepared so they are rendered as safe as
possible for personnel. This may include, but shall not be limited to:
1. Draining the contents of the tank to another tank or other acceptable location
2. Washing the tank with water
3. Purging the tank with an inert gas
NOTE: Special consideration must be given to tanks that are being purged with
an inert gas. Normal combustible gas indicators will not accurately measure
the combustible gas in a tank being purged with an inert gas, such as nitrogen.
Consult the HSE representative for the availability of specialized monitoring
equipment. Inert gases will also displace the oxygen content, making the
atmosphere very dangerous.
B. Liquids or gases shall not be removed from a tank unless they can be flushed or
vented to a safe location.
C. The tank shall be isolated from all other vessels or tanks by disconnecting
incoming/outgoing lines and/or blinding these same lines. This includes equalizer
lines.

III. Protective Equipment
A. All personnel must utilize and wear the proper protective equipment dictated by the
nature of the job and as required by the Confined Space Entry Permit and the Job
Hazard Analysis.
B. Required PPE or equipment may include:
1. Respiratory protective equipment
2. Eye and/or face protection
3. Full body coveralls
4. Hand protection
5. Foot protection
6. Hearing protection
7. Fire protection equipment
8. Combustible gas detectors, toxic gas detectors, and oxygen content and NORM
meters
9. Proper electrical equipment, such as: GFCIs, isolation transformers, etc.
10. Ventilation equipment
IV. Special PrecautionsPyrophoric Materials
A. Tanks must be considered to contain pyrophoric materials, such as iron sulfide,

unless proven otherwise. Pyrophoric materials are substances that will
spontaneously ignite when they contact air.
B. The preferred method of removing pyrophoric materials from a tank is by keeping

them in a water slurry state and pumping them out for safe disposal. Maintaining a
water blanket on pyrophoric materials will be necessary for the duration of the job.
Contact the environmental coordinator for proper disposal methods.
C. Pyrophoric material must be kept wet to prevent ignition. Each situation must be
evaluated individually; however, procedures for cleaning tanks containing
pyrophoric material may include:
1. Gas-Freeing Methods

(a) Blinding/isolating the tank from other equipment. Disconnected lines must
be sealed in a closed position immediately after opening to prevent air from
entering the tank.
(b) Any pyrophoric material must be wetted down immediately upon opening
the tank.
(c) Once the material is wet, purging the tank of any combustible gas may
begin. Natural ventilation may be used by opening the roof thief hatch and
the side manway. Use of an explosion proof air mover at the thief hatch
may speed the process.
(d) During the entire ventilation phase of the job, pyrophoric material must be
wetted down.
(e) When gas tests at the thief hatch indicate 10 percent or less LEL, high
pressure water may be introduced from the side manway or top hatch to
break up sediment, rust, scale, and other deposits.
(f) Interior surfaces of the tank shall not be allowed to dry until all scale and
other deposits have been removed.
2. Gas Testing Procedures
(a) Once gas tests indicate that combustible vapors inside the tank are below
10 percent LEL, the ventilation equipment and water spray shall be shut
down for 15 minutes, and the tests run again. The pyrophoric material
must be saturated before stopping the water spray so it will remain wet
during gas testing.
(b) All tank openings shall be tested. If the test results show above 10 percent
LEL, ventilation purging and flushing must be resumed.
(c) Respiratory protection, either positive pressure SCBA or air line unit, must
be used during gas testing if H2S levels are unknown or may reach 10 ppm
in the breathing zone.
3. Entry by anyone shall be allowed only after a Confined Space Entry Permit (See
Confined Space Entry Chapter in this Standard) has been properly issued. All
provisions of the permit must be strictly followed.

V. Tank Disassembly
A. Tanks may have to be disassembled for cleaning if manways are covered up and a
closed loop cleaning procedure cannot be done. Safety must be the primary
consideration in tank disassembly.
B. Personnel must wear the proper personal protective equipment, including respiratory
protection.
C. The tank must be vented/purged before disassembly may begin. Internal

combustible gas levels must be 10 percent LEL or below before work can start.
D. Pyrophoric material must be kept wet for the duration of the project.
E. Ignition sources must be controlled. If hot work must be performed, all provisions
of the hot work permit program must be strictly followed. Lubricated cold cutting is
the preferred method for cutting into the tank.
F. Any scaffolding used must be in compliance with company and government

standards.
VI. NORM Survey
A. Before any vessel is entered, a naturally occurring radioactive material (NORM)

survey must be completed to ensure the level of activity is below 2 millirems/hr as
measured by a calibrated Ludlum Model 3 or 3-97 meter, unless there are previous
results confirming that the tank is NORM-free. This shall be done after it has been
determined that the LEL is 10% or less, as Ludlum meters are not intrinsically safe.
The HSE representative must be consulted prior to entry to ensure the meter is
available when the test is to be performed. Contact the local HSE representative or
environmental coordinator for further information. The NORM survey shall be sent
to and retained by the local HSE contact.
B. Confined space atmospheres must be tested before entry is allowed. The atmosphere
must be tested for oxygen content, flammability (LEL), and any suspected toxic
contaminants such as hydrogen sulfide, NORM, etc.
VII. References
A. American Petroleum Institute; API 2015, Cleaning Petroleum Storage Tanks.


Document Title: Transportation of Hazardous Materials
I. General
A. Operating supervisors are responsible for ensuring that all company and
governmental regulations are followed when transporting hazardous materials.
B. The material in this section only provides a brief overview of the requirements
regarding the transportation of hazardous materials. It must be used in conjunction
with Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations.
II. Definition of Hazardous Materials
A. A hazardous material is any substance determined by the Secretary of Transportation

to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety and property when
transported in commerce. The Department of Transportation (DOT) has published a
list of substances designated as being hazardous. Contact the location HSE
representative for further clarification.
B. Classes of hazardous materials include the following:
Class Division Characteristics of Material
1.1 Explosive with mass explosion hazard
1.2 Explosive with only projection hazard
1.3 Explosive with only fire hazard
1.4 Explosive with minor explosion hazard
1.5 Very insensitive explosive
1.6 Extremely insensitive articles
2.1 Flammable gases
2.2 Nonflammable gases
2.3 Poison gases

3 Flammable liquids with flash point =< 141 F
COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID Combustible liquids with flash point =>100 F, and

(Domestic transportation only) <200 F
4.1 Wetted explosives, self-reactive materials,

combustible solids
4.2 Spontaneously combustible materials
4.3 Dangerous-when-wet materials
5.1 Oxidizers
5.2 Organic peroxides
6.1 Poisonous liquids and solids
6.2. Infectious substances
7 Radioactive materials
8 Corrosive liquids and solids
9 Miscellaneous hazardous materials
ORM-D (Domestic transportation only)

Consumer commodities
C. Hazardous substances are assigned reportable quantity (RQ) limits. The RQ limit is
the amount of that substance which if released requires the notification of federal
agencies. The hazardous substance classification does not apply to petroleum
products that are in the process of being used as lubricants or fuels. For example, the
gasoline in a vehicles fuel tank would not fall under these requirements.
D. A hazardous waste is any material that is subject to the hazardous waste manifest
requirements of the EPA. Consult the environmental coordinator to verify if a
material is to be classified as a hazardous waste.

III. Shipment of Hazardous Materials
A. Regulated materials must be packed to prevent spillage, leaks, or escape of product

into the environment.
B. Items for shipment must be properly identified, marked, and labeled in such a
manner that any person handling these materials will be readily aware of the nature
of the contents.
C. Specific packaging requirements for each class of hazardous materials must be

adhered to.
D. Placarding requirements include:
1. All four sides of a motor vehicle, rail car, or freight container.
2. The proper name of the material and the United Nations (UN) number.
3. Being correct and in place before the material is transported.
4. Shippers are responsible for ensuring placards are correct and in the proper
place.
NOTE: No placarding is needed on a motor vehicle or freight container

transported by highway only, if it contains less than or equal to 119 gallons or
1,000 pounds (aggregate gross weight) of a hazardous material and/or ORM-
classed materials.
E. Shipping papers are required:
1. They must be properly filled out according to the DOT Hazardous Material
Regulations.
2. Contain and identify a 24-hour emergency response number,
3. Emergency response information regarding the hazardous material must also

accompany the shipment.
F. The shipper is responsible for preparing shipping papers. Generic shipping papers
can meet these requirements.
G. The requirements for shipping papers does not apply to ORM- D materials unless
they are a hazardous waste or a hazardous substance.
H. Any tank, barrel/drum, cylinder, or other packaging not permanently attached to a

motor vehicle which contains any flammable liquid, compressed gas, corrosive

material, poisonous material, or radioactive material must be secured against

movement within the vehicle on which it is being transported.
I. Compressed gas cylinders must be secured to prevent movement during

transportation to prevent damage to the cylinders. (For example, wired cylinders,
cylinder rack, cylinder boxes, etc.)
J. Sample cylinders filled with hazardous materials are subject to rules for compressed
gas cylinders as stated in I. above, and must be transported in accordance with these
procedures or carried in an appropriate case/container.
K. No smoking is allowed when loading or unloading any explosive, flammable liquid,

flammable solid, or flammable compressed gas.
L. Motor vehicles operated by private carriers, such as BP, must be specially marked on
the door if the vehicle is rated at over 10,000 lbs GVWR. Markings must display
the name of the carrier and the city in which the carrier maintains its principal office.
They must be displayed on both sides of the vehicle and be readily legible in
daylight at 50 feet.
M. Vehicles transporting a properly marked portable (not secured to vehicle) tanks

containing less than or equal to 119 gallons or 1,000 pounds of hazardous material
do not have to be placarded. However, the portable tank must be marked with the
proper shipping name of the contents on two opposing sides, along with the
hazardous materials identification number specified for that material in 49 CFR
172.1 01.
N. If a cargo tank (a tank secured to the inside of the pickups bed) containing over 119
gallons or 1000 lbs of hazardous materials other than fuel for the vehicle is being
transported, the vehicle must be placarded.
O. State and federal driver qualification requirements must be met by employees who
transport hazardous materials. However, these requirements do not apply to drivers
of vehicles under 10,000 lbs GVWR or vehicles that are not required to be
placarded.
P. Commercial Drivers License Requirements
NOTE: state requirements may vary - check your local requirements.
1. A single vehicle with a gross vehicle rating (GVWR) of more than 26,000
pounds.
2. A trailer with a GVWR of more than 10,000 pounds if the gross combination
weight rating is more than 26,000 pounds.

3. A vehicle designed to transport more than 16 persons (including the driver).
4. Any size vehicle which requires hazardous material placards. Any vehicle that
transports greater than 119 gallons of hazardous material.
5. A simple vehicle weighing less than 26,001 pounds (GVWR) but more than
10,000 pounds (GVWR) if used commercially or to transport persons for hire.
IV. References
A. Department of Transportation; 49 CFR various sections including but not limited to

Parts 100-179, 391-397.


Document Title: Visitors Safety Program
I. General
A. The safety of visitors to field, or plant facilities is the responsibility of the operating
supervisor of that location.
The operating supervisor must assure that a comprehensive Visitor Safety Program
is in place for the areas for which he/she is responsible.
B. Visitors are defined as those that who do not normally report to that specific work
location. They may include school tours, vendors, or BP employees from other
locations.
C. All facilities must develop methods for accounting for visitors. This may be a sign-
in roster, badge system, or access card system. All visitors are to be accounted for
before entering work locations.
D. All visitors must receive a brief safety orientation, covering the following as a
minimum:
1. Smoking Policy
2. Facility alarms and emergency/evacuation procedures
3. Hazardous locations and substances that may be encountered
4. Personal protective equipment requirements
5. Reporting of injuries/accidents
E. Visitors must not tour work locations unescorted unless prior approval has been
obtained from local operations management.
F. Visitors to facilities covered under the OSHA Process Safety Management Standard
29CFR 1910.119 will be provided the Process Safety Overview for the facility.

II. Personal Protective Equipment
A. Visitors must wear personal protective equipment such as hard hats, safety glasses,
hearing protection, proper footwear, etc. as required by the local PPE Hazard
Assessment See the Personal Protective Equipment chapter of this Standard.
B. The site will provide PPE to visitors as needed.
III. References
A. Facility PPE Hazard Assessment, 29CFR 1910,119.
B. gHSEr Element # 1, Leadership and Accountability.
C. gHSEr Element # 3, People, Training, and Behaviors.

Page 1 of 34
Document Type: Health & Safety Guidance

Document Title: Welding Safety Practice
Authority: H&S Program Manager Custodian: NAG Industrial Hygiene
Specialist
Issue Date: July 1, 2006 Scope of Application: NAG Onshore US
Revision Date: New Control Tier: Tier 2
Next Review Date: July 1, 2008
1.0 Purpose/Scope
Welding, burning, brazing, and related operations must be conducted in accordance with BP U.S. North America Gas
(NAG) Onshore policies and procedures and Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA) standards 29CFR
1910 Subpart Q and 29CFR 1926, Subpart J, as is appropriate.
This safety standard is intended as a guide to safe practices in welding, burning, brazing, and related operations. The
precautions and protective measures outlined are recommended minimum requirements. Welders should exercise
judgment in applying these precautionary measurers in such matters as equipment operation, personal protective
equipment, ventilation, and hazardous chemicals and physical agents. Additional protective measures may be required in
certain instances, particularly those involving confined spaces and excavation and trenching operations. The
performance of these operations or any hot work may be performed only after complying with BP U.S. NAG, Control of
Work requirements.
Information on processes not covered by this safety standard or assistance in applying the recommended practices listed
herein can be obtained from the BP supervisor or H&S Coordinator.
All welding processes have inherent potential health and safety hazards. The hazards vary, depending on the type of
welding and the control measures being employed.
The principal hazards are to the eyes, skin and respiratory tract from ultraviolet radiation (UV), molten metal, and electric
arc. Adverse health effects also are common from breathing metal fumes and gases. The hazard potential from the metal
fumes generated by a welding operation depends on the types of metals being used; the concentration of metals in the
welders breathing zone and the duration of exposure.
Burning or welding on galvanized surfaces generates a zinc metal fume. This can cause a condition known as metal
fume fever that promotes symptoms similar to the flu, including a metallic taste in the mouth, dryness in the nose and
throat, muscle and joint pain, fever, chills, and nausea. These symptoms generally disappear within 24 hours.
Most welding is performed using coated rods or electrodes whose coatings and cores contain metal oxides, hydroxides,
carbonates, fluorides, and organic materials. Other materials encountered in welding and cutting processes may contain
cadmium, chromium, nickel or lead, all of which are considered toxic to humans.
The electric arc generates UV radiation. Skin exposure to UV radiation can cause a severe burn similar to sunburn. UV
radiation can damage the eyes, causing a condition known as welders flash or arc eye. Flash burns are painful, and
repeated exposure to UV radiation may result in permanent eye damage.
Tables 1 and 2 briefly describe the hazards inherent in various welding processes. The precautions and procedures
necessary to minimize those hazards are covered in the following paragraphs.
2.0 Definitions
Flammable liquids or vapor: Liquid or vapor having a flash point below 100 F (37.8 C).
Combustible liquid or vapor: Liquid or vapor having a flash point at or above 100 F (37.8 C).
Control Tier: 2 Issue Date: July 1, 2006

Page 2 of 34
Combustible materials: Substances that are capable of igniting and burning and will freely support combustion
once ignited. Wood and paper are examples of such materials.
Confined Spaces: Includes most work, whether indoors or outdoors, inside of tanks, drums, towers, or other vessels, as
well as, small rooms, excavations, and manholes. Refer to the BP U.S. NAG, Confined Space Entry Program and Hot
Work Section within the CoW Practice.
Hot Work: Is any work that will generate sufficient heat to ignite combustible and/or flammable materials.
MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheet
Must: Must is used to indicate practices or provisions that are mandatory.
Open Areas: Include most outside work and well-ventilated large rooms or buildings.
Should: Should is used to indicate practices or provisions that are not mandatory.
Welder: Welder or welding operator designates any operator of electric or fuel gas cutting or welding equipment of
similar or related processes.

Welding, burning, brazing or related operations must not be permitted in the following:
In areas not authorized by management
In sprinkled building while such protection is impaired
In areas near the storage of large quantities of exposed readily ignitable materials such as bulk sulfur, baled
paper, or cotton
In the presence of:
Explosive atmospheres (mixtures of flammable gas vapors, liquids, or dusts with air)
Explosive atmospheres that may develop inside unclean or improperly prepared tanks or equipment which
have previously contained such materials
Explosive atmospheres that may develop in areas with accumulation of combustible dust
4.1 Supervisor/Management
Supervisors/management must:
Understand their responsibilities for assuring safety in welding and cutting operations,
Designate approved welding areas and establish safe welding and cutting procedures,
Assure that all welding, burning, brazing and related operations are authorized and permitted prior to
starting work, regardless of who is performing the operation,
Determine if flammable and/or combustible materials are or may be present in the work area and take
one or more of the following steps to prevent exposure to ignition:
o Move the work a safe distance away from the combustible materials or hazardous area,
o Move the combustible materials a safe distance from the work area and or shielded if unable to be
moved,
o Schedule work activities such that combustible materials are not exposed during the work
operations.

Page 3 of 34
Assure that welders are properly trained and qualified to perform the planned work activities,
Assure that welders are trained in the safe operation of the equipment and processes used,
Assure that hazards, such as fumes, gases, electric shock, heat radiation and noise are communicated,
Assure that the precautionary information shown in Figures 1 and 2, or equivalent, for arc
welding/cutting and oxyfuel welding/cutting and related processes and equipment, is placed on
materials and equipment used in these processes. The information must be readily visible in the form of
a label, tag, or other printed form.
Assure that the precautionary information shown in Figures 3, or its equivalent, for brazing, cutting,
heating or welding materials containing cadmium as a designated constituent, is placed on any
applicable boxes, containers or coils of wire not having such warning labels. The information must be
readily visible in the form of a label, tag, or other printed form.
Assure that the precautionary information shown in Figures 4, or its equivalent, for brazing and gas
welding fluxes containing fluorine compounds, is placed on any applicable boxes or containers not
having such warning labels. The information must be readily visible in the form of a label, tag, or other
printed form.
Assure that safety precautions and procedures are communicated and understood,
Assure that approved welding/cutting equipment and personnel protective devices are used,
Assure that qualified fire watchers and proper fire protection equipment are on-site.
4.2 Welders
Welders must:
Understand their responsibilities for assuring safety in welding and cutting operations,
Understand the hazards of the task being performed and the procedures to follow to control the
hazardous conditions,
Use all equipment and tools in a safe manner at all times,
Not start any work until authorized by the BP supervisor or worksite representative and all safety
precautions have been met,
Discontinue work immediately if conditions change from the work approval conditions,
Shield, guard or in some manner identify where hot materials remain from welding/cutting and may be
unknowingly contacted by others,
Stop any job that is believed to be unsafe.
5.1 Health and Safety Problems in Burning and Welding

The principle that is common to all welding, burning, soldering, brazing, metalizing, and similar operations is
the heating of metals to cause separation or joining. In these processes, whether performed by gas flame or
electric arc, physical changes occur in the state of the metal, chemical changes occur in the air, and both
chemical and physical changes occur in fluxes, rod coatings, and surface coatings.
Most harmful metals are solids; therefore, they cannot readily enter the body to cause illness except by
inhalation. They may cause skin irritation (dermatitis) by being in external contact with the skin, and as
solutions of soluble salts, they can be ingested by mouth (accidental poisoning). The most important way in
which they can enter the body, by the lungs, does not occur unless the metals are finely divided (powders or

Page 4 of 34
dusts), or unless they are vaporized by heat and condensed back to fumes. In general, metal fumes are much
smaller particles than metal dusts and are, therefore, more easily inhaled and deposited in the lungs. Since
welding and burning operations create metal fumes, they become the most important method of changing solid
metals in a physical state in which they can be inhaled.
The electric arc, in passing through air, breaks down or changes certain components to form several harmful
gases. Ozone is produced from oxygen. Nitrogen is combined with oxygen to form oxides of nitrogen. Electric
arcs also produce radiant energy in the form of UV which, too, forms ozone and can cause painful burns of the
skin and eyes. Fluxes may contain fluorides, which are irritating compounds, and rod coatings may contain
copper or other metals. Resin cores may contain materials which, when heated, give off irritating vapors.
Many times hot work is performed on painted or coated metal surfaces. These materials will vaporize and may
be breathed by the welder. Cracks, patches, joints, and seams may not be completely clean and free from
residual materials that ignite or are released by heat.
5.2 Harmful Materials / Metals

Antimony, arsenic, barium, beryllium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, manganese, mercury, nickel,
ozone, selenium, silver, and vanadium are materials found in consumables, base metals, coatings, etc. that may
be encountered during welding or cutting operations and are known to be harmful at very low concentrations.
These materials have very low allowable exposure limits and require special attention to prevent overexposure
when conducting welding and cutting operations when they are present. Unless breathing zone sampling has
established that exposures are below allowable limits, local exhaust mechanical ventilation or respiratory
protection must be used to protect welders, helpers and adjacent personnel. Refer to the MSDS provided by the
manufacturer to identify these or other harmful materials and the precautionary measured required to prevent
overexposures. Contact the BP Regional Industrial Hygiene (IH) Team, in Houston, for guidance when these or
other harmful materials are encountered.
Cadmium is a naturally occurring metallic element that is present everywhere in the environment. Industrial
applications for cadmium were first developed in the late 19th and early 20th century. Early significant
industrial use of cadmium was in cadmium coatings for the corrosion protection of steel. Characteristics of
cadmium are its resistance to corrosion, low melting-point, good brazability and solderability, good plateability
and galvanic compatibility making it a preferred coating for steel structures, equipment and parts. Some fume
and dust from welding processes (including brazing, soldering, and thermal spraying) may contain cadmium or
cadmium oxide compounds. The specific form and concentration of cadmium present in the fume and dust is
dependant on the composition of the filler metals, metal coatings, atmosphere, flux, and the welding process.
Fumes are poisonous and overexposure may cause death. Acute (Short Term) effects of overexposure to
cadmium are similar, but much more severe, to the effects produced by fume and dust from other metals.
Inhalation exposure to high concentrations of fume may cause symptoms such as nausea, headaches, dizziness,
nervousness, lung complications and death. Chronic (Long Term) effects of exposure to cadmium oxide fume
and dust has caused severe chronic effects, kidney failure, and may with longer exposure and/or higher
concentrations, lead to severe respiratory disease and death. Inhalation of cadmium by smokers may accelerate
the development of respiratory diseases. There is evidence that long term exposure to cadmium may cause lung
cancer. OSHA has defined cadmium as carcinogenic. Conclusions from the International Agency for Research
on Cancer (IARC) indicate that there is sufficient evidence in humans to support that cadmium and cadmium
compounds are carcinogenic. To protect against overexposure, do not breathe fumes, gases or dusts produced
from welding or cutting processes that contain cadmium or cadmium compounds. Comply with OSHA
regulations for cadmium. Identify the composition of all base metals, coatings, and consumables and substitute
non-cadmium containing materials wherever possible. Read and follow the MSDSs for cadmium containing
products. Use enough ventilation, mechanically powered local exhaust at the arc, or both, to keep fumes, gases
and dust from the welders breathing zone and the general area. If ventilation is questionable, use air sampling
to determine the need for corrective measures air supplied respirators may be required. Avoid ingestion. Do
not eat or smoke in areas containing cadmium fume or dust. Keep exposure as low as possible.
The heating, soldering, brazing, or grinding of cadmium-containing alloys or cadmium-plated materials is so
hazardous that the use of this material has been restricted. Since cadmium-plated materials are often mistaken
for galvanized metals or zinc plating, it is important to positively rule out the possibility of cadmium-plated

Page 5 of 34
materials before performing any of the above operations. If there is any doubt, perform the following on-the
spot tests:
Using a welding rod, very gently heat a small spot of metal about the size of a nickel. Be sure not to burn
off the metal. After such gentle heating, cadmium will form a gold-yellow film. In contrast, zinc will turn
a smoky-gray color.
Note: Limit this test to a few seconds to prevent overexposure to cadmium fumes.
Chromium is a metal that exists in several different forms: divalent, trivalent, and hexavalent. Hexavalent
chromium (Cr(VI)) compounds are a group of chemical substances that contain the metallic element chromium
in its positive-6 valence (hexavalent) state. Cr(VI) has many uses. It is used as a pigment in paints, inks, and
plastics; as an anti-corrosion agent in protective coatings; in chrome plating; and the production of stainless
steel. Occupational exposures to Cr(VI) may occur from several sources, but three jobs in particular involve
frequent and/or heavy chromium exposure. These jobs are spraying anti-corrosion coatings, chrome plating and
welding and cutting stainless steel. In welding or cutting, the intense heat of the arc or flame vaporizes the base
metal, electrode coating or metals that are coated with a chromium material. This vaporized metal condenses
into tiny particles called fumes. Welding or cutting on chromium containing materials without adequate control
measures can lead to exposure at least several times above the Occupational Safety and Health Administrations
(OSHA) permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 5 micro grams/ cubic meter (5 g/m3) of air. To protect against
overexposure, do not breathe fumes, gases or dusts produced from welding or cutting processes that contain
chromium or chromium compounds. Identify the composition of all base metals, coatings, and consumables
and substitute non-chromium containing materials wherever possible. Read and follow the MSDSs for
chromium containing products. Of the different forms of chromium only hexavalent chromium Cr(VI) is
recognized as a human carcinogen, which causes lung cancer among other illnesses. Evaluations by state and
federal agencies indicate that the risk of lung cancer to exposed workers is extremely high. The National
Institute of Occupational Health (NIOSH) considers all Cr(VI) compounds to be potential occupational
carcinogens. Other adverse health effects associated with Cr(VI) exposure include dermal irritation, skin
ulceration, allergic contact dermatitis, occupational asthma, nasal irritation and ulceration, perforated nasal
septa, rhinitis, nosebleed, respiratory irritation, nasal cancer, sinus cancer, eye irritation and damage, perforated
eardrums, kidney damage, liver damage, pulmonary congestion and edema, epigastric pain, and erosion and
discoloration of the teeth. Cr(VI) enters the body in two ways: by being inhaled or ingested. Chromium can be
inhaled when chromium dust, mist, or fumes are in the air. Chromium dust can also get on cigarettes and be
inhaled with the tobacco smoke. Particles of chromium can be ingested if the dust gets on hands, clothing,
beard, or in food or beverages. Do not eat or smoke in areas containing chromium fume or dust and use good
hygiene practices to reduce ingestion exposures. Keep inhalation and ingestion exposures as low as possible.
The two best methods to prevent inhaling or ingesting chromium-containing particles are substituting
chromium-free materials and using engineering and work practice controls. If substitution is not possible,
engineering and work practice controls such as local exhaust ventilation must be implemented. Mechanically
powered local exhaust should be placed at the point where chromium is released into the air and exhausted
away from the general work area or nearby workers. If possible, the entire process should be contained within
an exhaust ventilation hood. Using local exhaust is far better than relying on dilution of chromium-
contaminated air by natural ventilation through open windows and doors, or general ventilation with fresh air
brought in through a duct. With the dilution approach, overexposure can still occur at the point of chromium
release into the air, or if the dilution air does not mix well with the room air. However, it may be infeasible to
control Cr(VI) exposure with engineering and work practice controls during certain work operations, such as
maintenance and repair activities. In these cases, respiratory protection must be provided. In other cases, some
engineering and work practice controls may be feasible, but these controls may not be capable of lowering
employee exposures to or below the PEL. For example, in certain welding operations such as welding stainless
steel in confined spaces, the PEL cannot always be achieved with feasible engineering and work practice
controls. In these cases, the employer must implement engineering and work practice controls where such
controls are feasible to reduce exposures, and supplement the engineering and work practices controls with
respiratory protection to achieve the PEL.

Page 6 of 34
Due to the risk of illness from exposure to Cr(VI) the Occupational Safe and Health Administration
(OSHA) has published 29 CFR 1910.1026, 1915.1026 and 1926.1126 Chromium (VI), effective May 30,
2006, to provide safeguards for occupational exposure to Cr(VI). Refer to the appropriate industry
standard and follow specific requirements regarding occupational exposure to Cr(VI).
Lead has been used for many years in industrial and commercial applications. Lead is commonly added to
industrial paints because of its characteristic to resist corrosion. Industries with particularly high potential
exposures include: construction work involving heating, welding, cutting, brazing, grinding, blasting,
chipping, etc., on lead paint surfaces or materials containing lead. Lead can be absorbed into the body by
inhalation (breathing) and ingestion (eating). When lead is scattered in the air as a dust, fume, or mist it can
be inhaled and absorbed through the lungs and upper respiratory tract. Inhalation of airborne lead is
generally the most important source of occupational lead absorption. Lead can also be absorb through the
digestive system if it gets into the mouth and is swallowed. Lead is a very toxic element, causing a variety
of effects at low dose levels. Brain damage, kidney damage, and gastrointestinal distress are seen from
acute (short-term) exposure to high levels of exposure. Chronic (long-term) exposure to lead in humans
results in effects on the blood, central nervous system (CNS), blood pressure, kidneys, and Vitamin D
metabolism. Human studies are inconclusive regarding lead exposure and cancer. To protect against
overexposure, do not breathe or ingest dusts, fumes or gases produced from, welding or cutting processes
involving lead or lead containing materials. Consult the BP U.S. NAG, Lead Safety Practice and Lead
Operations and Maintenance Manual for specific procedures and requirements regarding operations
involving lead and lead containing materials.
Fumes and gases from fluorine compounds can cause burns to skin and eyes on contact. In confined spaces,
welding or cutting operations involving fluxes, coatings, or other materials containing fluorine compounds must
use local exhaust mechanical ventilation or respiratory protection. In open spaces, the need for local exhaust
ventilation or respiratory protection will depend on individual conditions.
Fumes containing zinc and copper compounds may cause symptoms of dizziness, fever, or nausea, sometimes
called metal fume fever. In confined spaces, welding or cutting operations involving consumables, base
metals, or coatings containing zinc or copper must use local exhaust mechanical ventilation or respiratory
protection. In open spaces, the need for local exhaust ventilation or respiratory protection will depend on
individual conditions.
Among the more common metals, the ones listed in Table 4 are considered potentially injurious.
Gas-shielded arc cutting, plasma cutting, or oxygen cutting using either a chemical or iron powder must be
performed using local exhaust mechanical ventilation or other protective means unless breathing zone air
sample results indicate that materials liberated during the processes are below allowable limits.
Welding, cutting or disturbing asbestos or asbestos containing materials is prohibited. Contact the H&S
Coordinator for assistance if the composition or contents of materials are not known.
Cleaning compounds used prior to welding or cutting operations must be used according to manufacturers
instructions.
Cleaning or degreasing operations involving chlorinated hydrocarbons must be positioned such that vapors will
not reach or be drawn into areas with welding or cutting operations where exposed arc, flame or molten metal
are/or maybe present. Vapors must also be kept from areas penetrated by the ultraviolet radiation of arc
welding. The production of highly toxic phosgene gas may occur when vapors enter areas of welding
operations.
Precautions must be taken to prevent exposure to toxic preservative coatings. Preservative coatings must
be removed a sufficient distance from the area to be heated to ensure that the temperature of the unstripped
metal will not be appreciably raised. Operations involving such coatings must be evaluated for the need to
use respiratory protection. The selection and use of respiratory protection must be in accordance with the
BP U.S. NAG, Respiratory Protection Program.

Page 7 of 34
5.3 Planning Hot Work Welding

In planning or carrying out hot work, certain factors should be considered besides the obviously important hot
work permit and gas test. Those factors include:
The base metal and its health effects
The welding or burning process to be used, and its special health problems, if any
The location of the work: is the work to be done in the open or in a confined space?
Ventilation required: is special ventilation equipment needed?
Position of the work: is the work overhead or below? Can it be positioned to allow fumes to be carried
away without entering the welders breathing zone?
Presence of other employees near the job: is eye protection needed against UV? Are other workers in the
path of the welding fumes?
Cleanliness of the metal surface: are harmful or flammable materials present beneath patches or in seams?
Respiratory protection: are fume respirators adequate, or are air-supplied respirators needed?
5.4 General Precautions

Written rules and instructions covering the safe operation of equipment must be made available to the
welder and must be strictly followed.
Equipment must be maintained and operated in accordance with the manufactures instructions,
provided the instructions are consistent with American Welding Society recommendations per
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z49.1:2005 and /or regulatory guidelines.
All welding and cutting equipment must be inspected at the start of each shift, and/or prior to each use
ensure it is in safe operating condition. Unreliable or unsafe equipment must be removed from service
immediately and repaired or replaced.
Prior to doing any welding or burning, except in areas approved for routine hot work, be certain the
necessary hot work permit has been issued. Contact the person-in-charge or BP supervisor to obtain hot
work approval and the necessary permits.
No welding or cutting must occur unless the atmosphere is nonflammable and unless combustible materials
are relocated or protected from heat, sparks, slag or other ignition sources.
No cutting or welding must occur until the work area is inspected for and precautions taken to close all
cracks and opening in floors, walls, roofs, doorways or windows that might allow sparks and molten metal
to contact combustible materials,
Combustible walls, partitions, ceilings, or roofs must be protected by shields or guards to prevent ignition,
Particular attention must be paid to welding on a metal wall, partition, ceiling, or roof to prevent ignition of
combustibles on the other side of the wall, etc., due to conduction or radiation. Where combustibles are not
relocated, a fire watch must be positioned on the opposite side from the work area,
Welding is prohibited on a metal partition, wall, ceiling, or roof having a combustible covering
Cutting or welding is prohibited on pipes or other metal in contact with combustible material likely to
cause ignition by conduction,
Ducts and conveyor systems that might carry sparks must be protected or shut down,
If practical, welding or cutting operations must be moved to a designated safe location,
Welding/cutting machinery and equipment must be located so that it does not cause hazards to personnel.

Page 8 of 34
Keep passageways, ladders, and stairs clear of hoses and cables.

Good housekeeping must be maintained.
Signs must be posted near welding areas to warn of the need for eye or other applicable personal
protection.
Workers or others in adjacent work areas must be protected from radiant energy and spatter of welding or
cutting by the use of eye and face protection and protective clothing or by the use of non-combustible or
flame resistant protective screens or shields.
Protective screens or shields should permit air circulation at floor level and above the screen.
Welding stations or booths must be separated by non-combustible shields or screens.
High noise levels, commonly produced by welding, cutting, grinding and chipping operations, must be
controlled at the source when possible. When control measures are unable to reduce exposures to
acceptable levels, hearing protection such as ear muffs or ear plugs must be used.
Do not cut or weld in a hazardous area without obtaining an approved hot work permit.
Butane lighters must not be allowed on the person of the welder or helper.
Welding or cutting on any container, barrel, tank, piping, or other system must not be started until the
container has been prepared for hot work, declared safe by a qualified person and the proper work permits
are obtained.
Remove all containers that have held flammable liquids from open flame areas.
Welding and cutting are not permitted in areas where flammable paints or other flammable liquids are
being stored or used.
Precautions must be taken to prevent ignition of highly flammable hardened preservative coatings.
When coatings are determined to be highly flammable, they must be stripped from the area to be
heated to prevent ignition.
Combustible floors must be protected from flame, spark or molten metal by means of wetting, damp sand,
sheet metal or equivalent. Precautions must be taken to protect against electric shock when floors are wet.
Ensure that suitable fire-extinguishing equipment or materials are in working order and readily available in
the work area.
Sprinkler system protection must remain in service during welding or cutting operations. Temporary
shielding of automatic sprinklers heads with noncombustible sheet material or damp cloth guards must be
permitted where heat from welding or cutting operations could cause activation.
First aid equipment must be available for use at all times,
Fire watches must be posted at welding and cutting operations per guidelines provided in the BP Onshore
U.S. BU Safe Practices Manual, Section 4, Chapter 10 Hot Work, Section 5.3 Fire Watch.
Work in confined spaces must not begin until proper precautions and work authorizations are completed
per the guidelines provided by the BP Onshore U.S. BU Confined Space Entry Program. See the BP
Onshore US BU Safe Practices Manual, Section 3, Chapter 2 Confined Space Entry Program for details
Tables 5 thru 11 provide recommended minimum precautionary measures to be followed in performing the
types of hot work listed. If, in the opinion of the person-in-charge, BP supervisor, or H&S Coordinator,
additional protection is required for a particular welding or burning job, such added protective measures
should be used.

Page 9 of 34
5.5 Eye and Face Protection

When cutting or welding, wear approved eye and face protection with suitable filter lenses. Eye and
face protection must comply with ANSI Z87.1. Guidance for filter lens shading selection is provided
at 29CFR 1910.252(b)(2)(ii)(H) and American Welding Society (AWS) F2.2, Lens Shade Selector.
See Table I, Guide for Lens Shade Selection for assistance in lens selection.
Select goggles with tempered lenses shaded in accordance with Table 1 or darker to protect eyes from
injury and to provide good visibility of the work.
Approved burning goggles must have safety lens on both sides of the filter lens.
Welding helmets equipped with auto-darkening filter lens are recommended. Welders repeatedly use the
neck muscles to flip the welding helmet up or snap it down are at risk for developing a painful and
potentially permanent neck injury. The force required to flip the helmet can strain the neck muscles and
compress the vertebrae in the upper spine. Over a period of time a musculoskeletal injury may develop.
This type of injury may be avoided simply by using the hand to raise and lower the helmet or by using an
auto-darkening filter lens. Automatic helmets reduce the potential for neck injury while increasing the
accuracy of electrode or wire placement.
Welding helmets are not intended to protect against slag chips, grinding fragments, wire wheel
bristles, or similar hazards. Spectacles with side shields or safety goggles worn in combination with
face shields must be worn to protect against these hazards.
For arc welding and arc cutting with open arcs, helmets or hand shields with filter lenses and cover
lenses must be used by the operator and personnel viewing the arc. Arc goggles, protective spectacles
with side shields, or other approved eye protection must also be used.
For oxyfuel gas welding and cutting and submerged arc welding, goggles or other approved eye
protection with side shields must be worn.
For resistance welding and brazing, spectacles, goggles, or face shields suitable for the particular job
must be worn to protect eyes and faces.
Processes, such as micro plasma arc that may not present exposure to radiation hazards may produce
spatter exposures. For this reason the use of eye protection must be required during any welding,
cutting, brazing or soldering operation.
Outer cover lenses must be used to protect filter lens from spatter, pitting or scratching. They must be
of clear glass or self extinguishing plastic and are not required to be impact resistant.
Welders helmets with the lift front filter lenses feature must have a fixed impact resistant safety lens
or plate on the inside of the frame nearest to the eyes to protect the welder against flying materials
when the front is raised.
Filter lenses must be marked with the manufacture identification and shade number.
Helmets, handshields and goggles must be well maintained and cleaned before being transferred from
one person to another.
5.6 Ventilation
Ventilation must be provided to all welding, cutting, brazing and related operations such that exposure
levels, to hazardous concentrations of airborne contaminates, are maintained below the allowable limits
specified.
Many factors and conditions determine adequate ventilation. The recommended method is to sample for
the composition and quantity of fumes and gases present in breathing zone of personnel. For information
on ventilation methods and techniques and air sampling contact the Regional IH Team.

Page 10 of 34
Welders and cutters must take precautions to prevent breathing fumes directly. This may be done by the
positioning of the work or use of ventilation the captures or directs the fumes away from the face. Tests
have shown that directing air flow across the face is more effective than air flow from behind.
The following are ventilation requirements.
o Natural ventilation is acceptable for welding, cutting and other related operations where
precautions have been taken to keep fumes from the welders breathing zone and air sampling
shows that exposures levels are below allowable exposure limits.
o Where adequate ventilation is not practical or possible respiratory protective equipment must be
used
o Ensure that contaminated air exhausted from a working space is discharged into open air or
otherwise clear of the source of intake air.
o Do not use oxygen, or any other gas or mixture of gases, for ventilation, comfort cooling,
blowing dust from clothing, or for cleaning a work area.
o Only air may be used for ventilation.
o Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to prevent the accumulation of gases when
cutting torches are used.
Ventilation equipment consists of the following types:
o Air siphons (air movers)
o Exhaust blower (copious air mover)
Remember: When using blowers or siphons to exhaust fumes keep the exhaust inlet as close as possible to the
work.
Air siphons use large amounts of compressed air. Keep the following points in mind:
o Keep connecting air hoses as short as possible.
o Do not attempt to operate more than one siphon off a single air hose or outlet.
o If used to exhaust a vessel, be sure to seal the bell of the inlet side around the manhole or vessel
opening.
o Inspect blower safety screens daily. Repair or replace if broken. The use of a blower hinge is
also recommended.
5.7 Respiratory Protection

As a general rule when welding, a suitable fume respirator should be worn unless:
The work is performed in a welding shop having a local ventilation system.
The work is conducted in the open and the fumes will be drawn away from the welder.
When respiratory protection is required, the selection and use of any respiratory protective equipment must
be in compliance with the requirements of the BP U.S. NAG, Respiratory Protection Program.
In most situations, protection against metal fumes can be obtained through the use of filter-type respirators
fitted with a fume filter. High efficiency particulate respirators are required, as a minimum, for confined
space welding. Some fume respirators may also have a chemical cartridge behind the filter to absorb low
levels of gases and vapors that exist along with the fumes.
Filters and absorbent cartridges are not designed to protect against high levels of fumes or gases.

Page 11 of 34
When using supplied air line respirators, the air supply to the mask should be from cylinders of breathing
air. Breathing air supplied by cylinders or compressors must meet ANSI/Compressed Gas Association
(CGA) G-7.1 requirements for Grade D breathing air.
The welder should protect himself from sparks, flying slag, and radiation at all times. Clothing must be
selected for its ability to minimize the potential for ignition, burning, trapping hot materials, or electric
shock. Refer to BP FRC Policy for specific FRC requirements. Heavier materials such as cotton or wool
are preferred to lighter materials. Fabrics treated with flame resistant materials may lose some of its
protective qualities after repeated washings. Frayed materials are particularly susceptible to ignition and
burning and should not be worn during welding or cutting. Materials that can melt or easily burn must not
be worn when welding or cutting.
Sleeves and collars should be kept buttoned and front pockets eliminated if possible. When front pockets
are present they should be empted of flammable or readily combustible materials. Pants or coveralls should
not have cuffs or be turned up on the outside and should overlap shoe or boot tops.
Flame-resistant gloves in good repair, dry and capable of providing protection from electric shock during
welding must be worn during welding and cutting. Leather, rubber or other suitable materials are
recommended. Insulating linings should be used to protect against exposure to high radiant energy.
KEEP ALL CLOTHING AND PROTECTIVE APPAREL ABSOLUTELY FREE OF OIL AND
GREASE.
Adjust clothing where necessary to keep out flying sparks and slag. Sparks may lodge in rolled-up sleeves,
in pockets of clothing, or in cuffs of overalls or trousers. Keep sleeves and collars buttoned when
necessary. Low shoes with unprotected tops are not suitable for work where there is possibility of sparks or
slag getting inside shoes.
Protective aprons, leggings capes and sleeves should be worn to protect skin and clothing from sparks and
slag.
Flame-resistant ear plugs or equivalent must be used where hazards to the ear canal exists. Caps of flame-
resistant materials, worn under helmets, may also provide protection against ear canal, neck or head burns.
5.8 Arc Welding and Cutting Equipment Safety

The following are guidelines for the safe operation of arc welding and cutting equipment:
When using direct current (DC) or alternating current (AC), the welding operator must take special care to
prevent electric shock.
When open circuit voltages higher than those specified in ANSI/NEMA EWI, such as plasma arc cutting,
are used, adequate insulation or other means must be provided to protect the operator from making contact
with the high voltage.
The requirements for installation of arc welding equipment and proper grounding connections are provide
in ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electric Code, ANSI Z49.1:2005 and all applicable local codes.
Welding lead terminals must be protected from accidental contact by personnel or other objects.
Voltage limits for AC welding machines must not exceed; 80 V for manual arc welding and cutting and
100 V for automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting,
Voltage limits for DC welding machines must not exceed; 100 V for manual arc welding and cutting and
100 V for automatic (machine or mechanized) arc welding and cutting,
Connections for portable control devices to be carried by the operator, such as push buttons, must not be
connected to an AC circuit of higher than 120 volts. Portable control devices operating on circuits above
50 volts with exposed metal parts must be grounded by a grounding conductor in the control cable.

Page 12 of 34
AC reactors or autotransformers must not be used to draw welding current directly from a primary AC
power source having a voltage greater than 80 volts.
Operators must exercise care to ensure that the amperage rate selected is adequate for the job to be
performed and that welding machines must not be operated above the ampere rating and rated duty cycles
specified by the manufacturer.
Welding machines must not be used for applications other than those specified by the manufacturer.
Disconnecting switches or controllers must be provided as part of welding machines or must be near
machines. Overcurrent protection must also be provided.
Welding cables must be sized adequately for the reasonably expected current and duty cycles, complete
insulated, flexible type, and designed for the rigors of welding service. Special attention must be given to
cable insulation when used with equipment that includes high voltage, high frequency oscillators.
A cable of sufficient current capacity must be used to be returned the welding current to the welding
machine. However, the connection of a cable from the welding machine to a common conductor or
properly bonded structure on which the work rests or is connected to, must be a permissible alternate
procedure.
Guidance on the grouping of single-phase AC welding machines is provided in Section 11.3.2.2, ANSI
Z49.1: 2005.
The metal or work piece that is to be welded must be grounded independent of the welding leads to a good
electrical ground. This practice is required unless a qualified person assures it is safe to work on an
ungrounded work piece.
Grounding must be performed by positioning the work piece on a grounded metal floor or table, or by
connection to a grounded building frame or other satisfactory ground. Care must be taken to avoid the flow
of welding current through a connection designed only as a safety grounding connection. Welding current
may be higher than the grounding conductor can safely carry.
Welding machine ground connections must be connected on or as close as possible to the object being
worked on.
Conduits containing electrical conductors must not be used for completing a work lead circuit.
Welding machine grounds must not be connected to handrails, stairs, or projections from steel power or
lighting towers, or on any active air, or steam line.
Do not use pipelines containing gases or flammable liquids as part of a welding circuit.
Where pipeline contents and conditions allow BP supervision to authorize a pipelines use in a welding
circuit it must not be used as a permanent welding circuit, but may be used during construction, extension,
or repair providing the current is not carried through threaded joints, flanged bolt joints, or calked joints.
Special precautions must be used to avoid sparking at the connection of the work lead cable.
Grounding of the welding machine frame must be checked. Special attention must be given to safety
grounding connections of portable machines. See NFPA 70, National Electric Code, Article 250,
Grounding.
Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists and elevators must not be used to carry welding current.
When during construction or modification, a building or any other fabricated metal structure is used for a
welding current return circuit, it must be checked to determine if proper electrical contact exists at all joints.
Sparking or heat at any point must be cause for rejection of the structure as a return circuit
After assembling any connection to the welding machine, each assembled connection must be checked
before starting operations to determine that it is properly made.
Work leads must be firmly attached to the work; magnetic work clamps must be freed of metal particles
and spatter on contact surfaces.
Page 13 of 34
Where welders are working in close proximity, such that someone is likely to touch the exposed parts of
more than one electrode holder simultaneously, machines must be connected to minimize the shock hazard
as follows:
o Unless required by special cases, all DC machines must be connected with the same polarity.
o Unless required by special cases, all single-phase AC machines must be connected to the same phase
of the supply circuit and with the same instantaneous polarity.
o The operator and the other area personnel must be instructed on of the importance of avoiding
simultaneous contact of the exposed parts of more than one electrode holder.
There must be no leaks of cooling water, shielded gas, or engine fuel that can adversely affect the welders
safety.
Where arc welding is routinely performed, walls and other surfaces must have low reflectivity to ultraviolet
radiation. Formulated surface coatings or welding screens may be use to reduce reflectivity.
Temporary power lines to portable arc welding machines should be carried overhead whenever practical, or
laid on the floor or ground suitably protected so that they cannot be damaged or interfere with safe passage.
Necessary precautions must be taken to protect against electrical shocks when working in wet or damp
places.
In electric arc welding, all parts of the body should be covered to prevent skin burns from UV radiation or
molten metal. The feet and face are particularly vulnerable to burns, and care should be taken to see that
they are properly protected.
When the welder leaves the work area or stops for an appreciable time, the equipment or machine
output must be turned off or de-energized.
When not in use, remove electrodes from holders and place holders where they cannot make electrical
contact with employees or conducting objects.
Live metal parts of an electrode, holder or other equipment must not be allowed to touch bare skin or any
wet covering of the body.
The welder must be trained in avoidance of electrical shocks and protect themselves from electrical
contact with the work or ground by dry insulating material. Particularly, they must be protected
against large area contact by insulation when working in a sitting or prone position.
Unexplained shocks must be reported to the supervisor for investigation and correction prior to
continuing work.
Dry gloves in good condition must be used.
Electrode holders and guns must be well insulated and kept in good repair.
Electrode holders and guns must not be dipped in water.
Water-cooled holders and guns must not be used if any water leak or condensation exists which would
adversely affect the welders safety.
Except for shielded metal arc welding, the output of the welding machine must be electrically de-energized
when electrodes or contact tips are changed.
Welding leads must not be coiled or looped around parts or the body.
Precautions must be taken to prevent shock-induced falls when a welder is working above ground level.
Wearers of pace-makers or other vital-to-life devices/equipment must check with their clinician and
equipment manufacturer to determine whether a hazard exists from welding activities.
Cables are to have no repairs or splices within 10 ft. (3 meters) from the electrode holder.

Page 14 of 34
Joining lengths of cables must be done by methods specifically intended for the purpose. The connection
methods must have insulation adequate for service.
Place unused or spent welding rods or wire in suitable disposable containers, preferably metal recycle bins.
They should never be left on the ground, walking, or working surfaces.
Note that materials listed by the EPA or manufacture as hazardous or exhibit the characteristics of
ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity or toxicity must be disposed of per EPA and/or local guidelines. If
uncertain of the classification of the waste materials refer to the product MSDS for information and
guidance.
Welding power sources are to be located outside of confined spaces
When the welding machine is to be moved, the input power supply to the machine must be electrically
disconnected.
Repairs and modifications to welding equipment should only be performed by the equipment
manufacturer or qualified service technician.
The use of compressed gases for shielding in arc welding operations must follow the applicable
provisions in ANSI Z49.1:2005, Section 10, Oxyfuel Gas Welding and Cutting.
5.9 Safe Handling, Use and Storage of Gas Cylinders

The following are guidelines for safe handling, use and storage of gas cylinders. These guidelines must be
adhered to at all times. Refer to the BP U.S. NAG, Compressed Gas and Air Safety Standard for additional
requirements regarding gas cylinders.
All portable cylinders used for storage and shipment of compressed gases must be constructed and
maintained in accordance with the U.S. Department of Transportation regulation 49 CFR 173.
Only the cylinder owner or person authorized by the owner must fill a cylinder.
No person other than the gas supplier must mix gases in a cylinder or transfill gases from one cylinder to
another.
Compressed gas cylinders must be legibly marked with either the chemical or the trade name of the gas.
Cylinders on which the labeling is missing or illegible must not be used. They must be returned to the
supplier.
Markings and numbers stamped into cylinders must not be changed except in conformance with 49 CFR
173 U.S. DOT regulations.
Compressed gas cylinders must be equipped with connections complying with ANSI/CGA V-1, Standard
for Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections.
Cylinders with a water weight capacity over 30 pounds must be equipped with a means to connect a valve
protection cap or collar or recess to protect the valve.
Store cylinders in definitely assigned places where they will not be knocked over by passing or falling
objects. Cylinders must be secured in storage to prevent falling.
Cylinders should be kept away from stoves, radiators, furnaces, or other hot places. The storage
temperature of the cylinder contents must not be allowed to exceed 125 F (52C). The use temperature
must not exceed 120 F (49 C).
Cylinders in storage must be separated from flammable or combustible liquids and from easily ignited
materials by at least 20 feet (6.1 meters) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 ft. (1.6 meters) high
having a fire resistance of at least hour.
Oxygen cylinders in storage must not be stored in the same compartment with acetylene, reserve stocks of
calcium carbide or other fuel gas cylinders. Cylinders containing oxygen should be placed at least 20 ft.

Page 15 of 34
(6.1 meters) from cylinders containing fuel gases or stocks of calcium carbide or separated by a
noncombustible barrier at least 5 ft. (1.6 meters) high having a fire resistance of at least hour.
Oxygen cylinders stored in outside acetylene generator houses must be separated for the generator or
carbide storage rooms by a noncombustible partition having a fire resistance of at least one hour. This
partition must be without openings and must be gas-tight. Oxygen must not be stored inside acetylene
generator rooms.
Where cylinders are stored in the open, they should be protected from accumulations of ice and snow and
from the direct rays of the sun in localities where extreme temperatures prevail.
Cylinders transported by motor vehicle must be secured and transported in accordance with U.S. DOT
regulations.
Regulators should be removed and valve protection caps put in place hand tight when cylinders are not in
use or when they are being transported. Cylinders moved with the regulator attached must be secured in
position and the cylinder valve closed.
Never allow cylinders to come in contact with live wires, or ground wires from electrical equipment.
Cylinders must be kept away from radiators, piping systems, layout tables, etc., that may used for
grounding electric circuits such as an arc welding machine. The tapping of electrodes against a cylinder
must be prohibited. Do not strike an arc on cylinders.
Withdrawal rates from gas cylinders must not exceed manufacturers recommendations.
If the valve stem on a fuel gas cylinder is leaking the packing nuts must be tightened or the cylinder valve
closed.
If the leaking of a fuel gas cylinder cannot be stopped, the cylinder must be moved to a safe location
outdoors, away form any source of ignition, marked properly, and the supplier advised. If the leaking
cylinder cannot be safely moved to an outdoors location, the area or building must be immediately
evacuated and the fire department notified of the emergency. A precautionary sign must be posted not to
approach the leaking cylinder with a lighted cigarette or source of ignition.
Small fires at fuel gas cylinders must be extinguished, if possible, by closing the cylinder valve or by the
use of water, wet cloths, or fire extinguisher. The leak must then be treated as previously described. In the
case of a large fire at a fuel gas cylinder, such as from the functioning of a fuse plug or safety device,
personnel must be evacuated from the area and the cylinder kept wet with a heavy water stream to keep the
cylinder cool.
Fuel gas manifolds and high-pressure oxygen manifolds for use with oxygen cylinders having a DOT
service pressure above 250 psig must be approve either separately for each component part or as an
assembled unit.
All manifolds and parts must be used for the gases for which they are approved.
Fuel gas manifold capacity limits and locations must be in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 51.
Oxygen manifold capacity limits and locations must be in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 51.
Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds requirements must be in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 51.
Manifold installations and operation must be in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 51.
Cylinder valves must be closed before moving cylinders, when work is finished, and on empty cylinders
while in storage prior to return to the supplier.
Keep oxygen cylinders and fittings away from oil or grease. Oil or grease may ignite violently in presence
of oxygen. Oily or greasy substances must be kept away from cylinders, cylinder valves, couplings,
regulators, hose, and apparatus. Do not handle oxygen cylinders or apparatus with oily hands or gloves.
Oxygen cylinders should not be handled on the same platform with oil or be placed in a position where oil
or grease from overhead cranes, belts, or other equipment is likely to fall upon them.

Page 16 of 34
Do not drop cylinders or handle them roughly.

Do not use a hammer or wrench to open oxygen cylinder valves.
Never tamper with or attempt to repair oxygen cylinder valves. If trouble is experienced, notify the
supplier.
Acetylene and liquid gas cylinders must be used with valve end up. Acetylene cylinders should not be
allowed to lie on their sides when in storage or while being used. This prevents liquid flow into hoses and
regulators.
Never tamper with fusible plugs. The fusible safety plugs with which all acetylene cylinders are provided
act as safety releases when the cylinder is exposed to excessive temperatures. They melt at about the
temperature of boiling water and release acetylene from the cylinder.
Do not place cylinders below work where sparks or slag could fall on top of them.
Do not use the top of any cylinder as a place for storing tools or clothing. This might interfere with quick
closing of the valve, and it might also damage the fusible safety plugs. Never allow the recess top to
become filled with water when using the cylinder.
When cylinders are hoisted, they must be secured on a cradle, rack, sling board, or pallet. They must not be
hoisted or transported by means of magnets or choker slings.
Cylinders should be moved by tilting and rolling them on their bottom edges. They must not be
intentionally dropped, struck, or permitted to strike each other violently.
When cylinders are transported by powered vehicles, they must be secured in a vertical position.
A suitable cylinder truck, rack, chain, or other steadying device must be used to keep cylinders from being
knocked over while in use.
When cylinders are empty, or when cylinders are moved, the cylinder valve must be closed and have
protective valve cap in place
Cylinder valves must be closed whenever equipment is unattended.
Valve protection caps must not be used for lifting cylinders. Bars must not be used to pry against valves or
valve protection caps to move or loosen cylinders when frozen together. Warm, not boiling, water must be
used to thaw cylinders loose.
Fuel gas storage limits must be in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 51, Standard for the Design and
Installation of Oxygen-Fuel Gas Systems for Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes.
Fuel gas cylinders stored inside a building, except those in actual use or attached ready for use, must
be limited to a total gas capacity of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m3 ) or 300 pounds (135.9 kg) of liquefied
petroleum gas,
For storage in excess of 2,000 cubic feet (56 m3 ) total gas capacity of cylinders or 300 pounds (135.9
kg) of liquefied petroleum gas, a separate room or compartment conforming to the requirements
specified in OSHA 1910.253(f)(6)(i)(H) and (f)(6)(i)(I) must be provided, or cylinders must be kept
outside or in a special building. Special buildings, rooms or compartments must have no open flame
for heating or lighting and must be well ventilated.
Compressed gas cylinders must be secured in an upright position at all times. The cylinder should be
secured with chains, metal or nylon straps and NOT natural rope, which may deteriorate over time. Rig
trucks/weld trucks must have to put bottles upright.
Cylinders in storage must be separated from flammable or combustible liquids and from easily ignited
materials by a minimum distance of 20 feet (6.1 meters) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5 ft. (1.5

Page 17 of 34
meters) high having a fire resistance of at least hour. Cylinders must not be kept in unventilated
enclosures such as lockers or cupboards.
Oxygen cylinders in storage must be separated from fuel gas cylinders or combustibles materials
(especially oil or grease) a minimum distance of 20 ft. (6.1 meters) or by a noncombustible barrier of at
least 5 ft. (1.5 meters) high having a fire resistance rating of at least hour.
Cylinders must be kept far enough away from the actual welding or cutting operation so that sparks, hot
slag, or flame will not reach them. When this is impractical, fire resistant shields must be required and
provided.
Cylinders must be placed where they cannot become part of an electrical circuit. Electrodes must not be
struck against a cylinder to strike an arc.
Cylinders containing oxygen, acetylene or other fuel gas must not be taken into confined spaces.
Oxygen, acetylene, argon, or inert gas hoses must not be left in a confined space during shift change, lunch,
breaks, or unattended for extended periods of time.
Cylinders must not be used as rollers or supports.
No damaged or defective cylinders must be used.
Before a regulator is connected to a cylinder valve, the valve must be opened slightly and closed
immediately. (This action is generally termed cracking and is intended to clear the valve of dust/dirt that
might otherwise enter the regulator.) The person cracking the valve must stand to one side of the outlet;
NOT IN FRONT OF IT. The valve of a fuel gas cylinder must not be cracked where the gas would reach a
possible source of ignition.
A jet of oxygen should never strike an oily surface, greasy clothing, or enter a fuel oil or storage tank that
has contained flammable substances.
After the regulator is attached to the oxygen cylinder the following must be done:
o Engage the adjusting screw and open the downstream line to drain the regulator of gas.
o Disengage the adjusting screw and open the cylinder valve slightly to allow pressure to slowly
rise to full pressure on the pressure gauge before opening the valve to full open.
o Stand to one side of the regulator on not in front of the gauge faces when opening the cylinder
valve.
Before removing a regulator from a cylinder, the cylinder valve must be closed and the pressure drained
from the regulator.
Cylinder valves must always be opened slowly to prevent damage to the regulator.
A hammer or wrench must not be used open cylinder valves that are fitted with hand wheels.
To aid in quick closing in case of an emergency an acetylene cylinder valve must not be opened more than
approximately 1 turns and preferably no more than of a turn, unless specified by the manufacturer.
When high pressure gas cylinders, such as oxygen cylinders, are in use the valve must be opened fully to
prevent leakage around the valve stem.
Where cylinders requiring a special wrench, key, or handle to operate the cylinder valve, the device should
be left in position on the stem of the valve while the cylinder is in use so that the fuel gas can be shut off
quickly in case of emergency. In multiple cylinder installations, at least one such wrench must always be
available for immediate use.
Oxygen cylinders, equipment, pipelines, or apparatus must not be used interchangeably with any other gas.

Page 18 of 34
Compressed gas must never be used from cylinders without reducing the pressure through a suitable
regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold, unless the equipment used is designed to withstand full
cylinder pressure.
Regulators must have functional gauges on both the high and low pressure side.
Acetylene must not be used at a pressure in excess of 15 psig or 30 psia. Acetylene can dissociate
(decompose with explosive violence) above these pressure limits.
Before striking an arc or lighting a torch, check with person-in-charge or BP supervisor to obtain a hot
work permit (if required).
Except at a burner or torch, no device or attachment permitting mixtures of air or oxygen with flammable
gases prior to consumption must be allowed, unless approved for the purpose.
Serious injury may easily result if oxygen is used as a substitute for compressed air.
NEVER use oxygen:
In pneumatic tools
In oil preheating burners
To start internal combustion engines
To blow out pipelines
To dust off clothing or work area
To create pressure
For ventilation
To supply breathing air equipment
5.10 Oxygen/Fuel Gas Cutting and Welding Safety

To decrease the probability of incident, oxygen and fuel gases must be called by their proper names, such
as oxygen, acetylene, propane, natural gas, rather than air or gas.
Only approved pressure reducing regulators, connections, hoses and torches must be used.
Oxygen regulators must be marked USE NO OIL.
Oxygen regulators must be drained of oxygen before being attached to a cylinder, manifold, or before the
cylinder valve is opened.
Repairs to regulators, parts or regulators and gauges must be performed by qualified mechanics.
Whenever it is necessary to cross walkways or work areas, oxygen-acetylene hose must be strung overhead
or protected by planks laid on both sides of the hose
As a minimum, suitable approved flashback arrestors must be connected between both hose connections at
the torch and routinely inspected to ensure that they are operative.
Heat sensitive flashback arrestors that cutoff the flow of gas should also be attached to the outlet of both
regulators.
After assembly and at the beginning of each shift, all hoses carrying oxygen, acetylene, or any gas or
substance which may ignite or enter into combustion, or be harmful to employees, must be inspected for
leaks, burns, worn places, loose connections, or other defects that may render the hose unfit for service.
Torches must be inspected at the beginning of each shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose couplings and tip
connections.

Page 19 of 34
Leaks in the hose at the nipple connection should be repaired at once by cutting off the hose a few inches
from the end and remaking the connection. Leaks at other locations should be repaired by cutting off the
bad section and inserting a hose coupling as a splice. Never repair a hose with tape.
When hoses are taped together for convenience and to prevent tangling, not more than 4 in. (100
millimeters) in each 12 inches (300 millimeters) must be covered by tape.
Hose splices and repairs must be made with approved splicing kits and fittings.
Defective hose, or hose in doubtful condition, must not be used.
Hose connections must be fabricated to withstand, without leaking, twice pressure to which they are
normally subjected in service, but in no case less than 300 psi. Oil-free air or oil-free inert gas must be
used for testing.
Use only hose and connections made especially for oxy-acetylene welding and cutting. Hose connections
for welding gas lines must not be compatible with connections for breathing air. Hose connections must
comply with the standard hose connection specification, CGA Pamphlet E-1, Regulator Connection
Standards.
Hose for oxyfuel gas service must comply with the Rubber Manufacturers Associations IP-7, Specification
for Rubber Welding Hose.
Hose couplings must be of the type that cannot be unlocked or disconnected by means of a straight pull
without rotary motion.
Fuel gas and oxygen hoses must be easily distinguishable from each other by color coding. In the United
States the generally recognized colors are red for fuel gas hose, green for oxygen hose and black for inert-
gas and air hose. The hoses must not be interchangeable.
Hoses, cables, and other equipment must be kept clear of passageways, ladders, and stairways.
Boxes used for storing gas hoses must be ventilated.
Do not use compressed gas to clean clothing, blow out cinch anchor holes, or otherwise clean the work
area.
Torches must be lighted by friction lighters or other approved devices and not by matches, cigarette
lighters, welding arcs, or from hot work.
Hoses must be purged individually before lighting the torch for the first time each day and after a cylinder
change.
Do not use white lead, oil, grease, or other pipe fitting compounds for making joints.
Blow out new hoses with oxygen before using. When acetylene hoses have been cleared by oxygen, blow
through it before attaching it to the acetylene regulator.
Precaution: Do not blow out hose with acetylene.
Always protect hoses from damage or interference. Protect hoses from being trampled on or run over.
Avoid tangles and kinks, and place hoses so they will not be tripped over. Connections might be pulled off
or the cylinders and equipment might be pulled over by a sudden strong tug on the hose. Do not allow
hoses to come in contact with oil or grease. These deteriorate the rubber and constitute a hazard with
oxygen. Protect hoses from flying sparks, hot slag, or other hot objects and open flames.
5.11 Electric Arc Welding on Suspended Platforms

To reduce the possibility of a welding current arcing through a suspension wire rope during welding from
suspended scaffolds, the following precautions must be taken (see Figure 5).

Page 20 of 34
Use an insulated thimble to attach each suspension wire rope to its hanging support (such as cornice
hook or outriggers). Insulate excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent lines from
grounding.
Require that the suspension wire rope be covered with insulating material at least 4 ft. above the hoist.
If a tail line exists below the hoist, it must be insulated to prevent contact with the platform. The
portion of the tail line that hangs free below the unit must be guided or retained, or both, so that it does
not become grounded.
Cover each hoist with protective covers made from insulating material.
In addition to the work lead attachment required for the welding process, a grounding conductor must
be attached from the scaffold to the structure. The size of this conductor must be equal to or greater
than the size of the welding process work lead. It must not be in series with the welding process or the
work piece.
If a scaffold grounding lead is disconnected at any time, the welding machine must be shut off
immediately.
At no time allow an active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead to come in contact with the
scaffold or its suspension system.

American Petroleum Institute, RP 500
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z49.1:2005. Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied
Processes.
Accredited Standards Committee Z49. Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes. Miami:
American Welding Society, 2005.
American Welding Society F2.2, Lens Shade Selector
American Welding Society, Fact sheet 22
National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 51B, Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding,
Cutting and Other Hot Work
National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70, National Electric Code
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, Subpart I & Q, Welding, Cutting and Brazing
OSHA 29 CFR 1915 Subpart D, I, & P, Welding, Cutting and Heating
OSHA 29 CFR 1917.152, Welding, Cutting and Heating
OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart J, Welding and Cutting
OSHA 29 CFR 1000, Toxic and Hazardous Substances
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62, Interim Construction Lead Standard
OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1025, Industry Lead Standard
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, 1915, 1926, Cadmium
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, 1915, 1917,1918,1926, Chromium VI
BP Golden Rules of Safety
gHSSEr Elements #5, Facility Design and Construction
gHSSEr Elements #6, Operations and Maintenance

Page 21 of 34
gHSSEr Elements #8, Information and Documentation

OSHA Construction Welding, Cutting and Brazing
www.osha.gov/SLTC/constructionwelding/index.html
OSHA Oil & Gas Welling Drilling and Servicing eTools

www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/oilandgas/general_safety/hot_work_welding.html
Topics covered in ANSI Z49.1:2005 and/or applicable OSHA Standards, but not covered in this Safety Practice
include:
Brazing Furnaces
Public Exhibitions and Demonstrations
Resistance Welding
Electron Beam Welding and Cutting Processes (EBW and EBC)
Laser Beam Cutting and Welding
Brazing and Solder Safety
Fuel gas or oxygen manifold and header systems
Portable or stationary acetylene generators or systems
Use and/or storage of calcium carbide
Revision Log

New Draft Practice
Figure 1
Precautionary Information for

Page 22 of 34
Arc Welding Processes and Equipment
WARNING:
PROTECT yourself and others. Read and understand this information.
FUMES AND GASES can be hazardous to your health.
ARC RAYS can injure eyes and burn skin.
ELECTRIC SHOCK can KILL.
NOISE can damage hearing. (Include sentence if hazardous noise levels have been determined)
Before use, read and understand the manufacturers instructions, Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs), and
your employers safety practices.
Keep your head out of the fumes.
Use enough ventilation, exhaust at the arc, or both, to keep fumes and gases form your breathing zone and the
general area.
Wear correct eye, ear and body protection.
Do not touch live electrical parts.
See American National Standard ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes, published by
the American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126; OHSA Safety and Health
Standards are published by the U.S. Government Printing Office, 732 North Capitol Street NW, Washington,
DC 20401.
DO NOT REMOVE THIS INFORMATION
Figure 2
Page 23 of 34
Oxyfuel Gas Process and Equipment
WARNING:
FUMES AND GASES can be hazardous to your health.
HEAT RAYS (INFRARED RADIATION) from flame or hot metal can injure eyes.
NOISE can damage hearing. (Include sentence if hazardous noise levels have been determined)
Keep your head out of the fumes.
Use enough ventilation, exhaust at the arc, or both, to keep fumes and gases form your breathing zone and the
general area.
Wear correct eye, ear and body protection.
DC 20401.
Figure 3
Brazing, Cutting, Heating and Welding Materials Containing Cadmium
Page 24 of 34
DANGER: CONTAINS CADMIUM

FUMES ARE POISONOUS AND CAN KILL.
Do not breathe fumes. Even brief exposure to high concentrations should be avoided.
Use enough ventilation, exhaust at the arc, or both, to keep fumes and gases from your breathing zone and the
general area. If this cannot be done, use air supplied respirators.
Keep children away when using.
DC 20401.
First Aid: If chest pain, shortness of breath, cough or fever develop after use, obtain medical help immediately.
Figure 4
Brazing and Welding Fluxes Containing Fluorides

Page 25 of 34
DANGER: CONTAINS FLUORIDES.

FUMES AND GASES CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO YOUR HEALTH. BURNS EYES AND SKIN ON
CONTACT. CAN BE FATAL IF SWALLOWED.
Keep your head out of the fume.
Use enough ventilation, exhaust at the arc, or both, to keep fumes and gases from your breathing zone and the
general area.
Avoid contact of flux with eyes and skin.
Do not take internally.
Keep children away when using.
DC 20401.
First Aid: If contact in eyes, flush immediately with water for at least 15 minutes. If swallowed, induce vomiting.
Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Call a physician.
Table 1
Guide for Lens Shade Selection
(from AWS F2.2, Lens Shade Selector)
Shade numbers are given as a guide only and may be varied to suit individual needs.

Page 26 of 34
Process Electrode Size Arc Current Minimum Suggested *

In (mm) (Amperes) Protective Shade No.
Shade
(Comfort)
Shielded Metal Arc Welding Less than 3/32 (2.4) Less than 60 7 --
(SMAW) 3/32-5/32 (2.4-4.0) 60-160 8 10
5/32-1/4 (4.0-6.4) 160-250 10 12
More than 1/4 (6.4) 250-550 11 14
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) Less than 60 7 --

and Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) 60-160 10 11
160-250 10 12
250-500 10 14
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) Less than 50 8 10

50-150 8 12
150-500 10 14
Air Carbon Arc Cutting (CAC-A) (Light) Less than 500 10 12

(Heavy) 500-1000 11 14
Plasma Arc Welding (PAW) Less than 20 6 6 to 8

20-100 8 10
100-400 10 12
400-800 11 14
Plasma Arc Cutting (PAC) Less than 20 4 4

20-40 5 5
40-60 6 6
60-80 8 8
80-300 8 9
300-400 9 12
400-800 10 14
Torch Brazing (TB) -- -- 3 or 4
Torch Soldering (TS) -- -- 2
Carbon Arc Welding (CAW) -- -- 14
Plate Thickness Suggested

Shade No.
in. mm. (Comfort)
Oxyfuel Gas Welding (OFW)
Light Under 1/8 Under 3 4 or 5
Medium 1/8 to 1/2 3 to 13 5 or 6
Heavy Over 1/2 Over 13 6 or 8
Oxygen Cutting (OC)

Light Under 1 Under 25 3 or 4
Medium 1 to 6 25 to 150 4 or 5
Heavy Over 6 Over 150 5 or 6
*As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the
weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding, cutting, or brazing where the torch and/or the flux produces a high
yellow light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line of the visible light spectrum.
TABLE 2
WELDING SAFETY CHART
Type of
Welding Hazard Source Material Effect Control

Page 27 of 34
Arc Fumes Metal being Cadmium, cobalt, Metal fume fever, Local exhaust
Acetylene welded, lead, antimony, irritates lungs; dry ventilation, respirator
electrode used; chromium, copper, throat and cough, if in confined area.
coating on iron, beryllium, nausea, headache,
metal; flux, filler magnesium, chills with fever,
metals; zinc- manganese, tin, zinc, aching in joints, loss of
galvanizing fluorides appetite
Arc, Nonionizing Welding arc Infrared and Irritates and damages Tinted glass to shield
especially radiation ultraviolet (UV) eye tissue; can cause welder; proper eye
inert gas painful sunburn and protection and body
weld possibly skin cancer. covering including all
exposed skin;
separate welders
from other workers;
welding screens
Arc Toxic gases The arc, burning Acetylene, arsine, Some symptoms; Respirator if in
Acetylene process or carbon dioxide, headache, nausea; confined area; good
changes in the carbonic acid, carbon irritates lungs, eyes, local exhaust
atmosphere monoxide, nitrogen nose, and skin; ventilation
dioxide, ozone, dizziness and lack of
phosgene, phosphine appetite
Arc Metallic Sparks from All metals Burns, fires Eye protection;
Acetylene sparks, heated metal; clothing; pants, long
molten metal hot metal sleeves and socks;
gloves
Arc High voltage Splices, wires Shocks, fires Keep electrodes
covered, keep all
electric cable splices
and wires in good
condition and avoid
welding in damp areas.
Arc Solvent Cleaning and Trichloroethylene and Can be fatal, irritates No welding within 99.5
vapors degreasing of other chlorinated skin, eyes, nose, yds. (91 meters) of
metals before hydrocarbons; throat, and chest; degreasing operations;
welding; UV in degreasing solvents dizziness; chills, thirst; if gas smelled, welding
welding can produce deadly delayed effect; fluid in should be stopped
decompose phosgene gas on lungs and death. immediately and area
degreaser exposure to UV of evacuated. Be sure
solvents arc chlorinated solvents
are evaporated to
dryness before
welding.
TABLE 3
WELDING-RELATED ILLNESSES
Condition Cause Symptoms Duration
Conjunctivitis Exposure of the unprotected Reddening of the eyes,
scratchy feeling, pain upon

Page 28 of 34
(flashburn of the eyes) eyes to UV. exposure to light.

Metal Fume Fever Inhalation of excessive Chills, fever, nausea, 12-24 hours. Temporary
(brass chills, shakes, etc.) amounts of freshly formed headaches, dry cough illness. No permanent
fumes of the following metals: effects.
Copper, Iron (high levels),
Magnesium, Monel, Nickel,
Stainless Steel, Zinc (or
galvanized metals).
Irritation of Eyes, Nose, Ozone, oxides of nitrogen Dry, sore throat; reddening of Generally short. Depends
Throat, and Respiratory Air fluorides, other irritant eyes; cough; soreness in upon amount of exposure.
Passages materials such as smoke chest Under extreme conditions,
fumes, acid gases, and serious illness may result.
phenols
Heavy Metal Poisoning Inhalation and/or ingestion of Lead and Mercury: vague
(Lead, Mercury, Cadmium) lead, mercury, and cadmium complaints in early stages.
dust, and vapors Continued exposure can
cause headache, stomach
cramps, dizziness or
drowsiness, tremors, loss of
feeling, muscular aches, and
pains. Harmful effects can be
severe and prolonged.
Cadmium: No early warning
symptoms of irritation, even
at concentrations high
enough to cause severe
organ injury or death. Any
process involving soldering,
brazing, or welding of
cadmium-containing alloys or
cadmium-plated materials is
extremely dangerous.
TABLE 4
RATINGS OF HARMFUL METALS
Metal Rating

Page 29 of 34
Antimony, Copper, Chromium, Cobalt, Moderately Harmful

Magnesium, Nickel, Zinc
Lead, Mercury Harmful
Cadmium Extremely Harmful
TABLE 5
WELDING AND BURNING PRECAUTIONS
Stick Electrode Welding
Harmful Precautions
Electrode Basic Elements Byproducts

Page 30 of 34
AWS E-6010 Iron A

AWS 3-6011 Iron A
AWS E-6012 Iron A
AWS E-6013 Iron A
AWS E-6020 Iron A
E-316 Stainless 18-12 Chromium, Nickel, Iron Chromium, Nickel B
E-410 12% Cr Chromium, Iron Chromium B
E-502 5% Cr Chromium, Iron A
E-505 9% Cr Chromium, Iron Chromium B
E-7018 Low Hydrogen Iron Fluorides C
E-8018 B-2 (1 % Cr) Chromium, Iron A
E-9018 B-3 (2 % Cr) Chromium, Iron A
E-8018 C-2 (3 % Ni) Nickel, Iron
Stoody 6 65% Cobalt, 45% Gungsten, 28% Chromium B
Chromium Cobalt
Eutectic 680 High Chromium Nickel Chromium, Nickel B
Inco-A 68% Nickel Nickel B
Inconel 182 65% Nickel Nickel B
Monel 190 60% Nickel, 23% Copper Nickel, Copper B
Ni-Rod 55 60% Nickel Nickel B
Carpenter 20 36% Nickel, 20% Chromium B
Precautions:
A. No special precautions are needed in open or well-ventilated areas. Work in confined spaces may require
fume filter-type respirators. Consult the BP supervisor or H&S Coordinator.
B. Moderate amounts of harmful fumes generated:
1. Use exhaust blowers or air siphons to remove fumes from breathing zone in open areas.
2. Work in confined spaces will require high efficiency particulate respirators.
C. Harmful fumes and gases produced:
1. Use exhaust blowers or air siphons to remove gases and fumes from breathing zone in open areas.
2. Work in confined spaces will require air-supplied respirator.
D. Intense arc. Large amounts of fumes and gases released.
1. Provide adequate ventilation of work. Use fume exhausters to remove fumes and gases from breathing
zone in open areas. Do not direct exhaust air towards other employees. Use fume filter-type respirators
in open areas.
2. In confined areas, adequate ventilation must be provided and air-supplied respirator must be worn.
E. Use only in metallizing hood. If necessary to metallize in other locations, use air-supplied respirator and
protect other workers in the vicinity. Do not use any lead alloys in open shop area.
TABLE 6
WELDING AND BURNING PRECAUTIONS (Cont)
Tungsten Arc Welding, Gas Shielded (Heliarc)* (TIG)
Harmful
Rod Basic Elements Byproducts Precautions*

Page 31 of 34
Evedur 1010 05.6% Copper Silicon Copper, Ozone C

Oxweld 372 Copper 98% Copper Copper, Ozone C
AWS ER 4043 Aluminum, Silicon Ozone C
AWS ER 5356 Magnesium, Aluminum Ozone C
Oxweld 28 18% Chromium, 8% Nickel, Iron Chromium, Nickel, Ozone C
Steel Steel Ozone C
1 % Chromium Chromium, Iron Ozone C
2 % Chromium Chromium, Iron Ozone C
High levels of UV produced. Avoid eye flash with side shield goggles. Avoid skin burns with proper
clothing.
C. Harmful fumes and gases produced:
1. Use exhaust blowers or air siphons to remove gases and fumes from breathing zone in open areas.
2. Work in confined spaces will require air-supplied respirator.
TABLE 7
Short Arc Consumable Electrode Gas Shield* (MIG)
Harmful
Rod Basic Elements Byproducts Precautions*
18-8 Stainless 18% Chromium, 8% Nickel, Steel Chromium, Nickel, Ozone B
25-20 Stainless 25% Chromium, 20% Nickel, Steel Chromium, Nickel, Ozone B
Oxweld 63 98% Copper Copper, Ozone B
Airco 110 96% Copper Copper, Ozone B
Oxweld 62 91.5% Copper, Aluminum Copper, Ozone B
Type 316 Stainless 18% Chromium, 13% Nickel, Steel Copper, Nickel, Ozone B
Aluminum Aluminum Ozone B
Hastelloy B Nickel, Molybdenum Nickel, Ozone B
Inconel 62 Chromium, Nickel Nickel, Ozone B
Oxweld 65 Iron B
High levels of UV produced. Avoid eye flash on side shield goggles. Avoid skin burns with proper clothing.
TABLE 8
Acetylene Welding and Brazing
Harmful
Wire Basic Elements Byproducts Precautions*
Hastelloy D Silicon, 90% Nickel Nickel A

Page 32 of 34
Oxweld 5M Copper, Zinc, Tin Copper, Zinc B

1 Oxweld Steel A
Aluminum Aluminum A
Everdur 1010 Copper, Silicon Copper A
Arcosil J 56% Silver, 22% Copper, Copper, Zinc B
17% Zinc, 5% Tin
Oxweld 28 18% Chromium, 8% Nickel, Steel Chromium, Nickel B
18-8 Stainless 18% Chromium, 8% Nickel, Steel Chromium, Nickel B
Easy-Flo 45% Silver, 15% Copper, Zinc B
25% Cadmium, 16% Zinc
Sil-Fos 15% Silver, 80% Copper, Copper B
5% Phosphorus
Oxweld 372 98% Copper Copper B
Colmonoy 6 65% Cobalt, 28% Chromium Cobalt, Chromium B
Chromium Tungsten
Stoodite Iron, 30% Chromium Chromium B
Borod Tungsten Carbide, Iron
A. No special precautions are needed in open or well-ventilated areas. Work in confined spaces may require
fume filter-type respirators. Consult the BP supervisor or H&S Coordinator.
TABLE 9
Silver Soldering and Soldering
Harmful
Rod, Wire Basic Elements Byproducts Precautions*
1801 Super Silver, Copper, Cadmium, Zinc Copper, Cadmium, Zinc B
1602 Silver, Copper, Tin Copper B
18 FC Copper, Tin, Zinc Copper, Zinc B
16 FC Silver, Copper, Nickel Copper, Nickel B
15 Phoson Silver, Copper, Phosphorous Copper B
11 Allstate Copper, Zinc, Nickel Copper, Zinc, Nickel B
TABLE 10
Air Arc Cutting and Gouging (Carbon Rod)*
Material Worker Basic Elements Harmful Byproducts Precautions*

Steel Iron Iron Oxides D
Cast Iron Iron Iron Oxides D

Page 33 of 34
Monel Copper, Nickel Copper, Nickel D

Stainless Steels Chromium Nickel, Iron Chromium, Nickel D
Chrome Steels Chromium, Iron Chromium D
Brass Copper, Zinc Copper, Zinc D
Copper Copper Copper D
Aluminum Aluminum Nickel Oxides D
High Nickel Nickel Nickel Oxides D
Air gouging produces much higher metal fume levels than ordinary cutting or welding. High noise levels are
also produced which requires the use of hearing protection.
in open areas.
TABLE 11
Plasma Arc Cutting
Metals Cut Basic Elements Harmful Byproducts Precautions*

Steel Iron Iron Oxides D
Cast Iron Iron Iron Oxides D
Monel Copper, Nickel Copper, Nickel D
Stainless Steels Chromium Nickel, Steel Chromium, Nickel D
Chrome Steels Chromium, Steel Chromium D
Brass Copper, Zinc Copper, Zinc D
Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Oxides D
Everdur Silicon, Copper Copper D
High levels of UV produced. Avoid eye flash with proper eye protection. Avoid skin burns with proper
clothing. High noise levels produced. Hearing protection required.
in open areas.
FIGURE 5
SUSPENDED PLATFORM WELDING PRECAUTIONS

Page 34 of 34
Electrically Isolate
Overhead Support or
Insulated
Insulated Thimble
Tieback
Insulating Material
(excess wire rope stored Nonconductive
on insulating material) Wire Rope Cover
Welding Nonconductive
Electrode Lead Hoist Cover
Welding Surface Electrical Hoist

Internally Grounded (3rd
Work Lead Clamp
Wi )
(located close to
working area)
Power Hoist Electrical
Cable with 3rd Wire
Work Lead
Ground
Stage (platform)
Ground Stage (platform)
Wire Rope
End of Wire Insulated
from Structure and
Nonconductive Ground
Building Face Roller
Structure
To Hoist Power
Source with 3rd
Welding Machine Wire Grounded at
Power Source Junction Box
Note:
Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) operation illustrated. The same procedure is to be used for gas metal arc
welding (GMAW) and flux cored arc welding (FCAW).
Revision Log
D
Julyt 1, 2006 Duane Kortsha Jack Kogut / New NAG Health & Safety Guidance document.
Cheryl Metzler Issued as final.

Working on Tank Tops Page 1 of 6
Working on Tank Tops

1.0 Purpose/Scope
This Practice establishes minimum requirements for all persons who work at BP facilities involving work
which requires a person to be on a Solid Tank Top. Operating Centers (OC) may deem it necessary to
have more stringent requirements in place for specific tasks based on past work experience and hazard
assessments. To mitigate risks, consider using alternative methods such as, but not limited to, bucket
trucks, scaffolding, appropriate size tank boards that are in sound condition, man lifts, etc.
2.0 Definitions
PPE Personal Protective Equipment.

PFAS Personal Fall Arrest System which includes, Anchor Point, Body Harness and Connecting
Device e.g., shock absorbing lanyard and snap hook.
SPA Single Point Accountable The person in the organization (site / PU / BU) who has been
appointed as being accountable for the delivery and performance of an activity.
Competent Person (CP) One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the
surroundings or working conditions, which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees,
and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate or control these hazards
and conditions.
Qualified Person (QP) One who by possession of a recognized degree, certification, or professional
standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully demonstrated
his/her ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Ultrasonic thickness scan examination A method used to measure the thickness of a specific
material, e.g., steel pipe, tank tops, etc. by scanning or scrubbing a specific surface area of
plate/pipe in lieu of random spot checks.
Non Destructive Examination (NDE) - Similar to Non Destructive Testing (NDT) - examination
techniques used to verify the properties of a material / item.
Solid Tank Tops Tops that are stationary, not a floating tank top. These tank tops can be either of
the bolted or welded type.
Activities being performed on a Solid Tank Top without an approved walkway, must be approved by
the BP SPA or designate.
Individuals must use an approved Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS).
All new tanks shall be engineered to limit access to Tank Tops.
All tanks must have a sign posted in Spanish and English warning personnel not to access Tank Tops
without contacting a Competent Person or Operation Center Area Authority (AA).
Canada Gas will follow Canada regulations as they apply to the regulatory, certification, or program
requirements outlined in this Practice.


SPA or designate is responsible for the safe implementation of this procedure.
5.1 Complete appropriate BP permits i.e., hot work, confined space, permit to work, etc.
5.2 Pre-job risk assessment shall be performed and hazards mitigated prior to the start of work
activities. A rescue plan for working at heights to address each specific job task shall be in
place prior to the start of work activities.
5.3 Tank Top Inspection (by BP Approved Certified Inspectors):
5.3.1 Personnel access onto a Solid Tank Top shall be limited to tanks with exposed
steel surfaces. Personnel shall not enter onto insulated, fiberglass, or plastic
Tank Tops.
5.3.2 Operations / Maintenance shall identify where, and how often, access is
expected to be needed. Tank top access shall be broken down into the two types
listed below:
Frequent access those tanks where entry onto the Tank Top is a normal and
frequently repeated operational or maintenance function. These tanks shall have
their tops tested on a defined time frame that is short enough to confirm the
structural integrity of the top. The information obtained from the inspection shall
be tracked in the Inspection Data Management Tracking program to allow for
corrosion rate calculation and inspection recommendation tracking. The time
frame for re-inspection can be adjusted based on the identified corrosion rates
but shall not be less than 12 months apart.
Infrequent access Those tanks where access onto the Tank Top is limited to
occasional maintenance or similar activity. The inspection of these tanks will fall
into the requirements of the appropriate API inspection documents for frequency
of inspection. The information obtained from the inspection shall be tracked in
the Inspection Tracking program to allow for corrosion rate calculation and
inspection recommendation tracking.
5.4 Prior to Tank Top access, an Inspector shall visually inspect the top from the gauging
platform or the top of the access ladder for
a. visible holes, seam leaks, or blistered paint,
b. heavy areas of localized corrosion,
c. deformation of the Tank Top that will make access unsafe, and
d. the need for additional support material, i.e. plywood, planking, or scaffold pick to safely
access the roof (for additional information regarding support material, please contact a
facilities engineer).
5.5 If a hole is identified in the roof of a Tank Top, no personnel access is to be made when
product is in the tank. The tank shall be removed from service, emptied, cleaned, and
made available for an internal inspection.
5.6 The Tank shall be made static prior to inspection personnel accessing the Tank Top. All
inlet and outlet valves shall be closed, mixers turned off, and pumps shutdown. Inspection
personnel shall not enter onto a Tank Top when the tank is in operation.

5.7 Inspector qualifications

a. Non-destructive testing personnel shall be certified for the testing method being used in
the inspection to the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A or approved corporate
qualifications
b. Inspectors for tanks constructed to API 650 shall be certified to API-653.
c. Inspectors for tanks constructed to API 12 specifications shall meet the requirements of
Qualified Inspector as defined in API 12R1.
5.8 An Inspector shall define the area of the Tank Top where access is permitted, i.e. the entire
top, walkways to vents or instrumentation, etc. This defined area shall be recorded on a
layout sketch of the Tank Top. These sketches shall be recorded in the Inspection
Tracking Program.
a. If walkways or paths are defined, the boundary of the walkway on the roof (in
accordance with the layout sketch) from the gauging platform or the top of the ladder
must be made. This marking shall be done either with paint or tape in a distinctly
contrasting color.
b. Inspections of the complete roof will not require special marking.
5.9 Aboveground storage tanks are constructed to several different design codes and must be
inspected by following the appropriate inspection documents.
a. Storage tanks constructed to API 650 and its forerunner API 12C are generally larger
design for purpose tanks and shall be inspected as per the criteria of API 653.
b. Storage tanks constructed to API 12B, D, F, or P are normally smaller, pre-engineered,
bolted, field welded, shop welded, or Fiberglas reinforced plastic tanks and shall be
inspected as per the criteria in API 12R1.
c. Vertical storage tanks constructed to UL-142 or unknown standards shall be inspected
as per either API 653 or 12R1 at the discretion of the NAG BU Inspection Team.
5.10 Performance of non-destructive testing
5.11 Additional criteria
a. All Tank Top weld seams shall be assessed for potential repairs.
b. All identified holes through the Tank Top shall be repaired or the Tank Top plates
replaced.
c. Tanks constructed to API 650: any Tank Top that has an average measured thickness
of .09 in 100 square inches should be replaced or repaired.
d. Tanks constructed to one of the API 12 specifications: any Tank Top that has an
average measured thickness of less than.09 in 100 square inches should be replaced
or repaired prior to entry unless adequate additional support or walkboards are used.
e. Tops of tanks constructed to one of the API 12 specifications with Tank Top thickness
less than .09 but equal to or greater than .05 may be accessed if additional support or
walkboards are used
5.12 Record keeping and Follow Up
The Inspector performing the Tank Top inspection shall, prior to leaving the worksite,
inform the assigned Competent Person of all findings that will limit or stop personnel
access. The Competent Person or the Inspector shall then,
a. barricade the top of the stairway or ladder to limit access to the Tank Top if
access is limited

b. provide warning signage at the access point if necessary, and

c. initiate appropriate steps to complete all recommended repairs.
All data gathered during a Tank Top inspection shall be entered into the NAG BU
Inspection Data Management Tracking program. Thickness data, corrosion rates, and
remaining calculated life shall be entered.
Corrosion rates greater than 15 mils per year or remaining life of 1 year or less shall
have repair or follow-up inspection recommendations and be reported to operations
center personnel.
All recommendations that arise from the inspection shall be recorded and reported
through the Inspection Recommendation Tracking System.
5.13 Anchor Point
a. If Tank Top access is authorized an anchor point that is rated for a minimum of 5000
lbs times twice the number of people who will simultaneously access the Tank Top
(e.g., if two people are using the same anchor point, the anchor point must be rated for
10,000 lbs).
b. Portable anchor devices that can be transferred from one tank to another must meet
both OSHA and BPs requirements. (Canada to follow Canadian regulatory
requirements as well as BP requirements).
c. If a tank is equipped with a center tie off point, prior to its use as an anchor point for fall
protection, it must be inspected and approved by a Competent Person.
d. If a crane or bucket truck is to be used as an anchor point for fall protection, lock-out,
barricade, and monitoring procedures must be installed.
5.14 Temporary Walk-Way
a. Use of temporary walk-ways, hand railings, scaffolding, etc. must meet both OSHA and
BP requirements. (Canada to follow Canadian regulatory requirements as well as BP
requirements).
NAG SPU Safe Practices Manual
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.500 Subpart M "Fall Protection" (Canada to follow Canadian regulatory
requirements).
Fall Protection Safety Practice, found at:

Working at Heights Awareness Presentation, found at:

The following special material and/or equipment that could be required for the performance of this
procedure must meet both OSHA and BP requirements: (Canada to follow Canadian regulatory
requirements as well as BP requirements).
Scaffolding
Crane
Bucket Truck
Man Lift
Temporary hand rails
Temporary walk ways
Spark producing tools, lighting, etc.

Document Name Working on Tank Tops

Scope NAG SPU Control Tier 2
Document # K0000002589 Issue Date 30 Jan 2006
Revision Date 30 Jan 2006 Next Review 30 Jan 2009
HSMS
Health & Safety
Authority Duane Kortsha
Program Manager
Custodian Randy East Technical
Advisor
Controlled
Version
Revision
Rev# Revision Detail Approved by Approvers Title
Date
Revision
Title of Document File Name/Location
Date
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/o
Fall Protection Practice 16 Jan 2003
nshore/documents/K0000000870
http://docs.bpweb.bp.com/NAG:/content/hse/o
Working at Heights Awareness Presentation 15 Jun 2005
nshore/documents/K0000002044
Link to
NAG SPU Safe Practices Manual Current NAG SPU Safe Practices Manual
Manual
http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.sh
OSHA 29 CFR 1926.500 Subpart M Fall External
Link
ow_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=
Protection
10756
Document Approval
Signature Approver Date

Duane Kortsha
Authority Health & Safety Program Manager
Randy East
Custodian
HSMS Technical Advisor


Onshore US 1-10-08

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Onshore US 1-10-08

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

BP

NA GAS Onshore U.S.

ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists

Document Owner: Glenn Harper Revision Date: 6/29/2006

HCP Hearing Conservation Program

Document Owner: Glenn Harper Revision Date: 6/29/2006

psi pounds per square inch

Document Owner: Glenn Harper Revision Date: 6/29/2006

Document Number: K0000000415

Document Type: Health & Safety Practice

A. Upon initial employment and at least annually thereafter, employees must be

1. The existence, location, and availability of employee records of exposure to

3. The employees right of access to those records.

B. Notification will be accomplished by sending an annual letter to all employees or by

1. Environmental (workplace) monitoring, including personal, area, grab, swipe

2. Medical records, including the biological monitoring level of chemicals in the

Control Tier: 2 Print Date: 3/9/2006

B. Records or copies must be provided at no cost to the employee.

A. Occupational Safety And Health Administration, Department of Labor Standard, 29

B. gHSEr Element # 8, Information and Documentation.

Control Tier: 2 Print Date: 3/9/2006

Notice to All Employees

1. Exposure records relevant to your actual or potential exposure.

2. Your medical records.

3. Analyses using exposure or medical records concerning your working conditions or

Control Tier: 2 Print Date: 3/9/2006

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

4.0 Roles and Responsibilities

5.1 Exposure Assessments

BP and contractor work involving asbestos requires:

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

When bulk sampling is required to determine the asbestos content of materials, an

5.3 Communication of Hazards

Non-asbestos insulation identifiers (see Section 6.1, Non-Asbestos Insulation

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

BP operations and maintenance employees must receive annual asbestos awareness

5.5 Work Practices

5.5.1 Intact Asbestos Gaskets and Equipment Packing

5.5.1.1 Vehicle Brake and Clutch Assemblies

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

The industrial hygienist or designated representative shall coordinate asbestos abatement

5.8 Medical Surveillance

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

5.10 Record Keeping

6.0 Key Documents, Tools, References

OSHA Asbestos Construction Standard (29 CFR 1926.1101)

OSHA General Industry Standard for Asbestos (29 CFR 1910.1001)

EPA (40 CFR Part 763)

EPA NESHAPS (40 CFR Part 61)

6.1 Non-Asbestos Insulation Identifiers

Non-Asbestos Insulation Products With "Asbestos Free" Identifiers

Manufacturer Asbestos-Free Identifier

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

Document Control Details

Document Name Asbestos Management

Document#: K0000002595 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

ACGIH - American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists. A private not-for-profit,

Document#: K0000002613 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM

3.0 General Requirements

4.0 Key Responsibilities

5.0 Benzene Compliance Process

5.1 Recognition of Benzene Hazards

5.1.2 Where Found

Document#: K0000002613 Print Date: 7 November 2006 6:32 AM